function search_db_content(){ var json = 
[
  {
    "id": 1,
    "title": "About FactoryTalk View Machine Edition",
    "url": "66967.htm",
    "text": "FactoryTalk&reg; View Machine Edition (ME) software is a versatile HMI application that provides a dedicated and powerful solution for machine-level operator interface devices. As an integral element of the Rockwell Automation visualization solution, FactoryTalk View Machine Edition provides superior graphics, run-time user management, language switching, and faster commissioning time through a common development environment.  FactoryTalk View Machine Edition allows for a consistent operator interface across multiple platforms, including PanelView Plus and Windows desktop solutions and consists of:  FactoryTalk View Studio. Configuration software for developing and testing HMI applications.  FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station. A traditional stand-alone HMI solution that provides an integrated operator interface that runs the same HMI application on PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, MobileView terminal, Rockwell Automation Industrial Computers, or other industrial PC.  See also  Quick start steps for developing an application  Quick start steps for running an application  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2,
    "title": "Quick start steps for developing an application",
    "url": "66969.htm",
    "text": "In FactoryTalk View Studio, you create the software application to monitor and control your plant processes. These steps explain how to get an application up and ready to run.  Step 1: Create an application  Create the application that you will run. An application is a folder on your hard disk that contains, among other things, the application file (*.med).  Step 2: Set up communications  Establish communications between FactoryTalk View Studio and the hardware and devices you are using. You can use only Object Linking and Embedding for Process Control (OPC) communications. The default OPC server installed with FactoryTalk View Studio is FactoryTalk&reg; Linx&#8482;. These steps assume you are using FactoryTalk Linx.  Create device shortcuts that point to the devices.  Step 3: Specify project settings  Specify how you want the project to look at run time, including setting the graphic display type and size, background color, highlight color, and other properties.  Step 4: Create graphic displays  Create graphic displays that operators will use to monitor and control plant processes.  Step 5: Select tags  Once you have established device shortcuts, the tags on your network will be available through the Tag Browser. Assign these tags to the objects in your displays as needed.  Step 6: Set up alarms  Set up alarms to notify the operator when a dangerous or critical condition occurs.  Step 7: Set up data logging  Set up data logging to record what is happening when your system is running.  Step 8: Set up run-time message displays  Set up displays to give the operator additional information at run time. You can use displays to give the operator information messages, local messages, and information about system activity.  Step 9: Configure startup settings  Set up what components the project will use when it starts. This includes settings like what macros will run when the project starts, what the initial display will be, and what data log model to use, if any.  Step 10: Secure your system  For 3.20 and earlier applications and users, set up user access to specify which parts of your application different operators can use. For 4.00 and later applications, security is handled by FactoryTalk Security, which authenticates users and verifies their permission to perform specific actions within the system. For more information, see FactoryTalk help.  Step 11: Create a run-time file  Once you finish creating the application, create a run-time file.  See also  Quick start steps for running an application  About FactoryTalk View Machine Edition  ",
    "keywords": {
      "develop": "100",
      "create": "100",
      "application": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 3,
    "title": "Quick start steps for running an application",
    "url": "67505.htm",
    "text": "These steps explain how to run an application.  Tip:  To see how an application will behave at run time, in FactoryTalk View Studio, from the Application menu select Test Application or click the Test Application icon on the tool bar.  If you are using an OPC server, make sure the OPC server is set up before you run the application. See the documentation supplied by your OPC vendor for installation details.  For PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, and PanelView Plus CE terminals, the server must be installed on the run-time terminal and must be a local server. For Windows 7 SP1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1, Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server 2016 operating systems, OPC servers can be local or remote.  If your application uses a third party ActiveX control, make sure a version of the control that is compatible with the run-time operating system is installed and registered on the run-time terminal.  Step 1: Move the application to the run-time terminal or computer  If you run a PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal, move the runtime application to the terminal using ME Transfer Utility, compact flash card, or SD card.  If you run a MobileView&#8482; terminal, move the runtime application to the terminal using ME Transfer Utility or a memory stick.  If you run a personal computer, move the application through the Windows Explorer or by copying it to an electronic medium, such as a memory stick.  Step 2: Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station  The FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box opens in Configuration Mode when you start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station.  Step 3: Load and run the application  In the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box, click Load application, select the application to load, and click Run Application.  Tip:  PanelView Plus 7 Standard terminals and PanelView Plus 6 Compact terminals can only load and run PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications or Compact Machine Edition applications. If you try to start a non-Compact application or a PanelView Plus 7 Performance application on a PanelView Plus 7 Standard terminal or a PanelView Plus 6 Compact terminal, an error message will appear and the application will not be loaded.  However, PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications and Compact Machine Edition applications can be loaded and run on PanelView Plus 7 Performance and PanelView Plus 6 terminals.  See also  Quick start steps for developing an application  Transfer an application to a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal  Configuration Mode  Start an application  PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications and Compact Machine Edition applications  ",
    "keywords": {
      "run": "100",
      "application": "100",
      "run time": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 4,
    "title": "FactoryTalk View Studio main window",
    "url": "67599.htm",
    "text": "When you start FactoryTalk View Studio, you can open an existing application or create a new one using the items from the File menu. Once you open an application, the application appears in the Explorer window on the left side of the main window.  Many elements in the main window are common Windows elements and are not described here. The following are described because of their importance to using FactoryTalk View Studio.  Menu Bar - is located below the title bar. It contains the menus for the active window. The menus available depend on which type of editor or window is active.  To open a menu in the menu bar, click the menu name.  To choose an option from an open menu, click it, or press the shortcut keys listed beside it.  Toolbar(s) - is located below the menu bar. Toolbars contain buttons for commands commonly used in the active window. When you point to a button with the mouse cursor, its name is shown below it. This is called a tooltip. You can show multiple toolbars by selecting Toolbars from the View menu.  For quick access to one of these commands, click the toolbar button.  Explorer window - displays the folders containing the FactoryTalk Directory structure and the FactoryTalk View Studio editors. FactoryTalk places the name of the local computer and the local directory icon at the top of the tree, and the System folder containing security folders at the bottom, below the application-specific folders. The Explorer window includes the Application window and the Communications window, accessible through the tabs at the bottom. By default, the Explorer appears as the left pane of the main window. You can move, hide and resize the Explorer.  Diagnostics List - is located at the bottom of the window, above the status bar. The information displayed depends on how you have set up FactoryTalk Diagnostics. Click the Clear button to delete the message that is displayed, or, if you have resized the list to display more than one message, select a message and click Clear. Click the Clear All button to delete all the messages.  At run time, to view information about the system, use the default [DIAGNOSTICS] graphic display, or use a diagnostics list object in a customized graphic display.  Status Bar - is located at the bottom of the main window. It provides information about the active window or about the selected tool or command. The information that is displayed depends on where the mouse pointer is.  Workbook Mode tabs - if you select Workbook Mode from the View menu, the right pane displays tabs at the bottom for each graphic display and/or editor currently open in the Explorer window.  Tip:  You can hide or display the toolbars, Explorer window, diagnostics list and status bar using the View menu. A check mark means they are shown.  You can undock the diagnostics list and the Explorer window and move them elsewhere in the main window. To move the diagnostics list, click on the double \"grab bars\" at the left and drag, holding the left mouse button down. (If you can&#8217;t see the double grab bars, drag the top edge of the bar up to make it a bit larger. The bars appear at the bottom left.) To dock the diagnostics list, grab the title bar with the mouse and drag the diagnostics list until it touches the status bar, or double-click its title bar. To move the Explorer window, click in its title bar and drag, (holding the left mouse button down), or double-click on the title bar.  To resize the diagnostics list or Explorer window when they are undocked, grab an edge with the mouse and drag.  Both the Explorer window and the diagnostics list have menus that appear when you right-click on the title bar.  See also  Use the Explorer window  Test projects during development  "
  },
  {
    "id": 5,
    "title": "The Explorer window",
    "url": "67209.htm",
    "text": "The Explorer window has two tabs:  The Application tab contains the editors for creating and editing your application, and the System folder for setting up FactoryTalk Security.  The Communications tab contains the communications tree for the development computer. For more information about using the communications tree, see Help for FactoryTalk Linx.  When you open a project, the Explorer window is shown on the left in the main window.  Do one of the following to hide the Explorer window:  From the View menu, select Explorer Window.  Click the Show/Hide Explorer Window icon on the toolbar.  Click the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the Explorer window's title bar.  You can resize the Explorer window by dragging its edges.  Do one of the following to move the Explorer window:  Click the title bar and drag the Explorer window to a new position or dock it in a new location.  Double-click the title bar to float the Explorer window in the middle of the display, and then position it. Double click again to return the Explorer window to its last docked position.  Right-click the title bar and select a docking location, floating, or child mode.  You can view the Explorer window in a number of ways:  As a docked window. When docked, the explorer is always on top of other windows that it overlaps. You can dock the explorer to any edge of the main window.  As a floating window. When floating, the explorer is always on top of other windows that it overlaps, but you can move it to different locations in the main window by dragging its title bar.  As a child window. When the explorer is in child mode, you can minimize the explorer or position other windows in front of it. This mode is particularly useful when you are working in multiple editors or working with the Help open.  To put the explorer in child mode, right-click the Explorer window title bar and select MDI Child. You can see MDI Child as:  Minimized. The Explorer window shrinks to a title bar at the bottom of the display.  Maximized. The Explorer window covers the whole screen.  Restored. The Explorer window assumes a default size on the display.  Tip:  Double-clicking the title bar when the window is an MDI child maximizes the window. To change its state, that is, to see the title bar, click the Restore Down icon in the top right corner.  The Explorer window lists the folders that contain the FactoryTalk View Studio editors. Some editors, such as the Graphics editor, can have more than one file or component associated with them. When you select one of these editors, its components are shown below.  To change a component name, right-clicking on the name to open the Component context menu and selecting the Rename option. This also changes the name you will see in Windows File Manager or Windows Explorer.  To open an editor, use one of these methods:  Double-click on one of the components in an application (for example, a display).  Drag the editor&#8217;s icon from the Explorer to the workspace.  Right-click the editor&#8217;s icon, and then click New or Open.  Tip:  If the editor can create multiple components, the shortcut menu contains New. If the editor can only open a single component, the menu contains Open.  From the Tools menu, select the editor you want to open.  To open a component, use one of these methods:  Double-click the component.  Right-click the component and select Open.  Drag the component from the Explorer window to the workspace.  See also  Delete components  Rename components  Remove components  Test applications during development  Back up applications  "
  },
  {
    "id": 6,
    "title": "Create new components",
    "url": "67207.htm",
    "text": "Some editors, such as the Graphics Display, Macros, and Parameters editors, can create multiple components (or files). If an editor can create multiple components, its context menu includes New and Add component into application. Editors that cannot create more than one component only have Open on their context menus.  To create a new component, use one of the following methods:  Drag the component icon into the workspace.  Right-click the editor and select New.  From the File menu, select New, and then select the type of component to create.  To copy an existing component  In the Explorer window, select the editor that will use the component.  Right-click the editor and select Add Component Into Application.  In the Browser window, navigate to the location of the component you want to copy.  Select the component and click Open.  See also  Use the Explorer window  Delete components  "
  },
  {
    "id": 7,
    "title": "Rename components",
    "url": "67215.htm",
    "text": "The following components can be renamed:  Displays  Libraries  Images  Parameters  Local Messages  Information Messages  Data log Models  Macros  To rename a component  Select the component in the Explorer window.  Right-click the component and select Rename.  In the Rename dialog box, type the new name in the To text box.  Click OK.  Tip:  The rename function changes the component name shown in the Explorer window and the file name listed in Windows Explorer.  Rename components within FactoryTalk View Studio. Do not rename files using Windows Explorer.  A component name and its path can be up to 256 characters.  See also  Use the Explorer window  Create new components  Delete components  Rename components  "
  },
  {
    "id": 8,
    "title": "Delete components",
    "url": "67211.htm",
    "text": "Deleting components deletes them from the Explorer window and from the hard disk.  To delete components  In FactoryTalk View Studio, in the Explorer window, right-click the editor icon and select Delete.  In the component selection dialog box, select the components to be deleted and click OK.  Click the Yes button to confirm the deletion.  Tip:  To delete a component, you can also right-click the component in the Explorer window and select Delete.  See also  Use the Explorer window  Remove components  Delete all objects from a display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 9,
    "title": "Remove components",
    "url": "67213.htm",
    "text": "Removing components removes them from the Explorer window but leaves them on the hard disk.  To remove components  In FactoryTalk View Studio, in the Explorer window, right-click the editor icon and select Remove.  In the component selection dialog box, select the components to be removed and click OK.  Click the Yes button to confirm the removal.  Tip:  To remove a component, you can also right-click the component in the Explorer window and select Remove.  See also  Use the Explorer window  Delete components  "
  },
  {
    "id": 10,
    "title": "Context menu",
    "url": "67197.htm",
    "text": "The context menu opens when you click the right mouse button. The items shown on the menu depend on the object (if any) the mouse pointer is positioned over when the button is pressed.  Tip:  To select a command from the menu, click it, or highlight it and press Enter.  To close the menu, click anywhere outside it.  See also  The Explorer window  Delete components  Remove components  "
  },
  {
    "id": 11,
    "title": "Create a Machine Edition application",
    "url": "66972.htm",
    "text": "You can create a FactoryTalk View Machine Edition application when you start FactoryTalk View Studio or when FactoryTalk View Studio is open.  To create a Machine Edition application  If FactoryTalk View Studio is not started, start FactoryTalk View Studio.  If FactoryTalk View Studio is started, from the File menu, select New Application or click the New Application tool. If an application is already open, FactoryTalk View Studio asks you whether to close the application. Click Yes.  On the New tab of the New/Open Machine Edition Application dialog box, enter a name for the application in the Application Name box.  (Optional) Enter a description for the application. You can also modify the description in the application Properties dialog box after the application is created.  Select a language for the application. You can add more languages in the Language Configuration dialog box after the application is created.  Select a resolution for the application. You can modify the resolution in the Project Settings editor after the application is created.  Click Create.  (Optional) Add controller instruction faceplates to the application.  Tip:  Adding faceplate displays to an application affects the license count. Each added faceplate display (.gfx) counts as one display for activation purposes. The corresponding global object display (.ggfx) does not add to the total license count.  FactoryTalk View Studio creates the application&#8217;s folders and files and then shows the new application in the Explorer window. The system automatically creates a display called MAIN and sets the initial graphic to Main.  The application files are stored in:  \\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\HMI projects\\<ApplicationName>  The application file is given the extension .med.  See also  Options in the New/Open Machine Edition Application dialog box  Import an application  About application properties  Add a language to an application  Add controller instruction faceplates  ",
    "keywords": {
      "create": "100",
      "application": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 12,
    "title": "Options in the New/Open Machine Edition Application dialog box",
    "url": "262059.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options in the New/Open Machine Edition Application dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Application Name  The application name:  Must be unique to the application  Only starts with an alpha-numeric character  Can contain alpha-numeric characters and _  Can be up to 32 characters long  Description  The description can be up to 255 characters long.  Language  Select a language for the application. The selected language will be the application's default language.  Resolution  The Resolution list contains the same options as the Project window size list in the Project Settings dialog box, except the Custom size option.  See also  Create an application  Import an application  "
  },
  {
    "id": 13,
    "title": "PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications and Compact Machine Edition applications",
    "url": "67111.htm",
    "text": "PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications and Compact Machine Edition applications (applications running on PanelView Plus 6 Compact or PanelView Plus Compact terminals) have the following restrictions:  Restrictions  PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications  Compact Machine Edition applications  Maximum number of displays  100 (50 On Top displays and 50 Replace displays)  25  Maximum number of alarm messages  500  200  Maximum screen resolution  1280x800  640x480  Maximum number of FactoryTalk Linx shortcut  1  1  Methods of communications  Ethernet  If the application uses FactoryTalk Linx, only Ethernet drivers are supported.  Serial and Ethernet  If the application uses FactoryTalk Linx, only Serial-DF1, Serial-DH485, and Ethernet drivers are supported.  Supported versions of FactoryTalk Linx  5.20 and later  5.20 and later  If no FactoryTalk Linx shortcut is defined, a single KEPServer Enterprise data server can be used to communicate with a single device.  The Kepware Hilscher Universal and Modbus Plus communications drivers are not supported for PanelView Plus 7 Standard, PanelView Plus 6 Compact, or PanelView Plus Compact terminals. However, the drivers are supported on PanelView Plus 6 Compact 1000 terminal.  See also  Create an application  Import and conversion of an application  Specify project settings (General tab)  Validate PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications and Compact Machine Edition applications  Open applications  "
  },
  {
    "id": 14,
    "title": "Multiple version support",
    "url": "67575.htm",
    "text": "You can use the current release of FactoryTalk View Studio to create ME runtime application files (*.mer) that will run on previous versions of ME Station. These choices are available in the Create Runtime Application dialog box.  Open applications  Opening an application that was created with an earlier version of FactoryTalk View Studio or RSView Studio will convert the application to the current version of FactoryTalk View Studio. Once the application has been converted, it cannot be opened by earlier versions of FactoryTalk View Studio or RSView Studio. However, you still have the option of creating runtime application files that will run on earlier versions of ME Station.  Import applications  When you import earlier version application files, FactoryTalk View creates a copy of the application for the current version of FactoryTalk View. The earlier version is not altered.  You cannot import applications to FactoryTalk View Studio that were created with later versions than the one they are presently running.  Tip:  When a run-time file for an earlier version is created, the test run behavior on the current version of FactoryTalk View Studio may not be the same as actual run-time behavior on the targeted release.  See also  Open applications  Import and conversion of an application  Create a runtime application  "
  },
  {
    "id": 15,
    "title": "Open applications",
    "url": "67577.htm",
    "text": "Open an application when you start FactoryTalk View Studio or when FactoryTalk View Studio is open.  FactoryTalk View Machine Edition application files are converted to the current version of FactoryTalk View when you open them. Once the application has been converted, it cannot be opened by earlier versions of FactoryTalk View Studio. However, you can still use the current version of FactoryTalk View Studio to create runtime application files that will run on earlier versions of ME Station.  If an application was created in earlier versions of FactoryTalk View Machine Edition, when you open the application in current version FactoryTalk View Studio, ensure that the application's IP addresses do not contain a leading zero. FactoryTalk Linx interprets a leading zero as an octal notation. For example, the IP address 131.200.13.111 is valid, but 131.200.013.111 is invalid. Before opening the application, edit the application's Nodes.csv file in Notepad by removing leading zeroes in IP addresses.  To open an application in FactoryTalk View Studio, the logged-in user must have read/write access to the sub-folder that holds the HMI applications. If the security designation for FactoryTalk View Studio users is Power Users, they may not have write access.  To open an application  If FactoryTalk View Studio is not started, start FactoryTalk View Studio.  If FactoryTalk View Studio is started, from the File menu, select Open Application or click the Open Application tool @. If an application is already open, FactoryTalk View Studio asks you whether to close the application that is currently open. Click Yes.  On the Existing tab, select the application to open.  The resolution and version that was last used to open the application is shown.  If the application has more than one language, select a language to open the application in.  Click Open.  To open a recently used application  From the File menu, select Recent Applications.  Click the application name in the list.  If an application is already open, FactoryTalk View Studio asks you whether to close the application. Click Yes.  The application opens in the language it was last opened.  Tip:  To open two applications at the same time, for example to copy images and graphic objects between applications, start two instances of FactoryTalk View Studio.  See also  Create a Machine Edition application  Multiple version support  Configure Power User settings  Features that are not supported in version 9.0 or earlier  ",
    "keywords": {
      "open": "100",
      "application": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 16,
    "title": "Configure Power User settings",
    "url": "79422.htm",
    "text": "If the security designation for FactoryTalk View Studio users is Power Users, they may not have write access. To make sure that the settings for Power Users are correct, you need configure the Power User settings.  To configure Power User settings  Navigate to \\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\HMI projects, right-click the application folder, and select Properties.  On the Security tab of the Properties dialog box, select Power Users from the list of groups and user names.  In the Permissions box below the list, select Full Control and select the Allow check box.  Click OK.  See also  Open applications  "
  },
  {
    "id": 17,
    "title": "Test applications during development",
    "url": "67217.htm",
    "text": "To test an application you have been working on  With the application open, from the Application menu, select Test Application, or click the Test Application icon on the toolbar.  A FactoryTalk View ME Station emulator opens on the development computer and runs the application. There is a two-hour time limit for using the run-time system on the development computer.  To test a single graphic display  With the graphic display open, from the View menu, select Test Display.  The objects in the display are activated and connected to the tags assigned to them. In this mode, only the tags connected to the display will work, not the links to other displays or the alarms or other functions.  Tip:  If you have set up local messages and graphic objects to use multiple languages, the messages and objects will be shown in the application's current language while in test mode.  See also  Configure startup settings  Set up run-time navigation  Use the Explorer window  ",
    "keywords": {
      "test": "100",
      "application": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 18,
    "title": "FactoryTalk View Application Manager",
    "url": "67219.htm",
    "text": "How do I open FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager?  Use one of the following methods:  From Windows Start menu:  (Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008) Select All Programs > Rockwell Software > FactoryTalk View > Tools > FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager  (Windows Server 2012) Click the down arrow and select Apps > Rockwell Software > FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager  (Windows 10 and Windows Server 2016) Select All apps > Rockwell Software > FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager  In FactoryTalk View Studio, from the Tools menu, select Application Manager.  Use FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager to perform operations on FactoryTalk View Machine Edition (ME) applications.  Use this tool to:  Copy an application  Delete an application  Back up an application  Rename an application  Restore a previously backed up project or application  Tip:  You must use the FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager for these operations. Attempting to use some other means may produce undesirable results.  See also  Create a Machine Edition application  Import and conversion of an application  "
  },
  {
    "id": 19,
    "title": "Use FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager",
    "url": "46597.htm",
    "text": "Before you use FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager to manipulate an application, be sure that the application is closed.  To use FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager:  Open FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager.  If prompted, log on to FactoryTalk.  Select the operation you want to perform and click Next.  Follow the on-screen instructions for the operation you selected.  Click Finish to complete the operation.  See also  Select an operation  "
  },
  {
    "id": 20,
    "title": "Select an operation",
    "url": "46606.htm",
    "text": "Use this dialog box to select the operation you want to perform.  To select an operation  Select the operation you want to perform.  Click Next.  See also  Use FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager  Rename an application  Copy an application  Delete an application  Back up an application  "
  },
  {
    "id": 21,
    "title": "Rename an application",
    "url": "46595.htm",
    "text": "Use this dialog box to rename an application.  Tip:  If you want to rename a 7.0 or earlier version of application, convert the application to current version in FactoryTalk View Studio before the operation.  You will not be prompted to validate user rights.  To rename an application  Select Rename an application and click Next.  From the list, select the application you want to rename, and then click Next.  Type the new name of the application and click Finish.  If the new name is the same as an existing application, an error message will appear. If the name is valid, the operation will proceed.  Tip:  When you enter a new application name, do not exceed 32 characters. If the application name exceeds the maximum 32 characters allowed by FactoryTalk View Studio, errors and warning messages will show.  See also  Use FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager  Select an operation  ",
    "keywords": {
      "rename": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 22,
    "title": "Copy an application",
    "url": "46600.htm",
    "text": "Use this dialog box to copy an application.  Tip:  When you copy an existing application, the entire contents of the application, including the HMI server and all referenced data servers, will be copied.  To select an earlier version of application to copy, convert the application to current version in FactoryTalk View Studio before the operation.  To copy an application  Select Copy application and click Next.  From the list, select the application to copy, and then click Next.  Type the name of the new application and click Finish.  If the name is the same as an existing application, you will be prompted to overwrite the existing application. If you want to overwrite it, click Yes. If you do not want to overwrite it, click No and enter another name.  Tip:  When you enter a new application name, do not exceed 32 characters. If the application name exceeds the maximum 32 characters allowed by FactoryTalk View Studio, errors and warning messages will show.  See also  Use FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager  Select an operation  ",
    "keywords": {
      "copy": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 23,
    "title": "Delete an application",
    "url": "46608.htm",
    "text": "Use this dialog box to delete an application.  Tip:  When deleting an application, you will not be prompted to validate user rights.  When deleting a project, the project's unique security configuration will also be deleted.  To delete an application  Select Delete application and click Next.  From the list, select the application you want to delete, and then click Next.  For Machine Edition applications, the HMI server project referenced by the ME application is deleted together.  Click Finish. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.  See also  Use FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager  Select an operation  ",
    "keywords": {
      "delete": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 24,
    "title": "Back up an application",
    "url": "46610.htm",
    "text": "Use this dialog box to back up an application.  Tip:  If you want to select a 7.0 or earlier version of application to back up, convert the application to current version in FactoryTalk View Studio before the operation.  With one or more projects that use security active, you can create an .apa backup file for any project and only that project&#8217;s associated security configuration will be included in the .apa file.  If you restore an application from an .apa file, the HMI server will be restored to the local computer and will not need to be rehosted.  To back up an application  Select Backup application and click Next.   From the list, select the application you want to back up, and then click Next.  Name a backup archive.  If the operation succeeds, an archive file with the specified name and the extension .apa will be created and saved in the specified location.  See also  Use FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager  Select an application  Name a backup archive  Rename an application  ",
    "keywords": {
      "back up": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 25,
    "title": "Name a backup archive",
    "url": "46624.htm",
    "text": "When backing up an application, you need name a backup archive.  To name a backup archive  In the Enter a name for the application archive box, type a name for the application you are backing up.  The default name will be the name of the selected application.  Tip:  If the name is the same as an existing application, you will be prompted to overwrite the existing application. If you want to overwrite it, click Yes. If you do not want to overwrite it, click No and enter another name.  Specify where to store the application archive. You can type the location, or click the Browse button (\u2026) to search for and select the location.  The default location for backup archives is \\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\Archives  If you want to protect your backup files with a passphrase, select the Encrypt file contents check box.  You will be required to enter the passphrase when you restore any backup file that is passphrase protected.  Tip:  If you do not wish to encrypt the backup file contents, it will be saved as a plain text backup file.  If you selected the Encrypt file contents check box, type a passphrase and enter it again in the Confirm passphrase box.  Click Finish.  All application configurations including FactoryTalk Services Platform/System, as well as the physical project folders of the HMI server, are backed up.  See also  Use FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager  Back up an application  Restore an application  "
  },
  {
    "id": 26,
    "title": "Restore an application",
    "url": "46612.htm",
    "text": "Use this dialog box to create an application from an application archive (*.apa) file.  When restoring an application, you will not be prompted to validate user rights, and the security configuration of each project is preserved.  To restore an application  Select Restore application and click Next, or double-click the *.apa file to launch FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager.  Select the archive file that you wish to restore. You can click the Browse button (...) to search for and select the file. The default location for backup archives is \\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\Archives  Click Next. If the archived application is passphrase protected, enter the correct passphrase and click OK.  Enter the name of the new application to be created from the backup archive. The default name will be the name of the application that was originally archived.  Tip:  When restoring an application, if the name is the same as an existing application, you will be prompted to overwrite the existing application. If you want to overwrite it, click Yes. If you do not want to overwrite it, click No and enter another name.  When you enter a new application name, do not exceed 32 characters. If the application name exceeds the maximum 32 characters allowed by FactoryTalk View Studio, errors and warning messages will show.  Click Finish.  The restore process begins. If the name is valid, a progress bar appears.  See also  Use FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager  Restoring is interrupted  Restore a legacy project  Restore a runtime application  ",
    "keywords": {
      "restore": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 27,
    "title": "Restoring is interrupted",
    "url": "81278.htm",
    "text": "Restoring an application generates a recovery file that includes the directory information. After a successful restore operation, this file is deleted. However, if a restore operation is not completed - if the computer performing the operation loses power during the restore, for example - the recovery file is retained. When the FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager is restarted after an interrupted restore operation, a message appears advising the user that the recovery file still exists. The user is offered the option of replacing the existing FactoryTalk Directory with the one in the recovery file.  Recovering the directory will replace all users and groups, database definitions and security policies defined on this computer with the ones defined in the recovery file. Be sure a user name and password that will grant full access rights to the previous FactoryTalk Directory are available.  See also  Restore an application  "
  },
  {
    "id": 28,
    "title": "Restore a legacy project",
    "url": "46617.htm",
    "text": "Use this dialog box to create a new HMI project from an archived ME project (.mea) file.  To restore an ME project  Select Restore legacy project and click Next.  You can also double-click the .mea file to launch the FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager.  Select the archive file that you want to restore. You can click the Browse button (...) to search for and select the file.  The default folder for backup archives is \\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\Archives.  Enter the name of the new HMI project to be created from the backup archive, and then click Next.  The default name will be the name of the application that was originally archived. ME HMI projects are created in the folder \\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\HMI Projects.  If the new name is the same as an existing HMI project, an error message will appear. If the name is valid, a progress bar appears, indicating that a legacy project is being restored.  When you enter a new application name, do not exceed 32 characters. If the application name exceeds the maximum 32 characters allowed by FactoryTalk View Studio, errors and warning messages will show.  See also  Use FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager  Restore an application  Restore a runtime application  ",
    "keywords": {
      "restore": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 29,
    "title": "Restore a runtime application",
    "url": "46619.htm",
    "text": "Use FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager's runtime restore operation to create a development application file (*.med) from a FactoryTalk View Machine Edition v5.00 or later runtime application file (*.mer).  Tip:  This operation cannot be applied to runtime files created with versions of FactoryTalk View Studio prior to 5.00.  When a runtime file is created with FactoryTalk View Studio 5.00 or later, the user has the option of permanently protecting the file against conversion into a development file, or requiring a password. Protected run-time files cannot be converted into development applications.  Runtime conversion restores the application shortcuts and the original runtime PanelView Plus platform communications configuration only. It does not restore the communications topology of the original design workstation.  To restore a runtime application  Select Restore runtime application and click Next.  Select the archive file that you wish to restore. You can click the Browse button (...) to search for and select the file. The default folder for run-time files is \\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\Runtime.  If the selected file is password-protected, enter the password and click Next.  Enter the name of the new application to be created from the backup archive, then click Next.  The default name will be the name of the application that was originally archived. If the name is the same as an existing application, you will be prompted to overwrite the existing application. If you want to overwrite it, click Yes. If you do not want to overwrite it, click No and enter another name.  When you enter a new application name, do not exceed 32 characters. If the application name exceeds the maximum 32 characters allowed by FactoryTalk View Studio, errors and warning messages will show.  Click Finish.  A progress bar appears, indicating the application being restored. When the conversion process is complete, a Shortcut Validation report is generated and stored in the same location as the project file. Use this report as a tool to help you confirm all of your shortcuts and offline tag file assignments.  See also  Use FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager  Back up an application  Restore a legacy project  ",
    "keywords": {
      "restore": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 30,
    "title": "FactoryTalk Linx or RSLinx Enterprise conversion log and shortcut validation",
    "url": "217357.htm",
    "text": "The communications configuration (topology) on your workstation may be different from the configuration that was in use when the runtime application (.mer) was generated. Converting the runtime application to a different topology has the same effect as changing the shortcut device assignments. Failure to verify shortcut design assignments before using the converted application may result in unexpected behavior in the equipment being controlled. Please confirm the design path and offline tag file assignments for each shortcut.  See also  Restore a runtime application  "
  },
  {
    "id": 31,
    "title": "Name the application",
    "url": "46625.htm",
    "text": "Use this dialog box to name the application.  For the rename operation, if the name is the same as an existing application, an error message will show. If the name is valid, the operation will proceed.  For the copy or restore operation, if the name is the same as an existing application, you will be prompted to overwrite the existing application. If you want to overwrite it, click Yes. If you do not want to overwrite it, click No and enter another name.  To name the application  In the text box, type a name for the application, and then click Next or Finish.  When you enter a new application name, do not exceed 32 characters. If the application name exceeds the maximum 32 characters allowed by FactoryTalk View Studio, errors and warning messages will show.  See also  Rename an application  Copy an application  Restore an application  "
  },
  {
    "id": 32,
    "title": "Name the project",
    "url": "46627.htm",
    "text": "Use this dialog box to name the project.  To name the project  In the text box, type a name for the new HMI project to be created from the backed up file, and then click Finish.  If the name is the same as an existing project, an error message will show. If the name is valid, the operation will proceed.  When you enter a new application name, do not exceed 32 characters. If the application name exceeds the maximum 32 characters allowed by FactoryTalk View Studio, errors and warning messages will show.  See also  Restore a legacy project  "
  },
  {
    "id": 33,
    "title": "Specify an archive",
    "url": "46626.htm",
    "text": "Specify an archive file to be restored.  To specify an archive  Name the backup file that you want to restore and then click Next. You can click the Browse button (\u2026) to select the archived file.  The default folder for backup archives is \\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\Archives.  See also  Restore an application  "
  },
  {
    "id": 34,
    "title": "Select an application",
    "url": "46622.htm",
    "text": "The list contains all the applications eligible for the operation.  To select an application  From the list, select the application on which to perform the specified operation, and then click Next.  See also  Use FactoryTalk View ME Application Manager  Select an operation  "
  },
  {
    "id": 35,
    "title": "Import and conversion of an application",
    "url": "66974.htm",
    "text": "You can import the following application files to FactoryTalk View Studio and convert them to current version FactoryTalk View Machine Edition application files using Machine Edition Import Wizard:  PanelBuilder&reg; application (.pba or .pva)  PanelBuilder32 application (.pba or .pva)  PanelBuilder 1400e application (.pvc)  RSView&reg; Machine Edition application (.med)  FactoryTalk View Machine Edition application (.med)  When importing an application:  If the application contains any direct driver nodes, the Import Wizard will create an RSLinx topic for each direct driver node it finds. All topics are then converted to device shortcuts to run with FactoryTalk Linx. You must have RSLinx Classic and FactoryTalk Linx installed to complete the conversion.  If the application includes alarm block tags, the conversion process creates direct references for each of the block tags imported. The direct reference is based on the original block tag name and address, with the modifier \"L\" appended. The \"L\" modifier is followed by the number of elements to be read. The number is arrived at by dividing the number of bits that is defined for the block tag by the number of bits in each address element (assumed to be a 16-bit word). For example, if the original block tag had 47 bits defined, using the address N7:0, it would be converted to a direct reference as N7:0,L3.  If the application files are created with an earlier version FactoryTalk View, FactoryTalk View will create a copy of the application for the current version and will not alter the earlier version.  PanelView Plus 7 Standard application will be converted to PanelView Plus 7 Performance or custom size application, and the application limits will be removed. If you want a PanelView Plus 7 Standard application, specify the project window size in the Project Settings dialog box after the application is imported.  Compact Machine Edition application will be converted to regular non-compact application, and the application limits will be removed. If you want a Compact Machine Edition application, specify the project window size in the Project Settings dialog box after the application is imported.  The Import Wizard converts PanelBuilder objects to the most similar Machine Edition objects. When conversion is not possible, an error message is shown.  A PanelBuilder application will be converted to a Machine Edition application that does not contain a border or a title bar.  You can use the current version application files to create previous version runtime files in FactoryTalk View Studio. For information about the features supported in different versions of FactoryTalk View, see \"Appendix G\" in FactoryTalk View Machine Edition User's Guide.  You cannot import applications that were created with later versions of FactoryTalk View Studio than the one you are presently running. For example, if you are running Version 7.0, you cannot import an application that is created with Version 8.0.  See also  Create a Machine Edition application  Import an application  Multiple version support  PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications and Compact Machine Edition applications  Specify project settings (General tab)  ",
    "keywords": {
      "import": "100",
      "convert": "100",
      "application": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 36,
    "title": "Import an application",
    "url": "262409.htm",
    "text": "Use FactoryTalk View Studio and Machine Edition Import Wizard to import and convert an application to current version FactoryTalk View Machine Edition application.  To import an application  If FactoryTalk View Studio is not started, start FactoryTalk View Studio.  If FactoryTalk View Studio is started, from the File menu, select New Application or click the New Application tool. If an application is already open, FactoryTalk View Studio asks you whether to close the application. Click Yes.  On the New tab of the New/Open Machine Edition Application dialog box, enter a name for the application in the Application Name box.  (Optional) Enter a description for the application. You can also modify the description in the application Properties dialog box after the application is imported.  Tip:  If the imported application contains an application file comment, the comment will overwrite your description when the application is imported.  Select a language for the application. You can add more languages in the Language Configuration dialog box after the application is imported.  Click Import to start the Machine Edition Import Wizard.  In the Machine Edition Import Wizard - Import Type dialog box, select the type of file that you want to import and click Next.  In the Machine Edition Import Wizard - Import File dialog box, enter the name of the file you want to import or click the browse button to select the file.  If you are importing a FactoryTalk View Machine Edition application (.med), click Finish.  If you are not importing a FactoryTalk View Machine Edition application (.med), click Next. In the Machine Edition Import Wizard - Import Options dialog box, specify graphic display conversion and touch property and click Finish.  The Machine Edition Import Wizard converts the imported application to a Machine Edition application and shows it in the Explorer window. The system automatically creates a display called MAIN and sets the initial graphic to Main.  The converted files are stored in:  \\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\HMI projects\\<ApplicationName>  The application file is given the extension .med.  Tip:  The original resolution will not change during the import and conversion. You can modify the resolution in the Project Settings editor after the application is imported.  If errors occur during the conversion, a message describing the errors will show and the errors will be logged to a convert.log file located in the root folder of the ME project.  On a computer running a SQL Server&reg; 2008 R2 Standard 64-bit instance, if you fail to convert the tag database when importing a PVC application, try restarting the computer and importing the application again.  If the PanelBuilder&reg; application you import is an RIO application, additional steps are necessary before the application can be run on FactoryTalk View Machine Edition.  See also  Options in the New/Open Machine Edition Application dialog box  Import and conversion of an application  Displays added to an imported PanelBuilder application  Convert direct driver nodes in imported applications  Convert PanelBuilder RIO applications  "
  },
  {
    "id": 37,
    "title": "Displays added to an imported PanelBuilder application",
    "url": "262412.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the displays that will be added to a PanelBuilder application when the application is imported to FactoryTalk View Studio.  Displays  Descriptions  [DIAGNOSTICS]  This display will be added to a PanelBuilder 1400e or PanelBuilder32 application.  [ALARM]  This display will be added to:  A PanelBuilder32 application that does not have an Alarm Banner display  A PanelBuilder 1400e application that has its Alarm Message Window State set to Enabled  [INFORMATION]  This display will be added to:  A PanelBuilder32 application  A PanelBuilder 1400e application that has its Information Message Window State set to Enabled  [HISTORY] 800x600 or [HISTORY] 640x480  This display will be added to a PanelBuilder 1400e application.  [STATUS] 800x600 or [STATUS] 640x480  This display will be added to a PanelBuilder 1400e application.  See also  Import and conversion of an application  Import an application  "
  },
  {
    "id": 38,
    "title": "Configure download drivers",
    "url": "67510.htm",
    "text": "Before you can transfer files between your desktop computer and a terminal on the network, you must configure a driver on each machine. The type of driver you need depends on the kind of network that connects the two.  To configure a download driver on your desktop computer  In FactoryTalk View Studio, select the Communications tab of the Explorer window.  Right-click the top level device that identifies your computer, and select Add Driver.  Select the driver for the network type the terminal is on and click OK.  In the driver configuration window that opens, set up the driver and click OK.  When you return to the Communications Explorer, the new driver will appear in the tree.  To configure a download driver on the terminal  Start the terminal and go to Configuration Mode.  In the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station dialog box, click Terminal Settings.  Select Networks and Communications > FactoryTalk Linx Communications.  Select the network type the terminal is connected to, and then click Edit Driver.  In the driver configuration window that opens, set up the driver and click Close. The driver must be for the same network type that you configured on the desktop computer.  Restart the terminal to load the new configuration.  To communicate with the terminal  In FactoryTalk View Studio, select the Communications Explorer.  Right-click the network icon below the top level device that identifies your computer, and select Stop Browsing.  Right-click the same icon again and select Start Browsing. The terminal you have just configured appears as a node under the driver, along with any other devices on the network that have this driver set up.  See also  About communication drivers  Communicate with programmable logic controllers  Configuration Mode  "
  },
  {
    "id": 39,
    "title": "Select import type",
    "url": "67651.htm",
    "text": "To select the import type  From the list, select the type of application file that you want to import.  Tip:  If you are creating a new application from an existing FactoryTalk View Machine Edition project (*.med), use a name for the new application that is different from the existing project name.  See also  Import an application  Import a file  Select import options  "
  },
  {
    "id": 40,
    "title": "Select import options",
    "url": "67645.htm",
    "text": "Options available in the Machine Edition Import Wizard - Import Options window will vary depending on the type of application file you are importing.  Window size conversion  Use existing window size  Select this option to leave the imported project window size the same as specified in the original PanelBuilder file.  Convert to new window size  Select this option to specify a new window size for the imported project. The size you specify is used for all Replace displays.  Size (pixels)  Choose a window size from the list. If you choose a standard window size, the Width and Height boxes fill automatically. If you choose Custom size, type the width and height of the custom window, in pixels, in these boxes.  Scale graphic displays  Scaling options apply to imported PanelBuilder and PanelBuilder (.pba, .pvc, or .pva) applications only, and not to FactoryTalk View Machine Edition projects or applications.  If you check this box, all graphic displays in the converted ME application will change (increase or decrease) to the new window size. Graphic objects on the displays will be resized so that both their size and positions relative to each other remain the same.  Scaling example  If this box is not checked, the displays will be resized, and the objects will retain their original size and position in the display. This may result in some objects being outside the display area, but you can still select them and move them onto the display. If they are not moved into the display, they will not be visible at run time.  Tip:  If you select the scaling option, imported text will not change font size.  Touch property conversion  Enable touch on graphic objects from keypad only applications  Check this box if you want the &nbsp;operator to be able to press objects using a touch screen or mouse  Clear this box if you want the operator to be able to press objects using a keypad or external keyboard only.  Caption alignment  Specify what alignment to use for captions in imported PanelBuilder 1400e (.pvc) applications.  PanelBuilder objects may have more than one label. Machine Edition objects have only a single caption. If the object being imported has more than one label, all the labels will be converted to a single caption in the Machine Edition object.  To allow Machine Edition to align object text to look as much like the PanelBuilder application as possible, choose the second option, Match existing alignment without adding spaces.  Align top left and add spaces to match existing alignment  If this option is selected, captions in the imported application will be top-left aligned, and spaces and carriage returns will be added to make a single caption with Word Wrap on.  Match existing alignment without adding spaces  If this option is selected, captions in the imported application will be made to look as much like they did in the PanelBuilder application as possible without adding spaces. Instead of being top-left aligned, positioning is based on the Alignment property of the object's caption.  If the imported object has multiple labels, the order the labels will be displayed in the ME caption will be based on their top left position. An appropriate number of carriage returns will be added to separate the labels, depending on the height of the font to be used for the caption. Any labels not separated by carriage returns will have a space added between them.  External font conversion  Specify what font to use as a replacement for the 'External Font' used in a PanelBuilder (.pba or .pva) application  Convert external font to  Select the font to convert to from the drop-down list.  PanelBuilder application language  If the application you are converting uses an external font, from the drop-down list, select which language (or code page) was used when the external font was created.  All ASCII text strings are converted to their Unicode equivalent text strings during conversion.  See also  Import an application  Select import type  Import a file  Convert PanelBuilder RIO applications  Examples of scaling objects  "
  },
  {
    "id": 41,
    "title": "Import a file",
    "url": "67649.htm",
    "text": "Click the Browse button to open a Browse window. When you have located the file that you want to import, click the file name, and then click Open.  or  If you know the name and location of the application file, you can type the full path and name in the text box.  See also  Import an application  Select import type  Select import options  "
  },
  {
    "id": 42,
    "title": "Example: Scaling an object's size",
    "url": "67647.htm",
    "text": "If the user selects the scaling option, objects will be scaled in size so that they occupy the same relative area on the new display, using this formula:  New object width = (New display width/Old display width) x current object width  New object height = (New display height/Old display height) x current object height  On a 640x480 display, a button is 20 pixels wide by 40 pixels high.  If the display is reduced to 320x240, the button will be scaled to be 10 pixels wide by 20 pixels high.  New object width = (320/640) x 20 = 10  New object height = (240/480) x 40 = 20  If the display is increased to 800x600, the button will be scaled to 25 x 50.  New object width = (800/640) x 20 = 25  New object height = (600/480) x 40 = 50  Tip:  Imported text will not change font size.  See also  Import a file  Select import options  Example: Scaling an object's position  "
  },
  {
    "id": 43,
    "title": "Example: Scaling an object's position",
    "url": "299950.htm",
    "text": "If the user selects the scaling option, objects will be scaled in size so that they occupy the same relative position on the new display, using this formula:  New object left = (New display width/Old display width) x current object left  New object top = (New display height/Old display height) x current object top  On a 640x480 display, a button is located at 20,40.  If the display is reduced to 320x240, the button will be changed to be 10,20.  New object left = (320/640) x 20 = 10  New object top = (240/480) x 40 = 20  If the display is increased to 800x600, the button will be scaled to 25,50.  New object left = (800/640) x 20 = 25  New object top = (600/480) x 40 = 50  Tip:  Imported text will not change font size.  See also  Import a file  Select import options  Example: Scaling an object's size  "
  },
  {
    "id": 44,
    "title": "Convert direct driver nodes in imported applications",
    "url": "67653.htm",
    "text": "If the application you are importing contains any direct driver nodes, the import wizard will create one RSLinx topic for each direct driver node it finds. All topics are then converted into device shortcuts, to run with FactoryTalk Linx. You must have both RSLinx Classic and FactoryTalk Linx installed to make this two-step conversion.  To create topics after import, follow these steps in RSLinx Classic before importing the application.  To validate direct driver nodes in RSLinx Classic  Create the appropriate RSLinx driver(s) if not already created (for example, AB_ETH-1).  If it is an Ethernet driver (AB_ETH-1), add the IP address of each Direct Driver Node to the Ethernet driver setup.  Start RSWho and select each device associated with each Direct Driver Node (e.g., 131.200.13.128)  If these steps are not done in this order, the topics generated by the import code will be invalid and will need to be fixed using the Topic Editor in RSLinx Classic.  See also  Set up OPC communications  Communicate with programmable logic controllers  Import and conversion of an application  Import an application  "
  },
  {
    "id": 45,
    "title": "Convert PanelBuilder 1400e Expressions",
    "url": "66980.htm",
    "text": "Some PanelBuilder expression syntax is not supported in FactoryTalk View Studio's expression language. Therefore PanelBuilder 1400e expressions are converted to Machine Edition without being modified, and are then disabled. Warning text is placed at the beginning of each expression, and exclamation points (!) are placed at the beginning of each subsequent line.  Some PanelBuilder 1400e objects support both tags and expressions. For these objects, if the text assigned to a connection could be valid syntax for both a tag and an expression, the connection is treated as an expression, and is therefore disabled.  For example, N20-0_String_64 could be the name of a tag, or it could be an expression that subtracts \"0_String_64\" from the tag \"N20.\" The text would be converted as a disabled expression.  To enable a converted expression  Select the object containing the expression.  Open the object's Property Panel and click the Connections tab.  In the Exprn column, click the Browse button beside the expression.  In the Expression editor, delete the warning text and the exclamation marks.  Click Check Syntax.  If necessary, revise the expression to use FactoryTalk View expression language.  Equivalent expression syntax  Type of expression component or operator  PanelBuilder 1400e syntax  Equivalent FactoryTalk View syntax (if any)  Comment  REM or &#8217;  !  Line continuation  _ (underscore)  not needed  Equality  ( = )  EQ or ==  Bitwise Not<br />Bitwise And<br />Bitwise Or<br />Bitwise Xor  If both operands are Byte, Integer, Long, Variant, or any combination of these data types, use the FactoryTalk View syntax.  For other data types, no change is needed.  Not<br />And<br />Or<br />Xor  ~ (tilde)<br />&<br />| (pipe)<br />^  Exit statement  Exit  not needed  Local variables  DIM varname AS ...  varname =  Integer division  \\  (x - (x MOD y))/y  Endif  If then endif<br />If then else endif  If then else 0<br />If then else  Select case  SelectCase<br />Case1...CaseN<br />CaseElse<br />EndSelect  Use nested if then else  Logical Xor (if one or both operands are Boolean or Single data types)  Xor  NOT ((x AND y)  OR NOT (x OR y))  Order of precedence  The order of precedence is slightly different in FactoryTalk View. Check your expressions to make sure the result is what you intend.  PanelBuilder 1400e order of precedence  FactoryTalk View order of precedence  ( )  ( )  - (negation)  NOT, ~ (tilde)  *, / (floating point division)  &nbsp;*, /, MOD, %, **, AND, &&, &, >>, <<  \\ (integer division)  +, -, OR, ||, |, ^  Mod  EQ, ==, NE, <>, LT, <, GT, >, LE, <=, GE, >=  +, - (subtraction)  =, <>, <, >, <=, >=  Not  And  Or  Xor  See also  PanelBuilder 1400e Objects and Features Not Converted to ME  PanelBuilder 1400e to Machine Edition object mappings  About expressions  Operator precedence in expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 46,
    "title": "PanelBuilder 1400e to Machine Edition object mappings",
    "url": "66976.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows those cases where an imported PanelBuilder 1400e object is converted into a Machine Edition object of a different description.  PanelBuilder \"e\" object  Machine Edition object  Increment Value Button  Ramp Button  Decrement Value Button  Ramp Button  Increment Value Button with Display  Ramp Button and ME Numeric Display  Decrement Value Button with Display  Ramp Button and ME Numeric Display  Small and Large ASCII Input  String Input Enable  Small and Large Numeric Entry Keypad  Numeric Input Enable  Arc whose Fill Style is set to \"Solid\"  ME Arc and ME Line.  This is because the PanelBuilder \"e\" object is a closed shape, whereas the ME object is not closed between the two points of the Arc.  Screen List Selector's list  Display list selector  Screen List Selector's enter button  Enter List Key  Screen List Selector's down cursor button  Move Down List Key  Screen List Selector's up cursor button  Move Up List Key  Control List Selector's list  Control list selector  Control List Selector's enter button  Enter List Key  Control List Selector's down cursor button  Move Down List Key  Control List Selector's up cursor button  Control List Selector's up cursor button  Small and Large Screen Select Keypad  Display List Selector.  You will have to configure this object to change to the appropriate displays.  Screen Keypad Enable  Display List Selector.  You will have to configure this object to change to the appropriate displays.  Goto Screen Button  Goto display button  Return to Previous Screen Button  Return to display button  ASCII display  String display  Numeric Keypad Enable Button  Numeric input enable button  Normally Open Momentary Push Button  Momentary push button  Normally Closed Momentary Push Button  Momentary push button  Screen Print Button  Display print button  Time Display  Time and date display (set to show time only)  Date Display  Time and date display (set to show date only)  Alarm History Sort By Time/Sort By Value Button  Sort alarms button  Alarm Status Reset Qty/Time Button  Reset alarm status button  Alarm Panel  Alarm banner  Single Line Alarm Window  Alarm banner  Alarm Status Screen  Alarm status list  See also  Import and conversion of an application  PanelBuilder 1400e Objects and Features Not Converted to ME  "
  },
  {
    "id": 47,
    "title": "Convert PanelBuilder 1400E alarms",
    "url": "67722.htm",
    "text": "When a PanelBuilder 1400e application is converted into a Machine Edition application:  The tag assigned to the PanelBuilder 1400e Message to PLC connection is assigned to the ME Message connection.  The tag assigned to the PanelBuilder 1400e Message Control connection is assigned to the ME Message Notification connection.  The tag or expression assigned to the PanelBuilder 1400e Message Handshake connection is assigned to the ME Message Handshake connection.  Differences between PanelBuilder 1400e alarm message functionality and Machine Edition alarm message functionality  PanelBuilder \"e\" resets the Message Control (its equivalent of the Message Notification) when the Message Handshake makes a zero to non-zero transition. Machine Edition reset the Message Notification when the Message Handshake changes to a new non-zero value. It does not require the original value to be zero, though it will work if it is zero. This allows existing PanelBuilder \"e\" applications to be imported without needing modifications in this area.  See also  Import and conversion of an application  Alarm Import Export Wizard  Convert PanelBuilder 1400e Expressions  Set up alarm triggers (Triggers tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 48,
    "title": "Unsupported PanelBuilder 1400e Objects and Features",
    "url": "66978.htm",
    "text": "PanelBuilder &#8220;e&#8221; Settings and Controls not converted to Machine Edition  Transfer Inhibit control  Transfer Request control  Transfer Status control  PLC Controlled Relay control  PLC Controlled Audio control  Message control  Message Handshake control  Polarity control configured to display a minus sign with a negative number  Acknowledge to PLC control (if the Alarm Acknowledge is set to Bit)  Remote Alarm Operation Hold Time; the 1400e Remote Alarm Ack Control Hold Time will be used for all alarm hold times.  Remote Alarm Control Delay Time. If an Ack control is assigned in FactoryTalk View, there is no delay time between the alarm acknowledgment and the Ack control being set.  Bit alarm acknowledgment  Blinking alarm messages  Alarm relays  Screen security settings. FactoryTalk View uses a different method to assign security to displays.  Date and time settings. ME date and time settings are based on the run-time locale settings, which will have to be set after conversion.  Any characters in PanelBuilder screen names that are invalid in ME will be replaced with an underscore \"_\" character.  Expressions because some PanelBuilder 1400e expression syntax is not supported in FactoryTalk View Studio, all PanelBuilder expressions are disabled during conversion.  PanelBuilder &#8220;e&#8221; Objects not converted to Machine Edition  Scrolling List Object - including Cursor List, Multistate Indicator Object List, Local Message Object List, and Numeric Data Display Object List  Set Bit Cursor Point  GoTo Configure Mode Button  PanelBuilder &#8220;e&#8221; Graphic Object Features not converted to Machine Edition  Unsupported feature  Object  Notes  Blinking wallpaper objects  Image, text, arc, ellipse, line, panel, rectangle, wedge  If you want an object to blink at run time, unlock the wallpaper.  Fixed Position and PLC Controlled decimal display options  Numeric Input Cursor Point Numeric Data Display  Assign an expression to the object's Value control to achieve the same result.  PLC Controlled and Decimal Key Controlled decimal point options  Numeric Input Cursor Point Numeric Keypad Enable Button  Assign an expression to the object's Optional Expression control to achieve the same result.  Retain Cursor on Cancel.  Numeric Input Cursor Point  This is an application wide setting and not a setting of the individual cursor point objects.  Initial state values  Maintained Push Button  Multistate Push Button  Control List Selector  To set initial state values at startup, create a macro to set the appropriate tag values for the objects' controls.  Blinking pens  Trend  FactoryTalk View pens do not blink.  Date labels on the X axis  Trend  The date is displayed in the title.  Background screen plotting of pens using expressions  Trend  FactoryTalk View converts PanelBuilder 1400e's background plotting by adding the tags assigned to the pens to a data log model. However, expressions cannot be added to a data log model.  Object names  All objects  Object names are replaced with default FactoryTalk View names. PanelBuilder 1400e names are used for the object's description.  Caption and image placement  All objects  Some image captions may be truncated, clipped or may overlap images.  Multiple image labels  All objects  If a PanelBuilder 1400e object used multiple image labels, only the top left image label is converted.  Dash-Dot-1 and Dash-Dot-Dot-1 Line Styles  Arc, Wedge, Line, Ellipse and Scale  Objects with these line styles will be converted to objects with a dash line style. At run time on a PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal, they will appear with a dot line style, since PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE do not support any other line styles.  See also  Import and conversion of an application  Convert PanelBuilder 1400e Expressions  PanelBuilder 1400e to Machine Edition object mappings  "
  },
  {
    "id": 49,
    "title": "PanelBuilder32 to Machine Edition object mappings",
    "url": "67630.htm",
    "text": "The following tables show those cases where an imported PanelBuilder32 object is converted into a Machine Edition object of a different description.  PanelBuilder32 object  Machine Edition object  Message Display  Multistate Indicator  Numeric Entry Cursor Point  Numeric Input Enable  Increment/Decrement Entry  Numeric Input Enable  ASCII Entry Cursor Point  String Input Enable  Numeric Display  Text object with numeric embedded variable  Connected Line  Polyline  Circle  Ellipse  Freeform  Freehand  Bar Graph and Gauge inner text  a separate ME Text object  Bar Graph and Gauge inner graphic  a separate ME Image object  Gauge needle  a separate ME Gauge object  Therefore, if a PV \"s\" Gauge object has been configured with 2 needles, it will be converted to 2 separate ME Gauge objects.  The following PanelBuilder32 controls, objects, and components cannot be converted to Machine Edition:  Print Only Object.  Circular Scale Object.  Scrolling Text Object.  Print Alarm Button Object.  Horn Silence Button Object.  Lamp/Horn Test Button Object.  Select Operator Button Object.  Enable/Disable Security Button Object.  New Password Button Object.  Verify Password Button Object.  Security Settings.  Tip:  When a PanelBuilder32 list object is converted to a Machine Edition object, its foreground and background colors are used to set the Selection fore color and Selection back color for the object in the ME application. If the PanelBuilder32 object's foreground and background colors are set to the same color, the selection fore color and selection back color will also be the same. This means that a selected state will be invisible, because the foreground color (text) and the background color are the same.  To make the selected state visible, the object must be edited to change either the selection fore color or the selection back color.  This condition applies to both design time and run time, and affects the following objects:  List indicator  Display list selector  Control list selector  Piloted control list selector  Alarm list selector  See also  Import and conversion of an application  Convert PanelBuilder32 alarms  Unsupported PanelBuilder32 Objects and Features  Unsupported PanelBuilder32 RIO tags  "
  },
  {
    "id": 50,
    "title": "Convert PanelBuilder32 alarms",
    "url": "67632.htm",
    "text": "When a PanelBuilder32 application is converted to a Machine Edition application:  The tag assigned to the PanelBuilder Message to Remote Device Data Tag connection is assigned to the ME Message connection.  The tag assigned to the PanelBuilder Message to Remote Device Notification Tag connection is assigned to the ME Message Notification connection.  The tag assigned to the PanelBuilder Message to Remote Device Handshake Tag connection is assigned to the ME Message Handshake connection.  Differences between PanelBuilder32 alarm message functionality and Machine Edition alarm message functionality  Both Machine Edition and the PanelView terminal, follow this procedure:  Send the alarm message to the Data Tag connection.  Set the Notification Tag connection to 1.  Reset the Notification Tag connection to 0 when the Handshake tag changes to a new non-zero value.  The PanelView terminal performs the following additional steps that Machine Edition does not require:  Send Null (00) to Data Tag connection, overwriting the alarm message.  Set the Notification Tag connection to 1.  Reset the Notification Tag connection to 0 when the Handshake tag changes to a new non-zero value.  The Data Tag is now ready to accept a new alarm message.  Tip:  The maximum string length supported by FactoryTalk Machine Edition at runtime is 82 characters. Because some PanelBuilder32 protocols permit longer strings, some PanelBuilder32 alarm messages may be truncated after conversion.  See also  Import and conversion of an application  Alarm Import Export Wizard  Set up alarm triggers (Triggers tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 51,
    "title": "Unsupported PanelBuilder32 Objects and Features",
    "url": "67635.htm",
    "text": "PanelBuilder32 Settings and Controls not converted to Machine Edition  Remote Ack All Handshake Tag control  Remote Clear All Alarm Tag control  Remote Clear All Alarm Handshake Tag control  Message to Remote Device Notification Tag control  Message to Remote Device Handshake Tag control  PanelBuilder screen security settings  Ack setting for alarm messages; in FactoryTalk View, all alarms can be acknowledged  Bit alarm acknowledgment  Handshaking when alarm messages are sent to a remote device  Time and date formats  External fonts  PanelBuilder32 communications conversion  PanelBuilder nodes are converted to FactoryTalk Linx topics in the conversion process, and a FactoryTalk Linx data server is added to the imported application. Topics are then converted into device shortcuts, to run with FactoryTalk Linx. You must have both RSLinx Classic and FactoryTalk Linx installed to make this two-step conversion.  Tags are converted to HMI tags within the RSLinx topics.  Tip:  If you import an application more than once, delete the topics in RSLinx before re-importing. Otherwise, RSLinx will contain multiple unused topics.  Unsupported communication protocols  These communication protocols are not supported in FactoryTalk View:  ControlNet&#8482; scheduled communications  Modbus communications  Profibus DP communications  DeviceNet&#8482; communications  DH+&#8482; nodes that use the AutoMax node type  Invalid PanelBuilder node types and non-existent node names that are saved with the PanelBuilder application  Tags that use these protocols are converted to memory tags. Once you have set up communications for your converted application, change the memory tags to device tags that point to the correct addresses.  Bit array tags  You can monitor bit arrays for alarm conditions in FactoryTalk View, but you can&#8217;t assign bit arrays to graphic objects or write to bit arrays. Therefore, all bit array tags in your PanelBuilder application are converted to memory tags.  String tags  At runtime, the maximum string length supported by Machine Edition is 82 characters. Because some PanelBuilder32 protocols support longer strings, some PanelBuilder32 alarm messages may be truncated after conversion.  Unsupported characters in tag names  Semicolons (;) in tag addresses are supported in PanelBuilder32, but not in FactoryTalk View Studio. Before importing the PanelBuilder application, in the PanelBuilder32 Tag Editor, change the semicolons to colons (:).  Dashes (-) in tag names are supported in PanelBuilder32, but not in FactoryTalk View Studio. Before importing the PanelBuilder application, in the PanelBuilder32 Tag Editor, locate any tags whose names contain dashes and duplicate the tags. Then rename the tags without the dash, or replace the dash with an underscore (_). Once the tags have been renamed, use the Tag Search feature to find the graphic objects using the original tag names and edit the object to replace the old tag name with the new one.  PanelBuilder32 Objects not converted to Machine Edition  Print Only Object  Goto Config Screen Button  Circular Scale  Scrolling Text  Print Alarm Button  Horn Silence Button  Lamp/Horn Test Button  Select Operator Button  Enable/Disable Security Button  New Password Button  Verify Password Button  PanelBuilder32 Graphic Object Features not converted to Machine Edition  Unsupported feature  Object  Notes  Blink  Text, arc, ellipse, line, panel, rectangle, wedge  In FactoryTalk View, all of the listed objects use color animation to blink.  Blink  Image  Color images do not blink. Monochrome images use the Blink property to blink.  Allow Home/End  Allow Wrap  Ramping by coarse steps  Increment/Decrement Entry Button (converted to numeric input enable button)  Print setting  Multistate Indicator, Message Display  Initial state values  Maintained Push Button, Multistate Push Button, Standard Control List Selector  If you want to set these objects&#8217; states on application startup, create a macro to set the appropriate tag values for the objects&#8217; controls. Assign the macro in the Startup editor.  Least Significant Bit data format  Multistate Indicator, Message Display, List Indicator, Standard Control List Selector  Bit triggered states are not supported. Modify the state values and read tag, or else assign an expression to return the value of the least significant bit.  Inner text and inner graphic  Bar Graph, Gauge  Converted to a separate text object and image object  Scale clipping  Gauge  If the scale doesn&#8217;t fit within the height or width of the gauge, it is not clipped. Check the position of the scale to ensure it doesn&#8217;t overlap other objects.  Needle  Gauge  Converted to a separate gauge object; if the gauge had 2 needles, each needle is converted to a separate gauge object.  No Acknowledgment  Alarm List  All alarms can be acknowledged.  Turn Object View On property  All objects  If this property is set to False, the converted object does not appear.  Caption and image placement  All objects  Some image captions may be truncated, clipped or may overlap images.  See also  Import and conversion of an application  PanelBuilder32 to Machine Edition object mappings  Create array HMI tags  "
  },
  {
    "id": 52,
    "title": "Convert PanelBuilder RIO applications",
    "url": "67639.htm",
    "text": "When a PanelBuilder 1400e or PanelBuilder32 RIO application is converted for use in FactoryTalk View Machine Edition on PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE platforms, some additional steps are required to make the application usable.  Tip:  FactoryTalk Linx new alias BitArray data type allows PanelView 1400e Binary and Byte tags that were previously unsupported, to be converted to RSLinx RIO aliases. If you have previously converted PanelBuilder RIO applications, you may want to convert them again to take advantage of this expanded support. Tags listed here continue to be unsupported.  RIO communication is not presently supported for the Windows 7 SP1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1, Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server 2016 run time, or for test run.  PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications and Compact Machine Edition applications do not support RIO.  Convert an RIO application  As the Machine Edition Import Wizard processes an RIO application, the following changes are made:  The RIO rack configuration is saved in an RIO XML file.  The RIO block transfer file configuration is saved in the RIO XML file.  Supported tags are converted to HMI device tags and saved as aliases in the RIO XML file.  Unsupported tags are converted to HMI memory tags.  Block tags assigned to a PanelBuilder 1400e Alarm Trigger are converted to direct references.  I/O tag bit references are changed from octal to decimal.  Additional steps  You will have to complete the following steps on the converted application:  Delete the Pass-Through file assignment. FactoryTalk View Studio does not support pass-through file transfers.  Make sure the block transfer file numbers are sequential without gaps. If necessary, renumber the block transfer file numbers so there are no missing numbers. Tag addresses in the application will change automatically to match the new number.  Add an RIO driver in the FactoryTalk Linx data server.  Create a device shortcut named PVRIO that points to the RIO data device.  Import the RIO XML file created during the conversion into the RIO driver.  Correct any invalid RIO configurations.  Save the corrected RIO configuration.  To make an imported RIO application run on Machine Edition  Open the imported application in FactoryTalk View Studio.  Open the FactoryTalk Linx data server and double-click Communications set up.  In the Communications Setup editor, add an RIO driver.  In the Communications Setup editor, expand the RIO entry to show RIO data.  Right-click RIO data and select Configure RIO to open the RIO Configuration dialog box.  Right-click RIO and then select Import.  Browse to the location of the RIO XML file created during the conversion and click OK.  The XML file will be saved in the root of the project&#8217;s directory. For example, if you created an ME application with the name PV1 and imports a PanelBuilder application, the PV RIO XML file is in \\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\HMI Projects\\PV1.  Open the XML file and look for red \"X\" icons indicating invalid RIO configurations.  Correct the invalid RIO configurations and save the file.  See also  Unsupported PanelBuilder 1400e RIO tags  Unsupported PanelBuilder32 RIO tags  Unsupported PanelBuilder32 Objects and Features  "
  },
  {
    "id": 53,
    "title": "Unsupported PanelBuilder 1400e RIO tags",
    "url": "67641.htm",
    "text": "When a PanelBuilder 1400e RIO application is converted into a FactoryTalk View Machine Edition application, the Machine Edition Import Wizard converts all the valid tags in the imported applications into HMI device tags. Tags that the Wizard is not able to convert into device tags are converted into HMI memory tags, and an error is logged for each one, except for Block tags. For tags of tag type Block, a log file containing an equivalent direct reference will be created instead.  Unsupported tags include tags that in the PanelBuilder 1400e configuration have:  A blank address  A data type of 1 Digit BCD, 2 Digit BCD, 3 Digit BCD, 5 Digit BCD, 6 Digit BCD, or 7 Digit BCD  A data type of Bit Position, but an address that does not reference a single bit  A data type of Default, Unsigned Integer, Signed Integer, Long Integer, Float, 4 Digit BCD, 8 Digit BCD, or String, but an address whose assigned bit offset is not 0  A tag type of Block  An invalid PanelBuilder 1400e block transfer or I/O address  See also  Import and conversion of an application  Convert PanelBuilder RIO applications  Unsupported PanelBuilder32 Objects and Features  "
  },
  {
    "id": 54,
    "title": "Unsupported PanelBuilder32 RIO tags",
    "url": "67637.htm",
    "text": "When a PanelBuilder32 RIO application is converted into a Machine Edition application, the Machine Edition Import Wizard converts all the valid tags in the imported applications into HMI device tags. Tags that the Wizard is not able to convert into device tags are converted into HMI memory tags, and an error is logged for each one.  Unsupported tags include tags that, in the PanelBuilder32 configuration, have:  a blank address  a data type of Binary, but an address that does not reference a single bit and does not have a length or range of 8 bits or 16 bits specified  a data type of Bit Array but an address that does not have an Array Size of 1, 8, 16 or 32  a data type of Bit Array and an Array Size of 8, but an address whose offset is not 0 or 8 &#8211; (non-block transfer and SLC&#8482; addresses)  a data type of Bit Array and an Array Size of 8, but an address whose offset is not 0 or 10 (octal) &#8211; (non-SLC I/O addressing)  a data type of Bit Array and an Array Size of 16 or 32, but an address whose offset is not 0  a data type of Bit or BOOL, but an address that does not contain the bit delimiter /  a data type of 4BCD, Unsigned Integer, Signed Integer/INT, Character Array, DINT or SINT, but an address that does contain the bit delimiter character /  an invalid I/O or block transfer address  See also  Convert PanelBuilder RIO applications  Import and conversion of an application  Unsupported PanelBuilder32 Objects and Features  "
  },
  {
    "id": 55,
    "title": "PanelBuilder 1400e import tips",
    "url": "67723.htm",
    "text": "Here are some things you should be aware of when importing PanelBuilder 1400e (*.pvc) applications into FactoryTalk View Studio.  Before importing  If you import a PanelView 1400e application whose tag database contains no tags, you will not be able to open the Tags folder in the converted FactoryTalk View ME application. To avoid this, create at least one tag in the PanelView tag database before importing the application.  After importing  In PanelView multistate objects, the first state has a value of 1. In Machine Edition, the first state has a value of 0. If the imported PanelView application contains any of the following multistate objects, after conversion, verify that the state values are what you want them to be:  Control list selector  List indicator  Multistate indicator  Latched push button  Maintained push button  Momentary push button  Multistate push button  Symbol indicator  See also  Import and conversion of an application  Convert PanelBuilder RIO applications  PanelBuilder 1400e to Machine Edition object mappings  Convert PanelBuilder 1400e alarms  Convert PanelBuilder 1400e Expressions  Unsupported PanelBuilder 1400e Objects and Feature  Unsupported PanelBuilder 1400e RIO tags  PanelBuilder32 import tips  "
  },
  {
    "id": 56,
    "title": "PanelBuilder32 import tips",
    "url": "67726.htm",
    "text": "Here are some things you should be aware of when importing PanelBuilder32 (*.pba) applications into FactoryTalk View Studio.  Before importing  Before importing a PanelView32 project that uses external fonts, be sure that the external font file is in the following directory:  C:\\Program Files\\Allen-Bradley\\PBEX\\Fonts  If the conversion utility does not find the external fonts file there, the conversion will stop without reporting an error.  While importing  Certain error messages appear consistently when you import PanelView32 projects. The following error messages can safely be ignored:  Startup Editor: The initial screen does not exist in the graphics list.  Startup Editor: Failed to get startup information.  Format error: file c:\\documents and settings\\all users\\documents\\rsview enterprise\\me\\hmi project\\app1\\import text files\\almmsg.txt, section/key 'main'  The conversion process incorrectly logs errors when converting PanelView32 tags with the data type BIT and a Scale value of 0. These errors can safely be ignored. Tag scale errors should be logged for analog tags only.  After importing  If an imported PanelView32 project (.pba file) includes a logout button assigned to a function key, the function key assignment will not be converted properly in the Machine Edition application. The key will have to be reassigned manually.  After importing a PanelView32 project (a .pba file), if you do not see the newly created device shortcuts for the imported tags in the Tag Browser, restart FactoryTalk View Studio. When you re-open the imported application, the shortcuts will display correctly.  When you import PanelView32 projects, all the screens will be minimized.  In PanelView multistate objects, the first state has a value of 1. In Machine Edition, the first state has a value of 0. If the imported PanelView application contains any of the following multistate objects, after conversion, verify that the state values are what you want them to be:  Control list selector  List indicator  Multistate indicator  Latched push button  Maintained push button  Momentary push button  Multistate push button  Symbol indicator  See also  Import and conversion of an application  Convert PanelBuilder RIO applications  PanelBuilder32 to Machine Edition object mappings  Convert PanelBuilder32 alarms  Unsupported PanelBuilder32 Objects and Features  Unsupported PanelBuilder32 RIO tags  PanelBuilder 1400e import tips  "
  },
  {
    "id": 57,
    "title": "About application properties",
    "url": "67729.htm",
    "text": "How do I open the application Properties dialog box?  In the Explorer window, right-click the application icon and select Properties.  Application properties include the application's name and description. The application Properties dialog box shows the name and description specified at the time the application was created.  Use the application Properties dialog box to change the general properties of an application.  See also  Options in the application Properties dialog box  About project settings  "
  },
  {
    "id": 58,
    "title": "Options in the application Properties dialog box",
    "url": "227948.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the application Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Name  This is the name specified on the New tab of the New/Open Machine Edition Application dialog box when the application was created. It cannot be changed here.  Description  This is the description specified on the New tab of the New/Open Machine Edition Application dialog box when the application was created. You can change this description at any time  See also  About application properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 59,
    "title": "About project settings",
    "url": "67336.htm",
    "text": "How do I open the Project Settings dialog box?  In the System folder in the Explorer window, double-click the Project Settings icon.  Project settings determine the general appearance of your runtime application, such as the size and position of the project window and whether a title bar appears in the project window.  Tip:  Project settings affect how your graphic displays look. Specify project settings before you create graphic displays.  See also  Specify project settings (General tab)  Specify project settings (Runtime tab)  Specify project settings (Inactivity tab)  Scale the graphic displays  Set up runtime navigation  ",
    "keywords": {
      "project setting": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 60,
    "title": "Specify project settings (General tab)",
    "url": "67109.htm",
    "text": "On the General tab of the Project settings dialog box, specify the size of the project window and the application type.  To specify window appearance and application type  On the General tab of the Project settings dialog box, select the project window size from the list.  Tip:  If there are unsaved changes in the Alarm setup editor, or if the application exceeds the PanelView Plus 7 Standard application and Compact Machine Edition application limits, do not convert the application to a PanelView Plus 7 Standard application or a Compact Machine Edition application.  The following project screen size settings cannot be used to create a 6.0 or 6.10 ME runtime application:  PanelView Plus 400/600 (320x240)  PanelView Plus Compact 1000 (640x480)  PanelView Plus Compact 400/600 (320x240)  See also  About project settings  Options on the General tab  Specify project settings (Runtime tab)  Scale graphic displays  PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications and Compact Machine Edition applications  "
  },
  {
    "id": 61,
    "title": "Options on the General tab",
    "url": "227951.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Project Settings dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Project window size  Select the size of the project window. Usually, the project is designed to completely fill the runtime terminal&#8217;s screen. Therefore, set the project window size to the resolution of the terminal in pixels.  The project window size property is used for all Replace type graphic displays. If you change the window size after you have created graphic displays, you have the option of scaling the graphic displays.  If you choose to scale graphic displays, all Replace and On Top displays are resized, and the objects in them are scaled to fit the new size. Changing the project settings back to their original settings may not return the project to its original condition. If you may need to restore the application, be sure you make a backup copy before scaling.  If you choose not to scale displays after changing the window size, Replace displays will be resized, but objects in the displays will remain the same size and in the same position as before. On Top displays are not resized.  Width  If you select the project window size Custom size, type the width of the window in pixels.  Height  If you select the project window size Custom size, type the height of the window in pixels.  See also  Specify project settings (General tab)  Runtime terminal resolutions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 62,
    "title": "Runtime terminal resolutions",
    "url": "227952.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the resolutions of the various runtime terminals.  For this terminal or monitor  Select this project window size  PanelView Plus 400 or 600  PanelView Plus Compact 400 or 600  PanelView Plus 6 400 or 600  PanelView Plus 6 Compact 400 or 600  320x240  PanelView Plus 7 Standard 4\" Wide  480x272  PanelView Plus 700 or 1000  PanelView Plus CE 700H or 1000H  PanelView Plus Compact 1000  PanelView Plus 6 700 or 1000  PanelView Plus 6 Compact 1000  PanelView Plus 7 Standard 6\" or 7\"  PanelView Plus 7 Performance 6\" or 7\"  640x480  PanelView Plus 7 Standard 9\" Wide  PanelView Plus 7 Performance 9\" Wide  800x480  PanelView Plus 1250  PanelView Plus CE 1250H  PanelView Plus CE 1200P, 1200M, or 1200W  PanelView Plus 6 1250  PanelView Plus 7 Standard 10\"  PanelView Plus 7 Performance 10\"  800x600  PanelView Plus 1500  PanelView Plus CE 1500H  PanelView Plus CE 1500P, 1500M, or 1500W  PanelView Plus 6 1500  PanelView Plus 7 Standard 15\"  PanelView Plus 7 Performance 15\"  1024x768  MobileView  PanelView Plus 7 Standard 12\" Wide  PanelView Plus 7 Performance 12\" Wide  1280x800  PanelView Plus CE 1700M  PanelView Plus 7 Performance 19\"  1280x1024  PanelView Plus CE 2000M  1600x1200 (Custom size)  See also  Specify project settings (General tab)  Options on the General tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 63,
    "title": "Specify project settings (Runtime tab)",
    "url": "67340.htm",
    "text": "On the Runtime tab of the Project Settings editor, specify the window elements that are shown at runtime, such as title bar and minimize button.  If you make changes to the title bar or border settings after you have created graphic displays, you will have the option of scaling the displays.  To specify window runtime settings  On the Runtime tab of the Project settings dialog box, select the check boxes beside the window elements that you want the window to show at runtime.  (Optional) Specify a project window position.  (Optional) Select the Enable auto logout check box to enable auto logout.  Specify how many minutes the terminal must be inactive before the automatic logout occurs. Enter a value (1-32767) or select a tag.  (Optional) Specify a graphic display to open after the automatic logout.  Tip:  When the advanced automatic logout is enabled, the automatic logout settings on the Runtime tab of the Project Settings dialog box are disabled, but the controls are preserved.  See also  About project settings  Options on the Runtime tab  Specify project settings (Inactivity tab)  Scale graphic displays  Log in and out  "
  },
  {
    "id": 64,
    "title": "Options on the Runtime tab",
    "url": "225872.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Runtime tab of the Project Settings dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Title bar  Select this check box to show the name of the project in the title bar at the top of the window. Type the name in the box below the check box.  If you select this option, the window border is automatically shown with the title bar.  Border  Select this check box to show a border around the project window.  If you show the title bar, this option is selected automatically.  You can clear the Border check box only if the Title bar check box is clear.  Control box  Select this check box to show a control menu box in the upper left corner of the window. The user can click the control box to show the control menu, which contains options for manipulating the window.  If you select this option, a Close button appears at the right end of the title bar.  This option is available only if you select Title bar.  Minimize button  Select this check box to show a Minimize button at the right end of the title bar. The Minimize button reduces the window to an icon.  This option is available only if you select Title bar and Control box.  Project window position  Type the number of pixels from the top left corner of the screen to position the project window. If the project window occupies the whole screen, accept the default values of 0.  Enable auto logout  Select this check box to log out the current user automatically after the terminal is inactive for a specified period of time.  Inactivity period   Specify the length of time (in minutes) the terminal must be inactive before the current user is automatically logged out and the default user is logged in.  Return to graphic on logout  Select this check box to enable the application to navigate to a specified display when the current user is automatically logged out.  If auto logout is active and this check box is clear, when the current user is logged out, the display was open at logout remains open.  Parameter file - Select this option if the display's runtime parameter values will be provided by a parameter file. Click the Browse button (...) to open the Component Browser, and select the parameter file to run when the display navigation event is triggered. Parameter File option is selected by default.  Parameter list - Select this option if the display's runtime parameter values will be provided by a parameter list. Click the Browse button (...) to open the Tag Browser, and select the tag, or tags to add to the list.  See also  Specify project settings (Runtime tab)  Parameter files and parameter lists  "
  },
  {
    "id": 65,
    "title": "Specify project settings (Inactivity tab)",
    "url": "224196.htm",
    "text": "On the Inactivity tab of the Project Settings editor, configure advanced automatic logout settings.  Tip:  When the advanced automatic logout is enabled, the automatic logout settings on the Runtime tab of the Project Settings dialog box are disabled, but the controls are preserved.  To set up advanced automatic logout settings  On the Inactivity tab of the Project settings dialog box, select the Enable advanced inactivity actions check box.  Select the Log out the current user after an inactivity period check box.  Specify how many minutes the terminal must be inactive before the automatic logout occurs. Enter a value (1-32767) or select a tag.  (Optional) Specify a graphic display to open after the automatic logout. Specify how many minutes the terminal must be inactive before the application navigates to the specified display. Enter a value (0-32767) or select a tag.  (Optional) Specify a numeric tag to read the remaining inactivity time in seconds.  (Optional) Specify a numeric tag to stop the inactivity actions from occurring indefinitely, and reset the inactivity timeout.  See also  Options on the Inactivity tab  Specify project settings  "
  },
  {
    "id": 66,
    "title": "Options on the Inactivity tab",
    "url": "225869.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Inactivity tab of the Project Settings dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Enable advanced inactivity actions  Select this check box to enable the advanced inactivity actions.   If this check box is clear, the other properties on the Inactivity tab are disabled.  Log out the current user after an inactivity period  Select this check box to log out the current user automatically after the terminal is inactive for a specified period of time.  If this check box is clear, the current user will not be logged out automatically.  Inactivity period in minutes  Specify the length of time (in minutes) the terminal must be inactive before the current user is automatically logged out and the default user is logged in.  Literal value - Select this option and enter the time (1-32767 minutes) for the inactivity period.  Controlled by tag - Select this option and assign a tag to specify the inactivity period in minutes. Click the Browse button (...) to open Tab Browser and select the tag.  Parameter and expression are not supported.  Navigate to a display after an additional delay  Select this check box to enable the application to navigate to a selected display when the terminal is inactive for a specified period of time since the current user is automatically logged out.  If auto logout is active and this check box is clear, when the current user is logged out, the display was open at logout remains open.  Additional inactivity period in minutes  Specify the length of time for which the terminal is inactive since the current user is automatically logged out before the application navigates to a specified display. Specify Literal value (0-32767 minutes), or Controlled by tag.  Navigate to display  Select the display that the application navigates to after the additional inactivity period.  Parameter file - Select this option if the display's runtime parameter values will be provided by a parameter file. Click the Browse button (...) to open the Component Browser, and select the parameter file to run when the display navigation event is triggered. Parameter File option is selected by default.  Parameter list - Select this option if the display's runtime parameter values will be provided by a parameter list. Click the Browse button (...) to open the Tag Browser, and select the tag, or tags to add to the list.  Inactivity time remaining (secs)  (Optional) Specify a numeric tag to read the remaining inactivity time in seconds. Click the browse button to open the Tag Browser and select the tag.  Parameter and expression are not supported.  Inhibit inactivity actions  (Optional) Specify a numeric tag to stop the inactivity actions from occurring indefinitely, and reset the inactivity timeout.  Click the browse button to open the Tag Browser and select the tag.   Parameter and expression are not supported.  If the tag value is zero, the inactivity actions are enabled.  If the tag value is non-zero, the inactivity actions are disabled.  See also  Specify project settings (Inactivity tab)  Parameter files and parameter lists  "
  },
  {
    "id": 67,
    "title": "Configure startup settings",
    "url": "67098.htm",
    "text": "Use the Startup editor to specify which project components to start at runtime.  To configure startup settings  In the System folder in the Explorer window, double-click the Startup icon.  Select the project components to use when the project starts.  Specify the data log model to use, if any.  Specify startup and shutdown macros, if any.  Specify up to five graphic displays to open at startup, along with a parameter file or list, if any. If there are no graphic displays, or if no display is selected in the list, an empty window is shown at startup.  Click OK to confirm the configuration and exit from the Startup editor.  See also  Create a Machine Edition application  Options in the Startup editor  ",
    "keywords": {
      "startup setting": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 68,
    "title": "Configure startup settings",
    "url": "78504.htm",
    "text": "Use the Startup editor to specify which project components to start at runtime.  To configure startup settings  In the System folder in the Explorer window, double-click the Startup icon.  Select the project components to use when the project starts.  Specify the data log model to use, if any.  Specify startup and shutdown macros, if any.  Specify up to five graphic displays to open at startup, along with a parameter file or list, if any. If there are no graphic displays, or if no display is selected in the list, an empty window is shown at startup.  Click OK to confirm the configuration and exit from the Startup editor.  See also  Create a Machine Edition application  Options in the Startup editor  ",
    "keywords": {
      "startup setting": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 69,
    "title": "Configure startup settings",
    "url": "78503.htm",
    "text": "Use the Startup editor to specify which project components to start at runtime.  To configure startup settings  In the System folder in the Explorer window, double-click the Startup icon.  Select the project components to use when the project starts.  Specify the data log model to use, if any.  Specify startup and shutdown macros, if any.  Specify up to five graphic displays to open at startup, along with a parameter file or list, if any. If there are no graphic displays, or if no display is selected in the list, an empty window is shown at startup.  Click OK to confirm the configuration and exit from the Startup editor.  See also  Create a Machine Edition application  Options in the Startup editor  ",
    "keywords": {
      "startup setting": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 70,
    "title": "Options in the Startup editor",
    "url": "227958.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options in the Startup editor.  Options  Descriptions  Alarms  Select this check box to monitor tag values for alarm conditions and show alarm entries at run time. When an alarm goes off, the [ALARM] graphic display opens to notify the operator. You can use the predefined [ALARM] graphic display, or create your own graphic display containing an alarm banner or alarm list object.  Use the Alarm Setup editor to specify which display to use and the tag to monitor for trigger values.  Audit trail  Select this check box to use audit trail at run time.  Use the Audit Trail Setup editor to specify the audit trail settings.  Information messages  Select this check box to show information messages at run time. You can use the predefined [INFORMATION] graphic display, or create your own graphic display containing an information message display object. When a trigger value changes from zero to non-zero, the message display opens.  Specify the messages and their trigger values in the Information Messages editor. Specify the display to use and the tag to monitor for trigger values in the Information Setup editor.  Data logging  Select this check box to start data logging when the application starts. Specify a data log model from the list of configured models.  Startup macro  Select this check box to use a macro to assign initial values to tags when the project starts. Specify a macro from the list of configured macros.  Shutdown macro  Select this check box to use a macro to assign values to tags when the project stops. Specify a macro from the list of configured macros.  Initial graphic displays  Select this check box to choose up to five graphic displays that open when the application starts, from the All optional displays list. If there are no graphic displays, or if no display is selected from the list, an empty window is shown at startup.  Up and Down  Click the Up or Down button to sort the selected displays. The displays will be shown at startup by the sequence specified in the Selected displays box.  Parameter file  Select this option to use a parameter file to replace tag placeholders on the initial display. Click the Browse button (...) to open the Component Browser and select the parameter file to run when the initial graphic display opens.  Parameter list  Select this option to use a parameter list to replace tag placeholders on the initial display. Click the Browse button to open the Tag Browser and select the tag or tags to add to the list.  See also  Configure startup settings  Parameter files and parameter lists  "
  },
  {
    "id": 71,
    "title": "Configuration Mode",
    "url": "67408.htm",
    "text": "The FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box is the first dialog box that appears:  When FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station starts  In a terminal's Configuration Mode  See also  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station  Go to Configuration Mode on a runtime terminal at startup  Go to Configuration Mode on a runtime terminal when an application is running  ",
    "keywords": {
      "configuration mode": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 72,
    "title": "Go to Configuration Mode on a terminal at startup",
    "url": "227959.htm",
    "text": "You can go to Configuration Mode on a terminal at startup.  To go to Configuration Mode on a terminal at startup  If you have not configured your terminal to start FactoryTalk View ME Station automatically, start the terminal and then start FactoryTalk View ME Station.  If you have not configured your terminal to start an application automatically, start the terminal. The FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box opens.  Tip:  PanelView Plus terminals start FactoryTalk View ME Station automatically at startup.  See also  Configuration Mode  Go to Configuration Mode on a terminal when an application is running  Start an application automatically  "
  },
  {
    "id": 73,
    "title": "Go to Configuration Mode on a terminal when an application is running",
    "url": "227960.htm",
    "text": "You can go to Configuration Mode on a terminal when an application is running.  To go to Configuration Mode on a terminal when an application is running  Put a Goto Configure Mode button on a display. Open the display and press the button.  See also  Configuration Mode  Go to Configuration Mode on a terminal at startup  "
  },
  {
    "id": 74,
    "title": "About global connections",
    "url": "67159.htm",
    "text": "Global connections are connections that apply to your entire runtime application. Global connections allow the data source to control or interact with your application at runtime.  Use global connections to:  Update the date and time at the data source using the runtime terminal&#8217;s date and time.  Update the date and time on the runtime terminal using the data source date and time.  Notify the data source of the current display number.  Notify the data source when a display is printed.  Change the display on the runtime terminal remotely (from the data source).  Close On Top displays  Apply parameter files or parameter lists to the tag placeholders in the changed displays.  Print the current display from the data source.  Run up to five macros from the data source, when a tag or expression result changes.  Set the intensity of the backlight on a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal.  Monitor runtime RAM usage for troubleshooting purposes.  The use of each global connection is optional.  See also  Set up global connections  Causes of run-time errors for global connections  data source  ",
    "keywords": {
      "global connection": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 75,
    "title": "Set up global connections",
    "url": "67125.htm",
    "text": "To set up global connections  In the Explorer window, double-click the Global Connections icon to open the editor.  In the Maximum update rate (seconds) box, select the maximum rate at which the data source will supply data to the global connections. The rate applies to all the tags specified in Remote connections, including tags used in Remote expressions. At run time, all tags are updated when global connections are started, regardless of the update rate.  Click on the Date and Time tab to set the date and time connections. You can assign any of them, or leave them unassigned. In the Date and time output interval (seconds) box, type the frequency with which to update date and time values from the terminal to the data source.  Year  Day of Week  Month  Day of Month  Hour  Minute  Second  Remote Date and Time  Remote Year  Remote Month  Remote Day of Month  Remote Hour  Remote Minute  Remote Second  Click on the Display tab to assign the following connections. The first two connections are write connections for sending values from the application to the data source. Assign a tag to these connections:  Replace Display Number  Display Print Active  The second two connections are read connections for sending values from the data source to the application. Assign a tag or expression to these connections :  Remote Display Number  Remote Display Print  The next two connections are read connections for closing On Top displays. Assign a tag or an expression to these connections:  Close an On Top Display  Close All On Top Displays  The parameter connections are optional read connections to be used for displays that use parameters when they open. Assign a tag or expression to these connections:  Parameter file  Use Parameter List  Parameter Tag #1 to 10  Tip:  If you have selected the Use Parameter List connection on the Display tab of the Global Connections editor, be sure to fill in the Parameter Tag connections in numeric order. For example, do not assign Parameter Tag #1 and Parameter Tag #3 without assigning Parameter Tag #2.  Click the Macro tab to define up to five expressions or tags, each of which can run a corresponding macro. These connections are optional. You can use none, some, or all of them.  Remote Macro1-5  Click the Backlight tab to set the intensity of the backlight on the run-time terminal.  Remote Backlight Intensity  Tip:  This global connection does not work on the Windows 7 SP1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1, Windows Server 2012, or Windows Server 2016 operating system.  Click the Memory tab to set connections that allow an operator to monitor RAM usage at run time. Assign a tag to the following connections:  MERuntime RAM Usage  Total RAM Usage  Available RAM  Assign a tag or expression to this connection:  Remote RAM Usage  Click OK to save your changes and close the editor.  Tip:  To unassign a control, select the control in the Tag or Expression column and do one of the following:  Press Backspace on your keyboard repeatedly to remove the assignment one character at a time.  Double-click twice to highlight the text, and then press Delete or Backspace to remove the entire assignment at once.  See also  About global connections  Set up global connections - Date and Time tab  Set up global connections - Display tab  Global connections - Macro tab  Global connections - Backlight tab  Global connections - Memory tab  Causes of run-time errors for global connections  data source  "
  },
  {
    "id": 76,
    "title": "Set up global connections - Date and Time tab",
    "url": "67127.htm",
    "text": "To set up global Date and Time connections  In the Explorer window, double-click the Global Connections icon to open the editor.  In the Global Connections editor, click the Date and Time tab.  In the Date and time output interval (seconds) box, type the frequency with which to update date and time values from the terminal to the data source.  If a maximum update rate has not been selected, in the Maximum update rate (seconds) box, select the maximum rate at which the data source will supply data to the global connections.  You can assign any of the following date and time connections, or leave them unassigned. Assign a tag to the local connections. Assign a tag or an expression to the remote connections. The values of all of the assigned local connections are updated at the date and time output interval specified in step 3.  Year  Day of Week  Month  Day of Month  Hour  Minute  Second  Remote Date and Time  Remote Year  Remote Month  Remote Day of Month  Remote Hour  Remote Minute  Remote Second  Tip:  To unassign a control, select the control in the Tag or Expression column and do one of the following:  Press Backspace on your keyboard repeatedly to remove the assignment one character at a time.  Double-click twice to highlight the text, and then press Delete or Backspace to remove the entire assignment at once.  Options  Date and time output interval (seconds)  Type the frequency with which to update date and time values from the terminal to the data source.  Maximum update rate  From the drop-down list, select the rate at which to update tag values from the data source.  Columns  Connection  This column shows the name of the connection.  Tag or expression  Type the tag name or expression associated with the connection.  Tag button (...)  Click this button to open the Tag Browser and choose a tag instead of typing the tag name in the Tag or Expression column  Exprn button (...)  Click this button to open the Expression editor and create an expression instead of typing the expression in the Tag or Expression column.  See also  About global connections  Set up global connections - Display tab  Global connections - Macro tab  Global connections - Backlight tab  Global connections - Memory tab  Causes of run-time errors for global connections  data source  "
  },
  {
    "id": 77,
    "title": "Year",
    "url": "67131.htm",
    "text": "The application writes the 4-digit value corresponding to the year in the terminal&#8217;s internal clock to this control (for example, 2006).  See also  Set up global connections - Date and Time tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 78,
    "title": "Day of Week",
    "url": "67133.htm",
    "text": "The application writes the value corresponding to the day of the week (1-7, with 1 being Sunday) to this control from the terminal's internal clock.  See also  Set up global connections - Date and Time tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 79,
    "title": "Month",
    "url": "67135.htm",
    "text": "The application writes the value corresponding to the month (1-12) to this control from the terminal's internal clock.  See also  Set up global connections - Date and Time tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 80,
    "title": "Day of Month",
    "url": "67137.htm",
    "text": "The application writes the value corresponding to the day of the month (1-31) to this control from the terminal's internal clock.  See also  Set up global connections - Date and Time tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 81,
    "title": "Hour",
    "url": "67139.htm",
    "text": "The application writes the value corresponding to the hour (0-23) to this connection from the terminal's internal clock.  See also  Set up global connections - Date and Time tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 82,
    "title": "Minute",
    "url": "67141.htm",
    "text": "The application writes the value corresponding to the minute (0-59) to this control from the terminal's internal clock.  See also  Set up global connections - Date and Time tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 83,
    "title": "Second",
    "url": "67143.htm",
    "text": "The application writes the value corresponding to the second (0-59) to this control from the terminal's internal clock.  See also  Set up global connections - Date and Time tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 84,
    "title": "Remote Date and Time",
    "url": "67145.htm",
    "text": "You can assign an analog or digital tag or an expression to this control. The application reads the value of this control and, when it changes from zero to a non-zero value, updates the application terminal&#8217;s internal clock with the values in the Remote Year, Remote Month, Remote Day of Month, Remote Hour, Remote Minute, and Remote Second controls. Only the time elements to which controls are assigned are used to update the internal clock.  See also  Set up global connections - Date and Time tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 85,
    "title": "Remote Year",
    "url": "67147.htm",
    "text": "When the Remote Date and Time control is triggered, the application reads the value corresponding to the year (0000-9999 or 00-99) at the data source and updates the application terminal&#8217;s internal clock.  Assign an analog tag or an expression.  See also  Set up global connections - Date and Time tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 86,
    "title": "Remote Month",
    "url": "67149.htm",
    "text": "When the Remote Date and Time control is triggered, the application reads the value corresponding to the month (1-12) at the data source and updates the application terminal&#8217;s internal clock.  Assign an analog tag or an expression.  See also  Set up global connections - Date and Time tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 87,
    "title": "Remote Day of Month",
    "url": "67151.htm",
    "text": "When the Remote Date and Time control is triggered, the application reads the value corresponding to the day of the month (1-31) at the data source and updates the application terminal&#8217;s internal clock.  Assign an analog tag or an expression.  See also  Set up global connections - Date and Time tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 88,
    "title": "Remote Hour",
    "url": "67153.htm",
    "text": "When the Remote Date and Time control is triggered, the application reads the value corresponding to the hour (0-23) at the data source and updates the application terminal&#8217;s internal clock.  Assign an analog tag or an expression.  See also  Set up global connections - Date and Time tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 89,
    "title": "Remote Minute",
    "url": "67155.htm",
    "text": "When the Remote Date and Time control is triggered, the application reads the value corresponding to the minute (0-59) at the data source and updates the application terminal&#8217;s internal clock.  Assign an analog tag or an expression.  See also  Set up global connections - Date and Time tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 90,
    "title": "Remote Second",
    "url": "67157.htm",
    "text": "When the Remote Date and Time control is triggered, the application reads the value corresponding to the second (0-59) at the data source and updates the application terminal&#8217;s internal clock.  Assign an analog tag or an expression.  See also  Set up global connections - Date and Time tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 91,
    "title": "Set up global connections - Display tab",
    "url": "67163.htm",
    "text": "To set up global Display connections  In the Explorer window, double-click the Global Connections icon to open the editor.  In the Global Connections editor, click the Display tab.  If a maximum update rate has not been selected, in the Maximum update rate (seconds) box, select the maximum rate at which the data source will supply data to the global connections.  The first two connections are write connections for sending values from the application to the data source. Assign a tag to these connections:  Replace Display Number  Display Print Active  The second two connections are read connections for sending values from the data source to the application. Assign a tag or expression to these connections:  Remote Display Number  Remote Display Print  The next two connections are read connections for closing On Top displays. Assign a tag or an expression to these connections:  Close an On Top Display  Close All On Top Displays  The parameter connections are optional read connections to be used for displays that use parameters when they open. Assign a tag or expression to these connections:  Parameter file  Use Parameter List  Parameter Tag #1 to 10  Tip:  To unassign a control, select the control in the Tag or Expression column and do one of the following:  Press Backspace on your keyboard repeatedly to remove the assignment one character at a time.  Double-click twice to highlight the text, and then press Delete or Backspace to remove the entire assignment at once.  Do not assign an expression consisting of a constant to the Remote Display Number. If you do, the display whose number matches the constant opens and can never be closed or changed.  If a remote display print is in progress, the application ignores subsequent print requests from the data source until the display print has been processed.  Options  Maximum update rate  From the drop-down list, select the rate at which to update tag values from the data source.  Columns  Connection  This column shows the name of the connection.  Tag or expression  Type the tag name or expression associated with the connection.  Tag button (...)  Click this button to open the Tag Browser and choose a tag instead of typing the tag name in the Tag or Expression column.  Exprn button (...)  Click this button to open the Expression editor and create an expression instead of typing the expression in the Tag or Expression column.  See also  Set up global connections  Set up global connections - Date and Time tab  Global connections - Macro tab  Global connections - Backlight tab  Global connections - Memory tab  Causes of run-time errors for global connections  data source  Parameter file and parameter list  "
  },
  {
    "id": 92,
    "title": "Replace Display Number",
    "url": "67165.htm",
    "text": "Assign an analog tag. The application writes the display number of the current graphic display to this connection. Only the numbers of Replace displays can be written to this connection.  If you want to use global connections, you must make sure that each display has its own unique number.  See also  Set up global connections - Display tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 93,
    "title": "Display Print Active",
    "url": "67167.htm",
    "text": "Assign a digital tag to this control to notify the data source when a display is printing. The application writes 1 to this control when a screen print begins, and 0 when the application is finished printing. When the value changes to zero the printer may still be printing buffered data.  See also  Set up global connections - Display tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 94,
    "title": "Remote Display Number",
    "url": "67169.htm",
    "text": "The application reads the value of the connection and opens the graphic display whose display number corresponds to the value. If the value is zero, the operator has control of display changes. If the value does not match any display's number, the application sends a message to Diagnostics.  If you assign this connection, remote display changes occur whether or not the logged-in user has security access to a given display.  If you want to use global connections, you must make sure that each display has its own unique number.  Assign an analog tag or an expression to this connection. Do not assign an expression consisting of a constant to this connection. If you do, the display whose number matches the constant opens and can never be closed or changed.  Tip:  If the remote screen change opens too many On Top displays, the application may run out of memory, or so many tags may be on scan that performance will suffer.  See also  Set up global connections - Display tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 95,
    "title": "Remote Display Print",
    "url": "67171.htm",
    "text": "Assign an analog or digital tag or an expression to this control to allow the data source to trigger the printing of graphic displays. The application reads the value of the control and prints the currently visible display when the value changes from zero to a non-zero value. Everything on the screen is printed, including the current display, pop-up windows, and any visible background applications.  Turn off the screen saver if you assign this control.  While a display is being printed, subsequent print requests from the data source are ignored until the display print is finished.  See also  Set up global connections - Display tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 96,
    "title": "Close All On Top Displays",
    "url": "67175.htm",
    "text": "When this connection value is True, the application will close all replaceable On Top displays whose display number is not 0. Non-replaceable On Top displays will not be closed.  If you want to use global connections, you must make sure that each display has its own unique number.  A read only connection. Assign a digital tag or an expression to this connection.  See also  Set up global connections - Display tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 97,
    "title": "Close an On Top Display",
    "url": "67173.htm",
    "text": "The application reads the value of the connection and closes the graphic display whose display number corresponds to the value. If you want to use global connections, you must make sure that each display has its own unique number.  Replace displays and non-replaceable On Top displays cannot be closed by a remote display change. If the display number represents a Replace display or a non-replaceable On Top display, the close action is ignored and an error message is logged to Diagnostics.  A read only connection. Assign an analog tag to this connection.  See also  Set up global connections - Display tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 98,
    "title": "Parameter File",
    "url": "67527.htm",
    "text": "Assign a string tag or an expression to the connection. The application reads the tag or expression value to identify the parameter file for the display specified by the Remote Display Number connection.  If the Parameter File connection is assigned, and the Use Parameter List connection and Parameter Tag # connections are not assigned, the display will open using this parameter file.  If this connection is assigned, and the Use Parameter List connection evaluates to 0, the display will open using this parameter file.  If the Use Parameter List connection and one or more of the Parameter Tag # connections are assigned, the display will open using the tags assigned to the Parameter Tag # connections.  See also  Set up global connections - Display tab  Remote Display Number  "
  },
  {
    "id": 99,
    "title": "Use Parameter List",
    "url": "67529.htm",
    "text": "Assign a digital tag. The application reads the value of the tag to determine whether a parameter file or a parameter list will be used to provide parameters to the display when it opens at run time. If the tag value is 0, or if this connection is not assigned, the display will open using the parameter file specified in the Parameter File connection. If the tag value is 1, the display will open using the tags defined in the Parameter Tag # connections.  If neither this connection nor the Parameter File connection is assigned, but one or more of the Parameter Tag # connections are assigned, the display will open using the tags assigned to the Parameter Tag # connections.  Only 10 parameter tags can be assigned in this editor. If a display needs more than 10 parameters, use the Parameter File connection.  See also  Set up global connections - Display tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 100,
    "title": "Parameter Tag #1-10",
    "url": "67531.htm",
    "text": "Assign a tag to any or all of these connections. When the display specified by the Remote Display Number connection opens at run time, if the Use Parameter List connection is assigned and evaluates to a non-zero value, the tag values assigned here will replace the tag placeholders in the display.  You can type a string in the Tag or expression column, or click on the Tag button to open the Tag Browser and select a tag. The string can be any part of a tag name or&nbsp;folder name, for any kind of tag. When the display opens, the placeholder will be replaced with whatever part of the tag name you specified.  See also  Set up global connections - Display tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 101,
    "title": "Set up global connections - Macro tab",
    "url": "67533.htm",
    "text": "To set up global macro connections  In the Explorer window, double-click the Global Connections icon to open the editor.  In the Global Connections editor, click the Macro tab.  If a maximum update rate has not been selected, in the Maximum update rate (seconds) box, select the maximum rate at which the data source will supply data to the global connections.  These connections allow you to define up to five expressions or tags, each of which can run a corresponding macro.  Remote Macro1-5  Tip:  To unassign a control, select the control in the Tag or Expression column and do one of the following:  Press Backspace on your keyboard repeatedly to remove the assignment one character at a time.  Double-click twice to highlight the text, and then press Delete or Backspace to remove the entire assignment at once.  Options  Maximum update rate  From the drop-down list, select the rate at which to update tag values from the data source.  Columns  Connection  This column shows the name of the connection.  Tag or expression  Type the tag name or expression associated with the connection.  Tag button (...)  Click this button to open the Tag Browser and choose a tag instead of typing the tag name in the Tag or Expression column  Exprn button (...)  Click this button to open the Expression editor and create an expression instead of typing the expression in the Tag or Expression column.  See also  Set up global connections  Set up global connections - Date and Time tab  Set up global connections - Display tab  Global connections - Backlight tab  Global connections - Memory tab  Causes of run-time errors for global connections  data source  Remote Macro1-5  "
  },
  {
    "id": 102,
    "title": "Remote Macro1-5",
    "url": "67535.htm",
    "text": "Assign these controls to allow the data source to control when Macros 1 through 5 are run.  At run time, when the tag value, or the result of the expression, assigned to Remote Macro1 (Remote Macro2, etc.) changes from a zero to a non-zero value, or from a non-zero value to a new non-zero value, the macro named Macro1 (Macro2, etc.) will be run.  See also  Set up global connections - Macro tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 103,
    "title": "Set up global connections - Backlight tab",
    "url": "67537.htm",
    "text": "To set up the Backlight global connection  In the Explorer window, double-click the Global Connections icon to open the editor.  If a maximum update rate has not been selected, in the Maximum update rate (seconds) box, select the maximum rate at which the data source will supply data to the global connections.  A single connection allows you the option of setting the intensity of the backlight on the run-time terminal. Assign a tag or an expression to this connection.  Remote Backlight Intensity  This global connection is intended for the PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, or PanelView Plus CE terminals; it does not work on the Windows 7 SP1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1, Windows Server 2012, or Windows Server 2016 operating system.  Tip:  To unassign a control, select the control in the Tag or Expression column and do one of the following:  Press Backspace on your keyboard repeatedly to remove the assignment one character at a time.  Double-click twice to highlight the text, and then press Delete or Backspace to remove the entire assignment at once.  Options  Maximum update rate  From the drop-down list, select the rate at which to update tag values from the data source.  Columns  Connection  This column shows the name of the connection.  Tag or expression  Type the tag name or expression associated with the connection.  Tag button (...)  Click this button to open the Tag Browser and choose a tag instead of typing the tag name in the Tag or Expression column  Exprn button (...)  Click this button to open the Expression editor and create an expression instead of typing the expression in the Tag or Expression column.  See also  About global connections  Set up global connections - Date and Time tab  Set up global connections - Display tab  Global connections - Macro tab  Global connections - Memory tab  Causes of run-time errors for global connections  data source  Remote Backlight Intensity  "
  },
  {
    "id": 104,
    "title": "Remote Backlight Intensity",
    "url": "67539.htm",
    "text": "Assign a tag, expression, or direct reference to this read-only connection. At run time, the application reads the value at the data source and sets the backlight to a percentage of its maximum intensity corresponding to the value. For example, if the value of the connection is 75, the backlight will be set to 75 percent of its maximum intensity. This value will override the terminal's own backlight intensity setting.  If the value of the connection is 100 or greater, the backlight will be set to its maximum intensity. If the value is zero or less than zero, the backlight is set to its minimum value, that is, it will be turned off. The lowest intensity at which the backlight is still on is one percent.  Setting the backlight to zero percent is not recommended, for two reasons:  This setting overrides the PanelView Plus terminal's screen saver. A user may try to bring the terminal out of screen saver mode, but will see nothing on the display because the backlight is turned off.  This setting is retained when the terminal is turned off. When the terminal is turned on again, the display will remain dark.  In both these cases, it may seem that the terminal is damaged or in an error state, when it is really fully functional.  Tip:  The PanelView Plus terminal includes a backlight temperature control that overdrives the backlight when below 10@C (50@F) and reduces intensity to at least 40 percent when above 55@C (13@F). That control will override the setting assigned in this global connection.  This connection does not work on a Windows 7 SP1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1, Windows Server 2012, or Windows Server 2016 operating system.  See also  Set up global connections - Backlight tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 105,
    "title": "Set up global connections - Memory tab",
    "url": "67541.htm",
    "text": "To set up global Memory connections  In the Explorer window, double-click the Global Connections icon to open the editor.  If a maximum update rate has not been selected, in the Maximum update rate (seconds) box, select the maximum rate at which the data source will supply data to the global connections.  The following connections allow an operator to monitor the amount of RAM being used by Machine Edition Station at run time. Assign a tag to the first three connections; assign a tag or an expression to the Remote RAM Usage connection.  Tip:  To unassign a control, select the control in the Tag or Expression column and do one of the following:  Press Backspace on your keyboard repeatedly to remove the assignment one character at a time.  Double-click twice to highlight the text, and then press Delete or Backspace to remove the entire assignment at once.  Options  Maximum update rate  From the drop-down list, select the rate at which to update tag values from the data source.  Columns  Connection  This column shows the name of the connection.  Tag or expression  Type the tag name or expression associated with the connection.  Tag button (...)  Click this button to open the Tag Browser and choose a tag instead of typing the tag name in the Tag or Expression column  Exprn button (...)  Click this button to open the Expression editor and create an expression instead of typing the expression in the Tag or Expression column.  See also  About global connections  Set up global connections - Date and Time tab  Set up global connections - Display tab  Global connections - Macro tab  Global connections - Backlight tab  Causes of run-time errors for global connections  data source  "
  },
  {
    "id": 106,
    "title": "ME Runtime RAM Usage",
    "url": "67543.htm",
    "text": "When this connection is assigned, and the Remote RAM Usage connection is set to a non-zero value, the application writes the kilobytes of RAM being used by the runtime application to this connection, once every 10 seconds.  A read-write connection. Assign an analog tag.  See also  Set up global connections - Memory tab  Remote RAM Usage  "
  },
  {
    "id": 107,
    "title": "Total RAM Usage",
    "url": "67545.htm",
    "text": "When this connection is assigned, and the Remote RAM Usage connection is set to a non-zero value, the application writes the total kilobytes of RAM being used by all the processes running on the terminal, to this connection, once every 10 seconds.  A read-write connection. Assign an analog tag.  See also  Set up global connections - Memory tab  Remote RAM Usage  "
  },
  {
    "id": 108,
    "title": "Available RAM",
    "url": "67547.htm",
    "text": "When this connection is assigned and the Remote RAM Usage connection is set to a non-zero value, the application writes the amount of unused RAM on the run-time terminal (in kilobytes) to the Available RAM connection once every 10 seconds.  A read-write connection. Assign an analog tag.  See also  Set up global connections - Memory tab  Remote RAM Usage  "
  },
  {
    "id": 109,
    "title": "Remote RAM Usage",
    "url": "67549.htm",
    "text": "When this connection is set to a non-zero value, the MERuntime RAM Usage, Total RAM Usage, and Available RAM usage connections are active.  A read-only connection. Assign a tag or an expression.  See also  Set up global connections - Memory tab  ME Runtime RAM Usage  Total RAM Usage  Available RAM  "
  },
  {
    "id": 110,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for global connections",
    "url": "67161.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs errors about global connections to diagnostics if:  The Display Number or Remote Display Number control contains a non-existent display number.  The time or date received from the data source is invalid.  The data source triggers a display print but the printer is not responding.  The data source triggers a display print but the run-time system does not have enough memory to capture the display image.  Any of the expressions assigned to the connections are invalid or contain invalid assignment statements.  An expression has been defined to run a macro, and the macro does not exist.  The application logs a warning if the operator attempts to change graphic displays when display changes are controlled remotely (by the data source).  See also  About global connections  Set up global connections  data source  "
  },
  {
    "id": 111,
    "title": "Language switching",
    "url": "67657.htm",
    "text": "Language switching allows you to deploy an application in different languages. At design time, you can design an application with user-defined text strings in up to 40 languages. At run time, you can switch between up to 20 application languages dynamically using a language switch button for each language.  The user-defined text strings that support language switching are those that an operator sees in an application at run time, including:  Text objects created in graphic displays and global object displays  Graphic and global object display titles specified in the Display Settings dialog box  Labels and captions on graphic displays, including alarm trigger labels  Embedded time and date and numeric variables  Alarm, local, and information messages  Captions and shorter messages in the dialog boxes of User Management buttons and the Electronic Signature dialog box  Text strings defined in the extended properties of controller tags  Tip:  Make sure that you define the controller default language when multi-language is enabled.  If the requested language is not available in the controller, the application shows the default language defined and enabled in the HMI.  If the HMI default language is not defined in the controller, the application uses the controller default language or the single language that does not have an ID.   See also  Prepare an application for language switching  Switch application languages at design time  ",
    "keywords": {
      "language switching": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 112,
    "title": "Prepare an application for language switching",
    "url": "67665.htm",
    "text": "Before you can switch application languages, you need prepare the application for language switching.  To prepare an application for language switching  In Windows, set up locale formatting and the fonts that the application is to support.  Create, import, or open the application and specify a language in the Language box on the New tab. This language becomes the application's default language and can be used to show otherwise undefined text strings.  Use the Language Configuration dialog box to add languages to the application. Any one of these languages can be designated as the default language.  Specify the text strings for the application's graphic objects and messages.  Create a language switch button for each language that the application will switch to, and assign a language to each button.  Tip:  The captions on language switch buttons change when the operator switches languages at run time. To make the buttons identifiable besides the caption, you can color-code the buttons, or add flags to identify the language associated with each button.  Use the Language Configuration dialog box to export the text strings from the application to a Unicode text file or a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.  Translate the text strings in the exported file into each of the languages the application will use at run time.  Use the Language Configuration dialog box to import the edited file for each language into the application.  Open the application and switch languages using the Change Application Language dialog box to check the layout of the translated text.  Create the runtime application, specifying the startup language and the languages that the operator can switch to.  See also  Language switching  Windows locale formatting and fonts  Language Configuration dialog box  Export text strings  Switch application languages at design time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 113,
    "title": "Windows locale formatting and fonts",
    "url": "67667.htm",
    "text": "To switch application languages, you may need set up Windows locale formatting and fonts.  Locale formatting  Windows locale formatting determines how the application shows time, date, and floating point values at design time and run time.  It is strongly recommended that you do not edit the default locale settings for the following reasons:  You can only modify the formatting for the current user locale. The formatting for all other locales is set to their default values. For example, if you select English (United States) as the current user locale, modify its formats, and then select another locale, the modifications will be lost.  You can only modify settings for the current user. If more than one user will be logged in, they will all have to make the same modifications.  You can only modify locale settings for languages that are installed.  Tip:  Locale formatting is supported on PanelView Plus 7 and PanelView Plus 6 terminals, but is not supported on PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminals.  When the application language is switched, the default locale settings for the new language are used even if that language is not installed.  Fonts  Windows font support features allow an application to show characters that are not supported by the application's original font. If the application text strings are exported and translated into Chinese, for example, and then re-imported, the translated text will show in the Chinese font without the necessity of changing the font selection in every instance in the application.  Font support is enabled automatically when you install a language or language group. Once you install the East Asian language group, for example, fonts for these languages, including Chinese, are supported. If font support is disabled, any characters that the font cannot show will appear as undefined \"?\" characters.  Tip:  On Windows 7 SP1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1, Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server 2016 operating systems, some raster fonts, those with a .fon extension, and fonts with a symbol script, (for example, Wingdings), do not show characters from other fonts.  FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station supports font linking for PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, and PanelView Plus CE terminals. Use the Font Linking menu in FactoryTalk View ME Station Terminal Settings options to select a base font and to link another font to the base font. The base font and the linked font must be loaded on the terminal.  If your runtime application uses fonts that are not installed with FactoryTalk View ME Station, you will need to either copy the fonts manually to the internal card of the terminals, or, if the font is too large for the terminal's memory, (as is, for example,&nbsp;the Simsun font), you can copy the font onto an external Compact Flash card. If an external Flash card is used, it will need to be plugged into the terminal at all times while the application is running.  See also  Language switching  Prepare an application for language switching  Export text strings  Import text strings  "
  },
  {
    "id": 114,
    "title": "Set a registry key for font linking",
    "url": "67888.htm",
    "text": "To be sure that font linking works in Windows 7 Professional SP1, it is recommended that you use Tahoma or Microsoft Sans Serif fonts in your FactoryTalk View Machine Edition application.  If you want to use language switching with another font, you will have to add a registry key for that font. You can link the base font to all the fonts that are linked to Tahoma or Microsoft Sans Serif.  The registry key that is set using these directions only exists when fonts that support font linking are installed. When you install a new Windows language or language group, part of the process installs the fonts and enables font linking.  To link a base font to multiple fonts  From the Start menu, select Run.  In the Run dialog box, type regedt32 and press OK.  Select the window titled HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE on Local Machine.  Navigate to C:\\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\Windows NT\\CurrentVersion\\Fonts.  In the right pane, select the value for Tahoma or Microsoft San Serif.  From the Edit menu, select MultiString.  In the MultiString Editor, select the contents and copy (Ctrl+C).  From the Edit menu, select Add Value.  In the Add Value dialog box, in the Value Name box, type the name of the font that you want to set up font linking for (for example, Arial).  In the Data Type box, select REG_MULTI_SZ and press OK.  In the MultiString Editor, paste (Ctrl+V) the values you copied for Tahoma or Microsoft San Serif and then click OK.  The next time you restart the computer, the new font will be linked to all the fonts that Tahoma or Microsoft San Serif are linked to.  See also  Set up Windows for language switching  Language configuration (General tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 115,
    "title": "Turn on multiple language support in a graphic library",
    "url": "67732.htm",
    "text": "The graphic libraries installed with FactoryTalk View are language neutral by default. This means that the objects in graphic libraries show text strings in whatever language they were shipped, regardless of the language an application is opened in, or its default language. To switch languages for the text strings in a graphic library, you need turn on multiple language support in a graphic library.  To turn on multiple language support in a graphic library  In the Graphics folder, open a graphic library under Libraries.  Right-click the graphic library display and select Display Settings.  On the General tab of the Display Settings dialog box, select the Support Multiple Languages check box.  Tip:  When you save the library display, all strings that can be switched are saved in the current application language. When you do this, only the text strings for the current language will be shown. Text strings in any other language will appear as undefined strings. The strings will have to be exported, translated, and then imported before they will show in other languages.  When you create a graphic library display, the Support Multiple Languages check box is selected by default. If you want the display to be language neutral, clear the Support Multiple Languages check box.  See also  Language switching  Prepare an application for language switching  "
  },
  {
    "id": 116,
    "title": "Language Configuration dialog box",
    "url": "67687.htm",
    "text": "How do I open the Language Configuration dialog box?  In FactoryTalk View Studio, from the Tools menu, select Languages.  Use the General tab of the Language Configuration dialog box to:  Add or remove languages to the list available to the application. You can add up to 40 languages to your application at design time. At run time, up to 20 languages can be available for language switching.  Export or import language strings  Change the default language for the application  Specify whether to show undefined strings as the default language strings or as undefined string \"?\" characters  The language list shows the languages added to the application, first with the language name and then with the language RFC1766 identification code.  The format for an RFC1766 identifier is: <languagecode2>-<country/regioncode2>  where <languagecode2> is a lower case two-letter code, and <country/regioncode2> is an upper case two-letter code. For example, the RFC1766 code for U.S. English is en-US. The RFC1766 name is not case sensitive.  The languages in the list are supported for language switching. Be sure that these languages are installed on the development and run-time computers before trying to switch languages.  The language in the list that has a check mark beside it is the default language.  The application's current language is shown below the list window. This is the language selected when the application was opened.  Tip:  When you save an application component at design time, the text strings associated with it, such as captions, local messages, and alike, are saved in the application's current language.  See also  Language switching  Prepare an application for language switching  Options in the Language Configuration dialog box  Select a default language  "
  },
  {
    "id": 117,
    "title": "Options in the Language Configuration dialog box",
    "url": "243192.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options in the Language Configuration dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Add...  Click the Add button to open the Add Language dialog box where you can select a language to add to the application.  Remove  Click the Remove button to remove the selected language from the list. A prompt appears asking you to verify that you want to delete the selection. When you click Yes, the selection is removed from the language list.  If a language is the current language or the default language for the application, you cannot remove the language.  Export...  Click the Export button to open the Export Operation dialog box of the String Import Export Wizard.  Import...  Click the Import button to open the Import Operation dialog box of the String Import Export Wizard.  Set As Default  To change the application's default language, select a language and click this button. A check mark appears beside the default language.  Display undefined strings using the default language  Select this check box to show undefined strings for any language in the default language. If this check box is clear, undefined strings will be shown as single question mark characters (?). If a text string is undefined in the default language, it is shown as a single question mark.  If you have specified that undefined strings will be shown in the default language, when you export strings to an Excel spreadsheet, undefined strings are exported as\"**UNDEFINED**\". However, when you export strings to a Unicode file, the default language strings will be exported for undefined strings.  See also  Language Configuration dialog box  Add a language to an application  Change the default language for an application  Export Operation dialog box  Import Operation dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 118,
    "title": "Add a language to an application",
    "url": "67689.htm",
    "text": "Use the Add button on the General tab of the Language Configuration dialog box to add a language to an application.  The language list in the Add Language dialog box shows the languages supported by the design-time computer running FactoryTalk View Studio.  To add a language to an application  In the Language Configuration dialog box, click Add.  In the Add Language dialog box, select the language to be added to the application and click OK.  The Add Language dialog box closes and the selected language is added to the list on the General tab.  Tip:  The languages in the Add Language dialog box are those supported by the operating system of the computer. They are not necessarily installed on the computer. If the selected language is not installed, a warning message appears in the Diagnostics List at the bottom of the Explorer.  See also  Language switching  Windows locale formatting and fonts  Language Configuration dialog box  Change the default language for an application  Select a default language for an RSView ME 4.00 application that supports multiple languages  "
  },
  {
    "id": 119,
    "title": "Default language",
    "url": "67659.htm",
    "text": "When you create an application, the language you select in the New/Open Machine Edition Application dialog box becomes the default language for the application. Any undefined strings in the application can be shown in the default language rather than as question marks.  When you open an existing application that supports only one language, that language is the default language.  When you open an existing application that supports multiple languages, the language you select to open the application in becomes the application's current language. Once the application is opened, you can change the default language in the Language Configuration dialog box.  When you open an existing application created with RSView Studio Machine Edition 4.00 in FactoryTalk View Studio, if the application supports multiple languages, you are prompted to select a default language for the application.  See also  Language switching  Change the default language for an application  Select a default language for an RSView ME 4.00 application that supports multiple languages  Show undefined text strings in the default language  "
  },
  {
    "id": 120,
    "title": "Change the default language for an application",
    "url": "254766.htm",
    "text": "When an application is opened in FactoryTalk View Studio, you can change the default language.  To change the default language for an application  In the Language Configuration dialog box, select the language that you want to set as the default language.  Click the Set As Default button.  The check mark is shown beside the language you selected.  Tip:  If you change the default language, and if you are filtering the trigger labels for alarm objects, you will have to manually re-specify the trigger labels for every object that filters alarms.  When you save an application's components at design time, the text strings associated with them, such as captions, local messages, and alike, are saved in the application's current language.  See also  Language Configuration dialog box  Default language  "
  },
  {
    "id": 121,
    "title": "Select a default language for an RSView ME 4.00 application that supports multiple languages",
    "url": "67661.htm",
    "text": "When you open an RSView ME 4.00 application that supports multiple languages in FactoryTalk View Studio, you are prompted to select a default language for the application in the Default Language Prompt dialog box.  Tip:  If you open an RSView ME 4.00 application that supports only one language, that language becomes the default language and this dialog box is not shown.  If you open an RSView ME application of a version earlier than 4.00, the language you select to open the application in becomes the default language and this dialog box is not shown.  To select a default language for an RSView ME 4.00 application that supports multiple languages  From the list in the Default Language Prompt dialog box, select the language that is to be the default language for the application.  Tip:  The language shown in the Default Language Prompt dialog box is the language that you selected to open the application in. The list shows all the languages supported by the application.  Click OK.  You do not need to create new message files for each language when you open the RSView ME 4.00 application in FactoryTalk View Studio. By selecting a default language, you can use your existing message files containing all the messages in multiple languages.  See also  Language switching  Prepare an application for language switching  Add a language to an application  Default language  Switch message languages using the CurrentLanguage() function  "
  },
  {
    "id": 122,
    "title": "Show undefined text in the default language",
    "url": "254773.htm",
    "text": "You may need show the undefined text in the default language instead of question marks.  To show undefined text in the default language  In the Language Configuration dialog box, select the Display undefined strings using the default language check box.  Click OK.  See also  Language switching  Language Configuration dialog box  Default language  Change the default language for an application  "
  },
  {
    "id": 123,
    "title": "Export Operation dialog box",
    "url": "67675.htm",
    "text": "Use the Export Operation dialog box to:  export text strings for the language selected in the Language Configuration dialog box to a Unicode text file  export text strings for all supported languages to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet  See also  Prepare an application for language switching  Language Configuration dialog box  Options in the Export Operation dialog box  Export text strings to a Unicode text file  Export text strings to an Excel spreadsheet  "
  },
  {
    "id": 124,
    "title": "Options in the Export Operation dialog box",
    "url": "254878.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options in the Export Operation dialog box.  Table Heading  Table Heading  Export strings for <RFC1766 Name> to one or more Unicode text files  Click this button to export the application's text strings for the language selected in the Language Configuration dialog box to a Unicode text file.  Export strings for all languages to an Excel spreadsheet  Click this button to export the text strings for all the languages supported by the application to an Excel spreadsheet.  Optimize duplicate strings  Select this check box to make sure the text strings that appear in the application more than once are written to the spreadsheet only once instead of every time they occur.  Open exported file  Select this check box to open the exported file in Excel as soon as the export operation is completed.  See also  Export Operation dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 125,
    "title": "Export text strings to a Unicode text file",
    "url": "254869.htm",
    "text": "You can export the text strings of a single language from an application to a single tab-delimited text (*.txt) file in Unicode format. In the exported text file, the strings can be translated into another language.  To export text strings in an application to a Unicode text file  In the Language Configuration dialog box, select the language to be exported and click Export.  In the Export Operation dialog box, select Export strings for <RFC1766 Name> to one or more Unicode text files.  Select a destination for the exported text strings.  Tip:  The default name for an exported Unicode text file is:  <application name>_<server name>_<RFC1766 identifier>.txt  For example, Brewery_Brewery_en_US.txt.  If you specified that undefined strings will be shown in the default language, when you export strings to a Unicode file, the default language strings will be exported for undefined strings.  If you didn't specify that undefined strings will be shown in the default language, an undefined string will be exported to the Unicode text file as a single question mark (?). If the question mark is not replaced with a text string during the translation process, the question mark will be imported into the application.  If your application includes a password button, when exporting to a Unicode file, text descriptions and error messages for the Change Password dialog box are also exported. However, these strings do not switch languages at run time.  See also  Prepare an application for language switching  Show undefined text in the default language  Export Operation dialog box  Export text strings to an Excel spreadsheet  Select a destination for the exported text strings  "
  },
  {
    "id": 126,
    "title": "Edit an exported Unicode text file in Excel",
    "url": "67673.htm",
    "text": "You can edit an exported Unicode text file in Microsoft Excel (recommended).  To edit an exported Unicode text file in Excel  Open Excel, and from the File menu, select Open.  In the Open dialog box, make sure that All Files is selected, select the file you are going to edit, and click Open. The Text Import Wizard opens.  In Step 1 of the Text Import Wizard, select the following options and click Next:  Choose the file type that best describes your data: Delimited  Start import at row: 1  File origin: Windows (ANSI)  In Step 2, select the following options and click Next:  Delimiters the data must contain: Tab (make sure the other check boxes are cleared.)  Treat consecutive delimiters as one: clear the check box  In Step 3, for Column data format, select General.  Click Finish.  The first seven lines of the Unicode file explain what you can and cannot change in the file.  See also  Prepare an application for language switching  Language Configuration dialog box  Export text strings to a Unicode text file  Save the edited Unicode text file in Excel  Edit an exported Unicode text file in Notepad  "
  },
  {
    "id": 127,
    "title": "Save the edited Unicode text file in Excel",
    "url": "255074.htm",
    "text": "When you complete editing an exported Unicode text file in Excel, save the file in Excel.  To save the edited Unicode text file in Excel  In Excel, from the File menu, select Save As.  Make sure that Unicode Text (*.txt) is selected in the Save as type box and click Save.  When the message appears stating that the file may contain features that are not compatible with Unicode Text and asking if you want to keep the workbook in this format, click Yes. This saves the file but does not close it.  Close the file in Excel. When asked whether you want to save the changes, click Save. You can then save the file using its original name or specify a new name.  When prompted with the same message described in Step 3, click Yes.  Tip:  If a Unicode text file has been opened and saved in Excel, and you open the file in Notepad, the double quotes surrounding the string definitions will have been removed for most strings.  String definitions containing embedded double quotes or other characters that Excel treats as special characters (such as commas) will be enclosed within double quotes. Any embedded double quotes will have been converted to a pair of double quotes. The FactoryTalk View String Import Export Wizard imports all of these correctly.  See also  Export text strings to an Excel spreadsheet  Edit an exported Unicode text file in Excel  Edit an exported Unicode text file in Notepad  Import text strings from a Unicode text file  "
  },
  {
    "id": 128,
    "title": "Edit an exported Unicode text file in Notepad",
    "url": "255073.htm",
    "text": "You can edit an exported Unicode text file in Notepad.  To edit an exported Unicode Text File in Notepad  Open the file in Notepad. The first seven lines of the file explain what cannot be edited. The text strings that can be edited are enclosed in double quotes.  Make the changes required to translate the strings.  From the File menu, select Save As. Make sure that Text Documents [*.txt] is selected in the Save as type box, and Unicode is selected in the Encoding box. Save the file using its original name or specify a new name.  Close the file and Notepad.  See also  Prepare an application for language switching  Export Operation dialog box  Export text strings to a Unicode text file  Edit an exported Unicode text file in Excel  "
  },
  {
    "id": 129,
    "title": "Export text strings to an Excel spreadsheet",
    "url": "254870.htm",
    "text": "If an application supports multiple languages, you can export the text strings for all the application languages to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet (*.xls). The following versions of Microsoft Excel are supported:  Excel 2000  Excel 2002  Excel 2003  Excel 2007  Excel 2010  Excel 2013  To export text strings in an application to an Excel spreadsheet  In the Language Configuration dialog box, click Export.  In the Export Operation window, select Export strings for all languages to an Excel spreadsheet.  If you select the Optimize duplicate strings check box, the strings that appear repeatedly in the application appear only once in the spreadsheet, and need only be translated or edited once. When the file is imported, each instance of a duplicate string is replaced by the same edited or translated string.  If you select the Open exported file check box, the exported file opens as soon as the export is finished.  Select a destination for the exported text strings.  Tip:  The default name for an exported Excel file is:  <application name>_<export version number>.xls  For example, Brewery_1.xls  The first time you export strings to Excel, the export version number is 1. For each subsequent export from the same application, the number increases by 1.  When you export strings to an Excel spreadsheet, undefined strings are exported as \"**UNDEFINED**\". If this is not replaced with a text string during the translation process, an undefined string will be imported into the application.  For the instructions on opening a text file in Microsoft Excel, see \"Set up language switching\" in the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition User's Guide.  See also  Export Operation dialog box  Export text strings to a Unicode text file  Select a destination for the exported text strings  Tips for exporting text strings  Text strings that cannot be exported or imported  "
  },
  {
    "id": 130,
    "title": "An Excel spreadsheet of exported application text strings",
    "url": "255071.htm",
    "text": "In the Excel spreadsheet, the text strings for each application language appear in a separate column. Any strings that have not been translated appear as UNDEFINED. Once the undefined strings have been translated into their respective languages, the strings for all the languages can be re-imported into the application.  If you do not want strings for a language translated, delete that column.  An Excel spreadsheet cell has a theoretical limit of 1,024 characters that can be shown, but this may in fact be less, depending on the font used and the display characteristics. If any single item in your application's exported text exceeds this limit, (an alarm message, for example), the cell for that text appears blank in the exported Excel spreadsheet. For more information, refer to the specifications and limits for the version of Excel you use at https://products.office.com.  See also  Export text strings to an Excel spreadsheet  Edit an exported Unicode text file in Excel  "
  },
  {
    "id": 131,
    "title": "Select a destination for the exported text strings",
    "url": "67733.htm",
    "text": "In the Select Destination window, specify the location folder that will hold the exported string file.  To select a destination folder for the exported text strings  In the Select Destination dialog box, click Finish to accept the default folder shown in the text window, or browse for a new folder and click Finish to complete the operation.  See also  Export text strings to a Unicode text file  Export text strings to an Excel spreadsheet  "
  },
  {
    "id": 132,
    "title": "Tips for exporting text strings",
    "url": "67677.htm",
    "text": "The following tips are for exporting text strings from an application:  The default folder for exported text strings is \\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\Strings.  If you are exporting text strings for translation, see \"Set up language switching\" in the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition User's Guide for format and file schema information that describes which parts of the text file may be translated and which parts must remain the way they are when exported. This is necessary to ensure that the file will import correctly into a FactoryTalk View application.  If a component (such as a display) is being edited and has not been saved when you begin the export operation, you will be prompted to save it. If you click Yes, the edits will be saved, the component will be closed, and then the export will continue. If you click No, the edits will not be saved, but the component will be closed and the export will continue.  If you cancel the export while it is in progress, any files that were created are not deleted, but their contents might not be complete.  If you are using FactoryTalk Security to secure applications at design time, you must have Common/Read and Common/Write security permissions for the application to export strings.  If a Text object has its Size to Fit property set to True, the object's size may differ for different languages.  See also  Prepare an application for language switching  Export text strings to a Unicode text file  Export text strings to an Excel spreadsheet  Import Operation dialog box  Text strings that cannot be exported or imported  "
  },
  {
    "id": 133,
    "title": "Import Operation dialog box",
    "url": "67683.htm",
    "text": "Use the Import Operation dialog box to:  import text strings for the language selected in the Language Configuration dialog box from a Unicode text file  import text strings for all the application supported languages from an Excel spreadsheet  See also  Language Configuration dialog box  Export Operation dialog box  Options in the Import Operation dialog box  Import text strings from a Unicode text file  Import text strings from an Excel spreadsheet  "
  },
  {
    "id": 134,
    "title": "Options in the Import Operation dialog box",
    "url": "255219.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options in the Import Operation dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Import strings from a Unicode text file into <RFC1766 Name>  Select this option to import strings for the language selected in the Language Configuration dialog box from a Unicode text file into the application.  Import strings from an Excel spreadsheet into all application languages defined in the spreadsheet  Select this option to import text strings for all the application supported languages defined in the spreadsheet from an Excel spreadsheet into the application.  See also  Import Operation dialog box  Import text strings from a Unicode text file  Import text strings from an Excel spreadsheet  "
  },
  {
    "id": 135,
    "title": "Import text strings from a Unicode text file",
    "url": "67669.htm",
    "text": "You can import text strings from a Unicode text file into an application.  Prerequisites  Make sure that the application that you are going to import text into is not being edited or modified.  Create a backup of the text currently in your application by exporting it. This allows you to restore the original text to the application if an error occurs while importing, or if you cancel the import before it is complete.  To import text strings from a Unicode text file  In the Language Configuration dialog box, select the language to import and click Import.  In the Import Operation dialog box, select Import strings from a Unicode file into<RFC1766>.  Select a file to import text strings from.  See also  Import Operation dialog box  Select a file to import text strings from  Tips for importing text strings  Troubleshooting for the Unicode text file import operation  Text strings that cannot be exported or imported  "
  },
  {
    "id": 136,
    "title": "Import text strings from an Excel spreadsheet",
    "url": "255077.htm",
    "text": "You can import text strings from an Excel spreadsheet into an application.  Prerequisites  Make sure that the application that you are going to import text into is not being edited or modified.  Create a backup of the text currently in your application by exporting it. This allows you to restore the original text to the application if an error occurs while importing, or if you cancel the import before it is complete.  To import text strings from an Excel spreadsheet  In the Language Configuration dialog box, click Import.  In the Import Operation dialog box, select Import strings from an Excel spreadsheet into all application languages defined in the spreadsheet.  Select a file to import text strings from.  Tip:  An import from Excel spreadsheet will import every row in the spreadsheet until it reaches a blank row and every column until it reaches a blank column. Anything after that will not be imported.  See also  Export text strings to an Excel spreadsheet  Select a file to import text strings from  Tips for importing text strings  Troubleshooting for the Excel spreadsheet import operation  Text strings that cannot be exported or imported  "
  },
  {
    "id": 137,
    "title": "Select a file to import text strings from",
    "url": "67679.htm",
    "text": "In the Select File window of the String Import Export wizard, select the file to import text strings from into the current application.  To select a file to import text strings from  Click the Browse button to browse for a folder and select a file, and then click Open.  Click Finish.  See also  Export text strings to a Unicode text file  Export text strings to an Excel spreadsheet  Import text strings from a Unicode text file  Import text strings from an Excel spreadsheet  "
  },
  {
    "id": 138,
    "title": "Tips for importing text strings",
    "url": "255079.htm",
    "text": "The following tips are for importing text strings into an application:  If you cancel the import before it is complete, any text strings that were changed are not restored to their original values. To restore the original text, import a backup copy of the original text file.  Do not attempt to import a multi-line text string for a property that supports only a single string. If you do, the new line or carriage return character (\\n) will be shown as unreadable characters.  If you copy an entire graphic library that supports multiple languages into the Displays folder, all text strings are copied with the library.  If you are using FactoryTalk Security to secure applications at design time, you must have Common/Read and Common/Write security permissions for the application to import text strings.  You do not have to check every graphic display in an application to verify that text was imported correctly. If errors occurred while importing text, they are shown automatically from a log file called ImportErrors.txt. Each time errors occur while importing text into an application, the error file is overwritten.  If errors occurred while importing text strings, or if the import was canceled, a message appears in the diagnostics list and in the diagnostics log file.   See also  Import text strings from a Unicode text file  Import text strings from an Excel spreadsheet  Troubleshooting for the Unicode text file import operation  Troubleshooting for the Excel spreadsheet import operation  Excel spreadsheet checking orders during import  "
  },
  {
    "id": 139,
    "title": "Troubleshooting for the Unicode text file import operation",
    "url": "67671.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the common error messages and their remedies while importing a Unicode text file. x is the line number in the text file.  Error messages  Descriptions  File \"FileName\", Line x. ComponentType is not a valid component type for the application. The string was not imported.  This error is logged if the component type has been modified in the text file.  Open the text file and correct the text for the component type.  File \"FileName\", Line x. ComponentName is not a valid component for the application. The string was not imported.  This error is logged if the component name has been modified in the text file.  Open the text file and correct the text for the component name.  File \"FileName\", Line x. The string reference must be an unsigned long integer value between 1 and 4294967295. The string was not imported.  This error is logged if the string reference number has been modified in the text file, and the new string reference number is invalid.  Open the backup text file and copy the correct text string reference number to the translated text file.  File \"FileName\", Line x. The string was not used in the application and was not imported.  This error is logged if:  The string reference number has been modified in the text file, and the new string reference number is not used in the application. Open the backup text file and copy the correct the string reference number into the translated text file.  The object was deleted from the application after the text was exported. If this is correct, ignore the error.  File \"FileName\", Line x. The string definition must be contained within double quotes. The string was not imported.  This error is logged if the translated string definition includes embedded double quotes, but the string definition itself was not enclosed in double quotes.  Open the text file and enclose all string definitions containing embedded double quotes in double quotes. For example, the string definition, Start \"Backup motor\", must be enclosed in double quotes like this: \"Start \"Backup motor\"\".  File \"FileName\", Line x. Invalid line format!  This error is logged if a line in the import file does not contain all the component name or string reference number fields. The import continues with the next line in the file.  Open the backup text file and copy the missing fields to the translated text file.  Unable to open {FileName.txt}. None of the strings from this file were imported.  This error is logged if the text file could not be opened.  Make sure that you can open the selected text file in Notepad or Microsoft Excel.  See also  Export text strings to a Unicode text file  Edit an exported Unicode text file in Excel  Edit an exported Unicode text file in Notepad  Import text strings from a Unicode text file  "
  },
  {
    "id": 140,
    "title": "Troubleshooting for the Excel spreadsheet import operation",
    "url": "67681.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the common error messages and their remedies while importing an Excel spreadsheet.  Error messages  Descriptions  Errors occurred while importing strings from <ExcelFile.xls>.  One or more errors have occurred in the import operation. This message is logged to FactoryTalk Diagnostics.  String import was interrupted by the user.  The import operation has been interrupted or cancelled by the user. This message is logged to FactoryTalk Diagnostics and to the file ImportErrors.txt.  When any of the following errors occur, the message \"Errors occurred while importing strings from <ExcelFile.xls>\" is logged to FactoryTalk Diagnostics, and the error message is logged to ImportErrors.txt.  Unable to import strings as Microsoft Excel is not installed.  This message is logged to ImportErrors.txt when the user clicked the Finish button in the Select File step of the String Import Export Wizard, but does not have Microsoft Excel installed on the local computer. The import will not be started.  <RFC1776> does not exist in this application. No strings for this language were imported.  The language associated with one of the columns in the spreadsheet does not exist in the application. None of the strings for the language will be imported into the application, but the import will continue.  <Component Type> is not valid. No strings for this component were imported.  The component type of a string in the spreadsheet is not valid. None of the strings for the languages associated with the string definition will be imported into the application, but the import will continue.  <Server Name> does not exist in this application. No strings for this server were imported.  The server name for a string definition in the spreadsheet does not exist in the application. None of the strings for the languages associated with the string definition will be imported into the application, but the import will continue.  <Server Name> is unavailable. No strings for this server were imported.  The server name for a string definition exists in the application, but the HMI server being referenced is not available. None of the strings for the languages associated with the string definition will be imported into the application, but the import will continue.  <Server Name>_<Component Type>_<Component Name> does not exist in this application. No strings for this component were imported.  The component name for a string in the spreadsheet does not exist in the application. None of the strings for the languages associated with the string definition will be imported into the application, but the import will continue.  <Server Name>_<Component Type>_<Component Name>_<Description> does not exist in this application. No strings for this description were imported.  The description for a string in the spreadsheet does not exist in the application. None of the strings for the languages associated with the string definition will be imported into the application, but the import will continue.  <Optimized Duplicate String Reference> is pointing to a string that does not exist in the spreadsheet. No strings with this optimized duplicate string reference were imported.  An optimized duplicate string references a string that does not exist in the spreadsheet. The string will not be imported into the application, but the import will continue.  Unable to save <DisplayName>. No strings for this component name were imported.  A graphic display or global object cannot be saved, but the import will continue.  Unable to import strings as the currently logged in user does not have write access to the application.  The currently logged in user does not have Common\\Write security access to the application. No strings for the application will be imported.  Unable to import one or more strings as one or more cells were not formatted as text or numeric values.  A server name cell, a component type cell, a component name cell, a description cell, or a reference column, is not formatted as a string or numeric value. None of the language-switchable strings on that row will be imported into the application, but the import will continue.  Unable to import one or more strings as one or more header cells were not formatted as text or numeric values.  A header cell is not formatted as a string or numeric value. The import will be stopped.  See also  An Excel spreadsheet of exported application text strings  Import text strings from an Excel spreadsheet  Select a file to import text strings from  Excel spreadsheet checking orders during import  "
  },
  {
    "id": 141,
    "title": "Excel spreadsheet checking orders during import",
    "url": "255080.htm",
    "text": "When importing an Excel spreadsheet to an application, the import operation checks the Excel spreadsheet in the following order:  Language columns whose language does not exist in the application  Component types that are invalid  Server names that do not exist in the application  Component names that do not exist in the application  Descriptions that do not exist in the application  Duplicate string references pointing to strings that do not exist in the spreadsheet  See also  An Excel spreadsheet of exported application text strings  Import text strings from an Excel spreadsheet  Troubleshooting for the Excel spreadsheet import operation  "
  },
  {
    "id": 142,
    "title": "Text strings that cannot be exported or imported",
    "url": "254874.htm",
    "text": "You cannot export or import the following text strings:  text that is part of the graphical user interface of the FactoryTalk View Studio, or Machine Edition software, such as system error messages, text in dialog boxes, or menus. These are shown in the same language as the operating system, and are translated when FactoryTalk View is localized.  text that can be shown at run time, but is used to operate the application, such as the file names of graphic displays  text that you add to an application, such as tag descriptions and string constants in expressions  information from system tags, which is shown in the same language as the operating system  strings in recipe files  For more information about what can be exported and imported, see \"Set up language switching\" in FactoryTalk View Machine Edition User's Guide.  See also  Export text strings to a Unicode text file  Export text strings to an Excel spreadsheet  "
  },
  {
    "id": 143,
    "title": "Paste without localized language strings",
    "url": "80930.htm",
    "text": "The Paste without localized strings command enables you to remove all other language strings from an object except the current language in use in the FactoryTalk View Studio design environment. When you paste an object using this command, the other language strings are set to UNDEFINED. Except for this difference, this command functions the same as the Paste command.  For example, if you copy a momentary push button from an application that has been translated into several languages, and you use the Paste without localized strings command to paste the push button into a different application that has been opened in English, only the English string is kept and the other language strings are set to UNDEFINED.  To paste without localized strings  Select the object that contains the localized strings you want to remove.  From the Edit menu, select Copy.  From the Edit menu, select Paste without localized strings.  See also  Export Operation dialog box  Import Operation dialog box  Localized language strings  "
  },
  {
    "id": 144,
    "title": "Localized language strings",
    "url": "81101.htm",
    "text": "Localized language strings are stored for text properties of objects (for example, captions) and multistate objects (for example, momentary push buttons).  See also  Language switching  Language Configuration dialog box  Paste without localized language strings  "
  },
  {
    "id": 145,
    "title": "Switch application languages at design time",
    "url": "227229.htm",
    "text": "If an application is designed with multiple languages, you may need to switch application languages at design time to check the layout of translated text.  To switch application languages at design time  From the Application menu, select Change Application Language, or on the toolbar, click @.  In the Change Application Language dialog box, select the language you want to change to.  Tip:  The language list shows the languages added to the application, first with the language name and then with the language RFC1766 identification code.  Click OK.  The text in the following dialog boxes will be changed to the selected language:  Alarm Setup  Display  Global objects  Information Messages  Local Messages  If any of the dialog boxes is opened and has unsaved changes, a message prompts you to save the changes.  See also  Change Application Language dialog box  Language Configuration dialog box  Prepare an application for language switching  "
  },
  {
    "id": 146,
    "title": "Change Application Language dialog box",
    "url": "227230.htm",
    "text": "How do I open the Change Application Language dialog box?  In FactoryTalk View Studio, from the Application menu, select Change Application Language, or click the Change Application Language icon on the toolbar.  Use the Change Application Language dialog box to switch application languages at design time. The text in the following dialog boxes will be changed to the selected language:  Alarm Setup  Display  Global objects  Information Messages  Local Messages  See also  Switch application languages at design time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 147,
    "title": "Switch message languages in RSView Machine Edition 4.00",
    "url": "67663.htm",
    "text": "FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Version 5.00 and later supports language switching for local messages, information messages, and alarm messages.  Language switching in RSView Enterprise Machine Edition Version 4.00 did not include local messages, information messages, and alarm messages. When an application switched languages, these messages would still appear in the application's base language, that is, the language in which they were originally written.  Therefore, some users used an offset in the trigger value and an expression to display messages in different languages from a single message file.  To show local, information, and alarm messages in multiple languages using the CurrentLanguage() function  Create a message file containing versions of all the messages in all the languages in the application. For local messages, this file is created in the Local Messages editor, for information messages, in the Information Messages editor, and for alarm messages, in the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor.  Assign trigger values to each of the messages, using a specific offset for each language. For example, if there are 10 English messages, these would be assigned the trigger values 1 to 10. These messages would be translated into the next language, French, for example, and the French messages would be assigned values with an offset of 100 from the English messages. You would then have an English message with a trigger value of 1 and the corresponding French message with a trigger value of 101, an English message with a trigger value of 2 and a corresponding French message with a trigger value of 102, and so on. Additional languages could be added, with, for example, translated German messages having trigger values of 301 to 310, Chinese having values of 401 to 410, and so on.  Create a tag with trigger values for each of the messages in the base language.  Create an expression in the message display object using the CurrentLanguage() function to detect what the current language is, and, based on what language is detected, to apply the appropriate offset to the tag being used to trigger the messages. For example:  If CurrentLanguage() = \"en-US\" then tag1 else if CurrentLanguage() = \"fr-FR\" then tag1 + 100 else endif  At run time, the expression is evaluated. If the current language is English (United States), then the value of Tag1 would be used to trigger the English messages. If the operator presses a language switch button to make the current language French, the offset of 100 would be added to the value of Tag1 and would trigger messages in French.  If your RSView Machine Edition Version 4.0 application is using this method, you do not need to create new message files for each language when your application is opened in FactoryTalk Machine Edition Version 5.0 or later. By selecting a default language, you can continue to use your existing message file containing all the messages in multiple languages.  See also  About language switching  Select a default language  "
  },
  {
    "id": 148,
    "title": "Set up run-time navigation",
    "url": "67123.htm",
    "text": "The way the operator moves between the graphic displays that make up a project is referred to as navigation. To enable the operator to navigate, you can create:  A goto display button and link a graphic display to it. When the operator presses the button, the specified display opens.  A return to display button. When the operator presses the button, the current display closes and the previous display opens.  A close display button. When the operator presses the button, the current display closes.  A display list selector so the operator can select the displays to open.  You can also automatically control display changes using the Remote Display Number control. Assign this control in the Global Connections editor, and configure the data source to change the control value and open displays as required. You can only open Replace displays remotely.  You can use the Remote Display Number control and display navigation objects in the same project. However, if the control is a non-zero value, the display navigation objects are disabled.  Tip:  To enable an operator to print a graphic display at run time, create a display print button in the display.  See also  View alarms and messages at run time  View tag data at run time  Enter numeric and string values at run time  Change tag values at run time  Set up global connections  ",
    "keywords": {
      "navigation": "100",
      "run-time": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 149,
    "title": "Login and logout",
    "url": "67342.htm",
    "text": "For security to be effective, all users must have an Account ID to log in. Set up the IDs in the User Accounts dialog box.  To allow users to log in, create a login button in a graphic display that all users have access to, such as the startup graphic display.  To allow users to log out, create a logout button in a graphic display that all users have access to, such as the startup graphic display. When a user logs out, the user becomes a default user. Be sure that the default user privileges are carefully controlled.  You can also set up your run-time terminal to log out the current user automatically after the terminal has been inactive for a specified period of time. The automatic logout is independent of the security configuration of FactoryTalk user accounts or Windows Account security.  To set up automatic logout, specify the auto logout settings on the Runtime tab or the Inactivity tab of the Project Settings dialog box.  See also  Set up user accounts  Specify project settings (Runtime tab)  Specify project settings (Inactivity tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 150,
    "title": "Select single run-time language",
    "url": "67119.htm",
    "text": "In the Create Runtime Application Wizard - Select Language dialog box, choose the language to be included in the runtime application.  By default, when the language wizard opens, the current language for the application is selected.  To select a language to be included in the runtime application  Click on the language to highlight it.  Click Finish.  See also  Create a runtime application  Select multiple run-time languages  "
  },
  {
    "id": 151,
    "title": "Select multiple run-time languages",
    "url": "67117.htm",
    "text": "In the Create Runtime Application Wizard - Select Languages dialog box, select the languages to be included in the runtime application.  Tip:  When selecting multiple languages for a runtime application, be sure that you are not running FactoryTalk View Studio in the second monitor of a dual monitor system. Language check boxes will not accept selections when shown in a secondary monitor.  The runtime language(s) and the initial runtime application language that are selected last time when creating the runtime application are selected by default. If it is the first time you create the runtime application, the current language for the application is selected. The same language appears as the initial runtime language in the box below the language list.  To select the languages to be included and the initial application language for the runtime application  Select the check box for each language to be included in the runtime application.  To change the initial language, from the Select the initial runtime application language list, select the language.  Click Finish.  See also  Create a runtime application  Select single run-time language  "
  },
  {
    "id": 152,
    "title": "Create a runtime application",
    "url": "67115.htm",
    "text": "Before you can run an application, you must create a runtime version. When you create the runtime version, FactoryTalk View Studio compiles all of the necessary application information into a single file with the extension .mer.  When you create the runtime application file (with the file extension .mer), you can specify the version of FactoryTalk View ME Station for which to create the file. For example, if the application will run on a terminal that uses FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station&nbsp;5.0, you can specify that version for the .mer file.  If the application contains features that are not supported by the version you select, FactoryTalk View shows a validation report that lists the unsupported features. The runtime application file is not created. You must remove or turn off the unsupported features before you can create the runtime application file.  To create a runtime application  In FactoryTalk View Studio, with the application open, do either of the following:  From the Application menu, select Create Runtime Application.  On the toolbar, click @.  Specify the folder, in which to save the runtime application file.  In the File name box, enter the name for the application file.  The default name is the same name as the development application.  In the Save as type box, specify the version of FactoryTalk View ME Station for which to create the .mer file.  In the Conversion to development application area, select one of the following options:  Always allow conversion - The .mer file can always be used to generate an .med file.  Never allow conversion - The .mer file can never be used to generate an .med file.  Conversion protected by password - The .mer file can only be used to generate an .med file by providing a password.  If you want to include FactoryTalk ViewPoint content in the .mer file, select the Include ViewPoint content check box and from the list, select a FactoryTalk ViewPoint version.  Tip:  To enable the FactoryTalk ViewPoint check box and list, publish displays from FactoryTalk ViewPoint first. For details, see FactoryTalk ViewPoint Help.  To create a v8.20 or earlier version runtime application which includes FactoryTalk ViewPoint content, .NET Framework 3.5 is required. For information about how to install .NET Framework 3.5, see FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Installation Guide.  Click Save.  If there are multiple languages in the application, the language wizard opens. Select the language or languages to be included in the runtime application and click Finish.  Tip:  To show undefined strings in the default language at runtime, include the default language in your selection. The default language is also required for filtering alarms.  FactoryTalk View Studio creates a run-time version of the application in the directory you specify. If any editors are open, you are prompted to save any unsaved changes.  Tip:  Using FactoryTalk View Studio version 9.00.00 or later, you can create a v8.20 or earlier version of PanelView Plus 7 Standard runtime application (.mer) that contains more than 25 displays or more than 200 alarms. The runtime application can be run on a PanelView Plus 7 Standard terminal installed with firmware version 8.20 or earlier, and can be restored to a design time application (.med) using FactoryTalk View Studio version 8.20.00 or earlier. However, from the restored application, you cannot create a PanelView Plus 7 Standard runtime application using FactoryTalk View Studio version 8.20.00 or earlier, because the number of alarms or displays exceeds the restriction defined in FactoryTalk View Studio version 8.20.00 or earlier.  Earlier versions of ME Station will not be able to run later versions of ME runtime applications.  If the application contains features or objects that were not available in the selected version, error messages will be shown stating what feature or object is invalid. Errors or warnings are logged in a text file named <application name>ValidationResults.txt in the same location as the runtime application file. Warnings indicate something that will not prevent the application from running, but may produce problems at run time. Errors indicate the presence of some feature or object that will prevent the application from running at all. If errors are found during validation, the .mer file will not be created. If only warnings are found, the .mer file will be created, but a message stating that errors may appear at run time will be shown. Delete or modify the invalid objects and recreate the file. For information about the features supported in different versions of FactoryTalk View, see \"Appendix G\" in the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition User's Guide.  If the application is a PanelView Plus 7 Standard application or a Compact Machine Edition application, and the application exceeds the limits, the run-time file will not be created and error messages will be shown.  When a run-time file for an earlier version is created, the test run behavior on the current version of FactoryTalk View Studio may not be the same as actual run-time behavior on the targeted version.  When an .mer file is created, each Windows-linked user account is verified and its security identifier (SID) is used to get the latest account name. A MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal uses this account name for login purposes. If a user account name is blank (for example, the domain controller could not be accessed at the time when the run-time file was created, or a referenced account does not have trust in the domain), logins for that user on the terminal will fail. If this occurs, you must correct the blank name. Verify that the domain controller is connected or resolve the trust issue, and create the run-time file again.  Version 6.0 or earlier .mer files created on a 64-bit operating system cannot run on FactoryTalk View ME Station 6.0 or earlier or be converted to MED files. If you are creating a version 6.0 or earlier .mer file on a 64-bit operating system, Never allow conversion is the default and only choice in the Conversion to development application area.  See also  Select multiple run-time languages  Select single run-time language  MER to MED conversion  Features that are not supported in version 8.10 or earlier  ",
    "keywords": {
      "create": "100",
      "runtime application": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 153,
    "title": "Features that are not supported in version 9.0 or earlier",
    "url": "297001.htm",
    "text": "These version 10.0 features are not supported in FactoryTalk View ME Station version 9.0 or earlier. The right column describes how to remove the features.  To remove this feature  Do this  Variable message file  On the General tab of the Local Message Display Properties dialog box, clear the Use variable message file check box and click the Browse button to select a message file if needed.  Echo message  On the General tab of the Local Message Display Properties dialog box, clear the Use echo message check box.  Audit trail  In the Startup editor, clear the Audit trail check box.  CSV export  In the CSV Export Setup editor, clear the Enable CSV Export check box.  Audit trail list, audit trail detail, and clear audit trail graphic objects  Remove the graphic objects from graphic displays.  See also  Create a runtime application  Features that are not supported in version 8.20 or earlier  Features that are not supported in version 8.10 or earlier  Features that are not supported in version 7.0 or earlier  Features that are not supported in version 6.10 or earlier  "
  },
  {
    "id": 154,
    "title": "Features that are not supported in version 8.20 or earlier",
    "url": "271319.htm",
    "text": "These version 9.0 features are not supported in FactoryTalk View ME Station version 8.20 or earlier. The right column describes how to remove the features.  To remove this feature  Do this  Alarm banner, alarm list, and alarm status list objects with Use Alarm Identifier property enabled  Disable the Use Alarm Identifier function on the General tab of the object's Properties dialog box and the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor.  Hyperlink animation  Remove the hyperlink animation.  Extended tag properties  Remove the extended tag properties.  Multiple displays are selected to be shown at startup  Select only one or none graphic display to be shown at startup.  See also  Create a runtime application  Features that are not supported in version 8.10 or earlier  Features that are not supported in version 7.0 or earlier  Features that are not supported in version 6.10 or earlier  Feature that is not supported in version 5.10 or earlier  "
  },
  {
    "id": 155,
    "title": "Features that are not supported in version 8.10 or earlier",
    "url": "263836.htm",
    "text": "These version 8.20 features are not supported in FactoryTalk View ME Station version 8.10 or earlier. The right column describes how to remove or replace the features.  To remove or replace this feature  Do this  Graphics object with electronic signature property enabled  Disable the electronic signature function on the E-Signature tab of the object's Properties dialog box.  Application with advanced inactivity actions property enabled  Disable the advanced inactivity actions on the Inactivity tab of the Project Settings dialog box.  See also  Create a runtime application  Features that are not supported in version 7.0 or earlier  Features that are not supported in version 6.10 or earlier  Feature that is not supported in version 5.10 or earlier  Features that are not supported in version 5.0 or earlier  "
  },
  {
    "id": 156,
    "title": "Features that are not supported in version 7.0 or earlier",
    "url": "132776.htm",
    "text": "These version 8.0 features are not supported in FactoryTalk View ME Station version 7.0 or earlier. The right column describes how to remove or replace the features.  To remove or replace this feature  Do this  Add User/Group button  Delete the button object from graphic displays.  Delete User/Group button  Delete the button object from graphic displays.  Modify Group Membership button  Delete the button object from graphic displays.  Unlock User button  Delete the button object from graphic displays.  Enable User button  Delete the button object from graphic displays.  Disable User button  Delete the button object from graphic displays.  Login button  Clear the Domain name and User name boxes on the General tab of the Login Button Properties dialog box.  Password button  Clear the Change any user password (Administrative) option on the General tab of the Password Button Properties dialog box.  Change User Properties button  Delete the button object from graphic displays.  See also  Create a runtime application  Features that are not supported in version 8.10 or earlier  Features that are not supported in version 6.10 or earlier  Feature that is not supported in version 5.10 or earlier  Features that are not supported in version 5.0 or earlier  "
  },
  {
    "id": 157,
    "title": "Features that are not supported in version 6.10 or earlier",
    "url": "132775.htm",
    "text": "These version 7.00 features are not supported in FactoryTalk View ME Station version 6.10 or earlier. The right column describes how to remove or replace the features.  To remove or replace this feature  Do this  ME Alarm Embedded Server Update Rate  Select Match Alarm Update Rate or the same number as Maximum update rate on the Advance tab of the Alarm Setup editor.  MAXIMUM DATA POINTS enlargement support  Change the Maximum data point value to be equal to or less than 300000 on the Setup tab of the Data Log Models editor.  Parameterized Macro button  Clear the Use Variable Macro check box on the General tab of the Macro Button Properties dialog box.  Parameterized Goto display button  Clear the Use Variable Display check box on the General tab of the Goto Display Button Properties dialog box.  Parameterized display position  Clear the Use Variable Display Position check box on the General tab of the Goto Display Button Properties dialog box.  Graphic Objects configured with Gradient Shading background  Change the Gradient Shading background style to Solid or Transparent.  Delete Gradient animation from Graphics Objects animation or select other Fill Styles in color animation.  PNG image support  Delete PNG image object from graphic displays.  See also  Create a runtime application  Features that are not supported in version 8.10 or earlier  Features that are not supported in version 7.0 or earlier  Feature that is not supported in version 5.10 or earlier  Features that are not supported in version 5.0 or earlier  "
  },
  {
    "id": 158,
    "title": "Feature that is not supported in version 5.10 or earlier",
    "url": "132772.htm",
    "text": "The version 6.0 feature is not supported in FactoryTalk View ME Station version 5.10 or earlier. The right column describes how to remove or replace the feature.  To remove or replace this feature  Do this  Graphics object with Shaded or Original animation  Delete the Shaded or Original animation from the Graphics object animation or select Solid in Fill Style.  See also  Create a runtime application  Features that are not supported in version 8.10 or earlier  Features that are not supported in version 7.0 or earlier  Features that are not supported in version 6.10 or earlier  Features that are not supported in version 5.0 or earlier  "
  },
  {
    "id": 159,
    "title": "Features that are not supported in version 5.0 or earlier",
    "url": "67587.htm",
    "text": "These version 5.10 features are not supported in FactoryTalk View ME Station version 5.0 or earlier. The right column describes how to remove or replace the features.  To remove or replace this feature  Do this  Tag or expression assigned to the Close an On Top Display, or Close All On Top Displays connections  Delete the tag or expression assigned on the Display tab of the Global Connections editor.  Tag or expression assigned to the Parameter File, or Use Parameter List connections  Delete the tag or expression assigned on the Display tab of the Global Connections editor.  Tag or expression assigned to one or more of the Parameter Tag #1-10 connections  Delete the tag or expression on the Display tab of the Global Connections editor.  Parameter list property assigned in the Properties dialog box of a Display List Selector, Goto display button, or Logout button graphic object  In the object&#8217;s Properties dialog box, clear the Parameter list assignment.  Parameter list property assigned to the display specified for auto logout in Project Settings  On the Runtime tab of the Project Settings dialog box, clear the Parameter list assignment.  Parameter list assigned to the Initial graphic property in the Startup editor  In the Startup editor, clear the Parameter list assignment for the Initial graphic.  Use variable minimum/maximum property assigned to Numeric Input Cursor Point or Numeric Input Enable object  On the Numeric tab of the object&#8217;s Properties dialog box, clear the Use variable minimum/maximum property.  Caption on Keypad property assigned to Numeric Input Cursor Point object  On the Numeric tab of the object&#8217;s Properties dialog box, set the Caption on keypad/scratchpad property to blank.  Minimum or Maximum connections assigned for Numeric Input Cursor Point or Numeric Input Enable object  On the Connections tab of the object&#8217;s Properties dialog box, delete the tag or expression assigned to the Minimum or Maximum connection.  Use variable ramp or Use variable limit property set for the Ramp button object  On the General tab of the object&#8217;s Properties dialog box, clear the Use variable lower/upper limit and Use variable ramp value properties.  Ramp or Limit connection set for the Ramp button object  On the Connections tab of the object&#8217;s Properties dialog box, delete the tag or expression assigned to the Ramp or Limit connection.  The application is designated as a Compact Machine Edition application in Project Settings  On the General tab of the Project Settings dialog box, clear the Compact Machine Edition application check box.  See also  Create a runtime application  Features that are not supported in version 8.10 or earlier  Features that are not supported in version 7.0 or earlier  Features that are not supported in version 6.10 or earlier  Feature that is not supported in version 5.10 or earlier  "
  },
  {
    "id": 160,
    "title": "Validate PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications and Compact Machine Edition applications",
    "url": "67113.htm",
    "text": "When a PanelView Plus 7 Standard application or a Compact Machine Edition application is created, the application will be validated to make sure that it does not exceed any of the limits. Errors or warnings are logged in a text file named '<application name>ValidationResults.txt, in the same location as the runtime application file.  Warnings indicate something that will not prevent the application from running, but may produce problems at run time. Errors indicate the presence of some feature or object that will prevent the application from running at all. If errors are found during validation, the .mer file will not be created. If only warnings are found, the .mer file will be created, but a message stating that errors may appear at run time will be shown.  To correct this error  Do this  The application has too many graphic displays.  PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications do not support more than 100 displays.  Compact Machine Edition applications do not support more than 25 displays.  Reduce the number of displays in the application.  This application cannot be saved as a PanelView Plus 7 Standard Machine Edition runtime application because it contains more than 50 'Replace' displays.  Reduce the number of Replace displays in the application to 50 or less.  This application cannot be saved as a PanelView Plus 7 Standard Machine Edition runtime application because it contains more than 50 'On Top' displays.  Reduce the number of On Top displays in the application to 50 or less.  The application has too many alarm messages.  PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications do not support more than 500 alarm messages.  Compact Machine Edition applications do not support more than 200 alarm messages.  Reduce the number of alarm messages in the Alarm Setup editor.  Too many shortcuts.  PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications and Compact Machine Edition applications do not support more than one shortcut.  Make sure the application has only one FactoryTalk Linx shortcut.  Unsupported driver detected. Driver name = \"xxx-xx\".  PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications only support the Ethernet drivers.  Compact Machine Edition applications only support the Ethernet, Serial DF1 and Serial DH485 drivers.  Make sure the PanelView Plus 7 Standard application is communicating only with Ethernet drivers; and the Compact Machine Edition application is communicating only with FactoryTalk Linx Ethernet, Serial-DF1, or Serial-DH485 drivers.  Additional OPC servers with a FactoryTalk Linx shortcut.  PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications and Compact Machine Edition applications do not support additional OPC servers when a FactoryTalk Linx shortcut has been defined.  If a FactoryTalk Linx shortcut is defined, do not attempt to add additional OPC servers. If no FactoryTalk Linx shortcut is defined, a KEPServer Enterprise data server can be added.  The version of RSLinx Enterprise or FactoryTalk Linx is not supported.  RSLinx Enterprise versions 5.20 or later and FactoryTalk Linx are supported.  Make sure the application's version of RSLinx Enterprise is 5.20 or later or use FactoryTalk Linx.  The application's screen resolution is too high.  PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications do not support screen resolutions higher than 1280x800.  Compact Machine Edition applications do not support screen resolutions higher than 640x480.  Reduce the application's screen resolution in the Project Settings editor.  See also  Create a runtime application  PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications and Compact Machine Edition applications  "
  },
  {
    "id": 161,
    "title": "Convert a runtime application to a development application",
    "url": "67121.htm",
    "text": "Starting from the release of FactoryTalk View Machine Edition 5.00, users can use a runtime file (*.mer) to generate a corresponding development file (*.med).  Tip:  MER to MED functionality requires DataStore Plus ActiveX version 6.0.16.0 to be used.  Only .mer files created with FactoryTalk View Machine Edition 5.00 and later can be converted into .med files. Runtime files from earlier versions of Machine Edition cannot be converted.  When the conversion process is complete, a Shortcut Validation report is generated and stored in the same location as the project file. Use this report to as a tool to help you confirm all of your shortcuts and offline tag file assignments.  Runtime conversion restores the application shortcuts and the original runtime platform communications configuration only. It does not restore the communications topology of the original design workstation.  Version 6.0 or earlier .mer files created on a 64-bit operating system are not allowed to be converted to .med files. So if you are creating a version 6.0 or earlier .mer file on a 64-bit operating system, never allow a conversion that is the default and only choice under the Conversion to development application frame.  Possible reasons for creating a development file from a runtime file might be:  The original .med file has been lost  Only an .mer has been provided, but changes need to be made to the application  Changes such as adding passwords or saving recipes have been made to the .mer during run time; other changes that cannot be made at run time need to be made to the application without losing the runtime changes  Information saved during the running of the .mer (such as updated RecipePlus files) needs to be extracted  Other users may want to ensure that the runtime file can never be used to generate a development file, or can only be used by someone authorized to do so. For these cases, the .mer file can be locked so that it can never be converted, or a password can be required before conversion can begin.  See also  Create a runtime application  ",
    "keywords": {
      "convert": "100",
      "runtime application": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 162,
    "title": "Monitor Run-time RAM usage",
    "url": "67735.htm",
    "text": "Options in the Memory tab of the Global Connections editor allow developers to monitor how much memory is used by the application when it is running. It is strongly recommended that these connections be used during development and testing of FactoryTalk View ME applications to ensure that they do not exceed the limitations of the hardware. If the application is designed beyond the limitations of the PanelView Plus and PanelView Plus CE hardware, it should be modified to reduce memory usage, or possibly deployed on a PC-based platform such as the PanelView Plus Industrial PC.  As the application is developed and tested, the application should be run on the PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal with the ME Runtime RAM Usage connection enabled. The application developer should then navigate to all screens and exercise all functions of the application to monitor memory usage.  Hardware limitations  The PanelView Plus and PanelView Plus CE platforms have a 32MB process limit, which means that the application can consume no more than 32MB of memory at run time. Use the ME Runtime RAM Usage feature to determine if the application you are developing is approaching this limit.  When running on the PanelView Plus and PanelView Plus CE platforms, FactoryTalk View ME Station has a tag connection cache threshold of 26MB. If run-time RAM usage exceeds 26MB, screen change performance will slow down significantly as the system adds and removes tag connections from the cache. If your application's ME Runtime RAM Usage exceeds 26MB and you are experiencing slow application performance, consider modifying the application to reduce memory usage or moving to a PC platform.  Global connections can also monitor an application's Total RAM Usage and Available RAM. When developing a FactoryTalk View ME application, it is advisable monitor these values to ensure that the application does not exceed the available RAM installed in the terminal.  See also  About global connections  Set up global connections - Memory tab  Available RAM  ME Runtime RAM Usage  Remote RAM Usage  Total RAM Usage  Set up global connections - Memory tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 163,
    "title": "Transfer an application to a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal",
    "url": "67736.htm",
    "text": "You can use ME Transfer Utility to transfer an application file to a MobileView terminal, and to transfer an application or font file to a PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal.  To transfer a file to a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal  Configure a FactoryTalk Linx driver on the development computer.  If you use a serial link or a DH+ network for a PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal, configure the driver on the terminal.  Use ME Transfer Utility to transfer the file.  See also  About communication drivers  About ME Transfer Utility  ",
    "keywords": {
      "transfer": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 164,
    "title": "Configure terminal communications",
    "url": "67406.htm",
    "text": "There are two ways of configuring communications for your run-time terminal:  You can create a configuration on the runtime terminal itself, by going into Configuration Mode and selecting Terminal Settings > Networks and Communications > FactoryTalk Linx Communications. You cannot add devices to the tree in this box.  You can create a configuration in FactoryTalk Linx on the development computer. This configuration becomes a part of the runtime (.mer) file and is downloaded with the runtime file.  When you download your run-time file to the run-time terminal, you have the option of overwriting the communications configuration on the terminal with the communications configuration that is included with your .mer file.  Important:  Before you overwrite the terminal's communication configuration, be very sure that is what you want to do. If time and effort have been expended in creating a configuration on the terminal itself, do not overwrite it without considering that it may be unnecessary or even unwise to do so.  See also  Start an application  Start an application automatically  Configuration Mode  ",
    "keywords": {
      "configure": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 165,
    "title": "Run-time fonts",
    "url": "67738.htm",
    "text": "Licensed fonts for PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, and PanelView Plus CE terminals are supplied on the Accessories or Fonts CD. Users are requested to use only the fonts provided on these CDs with their terminals. Download the fonts to the terminal using ME Transfer Utility.  FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station also supports font linking for PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, and PanelView Plus CE terminals. Use the Font Linking menu in the Terminal Settings dialog box to select a base font and to link another font to the base font. Both the base font and the linked font must be loaded on the terminal.  Tip:  Bold or italic text that looks correct on the desktop computer may be truncated on the PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal. This is because, by default, only plain fonts are installed on the terminals. If you need bold or italic fonts for your application, download the bold/italic versions from the Fonts CDs.  See also  Transfer an application to the terminal  "
  },
  {
    "id": 166,
    "title": "Log on to Network Server",
    "url": "67412.htm",
    "text": "If your application is running on a PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, or PanelView Plus CE terminal, and is using a shared network drive to store data log files, the Logon to Network Server dialog box opens when your run-time file loads. Type your user name, password and the network domain name. What these values are depends on your network. If you are unsure, check with your network administrator.  This information is stored in RAM, and is erased when the machine reboots. Therefore, the information has to be re-entered each time the terminal starts. Checking the Update Default Credentials checkbox will not cause the terminal to save the network configuration information.  To save log-on data so that it does not need to be re-entered every time the terminal operator needs to access the network, the information must be in permanent storage.  To save log-on data permanently on PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, and PanelView Plus CE terminals  Go to Configuration Mode.  Select Terminal Settings > Networks and Communications > Network Connections > Network Identification.  Type your user name, password and network domain name, and then click OK.  After this, when the terminal needs access to the network for data storage or to print, this identification will be used to verify the connection.  If you are starting your application automatically, make sure the network log-on data is stored permanently, otherwise the application startup will stop at the Logon to Network Server dialog box.  See also  Start an application  Start an application automatically  Set up data logging (Paths tab)  Configuration Mode  "
  },
  {
    "id": 167,
    "title": "Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station on a personal computer",
    "url": "265107.htm",
    "text": "On a personal computer, you can set up FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station to start automatically when the computer starts or manually start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station.  To start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station on a personal computer, do one of the following  From Windows Start menu:  (Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008) Select All Programs > Rockwell Software > FactoryTalk View > FactoryTalk View ME Station  (Windows Server 2012) Click the down arrow and select Apps > Rockwell Software > FactoryTalk View ME Station  (Windows 10 and Windows Server 2016) Select All apps > Rockwell Software > FactoryTalk View ME Station  On the desktop, double-click the shortcut icon FTView ME Station.  In the Windows Explorer, right-click MERuntime.exe and select Run as administrator. Default location for this file is:  (32-bit operating system) \\Program Files\\Rockwell Software\\RSView Enterprise\\MERuntime.exe  (64-bit operating system) \\Program Files (x86)\\Rockwell Software\\RSView Enterprise\\MERuntime.exe  From Windows Start menu, select Run. In the Open box, type the path to the MERuntime.exe file.  See also  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station automatically by setting up the startup options  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station automatically on a MobileView terminal or a personal computer from Windows Startup folder  ",
    "keywords": {
      "start": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 168,
    "title": "Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station on a MobileView terminal",
    "url": "265103.htm",
    "text": "On a MobileView terminal, you can set up FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station to start automatically when the terminal starts or manually start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station.  To start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station on a MobileView terminal, do one of the following  On the desktop, press the FTView ME Station icon  In File Explorer, right-click MERuntime.exe and select Run as administrator. The default location for the file is C:\\Program Files (x86)\\Rockwell Software\\RSView Enterprise\\MERuntime.exe  See also  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station automatically by setting up the startup options  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station automatically on a MobileView terminal or a personal computer from Windows Startup folder  ",
    "keywords": {
      "start": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 169,
    "title": "Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station on a PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, or PanelView Plus CE terminal",
    "url": "265100.htm",
    "text": "On a PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, or PanelView Plus CE terminal, you can disable the automatic startup of FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station and start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station manually.  To start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station on a PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, or PanelView Plus CE terminal, do one of the following:  On the desktop, double-click the shortcut icon FTView ME Station.  In the Windows Explorer, double-click MERuntime.exe. Default location for this file is:  (PanelView Plus 7 and PanelView Plus 6) \\Windows  (PanelView Plus and PanelView Plus CE) \\Storage Card\\Rockwell Software\\RSViewME  If Windows Start menu is available, from the Start menu, select Run. In the Open box, type the path to the MERuntime.exe file.  If Windows Start menu is available, from the Start menu, select Programs > Rockwell Software > FactoryTalk View ME Station.  See also  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station automatically by setting up the startup options  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station automatically on a PanelView Plus CE terminal from Windows Startup folder  ",
    "keywords": {
      "start": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 170,
    "title": "Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station automatically by setting up the startup options",
    "url": "265230.htm",
    "text": "On a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal, or personal computer, you can set up FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station to start automatically and enter the Configuration Mode whenever the terminal or computer starts.  Tip:  On a PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus Compact terminal, FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station starts automatically when the terminal starts.  To start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station automatically and enter the Configuration Mode when a terminal or computer starts  Start FactoryTalk View ME Station.  Click Terminal Settings and select:  Startup Options > FactoryTalk View ME Station Startup on a PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal  FactoryTalk View ME Station Startup on a MobileView terminal or a personal computer  In the Startup Settings dialog box, click Edit.  Select the Go to Configuration Mode option.  If you loaded an application, click Configuration Mode Options to set up whether to load the current application and whether to replace FactoryTalk Linx communications when the terminal starts.  Click OK to close the Configuration Mode Options dialog box.  Click OK to close the FactoryTalk View ME Station Startup dialog box.  Click Close to close the Startup Settings dialog box.  Click Close to close the Terminal Settings dialog box.  On a PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal, click Reset and confirm the changes.  See also  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station on a personal computer  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station automatically on a MobileView terminal or a personal computer from Windows Startup folder  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station automatically on a PanelView Plus CE terminal from Windows Startup folder  Configuration Mode  Start an application automatically  ",
    "keywords": {
      "start": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 171,
    "title": "Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station automatically on a MobileView terminal or a personal computer from Windows Startup folder",
    "url": "67404.htm",
    "text": "On a MobileView terminal or a personal computer, you can start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station automatically whenever the terminal or computer starts by setting up the startup options or follow the steps below.  To start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station automatically when a MobileView terminal or a personal computer starts  Copy the path to the MERuntime.exe file (FactoryTalk View ME Station) to the Windows Startup folder.  The default folders of the path to the MERuntime.exe file is C:\\ProgramData\\Microsoft\\Windows\\Start Menu\\Programs\\Rockwell Software\\FactoryTalk View.  The Windows Startup folder is C:\\Users\\<logged in user name>\\AppData\\Roaming\\Microsoft\\Windows\\Start Menu\\Programs\\Startup.  Tip:  If you copied the path to the MERuntime.exe file to the Windows Startup folder, to disable the automatic startup of FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station, delete the file in the Windows Startup folder.  See also  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station automatically by setting up the startup options  Start an application automatically on a MobileView terminal or a personal computer using parameters  Stop a runtime application  ",
    "keywords": {
      "start": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 172,
    "title": "Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station automatically on a PanelView Plus CE terminal from Windows Startup folder",
    "url": "265227.htm",
    "text": "On a PanelView Plus CE terminal, you can start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station automatically whenever the terminal starts by setting up the startup options or follow the steps below.  To start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station automatically when a PanelView Plus CE terminal starts  Copy the path to the MERuntime.exe file (FactoryTalk View ME Station) to the Windows Startup folder.  The default folders of the path to the MERuntime.exe file is \\Storage Card\\Windows\\Desktop.  The Windows Startup folder is \\Storage Card\\Windows\\Startup.  Tip:  If you copied the path to the MERuntime.exe file to the Windows Startup folder, to disable the automatic startup of FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station, delete the file in the Windows Startup folder.  See also  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station automatically by setting up the startup options  Start an application automatically on a PanelView Plus CE terminal using parameters  Stop a runtime application  ",
    "keywords": {
      "start": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 173,
    "title": "File integrity Checking",
    "url": "265097.htm",
    "text": "When a PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal is powered up, before an application is started, the application file (.mer) and the log files that exist on the terminal are checked for possible corruption. If the integrity check fails, the user has the option to continue or to cancel the loading of the application. Running the application with corrupted files may result in unpredictable terminal operations.  You can disable integrity checking by setting up the File Integrity Check options accessed from the Terminal Settings dialog box.  See also  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station on a PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, or PanelView Plus CE terminal  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station automatically by setting up the startup options  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station automatically on a PanelView Plus CE terminal  Start an application  Start an application automatically by setting up the startup options  "
  },
  {
    "id": 174,
    "title": "Start an application",
    "url": "67414.htm",
    "text": "You can start an application in multiple ways.  To start an application, do one of the following  In the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box, click Load Application, select the application file to open, and click Run Application.  Double-click the .mer file. The application bypasses the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box and asks the user to choose whether to replace the terminal's communication configuration.  If Windows Start menu is available, from Windows Start menu, select Run, and in the Open box, type the path to the MERuntime.exe file, the path to the .mer file, and one or more parameters.  Tip:  The first time you start the application on a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal, the terminal's communication configuration must include a communication driver. If you have downloaded a communications file with the application, it will overwrite any communications configuration on the terminal. Be sure the drivers are configured.  If your data log files are saved in a shared folder, the Logon to Network Server dialog box will appear when the application starts.  PanelView Plus 7 Standard terminals and PanelView Plus 6 Compact terminals can only load and run PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications or Compact Machine Edition applications. If you try to start a non-Compact application or a PanelView Plus 7 Performance application on a PanelView Plus 7 Standard terminal or a PanelView Plus 6 Compact terminal, an error message will appear and the application will not be loaded.  See also  Parameters for starting an application  Log on to Network Server  Start an application automatically by setting up the startup options  Example: Starting an application on a personal computer using parameters  Example: Starting an application on a PanelView Plus 7 or PanelView Plus 6 terminal using parameters  ",
    "keywords": {
      "start": "100",
      "application": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 175,
    "title": "Start an application automatically by setting up the startup options",
    "url": "67410.htm",
    "text": "You can set up FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station to start and run an application automatically whenever a terminal or personal computer starts.  To start an application automatically whenever a terminal or personal computer starts  In the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box, load an application.  Click Terminal Settings and select:  Startup Options > FactoryTalk View ME Station Startup on a PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal  FactoryTalk View ME Station Startup on a MobileView terminal or a personal computer  In the Startup Settings dialog box, click Edit.  Select the Run Current Application option and click Run Options.  If you want to overwrite the terminal's communications file, select Yes for Replace RSLinx Communications or Replace FactoryTalk Linx Communications.  If you want to delete the log files, select Yes for Delete Log Files on Every Power Cycle and click OK.  Click OK to close the FactoryTalk View ME Station Startup dialog box.  Click Close to close the Startup Settings dialog box.  Click Close to close the Terminal Settings dialog box.  On a PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal, click Reset and confirm the changes.  In the future, whenever the terminal or personal computer starts, FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station will start automatically, delete the application's log files, overwrite the terminal's communications file, and run the application.  Tip:  PanelView Plus 7 Standard terminals and PanelView Plus 6 Compact terminals can only load and run PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications or Compact Machine Edition applications. If you try to start a non-Compact application or a PanelView Plus 7 Performance application on a PanelView Plus 7 Standard terminal or a PanelView Plus 6 Compact terminal, an error message will appear and the application will not be loaded.  If your application uses a shared network folder to store data log files, you will have to log onto a network when the application starts. To run the application automatically, you must store the network logon data in the terminal's permanent storage.  See also  Start an application automatically on a MobileView terminal or a personal computer using parameters  Start an application automatically on a PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus CE, or PanelView Plus Compact terminal using parameters  Stop&nbsp;FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station  Log on to Network Server  Configure terminal communications  ",
    "keywords": {
      "start": "100",
      "application": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 176,
    "title": "Start an application automatically on a MobileView terminal or a personal computer using parameters",
    "url": "265307.htm",
    "text": "On a MobileView terminal or a personal computer, you can start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station and runs an application automatically whenever the terminal or computer starts by setting up the startup options or using parameters.  To start an application automatically when a MobileView terminal or a personal computer starts  Copy the path to the MERuntime.exe file (FactoryTalk View ME Station) to the Windows Startup folder.  The default folders of the path to the MERuntime.exe file is C:\\ProgramData\\Microsoft\\Windows\\Start Menu\\Programs\\Rockwell Software\\FactoryTalk View.  The Windows Startup folder is C:\\Users\\<logged in user name>\\AppData\\Roaming\\Microsoft\\Windows\\Start Menu\\Programs\\Startup.  Tip:  If you copied the path to the MERuntime.exe file to the Windows Startup folder, to disable the automatic startup of FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station, delete the file in the Windows Startup folder.  In the Startup folder, right-click FactoryTalk View ME Station and select Properties.  On the Shortcut tab, in the Target box, after the existing text, type a space, the path to the .mer file, and one or more parameters.  For example, to start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station and open an application called Malthouse on a Windows 7 operating system computer, type  \"C:\\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\Runtime\\malthouse.mer\" /r /d /o  Click OK.  In the future, whenever the MobileView terminal or the personal computer starts, FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station will start automatically, delete the applications log files, overwrite the terminal's communications file, and run the application.  If you do not want to delete the log files, omit the /d parameter.  If you do not want to overwrite the communications file, omit the /o parameter.  To give the user the choice of overwriting the communications file, use the /a parameter instead of the /o parameter.  See also  Start an application automatically by setting up the startup options  Log on to Network Server  Configure terminal communications  Parameters for starting an application  Stop a runtime application  ",
    "keywords": {
      "start": "100",
      "application": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 177,
    "title": "Start an application automatically on a PanelView Plus CE terminal using parameters",
    "url": "265308.htm",
    "text": "On a PanelView Plus CE terminal, you can set up FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station to start and run an application automatically whenever the terminal starts by setting up the startup options or using parameters.  To start an application automatically when a PanelView Plus CE terminal starts  Copy the path to the MERuntime.exe file (FactoryTalk View ME Station) to the Windows Startup folder.  The default folders of the path to the MERuntime.exe file is \\Storage Card\\Windows\\Desktop.  The Windows Startup folder is \\Storage Card\\Windows\\Startup.  In the Startup folder, right-click FactoryTalk View ME Station and select Properties.  On the Shortcut tab, in the Target box, after the existing text, type a space, the path to the .mer file, and one or more parameters.  For example, to start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station and open an application file in a default folder, called Malthouse, type:  \"\\Storage Card\\Rockwell Software\\RSViewME\\Runtime\\Malthouse.mer\" /r /d /o  Click OK.  In the future, whenever the PanelView Plus CE terminal starts, FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station will start automatically, delete the applications log files, overwrite the terminal's communications file, and run the application.  If you do not want to delete the log files, omit the /d parameter.  If you do not want to overwrite the communications file, omit the /o parameter.  To give the user the choice of overwriting the communications file, use the /a parameter instead of the /o parameter.  Tip:  If your application uses a shared network folder to store data log files, you will have to log onto a network when the application starts. To run the application automatically, you must store the network logon data in the terminal's permanent storage.  See also  Start an application automatically by setting up the startup options  Log on to Network Server  Configure terminal communications  Parameters for starting an application  Stop a runtime application  ",
    "keywords": {
      "start": "100",
      "application": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 178,
    "title": "Parameters for starting an application",
    "url": "265098.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the parameters for starting an application.  Parameters  Descriptions  /a  Use this parameter with the /r parameter to start the runtime application without opening Configuration Mode, and to show the Replace Communications dialog box to provide the options to keep or overwrite the terminal's communication configuration with the application's communication configuration.  The /a parameter overrides the /o parameter if they both present.  /d  Use this parameter with the /r parameter to start the runtime application without opening Configuration Mode, and to delete the application&#8217;s alarm and data log files before running the application.  Data log files are deleted only if you log to the default path.  /o  Use this parameter with the /r parameter to start the runtime application without opening Configuration Mode, and to replace the terminal's communication configuration with the application's communication configuration.  /r  Use this parameter to start the runtime application without opening Configuration Mode.  You can use the /r parameter alone, or with either or both of /d and /o parameters.  See also  Start an application automatically on a MobileView terminal or a personal computer using parameters  Start an application automatically on a PanelView Plus CE terminal using parameters  Example: Starting an application on a MobileView terminal or a personal computer using parameters  Example: Starting an application on a PanelView Plus 7 or PanelView Plus 6 terminal using parameters  Example: Starting an application on a PanelView Plus CE terminal using parameters  ",
    "keywords": {
      "start": "100",
      "application": "100",
      "parameter": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 179,
    "title": "Example: Starting an application on a MobileView terminal or a personal computer using parameters",
    "url": "265233.htm",
    "text": "You can use one or more parameters to start an application on a MobileView terminal or a personal computer. For example, to start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station and open an application called Malthouse using all the parameters, from Windows Start menu, select Run and in the Open box, type the following and press Enter:  \"C:\\Program Files\\Rockwell Software\\RSView Enterprise\\MERuntime.exe\" \"C:\\ Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\Runtime\\malthouse.mer\" /r /d /o /a  The example assumes that the .mer file is in the default folder.  Be sure to leave a space between the quotes in the middle or this will not work.  See also  Start an application  Start an application automatically on a MobileView terminal or a personal computer using parameters  Parameters for starting an application  "
  },
  {
    "id": 180,
    "title": "Example: Starting an application on a PanelView Plus 7 or PanelView Plus 6 terminal using parameters",
    "url": "265234.htm",
    "text": "You can use one or more parameters to start an application on a PanelView Plus 7 or PanelView Plus 6 terminal. For example, to start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station and open an application called Malthouse using all the parameters, from Windows Start menu, select Run and in the Open box, type the following and press Enter:  \"\\Application Data\\Rockwell Software\\RSViewME\\MERuntime.exe\" \"\\Storage Card\\Rockwell Software\\RSViewME\\Runtime\\malthouse.mer\" /r /d /o /a  Alternative locations might be on Storage Card2 or USB Storage instead of Application Data.  See also  Start an application  Parameters for starting an application  "
  },
  {
    "id": 181,
    "title": "Example: Starting an application on a PanelView Plus CE terminal using parameters",
    "url": "265231.htm",
    "text": "You can use one or more parameters to start an application on a PanelView Plus CE terminal. For example, to start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station and open an application called Malthouse using all the parameters, from Windows Start menu, select Run and in the Open box, type the following and press Enter:  \"\\Storage Card\\Rockwell Software\\RSViewME\\MERuntime.exe\" \"\\Storage Card\\Rockwell Software\\RSViewME\\Runtime\\malthouse.mer\" /r /d /o /a  Alternative locations might be on Storage Card2 instead of Storage Card.  See also  Start an application  Start an application automatically on a PanelView Plus CE terminal using parameters  Parameters for starting an application  "
  },
  {
    "id": 182,
    "title": "Stop a runtime application",
    "url": "67501.htm",
    "text": "You may need to stop a runtime application. When the application closes, the run-time system also stops.  To stop a runtime application, do one of the following  Press a shutdown button on a graphic display.  Click the close button in the right corner of the title bar. To use this method, select the Title bar option in the Project Settings dialog box.  See also  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station on a personal computer  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station on a MobileView terminal  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station on a PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, or PanelView Plus CE terminal  Specify project settings (Runtime tab)  ",
    "keywords": {
      "stop": "100",
      "runtime application": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 183,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for legacy ME Station applications",
    "url": "67503.htm",
    "text": "If a user attempts to run an earlier version application on an earlier version FactoryTalk View Machine Edition, the following message may appear:  \"Failed to load Tag Config Server\"  A possible reason for this message is that the application file (.mer) created with FactoryTalk View Studio 6.10 or later is not compatible with the old database. For example, you cannot run an application created with FactoryTalk View Studio 6.10 on ME Station 6.0.  FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station 6.0 and earlier cannot run an application that is created with FactoryTalk View Studio 6.10 or later installed on a 64-bit OS since the database is incompatible.  FactoryTalk View Studio 6.10 or later installed on a 64-bit OS will not create a 6.0 or earlier version application with Allow Conversion option enabled.  MER  Created with  MER Conversion Setting  FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station 6.10 or later  FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station 6.0 or earlier  x32 OS  x64 OS  x32 OS  6.0 or earlier MER  FactoryTalk View Studio 6.0 or earlier  Allow  Compatible  Compatible  Compatible  Disallow  Compatible  Compatible  Compatible  FactoryTalk View Studio 6.10 or later on a 32-bit OS  Allow  Compatible  Compatible  Compatible  Disallow  Compatible  Compatible  Compatible  FactoryTalk View Studio 6.10 or later on a 64-bit OS  Allow  N/A  N/A  N/A  Disallow  Compatible  Compatible  Incompatible  6.10 or later MER  FactoryTalk View Studio 6.10 or later on a 32-bit OS  Allow  Compatible  Compatible  Incompatible  Disallow  Compatible  Compatible  Incompatible  See also  Quick start steps for running an application  Start an application  Start an application automatically on a MobileView terminal or a personal computer using parameters  "
  },
  {
    "id": 184,
    "title": "Enter numeric and string values at run time",
    "url": "67560.htm",
    "text": "The operator can enter values at run time using these graphic objects:  To enter  Press this button object  Then enter values in the pop-up that opens  Numeric values  Numeric input enable button  Numeric input cursor point  Use the numeric pop-up keypad  Use the numeric pop-up scratchpad  How the numeric pop-ups work at run time  String values  String input enable button  Use the string pop-up keyboard  Use the string pop-up character input  Use the string pop-up scratchpad  How the string pop-up keyboard works at run time  How the string pop-up scratchpad works at run time  See also  Set up run-time navigation  Change tag values at run time  View alarms and messages at run time  View tag data at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 185,
    "title": "Select string pop-up",
    "url": "67566.htm",
    "text": "To open the String Pop-up dialog box, from the Tools menus, select Options > String Pop-up.  Choose whether the string input enable object, the Login button and the Password button will show the string pop-up keyboard or the string pop-up character input at run time when running applications on Windows 7 SP1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1, Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server 2016 operating systems. The default selection when the dialog box first opens is the keyboard. When the dialog box is next opened, whatever choice was last made will persist.  When invoked from the string input enable object, the user can enter an alphanumeric string and write it to the object's Value control.  When invoked from the Login dialog box, the user can enter a user name (up to 275 alphanumeric characters) and a password (up to 127 characters), which will be returned to the Login dialog box to allow the user to log in.  When invoked from the Change Password dialog box, it allows the user to enter an old password, new password and confirmation password of up to 16 alphanumeric characters.  Options  String pop-up keyboard override  Use the string pop-up keyboard  Click this radio button to use the standard pop-up keyboard.  Use the string pop-up character input  Click this radio button to use the string pop-up character input instead of the pop-up keyboard.  See also  Enter numeric and string values at run time  Change tag values at run time  Locate the graphic libraries  "
  },
  {
    "id": 186,
    "title": "Change tag values at run time",
    "url": "67573.htm",
    "text": "The operator can change tag values at run time using these graphic objects:  Momentary push button  Maintained push button  Latched push button  Multistate push button  Interlocked push button  Ramp button  Horizontal sliders  Vertical sliders  Tip:  The operator uses these buttons to start and stop plant operations. Choose the button that best suits your process.  See also  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station  Set up run-time navigation  View alarms and messages at run time  Enter numeric and string values at run time  View tag data at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 187,
    "title": "View alarms and messages at run time",
    "url": "67551.htm",
    "text": "The operator can view alarms and other messages at run time using these graphic objects and graphic displays:  This information  Appears in this object  In this default graphic display  Alarm messages  alarm list  [ALARM]  Alarm list  System activity  diagnostics list  [DIAGNOSTICS]  How the diagnostics list works at run time  Information messages  information message display  [INFORMATION]  How the information message display works at run time  Local messages  local message display  no default display  How the local message display works at run time  Tip:  The default alarm, information, and local message displays open automatically when the assigned tags match the messages&#8217; trigger values. They can also be opened using goto display buttons. Operators can acknowledge and clear messages in these displays.  All of these objects can be placed in any graphic display.  See also  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station  Set up run-time navigation  View tag data at run time  Enter numeric and string values at run time  Change tag values at run time  ",
    "keywords": {
      "view": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 188,
    "title": "View tag data at run time",
    "url": "67557.htm",
    "text": "The operator can view tag data at run time using these graphic objects:  String display  Bar graph  Gauge  Numeric display  Trend  ActiveX controls  Tip:  Objects that display tag data can be placed in any graphic display.  To display the current date and time, create a time and date display object in the graphic display.  For information on converting logged tag data into other formats, such as Excel, please refer to Answer IDs 20644 and 21174 in the Rockwell Knowledgebase.  See also  Set up run-time navigation  View alarms and messages at run time  Enter numeric and string values at run time  Change tag values at run time  About ActiveX objects  "
  },
  {
    "id": 189,
    "title": "Security in FactoryTalk View Machine Edition",
    "url": "67384.htm",
    "text": "With the addition of FactoryTalk and RSAssetSecurity (now FactoryTalk Security) in RSView Studio Machine Edition v4.00, the way security is set up and applied changed.  As it was  In 3.20 and earlier versions of View Studio Machine Edition, security controlled access to the displays in an application. Displays were assigned one of 16 security codes (A - P) or the asterisk (*). Users were also assigned security codes. Users whose account codes matched the codes assigned to the displays were allowed access to those displays, and were able to make changes to the displays at design time and at run time. User accounts applied only to the application in which they were created.  As it is  FactoryTalk Security is a part of FactoryTalk Directory, which is installed with the FactoryTalk Services Platform. This means that security applies not only to the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition application, but to any other FactoryTalk-enabled software running on the same computer.  Instead of dealing with access to parts of the system, FactoryTalk Security is concerned first with authenticating users' identities, and then with verifying their authorization to perform specific actions within the system.  During Machine Edition installation, a FactoryTalk Security Windows-Linked group called Authenticated Users is added to the FactoryTalk Directory. This group permits any users who can log into Windows to be authenticated in the FactoryTalk Directory. By default, the desktop Windows user will be logged in when FactoryTalk View Studio opens, so FactoryTalk View Studio will not prompt a user to log on to FactoryTalk.  To limit access to the application or parts of the application, you must set up user accounts and passwords.  Users can still create applications that include run-time security when running on ME Station. However, authenticated users are not supported on PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE platforms. For that reason, applications that test satisfactorily on Windows 7 SP1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1, Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server 2016 operating systems may perform differently after being downloaded to the PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminals.  Once users are added to FactoryTalk Security, run-time security within FactoryTalk View Machine Edition uses the same 16 security codes in the same way as previous versions of View Studio.  See also  ME Runtime 4.00 and later tab  Add users or groups to FactoryTalk Security  About security for ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier accounts  Set up ME Runtime 4.00 and later user and group accounts  ",
    "keywords": {
      "security": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 190,
    "title": "Policies in FactoryTalk Security",
    "url": "67881.htm",
    "text": "To see the security policies for FactoryTalk View Studio and any other FactoryTalk-enabled software on the design-time computer, at the bottom of the Explorer, open the folder System/Policies/System Policies and then double-click Security Policy. In the dialog box that opens, you can set up some parameters of the user accounts and passwords, including how often a user can enter an invalid password before being locked out, how long passwords have to be, and how often they must be changed. Definitions of the options appear at the bottom of the dialog box, and detailed FactoryTalk Security help is available by clicking the Help button.  By default, most of these policies are set so they are not in effect. You can enable them or change their values if your system requirements call for it. To ensure that you are not locked out of the FactoryTalk Directory, we recommend that you leave the Account lockout threshold set to 0. It is also advisable to leave single sign-on enabled. If you disable single sign-on, users must not only log onto FactoryTalk each time FactoryTalk View Studio is restarted, but users will also be required to log onto any other FactoryTalk-enabled applications when they are opened.  Important:  Remember that any changes that you make to system security policies will be included as part of the runtime application. It is therefore very strongly recommended that you do not alter the default settings in the Security Policy Properties dialog unless necessary, and unless the implications of the changes are fully understood.  How security policies affect FactoryTalk View run time  Logon session lease - applies to FactoryTalk View ME run time for Windows-linked users only.  Account lockout threshold - applies to users only and local groups only. Windows-linked users follow the policies set on the domain controller.  Keep record of deleted accounts - does not apply. Accounts cannot be deleted at run time.  Show deleted accounts in user list - there is no run-time user list.  Password Policy Settings - apply only to local users and groups.  Single Sign-On Policy Settings - does not apply to run time.  See also  Security in FactoryTalk View Machine Edition  Add users or groups to FactoryTalk Security  Set up ME Runtime 4.00 and later user accounts  ",
    "keywords": {
      "security": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 191,
    "title": "Use Runtime 4.00 and later security",
    "url": "67744.htm",
    "text": "You can use the new security system the same way you used the previous system, by assigning security codes to displays and to users or to groups of users. The only one additional step is adding users to FactoryTalk Security.  Security provides a way to restrict access to certain parts of the system. You can limit the users who have access to the system by setting up user accounts and passwords. You can also limit users to specific graphic displays.  If you don&#8217;t set up security, anyone can use the system without logging on, and view all the graphic displays.  Tip:  Remember that the users and permissions you set up in FactoryTalk Security apply not only to FactoryTalk View Studio, but also to any other FactoryTalk-enabled software running on the same computer.  To set up FactoryTalk Security to work like 3.20 and earlier security  During installation, the FactoryTalk Directory Configuration Wizard grants administrative permissions to all authenticated Windows users, that is, users who are able to log onto the local computer.  At design time, add your users and user groups to FactoryTalk Security through the Runtime Security editor. Assign passwords or not as you choose.  Open the Runtime Security editor and add the groups or individual users to the application. Assign security codes in the Security Settings for <application name> dialog box.  Assign security codes to displays in the Display Settings dialog box.  See also  Add users or groups to FactoryTalk Security  Set up ME Runtime 4.00 and later user accounts  Edit general display settings  About security for ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier accounts  "
  },
  {
    "id": 192,
    "title": "Add users or groups to FactoryTalk Security",
    "url": "67364.htm",
    "text": "Users and groups must be part of FactoryTalk Security before they can be added to Runtime Security in FactoryTalk View Machine Edition.  You can add users to FactoryTalk Security through the Runtime Security editor in FactoryTalk View Machine Edition, or through the Users and Groups folders in the System folder at the bottom of the Explorer window. FactoryTalk Security users can be granted or denied security permissions at all levels of FactoryTalk Security from the FactoryTalk directory level down.  Once users and groups have been added to security, you can add them to your application through the Runtime Security editor.  Tip:  It is advisable to create groups first, and grant the appropriate permissions to the group. This allows you to create a security structure without the need to know exactly who the users will be. When users are added to the group, they inherit the permissions granted to the group. If necessary, individual users can later be denied specific permissions.  A maximum of 255 user accounts can be added to the application.  For more detailed information, see FactoryTalk Security Online Help.  To add users or groups through the Runtime Security editor  In the System folder at the top of the Explorer window, double-click the Runtime Security icon to open the editor.  Click the ME Runtime 4.00 and later tab.  The Default account appears in the form. Click the Add button or the Add icon in the toolbar to enter a new account.  or  In the Setup menu, select Add Users/Groups.  The Select User or Group dialog box opens. In the Filter Users frame at the bottom, select Show groups only or Show users only.  To add a user or user group from the list, select the name and click OK. The name appears in the Runtime Security editor spreadsheet, with all the security codes enabled (marked Y).  To create a new account  Follow steps 1 through 4 above.  Click Create New, and then select User or Windows linked user.  Follow the instructions in the FactoryTalk Security help.  Tip:  Only the User name field in the New User dialog box is required. The other fields are optional.  To add users and groups through the FactoryTalk System folder  Open the Users and Groups folder in the System folder at the bottom of the Explorer window.  Right-click Users Groups (to add groups), or Users (to add individual users) and then select New.  Select User Group or User.  In the dialog box that opens, click the Help button. Follow the instructions in the FactoryTalk Security help.  See also  Set up ME Runtime 4.00 and later user accounts  Security in FactoryTalk View Machine Edition  "
  },
  {
    "id": 193,
    "title": "ME Runtime 4.00 and later tab",
    "url": "67374.htm",
    "text": "Use the ME Runtime 4.00 and later tab to:  Add and remove run-time user accounts  View user names for FactoryTalk Security users and groups  Specify login and logout macros for FactoryTalk Security users  Assign A-P codes to user accounts  The editor consists of a form area and a spreadsheet.  The ME Runtime 4.00 and later tab differs from the ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier tab in the following ways:  The user account name cannot be entered or changed in the editor.  There is no user password text box.  The toolbar options Cut, Delete, Duplicate, Insert Row, Fill Forward, and Sort are not available.  The DEFAULT user has no password, and none can be set.  Multiple rows cannot be selected.  The View menu  Use the options in the View menu to:  Show or hide the spreadsheet and form  Change the spreadsheet font  Move between the spreadsheet and the form  The Toolbar  Use the tools in the toolbar to:  Copy and paste selected text  Add users and groups  Tip:  Do not attempt to copy and paste accounts from one tab to the other. It may produce undesirable results.  To add users and/or groups to the application  Click the Add button or the Add User/Group icon in the toolbar.  The Select User or Group dialog box opens. In the Filter frame, select the option that shows the users or groups you want.  Select the user or group you want to add and click OK.  Tip:  A maximum of 255 user accounts can be added to the application.  New users must be created in the Select User or Group dialog box for FactoryTalk Security before they can be added to Runtime Security.  Options  Account ID  Accounts shown in the 4.00 spreadsheet, other than the DEFAULT user, are FactoryTalk Security users or groups. You cannot modify the Account ID for a FactoryTalk Security user or group in the Runtime Security editor.  Login Macro  The login macro is optional. To run a macro each time this user logs in, type the macro name in this box or click the Browse button (\u2026) to select from a list of macros in the application.  Logout Macro  The logout macro is optional. To run a macro each time this user logs out, type the macro name in this box or click the Browse button (\u2026) to select from a list of macros in the application.  If a new user logs in before the previous user has logged out, the logout macro of the previous user runs after the new user logs in.  Security Codes  For a new user, all the boxes are checked by default (Y is displayed in all columns in the spreadsheet). To block access to a security code, clear the check box for the code in the form section.  Tip:  Be sure the DEFAULT user is allowed at least one security code, and assign the same security code (or the * code) to the initial graphic display. If the DEFAULT user has no security codes allowed, when the application is run, no display will open.  See also  Add users or groups to FactoryTalk Security  Set up ME Runtime 4.00 and later user accounts  Migrate ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier accounts  "
  },
  {
    "id": 194,
    "title": "Set up ME Runtime 4.00 and later user and group accounts",
    "url": "67372.htm",
    "text": "Like RSView 3.20 user accounts, FactoryTalk View 4.00 user accounts work with security codes to determine who has access to the system at run time. Add user accounts through the Runtime Security editor, and then assign security access to the individual users.  The first account ID in the ME Runtime 4.00 and later spreadsheet is DEFAULT, with security codes A through P checked. The DEFAULT account is used when no user is logged on. Unless you change the security code settings for the DEFAULT account, everyone has access to all parts of the run-time system without logging on. You can change which security codes are checked for the DEFAULT account, but you cannot change the name of this user account or assign it a password.  To restrict access to individual graphic displays, assign the displays a security code from A through P. Then change the DEFAULT user account to turn off access to the security codes you have assigned, and assign security codes to users and user groups. To have access to a display that has a security codes assigned to it, the user must have an account set up with that security code turned on, that is, its check box is checked in the security code grid.  Tip:  In ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier, the asterisk symbol applied to a display made the display accessible to all users. In 4.00 and later, the asterisk gives access to any user who has at least one security code assigned.  To set up ME Runtime 4.00 and later user accounts  In the System folder in the Explorer window, double-click the Runtime Security icon to open the editor.  Click the ME Runtime 4.00 and later tab.  The Default account appears in the form. Click the Add button or the Add icon in the toolbar to enter a new account.  or  In the Setup menu, select Add Users/Groups.  The Select User or Group dialog box opens. In the Filter Users frame at the bottom, select Show groups only, Show users only, or Show all.  In the list of users and groups, select a user account or group account and click OK. The selected user or group appears in the Account spreadsheet.  Assign security codes to the selected account by clearing the check boxes in the Security Codes grid and clicking Accept. By default, all the codes are checked for each new account.  The Login and Logout macros are optional. Type the macro name in the box or click the Browse button (\u2026) to select from a list of macros in the application.  Click Next to clear the form.  When you have finished adding user accounts, click Close to close the editor and save changes.  Tip:  Be sure to assign at least one security code to new users. New users with no security codes or actions assigned are not saved in the Runtime Security editor.  To remove an ME Runtime 4.00 and later user account from the application  In the spreadsheet, click on a user name to select it.  Click Remove.  Tip:  Changes made to security in the Runtime Security editor take effect as soon as they are saved.  You can select users and groups from either a network Windows domain or a local Windows computer. These accounts will not authenticate if the application is transferred to a terminal or computer in a different Windows domain.  Do not attempt to copy and paste accounts from the ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier tab to the ME Runtime 4.00 and later tab, or vice versa. It may produce undesirable results.  Deleting users from FactoryTalk Security does not remove them from the application. They must be removed manually, just as they were added manually. Similarly, removing users from the application does not delete them from FactoryTalk Security.  See also  ME Runtime 4.00 and later tab  Set up ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user accounts  Causes of run-time errors for ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user accounts  "
  },
  {
    "id": 195,
    "title": "Migrate ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier accounts",
    "url": "67376.htm",
    "text": "Opening an application that was created with an earlier version of View Studio will convert the application to the current version. Once the application has been converted, it cannot be opened by earlier versions of View Studio.  However, there is still the option of creating runtime application files that will run on earlier versions of ME Station. For this reason, it is still possible to create 3.20 and earlier users in FactoryTalk View Studio. Also, if an application that was created with an earlier version of View Studio, or an application created for PanelView Plus terminals, is imported, any users created in those applications will appear on the ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier tab of the Runtime Security editor.  If the application is intended to create run-time (.mer) files to run on earlier versions of ME Station, these users can remain on the ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier tab. However, if the application is intended for 4.00 or later, the users will need to be migrated to the ME Runtime 4.00 and later tab.  Tip:  If your system uses FactoryTalk Security, the user requesting the migration of 3.20 and earlier accounts must have Common/Write and Common/Create Children permission in the Users and Users Groups folders, and permission to modify applications in the directory.  Runtime 3.20 and earlier accounts must be saved before migrating to 4.00 and later. If new users on the ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier tab have not been saved, an error message will appear when you attempt to migrate the accounts to 4.00 and later.  To migrate ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user accounts  With the Runtime Security editor open, click the View menu.  Select Migrate ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier accounts.  The user names on the ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier tab will appear on the ME Runtime 4.00 and later tab.  Migrate user accounts  The following behavior applies to both private and Windows domain accounts.  If the same user account appears on both tabs, but the security code settings and/or login/logout are different, the account on the ME Runtime 4.00 and later tab will not be changed.  If an ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier account is not in the ME Runtime 4.00 and later account or the FactoryTalk directory, it will be added to ME Runtime 4.00 and later, and to FactoryTalk, with its 3.20 or earlier password, security codes, and login/logout macros.  If an ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier account already exists in FactoryTalk, and has the same password in both 3.20 or earlier and FactoryTalk, it will be added to the ME Runtime 4.00 and later tab. If the password for the 3.20 account and the FactoryTalk are different, a message appears asking whether you want to replace the FT user account with the 3.x user account. To migrate the account, choose Yes.  Tip:  ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier passwords are not case sensitive. FactoryTalk Security passwords are case sensitive. When ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier passwords are migrated, the resulting ME Runtime 4.00 and later passwords are lower case.  If the password for a 3.20 and earlier account is shorter than the FactoryTalk policy setting for minimum password length, the account will not be migrated. (By default, the policy setting for FactoryTalk View Machine Edition is disabled, that is, set to 0 characters.)  An information message is logged to FactoryTalk Diagnostics for each account migrated. An error message is logged for each account that&nbsp;cannot be migrated.  If an ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user account has no security codes defined, the account will initially be migrated to the ME Runtime 4.00 and later tab. However, once the Runtime Security editor has been closed and reopened, the user will not appear. This is because users who are assigned no security codes in ME Runtime 4.00 and later are not saved into the editor.  Tip:  Do not attempt to copy and paste accounts from one tab to the other. It may produce undesirable results.  If the DEFAULT user has a Login or Logout macro assigned, the macro will not be migrated with the user accounts.  The security codes for the DEFAULT user are not migrated with the user accounts. If any code or event in the application (such as animation) relies on the DEFAULT user having or not having a particular code, the DEFAULT user's security code settings will have to be re-set manually to make the application work as it did in 3.20 and earlier.  Be sure the DEFAULT user is allowed at least one security code that is also assigned to the initial graphic display. If the DEFAULT user has no security codes allowed, when the application is run, no display will open.  See also  Add users or groups to FactoryTalk Security  Set up RSView 4.0 user accounts  "
  },
  {
    "id": 196,
    "title": "About security for ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier accounts",
    "url": "67346.htm",
    "text": "For ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier accounts, security provides a way to restrict access to certain parts of the system. You can limit the users who have access to the system by setting up user accounts and passwords. You can also limit users to specific graphic displays.  If you don&#8217;t set up security, anyone can use the system and view all the graphic displays without logging on.  Tip:  Remote Display Number controls do not use the security code. Remote display changes occur whether or not the logged-in user has security access to a given display.  Limit access to graphic displays  By default, all users have unrestricted access to all graphic displays. When you assign a security code to a graphic display, only those users who have access to the display can open it. There are 16 security codes, A through P, and the asterisk symbol (*). The * represents unlimited access.  There are two approaches to setting up security: by inclusion and by exclusion. Security by inclusion restricts access only to specific graphic displays, leaving the rest available to all users. Use this method in situations where most users can have access to most displays. Security by exclusion restricts access for all users, except the system administrator, to only a few specific graphic displays.  Set up security  Use these editors to set up security:  Graphics - assign security codes to graphic displays in the Display Settings dialog box of this editor.  Runtime Security - set up user accounts and passwords in this editor, and specify the security codes the user has access to. You can also assign login and logout macros to users in this editor.  Macros - create the users&#8217; login and logout macros in this editor.  See also  Set up FactoryTalk View 3.x user accounts  Causes of run-time errors for FactoryTalk View 3.x user accounts  Security by inclusion  Security by exclusion  The Graphics editor  ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier tab  Create a macro  "
  },
  {
    "id": 197,
    "title": "Set up ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user accounts",
    "url": "67380.htm",
    "text": "The first account ID in the ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier Accounts spreadsheet is DEFAULT, with security codes A through P selected. The DEFAULT account is used when no user is logged on. Unless you change the security code settings for the DEFAULT account, everyone has access to all parts of the system without logging on. You can change which security codes are selected for the DEFAULT account, but you cannot change the name of this user account.  To set up ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user accounts  In the System folder in the Explorer window, double-click the Runtime Security icon to open the editor.  Click the ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier tab.  The Default account appears in the form. Click Next or click on a blank line in the spreadsheet to enter a new account.  Type an Account ID in the form or spreadsheet section. The Login and Logout macros are optional.  Type a Password in the form section.  Click Accept to confirm. Click Discard to cancel changes.  In the Password Confirmation dialog box, type the password you have entered for the account, and then click OK.  In the Runtime Security dialog box, click Next to clear the form box.  Tip:  When FactoryTalk View Studio opens, it inherits the security context of the user currently logged into Windows.  Remote Display Number controls do not use the security code. Remote display changes occur whether or not the logged-in user has security access to a given display.  Changes made to security in the Runtime Security editor take effect as soon as they are saved.  You can select users and groups from either a network Windows domain or a local Windows domain.  See also  Specify ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user security codes  Delete a ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user account  Confirm ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier passwords  Causes of run-time errors for ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user accounts  "
  },
  {
    "id": 198,
    "title": "Specify ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user security codes",
    "url": "217039.htm",
    "text": "ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user accounts work with security codes to determine who has access to the system. To have access to a display that has one of these security codes assigned to it, the user must have an account set up with that code turned on.  To specify ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user security codes  Click a user name in the spreadsheet to select it. The name and other details are shown in the form section.  Specify the user&#8217;s access in the Security Codes part of the form by clearing the check box beside the security codes, to which they do not have access, or double click in the appropriate spreadsheet column to change the Y to N.  Click Accept.  Repeat the process for each user.  When you have finished adding user accounts, click Close to close the editor and save changes.  See also  Set up ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user accounts  Delete a ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user account  "
  },
  {
    "id": 199,
    "title": "Delete a ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user account",
    "url": "217040.htm",
    "text": "You may need to delete a user account.  To delete a ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user account  In the spreadsheet area, click the number at the left end of the row, and then press Delete on your keyboard.  See also  Set up ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user accounts  Specify ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user security codes  "
  },
  {
    "id": 200,
    "title": "Delete all objects from a display",
    "url": "67805.htm",
    "text": "To remove all objects from a graphic display  Choose Clear All from the Edit menu.  Tip:  Use Undo from the Edit menu to restore your display if you have accidentally chosen the Clear All command.  See also  Delete objects  "
  },
  {
    "id": 201,
    "title": "ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier tab",
    "url": "67344.htm",
    "text": "The user accounts entered in the ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier tab will be used when creating applications for 3.20 and earlier runtime applications.  Use the ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier tab to enter user names and passwords for user accounts, and then assign security access to them for applications. The editor consists of a form area and a spreadsheet.  The View menu  Use the options in the View menu to:  show or hide the spreadsheet and form  change the spreadsheet font  restore the default font  The Toolbar  Use the tools in the toolbar to:  Cut, copy, paste and delete selected text. Cutting or deleting a No security code changes it to a Yes. You cannot cut or delete Yes security codes.  Duplicate a selected user, with all the same settings, including the name  Insert a blank row above the row in which the cursor is located  Fill forward - with multiple rows selected, copy the settings from the first row into other selected rows  Sort multiple cells selected in a column alphanumerically by the selected cells' contents  Add a user or group  Tip:  A maximum of 255 user accounts can be added to the application.  Options  Account ID  Click Next or click on a blank line in the spreadsheet to enter a new account in this box. Type a user name or ID for the account (20 characters maximum, including spaces). The following characters are invalid: /\\;:|+*?<>. This box cannot be blank.  Changing a name in this box changes the account name in the spreadsheet. The Prev and Next buttons change to Accept and Discard.  The name is not case sensitive when the user types it at run time. However, FactoryTalk View uses all upper case for names in expressions.  You cannot modify the Account ID for a Windows domain user or group.  Login Macro  The login macro is optional. To run a macro each time this user logs in, type the macro name in this box or click the Browse button (\u2026) to select from a list of macros in the application.  Logout Macro  The logout macro is optional. To run a macro each time this user logs out, type the macro name in this box or click the Browse button (\u2026) to select from a list of macros in the application.  If a new user logs in before the previous user has logged out, the logout macro of the previous user runs after the new user logs in.  Password  Type a password for the account (14 characters maximum, including spaces). Passwords are not case sensitive. In the Password Confirmation dialog, retype the password and then click OK.  You cannot assign or modify a password for a Windows domain account from FactoryTalk View. To change the password, use the Users and Passwords tool in Windows.  Security Codes  The default is for all the boxes to be checked (Y is displayed in all columns in the spreadsheet). To block access to a security code, clear the check boxes for the code in the form section, or double click in the code's spreadsheet columns to change Y to N (or N to Y).  See also  About security for ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier accounts  Causes of run-time errors for ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user accounts  Change ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier passwords  Add Windows users or groups to the ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier Accounts list  Create a runtime application  "
  },
  {
    "id": 202,
    "title": "Security by inclusion",
    "url": "67348.htm",
    "text": "Important:  The following procedure applies only to accounts in the FactoryTalk View 3.x Accounts tab of the Runtime Security editor.  When you set up security by inclusion, you restrict access to specific parts of the system, leaving the rest available to all users. Use this method in situations where most users can have access to most of the graphic displays.  To set up security by inclusion  In the Graphics editor, assign security codes to the graphic displays you want to restrict access to. Only the users with access to the assigned security codes will be able to use the restricted displays. All users will have unlimited access to the displays that have not been assigned a specific security code.  In the Runtime Security editor, set up user accounts to specify which security codes users have access to. When you enter a user&#8217;s name in the Runtime Security spreadsheet, the default is for the user to have access (Y) to all codes. For each user, turn off access (N) to all the codes that user is not allowed to use.  For the DEFAULT user in User Accounts, turn off access to those codes that are being used to restrict access to certain graphic displays. This ensures the security of the displays you have assigned these codes to.  See also  Security by exclusion  Set up FactoryTalk View 3.x user accounts  Example: Security by inclusion  "
  },
  {
    "id": 203,
    "title": "Security by exclusion",
    "url": "67354.htm",
    "text": "Important:  The following procedure applies only to accounts in the ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier tab of the Runtime Security editor.  Example  Security by exclusion restricts access for all users, except the system administrator, to only a few specific graphic displays.  To set up security by exclusion  In the Graphics editor, assign security codes to the graphic displays you want to restrict access to. Only the users with access to the assigned security codes will be able to use the restricted displays. All users will have unlimited access to the displays that have not been assigned a specific security code.  You can assign the asterisk (*) to a display if everyone is to have access to it. For example, you might assign unlimited access to the startup graphic display.  In the Runtime Security editor, specify the users and set their access for all codes to No (N) except for those each user is to have access to.  For the DEFAULT user, turn off access to those codes that have been assigned to specific graphic displays. This ensures the security of the displays you have assigned these codes to.  See also  Security by inclusion  Set up FactoryTalk View 3.x user accounts  About security for ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier accounts  "
  },
  {
    "id": 204,
    "title": "Add Windows users or groups to the 3.20 and earlier Accounts list",
    "url": "67362.htm",
    "text": "The following procedure applies only to accounts in the ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier tab of the Runtime Security editor. To add Windows-linked users or groups to FactoryTalk Security, see Add users or groups to FactoryTalk Security.  In the Windows Security Options dialog box, you can add Windows users or domain groups to the FactoryTalk View user accounts list. All users must be in the same Windows domain. The users and groups that you add will have the default security access specified for the Default user. By default, all the account codes A-P will be enabled for the Default user. You can customize the individual user's or groups' security codes in the Runtime Security editor.  You can use a private list of users or a list of users and groups from the Windows Domain, but not both. If you choose to use Windows groups and users, any users that you have set up in the Runtime Security editor will be deleted.  To add Windows users or groups to the FactoryTalk View user accounts  In the Runtime Security editor, select Windows Security Options from the Setup menu.  Select the Use Windows Accounts as source for FactoryTalk View User Accounts check box. This will delete any users presently listed in the Runtime Security editor.  In the Windows Domain box, select the Windows domain that contains the users you are going to add to the FactoryTalk View user accounts. All users must be in the same Windows domain.  To add all the members of the Windows Users or Groups list to the FactoryTalk View User Accounts list, click the Double arrow (>>).  To add a single member of the Windows Users or Groups to the FactoryTalk View User Accounts list, click a member to select it and then click the Right arrow (>) to add it.  To add selected users or groups, Ctrl-click the members you want to add and then click the Double arrow (>>) to copy them into the FactoryTalk View User Accounts list.  Click OK to return to the main Runtime Security window where the members of the user accounts list will be shown.  Edit the new accounts.  To remove members from the FactoryTalk View User Accounts list  In the Runtime Security editor, select Windows Security Options from the Setup menu.  Click a user or group to select it, or Ctrl-click to select more than one, and then click Remove to delete the selected members from the list.  Tip:  Entries in the Windows Users or Groups list are in alphabetical order with the domain groups listed first, followed by the users.  A maximum of 255 user accounts can be added to the application.  Options  Windows Domain  This list shows the local and network Windows domains that are available on the machine that FactoryTalk View is installed on. Select the domain you are going to choose users from. If you have selected users from one domain, and then choose another domain, the FactoryTalk View User list in this dialog box is cleared.  Windows Users or Groups  This list displays all the users in the currently selected Windows domain.  FactoryTalk View User  This list displays whatever users you have added from the Windows domain user accounts list. You can remove individual users from this list.  See also  Set up FactoryTalk View 3.x user accounts  FactoryTalk View 3.x Accounts tab  Add users or groups to FactoryTalk Security  "
  },
  {
    "id": 205,
    "title": "Change ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier passwords",
    "url": "67360.htm",
    "text": "If you are using security, assign users an Account ID and a password in the Runtime Security editor. If you are using accounts set up in the Runtime Security editor, you can only change passwords using FactoryTalk View Studio.  Tip:  If you are using Windows users or groups, you can only change passwords through the Control Panel. You cannot change them in FactoryTalk View Studio.  Users cannot change their passwords and you cannot change the passwords at run time.  To change a user's password  In the Runtime Security editor's spreadsheet area, click the row for the user's account.  In the form area, in the Password box, type the new password.  In the Password Confirmation box, type the new password again, and then click OK.  See also  Set up ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user accounts  ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier Accounts tab  Add Windows users or groups to the ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier Accounts list  About security for ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier accounts  "
  },
  {
    "id": 206,
    "title": "Confirm ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier passwords",
    "url": "67382.htm",
    "text": "The Password Confirmation dialog box is displayed when you have entered a password for a user account and pressed Accept. Retype the password to confirm it.  To confirm a user account password  Type the password in the Confirmation box.  Click OK.  See also  Set up ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user accounts  Change ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier passwords  About security for ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier accounts  "
  },
  {
    "id": 207,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier user accounts",
    "url": "67358.htm",
    "text": "At run time, if a user attempts to open a graphic display and she or he does not have access, the application logs an error to diagnostics.  See also  Set up FactoryTalk View 3.x user accounts  "
  },
  {
    "id": 208,
    "title": "Example: Security by exclusion",
    "url": "67352.htm",
    "text": "To set up security for a system that has a system administrator with access to all graphic displays, and two users with restricted access, you would do the following:  In the Graphics editor:  Assign security code A to a graphic display named Boiler  Assign security code B to all the other graphic displays  In the Runtime Security editor:  Leave all the access rights to all codes turned on (Y) for System Administrator  Turn off (N) access rights to everything except code A for User1  Turn off (N) access rights to everything except code A for User2  With this setup, User1 and User2, who have access to code A only, can log on, view the Boiler display, and log off. The system administrator, who has access to all codes, (that is, both A and B), can view all the graphic displays.  See also  The Graphics editor  ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier tab  Security by exclusion  About security for ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier accounts  Example: Security by inclusion  "
  },
  {
    "id": 209,
    "title": "Example: Security by inclusion",
    "url": "67350.htm",
    "text": "To set up security for a system that has two restricted graphic displays (Boiler and Reactor), and different users with different restrictions to access, you could do the following:  In the Graphics editor:  Assign security code A to the graphic display Boiler.  Assign security code B to the graphic display Reactor.  Assign no security code to other displays.  In the Runtime Security editor:  Turn off (N) the access rights to code A for all User1 type users. These users can log on, view all the displays except the Boiler, and log off.  Turn off (N) the access rights to code B for all User2 type users. These users can log on, view all the displays except the Reactor, and log off.  Turn off (N) the access rights to both codes A and B for default users. These users can log on, view all the displays except the Boiler and the Reactor, and log off.  See also  The Graphics editor  ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier tab  Security by inclusion  About security for ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier accounts  Example: Security by exclusion  "
  },
  {
    "id": 210,
    "title": "Communicate with programmable logic controllers",
    "url": "67430.htm",
    "text": "You can collect programmable controller data via OPC servers to Allen-Bradley&reg; and non-Allen-Bradley devices.  FactoryTalk View Studio is an OPC client. The default OPC server installed with FactoryTalk View Studio is FactoryTalk Linx. However, you can use third-party OPC servers to communicate with your application's data sources. Most OPC servers are capable of communicating with a variety of devices over a variety of networks using a variety of protocols.  To communicate with programmable controllers  Specify a FactoryTalk Linx or OPC server for your application.  Configure a device shortcut, that is, a path between the data server and each controller you want to use as a data source.  Add device tags to the tag database for your application, or use direct references to objects in the graphic displays.  To specify an OPC server for your project  In the Explorer window, select the application name at the root of the tree and right-click; then select New Data Server.  Select FactoryTalk Linx or OPC Data Server.  In the OPC Data Server Properties tab(s), specify the OPC server name (ProgID), host computer name (if the server is remote), your name for the server and, optionally, a description. Click the Browse button to select from the list of available servers.  To configure third-party OPC communications  Once you have added a third-party OPC server to your application, the Tag Browser should display that server's data items in the correct syntax for that server.  To configure FactoryTalk Linx communications  If you are using a FactoryTalk Linx data server, this step creates the communications configuration file that your application uses to communicate with the devices on the network. You can create separate configurations for testing during development and for actual use at run time.  In the Applications Explorer, select the FactoryTalk Linx data server.  Double-click Communications Setup to open the Configuration Wizard.  Create a new configuration and click Finish.  In the Communications Setup editor, add devices, set up device shortcuts, and construct a communications tree. As you add devices, you define their IP addresses. In the left pane, create and name shortcuts between the server and devices. Then select a device in the right pane and click Apply. You can continue to add devices by right-clicking the elements of the tree and selecting from the applicable devices.  Tip:  Shortcuts configured on the Target tab apply to the communications configuration of the run-time terminal. This file is downloaded to the run-time terminal with the application and can be used with the application at run time. Shortcuts configured in the Local tab apply to the communications configuration of the development computer. The same shortcut names are used in both instances, but they can be configured to refer to different devices.  The tree in the Local tab is reflected in the Communications Explorer. Changes made in one will also appear in the other.  To add OPC server tags  In the Tag Database editor in FactoryTalk View Studio, create a new analog, digital, string or array tag. Block tags are not supported in an OPC server.  In the Data Source box, select Device.  Click the Browse button in the Address box to open the Tag Browser.  In the left pane, select the OPC server that your application is using.  Open the Online item to show the single element processor tags in the right pane. Multi-element tags and program tags are listed in the left hand pane, below the Online heading. Click any of them to show their elements in the right hand pane.  Select the tag you want to use and then click OK. The full path to the tag you selected appears in the Address box, in the correct syntax for the data server you are using.  Click Accept.  Tip:  The OPC server is configured separately. Before you can add a data server to your application, the data server must be correctly installed on the local computer or on a remote computer accessible via a network.  See also  Set up OPC communications  Add a data server to an application  ",
    "keywords": {
      "communicate": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 211,
    "title": "About OLE for Process Control",
    "url": "67455.htm",
    "text": "OLE for Process Control (OPC&reg;) is an open and inter-operable interface standard, based on the functional requirements of Microsoft&#8217;s OLE/COM technology that fosters inter-operability between automation/control applications and box systems/devices.  OPC offers advantages for connecting to non-Allen-Bradley devices, because OPC is  Highly efficient  Reliable (particularly over network)  Actively supported by Microsoft  Tip:  For applications running on PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminals, the OPC server must be local. Applications based on Windows 7 SP1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1, Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server 2016 operating systems.  To set up the application as an OPC client  Set up an OPC data server, specifying the OPC server name (ProgID), host computer name (if the server is remote) and a local name and, optionally, a description.  In the tag database, define a tag with Device as its data source.  In the Address box, specify the OPC item that will provide values for the tag.  Tip:  Please refer to your server documentation for information on deploying OPC servers on a PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal.  See also  Set up OPC communications  Communicate with programmable logic controllers  ",
    "keywords": {
      "OPC": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 212,
    "title": "OPC",
    "url": "67883.htm",
    "text": "An abbreviation for OLE for Process Control, a method for transferring and sharing information among automation control applications and communications devices. OLE is an acronym for Object Linking and Embedding, which is a way to transfer and share information among Windows applications.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 213,
    "title": "Set up OPC communications",
    "url": "67400.htm",
    "text": "FactoryTalk View Studio is an OPC client. Its function is to communicate with an OPC server. The default OPC server installed with FactoryTalk View Studio is FactoryTalk Linx. FactoryTalk Linx is a communication server built around FactoryTalk technology, to assist in developing and running your FactoryTalk View Machine Edition applications. It is an OPC 2.05 compliant server and will run on multiple platforms, ranging from PanelView Plus dedicated terminals to desktop computers.  However, you can use third-party OPC servers to communicate with your application's data sources. Most OPC servers are capable of communicating with a variety of devices over a variety of networks using a variety of protocols.  You can communicate with Allen-Bradley controllers and certain non-Allen-Bradley devices that are connected to an OPC server. OPC servers for applications running on PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminals must be on the run-time computer. OPC servers for applications running on Windows 7 SP1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1, Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server 2016 operating systems can be local or remote.  To set up OPC communication  Set up an OPC data server, specifying the OPC server name (ProgID), host computer name (if the server is remote), your name for the server and, optionally, a description.  Configure a driver in the OPC server software. The terminology and precise procedure may differ from one OPC server to another, but what you are doing is configuring a connection between the server and specific data items in a device. The type of driver you select is dependent on the type of network the devices are linked to.  Define a network path between the OPC server and each device you want to use as a data source. Different OPC servers use different terms for this path. In RSLinx 2.x, an alias (a name) that defines a network path from an OPC server to a device is called an OPC topic. In FactoryTalk Linx, the path is called a device shortcut. Other third party servers use other terms. If the server has been correctly installed, it will be able to serve up data items that you can connect to through the Tag Browser.  In the tag database, define device tags.  In the Address box of the Tags editor, specify the OPC item that will provide values for the tag.  Tip:  Please refer to your server documentation for information on deploying OPC servers on a PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, or PanelView Plus CE terminal.  See also  Communicate with programmable logic controllers  Add a data server to an application  OPC Data server properties (General tab)  OPC Data server properties (Advanced tab)  ",
    "keywords": {
      "communicate": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 214,
    "title": "Add a data server to an application",
    "url": "67434.htm",
    "text": "To use data server tags, you need to add an OPC data server to provide the link between your application and the hardware device containing the tags being referenced.  FactoryTalk View Studio is an OPC client. The default OPC server installed with FactoryTalk View Studio is FactoryTalk Linx. However, you can use third-party OPC servers to communicate with your application's data sources. Most OPC servers are capable of communicating with a variety of devices over a variety of networks using a variety of protocols.  To add a data server  In the Explorer window, position the mouse cursor at the root of the application, right-click the application icon and select New Data Server from the Context menu.  or  From the File menu, select New.  Select FactoryTalk Linx or OPC.  In the OPC properties dialog box that opens, specify the required information in the General and Advanced tabs.  Click OK in each tab to save the data server information.  To modify the properties of an OPC data server after it has been added  Right-click the data server's icon and then select Properties from the Context menu.  In the Data Server Properties tabs, make the necessary changes, and then click OK.  To delete a data server  Right-click the data server and then select Delete.  See also  Data server properties (General tab)  Data server properties (Advanced tab)  ",
    "keywords": {
      "data server": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 215,
    "title": "OPC Data server properties (General tab)",
    "url": "67436.htm",
    "text": "The General tab of the Data Server dialog box lets you specify general information for a new data server or change information about an existing server. It also shows server status.  To specify the general properties of a data server  In the Explorer window, right-click the data server icon and then select Properties from the Context menu.  In the General tab, specify the OPC server name (Programmatic ID), host computer name (if the server is remote), your name for the server and, optionally, a description. Click the Browse button to select from the list of available servers.  Click Apply to save the information.  Options  Name  Type a name for the data server. This will appear in the Explorer window. The name of the data server cannot include hyphens (-).  Description  Type a description for the data server. For example, use this box to describe the server's location, or to identify a contact person in case of failure.  Computer hosting the server  Server will be hosted on local computer  Click this button if the server will be running on the same machine as the application. For applications running on a PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, or PanelView Plus CE terminal, the server must be on the local computer.  Server will be hosted on remote computer  Type the name of the computer that is hosting the OPC server, or click the Browse button to navigate to a computer and select it.  OPC Server name (ProgID)  Type the name of the OPC server or its ProgID, or click the browser button to navigate to the server and select it. The list displays the servers installed on the development computer.  If you want to use RSLinx Classic as the OPC server, and RSLinx Classic is installed on the same computer as FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station, click RSLinx OPC Server.  If RSLinx Classic is not installed on the same computer as FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station, click RSLinx Remote OPC Server.  See also  Add a data server to an application  HMI server properties  Data server properties (Advanced tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 216,
    "title": "OPC Data server properties (Advanced tab)",
    "url": "67438.htm",
    "text": "In the Advanced tab you can create a cache of the data server&#8217;s tag names, and choose whether to include additional tag information, such as tag data types, in the cache. Creating a cache lets you browse for tags when the server is not available.  To create a tag cache for a data server  In the Explorer window, right-click the data server icon and then select Properties from the Context menu.  On the Advanced tab, click the check box labeled Include extended information in the server cache file if you want extended tag information to be available in the cache.  Click the Create Cache button to create the cache. If the cache already exists, the button caption will be Synchronize and the button will allow you to update the cache contents.  Options  Include extended information in the server cache file  Click this check box to include extended information. Including extended information will increase the time needed to create or synchronize the cache.  See also  HMI server properties  Data server properties (General tab)  Add a data server to an application  "
  },
  {
    "id": 217,
    "title": "HMI server properties (General tab)",
    "url": "67398.htm",
    "text": "The General tab of the HMI Server Properties dialog box displays information about the HMI server and lets you change its description.  To modify the general properties  In the Explorer window, right-click the HMI server icon and then select Properties from the Context menu.  In the General tab add or change the description.  Click Apply to save the changes.  Options  Name  Displays the name of the HMI server. You cannot change it.  Description  You can add text to describe the HMI server or edit an existing description.  Project file  Shows the location of the HMI server project file.  Number of displays  Shows the number of displays contained in the HMI server project.  Licensed maximum  Shows the maximum number of displays that can be contained in the HMI server project. The activation key that the HMI server is using sets this limit.  Tip:  Adding faceplate displays to an application affects the license count. Each added faceplate display (.gfx file) counts as one display for activation purposes. The corresponding global object display (.ggfx file) does not add to the total license count.  See also  Set up OPC communications  Data server properties (General tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 218,
    "title": "About communication drivers",
    "url": "67402.htm",
    "text": "Communication drivers have two functions:  To allow FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station to communicate tag information to and from various Allen-Bradley devices.  To allow the terminal to accept runtime application files (.mer).  To add a driver  From the Communications Explorer, right-click the workstation and select Add Driver.  Choose a FactoryTalk Linx driver to add from the list of Available Drivers that shows.  To configure a download driver  If your network is anything but Ethernet, you must configure a download driver on the terminal that the application will run on. If you are using an Ethernet link, you do not need to configure the driver. The Ethernet driver is selected by default.  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station on the terminal. The FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station dialog box opens. This is the first dialog in the terminal's configuration mode.  Click Terminal Settings, then select Networks and Communications > FactoryTalk Linx Communications.  In the FactoryTalk Linx Configuration dialog box, select the network type, and then click Edit Driver.  Make the necessary changes to the driver, and close the window.  Restart the terminal to load the new configuration.  Tip:  The FactoryTalk Linx serial (DF1) driver does not support KF2, KF3, or KE devices. To use these drivers on a Windows Server 2008 operating system, use RSLinx Classic as the data server.  The Kepware Hilscher Universal and Modbus Plus communications drivers are not supported for PanelView Plus 7 Standard, PanelView Plus 6 Compact, or PanelView Plus Compact terminals. However, the drivers are supported on PanelView Plus 6 Compact 1000 terminal.  See also  Start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station  Configure download drivers  ",
    "keywords": {
      "communication driver": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 219,
    "title": "What is an HMI tag database?",
    "url": "67445.htm",
    "text": "In the HMI tag database, you can define data you want FactoryTalk View to monitor. There is one HMI tag database per HMI server. Each entry in the database is called an HMI tag. An HMI tag is a logical name for a variable in a device or in local memory (RAM) that is referenced in the HMI tag database.  All parts of the system use tag values. Graphics uses tag values to control the animation in a display or update a trend graph; Alarming monitors HMI tag values and compares them to \"acceptable\" limits; Data Log stores tag values to create a historical record.  HMI tags are required when you need extra information included with the tag value. This extra information can be a minimum/ maximum value range or value units. If you do not need this information, you can use direct references to tags in other data servers.  HMI tags you do not create  A set of system tags is created automatically when you create an HMI server project, and stored in a folder called 'system' in the tag database.  System tags - store information generated while the system is running, including alarm reset time and date, system time and date, and current user information. There are analog, digital, and string system tags. You can use them anywhere you use other types of tags, but you cannot edit system tags.  Tip:  The maximum number of alarmable HMI tags allowed is 5000 per HMI server.  Each graphic display can contain up to 1000 expressions or references to tags.  See also  About HMI tag types  About data sources  Set up an HMI tag database  Log tag data  ",
    "keywords": {
      "HMI tag database": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 220,
    "title": "Set up an HMI tag database",
    "url": "67457.htm",
    "text": "An HMI tag database consists of records called tags. (A tag is similar to a symbol in PLC programming terminology.) In the HMI tag database you define the data you want the application to monitor. There is one tag database per HMI server.  To set up a tag database  Develop a system of conventions for naming tags.  Develop a hierarchy of folders to organize tags into groups.  For example, a folder that represents a particular area of a plant can contain folders that represent the machines in that area. Each machine folder would contain a group of tags representing the devices being monitored.  In the Tags editor, create the folders and tags that make up the database. To create an HMI tag you specify its name, the type of data it will contain, and its data source. The exact information that is required depends on the tag&#8217;s type and data source.  In the Tags editor, set up the alarms for individual tags. You can do this when you add a tag, or you can edit the tag later to add this information.  See also  Communicate with programmable logic controllers  Create HMI tags  About data sources  About HMI tag types  HMI tag database  The folder hierarchy  "
  },
  {
    "id": 221,
    "title": "Log tag data",
    "url": "67470.htm",
    "text": "The HMI tag database does not store actual tag values. Instead, it defines which values are to be collected. The values themselves are stored in a value table on the HMI server. When the HMI server is turned off, the value table is cleared. To have a permanent record of tag values, log them to the data log file on disk.  To log tag values to disk, you create a data log model in the Data Log Model editor and specify the tags that are to be logged.  To see the current value of a tag (the value that is stored in the value table), design a graphic with display fields or a trend object to show you this information.  Tip:  The maximum number of tags that can be logged by the data log model is 10,000.  See also  The Data Log Model editor  Value table  "
  },
  {
    "id": 222,
    "title": "About HMI tag types",
    "url": "67443.htm",
    "text": "Tags you create in FactoryTalk View are called HMI tags. When you create a tag, you assign it a tag type and a data source. Tag type specifies how the application interprets data from the programmable controller or other source, and how it is represented in the application.  You can create and use three types of HMI tags based on the data that they can store:  Analog tag stores a numeric value from a range of values defined for the tag. Use them to represent devices that can have a range of values such as temperature, pressure, flow, or the position of a rotary control.  Digital tag accepts any numeric value. Zero will be written as False (0) and any non-zero number will be written as True (1). Use them to represent devices that have two states: on or off, such as switches, contacts and relays.  String tag stores ASCII strings that can be a string of characters or whole words. The maximum size string allowed is 82 characters. Use string tags to represent devices that use text, such as a bar code scanner that uses an alphanumeric product code.  In addition to the tags you create, the application provides a set of system tags.  Tip:  In discussions about setting up communications for the application, you will find the terms device tag and memory tag. These refer to the data source specified for a given tag, rather than the type of data it accepts.  The maximum number of alarmable tags allowed is 40,000 per HMI server, 10,000 of which can be analog tags.  Each graphic display can contain up to 1000 expressions or references to tags.  See also  About system tags  About data sources  ",
    "keywords": {
      "HMI tag": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 223,
    "title": "Create analog HMI tags",
    "url": "67472.htm",
    "text": "Analog HMI tags can have a range of values, and can represent complex states, such as the position of rotary controls or a temperature. When you choose the analog tag type in the Type box of the Tags editor's form area, the additional input boxes described below appear.  Options  Tag  Minimum/Maximum  Type the minimum and maximum values acceptable for this tag.  These boxes establish the minimum and maximum possible values for the tag. They ensure that values outside a specified range will not be written to the data source. However, values outside the range can still be read from the data source.  Important:  The minimum and maximum values for a floating-point analog tag cannot exceed the range +/-3.40282e +38.  Scale  Specify a scale value. The value from the data source is multiplied by the scale value before it is written to the value table. The value specified in FactoryTalk View is divided by the scale value before it is written to the data source. A scale value of 0 will result in an error.  Offset  Specify an offset. The offset value is added to the (scaled) value from the data source before the value is written to the value table. It is subtracted from the value before it is written to the data source.  Scale and Offset values work together to modify the \"raw data\" that comes from, and goes to, the data source. Scale is a multiplication factor and Offset is a fixed value. Values from the data source are first scaled, then the offset is added. The formula for this calculation is:  FactoryTalk View value = (data source value x scale) + offset  When a number is written to the data source, the process is reversed. That is, the offset is subtracted, and the scale number is used for division. The formula for this calculation is:  data source value = (FactoryTalk View value - offset)/scale  This ensures that the correct, unmodified value is sent to the data source.  The default values are Scale = 1 and Offset = 0. With these values, a value from the data source will be saved in the database unmodified, and values from the database will be written to the data source unmodified.  Units  Type the units the tag value is measured in, for example, PSI or rpm. The text label is for display only. It can be up to 20 characters long.  Data Type  For analog tags with Device as the data source, the data type determines the format used when reading and writing tag data to the data server. Select the data type that matches the format of the data stored in the data server.  For analog tags connecting to a Logix 5000&#8482; processor, specify a data type that corresponds to the data type in the Logix 5000 processor: Byte, Unsigned Integer, Integer, Long Integer, or Floating Point.  Important:  Do not point an analog HMI tag to a Boolean device tag.  For tags with Memory as the data source, select the data type that matches the format of the data you will store in the tag.  Choosing Default is the same as choosing Floating Point.  The data types and their allowable minimum and maximum values are:  Unsigned Integer - unsigned 16-bit integer; range 0 to 65535  Integer - signed 16-bit integer; range -32768 to 32767  Long Integer - signed 32-bit integer; range -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647  Floating Point - single-precision (32-bit) floating point; 1 bit is used for the sign (if any), 8 bits for the exponent, and 23 bits for the significant. This allows no more than 7 digits. In FactoryTalk View Machine Edition, floating point values are rounded to six digits. Therefore, using a floating point data type and adding to it a value that exceeds the 6 significant digits will result in a loss of precision.  Byte - unsigned 8-bit integer; range 0 to 255  3-Digit BCD - 3-digit binary-coded decimal; range 0 to 999  4-Digit BCD - 4-digit binary-coded decimal; range 0 to 9999  Tip:  The default data type is Floating Point.  For tags using data types other than floating point, the data will be stored internally in 'int32' (32-bit signed integer) format.  For tags using data types other than floating point, if the scale, offset, min, max, or initial value is used with a decimal point, the value is stored internally in floating point format. This means that the maximum value for the tag is 16,777,216, which is the maximum integer value for single precision floating point numbers.  Each graphic display can contain up to 1000 expressions or references to tags.  See also  Create HMI tags  About data sources  Log tag data  The Tags editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 224,
    "title": "Create digital HMI tags",
    "url": "67474.htm",
    "text": "Digital tags will accept any numeric value. Zero will be written as False (0) and any non-zero number will be written as True (1). Use them to represent devices that have two states: on or off, such as switches, contacts and relays.  Important:  Do not point a digital HMI tag to a non-Boolean device tag.  Each graphic display can contain up to 1000 expressions or references to tags.  See also  Create HMI tags  About data sources  Log tag data  "
  },
  {
    "id": 225,
    "title": "Create string HMI tags",
    "url": "67476.htm",
    "text": "String tags refer to ASCII strings or a series of characters or whole words.  When creating string HMI tags:  You cannot define an alarm for a string tag.  The initial value for a string tag must be less than or equal to its length.  You must append the modifier \"Lx\" to the address, where x specifies the number of 16-bit words to read or write, instead of the number of bytes. Do not add any space between the address and the appended length modifier. If you import a legacy application, you will need to modify the addresses of any string tags unless they already use the string (ST) data type. For example, string displays, string input objects, and the alarm message connections may require the modification.  In the Tags editor, in the Length text box, type a number (1-82) to specify the length of the string tag in bytes. The length must be a multiple of the size of the programmable controller data element you are addressing. For example, if you reference two-byte data elements in an integer section, the string tag length must be a multiple of two. If you reference one-byte data elements in an ASCII section, the string tag length must be a multiple of one.  Tip:  String HMI string tags that use the Integer (N) and Binary (B) data types cannot be written to or read.  Each graphic display can contain up to 1000 references to expressions or tags.  When setting up a string tag that will read from a Logix 5000 processor, in the Tag Browser, select the element ending in .len. When the address appears in the Tags editor, delete .len from the address.  If you are using ControlLogix&reg; string tags with a non-zero index to the string array, the length you specify for the tag must consider the index value. In other words, when the array index \"x\" is greater than 0, the length of the string to be displayed will be 82 - x. If you do not make this correction, wire-framed values will be shown.  In the first example string below, the index is 0, and the length of the string to be shown is specified as \"sc82\". In the second example string, the index is 9 and the length of the string to be displayed is adjusted accordingly: \"sc(82-9)\"  {[Control_Logix]ST1[10].DATA[0],sc82}  {[Control_Logix]ST1[10].DATA[9],sc73}  See also  Create HMI tags  About data sources  Log tag data  "
  },
  {
    "id": 226,
    "title": "About array tags",
    "url": "67478.htm",
    "text": "Array tags are used with alarms. Rather than using a tag for each alarm trigger, you can create an array tag with a specific number of elements and connect an alarm trigger to each element. This frees up more tags for other uses.  Use bit arrays with bit or LSBit trigger types to trigger alarm messages. By assigning alarm triggers to the elements in a bit array instead of to bit addresses, you leave more tags in the database free for other uses. When an element of an array changes from 0 to 1, it can generate an alarm message if a message has been set up for that bit position. With the Bit trigger type, you can generate simultaneous alarm messages, one for each element. With the LSB trigger type, only the lowest bit position would trigger an alarm.  The number of bits in the array depends on the data type of the tag. Integer data types, for example, return 16 bits per element, while Bit data types return 8 bit per element.  To trigger a digital alarm based on an array of controller bits, you must use a direct reference and the syntax tagname,Larraylength (for example, [PLC5]N7:0,L5.  Tip:  Do not leave a space between the tag address and the length.  For example, the address {[SLC]BlockWrite1, L8} (where BlockWrite is the equivalent of N7:0), will not work. {[SLC]BlockWrite1,L8} will work.  To trigger alarms using bit positions  In the Trigger tab of the Alarm Setup editor, create a Bit type alarm trigger.  In the Trigger dialog box, click Browse in the Tag column and browse to the first element of an array. (Example: in a Logix 5000 controller called CLGX1, select AAlm[0]. This is an integer tag type.)  Click OK to insert the tag address into your trigger tag. This address {[CLGX1]AAlm[0]} will be the starting element in your array tag. [CLGX1] is the direct reference, that is, the FactoryTalk Linx device shortcut name.  Double-click the address and append a comma and the letter L to the address. Then type the number of elements you want to include in your array tag. To add 64 elements to the example address, modify it to read {[CLGX1]AAlm[0],L64]}. This syntax will return (64 x 16 =) 1024 bits. Do not leave a space between the tag address and the length.  In the Messages tab, assign trigger values and alarm messages to as many of the elements in the array tag as you like. Each trigger value corresponds to a bit position, not a bit address.  In the Trigger Value column, enter a number for the element that will trigger the message, and create the message in the Message column. When that element in the array changes value, it will trigger the alarm and display the message.  Bit position  Trigger Value  Message  1  1  Line 1: Conveyor has stopped  2  2  Line 1: Power failure  3  3  Line 2: Conveyor has stopped  4  4  Line 2: Power failure  ..  ..  ..  1024  1024  Line 6: Oven door open  To trigger alarms using Least Significant Bit positions  In the Trigger tab of the Alarm Setup editor, create an LSBit type alarm trigger.  In the Trigger dialog box, click Browse in the Tag column and browse to the first element of an array.(For example, in a PLC5, select an integer tag N7:61. For this example, only the first three bit positions are used, so there is no need to specify a length (L) for the array. If you were monitoring bits in N7:62 as well, you would add L2 to the address: ::[PLC5]N7:61,L2  Specify these trigger values and alarm messages for the alarm trigger:  Bit in the array  Bit position  Trigger value  Message  00  1  1  Motor has lost power  01  2  2  Motor has stopped  02  3  3  Overload switch has lost power  At run time, if power to the motor is lost, all three bit values will change from 0 to 1, but only the first alarm message will be generated, because bit 00 is the least significant, that is, the lowest, bit. If the operator acknowledges the first alarm and power is not yet restored, the second alarm is generated, and so on.  See also  Set up alarm triggers (Trigger tab)  About HMI tag types  ",
    "keywords": {
      "array tag": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 227,
    "title": "Tips for using array tags",
    "url": "67880.htm",
    "text": "To create an array tag, specify how many elements to use, beginning with the first element at the tag&#8217;s address.  Use these tag data types for array tags. Use this table to determine how many data elements to address to provide the number of bits you need.  Data Type  Number of bits per element  Character  8  Byte  8  Short Integer  16  Word  16  Integer  32  Double Word  32  For example, if you want to monitor 128 bit positions for an alarm trigger, and you are using the Integer data type, you would append the modifier L4 to the tag name (because 4 x 32 = 128).  You cannot use HMI tags (digital or string tags) for array tags. You must use a direct reference (data server tags) for array tags.  Equivalent data types  Different processors and OPC servers use different terminology for tag data types. This section provides information about equivalent data types that you can use for array tags, with the associated number of bits for each.  Analog HMI tags created in FactoryTalk View  You can view a tag&#8217;s data type in the Tag Browser.  Data type  Number of bits  Byte  8  Unsigned Integer  16  Integer  16  3-Digit BCD  16  4-Digit BCD  16  Long Integer  32  PLC and SLC tags  When creating array tags, you can use PLC and SLC tags with this data type:  Data type  Number of bits  Short Integer  16  Data server tags with the Short Integer data type are shown in the Tag Browser with the Item Canonical Data Type of Integer.  To view a tag&#8217;s Item Canonical Data Type, in the Tag Browser, right-click the tag and select Properties.  Logix 5000 tags  When creating array tags, you can use Logix 5000 tags with these data types:  Table Heading  Table Heading  SINT  8  INT  16  DINT  32  Data server tags with the data types described in the table are shown in the Tag Browser with the Item Canonical Data Types of Character, Short Integer, and Long Integer, respectively.  See also  The Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor  About HMI tag types  About array tags  "
  },
  {
    "id": 228,
    "title": "About system tags",
    "url": "67481.htm",
    "text": "System tags store information generated while the system is running, such as the name of the logged-in user, system time and date, and the like. FactoryTalk View creates system tags when you create an application. The system tags are stored in the folder called system in the HMI tag database, and their data source is system. You can use system tags anywhere you would use any other type of tag, but cannot create or edit them. For example, you can create a string display object on a graphic display and assign the system tag, system\\Time, to the object. At run time, the object shows the information stored in the system tag, which is the current system time.  Open the system folder in the Tags editor to see the system tags.  System tags provide the following types of information:  Alarms  Time  Graphics  User  See also  About system alarms and time tags  About system graphics and user tags  About HMI tag types  About data sources  ",
    "keywords": {
      "system tag": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 229,
    "title": "About system alarms and time tags",
    "url": "67483.htm",
    "text": "The following tag contains the time and date when the status of alarms was last reset. The date uses the long date format.  Tag name  Type  Description  system\\AlarmResetDateAndTimeString  String  Read-only.  Contains the date and time of the last alarm reset.  At run time, date and time information stored in this tag is shown in the language of the run-time Windows operating system and in the format specified by the Regional or Regional and Language options in the Windows Control Panel.  These system tags record time and date information in various formats.  Tag names  Types  Descriptions  system\\Date  String  Read-only.  System date. At run time, date and time information stored in this tag is shown in the format specified by the Regional or Regional and Language options in the Windows Control Panel.  system\\DateAndTimeInteger  Analog  Read-only.  Number of seconds elapsed since midnight (00:00:00) January 1, 1970, coordinated universal time (UTC).  system\\DateAndTimeString  String  Read-only.  Complete date and time display. For example: Monday, December 12 2001 10:47:50 AM.  system\\DayOfMonth  Analog  Read-only.  Day of the month (1 - 31).  system\\DayOfWeek  Analog  Read-only.  Day of the week (1-7); Sunday = 1.  system\\DayOfYear  Analog  Read-only.  Day of the year (1-366).  system\\Hour  Analog  Read/write.  Hour of the day (0-23).  system\\Minute  Analog  Read/write.  Minutes (0 - 59).  system\\Month  Analog  Read-only.  Number for month (1-12).  system\\MonthString  String  Read-only.  Name of the month. At run time, date and time information stored in this tag is shown in the format specified by the Regional or Regional and Language options in the Windows Control Panel.  system\\Second  Analog  Read/write.  Seconds (0 - 59).  system\\Time  String  Read-only.  System time. At run time, date and time information stored in this tag is shown in the format specified by the Regional or Regional and Language options in the Windows Control Panel.  system\\Year  Analog  Read-only.  The year (1980-2099). At run time, date and time information stored in this tag is shown in the format specified by the Regional or Regional and Language options in the Windows Control Panel.  The changes to Windows regional settings are not reflected in the system\\AlarmResetDateAndTimeString, system\\Date, system\\Time, system\\DateAndTimeString, and system\\MonthString tags. The format used is defined by the operating system and cannot be changed.  See also  About system tags  About system graphics and user tags  About HMI tag types  "
  },
  {
    "id": 230,
    "title": "About system graphics and user tags",
    "url": "67485.htm",
    "text": "The following HMI tags can be used to make graphic objects appear as though they are blinking on and off.  Tag names  Types  Descriptions  system\\BlinkFast  Digital  Toggles on and off every 100 ms (10 times per second).  system\\BlinkSlow  Digital  Toggles on and off every 500 ms (twice per second).  The following tag contains the name of the current user.  Tag name  Type  Description  system\\User  String  Contains name of the logged-in user.  See also  About system tags  About system alarms and time tags  About HMI tag types  "
  },
  {
    "id": 231,
    "title": "About data sources",
    "url": "67447.htm",
    "text": "The FactoryTalk View documentation uses the term data source as a generic term that includes all possible sources of tag data, for both data server tags and HMI tags.  The data source can be memory or a device such as a programmable logic controller or OPC server. The application writes values to and reads values from the data source.  The data source is configured to exchange information (in the form of numeric or string values) between the application and the physical machine that your project is controlling.  The data source for analog, digital, or string HMI tags can be Device or Memory. For system tags, the data source is Memory.  Device  When you choose Device as the data source for a tag, you have to specify where the value for the tag is obtained. This can be a memory location in a programmable controller or an OPC Item.  Memory  The data for a tag with Memory as its data source comes only from the value table. A memory tag is not associated with a programmable controller. Its value at startup is defined by the Initial Value setting. The current value can be changed using an object in a graphic display.  System  When you create a new project, the application creates system tags. They are in a folder called System and have System as their data source. They store information that is generated while the system is running, such as the current system time and date. You cannot create or edit system tags, but you can use them wherever you would use any other tag.  Important:  Do not create HMI tags that are pointing to a System tag. When a project contains an HMI tag pointing to a System tag, users may fail in creating an MER or have runtime performance issues.  All tag values, whatever their source, are stored in the value table. All parts of the project, including the graphic displays, alarms, and so on, read the values from this table.  See also  About the Device data source  About the Memory data source  About OLE for Process Control (OPC)  About HMI tag types  value table  ",
    "keywords": {
      "data source": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 232,
    "title": "About data sources",
    "url": "78505.htm",
    "text": "The FactoryTalk View documentation uses the term data source as a generic term that includes all possible sources of tag data, for both data server tags and HMI tags.  The data source can be memory or a device such as a programmable logic controller or OPC server. The application writes values to and reads values from the data source.  The data source is configured to exchange information (in the form of numeric or string values) between the application and the physical machine that your project is controlling.  The data source for analog, digital, or string HMI tags can be Device or Memory. For system tags, the data source is Memory.  Device  When you choose Device as the data source for a tag, you have to specify where the value for the tag is obtained. This can be a memory location in a programmable controller or an OPC Item.  Memory  The data for a tag with Memory as its data source comes only from the value table. A memory tag is not associated with a programmable controller. Its value at startup is defined by the Initial Value setting. The current value can be changed using an object in a graphic display.  System  When you create a new project, the application creates system tags. They are in a folder called System and have System as their data source. They store information that is generated while the system is running, such as the current system time and date. You cannot create or edit system tags, but you can use them wherever you would use any other tag.  Important:  Do not create HMI tags that are pointing to a System tag. When a project contains an HMI tag pointing to a System tag, users may fail in creating an MER or have runtime performance issues.  All tag values, whatever their source, are stored in the value table. All parts of the project, including the graphic displays, alarms, and so on, read the values from this table.  See also  About the Device data source  About the Memory data source  About OLE for Process Control (OPC)  About HMI tag types  value table  ",
    "keywords": {
      "data source": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 233,
    "title": "About the Device data source",
    "url": "67451.htm",
    "text": "A tag with Device as its data source receives its data from a source external to FactoryTalk View, that is, a programmable controller via RSLinx or from a third party OPC server, or another Windows program through an OPC server.  When you define the tag, you specify the address of the value in the programmable controller's data table, or its OPC item. The system then scans this location, and stores the value in the value table, making it available to the rest of the system.  To set up Device as the data source  In the Tag Database editor's form, under Data Source, choose Device.  Type an address or click the Browse button (...) beside the Address box to open the Tag Browser and select a tag address.  Option  Address  This is the physical address in the programmable controller or the OPC item that this tag is associated with. For non-OPC tags, the address syntax depends on the programmable controller's addressing convention. The maximum length is 255 characters.  Important:  Do not point an analog HMI tag to a Boolean device tag and also do not point a digital HMI tag to a non-Boolean device tag.  Tip:  It is vital that address referenced in SLC controllers actually exist in the SLC data table. Referencing invalid SLC addresses will cause valid addresses to fail.  Do not use leading zeroes in tag addresses. FactoryTalk Linx interprets a leading zero to mean an octal notation.  See also  Set up OPC communications  About HMI tag types  About data sources  data source  Value table  "
  },
  {
    "id": 234,
    "title": "About the Memory data source",
    "url": "67453.htm",
    "text": "A tag with Memory as its data source is not associated with a programmable controller.  The value for a tag with Memory as its data source comes from the value table of an HMI server. The Initial Value setting defines its startup value. From then on its value can be changed with a macro or by input from a graphic display.  To retain the most recent value when the application is shut down and restarted, check Retentive. If you do not check this box, the Initial Value is used when the application is restarted.  Option  Initial Value  This value will appear in the value table until the memory tag is changed. If you leave this box blank, a default value is provided by the application.  For an analog or digital tag, enter a number.  For a string tag, enter the text.  See also  Create HMI tags  About data sources  About the Device data source  data source  Value table  "
  },
  {
    "id": 235,
    "title": "Value table",
    "url": "67449.htm",
    "text": "The place in a computer's memory where FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station stores tag values. These values are accessible to all parts of FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station. This is the primary source of real time process information for all applications.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 236,
    "title": "About controller tag extended properties",
    "url": "289016.htm",
    "text": "Starting from version 21, Logix controllers support the extended tag properties that are configurable in Studio 5000 Logix Designer&reg;.  Starting from FactoryTalk View version 9.00.00, you can use the following extended tag properties when a controller tag type can be referenced:  .@Description: Description of the tag  .@EngineeringUnit: A system of measurements of physical quantities  .@Min: The minimum numeric value for the non-Boolean tag being measured  .@Max: The maximum numeric value for the non-Boolean tag being measured  .@State0: The false Boolean state of the tag  .@State1: The true Boolean state of the tag  To read the values, use the format TagName.@ExtendedProperty where TagName is the controller tag and ExtendedProperty is the extended tag property, for example, [Shortcut]SodaCIPTanks.Water.Value.@Min.  See also  Performance considerations when using extended tag properties  Memory considerations when using extended tag properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 237,
    "title": "Performance considerations when using extended tag properties",
    "url": "289017.htm",
    "text": "ControlLogix extended tag properties provide application efficiencies and high integration between the control and HMI application programs. Before undertaking the design of an HMI application accessing extended tag properties, an HMI designer needs to consider the performance characteristics related to extended tag properties.  Extended tag properties are integrated into the ControlLogix application program. On a controller, the metadata is stored in FLASH memory. To maintain controller performance, the system design requires each extended tag property that is used on an HMI display be accessed separately. This design affects the display loading time within the HMI application. When loading a display that uses extended tag properties, all objects (for example, numeric display, button captions, and the like) will be wire-framed before all data and extended tag property data is read from the controller.  The time to load the extended tag property data depends on how many extended tag properties are used on a display. To improve overall HMI application performance, extended tag property data is cached in memory. This caching improves the display loading performance when a display is revisited.  Extended tag properties can be used with the runtime language switching feature of FactoryTalk View. When a language switch occurs, the HMI application will read, if the locale exists, the referenced string-type extended tag property values, for example, .@Description. Reading the extended tag property values delays the display refresh that occurs when a language switch occurs. The refresh delay is the same as the delay when a display is initially loaded.  The following tables show the performance data that was generated using an Allen-Bradley 1756-L75 controller running V28 firmware and an Allen-Bradley 1756-L85 controller running V28 firmware. You can use the data as a reference to estimate the impact to your applications that use extended tag properties.  See also  About controller tag extended properties  Memory considerations when using extended tag properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 238,
    "title": "Performance of a 1756-L85 controller running V28 firmware",
    "url": "289022.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the time to load the extended tag property data when switching displays.  Terminal types  When a graphic display includes  50 extended tag properties  200 extended tag properties  500 extended tag properties  1000 extended tag properties  Computer  1.5 s  2.4 s  4.0 s  6.9 s  PanelView Plus 6 400/600  2.7 s  4.2 s  7.6 s  9.6 s  PanelView Plus 6 700-1500  1.7 s  2.5 s  4.3 s  5.4 s  PanelView Plus 7 Standard  3.6 s  6.1 s  11.0 s  14.3 s  PanelView Plus 7 Performance  1.4 s  2.3 s  4.1 s  5.1 s  The following table shows the time to load the extended tag property data when switching languages at run time.  Terminal types  When a graphic display includes  50 extended tag properties  200 extended tag properties  500 extended tag properties  1000 extended tag properties  Computer  0.6 s  1.1 s  2.2 s  4.1 s  PanelView Plus 6 400/600  1.1 s  2.8 s  5.5 s  6.4 s  PanelView Plus 6 700-1500  1.2 s  2.0 s  3.4 s  4.5 s  PanelView Plus 7 Standard  1.6 s  3.6 s  7.8 s  10.5 s  PanelView Plus 7 Performance  1.2 s  2.2 s  3.7 s  5.1 s  See also  Performance considerations when using extended tag properties  Performance of a 1756-L75 controller running V28 firmware  "
  },
  {
    "id": 239,
    "title": "Performance of a 1756-L75 controller running V28 firmware",
    "url": "289024.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the time to load the extended tag property data when switching displays.  Terminal types  When a graphic display includes  50 extended tag properties  200 extended tag properties  500 extended tag properties  1000 extended tag properties  Computer  2.3 s  4.5 s  9.6 s  17.4 s  PanelView Plus 6 400/600  3.2 s  6.3 s  12.4 s  14.1 s  PanelView Plus 6 700-1500  3.4 s  4.9 s  10.2 s  11.9 s  PanelView Plus 7 Standard  4.8 s  8.5 s  16.8 s  20.2 s  PanelView Plus 7 Performance  3.0 s  4.6 s  9.8 s  11.4 s  The following table shows the time to load the extended tag property data when switching languages at run time.  Terminal types  When a graphic display includes  50 extended tag properties  200 extended tag properties  500 extended tag properties  1000 extended tag properties  Computer  1.2 s  3.5 s  8.2 s  16.0 s  PanelView Plus 6 400/600  2.0 s  5.1 s  10.1 s  11.2 s  PanelView Plus 6 700-1500  1.5 s  3.8 s  8.9 s  10.0 s  PanelView Plus 7 Standard  2.7 s  6.1 s  13.2 s  16.8 s  PanelView Plus 7 Performance  1.6 s  3.9 s  8.8 s  10.8 s  See also  Performance considerations when using extended tag properties  Performance of a 1756-L85 controller running V28 firmware  "
  },
  {
    "id": 240,
    "title": "Memory considerations when using extended tag properties",
    "url": "289018.htm",
    "text": "The HMI system caches extended tag property values to improve performance. The HMI system caches extended tag property values for each runtime language viewed while the HMI application is executing. The cache is stored in RAM. On PanelView Plus 6 and PanelView Plus 7 terminals, there is a limited amount of RAM. To prevent the PanelView Plus 6 or PanelView Plus 7 terminal from encountering an out-of-memory condition, the system is designed to empty the extended tag property cache after eight hours. The system will remove all cached extended tag property values from the RAM cache except for the value associated with the HMI default language and the last runtime language viewed.  Example  Assume an HMI application supports English (default language), French, and Chinese languages. When the application is launched, the English language extended tag property values will be read and cached as the operator navigates to different displays. After four hours of operation, the operator switches to French. After two additional hours of operation in French, the operator switches to Chinese. If nothing else changes, after eight hours passes, the French language extended tag property values will be removed from the cache. The English language and Chinese language extended tag property values will be retained in the cache.  See also  About controller tag extended properties  Performance considerations when using extended tag properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 241,
    "title": "Create HMI tags in the Tags editor",
    "url": "67441.htm",
    "text": "The Tags editor options listed below are common to all types of tags. To see the additional options for a specific type of tag, go to the help topic for that tag type.  To create an HMI tag  Decide which HMI server you want to create the tag in.  Open the Tags editor by doing one of the following:  In the Explorer window, double-click the Tags icon in the Tags folder.  Right-click the Tags title and select Open from the context menu.  Drag the Tags icon to the workspace.  To add the tag to a folder, double-click the folder in the folder hierarchy to open it. The folder name appears in the Name box.  Click the New button in the form section to clear the form and position the cursor in the Name box.  Type the tag name and select its type.  Enter the additional information required in the Tag section for the type of tag you are creating.  Choose a data source and enter the information as required for that type of data source.  Click Accept to save the tag to the HMI Tag database.  Tip:  Once you've created a tag, you can't change its type or name by editing them. To rename a tag or change its type, you must duplicate the tag and then supply a new name and type.  When you enter information in the form, the Prev and Next buttons change to Accept and Discard buttons. Click Accept to save tag information. Click Discard to cancel changes to a tag.  You can also create new tags in the Tag Browser.  Options  Tag  Name  Type the tag's name. If you are defining a tag within a folder, the folder name will already be present and is considered part of the tag name. The name can be 255 characters long, and can include letters, numbers, the underscore (_), the dash (-), and back slash (\\) (for tags in folders).  Tip:  Use letters in the tag name in addition to numbers. Tag names with over 30 numbers may not display properly in the tag browser.  Type  Choose digital, analog, or string. Additional input boxes related to the type are shown.  Description  Type a description of the tag (128 characters maximum) if desired.  Data Source  Device  Choose Device if data for the tag originates from a specific memory location in a programmable controller or from another Windows program.  Address. Type the address of the device, or click the browse button to open the Tag Browser. The list will show all non-HMI tags in the application. (HMI tags cannot reference other HMI tags.) Select a tag in the Tag Browser, and click OK to insert the address in the Address box.  Memory  Choose Memory if data originates from the value table or you wish to store variables in volatile memory.  Initial Value. For memory tags only, type a starting value for the tag.  Retentive. Check this box if you want the tag to retain its value at run time when the application is closed and reopened, or if the run-time terminal is shut down and restarted.  Tip:  This feature only applies to run time, not to development.  Any changes to the tag database, either through the editor or through importing a CSV file, will cause retentive tags to reset to their initial values.  See also  Set up an HMI tag database  About HMI tag names  About HMI tag types  About data sources  Log tag data  data source  Add and edit HMI tags from the Tag Browser  ",
    "keywords": {
      "HMI tag": "100",
      "create": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 242,
    "title": "The Tags editor",
    "url": "67424.htm",
    "text": "Use the Tags editor to create and edit tags in the HMI tag database, to create folders that will contain tags or other folders. It consists of the following sections:  Form  Spreadsheet  Query box  Folder hierarchy  Use the options in the View menu to:  Show or hide the spreadsheet and form  Change the spreadsheet font  Update the contents of the editor  View tag database statistics  Restore default settings if you have changed the editor's appearance  Use the tools in the toolbar to:  Delete or duplicate tags and folders  Insert rows in the spreadsheet  Refresh the contents of the database with changes from other editors  Create new folders  See also  Create HMI tags  Set up an HMI tag database  Sections in the Tags editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 243,
    "title": "The Tags editor",
    "url": "78488.htm",
    "text": "Use the Tags editor to create and edit tags in the HMI tag database, to create folders that will contain tags or other folders. It consists of the following sections:  Form  Spreadsheet  Query box  Folder hierarchy  Use the options in the View menu to:  Show or hide the spreadsheet and form  Change the spreadsheet font  Update the contents of the editor  View tag database statistics  Restore default settings if you have changed the editor's appearance  Use the tools in the toolbar to:  Delete or duplicate tags and folders  Insert rows in the spreadsheet  Refresh the contents of the database with changes from other editors  Create new folders  See also  Create HMI tags  Set up an HMI tag database  Sections in the Tags editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 244,
    "title": "The Tags editor",
    "url": "78489.htm",
    "text": "Use the Tags editor to create and edit tags in the HMI tag database, to create folders that will contain tags or other folders. It consists of the following sections:  Form  Spreadsheet  Query box  Folder hierarchy  Use the options in the View menu to:  Show or hide the spreadsheet and form  Change the spreadsheet font  Update the contents of the editor  View tag database statistics  Restore default settings if you have changed the editor's appearance  Use the tools in the toolbar to:  Delete or duplicate tags and folders  Insert rows in the spreadsheet  Refresh the contents of the database with changes from other editors  Create new folders  See also  Create HMI tags  Set up an HMI tag database  Sections in the Tags editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 245,
    "title": "The Tags editor",
    "url": "78490.htm",
    "text": "Use the Tags editor to create and edit tags in the HMI tag database, to create folders that will contain tags or other folders. It consists of the following sections:  Form  Spreadsheet  Query box  Folder hierarchy  Use the options in the View menu to:  Show or hide the spreadsheet and form  Change the spreadsheet font  Update the contents of the editor  View tag database statistics  Restore default settings if you have changed the editor's appearance  Use the tools in the toolbar to:  Delete or duplicate tags and folders  Insert rows in the spreadsheet  Refresh the contents of the database with changes from other editors  Create new folders  See also  Create HMI tags  Set up an HMI tag database  Sections in the Tags editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 246,
    "title": "Sections in the Tags editor",
    "url": "298871.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the sections in the Tags editor.  Sections  Descriptions  Form  In the Tag area, specify the tag name, type, description, and other details that vary depending on the tag type.  In the Data Source area, specify the tag's data source, device, or memory.  To toggle this section of the editor open and closed, from the View menu, select Form.  Spreadsheet  This section shows a list of tags. Use the query box or the folder hierarchy to select the tags you intend to show.  Tags in the spreadsheet are for viewing only. When you select a tag in the spreadsheet, its details are shown in the form, where you can edit them.  To toggle this section of the editor open and closed, from the View menu, select Spreadsheet.  To change the font used in the spreadsheet, from the View menu, select Spreadsheet Font and specify the new font, style, and size.  Query Box  Use this section to search for and select a particular tag, or group of tags (using query patterns), that you want to view in the spreadsheet.  When a tag is selected in the spreadsheet it will be shown in the Form, where you can edit it.  You can select a single tag by typing the tag name, or multiple tags by using wildcard characters.  Folder Hierarchy  This section shows the folders that make up the tag database. A root folder icon called root is always present in the hierarchy, as well as a folder called System, which contains the system tags that come with FactoryTalk View.  See also  The Tags editor  Use the query box  Use the folder hierarchy  Use wildcard characters  Create tag folders  "
  },
  {
    "id": 247,
    "title": "Add an HMI tag",
    "url": "67497.htm",
    "text": "When you are in the Tag Browser, you can open a dialog box that lets you add a new HMI tag to the database.  To add a new HMI tag  Select a folder from the Folders side of the Tag Browser that contains an HMI server.  Right-click in the right-hand side of the Tag Browser to open the Context menu.  Select New HMI Tag from the Context menu.  In the New HMI Tag dialog box, type the information for the tag.  Click OK to save the new tag to the HMI tag database and return to the Tag Browser.  Tip:  If a tag does not show up on the right side when you add it, select the folder and right-click it, and then select Refresh Folder from the context menu.  See also  Create HMI tags  Create tag folders  Add and edit HMI tags from the tag browser  About HMI tag types  "
  },
  {
    "id": 248,
    "title": "Edit an HMI tag",
    "url": "67757.htm",
    "text": "You can edit all parts of a tag except the tag name and type.  To edit an existing HMI tag in the Tags editor  Select the tag to edit in the spreadsheet. Details of the tag appear in the form area.  Edit any details of the tag except the tag name or tag type.  Click Accept.  You can also select an HMI tag from the right-hand side of the Tag Browser and open the Edit HMI Tag dialog box to edit it.  See also  Add and edit HMI tags from the Tag Browser  "
  },
  {
    "id": 249,
    "title": "Duplicate an HMI tag",
    "url": "67758.htm",
    "text": "Use the Tags editor to duplicate HMI tags.  To duplicate a tag  In the Tags editor's spreadsheet, select the tag to duplicate.  On the Edit menu, click Duplicate, or click the Duplicate Tag tool in the toolbar.  A new row is inserted in the spreadsheet below the highlighted row. The new row contains all the same information except the tag name.  In the form area, in the Name box, type a name for the new tag, up to 255 characters long (including the folder name).  Click Accept.  See also  Set up an HMI tag database  Create HMI tags  Add an HMI tag  Add and edit HMI tags from the tag browser  "
  },
  {
    "id": 250,
    "title": "The folder hierarchy",
    "url": "67459.htm",
    "text": "The folder hierarchy and the spreadsheet work together. The folder hierarchy shows the layout of folders in the database and the spreadsheet shows the tags within the folders. Double-click an icon in the folder hierarchy window to list the folder&#8216;s tags in the spreadsheet.  If the folder contains other nested folders, its icon has a plus (+) in it. When you double-click it, the folders in it are listed in the hierarchy. If you need to resize the hierarchy box to view a set of nested folders, drag the right border of the box to the required size.  To select more than one folder at a time, hold down the Ctrl key as you double-click the folder names. All the tags from the selected folders are displayed in the spreadsheet.  To duplicate or delete a folder, select it in the folder hierarchy and use the appropriate command in the Edit menu or select the appropriate tool on the toolbar.  See also  Create tag folders  Create HMI tags  Example: Use tag folders  "
  },
  {
    "id": 251,
    "title": "Create a new HMI tag folder",
    "url": "67466.htm",
    "text": "Example  Use folders to organize the tags in the Tags database. You can create a new folder in the Tags editor, or in the Tag Browser. Once you have created a folder you can add tags to it. Folders make it easier to plan and maintain the database. For example, you can group together all the tags for similar devices or areas of a plant floor.  To create a new folder  When the Tags editor is open, choose New Folder from the Edit menu.  or  In the Tag Browser, right-click the folder of an area or a folder containing an HMI server and then select New HMI Tag Folder from the Context menu. If the server names are not visible, right-click the Folders pane and then select Show Server Names.  In the New HMI Tag Folder dialog box, type a name for the folder, then click OK.  Tip:  In the Tags editor you can use the Duplicate option on the Edit menu to create a copy of a folder and its tags with a new folder name.  In the Tag Browser, the New HMI Folder menu item is only available when an area folder, or a folder containing an HMI server is selected.  You can nest folders, that is, create a new folder within another folder. Open a folder and then click New Folder. In the Name text box, after the backslash, type the new folder name. Remember that the backslash in a folder name counts as one character in a tag name.  Option  Name  Type the name for the new folder.  See also  The Folder hierarchy  "
  },
  {
    "id": 252,
    "title": "Create tag folders",
    "url": "67461.htm",
    "text": "Example  Use the folders to organize the tags in a database. Once you have created a folder you can add tags to it.  To create a new folder  Choose New Folder from the Edit menu, or click the Create Folder button in the Tags editor's toolbar.  In the New Folder dialog box, type a name for the folder.  Click OK.  Use folders to organize the tags in a database. Organizing tags makes planning and maintaining the database easier. For example, you can group together all the tags for similar devices or areas of a plant floor.  Double-click a folder in the Folder Hierarchy tree to list its tags in the spreadsheet.  Tip:  You can use the Duplicate Folder option on the Edit menu to create a copy of a folder and its tags with a new folder name.  You can also create folders in the Tag Browser. The folders that appear in the left pane of the Tag Browser are the same folders that appear in the Tags editor.  You cannot add folders to data servers, only to the applications.  Option  Name  Type the name for the new folder.  See also  The folder hierarchy  Create a new HMI folder  "
  },
  {
    "id": 253,
    "title": "Duplicate or delete folders",
    "url": "67468.htm",
    "text": "When you duplicate a folder, you create a copy of the selected folder and all its tags with a new folder name. If the folder contains folders, they are also duplicated.  To duplicate a folder and its tags  Select the folder in the folder hierarchy.  Choose Duplicate Folder from the Edit menu or choose the Duplicate Tag Folder tool from the toolbar.  Type a name for the new folder.  Click OK.  Options  From  Displays the name of the selected folder.  To  Type the name for the duplicate folder. It cannot contain any spaces.  To delete a folder  Select one or more folders in the hierarchy.  On the Edit menu, click Delete Folder, or choose the Delete Folder tool from the toolbar.  In the Confirmation box, click Yes.  See also  The folder hierarchy  Create tag folders  "
  },
  {
    "id": 254,
    "title": "The query box",
    "url": "67499.htm",
    "text": "Use the Search For query box to specify which tags to list in the spreadsheet. You can select a tag from the list and edit it in the form. You can also search for a particular tag that you wish to edit. It will be shown in the spreadsheet and the form.  Type the name of a single tag in the query box to display it in the spreadsheet and form.  For example, if you type  Industry\\Flow  the tag is listed in the spreadsheet and form.  Use wildcards to specify multiple tags. All the tags that correspond to the wildcards are displayed in the spreadsheet. The first tag in the list is selected, and details of that tag are shown in the form.  For example, if you type  Industry\\*  all the tags in the Industry folder are listed in the spreadsheet. The details of the first tag in the list appear in the form.  Enter the asterisk ( * ) wildcard by itself to list the entire tag database.  See also  Wildcard characters  Create HMI tags  Set up an HMI tag database  "
  },
  {
    "id": 255,
    "title": "About HMI tag names",
    "url": "67489.htm",
    "text": "HMI tag names can be up to 255 characters long and can contain the following characters:  A to Z  0 to 9  underscore (_) and dash (-)  Use the backslash (\\) to separate the parts of a tag name in a folder. For example, the tag name tanks\\oil\\temperature would be a tag named temperature in the oil folder, which is in the tanks folder.  You can use mixed case. Tag names preserve upper and lower case for readability but are not case sensitive. For example, the tag name MixerValve1 is the same as mixervalve1.  Tip:  When a tag name contains a dash (-), to use it in an expression, enclose the name in braces { }; for example, {N33-0}.  Use braces when using wildcards to represent multiple tags in an expression, for example, {alarm*}.  See also  Use wildcard characters  Create HMI tags  "
  },
  {
    "id": 256,
    "title": "Wildcard characters",
    "url": "67491.htm",
    "text": "Use wildcard characters with tag names in the query box to select multiple tags to list in the spreadsheet. The wildcard characters are:  ?  Matches any single character. For example, type:<br />tower\\total???<br />to list all tags in the tower folder with eight-character names, the first five of which are tower\\total.  *  Matches any number of characters, including the back slash (\\). For example, type:<br />tower*<br />to list all the tags in the tower folder. If there were other folders with names like tower1 or towers, their tags would also be listed.  A search string can be up to 255 characters long (the maximum length for a tag name). Case is ignored.  See also  Create HMI tags  About HMI tag names  "
  },
  {
    "id": 257,
    "title": "View tag statistics",
    "url": "67759.htm",
    "text": "The Tag Statistics dialog box provides the following information for the current database:  HMI tag database path  The ODBC data source  The date the tag database was last modified  The number of analog, digital, and string tags  The total number of HMI tags  The number of folders in the database  To view tag statistics  With the Tags editor open, from the View menu, select Tag Statistics.  See also  The Tags editor  Set up an HMI tag database  "
  },
  {
    "id": 258,
    "title": "Example: Use tag folders",
    "url": "67463.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows a small database with two folders, Municipal and Industry.  This database has six tags in two folders. The two folders are used to create a structure for the database, and the six tags are for storing values.  See also  Create a new HMI folder  Create tag folders  Duplicate folders  The folder hierarchy  "
  },
  {
    "id": 259,
    "title": "The Tag Browser",
    "url": "67090.htm",
    "text": "How do I open the Tag Browser?  Use one of the following methods:  In the editors that uses tag assignments, click the Browse button in the Tags column.  In the Expression editor, position the cursor where you want to insert a tag name, and then click Tags.  In the Parameters editor, double-click where you want to insert a tag name.  In FactoryTalk View, when you need to use a tag, you can type its name and path, or you can browse for it.  Use the Tag Browser to:  Browse the tag database and select a tag or folder from the editor you are working in  Edit or add an HMI tag  Add a folder  Import tags from PLC databases into the project&#8217;s tag database  Create a backing tag or structure tag for use with controller instruction faceplates  The Tag Browser is divided into two sections. The left side shows the hierarchy of the folders for the HMI tag database. Each device shortcut (in FactoryTalk Linx) or OPC topic (in RSLinx Classic) is represented by a folder.  Tip:  In addition to toggling the display of data server names, the context menu for the left-hand pane also lets you refresh the folder display, add new HMI folders, and move the cursor to the home area in the folder hierarchy.  See also  Select a tag and copy it into the editor you are working in  Select multiple tags for a data log model  Select a folder  The Tag editor  Import PLC tags  "
  },
  {
    "id": 260,
    "title": "The Tag Browser",
    "url": "78506.htm",
    "text": "How do I open the Tag Browser?  Use one of the following methods:  In the editors that uses tag assignments, click the Browse button in the Tags column.  In the Expression editor, position the cursor where you want to insert a tag name, and then click Tags.  In the Parameters editor, double-click where you want to insert a tag name.  In FactoryTalk View, when you need to use a tag, you can type its name and path, or you can browse for it.  Use the Tag Browser to:  Browse the tag database and select a tag or folder from the editor you are working in  Edit or add an HMI tag  Add a folder  Import tags from PLC databases into the project&#8217;s tag database  Create a backing tag or structure tag for use with controller instruction faceplates  The Tag Browser is divided into two sections. The left side shows the hierarchy of the folders for the HMI tag database. Each device shortcut (in FactoryTalk Linx) or OPC topic (in RSLinx Classic) is represented by a folder.  Tip:  In addition to toggling the display of data server names, the context menu for the left-hand pane also lets you refresh the folder display, add new HMI folders, and move the cursor to the home area in the folder hierarchy.  See also  Select a tag and copy it into the editor you are working in  Select multiple tags for a data log model  Select a folder  The Tag editor  Import PLC tags  "
  },
  {
    "id": 261,
    "title": "Select a tag and copy it into the editor you are working in",
    "url": "299040.htm",
    "text": "You can use the Tag Browser to select a tag and copy it into the editor you are working in.  To select a tag and copy it into the editor you are working in  Navigate to the relevant folder in the left pane and click to open it.  Select the tag in the list on the right and click OK or double-click the tag name. The tag name appears in the Selected Tag box.  Click OK.  The tag name will appear in the editor or on the tab and the Tag Browser will close.  Tip:  When you open the Tag Browser from the Tags in Model tab of the Data Log Model editor, you can select multiple tags. If you select a tag folder in the multiple tag select mode used for the Data Log Models editor, it will not appear in the Selected Tag box.  See also  Set up data logging  "
  },
  {
    "id": 262,
    "title": "Select multiple tags for a data log model",
    "url": "299042.htm",
    "text": "You can use the Tag Browser to select multiple tags for a data log model.  To select multiple tags&nbsp;for a data log model  Navigate to the relevant folder in the hierarchy on the left and click it to open it.  In the list of tags in the right-hand pane, click a tag to select it. To select another tag, hold down the Ctrl key as you click.  Click the Add Tag[s] to List button to add the tags you have selected to the Selected tag[s] box.  Tip:  Click Clear to remove all tags from the Selected tag[s] box, or select individual tags and click Remove to remove only the selected tags.  See also  The Tag Browser  Select a tag and copy it into the editor you are working in  "
  },
  {
    "id": 263,
    "title": "Select a folder",
    "url": "299044.htm",
    "text": "You can use the Tag Browser to select a folder.  To select a folder  Select a folder from the tree structure in the left pane.  The folder name appears in the Selected Tag text box. If there are tags associated with the folder, they are listed in the right hand pane.  If you are using RSLinx Classic, the Offline file shows tags in a PLC program stored on disk. If the OPC topic has access to symbols, you can browse for them in the Offline folder. For details, see RSLinx Classic Help.  If you are using FactoryTalk Linx, the Offline folder shows tags in an RSLogix .acd file.  The Online folder shows the device's online tags.  Navigate to the relevant folder in the hierarchy on the left and then click to select it.  If the folder is a structure tag, its name will be shown in the Selected Tag box. For example:  /::[countup]Timer3  If the folder is not a structure tag, the folder name will be shown in the Selected Tag box. For example:  system  Click OK to return the information in the Selected Tag box, into the editor you were working in, and close the browser.  See also  The Tag Browser  Select a tag and copy it into the editor you are working in  Select multiple tags  for a data log model  "
  },
  {
    "id": 264,
    "title": "Create a tag",
    "url": "299046.htm",
    "text": "You can use the Tag Browser to create a tag.  To create a tag  Right-click in the Contents pane and select New HMI Tag.  Fill in the tag details in the Tag editor.  Click OK to save the tag to the tag database.  Click OK in the Tags dialog box to return to the editor you were working in.  Tip:  If the tag is to be in a folder, the folder must already exist. You can open the New Folder dialog box from the Tag Browser by right-clicking in the left pane and selecting New HMI Tag Folder.  To specify a tag in a folder, type the folder name as part of the tag name. For example, to add a tag named pump1 to the folder named NE_Corner, you would type NE_Corner\\pump1 as the tag name.  See also  The Tag Browser  Select a tag and copy it into the editor you are working in  "
  },
  {
    "id": 265,
    "title": "Edit an existing tag",
    "url": "299047.htm",
    "text": "You can use the Tag Browser to edit an existing tag.  To edit an existing tag  Right-click in the Contents pane and select Edit HMI Tag.  Make the required changes in the Tag editor.  Click OK to save the changes to the tag database.  Click OK in the Tag Browser to return to the editor you were working in.  See also  The Tag Browser  Create a tag  Add and edit HMI tags from the Tag Browser  "
  },
  {
    "id": 266,
    "title": "Add a folder",
    "url": "299049.htm",
    "text": "You can use the Tag Browser to add a folder.  To add a folder  Right-click in the Folders pane and select New HMI Tag Folder.  In the New Folder dialog box, type the name of the folder and click OK.  See also  The Tag Browser  Select a folder  Add and edit HMI tags from the Tag Browser  "
  },
  {
    "id": 267,
    "title": "Add and edit HMI tags from the Tag Browser",
    "url": "67487.htm",
    "text": "When you select New HMI Tag, or Edit HMI Tag from the Context menu of the right-hand pane of the Tag Browser, a dialog box opens that you can use to edit the selected HMI tag or add a new HMI tag.  To add an HMI tag  Select a folder that contains an HMI server from the left-hand side of the Tag Browser.  Right-click in the right-hand side of the Tag Browser to open the Context menu.  Select New HMI Tag from the Context menu.  In the New HMI Tag dialog box, type the information for the tag.  Click OK to save the new tag to the Tags database and return to the Tag Browser.  To edit an existing HMI tag  Select a folder that contains an HMI server from the left-hand side of the Tag Browser.  In the right-hand side of the tag browser, right-click a tag to select it and open the Context menu.  Select Edit HMI Tag from the Context menu.  In the Edit HMI Tag dialog box, make the required changes to the information for the tag. You can edit any parts of a tag except the tag name and the tag type.  Click OK to save the changes to the Tags database and return to the Tag Browser.  Tip:  Each graphic display can contain up to 1000 expressions or references to tags.  Options  Tag  Name  Specify the tag's name. If you are defining a tag within a folder, type the folder name followed by the backslash, then the tag name. The name (including the folder name) can be 40 characters long, and can include letters, numbers, the underscore (_) and back slash (\\).  Type  Choose digital, analog, or string. Additional input boxes related to the type are shown.  Description  Type a description of the tag (132 characters maximum).  Data Source  Device  Choose Device if data for the tag originates from specific memory locations in a programmable controller via FactoryTalk Linx or another OPC server.  Memory  Choose Memory if data originates from the HMI server's value table, as it does, for example, for a derived tag.  Initial Value  For memory tags, type a starting value for the tag.  See also  Guidelines for naming tags  About tag types  About data sources  Add an HMI tag  The Tag Browser  "
  },
  {
    "id": 268,
    "title": "The Tag editor",
    "url": "67495.htm",
    "text": "The Tag editor opens when you click New HMI Tag or Edit HMI Tag in the Tag Browser's context menu. This lets you add and edit tags from editors other than the Tag Database editor.  To add a tag using the Tag editor  In the Tag Browser, right-click in the right pane and select New HMI Tag.  Define the new tag by specifying a name, type, and data source. When you choose a tag type and data source, additional input boxes are shown.  Click OK to add the tag to the tag database.  To edit an existing tag  Select the tag from the Tag Browser.  Right click and select Edit HMI Tag.  Make the required changes.  Click OK to save the changes to the tag database.  Options  Tag  Name  Specify the tag's name. If you are defining a tag within a folder, type the folder name followed by the backslash, then the tag name. The name (including the folder name) can be up to 255 characters long. The name can include letters, numbers, the underscore (_), hyphen or minus sign (-), and back slash (\\).  Type  Choose digital, analog, or string. Additional input boxes related to the type are shown.  Description  Type a description of the tag (128 characters maximum). This can be shown as a label in a graphic display.  Data Source  Device  Choose Device if data for the tag originates from specific memory locations in a programmable controller via direct drivers or an OPC server.  Address  Type the address of the device, or click the Browse button to open the Tag Browser. The list will show all non-HMI tags in the application. (HMI tags cannot reference other HMI tags.) Select a tag in the Tag Browser, and click OK to insert the address in the Address box.  Memory  Choose Memory if data originates from the value table.  Retentive. Check this box if you want the tag to retain its value when the application is closed and reopened, or if the run-time terminal is shut down and restarted.  Initial Value. For memory tags, type a starting value for the tag.  Tip:  If you are relying on retentive behavior for some aspect of your application's functionality, make sure you do not run FactoryTalk View Studio at the same time that you run the application file (*.mer). The reason is that while FactoryTalk View Studio has the application open, the Tag server will cache information for HMI tags, with the unexpected result that all memory tags will appear to be retentive. If you shut down FactoryTalk View Studio and then restart the application, only retentive tags will actually retain their values.  Any changes to the tag database, either through the editor or through importing a CSV file, will cause retentive tags to reset to their initial values.  To assign initial values to device tags, create a macro in the Macros editor. In the macro, specify a list of tags and assign initial values to them. You can run a macro when the project starts and stops, when a graphic display is opened and closed, and when a user logs in and logs out. As well, in the Global Connections dialog box, you can define up to five expressions or tags, each of which can run a corresponding macro.  See also  About HMI tag names  About HMI tag types  About data sources  Tag Browser  About macros  Set up global connections  "
  },
  {
    "id": 269,
    "title": "Import PLC tags",
    "url": "67426.htm",
    "text": "You can import PLC tags to an HMI tag database. Tags imported this way are copied into the current HMI project and are not shared with the source database. Changes made to tag configuration in FactoryTalk View will not affect the database they have been imported from.  To import tags from a PLC database  In the Tags editor, select Other Databases from the Edit menu to open the Import PLC Tags dialog box.  or  Select the DB tool from the Tags editor toolbar.  or  In the right-hand side of the Tag Browser, right click to display the Context menu and then select Import PLC Tags.  Type a folder name if you want the tags to be in a folder. If the folder does not already exist in the project&#8217;s tag database, it will be created.  Specify the RSLinx Classic topic for the location of the imported tags, or the name of the FactoryTalk Linx device shortcut. The tags will be copied into this topic, and each tag's address in the HMI tag database will contain the name of the topic or device shortcut.  Type the name and path for the PLC database you want to import tags from or click the Browse button to locate and select the database. The tags from the selected PLC database are shown in the box below the Filter box.  If the list of tags is too big to display entirely, or you only want to see certain tags, type a filter string and then click Search to filter the list.  Highlight the tag or tags you want to import, and then click OK to add the tags to the current HMI Tag database. If you have already imported a particular tag, you are prompted to change its name if you want to import it again.  Tip:  The filter allows the '?' wildcard character to stand for any single character and the '*' to represent any multiple characters.  The file extension for a PLC database depends on the tool used to create it.   The file extensions are:  .ctd for RSLogix 5/500 saved as an external database  .rss for an RSLogix 500&reg; internal database  .rsp for an RSLogix 5 internal database  The PLC database browser only shows PLC/SLC addresses that are used in the Address/Symbol editor in PLC programming software.  The import operation can handle a maximum of 500 tags per import. If more than 500 tags are to be imported, the operation will have to be repeated until all desired tags have been selected and imported.  Options  Import Tags into Folder  Type the name of a folder if you want the imported tags to be placed in one. If the folder does not already exist in the FactoryTalk View tag database it will be created.  FactoryTalk Linx Shortcut  You must specify the RSLinx Classic topic name or the FactoryTalk Linx device shortcut for the location of the imported tags. This name will appear in square brackets before each tag address. For example, if 'bob' is the topic name specified, a tag address might be [bob]tag1.  If the tag address, including the shortcut or topic name, includes a colon character ':', the tag address will be preceded by the '::' string. An example of a tag address might be ::[bob]N7:0.  PLC Symbols and Addresses  PLC Database  Type the path and name of the PLC database you want to import tags from, or click the Browse button to navigate to the database. When you choose a database, its tags are displayed in the box below the Filter box.  Filter  Type a string in this box to filter tags that are displayed in the box below the filter. You can also use it to search for a particular tag or set of tags.  Tip:  Wildcards are not used and you cannot filter beyond a slash. Example: filter of B3/1 will not show B3/10, B3/11, and so on.  Addresses and Symbols  When you click Addresses and Symbols, the filter looks for matches in the address string and displays both the addresses and names for the tags.  Symbols  When you click Symbols, the filter looks for matches in the names of the tags in the selected database and only displays the tag names. Tags that have addresses but not symbol names will not be shown.  Use Symbol Name as Tag Address  Check this box if you want the symbol name for a tag to be used as its address. If no tag name exists, a tag name will be created from the address.  See also  Rename import tags  Communicate with programmable logic controllers  "
  },
  {
    "id": 270,
    "title": "Rename import tags",
    "url": "67428.htm",
    "text": "The Rename Tag dialog box opens when you confirm that you want to import a tag that you have already imported into the project tag database. Because you cannot have two tags with the same name, you must rename subsequent copies of a previously imported tag. This lets you import as many copies of a tag from a PLC, or other, database as you require.  See also  Import PLC tags  "
  },
  {
    "id": 271,
    "title": "About expressions",
    "url": "66982.htm",
    "text": "An expression can be a tag name, a tag placeholder, a mathematical or logical equation, or a function that returns a numeric, string, or true or false value. For expressions that return true and false values, 1 and other non-zero values signify True, and zero signifies False. Expressions let you manipulate the data gathered from devices and make it more meaningful by comparing it to other values, combining it with other values, creating cause and effect relationships between values, or displaying it.  Expressions can contain:  Tags, tag placeholders, arithmetic, and bitwise operators, and mathematical functions such as SQRT (square root), that return numeric values.  Relational and logical operators, and functions such as ALM_FAULT (alarm fault), that return true/false values.  Non-mathematical functions, such as the CurrentLanguage function that returns the RFC17766 code for the current language of an application.  If-Then-Else logic that returns numeric or true and false values, depending on how it's structured. These are called conditional expressions because the result of the expression depends on whether the If statement is true or false. When the If statement evaluates to True the result is defined by the Then statement. When the If statement is False the result is defined by the Else statement.  Use expressions in:  Graphic displays  Alarm setup  Information setup  Macros  Global connections  See also  The Expression editor  Quick reference to math functions  Quick reference to operators  Causes of run-time errors for expressions  Examples: Expressions  ",
    "keywords": {
      "expression": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 272,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for expressions",
    "url": "67614.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs errors about invalid expressions to diagnostics under these circumstances:  The expression is too large. The maximum compiled size for an expression is 8 KB.  The expression attempts to compare a string to a number.  The expression attempts to perform an invalid operation on a string. You can only use string tags as operands with the plus (+) arithmetic operator and with relational operators.  Adding two strings yields a long string. The maximum string length is 82 characters.  The expression contains an invalid instruction. In this case, the probable cause is file corruption. Recreate the run-time project.  A tag in the expression is uninitialized, the value is too old (stale), or the value is in error.  The expression attempts to perform an invalid operation on a floating point number. You cannot perform modulus or bitwise operations on floating point numbers.  The expression attempts to divide by zero or perform modulus with zero in the denominator.  The expression attempts to calculate the square root of a negative number.  See also  About expressions  The Expression editor  String tags in expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 273,
    "title": "The Expression editor",
    "url": "67016.htm",
    "text": "To create an expression, type it directly in the Tag or expression box in the editor you are working in, or click the Browse button (\u2026) to open the Expression editor and use the editor to create one.  These buttons in the Expression editor each provide a list of operators for use in expressions:  If  Logical  Relational  Arithmetic  Bitwise  The editor also contains these buttons:  Functions button - opens a dialog box with access to all the functions that can be used in expressions.  Tags button - opens the Tag Browser to let you search the database for a particular tag.  Check Syntax button - checks that the expression entered uses valid syntax. If there are any errors, they are listed in the box next to the button. If there are no errors, Valid is shown in the box. If you make changes to the expression, check the syntax again.  The application does not check the syntax of expressions you type in the Tag or Expression box.  The Line and Column boxes show the cursor position in the Expression box.  To create an expression using the Expression editor  Type the expression in the Expression box, up to 999 characters long.  Use the buttons to enter the operators or functions you need in the edit box.  Use the Tags button to open the Tag Browser, where you can choose tags for the expression.  Click the Check Syntax button to check for syntax errors.  Click OK when the expression is complete.  To select an operator  Click the button for the operators you want to list.  Click an operator to copy it to the expression edit box.  To select a function  Click the Functions button to show the alphabetical listing of the functions available.  Highlight the function you want, then click OK. Or, double-click the function.  This copies the function to the Expression edit box.  Tip:  Press Ctrl-Tab to insert a tab in the expression.  You can cut, copy and paste expressions or parts of expressions between objects and editors.  See also  About expressions  Formatting expressions  Add comments to expressions  Causes of run-time errors for expressions  Select functions  The Tag Browser  "
  },
  {
    "id": 274,
    "title": "Constants in expressions",
    "url": "67624.htm",
    "text": "Example  A constant can be one of the following:  integer (123)  floating point value (123.45)  string (\"character string\")  See also  About expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 275,
    "title": "Format expressions",
    "url": "67606.htm",
    "text": "Example  Expressions can have tabs, new line characters, and multiple spaces. This allows you to format an expression so that it is easier to understand what is happening. Press Ctrl + Tab to insert a tab in an expression in the Expression editor.  For example, you can align the Else with the appropriate If so the logic is easier to understand. Alternately, you can remove extra spaces and line breaks to make maximum use of the editor space.  Tip:  Do not allow tag names, keywords, function names, or function arguments to span more than one line.  See also  About expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 276,
    "title": "Add comments to expressions",
    "url": "67610.htm",
    "text": "You can enter comments for an expression to explain its logic or function. Begin a comment with an exclamation point. Everything following the exclamation point, to the end of that line, is not evaluated.  See also  About expressions  Example: Comments  "
  },
  {
    "id": 277,
    "title": "Write expressions",
    "url": "67628.htm",
    "text": "You can use write expressions with the numeric entry graphic objects. Write expressions allow the operator to enter a value at run time. The application substitutes the value the operator enters for the placeholder in the expression, calculates the value of the expression, and writes the result to the Value control. All write expressions must contain a question mark (?) as a placeholder for the value the operator enters.  See also  About expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 278,
    "title": "Tags in expressions",
    "url": "67620.htm",
    "text": "An analog or digital tag can stand alone as an expression or be included as part of an expression that is made up of other components as well, such as constants, operators, functions, and If-Then-Else logic. An expression that is simply a tag name returns the current value of the tag.  You can use string tags as operands with the plus (+) arithmetic operator and with relational operators.  When using a tag in an expression you can  Click the Tags button to display the tag list, highlight a tag to select it, then click OK to enter the tag in the expression.  Type a tag name that is not yet defined in the tag database, finish entering the expression and click OK, then define the tag if you want to.  Enter a tag name by either of the above methods, then double-click it to update or enter the tag&#8217;s definition.  When you use a tag name that contains dashes (-) or starts with a number, you must enclose it in curly brackets in the expressions to distinguish the tag name from other elements in the expression.  Example: tag1 == tag2 + {tag-3}  See also  About expressions  String tags in expressions  Quick reference to math functions  Quick reference to security functions  Quick reference to operators  Constants in expressions  If-Then-Else logic  "
  },
  {
    "id": 279,
    "title": "String tags in expressions",
    "url": "67616.htm",
    "text": "You can use string tags as operands with the plus (+) arithmetic operator and with relational operators.  The + operator will join string operands. For example if the values of tag1 and tag2 are SOME and THING, the expression tag1+tag2 would return the value SOMETHING.  When using string tags with the relational operators, the initial character of the operand is evaluated first by capitalization and then by alphabetic order. Lower case letters are greater than upper case letters.  See also  About expressions  Causes of run-time errors for expressions  Relational operators in expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 280,
    "title": "If-Then-Else logic",
    "url": "66992.htm",
    "text": "If-Then-Else logic allows an expression to make a decision. The format of the If-Then-Else logic is:  If statement Then value1 Else value2  If the statement is true the expression returns value1.   If the statement is false the expression returns value2.  You can create even more complex expressions by nesting If-Then-Else statements.  Tip:  The Else portion of the statement is required.  See also  About expressions  Nested If-Then-Else logic  Example: If-Then-Else logic  "
  },
  {
    "id": 281,
    "title": "Nested If-Then-Else logic",
    "url": "66997.htm",
    "text": "If-Then-Else structures can be nested inside one another to handle situations requiring complex branching.  Tip:  Every If must have a Then and Else.  See also  About expressions  Use If-Then-Else logic  Example: Nested If-Then-Else logic 1  Example: Nested If-Then-Else logic 2  "
  },
  {
    "id": 282,
    "title": "Operator precedence in expressions",
    "url": "67060.htm",
    "text": "The rules that determine the order for evaluating an expression with more than one operator are  Operators of equal precedence are evaluated from left to right.  Operators of unequal precedence are evaluated according to precedence, from highest to lowest.  An operator in a statement enclosed in parentheses takes precedence over operators that are not.  Precedence Level  Name  Symbols  1 (Highest)  Parentheses  ( )  2  logical negation  bitwise complement  NOT  ~  3  Multiplication  division  modulus (remainder)  *  /  MOD, %  exponent  logical and  bitwise and  bitwise right shift  bitwise left shift  **  AND, &&  &  >>  <<  4  Addition  subtraction  logical or  bitwise inclusive or  bitwise exclusive or  the math functions  +  -  OR, ||  |  ^  sin, etc.  5 (lowest)  Equal  not equal  less than  greater than  less than or equal to  greater than or equal to  EQ, ==  NE, <>  LT, <  GT, >  LE, <=  GE, >=  See also  About expressions  Example: Operator precedence  "
  },
  {
    "id": 283,
    "title": "Arithmetic operators in expressions",
    "url": "67044.htm",
    "text": "Arithmetic operators allow you to perform basic arithmetical functions.  Symbol  Operator  Example  +  addition  tag1 + tag2  -  subtraction  tag1 - tag2  *  multiplication  tag1 * tag2  /  division  tag1 / tag2  MOD, %  modulus (remainder)  tag1 % tag2  **  exponent  tag1 ** 2  Tip:  Be sure that any tag value you use as a divisor cannot at some point have a value of zero. Expressions that attempt to divide a number by zero produce an error at run time.  To use MOD, both tags must contain integer values.  See also  About expressions  Operator precedence  Example: Arithmetic operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 284,
    "title": "Bitwise operators in expressions",
    "url": "67064.htm",
    "text": "Bitwise operators let you examine and manipulate individual bits within a value. These operators must only be applied to integers, not floating point numbers.  Symbol  Operator  Example  &  AND  tag1 & 07  |  inclusive OR  tag2 | tag1  ^  exclusive OR (XOR)  tag1 ^ 01  >>  right shift  tag1 >> 1  <<  left shift  tag1 << 2  ~  complement  ~ tag1  Tip:  The bitwise operators &, |, and ^ compare two integers or tags on a bit by bit basis.  The bitwise operators >>, <<, and ~ operators manipulate a single integer or tag.  See also  About expressions  Example: Bitwise operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 285,
    "title": "Logical operators in expressions",
    "url": "67018.htm",
    "text": "Logical operators determine the validity of one or more statements. The operators return a value of 1 (or another non-zero value) if the expression is true, or a value of 0 if false. There are three logical operators: AND, OR, and NOT.  Symbols  Operator  Example  AND, &&  and  (tag1 < tag 2) AND (tag1 == 5)  OR, ||  or  (tag1 == 5) OR (tag1 ==10)  NOT  negation  NOT(tag1 > tag2)  Tip:  The parentheses are essential in the above expressions.  Any statement which evaluates to a non-zero value is regarded as true. For example, the statement tag1 will be false if the value of tag1 is 0, and true if tag1 has any other value.  See also  About expressions  Example: Logical operators  Logical AND  Logical OR  Logical NOT  "
  },
  {
    "id": 286,
    "title": "Relational operators in expressions",
    "url": "67028.htm",
    "text": "Relational operators compare two values to provide a true or false result. If the statement is true, a value of 1 is returned. If false, 0 is returned. There are six relational operators; each has two different symbols.  Symbols  Operator  Example  EQ, ==  equal  tag1 == tag2  NE, <>  not equal  tag1 <> tag2  LT, <  less than  tag1 < tag2  GT, >  greater than  tag1 > tag2  LE, <=  less than or equal to  tag1 <= tag2  GE, >=  greater than or equal to  tag1 >= tag2  See also  About expressions  Example: Relational operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 287,
    "title": "Quick reference to operators",
    "url": "67086.htm",
    "text": "Symbol  Operator  Example  +  addition  tag1 + tag2  -  subtraction  tag1 - tag2  *  multiplication  tag1 * tag2  /  division  tag1 / tag2  MOD, %  modulus (remainder)  tag1 % tag2  **  exponent  tag1 ** 2  EQ, ==  equal  tag1 == tag2  NE, <>  not equal  tag1 <> tag2  LT, <  less than  tag1 < tag2  GT, >  greater than  tag1 > tag2  LE, <=  less than or equal to  tag1 <= tag2  GE, >=  greater than or equal to  tag1 >= tag2  AND, &&  and  (tag1 < tag 2) AND (tag1 = 5)  OR, ||  or  (tag1 = 5) OR (tag1 = 10)  NOT  negation  NOT(tag1 > tag2)  &  AND  tag1 & 07  |  inclusive OR  tag2 | tag1  ^  exclusive OR (XOR)  tag1 ^ 01  >>  right shift  tag1 >> 1  <<  left shift  tag1 << 2  ~  complement  ~ tag1  See also  About expressions  Quick reference to math functions  Quick reference to security functions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 288,
    "title": "Addition (+)",
    "url": "67048.htm",
    "text": "Returns the sum of the two values.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 289,
    "title": "Subtraction (-)",
    "url": "67050.htm",
    "text": "Returns the difference of the two values.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 290,
    "title": "Multiplication (*)",
    "url": "67052.htm",
    "text": "Returns the product of the two values.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 291,
    "title": "Division (/)",
    "url": "67054.htm",
    "text": "Returns the quotient of the two values.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 292,
    "title": "Modulus (MOD or %)",
    "url": "67056.htm",
    "text": "Returns the remainder of one number divided by another. For example, the remainder of 13 divided by 5 is 3; so 13 % 5 = 3.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 293,
    "title": "Exponent (**)",
    "url": "67058.htm",
    "text": "Returns the result of raising the first value to the power of the second value.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 294,
    "title": "Equal (EQ or ==)",
    "url": "67032.htm",
    "text": "Compares the two values and returns a 1 (true) if they are equal, or a 0 (false) if they are not equal.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 295,
    "title": "Not equal (NE or &lt;&gt;)",
    "url": "67034.htm",
    "text": "Compares the two values and returns a 1 (true) if they are not equal, or a 0 (false) if they are equal.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 296,
    "title": "Less than (LT or &lt;)",
    "url": "67036.htm",
    "text": "Compares two values and returns a 1 (true) if the value on the left is smaller than the value on the right, and returns a 0 (false) otherwise.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 297,
    "title": "Greater than (GT or &gt;)",
    "url": "67038.htm",
    "text": "Compares two values and returns a 1 (true) if the value on the left is larger than the value on the right, and returns a 0 (false) otherwise.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 298,
    "title": "Less than or equal to (LE or &lt;=)",
    "url": "67040.htm",
    "text": "Compares two values and returns a 1 (true) if the value on the left is smaller or the same as the value on the right, and returns a 0 (false) otherwise.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 299,
    "title": "Greater than or equal to (GE or &gt;=)",
    "url": "67042.htm",
    "text": "Compares two values and returns a 1 (true) if the value on the left is larger or the same as the value on the right, and returns a 0 (false) otherwise.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 300,
    "title": "Logical AND (&amp;&amp;)",
    "url": "67022.htm",
    "text": "Returns a value of 1 if the statements to the right and to the left of the operator are both true.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 301,
    "title": "Logical OR (||)",
    "url": "67024.htm",
    "text": "Returns a value of 1 if either the statement to the left or to the right of the operator is true.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 302,
    "title": "Logical NOT",
    "url": "67026.htm",
    "text": "Reverses the logical value of the statement it operates on.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 303,
    "title": "Bitwise AND (&amp;)",
    "url": "67068.htm",
    "text": "Returns an integer with a bit set to 1 if both of the corresponding bits in the original numbers are 1. Otherwise, the resulting bit is 0.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 304,
    "title": "Bitwise inclusive OR ( | )",
    "url": "67070.htm",
    "text": "Returns an integer with a bit set to 1 if either or both of the corresponding bits in the original numbers are 1. If both bits are 0, the resulting bit is 0.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 305,
    "title": "Bitwise exclusive OR (^)",
    "url": "67072.htm",
    "text": "Returns an integer with a bit set to 1 if either of the corresponding bits in the original numbers is 1. If both bits are 1 or both are 0, the resulting bit is 0.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 306,
    "title": "Right Shift operator ( &gt;&gt; )",
    "url": "67074.htm",
    "text": "Shifts the bits within the left operand by the amount specified in the right operand. The bit on the right disappears.  Either a 0 or a 1 is shifted in on the left, depending on whether the integer is signed or unsigned. With unsigned integers, 0 is always shifted in on the left; with signed integers, a 0 is shifted in when the number is positive (i.e., the leftmost bit, the sign bit, is 0), and a 1 is shifted in when the number is negative (i.e., the leftmost bit, the sign bit, is 1). In other words, with signed integers, the sign of the number is always maintained.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 307,
    "title": "Left Shift operator ( &lt;&lt; )",
    "url": "67076.htm",
    "text": "Shifts the bits within the left operand by the amount specified in the right operand. The bit on the left disappears and a 0 is shifted in on the right.  If the left bit is a 1 an overflow will occur, and an error message is displayed. To prevent this, use the bitwise AND (&) operator in an expression. For example:  (dev << 1) & 65535 where 65535 is 1111 1111 1111 1111 in binary form.  where dev is a tag name, whose value is being shifted left.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 308,
    "title": "Complement operator ( ~ )",
    "url": "67078.htm",
    "text": "Gives the one&#8217;s complement of a number, i.e., reverses every bit within the number, so that every 1 bit becomes a 0 and every 0 becomes a 1.  See also  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 309,
    "title": "Math functions in expressions",
    "url": "67088.htm",
    "text": "Use math functions to calculate the log (natural or base 10), trigonometry ratios (in radians or degrees) or square root of a tag.  See also  About expressions  Quick reference to math functions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 310,
    "title": "Select functions",
    "url": "67080.htm",
    "text": "When you click the Functions button in the Expression editor it opens the Function Selection dialog box, listing all the functions available to the Expression editor.  To select a function for the expression you are creating  Click the Functions button.  Click a category in the Functions Category list on the left.  From the Choices within Category list, double-click the function you want for the expression, or highlight it and click OK. The function is copied to the Expression dialog box.  See also  Quick reference to math functions  Math functions in expressions  Quick reference to security functions  About expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 311,
    "title": "Quick reference to math functions",
    "url": "67082.htm",
    "text": "The mathematical functions, listed alphabetically in the following table, are used with expressions, which can consist of a stand-alone tag (tag), multiple tags (tag*), a constant, or a complex expression.  This function:  Returns this value:  ARCCOS(expression)  the arc cosine of the expression in radians  ARCCOSD(expression)  the arc cosine of the expression in degrees  ARCSIN(expression)  the arc sine of the expression in radians  ARCSIND(expression)  the arc sine of the expression in degrees  ARCTAN(expression)  the arc tangent of the expression in radians  ARCTAND(expression)  the arc tangent of the expression in degrees  COS(expression)  the cosine of the expression in radians  COSD(expression)  the cosine of the expression in degrees  LOG(expression)  the natural log of the expression  LOG10(expression)  the base ten log of the expression  SIN(expression)  the sine of the expression in radians  SIND(expression)  the sine of the expression in degrees  SQRT(expression)  the square root of the expression  TAN(expression)  the tangent of the expression in radians  TAND(expression)  the tangent of the expression in degrees  See also  About expressions  Quick reference to security functions  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 312,
    "title": "Quick reference to security functions",
    "url": "67084.htm",
    "text": "These functions allow you to determine a user&#8217;s identity or security rights to limit access to the application based on these criteria. You might use these functions to control the visibility of graphic objects.  This function  Returns this value  CurrentUserName( )  A string containing the name of the current user.  This function is case sensitive. All RSView 3.20 and earlier user names use uppercase letters.  CurrentUserHasCode(SecurityCode)  1 (true) if any of the specified security codes have been assigned to the user; 0 (false) if not.  The argument can be a security code, tag name, or tag placeholder. If you use a tag name or tag placeholder, it must be enclosed in curly brackets ({}), for example, CurrentUserHasCode({#1}).  If checking multiple security codes, do not type a space between the security code letters.  For example, CurrentUserHasCode(ABP) returns the value 1 if the user has been assigned one or more of the specified codes.  CurrentUserHasGroup(\"Group Name\")  1 (true) if the current user is assigned to the specified group configured in FactoryTalk Diagnostics; 0 (false) if not.  The argument can be a literal string, string tag, or tag placeholder. If you use a string, it must be enclosed in double quotes, for example, CurrentUserHasGroup (\"UserGroupName1\").  The argument can also be a combination of a literal string and string tag in the format of &#8220;Liter string&#8221; + String tag, for example, CurrentUserHasGroup (\"UserGroupName1\"+{[Controller]Main.UserGroupName}).  If CurrentUserHasGroup(\"Group C\") returns the value 1, the user has been assigned to Group C.  This function is only supported in 8.0 and later versions of FactoryTalk ME applications.  Tip:  If you use a tag parameter for the CurrentUserHasCode() or the CurrentUserHasGroup () security function and create an 8.20 or earlier version runtime application (.mer) using current version FactoryTalk View:  The runtime application functions well.  When you restore the runtime application to 8.20 or earlier version design time application (.med) and create runtime application from the design time application in FactoryTalk View 8.20 or earlier, the security function does not work.  After you create a Windows-linked group on a domain computer and configure the group in FactoryTalk Directory, if you want to delete the group from the domain computer, and create a same-named Windows-linked group, you need do the following to ensure the CurrentUserHasGroup() security function returns consistent values on desktops and terminals:  Delete the Windows-linked group from the domain computer and FactoryTalk Directory.  Create a Windows-linked group on domain computer and assign the user(s) to the Windows-linked group.  Configure the Windows-linked group in FactoryTalk Diagnostics.  On terminals, when removing a domain user from a specified group that is configured in FactoryTalk Directory, CurrentUserHasGroup() still returns TRUE until the user re-log in.  See also  About expressions  Quick reference to math functions  Quick reference to operators  "
  },
  {
    "id": 313,
    "title": "Use expressions in graphic displays",
    "url": "67006.htm",
    "text": "In the Graphics editor, you can use expressions to manipulate the control values of many of the graphic objects. You can also use expressions when attaching animation to objects.  See also  About expressions  The Graphics editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 314,
    "title": "Use expressions with alarms",
    "url": "67008.htm",
    "text": "In the Alarm Setup editor, you can use expressions with some of the controls that silence and acknowledge alarms.  See also  About expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 315,
    "title": "Use expressions with global connections",
    "url": "67014.htm",
    "text": "In the Global Connections editor, you can use expressions to:  Remotely control the opening and printing of displays  Remotely control the date and time to show  See also  About expressions  Set up global connections  "
  },
  {
    "id": 316,
    "title": "Use expressions with information messages",
    "url": "67010.htm",
    "text": "In the Information Setup editor, you can use an expression to determine when to show the information messages.  See also  About expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 317,
    "title": "Use expressions with macros",
    "url": "67012.htm",
    "text": "In the Macros editor, you can create macros that use expressions to assign initial values to tags.  See also  About expressions  Create macros  "
  },
  {
    "id": 318,
    "title": "Examples: Expressions",
    "url": "66984.htm",
    "text": "Expressions that return numeric values  Expressions that return true/false values  Control visibility with If-Then-Else logic  "
  },
  {
    "id": 319,
    "title": "Example: Operator precedence",
    "url": "67062.htm",
    "text": "For these examples, tag1 = 5, tag2 = 7, and tag3 =10.  (tag1 > tag2) AND (tag1 < tag3) is evaluated in this sequence:  1&nbsp;tag1 > tag2 = 0  2&nbsp;tag1 < tag3 = 1  3&nbsp;0 AND 1 = 0  The expression evaluates to 0.  tag1 > tag2 AND tag3 is evaluated in this sequence:  1&nbsp;tag2 AND tag3 = 1  2&nbsp;tag1 > 1 = 1  The expression evaluates to 1.  NOT tag1 AND tag2 > tag3 ** 2 is evaluated in this sequence:  1&nbsp;NOT tag1 = 0  2&nbsp;0 AND tag2 = 0  3&nbsp;tag3 ** 2 = 100  4&nbsp;0 > 100 = 0  The expression evaluates to 0.  See also  About expressions  Operator precedence in expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 320,
    "title": "Example: Use tags in expressions",
    "url": "67622.htm",
    "text": "In the following examples, tag1 = 5 and tag2 = 7.  tag1 returns 5  tag1 + 25 returns 30  tag1 MOD tag2 returns 5*  * To use MOD, both tags must contain integer values.  tag1 > tag2 returns 0 (false)  (tag1 < tag2) AND (tag1 == 5) returns 1 (both statements are true)  See also  About expressions  Tags in expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 321,
    "title": "Example: Arithmetic operators",
    "url": "67046.htm",
    "text": "For these examples, tag1 = 5 and tag2 = 7.  tag1 + tag2&nbsp;returns a value of 12  tag1 * tag2&nbsp;returns a value of 35  tag1 - tag2&nbsp;returns a value of -2  tag1 / tag2&nbsp;returns a value of 0.71  tag2 MOD tag1&nbsp;returns a value of 2*  * To use MOD, both tags must contain integer values.  tag1 ** tag2&nbsp;returns a value of 78125  See also  About expressions  Arithmetic operators in expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 322,
    "title": "Example: Bitwise operators",
    "url": "67066.htm",
    "text": "For these examples tag1 = 5 (binary 0000 0000 0000 0101), tag2 = 3 (binary 0000 0000 0000 0011)  tag1 & tag2&nbsp;<br />returns 1 (binary 0000 0000 0000 0001)  tag1 | tag2&nbsp;<br />returns 7 (binary 0000 0000 0000 0111)  tag1 ^ tag2&nbsp;<br />returns 6 (binary 0000 0000 0000 0110)  tag1 >> 1&nbsp;<br />returns 2 (binary 0000 0000 0000 0010)  tag1 << 1&nbsp;<br />returns 10 (binary 0000 0000 0000 1010)  ~ tag1&nbsp;&nbsp;<br />returns -6 (binary 1111 1111 1111 1010)  See also  About expressions  Bitwise operators in expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 323,
    "title": "Example: Control visibility with If-Then-Else logic",
    "url": "66990.htm",
    "text": "This example shows how to create a graphic object that is to be visible only when tag1 exceeds a specified value.  To create a graphic object that is to be visible only when tag1 exceeds a specified value  Draw the object.  In the Visibility animation dialog box, type the expression:  If (tag1 > 55) Then 1 Else 0  Specify that the object is to be visible when the expression is true.  See also  About expressions  If-Then-Else logic  "
  },
  {
    "id": 324,
    "title": "Example: Expressions that return numeric values",
    "url": "66986.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the expressions that return numeric values.  For these examples, assume tag1 = 5 and tag2 = 25.  Expressions  Returned values  tag1  5  tag1 + tag2  (arithmetic operator)  30  ~tag1  (bitwise operator)  -6  SQRT(tag2)  (mathematical function)  5  See also  About expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 325,
    "title": "Example: Expressions that return true or false values",
    "url": "66988.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the expressions that return true or false values.  Expressions  Returned values  tag1 > 20  (relational operator)  1 (true) if tag1 is greater than 20  0 (false) if tag1 is less than or equal to 20  Industry\\Valve AND Municipal\\Valve  (logical operator)  1 (true) if both valves are open  0 (false) if one or both valves are closed  See also  About expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 326,
    "title": "Example: Logical operators",
    "url": "67020.htm",
    "text": "For these examples, tag1 = 5 and tag2 = 7.  (tag1 < tag2) AND (tag1 == 5)  returns a 1 since both statements are true  tag1 && tag2  returns a 1 since both tag1 and tag2 are non-zero (true)  (tag1 > tag2) OR (tag1 == 5)  returns a value of 1 since tag1 = 5 is true  NOT(tag1 < tag2)  tag1 < tag2 is true and would return a 1 but the NOT operator reverses the logical value, so 0 is returned  See also  About expressions  Logical operators in expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 327,
    "title": "Example: Relational operators",
    "url": "67030.htm",
    "text": "For these examples, tag1 = 5 and tag2 = 7.  tag1 > tag2<br />is false, so the expression returns a 0  tag1 LE tag2<br />is true, so the expression returns a 1  tag1 == 5<br />is true, so the expression returns a 1  See also  About expressions  Relational operators in expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 328,
    "title": "Example: Comments",
    "url": "67612.htm",
    "text": "In a single line such as:  If a>b Then c Else d ! if/then expression  only that part preceding the exclamation point is evaluated.  In several lines such as:  If a>b !Click this button to use a subset of the data contained in the data model.  !temp a greater than temp b  Then c ! shut valve  Else d ! do nothing  only those parts preceding the exclamation points are evaluated.  See also  About expressions  Add comments to expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 329,
    "title": "Example: Constants",
    "url": "67626.htm",
    "text": "The following are valid expressions that use constants:  tag1 / 2<br />halves tag1  3.1415926 * ( tag1 ** 2)&nbsp;<br />calculates the area of a circle, whose radius is tag1  See also  About expressions  Constants in expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 330,
    "title": "Example: If-Then-Else logic",
    "url": "66994.htm",
    "text": "This expression:  If statement  Then value1  Else value2  Has this interpretation:  See also  About expressions  If-Then-Else logic  Example: Controlling visibility with If-Then-Else logic  "
  },
  {
    "id": 331,
    "title": "Example: Nested If-Then-Else logic 1",
    "url": "66999.htm",
    "text": "This expression:  If statement1 Then value1  Else&nbsp;If statement2 Then value2  Else value3  Has this interpretation:  See also  About expressions  Nested If-Then-Else logic  Example: Nested If-Then-Else logic 2  "
  },
  {
    "id": 332,
    "title": "Example: Nested If-Then-Else logic 2",
    "url": "67002.htm",
    "text": "This expression:  If statement1 Then  If statement2 Then value1  Else value2  Else value3  Has this interpretation:  See also  Example: Nested If-Then-Else logic 1  "
  },
  {
    "id": 333,
    "title": "Example: Write expressions",
    "url": "67768.htm",
    "text": "In this example, the operator regulates the speed of a conveyor belt by entering a value in feet or meters per second. When the operator enters the value in feet per second, the value is passed to the data source without conversion. When the operator enters the value in meters per second, the value is converted to feet per second before being passed to the data source.  The operator first indicates whether the value is in feet or meters by pushing a maintained push button. The push button has one state corresponding to feet per second, and the other state to meters per second. A tag called feet_or_meters is assigned to the maintained push button&#8217;s Value control.  Then the operator enters the value in a numeric pop-up keypad. The \"?\" character is the placeholder for the value the operator enters.  Here is the write expression assigned to the numeric input enable button&#8217;s Optional Expression control:  IF feet_or_meters == 0 THEN<br />?<br />ELSE<br />? * 3.281  The application writes the result of the expression to the Value control assigned to the numeric input enable button.  See also  About expressions  Write expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 334,
    "title": "Example: Format expressions",
    "url": "67608.htm",
    "text": "The following expression:  If (tag1 > tag2) Then 0  Else&nbsp;If (tag1 > tag 3) Then 2  Else 4  Could be condensed to the following:  If (tag1 > tag2) Then 0 Else If (tag1 > tag3) Then 2 Else 4  See also  About expressions  Format expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 335,
    "title": "About macros",
    "url": "67103.htm",
    "text": "A macro is a list of tag assignments stored in a text file, in the format <tag>=<value>. Each assignment assigns a value to a tag. The value can be in the form of another tag, an expression, a numeric constant, or a string. Whenever you run the macro, the specified values are written to the tags.  Use macros in these editors:  Startup - assign project startup and shutdown macros.  Graphics - assign startup and shutdown macros to graphic displays in the Display Settings dialog box of this editor.  Runtime Security - assign login and logout macros to users.  Global connections - assign macros to up to five global connections. Macros are run when an expression result or tag value changes.  At run time, the tag assignments in the macro file are run asynchronously, that is, the system does not wait for the completion of one tag assignment before running the next.  Tip:  Because macros are not necessarily executed in the order in which they are listed, do not rely on the order of execution to control your process.  To run a specified macro at run time, create a macro button and assign the macro to the button. When the operator presses the button at run time, the macro is executed.  When renaming macro files, make sure you update any references to that macro file (for example, in Runtime Security, Display Settings, or the Startup editor) to the new name.  See also  Create macros  Causes of run-time errors for macros  Example: Use macros  Configure startup settings  The Graphics editor  ME Runtime 3.20 and earlier tab  Set up global connections  ",
    "keywords": {
      "macro": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 336,
    "title": "Create a macro",
    "url": "67356.htm",
    "text": "In the Macros editor, assign values to tags. The values can be in the form of other tags, expressions, or simple numeric values. At run time, when the macro runs, the values are sent to the tags at the data source.  To create a macro  Open the Macros editor, using one of these methods:  From the File menu, select New > Macro.  In the Explorer window's Logic and Control folder, double-click the Macros icon.  In the Explorer window's Logic and Control folder, right-click the Macros icon and select New.  In the Explorer window's Logic and Control folder, drag and drop the Macros icon into the right pane.  Type one or more tag assignments, each in a separate row.  From the File menu, select Save and specify a name for the file.  Click Close.  You are prompted to save your changes if you haven&#8217;t done so.  Tip:  When renaming macro files, make sure you update any references to that macro file, for example, in the Runtime Security, Display Settings, or Startup editor.  See also  About macros  Options in the Macros editor  data source  "
  },
  {
    "id": 337,
    "title": "Create macros",
    "url": "78499.htm",
    "text": "In the Macros editor, assign values to tags. The values can be in the form of other tags, expressions, or simple numeric values. At run time, when the macro runs, the values are sent to the tags at the data source.  To create a macro  Open the Macros editor, using one of these methods:  From the File menu, select New > Macro.  In the Explorer window's Logic and Control folder, double-click the Macros icon.  In the Explorer window's Logic and Control folder, right-click the Macros icon and select New.  In the Explorer window's Logic and Control folder, drag and drop the Macros icon into the right pane.  Type one or more tag assignments, each in a separate row.  From the File menu, select Save and specify a name for the file.  Click Close.  You are prompted to save your changes if you haven&#8217;t done so.  Tip:  When renaming macro files, make sure you update any references to that macro file, for example, in the Runtime Security, Display Settings, or Startup editor.  See also  About macros  Options in the Macros editor  data source  "
  },
  {
    "id": 338,
    "title": "Create macros",
    "url": "78500.htm",
    "text": "In the Macros editor, assign values to tags. The values can be in the form of other tags, expressions, or simple numeric values. At run time, when the macro runs, the values are sent to the tags at the data source.  To create a macro  Open the Macros editor, using one of these methods:  From the File menu, select New > Macro.  In the Explorer window's Logic and Control folder, double-click the Macros icon.  In the Explorer window's Logic and Control folder, right-click the Macros icon and select New.  In the Explorer window's Logic and Control folder, drag and drop the Macros icon into the right pane.  Type one or more tag assignments, each in a separate row.  From the File menu, select Save and specify a name for the file.  Click Close.  You are prompted to save your changes if you haven&#8217;t done so.  Tip:  When renaming macro files, make sure you update any references to that macro file, for example, in the Runtime Security, Display Settings, or Startup editor.  See also  About macros  Options in the Macros editor  data source  "
  },
  {
    "id": 339,
    "title": "Options in the Macros editor",
    "url": "298863.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options in the Macros editor.  Options  Descriptions  Tag  Enter the tag name in this column, or click the Browse button to open the Tag Browser and select a tag.  Expression  Enter a tag name, expression, or numeric value in this column, or click the Browse button to open the Expression editor and create an expression.  See also  Create a macro  The Expression editor  Tag Browser  "
  },
  {
    "id": 340,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for macros",
    "url": "67601.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs errors and warnings about macros to diagnostics under these circumstances:  problems reading the macro file or the expression  problems writing to the tag  problems communicating within the project or with the data source  The application also sends information messages to diagnostics when an expression in a macro is read successfully, and when a value is written to a tag successfully.  Tip:  Because macros are not necessarily run in the order in which they are listed, do not rely on the order of execution to control your process.  See also  About macros  data source  "
  },
  {
    "id": 341,
    "title": "Example: Use macros",
    "url": "67105.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the macros that assign initial values to tags.  Methods of assigning an initial value   Macros  Using another tag  tag1 = tag2  Using an expression  tag1 = tag2 * 5 + (tag3 - 1) * 2  Using a simple numeric value  tag1 = 120  See also  About macros  "
  },
  {
    "id": 342,
    "title": "About data logging",
    "url": "67094.htm",
    "text": "Use data logging and the trend graphic object to chart how tag values change over time.  At run time, when the operator opens a graphic display containing a trend, the trend displays values from the data log file for the data log model that is running. The data log model specifies the data to collect in the data log file.  Use these editors to set up data logging:  Data Log Model - set up a data log model that specifies how many log values to store, the conditions that trigger data logging, and which tags to monitor.  Startup - turn on data logging by selecting the Data logging check box. Also use this editor to specify the data log model to use at run time.  Graphics - create a graphic display containing a trend graphic object, and set up the trend to display values from the data log model. Specify what the trend object looks like, which tag values to display, the start time, the time span for the data, and the name of the data log model.  As soon as the project starts running, it begins logging values to the data log file. When the file is full, the oldest data is deleted to make room for new data. The application supplies data from the log file to the trend object for the specified tags and time span.  Tip:  The data log file is retained when an application is restarted after a shutdown or power loss. You can delete the log file from the run-time computer at project startup.  See also  The Data Log Model editor  Configure startup settings  The Graphics editor  Set up data logging (Setup tab)  Set up data logging (Paths tab)  ",
    "keywords": {
      "data logging": "100",
      "model": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 343,
    "title": "Configure a model",
    "url": "67096.htm",
    "text": "Data logging saves specific tag values or data under certain conditions. In the Data Log Model editor, you create data log models that define these conditions. The data can be shown in a trend.  When you configure a model you specify how many log values to store, where log files will be stored, the conditions that will trigger data logging, and which tags the model will monitor.  You can define multiple data log models, but at run time you can use only one data log model at a time.  Tip:  For data logging to occur at run time, you must select the Data logging box in the Startup editor.  The maximum number of tags that can be logged is 100 tags.  To configure a model  Open the Data Log Model editor using one of these methods:  In the Data Log folder in the Explorer window, double click the Data Log Model icon.  In the Data Log folder in the Explorer window, right click the Data Log Model icon and select New.  In the Data Log folder in the Explorer window, drag and drop the Data Log Models icon into the right pane.  In the Data Log folder in the Explorer window, right-click an existing data log model and select Open.  From the File menu, select New > Data Log.  Define the model on the Setup, Paths, Log Triggers, and Tags In Model tabs.  When you click Close to save the model, type a name for it in the Component Name dialog box.  See also  About data logging  Configure startup settings  Set up data logging (Setup tab)  Set up data logging (Paths tab)  Set up data logging (Log Triggers tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 344,
    "title": "Configure a model",
    "url": "78491.htm",
    "text": "Data logging saves specific tag values or data under certain conditions. In the Data Log Model editor, you create data log models that define these conditions. The data can be shown in a trend.  When you configure a model you specify how many log values to store, where log files will be stored, the conditions that will trigger data logging, and which tags the model will monitor.  You can define multiple data log models, but at run time you can use only one data log model at a time.  Tip:  For data logging to occur at run time, you must select the Data logging box in the Startup editor.  The maximum number of tags that can be logged is 100 tags.  To configure a model  Open the Data Log Model editor using one of these methods:  In the Data Log folder in the Explorer window, double click the Data Log Model icon.  In the Data Log folder in the Explorer window, right click the Data Log Model icon and select New.  In the Data Log folder in the Explorer window, drag and drop the Data Log Models icon into the right pane.  In the Data Log folder in the Explorer window, right-click an existing data log model and select Open.  From the File menu, select New > Data Log.  Define the model on the Setup, Paths, Log Triggers, and Tags In Model tabs.  When you click Close to save the model, type a name for it in the Component Name dialog box.  See also  About data logging  Configure startup settings  Set up data logging (Setup tab)  Set up data logging (Paths tab)  Set up data logging (Log Triggers tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 345,
    "title": "Configure a model",
    "url": "78492.htm",
    "text": "Data logging saves specific tag values or data under certain conditions. In the Data Log Model editor, you create data log models that define these conditions. The data can be shown in a trend.  When you configure a model you specify how many log values to store, where log files will be stored, the conditions that will trigger data logging, and which tags the model will monitor.  You can define multiple data log models, but at run time you can use only one data log model at a time.  Tip:  For data logging to occur at run time, you must select the Data logging box in the Startup editor.  The maximum number of tags that can be logged is 100 tags.  To configure a model  Open the Data Log Model editor using one of these methods:  In the Data Log folder in the Explorer window, double click the Data Log Model icon.  In the Data Log folder in the Explorer window, right click the Data Log Model icon and select New.  In the Data Log folder in the Explorer window, drag and drop the Data Log Models icon into the right pane.  In the Data Log folder in the Explorer window, right-click an existing data log model and select Open.  From the File menu, select New > Data Log.  Define the model on the Setup, Paths, Log Triggers, and Tags In Model tabs.  When you click Close to save the model, type a name for it in the Component Name dialog box.  See also  About data logging  Configure startup settings  Set up data logging (Setup tab)  Set up data logging (Paths tab)  Set up data logging (Log Triggers tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 346,
    "title": "Set up data logging (Setup tab)",
    "url": "67420.htm",
    "text": "In the Setup tab, provide a brief description of the data log model, and specify how many tag values to store.  Options  Model name  This is the name you specify when you save the data log model. To save the model, click Close, or, from the File menu, choose Save.  Tip:  You cannot save a data log model until you have added at least one tag to the model (in the Tags in Model tab).  Description  Type a brief description of the model, up to 50 characters. This is for your information only.  Maximum data points  Type the total number of tag values to store. When this number is reached, the oldest tag values are deleted to make room for new values. The higher you set the limit, the more space the data log file requires on the run-time computer; or, if you are logging to a custom path on a remote computer, more space is required on the remote computer.  Tip:  The minimum value to store is 100. The maximum value is 1,000,000 for version 7.00.00 or 300,000 for release versions earlier than 7.00.00. The default is 1000.   Important:  Applications with a very large number of data points in the data log model, at or close to the maximum, will take longer to close than applications with a smaller number of data points.  See also  About data logging  Set up data logging (Paths tab)  Set up data logging (Log Triggers tab)  Set up data logging (Tags In Model tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 347,
    "title": "Set up data logging (Paths tab)",
    "url": "67416.htm",
    "text": "On the Paths tab, specify where the run-time data log files will be saved. You can choose the system default path or specify a custom location.  System default path  The system default path will vary depending on the computer that FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station is running on. Log files are stored in:  (Windows 7 SP1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1, Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server 2016 applications and MobileView terminal applications) \\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\Logs\\Runtime Application Name\\DLGLOG\\Data Log Model Name.  (PanelView Plus 7 and PanelView Plus 6 terminal applications) \\Windows\\Logs\\Runtime Application Name\\DLGLOG\\Data Log Model Name.  (PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal applications) \\Storage Card\\Rockwell Software\\RSViewME\\Logs\\Runtime Application\\Name\\DLGLOG\\Data Log Model Name.  Custom location - Path where data log file(s) will be stored  Type the path to the folder where run-time data log file(s) will be stored.  For Windows 7 SP1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1, Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server 2016 applications and MobileView terminal applications, the path must contain a drive letter (such as C:\\) or use the Universal Naming Convention (UNC) style.  For PanelView Plus 7 and PanelView Plus 6 applications, you can log to a location on the terminal, a shared folder on a networked computer, or an SD card. For example, \\Storage Card2\\Data\\Logs specifies a location on the PanelView Plus 7 or PanelView Plus 6 terminal.  For PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, and PanelView Plus CE terminal applications, you can log to a location on the terminal, a shared folder on a networked computer, or Compact Flash card. For example, \\Storage Card\\Data\\Logs specifies a location on the PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CEterminal.  Tip:  To log to a shared folder on a networked computer, use UNC style for the path. For example, \\\\server\\logs. logs is a shared folder on a network server.  A shared folder on a networked computer must be on a shared drive.  The network must have domain name resolution, such as a DNS server, to resolve the UNC computer name defined in your path.  If you specify a path to a folder that does not exist, the path will be created at run time, as long as the user logged in to the run-time computer has folder creation rights at the specified location.  For information on converting logged tag data to other formats, such as Excel, refer to Answer ID 33924 and 21174 in the Rockwell Knowledgebase.  See also  About data logging  Set up data logging (Setup tab)  Set up data logging (Log Triggers tab)  Set up data logging (Tags In Model tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 348,
    "title": "Set up data logging (Log Triggers tab)",
    "url": "67422.htm",
    "text": "In the Log Triggers tab you specify when to log tag values. Choose whether logging takes place at regular intervals or when tag values change. The default is Periodic/10 seconds, which means values are logged every ten seconds.  Options  Periodic  Interval  To log tag values periodically, choose Periodic. In the Interval box, type a time and select a time unit to specify how often tag values are logged. All tags in the model are logged each time this interval expires.  On Change  Use the On Change trigger to log tag values once a value has changed by a certain percentage. The percentage is based on the tag's minimum and maximum values as configured in the Tags editor. Only tags that change by the specified percentage are logged. For example, specifying 10 means a tag's value must change by 10 percent to be logged. FactoryTalk View only attempts to read minimum and maximum values for tags with a percentage change other than 0.  If you are logging a tag that does not have a minimum or maximum attribute, for instance, a direct reference data item (a non-HMI tag), or a data server tag in Logix 5000, the percentage calculation does not work, and any change in the tag's value is logged.  Maximum update rate  Specify the maximum rate at which data servers will send data to the tags in the data log model. The update rate applies to all the data log model tags. The default update rate is 1 second.  At run time, all tags are updated immediately when the data log model is started, regardless of the update rate.  Change Percentage  Type the percentage a tag value has to change to trigger logging. To log all changes, type 0. The percentage can contain decimals.  Heartbeat  Type a time and select a time unit to specify how often tag values are logged even if no change has occurred. The heartbeat ensures that the data in the log file is current.  Specify 0 for the heartbeat if you do not want to use it. All tag values are logged whenever they change.  Tip:  The heartbeat value must not be less than the maximum update rate. However, if you specify a heartbeat rate of 0 (heartbeat not used), this will not conflict with any update rate.  See also  About data logging  Set up data logging (Setup tab)  Set up data logging (Paths tab)  Set up data logging (Tags In Model tab)  The Data Log Model editor  The Tags editor  Configuration of a CSVDataLog or a DataStorePlus ActivewX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 349,
    "title": "Set up data logging (Tags In Model tab)",
    "url": "67092.htm",
    "text": "In the Tags In Model tab, you identify which tags the model will log data for. The maximum number of tags that can be logged is 100 tags. You cannot log data for string tags, array tags, parameters, or expressions, and you cannot use tag placeholders in your data log model.  Options  Tags to add  Type the names of the tags the data log model will monitor. Separate multiple tag names with a space.  Tag browse button (...)  Click this button to open the Tag Browser. Tags that you select in the Tag Browser are entered in the Tags to add box when you click OK.  Tip:  In the Data Log Models editor, you can select multiple tags at once.  Data log models do not accept shortcut names that contain spaces. Ensure that a device shortcut is a single word without spaces, for example, NEW_SHORTCUT.  To select multiple tags for a data log model in the Tag Browser  Navigate to the relevant folder in the hierarchy on the left and then click it to open it.  In the list of tags in the right-hand pane, click a tag to select it. To select another tag, hold down the Ctrl key as you click the mouse.  Click the Add Tag[s] to List button, to add the tags you have selected to the Selected tag[s] box.  Click Clear to remove all tags from the Selected tag[s] box, or select individual tags and click Remove to remove only the selected tags.  Tags in model  This box shows the tags that have been added to the model so far.  Add  Click this button to add the tags listed in the Tags to add box.  Remove  Highlight a tag in the Tags in model box, and then click this button to remove a tag.  Remove All  Click this button to remove all tags from the model.  Tip:  Applications with a very large number of data points in the data log model, at or close to the maximum, will take longer to close than applications with a smaller number of data points.  See also  About data logging  Set up data logging (Setup tab)  Set up data logging (Paths tab)  Set up data logging (Log Triggers tab)  The Data Log Model editor  The Tag Browser  "
  },
  {
    "id": 350,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for data logging",
    "url": "67603.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs errors to FactoryTalk Diagnostics about data logging under these circumstances:  If for any reason communications between the data log model and the data log file fail or are interrupted, data logging will stop and will not be restored until the application is restarted. The application will log an error.  When your project starts at run time, if any of the tags specified in the current data log model do not exist, the application logs an error.  If the data log file is corrupted or invalid, the file is deleted and recreated, and the application logs an error.  If the data is not being logged to a folder location on the run-time computer, but to a remote computer on a network, the run-time computer and the remote computer must be on the same domain. Otherwise, the log folder cannot be created and the application logs an error.  If logging to an invalid path, the log folder cannot be created, and the application logs an error. One of the reasons that the path may be invalid is that the top-level folder of the path must be shared.  If the storage device becomes full due to lack of disk space, data logging stops, and the application logs an error. When sufficient disk space becomes available, data logging continues, but the data that would have been logged during the intervening time cannot be retrieved.  If there is not enough disk space at application startup, the data log model does not start when the application starts, and the application logs an error.  If the data log model contains an invalid tag type, e.g., a string tag, the application logs an error and the tag is put off-scan.  See also  About data logging  The Data Log Model editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 351,
    "title": "About graphic displays",
    "url": "67394.htm",
    "text": "In FactoryTalk View Studio, there are three kinds of graphic displays:  Standard displays - stored in the Displays folder. These are the displays that the operator sees at run time. They present views of automated plant activity or processes. They can show system or process data and provide operators with a way to write values to a real-time database or an external device such as a programmable controller.  Global object displays - stored in the Global Objects folder. Global object displays let you link the appearance and behavior of a graphic object on a global object display to multiple copies of that object in standard displays. When you make changes to the original object, the changes are automatically applied to the copies.  Library displays - stored in the Libraries folder. A library display contains ready-made graphic objects that you can use in other displays.  The elements that make up a graphic display are called graphic objects. The Objects menu in the Graphics editor provides simple drawing elements such as line, rectangle, and ellipse, as well as ready-made objects such as push buttons, input and display fields, and alarm banners and lists. Use these elements to create visual representations of processes and activities. Then animate the display by linking objects to tags so that the appearance of the objects change as the values of the tags do.  The maximum number of displays an application can have is determined by the type of activation the user has purchased for FactoryTalk View Studio. PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications have a limit of 100 displays (50 On Top displays and 50 Replace displays). Compact Machine Edition applications (applications running on PanelView Plus 6 Compact or PanelView Plus Compact terminals) have a limit of 25 displays.  See also  Create graphic displays  Edit graphic displays  Graphic objects and drawing elements  Graphic Libraries  About global objects and global object displays  ",
    "keywords": {
      "graphic display": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 352,
    "title": "The Graphics editor",
    "url": "67107.htm",
    "text": "When you start the Graphics editor you see a window with various menus, toolbars, and palettes, and a display window (drawing area) where you create and edit a graphic display.  If you select an existing display when you start the editor, the display determines the size of the editor's window.  Replace displays use the size specified in the Project Settings editor.  You can specify the size of On Top displays individually in the Display Settings dialog box or using the handles on the dotted line surrounding the display.  Tip:  You can have multiple graphic displays open at one time.  Project settings affect how your graphic displays look. Specify project settings before you create graphic displays.  See also  Create graphic displays  Project Settings  Display Settings  Set up the Graphics Display window  Set up a graphic display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 353,
    "title": "The Graphics editor",
    "url": "78493.htm",
    "text": "When you start the Graphics editor you see a window with various menus, toolbars, and palettes, and a display window (drawing area) where you create and edit a graphic display.  If you select an existing display when you start the editor, the display determines the size of the editor's window.  Replace displays use the size specified in the Project Settings editor.  You can specify the size of On Top displays individually in the Display Settings dialog box or using the handles on the dotted line surrounding the display.  Tip:  You can have multiple graphic displays open at one time.  Project settings affect how your graphic displays look. Specify project settings before you create graphic displays.  See also  Create graphic displays  Project Settings  Display Settings  Set up the Graphics Display window  Set up a graphic display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 354,
    "title": "The Graphics editor",
    "url": "78494.htm",
    "text": "When you start the Graphics editor you see a window with various menus, toolbars, and palettes, and a display window (drawing area) where you create and edit a graphic display.  If you select an existing display when you start the editor, the display determines the size of the editor's window.  Replace displays use the size specified in the Project Settings editor.  You can specify the size of On Top displays individually in the Display Settings dialog box or using the handles on the dotted line surrounding the display.  Tip:  You can have multiple graphic displays open at one time.  Project settings affect how your graphic displays look. Specify project settings before you create graphic displays.  See also  Create graphic displays  Project Settings  Display Settings  Set up the Graphics Display window  Set up a graphic display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 355,
    "title": "The Graphics editor",
    "url": "78495.htm",
    "text": "When you start the Graphics editor you see a window with various menus, toolbars, and palettes, and a display window (drawing area) where you create and edit a graphic display.  If you select an existing display when you start the editor, the display determines the size of the editor's window.  Replace displays use the size specified in the Project Settings editor.  You can specify the size of On Top displays individually in the Display Settings dialog box or using the handles on the dotted line surrounding the display.  Tip:  You can have multiple graphic displays open at one time.  Project settings affect how your graphic displays look. Specify project settings before you create graphic displays.  See also  Create graphic displays  Project Settings  Display Settings  Set up the Graphics Display window  Set up a graphic display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 356,
    "title": "Set up the Graphics Display window",
    "url": "298866.htm",
    "text": "You can set up the Graphics Display window from the View menu.  To set up the Graphics Display window  From the View menu, toggle on or off the display of the Status bar, Explorer, and toolbars.  These settings apply to the Graphics Display window rather than the individual graphic displays. They stay as you set them from one editing session to the next.  See also  The Graphics editor  Set up a graphic display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 357,
    "title": "Set up a graphic display",
    "url": "298867.htm",
    "text": "You can set up a graphic display from the Edit menu, context menu, or View menu.  To set up a graphic display  Use Display Settings on the Edit menu or context menu to define the size and background color for the graphic display. Some display settings also determine how the screen will look and behave at run time.  Use Grid Settings on the View menu to set up and activate a grid for the current graphic display.  Use commands on the View menu such as Zoom In or Zoom Out to increase or reduce the magnification of the graphic display. Magnification is not retained between editing sessions.  See also  The Graphics editor  Set up the Graphics Display window  Specify grid settings for a display  Magnify a display  Reduce the magnification of a display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 358,
    "title": "Save and exit from the Graphics editor",
    "url": "67267.htm",
    "text": "To save the graphic display you are working on and close the Graphics editor  Choose Save from the file menu or click the Save tool in the toolbar. This saves the graphic display with its existing name.  To save a previously saved graphic display under another name, choose the Save As command. This creates another copy of the display with the new name.  Choose Close from the File menu.  If you haven't saved your changes, you'll be asked if you want to.  Answer Yes to save the graphic display.  Answer No and all changes will be discarded.  Tip:  When renaming graphic displays, make sure you update any graphic objects that use the display name (for example, go to display button or display list selector) to the new name.  See also  The Graphics editor  Open graphic displays  Save graphic displays  "
  },
  {
    "id": 359,
    "title": "Magnify a display",
    "url": "67595.htm",
    "text": "The Zoom In option on the View menu allows you to see the objects in an area of the graphic display in more detail, making it easier to draw.  To magnify an area  Choose the object or objects to magnify.  Choose Zoom In from the View menu.  Use the scroll bars to view the desired area of the graphic display.  To return the display to its original size  From the View menu, select Cancel Zoom.  See also  Reduce the magnification of a display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 360,
    "title": "Reduce the magnification of a display",
    "url": "67597.htm",
    "text": "The Zoom Out option on the View menu reduces the magnification of the display. This gives you an overview of the objects in the display.  To reduce the magnification of a display  Choose Zoom Out from the View menu.  To return the display to its original size  From the View menu, select Cancel Zoom.  See also  Magnify a display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 361,
    "title": "Specify grid settings for a display",
    "url": "67589.htm",
    "text": "A grid helps you size and position objects precisely. You can change the grid settings any time while you are drawing. You can also use the View menu items Show Grid to turn grid visibility on and off, and Snap On to activate or de-activate the grid.  To set up the grid for a display  Select Grid Settings from the View menu.  Select the attributes and spacing for the grid.  Click OK.  Tip:  Font sizes are not given in pixels. If you want to place text on the grid lines you will have to make the vertical grid slightly larger to accommodate the font. For example, if the font size is 10, and the grid is 10 x 10, the font will not fit correctly. If you make the grid 10 x 16, increasing the vertical grid by 6 pixels, a size 10 Arial font will fit. The amount you have to increase may vary from font to font.  The grid settings apply to all subsequently opened displays.  Options  Attributes  Show Grid  Click to make the grid visible.  Snap To Grid  Click to make the grid active. When the grid is active, all the objects you draw, except freehand objects, are pulled to the closest grid point.  Grid Color  Select a color for the grid points.  Spacing  Horizontal (x)  Set the horizontal (or x axis) spacing for the grid points in pixels.  Vertical (y)  Set the vertical (or y axis) spacing for the grid points in pixels.  See also  Activate the grid for a display  Make the grid visible  "
  },
  {
    "id": 362,
    "title": "Make the grid visible",
    "url": "67593.htm",
    "text": "To make the grid in a display visible  Select Show Grid from the View menu,  or  Select the Show Grid check box in the Grid Settings dialog box.  To hide the grid  Deselect Show Grid on the View menu,  or  Clear the Show Grid check box in the Grid Settings dialog box.  To activate the grid so that objects in the graphic are aligned to it  Check Snap to Grid in the Grid Settings dialog box,  or  Select Snap On from the View menu.  See also  Specify grid settings for a display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 363,
    "title": "Activate the grid for a display",
    "url": "67591.htm",
    "text": "The grid can be active or inactive. When the grid is active, most of the objects you draw or position are pulled into alignment with the closest grid point. Some objects, such as the freehand object, snap to their own grid.  Deactivate the grid to draw or position an element between the grid lines. Activate the grid to automatically align the next object you draw or place. Existing objects are not aligned when the grid is activated unless they are moved.  To activate the grid for a display  Select Snap On from the View menu, or select the Snap To Grid check box in the Grid settings dialog box.  To de-activate the grid  De-select Snap On from the View menu, or clear the Snap To Grid check box in the Grid settings dialog box.  See also  Specify grid settings for a display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 364,
    "title": "Create graphic displays",
    "url": "67234.htm",
    "text": "A graphic display presents the operator's view of plant activity. It can show system or process data and provide operators with a way to write values to the data source. The components that make up a graphic display are called graphic objects.  Graphic objects can be:  created in the Graphics editor  copied and pasted from another graphic display or library  dragged and dropped from another graphic display or library  imported from DXF or WMF files  You can use these types of objects in graphic displays:  Drawing objects - geometric and freehand shapes, images, and text. You can animate a drawing object by attaching animation to it using a tag or expression. The drawing objects are listed on the Objects > Drawing menu.  Interactive objects - push buttons, indicators, numeric, and string input objects, and other objects listed on the Objects menu. You can apply visibility animation to these objects.  ActiveX objects - objects such as sliders, check boxes, radio buttons, Web browsers, and so on. You could use an ActiveX object to change a tag value, by connecting the tag to an ActiveX control property.  The types of ActiveX objects available depend on the software installed on your system. Make sure you use ActiveX controls that work with the operating system of the run-time computer. You should have both the version of the control for Windows 7 SP1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1, Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server 2016 operating systems, and the version for Windows CE.  To use an ActiveX object, on the Objects menu select ActiveX Control.  Tip:  Project settings affect how your graphic displays look. Specify project settings before you create graphic displays.  To create a new graphic display  To open the Displays editor, use one of these methods:  From the File menu, select New > Display  In the Graphics folder in the Explorer window, right-click the Display icon and select New.  In the Graphics folder in the Explorer window, drag and drop the Display icon into the right pane.  From the Edit menu, select Display Settings.  In the Display Settings dialog box, specify the background color and any run-time settings that you require.  Use tools from the toolboxes and toolbars to draw and arrange the objects in the graphic display. Use the palettes to apply fill and color before or after drawing an object.  Attach animation to simple drawing objects, as required, to animate them with real-time data. For interactive and ActiveX objects, you can attach visibility animation only. Visibility animation controls the conditions under which the objects appear in graphic displays at run time.  Choose Save from the File menu to save the graphic display.  All graphic files are given the extension .gfx.  See also  Edit graphic displays  Edit fine details with the keyboard  Drawing objects  The Graphics editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 365,
    "title": "Open graphic displays",
    "url": "67269.htm",
    "text": "To open an existing graphic display  In the Explorer window, open the Graphics folder, click Displays and then double-click the display.  or  Drag and drop the name of the display onto the right pane.  See also  Edit graphic displays  Use the Explorer window  "
  },
  {
    "id": 366,
    "title": "Default graphic displays",
    "url": "67796.htm",
    "text": "To help you get your project up and running as quickly as possible, FactoryTalk View Studio creates several default graphic displays that are pre-configured for a typical application. The default displays are created when you create the project.  The application creates these default displays:  [ALARM] - appears when alarms are triggered. Use this display to notify the operator when a dangerous or critical situation occurs.  [DIAGNOSTICS] - appears when certain system activity occurs. Use this display to notify the operator of information messages, warnings, errors, and audit messages from the application.  [INFORMATION] - appears when configured messages are triggered. Use this display to give the operator run-time messages about information that requires immediate attention.  MAIN - It is the default startup graphic display. You can specify other initial graphic display in the Startup editor.  You can use the default displays as is, modify them, or create your own displays.  To edit a default display  Open the display by doing one of the following:  In the Explorer window, open the Displays list in the Graphics folder, and then double-click the name of the graphic file to edit.  Drag and drop the name of the display from the Displays list onto the right pane.  Tip:  To open the [ALARM], [DIAGNOSTICS], or [INFORMATION] display, you can also click the Edit button in the Alarm Setup, Diagnostics List Setup, or Information Setup editor.  Use the tools and menu options available in the Graphics editor to modify the graphic display.  Save the graphic display. If you want to keep the original default display unchanged for future reference, choose Save As to give the modified display a new name.  Tip:  Copies of the default graphic displays are also available in the Graphics Libraries.  See also  Edit graphic displays  Use the Graphics editor  Use the Graphics Library  Configure startup settings  "
  },
  {
    "id": 367,
    "title": "Edit graphic displays",
    "url": "67242.htm",
    "text": "A graphic display consists of drawing objects such as ellipses and rectangles; interactive objects such as push buttons, numeric displays, and control list selectors; ActiveX objects provided by other applications; and display settings.  To edit an existing graphic display  Open the Graphics folder in the Explorer window.  Open the Displays list.  Double-click the name of the graphic file to edit.  Use the tools and menu options available in the Graphics Display editor to modify the graphic display.  Save the graphic display. If you are editing a graphic template as the basis for a new graphic display, choose Save As to give the graphic display a new name.  Tip:  To see the menu options available for any object in the graphic display, click the right mouse button when the cursor arrow is pointing at the object in question. This displays a context menu. To select a command from the menu, click it or highlight it then press Enter.  To see display settings, click the right mouse button on a blank area of the display and select Display Settings from the Context menu.  To open the editor&#8217;s toolboxes, toolbars, and palettes, select them from the View > Toolbars menu.  See also  Create graphic displays  Use the Graphics editor  Use the Graphics Library  Edit fine details with the keyboard  Import graphic images  "
  },
  {
    "id": 368,
    "title": "Save graphic displays",
    "url": "67265.htm",
    "text": "To save a new graphic display  Choose Save from the File menu.  Specify a name for the graphic display you are saving.  Click OK.  Tip:  You can use Save As to save a copy of an existing graphic display under a different name. This creates a copy of the file with the new name, leaving the original file unmodified. All graphic display files are stored in a directory determined by FactoryTalk View Studio. You cannot change the directory.  The length of the file name and its complete path should be no more than 256 characters.  When renaming graphic displays, make sure you update any graphic objects that use the display name (for example, goto display button or display list selector) to the new name.  Options  Component name  Type a file name and click OK.  See also  Graphic Libraries  Save and exit from the Graphics editor  Graphics editor  Open graphic displays  "
  },
  {
    "id": 369,
    "title": "Print graphic displays",
    "url": "67798.htm",
    "text": "To print a graphic display  Choose Print from the File menu.  Specify print options such as number of copies.  Click OK.  Tip:  To change the printer or printer options, from the File menu, choose Print Setup.  To print graphic displays at run time, create a display print button.  See also  Start an application  "
  },
  {
    "id": 370,
    "title": "Scale graphic displays",
    "url": "67338.htm",
    "text": "If you make changes to the window size, the Title check box, or the border check box on the project settings tabs, the Graphic Display Scaling dialog box opens.  Important:  If you choose to scale displays, changing the project settings back to their original settings may not return the project to its original condition. If you may need to restore the application, make a backup copy before scaling.  To scale graphic displays  Select the Scale graphic displays check box.  Select the check boxes to scale font sizes, border sizes, images, and the offsets used in animations.  Click OK to close the window and return to the Project Settings editor.  Tip:  If you choose to scale graphic displays, all Replace and On Top displays are resized, and the objects on them are scaled to fit the new size.  If you choose not to scale displays after changing the window size, Replace displays will be resized, but objects on the displays will remain the same size and in the same position as before. On Top displays are not resized.  If the application includes objects with images whose Image scaled property is turned on in the Image Settings pane of the object's Label tab, it is not necessary to scale images. Scaling images at run time may have a negative effect on the application's performance, depending on factors such as the image resolution and size. Therefore, if the application includes only a few objects with images, performance may be optimized by resizing the images manually.  See also  Options in the Graphic Display Scaling dialog box  About project settings  Specify project settings (General tab)  Specify project settings (Runtime tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 371,
    "title": "Options in the Graphic Display Scaling dialog box",
    "url": "348474.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options in the Graphic Display Scaling dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Scale graphic displays  Select this check box to let displays be scaled to match whatever changes you have made.  Scale the font size used by objects  Select this check box to scale the text on graphic objects. The new font size is determined as a percentage of the original font's height.  Text objects will be scaled only if the SizeToFit property is set to False.  Fonts used by ActiveX controls will not be scaled.  Scale the border sizes used by objects  Select this check box to scale object's borders. The new border width is calculated as a percentage of the original. New border widths with a floating point value greater than 1 will be rounded down to the nearest integer. Border widths with a floating point value less than 1 will be rounded up to 1.  Scale the images in the Images folder  Select this check box to scale the size of images in the Image folder as a percentage of the original.  The images will maintain the same height and width ratio as the original. If the project window size is changed and the vertical and horizontal scaling factors are not the same, the smallest scaling factor will be applied to both height and width.  Scale the offsets used in animations  Select this check box to scale the Horizontal offset and the Vertical offset pixels as a percentage of the original for the following animations:  Horizontal Position  Vertical Position  Horizontal Slider  Vertical Slider  See also  Scale graphic displays  "
  },
  {
    "id": 372,
    "title": "Set up display properties and behavior",
    "url": "67259.htm",
    "text": "Use the Display Settings option on the Edit menu to set up how the current graphic display will look and behave at run time.  To set up the display properties and behavior  Choose Display Settings from the Edit menu.  In the General tab, specify the details of how the display will look at run time.  In the Behavior tab, specify how the display will behave at run time.  Click OK when the settings are complete.  Tip:  If the tags assigned to a graphic object have not yet been scanned or are in error, the object will appear in the display with an outline, or will display some special form, such as asterisks, to indicate an error.  See also  Edit general display settings  Edit display behavior settings  Create graphic displays  The Graphics editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 373,
    "title": "Set up display properties and behavior",
    "url": "78497.htm",
    "text": "Use the Display Settings option on the Edit menu to set up how the current graphic display will look and behave at run time.  To set up the display properties and behavior  Choose Display Settings from the Edit menu.  In the General tab, specify the details of how the display will look at run time.  In the Behavior tab, specify how the display will behave at run time.  Click OK when the settings are complete.  Tip:  If the tags assigned to a graphic object have not yet been scanned or are in error, the object will appear in the display with an outline, or will display some special form, such as asterisks, to indicate an error.  See also  Edit general display settings  Edit display behavior settings  Create graphic displays  The Graphics editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 374,
    "title": "Edit general display settings (General tab)",
    "url": "67256.htm",
    "text": "To edit the run-time property settings for a display  Click the General tab in the Display Settings dialog box.  Edit the settings presented in this tab.  Options  Display Type  Replace  Choose Replace to have this display close any open displays on the screen at run time. Replace displays use the size specified for the Project window size option in the Project Settings dialog box.  Replace displays do not close displays of the type On Top that have the Cannot Be Replaced option selected. Only one Replace display can be open at a time.  On Top  Choose On Top to position the display in front of any other display (of On Top or Replace types) that is already open at run time. On Top displays can be any size or position.  Cannot Be Replaced. Check this box to keep the display open and on top when a Replace display opens at run time.  Tip:  On Top displays that cannot be replaced may be hidden behind other On Top displays that cannot be replaced when they are opened by a remote screen change.  Size  For On Top displays, specify the display size. The size cannot be changed at run time.  Use Current Size  Choose this option to size the display using the mouse. If you choose this option, the Width and Height input boxes are not available.  Specify Size in Pixels  Choose this option when you want to specify a fixed width and height in pixels for the display, rather than using the mouse to size the display.  Position  For On Top displays, specify the display position. These settings determine the position of the display when it is opened at run time, relative to the upper left corner of the application window.  However, if the operator opens the display using a goto display button or display list selector object that has \"Display position enabled\" selected, the Display Settings Position options are ignored. Instead, the \"Top position\" and \"Left position\" settings specified for the button or list selector determine the display&#8217;s position.  X  Specify the horizontal position of the graphic in pixels. The default is 0, which positions the left side of the graphic display on the left edge of the application window.  Y  Specify the vertical position of the graphic in pixels. The default is 0, which positions the top edge of the graphic display on the top edge of the application window.  Display Number  If you don&#8217;t intend to change displays using a data source, accept the default display number.  To change the display remotely, type a number for the display. This number is used to automatically control display changes, using the Remote Display Number control.  Assign this control in the Global Connections editor, and configure the data source to change the control value and open displays as required (using the display number to designate the display to open).  Tip:  If you want to use global connections, you must make sure that each display has its own unique number, that is, that no two displays have the same number. If more than one display is assigned the same display number, you cannot be certain which display global connections will open at run time.  Security Code  Click the down arrow to display the security codes. The default code is *, which, in RSView 3.x, gives access to the display to all users. In RSView 4.0, the * gives access to the display to any user who has at least one security code, A-P, assigned.  Choose a security code from A to P to restrict access to the display so that only users who have the display's security code specified in their account will be able to display it.  If you assign the Remote Display Number control in the Global Connections editor, remote display changes occur whether or not the logged-in user has security access to a given display.  Title Bar  Check this box to include a title bar for an On Top graphic display at run time. You can type a name for the display that will be used in place of its component name in the title bar.  Insert variable  To insert a variable in the title bar, click the box and select the type of variable to be inserted from the list. In the dialog box, specify the details of the variable and then click OK.  Background Color  Click this box to select the background color for the graphic display. If you want the background to have a gradient look, select Use gradient style check box. In this case, clicking the color square brings up the gradient fill dialog box.  Support Multiple Languages  Only library displays have this property.  Check this box if you want the objects in the library display to support multiple languages. If this box is not checked, a library display will display only one set of strings, in the language in which the application was shipped. If this box is checked, a library display will support an unlimited number of languages. When an object is dragged or copied from a library display to an application display, any strings that match a language supported by the application will be copied. Any strings in languages not supported by the application will not be copied. If an entire library that supports multiple languages is copied to the Displays folder, all text strings are copied with the library.  The default for all new library displays is for this option to be turned on (the check box is checked).  For library displays that are shipped with FactoryTalk View, this option is turned off (the check box is cleared).  Disable Initial Input Focus  Check this box if you do not want the display to take input focus when it opens. (You might do this if you want an on-top display such as the alarm banner to retain its focus when an underlying screen changes.) The operator can then touch or click the display to give it input focus.  Maximum Tag Update Rate  Specify the maximum rate at which data servers will send data to the tags used in the display, including tags used in expressions and embedded variables. The default update rate is 1.0 second`. If the update rate is changed, the new rate will not take effect until the display is closed and re-opened.  At run time, all tags are updated immediately when the display is opened, regardless of the update rate.  See also  Set up display properties and behavior  Edit display behavior settings (Behavior tab)  Create graphic displays  Edit graphic displays  Set up run-time navigation  "
  },
  {
    "id": 375,
    "title": "Edit display behavior settings (Behavior tab)",
    "url": "67261.htm",
    "text": "To edit the run-time behavior settings for a display  Click the Behavior tab in the Display Settings dialog box.  Edit the settings presented in this tab.  Macros  In these boxes, enter macros that will run when a display is started up or shut down.  Startup  Click the Browse button and select the macro that is to run when the display is opened, or type the macro in if you are sure of its spelling.  Shutdown  Click the Browse button and select the macro that is to run when the display is closed, or type the macro in if you are sure of its spelling.  Behavior of Object with Input Focus  Some interactive objects need to be selected by tabbing to them or clicking with the mouse to activate them so they have input focus. Among the objects that require this sort of activation are alarm lists, trends, and display list selectors.  Disable Highlight When Object has Focus  Check this box to turn off the highlighting of the object with input focus.  Highlight Color  Choose the color of the highlight displayed at run time around the object that currently is active and has focus.  See also  Set up display properties and behavior  Editing general display settings  Create graphic displays  Edit graphic displays  input focus  About macros  "
  },
  {
    "id": 376,
    "title": "input focus",
    "url": "67263.htm",
    "text": "At run time, an object in a graphic display has input focus when it is active and ready to receive input from the mouse or keyboard. Some objects need to be selected by tabbing to them, pressing them (on touch screens), or clicking with the mouse to activate them.  Press the Tab key to move to the next object that accepts input focus. The order in which Tab moves between these objects is from upper left to lower right.  Press Shift+Tab to move back to the previous object that accepts input focus.  Objects that accept input focus include the trend object, the control list selector, the piloted control list selector, the display list selector, the alarm list, alarm status list, and alarm banner, the diagnostics list, the numeric input cursor point, and third party ActiveX controls.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 377,
    "title": "FactoryTalk View graphic XML file",
    "url": "58487.htm",
    "text": "The FactoryTalk View graphic display XML (Extensible Markup Language) file is an XML document that describes an entire graphic display, including:  Display settings  Graphic objects  Properties  Connections  Animations  Key assignments  Grouping  Wallpaper  A FactoryTalk View graphic display XML file contains the following parts:  XML declaration  XML element  Root element  A FactoryTalk View graphic display XML file may contain the following elements, attributes, and characters:  XML elements and attributes  displaySettings element  Graphic object elements  group elements  Special characters  The easiest way to understand how the parts of a display relate to an XML file is to create a display, add objects to it, and export the file and see how it describes the display.  Tip:  Use the Graphics Import Export Wizard to import and export the XML information about graphic displays, and modify the exported files using a text editor such as Notepad.  Picture or OLE object does not support XML import or export.  To determine whether an XML file is well-formed, open the file in Internet Explorer. If the XML code appears in Internet Explorer, the file is well-formed. If the file is not well-formed, Internet Explorer will show an error message. Advanced users of XML can create XML documents programmatically using programs such as Microsoft Visual Basic and Microsoft Visual C++. For more information about XML, go to http://www.w3.org/XML.  See also  Graphic display XML file structure  Graphic display XML schema  Graphic display XML file elements and attributes  Batch Import File Format  ",
    "keywords": {
      "XML file": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 378,
    "title": "XML declaration",
    "url": "58490.htm",
    "text": "An XML file begins with an XML declaration, containing the XML version and the encoding information. For example,  <?xml version=\"1.0\" encoding=\"UTF-8\" ?>  <?xml version=\"1.0\" encoding=\"UTF-16\" ?>  If you create an XML document in Notepad, the file can be saved in UTF-8 or UTF-16 file format. If no declaration appears, UTF-8 format is assumed. If you save the file in Notepad with Encoding=Unicode, be sure the declaration at the top of the XML file specifies encoding=\"UTF-16\".  Tip:  Notepad's Unicode file type corresponds to UTF-16 file format.   For files containing strings in English or other Latin-based languages, UTF-8 is recommended to reduce the size of the XML file. For other languages, such as Chinese, Japanese, or Korean, UTF-16 is recommended.  You must specifically save as the desired encoding in Notepad. The default is to save to ANSI, and that format will not import properly.  See also  About XML (Extensible Markup Language)  Graphic display XML file elements and attributes  Graphic display XML schema  Example: Graphic display XML file  "
  },
  {
    "id": 379,
    "title": "Root element",
    "url": "298321.htm",
    "text": "The root element of an XML document contains all other elements and attributes in the document. An XML document may contain only one root element. All other elements in the document must be contained or nested within the root element. The root element of a FactoryTalk View graphic display XML file is the graphic element gfx. It represents a graphic display. The elements contained by the gfx element represent the objects and properties of the display.  In an XML document, the start and end of a gfx or display element shows as follows:  <gfx>  ...  </gfx>  All the other parts of the xml file, except the XML declaration, are nested within the gfx element.  The <gfx> element must include a reference to the name of the schema file as follows:  <gfx xmlns:xsi=\"http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance\" xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocation=\"Gfx-ME1.xsd\">  The schema file used to validate FactoryTalk View Machine Edition graphic display files is Gfx-ME1.xsd. When you install FactoryTalk View Machine Edition, the default location for this file is C:\\Program Files\\Rockwell Software\\RSView Enterprise\\Schemas.  See also  FactoryTalk View graphic XML file  XML declaration  XML element  XML schema file  ",
    "keywords": {
      "root element": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 380,
    "title": "XML schema file",
    "url": "58498.htm",
    "text": "An XML schema file is a text file that defines the structure, content, and semantics of the XML file. The name of the schema file to be used with an XML file must be defined in the XML file using the xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocation attribute.  To import an XML file and generate a number of graphic objects, the Graphics Import Export Wizard will make sure the XML file specified by the user is valid according to the schema file referenced within the XML file. If the XML file is invalid, the graphic importer will show an error message describing the problem. If the XML file is valid, the Graphics Import Export Wizard will create or update the graphic objects based on the information in the XML file.  A schema file has the extension .xsd. When you install FactoryTalk View, this file is installed in \\Program Files\\Rockwell Software\\RSView Enterprise\\Schemas. The schema file for FactoryTalk View Machine Edition is Gfx-ME1.xsd.  The following is a small portion of the schema file showing how border styles must be described for graphics objects:  <xs:simpleType name=\"borderStyleEnums\">  <xs:restriction base=\"xs:NMTOKEN\">  <xs:enumeration value=\"none\"/>  <xs:enumeration value=\"raised\"/>  <xs:enumeration value=\"inset\"/>  <xs:enumeration value=\"raisedInset\"/>  <xs:enumeration value=\"line\"/>  </xs:restriction>  </xs:simpleType>  See also  FactoryTalk View graphic XML file  Root element  ",
    "keywords": {
      "schema file": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 381,
    "title": "XML element",
    "url": "298353.htm",
    "text": "In an XML document, the start and end of an element shows as follows:  <element name>  ...  </element name>  If an element has no sub-elements, it can end with />, such as <element name...attributes.../>. For example,  <text name=\"Text1\" height=\"16\" width=\"87\" left=\"69\" top=\"42\" caption=\"Pump House 1\"/>  See also  FactoryTalk View graphic XML file  XML declaration  Root element  ",
    "keywords": {
      "element": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 382,
    "title": "XML elements and attributes",
    "url": "58494.htm",
    "text": "An XML document can contain element types, elements, and attributes of elements. Each XML document has a single element called the document element or root element, which contains other nested elements. The root element of a graphic XML document is the gfx element. It represents the graphic display.  Other elements defining and describing the graphic display are nested in the gfx element. Elements consist of a start-tag, the element's contents, and an end-tag. Elements have attributes, and attributes have values. You can specify multiple attributes for an element and have multiple elements in an XML file.  Elements can also have sub-elements nested within them, with their own attributes. Captions, imageSettings, states, animations, thresholds, and connections are examples of sub-elements. These in turn may have their own sub-elements, such as stateID elements within the states element, animateType elements within the animations element, threshold elements within the thresholds element, and connection elements within the connections element. caption and imageSettings elements can be sub-elements of a graphic object, or sub-elements within a state sub-element.  In the help definitions of elements and attributes:  Text in quotes \"\" indicates a data type such as string, integer, float, and other.  Text separated by a vertical bar | indicates the possible values for an attribute, only one of which can be specified at a time.  Values appear in double quotes and follow an equal (=) sign.  Each graphic object is defined as a separate element in an XML file, and is identified by its element type, for example, interLockedButton. Type names have lower case initial letters and uppercase letters at the start of each word making up the concatenated type name. Each object within the type can be further identified by a unique name, such as interlockedPushButton1. Attributes following the element type specify the properties defined for the object. Each attribute has a value. The kind of values an attribute takes depends on the property. Values may be simple numbers, floating point numbers, selections from an enumerated list, character strings or Boolean values.  See also  RRGGBB color table  About XML (Extensible Markup Language)  Graphic display XML file structure  Graphic display XML schema  ",
    "keywords": {
      "element": "100",
      "attribute": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 383,
    "title": "XML elements",
    "url": "58627.htm",
    "text": "This section introduces the XML elements that a FactoryTalk View graphic display XML file may contain.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 384,
    "title": "displaySettings element",
    "url": "58502.htm",
    "text": "The first element within the gfx element in an exported graphic display XML document is called displaySettings. It corresponds to the properties defined on the tabs of the Display Settings dialog box. This element is optional, but a graphic display XML file must not have more than one displaySettings element, and it cannot be within a group.  See also  displaySettings element attributes  "
  },
  {
    "id": 385,
    "title": "displaySettings element attributes",
    "url": "298572.htm",
    "text": "The displaySettings element has the following attributes:  displayType  cannotBeReplaced  positionX  positionY  securityCode  backColor  titleBar  titleBarText  maximumTagUpdateRate  focusHighlightColor  disableFocusHighlight  size  width  height  displayNumber  disableInitialInputFocus  startupMacro  shutdownMacro  See also  displaySettings element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 386,
    "title": "caption element",
    "url": "58545.htm",
    "text": "The caption element contains and describes the text that appears on a button or state to tell the operator something about the object's purpose or state.  Caption elements have the following attributes:  backColor  backStyle  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  underline  italic  strikethrough  caption  alignment  blink  color  wordWrap  The following elements have caption elements:  Button graphic object elements (without states): acknowledgeAlarmButton, acknowledgeAllAlarmsButton, alarmStatusModeButton, clearAlarmBannerButton, clearAlarmHistoryButton, closeButton, diagnosticsClearButton, diagnosticsClearAllButton, displayPrintButton, gotoButton, gotoConfigureModeButton, informationAckButton, loginButton, logoutButton, macroButton, printAlarmHistory, printAlarmStatus, rampButton, resetAlarmStatusButton, returnToButton, shutdownButton, silenceAlarmsButton, sortAlarmsButton, trendNextPenButton, trendPauseButton  Key button graphic object elements: backspaceKey, endKey, enterKey, homeKey, moveDownKey, moveLeftKey, moveRightKey, moveUpKey, pageDownKey, pageUpKey  Numeric and string object elements: numericInputEnable, stringInputEnable  State elements  For objects with states, the caption is a nested element within the state element.  See also  caption element attributes  "
  },
  {
    "id": 387,
    "title": "caption element attributes",
    "url": "298588.htm",
    "text": "The caption element (button object) element has the following attributes:  backColor=\"color\"  backStyle=\"enumeration\"  fontFamily*=\"string\"  fontSize*=\"float\"  bold*=\"boolean\"  underline*=\"boolean\"  italic*=\"boolean\"  strikethrough*=\"boolean\"  caption=\"string\"  alignment=\"enumeration\"  blink=\"boolean\"  color=\"color\"  wordWrap=\"boolean\"  The caption element for the displayListSelector, controlListSelector, pilotedControlListSelector and listIndicator objects does not contain all the attributes listed above. Attributes marked with an asterisk (*) are set in the main graphic object element, and the wordWrap attribute is not used.  See also  caption element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 388,
    "title": "color element (animation)",
    "url": "58660.htm",
    "text": "The color element (animation) specifies the colors and behavior used in color animation at run time. Up to 16 color elements can be defined for each object.  The animateColor element nested within the animations element of a graphic drawing object (except for panel and image) contains this element.  See also  color element (animation) attributes  animateColor element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 389,
    "title": "color element (animation) attributes",
    "url": "333337.htm",
    "text": "The color element (animation) element has the following attributes:  value  foreBehavior  foreColor1  foreColor2  backBehavior  backColor1  backColor2  See also  color element (animation)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 390,
    "title": "imageSettings element",
    "url": "58571.htm",
    "text": "The imageSettings element defines an image that appears on an object to give the operator information about the object or its state.  The following objects and elements contain the imageSettings element:  Button graphic object  numericInputEnable graphic object  stringInputEnable graphic object  state elements  See also  imageSettings element attributes  "
  },
  {
    "id": 391,
    "title": "imageSettings element attributes",
    "url": "298597.htm",
    "text": "The imageSettings element has the following attributes:  imageName=\"component\"  alignment=\"enumeration\"  backStyle=\"enumeration\"  color=\"color\"  backColor=\"color\"  scaled=\"boolean\"  blink=\"boolean\"  See also  imageSettings element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 392,
    "title": "parameters and parameter elements",
    "url": "58628.htm",
    "text": "Parameters elements  Parameters elements correspond to global object parameters defined in global base objects.  Parameters elements are nested within graphic object elements for global reference objects, and contain nested parameter elements. Parameters elements begin with the <parameters> start tag and end with the </parameters> end-tag.  Global objects in global object displays contain these elements.  Parameter elements  Each parameter element contains the attributes for a specific global object parameter value in a global reference object. The parameter element begins with the <parameter> start tag and ends with the </parameter> end tag.  Any graphic object element whose isReferenceObject attribute is set to True contains this element if global object parameters for the base object have been defined.  See also  isReferenceObject attribute  parameter elements attributes  "
  },
  {
    "id": 393,
    "title": "parameter elements attributes",
    "url": "333340.htm",
    "text": "The parameter elements have the following attributes:  name  value  description  See also  parameters and parameter elements  name attribute (global parameters)  value attribute (global attribute)  description attribute (global attribute)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 394,
    "title": "rotation element",
    "url": "58638.htm",
    "text": "The rotation element specifies the degree of rotation for an object.  This element does not appear in an exported XML file, but can be used to replace the transform element, which is not editable by the user. In the exported XML file, delete the transform element and insert the rotation element.  An XML import file with both the transform and rotation elements will fail validation.  The arc, wedge, roundedRectangle, and ellipse graphic object elements can contain the rotation element.  Element name: rotation  See also  transform element  rotation element attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 395,
    "title": "rotation element attribute",
    "url": "333458.htm",
    "text": "The rotation element has the following attribute:  angle  See also  rotation element  angle attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 396,
    "title": "states and state elements",
    "url": "58523.htm",
    "text": "States elements  States elements are nested within graphic object elements for objects that have states, and contain nested state elements. States elements begin with the <states> start tag and end with the </states> end-tag.  The following object elements have states elements:  Button objects: momentaryButton, maintainedButton, latchedButton, multistateButton, interlockedButton  Indicator objects: multistateIndicator, listIndicator, symbol  Selector objects: displayListSelector, controlListSelector, pilotedControlListSelector  State elements  Each state element contains the attributes for a specific state of an object. The state element begins with the <state> start tag and ends with the </state> end tag (unless the state has no sub-elements, in which case the end tag is />).  See also  states and state elements attributes and child elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 397,
    "title": "states and state elements attributes and child elements",
    "url": "333463.htm",
    "text": "The state elements have the following attributes:  value  patternColor  patternStyle  backColor  blink  borderColor  stateId  Different objects have different kinds of stateId attributes, depending on the number and kind of states the object has: 2 states no error, 2 states plus Error, 255 states plus Error, 256 states no Error, and 2000 states plus Error types.  The state elements have the following child elements:  caption  imageSettings  See also  states and state elements  borderColor attribute  caption element  stateID attribute - 2 states, no Error  "
  },
  {
    "id": 398,
    "title": "threshold element",
    "url": "58603.htm",
    "text": "Thresholds are numerical tag or expression values that cause changes in the appearance of graphic objects at run time.  The gauge and barGraph graphic object elements contain thresholds.  See also  threshold element attributes  Graph and gauge objects: gauge object  Graph and gauge objects: barGraph object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 399,
    "title": "threshold element attributes",
    "url": "333466.htm",
    "text": "The threshold element has the following attributes:  thresholdIndex  thresholdValue  fillColor  blink  See also  threshold element  thresholdIndex attribute  thresholdValue attribute  fillColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 400,
    "title": "transform element",
    "url": "58640.htm",
    "text": "The transform element specifies the position of an object on the display. The transform element appears in the exported XML file when an object without a path attribute is manually rotated or flipped after it has been created. The attributes are matrix-mathematical values relating to the object's default position.  Important:  This element is not intended to be edited by the user. It exists in the exported XML file solely to ensure that an object that has been manually rotated or flipped after it was created is redrawn in the same position when the XML graphic file is re-imported.  The arc, wedge, roundedRectangle, and ellipse graphic object elements contain the transform element.  Element name: transform  See also  transform element attributes  "
  },
  {
    "id": 401,
    "title": "transform element attributes",
    "url": "333470.htm",
    "text": "The transform element has the following attributes:  scaleWidth  scaleHeight  shearWidth  shearHeight  offsetWidth  offsetHeight  See also  transform element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 402,
    "title": "group element",
    "url": "58644.htm",
    "text": "All the objects within a group are nested within a group element. Each element within the group is defined in the same way as ungrouped elements. Group elements can be nested within other group elements.  A group element can contain any number of any other graphic object elements, but can be treated as a single object. Group attributes belong to the group as a whole, while each of the graphic object elements retains its own attributes. However, if animation is applied to the group, group animation will take precedence over object animation if the two conflict.  A group element must be within the gfx element or another group element.  See also  group element attributes  "
  },
  {
    "id": 403,
    "title": "group element attributes",
    "url": "333957.htm",
    "text": "The group element has the following attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  Group elements in exported files show only the name, visible, and wallpaper attributes. The name element is required. All the others are optional.  The group draws its height, width, left, and top values from the objects within the group. If you edit the exported XML file to add values for these group attributes and then re-import the file, the new attributes will override attribute values for the objects.  Important:  If the wallpaper attribute for a group is set to true, the wallpaper attributes for all the objects, sub-groups and objects in sub-groups within the group must be missing or be set to false. Otherwise, unexpected behavior may result.  See also  group element  wallpaper attribute  width attribute  visible attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 404,
    "title": "animations and animate elements",
    "url": "58623.htm",
    "text": "Animation defines how you want an object to behave at run time. Object animation associates objects with tags or expressions so the appearance or movement of an object changes to reflect changes to a tag or expression value.  Animation for sliders is controlled by a single tag. For other forms of animation, define an expression to control the object's changes in appearance or position.  The animations element  The animations element is nested within the graphic object element.  The animate elements  The animate elements are nested within the animations element.  Groups and drawing objects have the following animate elements: animateColor, animateFill, animateHeight, animateWidth, animateHorizontalPosition, animateVerticalPosition, animateRotation, animateHorizontalSlider, animateVerticalSlider, and animateVisibility.  Exceptions are the rounded rectangle object, with no animateRotation element, and the image and panel objects, which contain only the animateVisibility element.  All other objects have only the animateVisibility element.  If more than one animation is defined, the animations must be defined in the following order (though animations may be missing from the list):  animateVisibility  animateRotation  animateWidth  animateHeight  animateHorizontalPosition  animateVerticalPosition  animateHorizontalSlider  animateVerticalSlider  animateFill  animateColor  See also  Graphic display XML file elements and attributes  Graphic display XML file structure  Graphic display XML schema  "
  },
  {
    "id": 405,
    "title": "animateColor element",
    "url": "58654.htm",
    "text": "The animateColor element specifies the expression that will control the color animation at run time, and the blink rate, if any.  All graphic drawing objects, except for panel and image, contain this element within the animations element.  Nested elements  color  See also  animations and animate elements  color element (animation)  animateColor element attributes  animateColor element example: rectangle  "
  },
  {
    "id": 406,
    "title": "animateColor element attributes",
    "url": "335573.htm",
    "text": "The animateColor element has the following attributes:  expression  blinkRate  See also  expression attribute (animation)  blinkRate attribute  animateColor element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 407,
    "title": "animateFill element",
    "url": "58672.htm",
    "text": "The animateFill element specifies how the fill level of an object will change at runtime as the value of a tag or an expression changes.  All drawing objects, except panel and image, contain this element nested in the animations element.  Nested elements  defaultExpressionRange  constantExpressionRange  animations and animate elements  readFromTagsExpressionRange  See also  animations and animate elements  animateFill element attributes  defaultExpressionRange element  constantExpressionRange element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 408,
    "title": "animateFill element attributes",
    "url": "335576.htm",
    "text": "The animateFill element has the following attributes:  expression  fillMin  fillMax  fillDirection  insideOnly  anchor  See also  animateFill element  expression attribute (animation)  fillMin attribute  fillMax attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 409,
    "title": "animateHeight element",
    "url": "58693.htm",
    "text": "The animateHeight element specifies how the height of an object will change at runtime as the value of a tag or an expression changes.  All drawing objects, except panel and image, contain this element nested in the animations element.  Nested elements  defaultExpressionRange  constantExpressionRange  readFromTagsExpressionRange  See also  animations and animate elements  defaultExpressionRange element  constantExpressionRange element  animateHeight element attributes  "
  },
  {
    "id": 410,
    "title": "animateHeight element attributes",
    "url": "335584.htm",
    "text": "The animateHeight element has the following attributes:  expression  verticalChangeMin  verticalChangeMax  anchor  See also  animateHeight element  expression attribute (animation)  verticalChangeMin attribute  verticalChangeMax attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 411,
    "title": "animateHorizontalPosition element",
    "url": "58711.htm",
    "text": "The animateHorizontalPosition element specifies how the horizontal position of an object will change at runtime as the value of a tag or expression changes.  All drawing objects, except panel and image, contain this element nested in the animations element.  Nested elements  defaultExpressionRange  constantExpressionRange  readFromTagsExpressionRange  See also  animations and animate elements  defaultExpressionRange element  constantExpressionRange element  animateHorizonalPosition element attributes  "
  },
  {
    "id": 412,
    "title": "animateHorizonalPosition element attributes",
    "url": "335588.htm",
    "text": "The animateHorizonalPosition element has the following attributes:  expression  horizontalOffsetMin  horizontalOffsetMax  See also  expression attribute (animation)  horizontalOffsetMin attribute  horizontalOffsetMax attribute  animateHorizontalPosition element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 413,
    "title": "animateHorizontalSlider element",
    "url": "58715.htm",
    "text": "The animateHorizontalSlider element specifies how the value of a tag will change at runtime as the horizontal position of an object changes. If the operator moves the object manually at run time, the position of the object is read back to the tag as a value.  All drawing objects, except panel and image, contain this element nested in the animations element.  Nested elements  defaultExpressionRange  constantExpressionRange  readFromTagsExpressionRange  See also  animations and animate elements  defaultExpressionRange element  constantExpressionRange element  animateHorizonalSlider element attributes  "
  },
  {
    "id": 414,
    "title": "animateHorizonalSlider element attributes",
    "url": "335592.htm",
    "text": "The animateHorizonalSlider element has the following attributes:  expression  horizontalOffsetMin  horizontalOffsetMax  See also  expression attribute (animation)  horizontalOffsetMin attribute  horizontalOffsetMax attribute  animateHorizontalSlider element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 415,
    "title": "animateHyperlink element",
    "url": "272242.htm",
    "text": "The animateHyperlink element specifies the expression that controls the hyperlink animation at run time.  All drawing objects, except panel and image, contain the animateHyperlink element nested in the animations element.  See also  animations and animate elements  animateHyperlink attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 416,
    "title": "animateHyperlink attribute",
    "url": "272243.htm",
    "text": "The animateHyperlink element has the following attribute:  expression=\"string\"  See also  animateHyperlink element  expression attribute (animation)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 417,
    "title": "animateRotation element",
    "url": "58719.htm",
    "text": "The animateRotation element specifies the degree of rotation for an object based on the value of a tag or expression.  All drawing objects, except rounded rectangle, panel and image, contain this element nested in the animations element.  Nested elements  defaultExpressionRange  constantExpressionRange  readFromTagsExpressionRange  See also  animations and animate elements  defaultExpressionRange element  constantExpressionRange element  animateRotation element attributes  "
  },
  {
    "id": 418,
    "title": "animateRotation element attributes",
    "url": "335595.htm",
    "text": "The animateRotation element has the following attributes:  expression  rotationMin  rotationMax  centerOfRotation  See also  expression attribute (animation)  rotationMin attribute  rotationMax attribute  animateRotation element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 419,
    "title": "animateVerticalPosition element",
    "url": "58725.htm",
    "text": "The animateVerticalPosition element specifies how the vertical position of an object will change at runtime as the value of a tag or expression changes.  All drawing objects, except panel and image, contain this element nested in the animations element.  Nested elements  defaultExpressionRange  constantExpressionRange  readFromTagsExpressionRange  See also  animations and animate elements  defaultExpressionRange element  constantExpressionRange element  animateVerticalPosition element attributes  "
  },
  {
    "id": 420,
    "title": "animateVerticalPosition element attributes",
    "url": "335600.htm",
    "text": "The animateVierticalPosition element has the following attributes:  Attributes  expression  verticalOffsetMin  verticalOffsetMax  See also  expression attribute (animation)  verticalOffsetMin attribute  verticalOffsetMax attribute  animateVerticalPosition element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 421,
    "title": "animateVerticalSlider element",
    "url": "58729.htm",
    "text": "The animateVerticalSlider element specifies how the value of a tag will change at runtime as the vertical position of an object changes. If the operator moves the object manually at run time, the position of the object is read back to the tag as a value.  All drawing objects, except panel and image, contain this element nested in the animations element.  Nested elements  defaultExpressionRange  constantExpressionRange  readFromTagsExpressionRange  See also  animations and animate elements  defaultExpressionRange element  constantExpressionRange element  animateVerticalSlider element attributes  "
  },
  {
    "id": 422,
    "title": "animateVerticalSlider element attributes",
    "url": "335677.htm",
    "text": "The animateVerticaSlider element has the following attributes:  expression  verticalOffsetMin  verticalOffsetMax  See also  expression attribute (animation)  verticalOffsetMin attribute  verticalOffsetMax attribute  animateVerticalSlider element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 423,
    "title": "animateVisibility element",
    "url": "58732.htm",
    "text": "The animateVisibility element specifies the conditions under which an object will be visible at run time. Objects can become visible or invisible as the value of a tag or an expression changes.  All graphic object elements have animateVisibility elements nested within the animations element.  See also  animations and animate elements  animateVisibility element attributes  "
  },
  {
    "id": 424,
    "title": "animateVisibility element attributes",
    "url": "335680.htm",
    "text": "The animateVisibility element has the following attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  expression attribute (animation)  expressionTrueState attribute  animateVisibility element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 425,
    "title": "animateWidth element",
    "url": "58685.htm",
    "text": "The animateWidth element specifies how the width of an object will change at runtime as the value of a tag or an expression changes.  All drawing objects, except panel and image, contain this element nested in the animations element.  Nested elements  defaultExpressionRange  constantExpressionRange  readFromTagsExpressionRange  See also  animations and animate elements  defaultExpressionRange element  constantExpressionRange element  animateWidth element attributes  "
  },
  {
    "id": 426,
    "title": "animateWidth element attributes",
    "url": "335683.htm",
    "text": "The animateWidth element has the following attributes:  expression  horizontalChangeMin  horizontalChangeMax  anchor  See also  expression attribute (animation)  horizontalChangeMin attribute  horizontalChangeMax attribute  animateWidth element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 427,
    "title": "constantExpressionRange element",
    "url": "58699.htm",
    "text": "The constantExpressionRange element uses constant numeric values to control the range of a graphic object's animation.  The following animation elements contain this attribute: animateFill, animateHeight, animateHorizontalPosition, animateHorizontalSlider, animateRotation, animateVerticalPosition, animateVerticalSlider, animateWidth.  Animation elements are nested in the animations element.  See also  animations and animate elements  constantExpressionRange element attributes  "
  },
  {
    "id": 428,
    "title": "constantExpressionRange element attributes",
    "url": "335686.htm",
    "text": "The constantExpressionRange has the following attributes:  min  max  See also  min attribute (constantExpressionRange)  max attribute (constantExpressionRange)  constantExpressionRange element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 429,
    "title": "defaultExpressionRange element",
    "url": "58691.htm",
    "text": "The constantExpressionRange element uses the minimum and maximum values of a specified tag to define the range of values for the expression controlling the object's animation. If the expression uses more than one tag, the minimum and maximum values of the first tag are used for the animation.  The following animation elements contain this attribute: animateFill, animateHeight, animateHorizontalPosition, animateHorizontalSlider, animateRotation, animateVerticalPosition, animateVerticalSlider, animateWidth.  Animation elements are nested in the animations element.  See also  animations and animate elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 430,
    "title": "readFromTagExpressionRange element",
    "url": "58705.htm",
    "text": "The readFromTagExpressionRange defines the range of a graphic object's animation by reading one tag's value for the minimum and another tag's value for the maximum.  The following animation elements contain this attribute: animateFill, animateHeight, animateHorizontalPosition, animateHorizontalSlider, animateRotation, animateVerticalPosition, animateVerticalSlider, animateWidth.  Animation elements are nested in the animations element.  See also  constantExpressionRange element  defaultExpressionRange element  animations and animate elements  readFromExpressionRange element attrributes  "
  },
  {
    "id": 431,
    "title": "readFromExpressionRange element attrributes",
    "url": "335691.htm",
    "text": "The readFromExpressionRange element has the following attributes:  minTag  maxTag  See also  minTag attribute  maxTag attribute  readFromTagExpressionRange element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 432,
    "title": "connections and connection elements",
    "url": "58615.htm",
    "text": "Each connection element defines the tag or expression whose value is connected to the graphic object.  Connections element  The connection element is nested within the graphic object element.  The following object elements contain the connections element: closeButton, stringInputEnable, numericInputCursorPoint, numericInputEnable, stringDisplay, numericDisplay, activeXObject, localMessageDisplay, pilotedControlListSelector, controlListSelector, gauge, barGraph, listIndicator, symbolIndicator, multistateIndicator, rampButton, interlockedButton, multistateButton, latchedButton, maintainedButton, momentaryButton  Connection elements  Connection elements are nested with a connections element.  Tip:  Connection name attributes cannot be changed. If you change the name attribute of a connection in an exported xml file and then import the file, you will see an error message in the import status file saying that the specified connection name is not valid for the object.  See also  Graphic display XML file elements and attributes  Graphic display XML file structure  Graphic display XML schema  connection elements attributes  "
  },
  {
    "id": 433,
    "title": "connection elements attributes",
    "url": "335843.htm",
    "text": "The connection elements have the following attributes:  name  expression  optionalExpression  See also  name attribute  expression attribute (connections)  optionalExpression attribute  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 434,
    "title": "ActiveAcknowledged connection",
    "url": "58737.htm",
    "text": "The ActiveAcknowledged connection specifies whether to show alarms that are currently active (in alarm) and have also been acknowledged.  A read-only connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and uses the result to determine whether or not to display active acknowledged alarms.  If this connection is assigned, it overrides the displayActiveAckedAlarms attribute.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 435,
    "title": "ActiveUnacknowledged connection",
    "url": "58738.htm",
    "text": "The ActiveUnacknowledged connection specifies whether to display alarms that are currently active (in alarm) but have not yet been acknowledged.  A read-only connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and uses the result to determine whether or not to display active unacknowledged alarms.  If this connection is assigned, it overrides the displayActiveUnackedAlarms attribute.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 436,
    "title": "Enter connection",
    "url": "58739.htm",
    "text": "The Enter connection determines how long the Enter key press is registered. Use this connection with Enter key handshaking.  A write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. This connection accepts values of 0 and 1 only.  The controlListSelector, numericInputCursorPoint, numericInputEnable, stringInputEnable and pilotedControlListSelector connections elements contain this connection.  Tip:  If the controlListSelector or pilotedControlListSelector WriteOnEnter attribute is false, the Enter and Enter Handshake connections are ignored.  See also  connections and connection elements  writeOnEnter attribute  Enter Handshake connection  "
  },
  {
    "id": 437,
    "title": "Enter Handshake connection",
    "url": "58743.htm",
    "text": "This connection resets the Enter connection, using the handshakeReset attribute. Use this connection for Enter key handshaking if you want the Enter connection to be reset when a value at the data source changes.  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and resets the Enter connection when the expression value meets the conditions of the handshakeReset attribute.  The controlListSelector, numericInputCursorPoint, numericInputEnable, stringInputEnable and pilotedControlListSelector connections elements contain this connection.  Tip:  If the controlListSelector or pilotedControlListSelector WriteOnEnter attribute is false, the Enter and Enter Handshake connections are ignored.  See also  connections and connection elements  Enter connection  handshakeReset attribute  writeOnEnter attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 438,
    "title": "Handshake connection",
    "url": "58747.htm",
    "text": "The application reads the value of this connection at the data source, and resets the button to its unlatched state when this connection changes to meet the conditions of the latchResetType attribute.  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and resets the button to its unlatched state when this connection changes to meet the conditions of the latchResetType attribute.  The latchedButton graphic object element's connections element contains this connection element.  See also  connections and connection elements  latchResetType attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 439,
    "title": "InactiveAcknowledged connection",
    "url": "58750.htm",
    "text": "The InactiveAcknowledged connection specifies whether to display alarms that are currently inactive (no longer in alarm) and have also been acknowledged.  A read-only connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and uses the result to determine whether or not to display inactive acknowledged alarms.  If this connection is assigned, it overrides the displayInactiveAckedAlarms attribute.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 440,
    "title": "InactiveUnacknowledged connection",
    "url": "58751.htm",
    "text": "The InactiveUnacknowledged connection specifies whether to display alarms that are currently inactive (no longer in alarm) and have not yet been acknowledged.  A read-only connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and uses the result to determine whether or not to show inactive unacknowledged alarms.  If this connection is assigned, it overrides the displayInactiveUnackedAlarms attribute.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 441,
    "title": "Indicator connection",
    "url": "58752.htm",
    "text": "The application reads the value of the connection at the data source, and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the state corresponding to the value.  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the state corresponding to the value.  The momentaryButton, maintainedButton, multistateButton, latchedButton, multistateIndicator, listIndicator, and symbol graphic object elements' connections element contain this element.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 442,
    "title": "Indicator connection (numericInputCursorPoint)",
    "url": "58753.htm",
    "text": "The application reads the value of the connection at the data source, and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the value.  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the value.  If the Indicator connection is unassigned, the object will display the last value written out to the Value connection.  The numericInputCursorPoint graphic object element's connections element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 443,
    "title": "Indicator connection (pilotedControlListSelector)",
    "url": "58754.htm",
    "text": "When a display containing a piloted control list selector is opened, if the piloted control list selector is remotely controlled, the application reads this value to determine what state to show.  A read-only connection. Assign a tag or an expression to this connection.  The pilotedControlListSelector graphic object element's connections element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 444,
    "title": "Limit connection",
    "url": "58755.htm",
    "text": "The application reads the tag or expression value to determine the upper or lower limit to the ramp value.  This connection is only used if the useVariableLimit attribute is True.  A read connection. Assign a tag or an expression to this connection. If you assign an expression, &nbsp;the application calculates the value of the expression and uses the result to determine the ramp value limits.  The rampButton graphic object element's connections element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  useVariableLimit attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 445,
    "title": "Maximum connection",
    "url": "58758.htm",
    "text": "This connection specifies the maximum value of a trend when the Y-axis Minimum/maximum value option is set to Custom and the maximum value is controlled by a tag or expression.  A read connection. Assign a tag or an expression to this connection. If you assign an expression, &nbsp;the application calculates the value of the expression and uses the result to determine the maximum value.  The trend object's connections element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 446,
    "title": "Message File connection",
    "url": "297008.htm",
    "text": "A read-only connection. Assign a string tag or expression.  The application reads the value of the connection and uses the value as the message file for the local message display.  If the UseVariableMessage property is False, this connection will not be read.  The localMessageDisplay graphic object element's connections element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 447,
    "title": "Minimum connection",
    "url": "58759.htm",
    "text": "This connection specifies the minimum value of a trend when the Y-axis Minimum/maximum value option is set to Custom and the minimum value is controlled by a tag or expression.  A read connection. Assign a tag or an expression to this connection. If you assign an expression, &nbsp;the application calculates the value of the expression and uses the result to determine the minimum value.  The trend object's connections element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 448,
    "title": "Pen connection",
    "url": "58760.htm",
    "text": "The Pens 1-8 connections specify the number of the pens in a trend object to assign a tag or an expression to. The trend object supports up to 8 pens.  A read connection. Assign a tag or an expression to the connection. If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and uses the result to determine the value of the pen.  The trend object's connections element contains these connections.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 449,
    "title": "Polarity connection",
    "url": "58761.htm",
    "text": "This connection determines whether or not a minus sign is shown. A minus sign is shown when this connection has a positive non-zero value. If this connection is assigned, it overrides the polarity of the Value connection&#8217;s value.  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and uses the result to determine whether to show a minus sign.  If the Polarity connection uses a tag with a floating point address, values less than .5 will be rounded down and values greater than or equal to .5 will be rounded up.  The numericDisplay graphic object element's connections element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 450,
    "title": "Ramp connection",
    "url": "58762.htm",
    "text": "The application reads the tag or expression value to determine the ramp value.  A read connection. Assign a tag or an expression to this connection. If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and uses the result to determine the ramp value.  This connection is only used if the useVariableRamp attribute is True.  The rampButton graphic object element's connections element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  useVariableRamp attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 451,
    "title": "Remote Access connection",
    "url": "58765.htm",
    "text": "If this connection is a non-zero value, the piloted control list selector is controlled remotely. If the connection is set to zero, the operator controls the object.  A read only connection. Assign a tag to this connection.  The pilotedControlListSelector graphic object element's connections element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 452,
    "title": "Top Position connection",
    "url": "58766.htm",
    "text": "Whenever the list scrolls, the value of the top visible state is written out to the assigned tag.  A write only connection. Assign a tag to this connection.  The pilotedControlListSelector graphic object element's connections element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 453,
    "title": "Echo Message connection",
    "url": "302335.htm",
    "text": "A write-only connection.  Assign a string tag to write the triggered message to the connection.  If the UseEchoMessage property is False, this connection will not be written to.  The localMessageDisplay graphic object element's connections element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 454,
    "title": "Value connection (closeButton)",
    "url": "58768.htm",
    "text": "When the operator presses the Close Display button, the application writes the value specified in the closeValue attribute to the tag&#8217;s data source.  A write connection. Assign a tag to this connection.  The closeButton graphic object element contains this connection in its connections element.  See also  connections and connection elements  closeValue attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 455,
    "title": "Value connection (controlListselectors)",
    "url": "58773.htm",
    "text": "When the operator selects a state, the application writes the value corresponding to the selected state to the tag&#8217;s data source. The application also monitors this connection and if the value changes, highlights the new state in the list.  A read-write connection. Assign a tag to this connection.  If the writeOnEnter attribute is true, the application doesn&#8217;t write to the Value connection until the operator selects a state and presses Enter.  If the WriteOnEnter attribute is false, the Enter and Enter Handshake connections are ignored.  The controlListSelector and pilotedControlListSelector graphic object elements have this connection within their connections element.  See also  connections and connection elements  writeOnEnter attribute  Enter connection  Enter Handshake connection  "
  },
  {
    "id": 456,
    "title": "Value connection (gauge and bar graph)",
    "url": "58774.htm",
    "text": "The application reads the value of the connection at the data source and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the value.  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the value.  The gauge and bar graph graphic object elements have this connection within their connections elements.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 457,
    "title": "Value connection (interlockedButton)",
    "url": "58775.htm",
    "text": "When the operator presses the Interlocked button, the application writes the value for this button to the tag&#8217;s data source. The application also reads this tag to determine which state to show.  A read-write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. Assign the same tag to the Value connection for each interlocked push button in a group.  The interlockedButton graphic object element's connections element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 458,
    "title": "Value connection (latchedButton)",
    "url": "58776.htm",
    "text": "When you open a display containing a latched push button, the application reads the Value connection to determine its current state.  When the operator presses the Latched Push button, the application writes the value corresponding to the latched state (State 1) to the tag&#8217;s data source, (unless the latchResetType attribute is nonZeroValue and the Handshake connection is currently a non-zero value). When the Handshake connection unlatches the button, the application sends the value corresponding to the unlatched state (State 0) to the Value connection.  A read-write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. To provide visual feedback that the Value connection has been read by the data source, assign different tags to the Value and Indicator connections. Configure the data source to pass the Value connection&#8217;s value to the Indicator connection.  The latchedButton graphic object element's connections element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  latchResetType attribute  Handshake connection  Indicator connection  "
  },
  {
    "id": 459,
    "title": "Value connection (local message display)",
    "url": "58779.htm",
    "text": "The application reads the value of the connection at the data source and updates the local message display to show the message whose trigger value corresponds to the connection value.  A read connection. Assign a tag or an expression to this control. If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and updates the display to show the message whose trigger value corresponds to the expression value.  The localMessageDisplay graphic object element's connections element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 460,
    "title": "Value connection (maintained and multistate)",
    "url": "58780.htm",
    "text": "If the nextStateBasedOn attribute is valueControl, the application reads the assigned tag to determine which state to show next. The application then writes the value corresponding to the new state to the tag&#8217;s data source.  A read-write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. To provide visual feedback that the Value connection has been read by the data source, assign different tags to the Value and Indicator connections. Configure the data source to pass the Value connection&#8217;s value to the Indicator connection.  The maintainedButton and multistateButton graphic object element have this connection within their connections element.  See also  connections and connection elements  nextStateBasedOn attribute  Indicator connection  "
  },
  {
    "id": 461,
    "title": "Value connection (momentary button)",
    "url": "58783.htm",
    "text": "The application writes the value corresponding to the current state (pressed or released) to the tag&#8217;s data source.  A write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. To provide visual feedback that the Value connection has been read by the data source, assign different tags to the Value and Indicator connections. Configure the data source to pass the Value connection&#8217;s value to the Indicator connection.  The momentaryButton graphic object element's connections element contains this element.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 462,
    "title": "Value connection (numeric display)",
    "url": "58784.htm",
    "text": "The application reads the value of the Value connection&#8217;s tag at the data source and shows this value in the numeric display.  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and displays the result in the numeric display.  The numericDisplay graphic object element contains this connection element within its connections element.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 463,
    "title": "Value connection (numeric input)",
    "url": "58785.htm",
    "text": "hen the operator presses the Enter key, the application writes the numeric value to the tag&#8217;s data source. If the decimalPoint attribute is fixedPosition, and the digitsAfterDecimalPoint attribute value is not 0, the decimal point is removed from the shown value and the resulting value is used.  A write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. If you do not assign the Value connection, the numeric pop-up does not open at run time when the operator presses the button.  The numericInputEnable and numericInputCursorPoint graphic object elements contain this connection within their connections elements.  Tip:  The Optional Expression is an optional write connection that works with the Value connection. To use it, assign a write expression to the optionalExpression attribute.  The application calculates the value of the expression and writes the result to the Value connection. All write expressions must contain a question mark (?) as a placeholder for the value the operator enters at run time.  See also  connections and connection elements  decimalPoint attribute  digitsAfterDecimalPoint attribute (numeric objects)  optionalExpression attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 464,
    "title": "Value connection (pilotedControlListSelector)",
    "url": "58790.htm",
    "text": "When a display containing a piloted control list selector is opened, if the list is operator controlled, (that is, if the Remote Access connection's value is set to zero), the application reads this tag to determine what state to show.  A write connection. Assign a tag to this connection.  The pilotedControlListSelector graphic object element's connections element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  Remote Access connection  "
  },
  {
    "id": 465,
    "title": "Value connection (rampButton)",
    "url": "58792.htm",
    "text": "The application keeps a copy of the Value connection on the computer. When the operator presses the ramp button, the application adds or subtracts the rampValue amount from the local Value connection value and writes the result to the Value connection tag&#8217;s data source.  A read-write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. If the rampValue attribute is a floating point value and the Value connection is an integer tag, the application rounds the value before writing it to the control.  The rampButton graphic object element's connections element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  rampValue attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 466,
    "title": "Value connection (stringDisplay)",
    "url": "58799.htm",
    "text": "The application reads the value of the Value connection&#8217;s tag at the data source to determine the string to show.  A read connection. Assign a tag or expression that can support up to 82 characters (bytes).  The stringDisplay graphic object element contains this connection within its connections element.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 467,
    "title": "Value connection (stringInputEnable)",
    "url": "58800.htm",
    "text": "When the operator presses the Enter key, the application writes the alphanumeric string to the tag&#8217;s data source.  A write connection. Assign a tag that can support up to 82 characters (bytes). If you do not assign the Value connection,&nbsp;the string pop-up does not open at run time when the operator presses the button.  The stringInputEnable graphic object element's connections element contains this connection.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 468,
    "title": "Visible States connection",
    "url": "58801.htm",
    "text": "When the list scrolls, the values associated with the states that are visible on the list will be written to the data source. The number of elements in the array tag must match the number of visible states.  A write control. Assign an array tag to this control.  The pilotedControlListSelector graphic object element has this connection within its connections element.  See also  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 469,
    "title": "XML attributes",
    "url": "59412.htm",
    "text": "This section introduces the XML attributes that a FactoryTalk View graphic display XML file may contain.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 470,
    "title": "access attribute",
    "url": "59101.htm",
    "text": "The access attribute specifies who has access to the piloted control list selector's selected state.  The state element within the pilotedControlListSelector graphic object element's states element contains the access attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Access  See also  access attribute syntax  Advanced objects: pilotedControlListSelector object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 471,
    "title": "access attribute syntax",
    "url": "336175.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the access attribute:  access=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: operatorAndRemote | operator | remote | none  operatorAndRemote - both a user and a remote controller can select the state  operator - only a user can select the state  remote - only a controller can select the state  none - the state cannot be selected  See also  access attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 472,
    "title": "ackSymbol attribute",
    "url": "59255.htm",
    "text": "The ackSymbol attribute specifies the symbol to show in the acknowledged symbol column beside an acknowledged alarm if the displayAckSymbol attribute is true. The default symbol is an asterisk (*).  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: AckSymbol  See also  ackSymbol attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  displayAckSymbol attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 473,
    "title": "ackSymbol attribute syntax",
    "url": "336177.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the ackSymbol attribute:  ackSymbol=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string of&nbsp;1 character.  See also  ackSymbol attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 474,
    "title": "action attribute",
    "url": "59411.htm",
    "text": "The action attribute specifies the recipe operation that will be executed when the button is pressed.  The recipePlusButton graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Action  See also  action attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 475,
    "title": "action attribute syntax",
    "url": "336179.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the action attribute:  action=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: download | upload | uploadAndCreate | restore | save | delete | rename  download - writes the ingredient value in the data set to the tags in the tag set  upload - reads the tag values in the tag set and writes those values to the data set in the recipe file  uploadAndCreate - reads the values in a tag set and creates a new recipe unit by writing those values to a new data set  restore - writes the values in a recipe unit to a RecipePlus table object  save - writes the values displayed in a RecipePlus table object to a recipe file  delete - deletes the currently selected recipe unit from the recipe file  rename - renames the currently selected recipe unit  See also  action attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 476,
    "title": "activeAckedBackColor attribute",
    "url": "59237.htm",
    "text": "The activeAckedBackColor attribute specifies the background color of alarms that are presently in alarm (active) and have also been acknowledged. If the activeAckedUseAlarmColors attribute is true, this color is not used.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ActiveAckedBackColor  See also  activeAckedBackColor attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 477,
    "title": "activeAckedBackColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336181.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the activeAckedBackColor attribute:  activeAckedBackColor=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  activeAckedBackColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 478,
    "title": "activeAckedBlink attribute",
    "url": "59221.htm",
    "text": "The activeAckedBlink attribute specifies whether alarms that are currently active (in alarm) and have also been acknowledged will blink at run time.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ActiveAckedBlink  See also  activeAckedBlink attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 479,
    "title": "activeAckedBlink attribute syntax",
    "url": "336183.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the activeAckedBlink attribute:  activeAckedBlink=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  activeAckedBlink attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 480,
    "title": "activeAckedForeColor attribute",
    "url": "59245.htm",
    "text": "The activeAckedForeColor attribute specifies the foreground (text) color of alarms that are presently in alarm (active) and have also been acknowledged. If the activeAckedUseAlarmColors attribute is true, this color is not used.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ActiveAckedBackColor  See also  activeAckedForeColor attribute syntax  activeAckedUseAlarmColors attribute  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 481,
    "title": "activeAckedForeColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336185.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the activeAckedForeColor attribute:  activeAckedBackColor=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  activeAckedForeColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 482,
    "title": "activeAckedUseAlarmColors attribute",
    "url": "59229.htm",
    "text": "The activeAckedUseAlarmColors attribute specifies whether the alarm list object will use the colors defined in the Alarm Setup Editor to display alarms that are presently in alarm (active) and have also been acknowledged. If this attribute is false, these alarms will be displayed using the colors specified by the activeAckedBackColor and activeAckedForeColor attributes.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ActiveAckedUseAlarmColors  See also  activeAckedUseAlarmColors attribute syntax  activeAckedForeColor attribute  activeAckedBackColor attribute  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 483,
    "title": "activeAckedUseAlarmColors attribute syntax",
    "url": "336187.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the activeAckedUseAlarmColors attribute:  activeAckedUseAlarmColors=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  activeAckedUseAlarmColors attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 484,
    "title": "activeSymbol attribute",
    "url": "59259.htm",
    "text": "The activeSymbol attribute specifies the symbol to show in the Active Symbol column beside an active alarm if the displayActiveSymbol attribute is true. The default symbol is an asterisk (*).  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: activeSymbol  See also  activeSymbol attribute syntax  displayActiveSymbol attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 485,
    "title": "activeSymbol attribute syntax",
    "url": "336189.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the activeSymbol attribute:  activeSymbol=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string of&nbsp;1 character.  See also  activeSymbol attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 486,
    "title": "activeUnackedBackColor attribute",
    "url": "59239.htm",
    "text": "The activeUnackedBackColor attribute specifies the background color of alarms that are presently in alarm (active) and have not yet been acknowledged. If the activeUnackedUseAlarmColors attribute is true, this color is not used.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ActiveUnackedBackColor  See also  activeUnackedBackColor attribute syntax  activeUnackedUseAlarmColors attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 487,
    "title": "activeUnackedBackColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336191.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the activeUnackedBackColor attribute:  activeUnackedBackColor=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  activeUnackedBackColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 488,
    "title": "activeUnackedBlink attribute",
    "url": "59223.htm",
    "text": "The activeUnackedBlink attribute specifies whether alarms that are currently active (in alarm) but have not yet been acknowledged will blink at run time.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: activeUnackedBlink  See also  activeUnackedBlink attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 489,
    "title": "activeUnackedBlink attribute syntax",
    "url": "336193.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the activeUnackedBlink attribute:  activeUnackedBlink=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  activeUnackedBlink attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 490,
    "title": "activeUnackedForeColor attribute",
    "url": "59247.htm",
    "text": "The activeUnackedForeColor attribute specifies the foreground (text) color of alarms that are presently in alarm (active) and have not yet been acknowledged. If the activeUnackedUseAlarmColors attribute is true, this color is not used.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ActiveUnackedForeColor  See also  activeUnackedForeColor attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 491,
    "title": "activeUnackedForeColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336195.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the activeUnackedForeColor attribute:  activeUnackedForeColor=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  activeUnackedForeColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 492,
    "title": "activeUnackedUseAlarmColors attribute",
    "url": "59231.htm",
    "text": "The activeUnackedUseAlarmColors attribute specifies whether the alarm list object will use the colors defined in the Alarm Setup Editor to show alarms that are presently in alarm (active) but have not yet been acknowledged. If this attribute is false, these alarms will be shown using the colors specified by the activeUnackedBackColor and activeUnackedForeColor attributes.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ActiveUnackedUseAlarmColors  See also  activeUnackedUseAlarmColors attribute syntax  activeUnackedForeColor attribute  activeUnackedBackColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 493,
    "title": "activeUnackedUseAlarmColors attribute syntax",
    "url": "336197.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the activeUnackedUseAlarmColors attribute:  activeUnackedUseAlarmColors=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  activeUnackedUseAlarmColors attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 494,
    "title": "alarmListMode attribute",
    "url": "59295.htm",
    "text": "The alarmListMode attribute sets the mode of the alarm status list.  The alarmStatusList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ListMode  See also  alarmListMode attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 495,
    "title": "alarmListMode attribute syntax",
    "url": "336199.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the alarmListMode attribute:  alarmListMode=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: allAlarms | activeAlarms | pastAlarms  allAlarms displays all alarms set up in the Alarm Setup editor, whether active, inactive, or never active  activeAlarms displays currently active alarms  pastAlarms displays alarms that are or have been active since the last reset  See also  alarmListMode attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 496,
    "title": "alignment attribute",
    "url": "58563.htm",
    "text": "The alignment attribute specifies the position of the shown message, image, or value on the object. If the object&#8217;s shape attribute is circle or ellipse, the position is relative to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Text object elements, caption elements and imageSettings elements contain alignment attributes.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Alignment, CaptionAlignment, St_CaptionAlignment, ImageAlignment, St_ImageAlignment  See also  shape attribute  alignment attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 497,
    "title": "alignment attribute syntax",
    "url": "336201.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the alignment attribute:  alignment=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: topLeft | topCenter | topRight | middleLeft | middleCenter | middleRight | bottomLeft | bottomCenter | bottomRight  See also  alignment attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 498,
    "title": "anchor attribute",
    "url": "58683.htm",
    "text": "The anchor attribute specifies what part of the object remains constant, that is, from what point the object grows or shrinks as the tag or expression value changes.  All the graphic drawing object elements (except panel and image) contain this attribute, nested within the animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Anchor on the Animation Width tab  See also  animateWidth element  animations and animate elements  anchor attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 499,
    "title": "anchor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336203.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the anchor attribute:  anchor=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: left | center | right  See also  anchor attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 500,
    "title": "angle attribute",
    "url": "58642.htm",
    "text": "The angle attribute specifies the angle of rotation for an object element in an imported XML file. The object's transform element in the exported XML file has been replaced by the rotation element.  The arc, wedge, ellipse and rounded rectangle graphic object elements can contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: N/A  See also  rotation element  angle attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 501,
    "title": "angle attribute syntax",
    "url": "336205.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the angle attribute:  angle=\"double\"  where double is the number of radians from the object's rightmost point (0). A positive number moves the angle counter-clockwise and a negative number moves it clockwise.  See also  angle attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 502,
    "title": "audio attribute",
    "url": "58878.htm",
    "text": "The audio attribute specifies whether to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed. If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  All button graphic object element contains this attribute. The numericInputEnable, numericInputCursorPoint, stringInputEnable, and displayListSelector graphic object elements also contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Audio  See also  audio attribute syntax  Numeric and string objects: numericInputEnable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 503,
    "title": "audio attribute syntax",
    "url": "336207.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the audio attribute:  audio=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  audio attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 504,
    "title": "autoRepeatDelay attribute",
    "url": "58908.htm",
    "text": "The autoRepeatDelay attributev specifies the length of time, in milliseconds, a multistate button, ramp button or timed key button has to be pressed and held down before auto repeat starts.  The multistateButton, rampButton and all key button graphic elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: AutoRepeatDelay  See also  autoRepeatDelay attribute syntax  Push button objects: rampButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 505,
    "title": "autoRepeatDelay attribute syntax",
    "url": "336209.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the autoRepeatDelay attribute:  autoRepeatDelay=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of the following number of milliseconds: 200 | 400 | 600 | 800 | 1000 | 1500 | 2000 | 2500  See also  autoRepeatDelay attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 506,
    "title": "autoRepeatRate attribute",
    "url": "58910.htm",
    "text": "The autoRepeatRate attribute specifies the number of times per second a button press is registered when a multistate button, ramp button or timed key button goes into auto repeat mode. Specify 0 if you don&#8217;t want to use auto repeat.  The multistateButton, rampButton, and all key button graphic elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: AutoRepeatRate  See also  autoRepeatRate attribute syntax  Push button objects: rampButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 507,
    "title": "autoRepeatRate attribute syntax",
    "url": "336211.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the autoRepeatRate attribute:  autoRepeatDelay=\"integer\"  where integer is a positive number from 0 through 20.  See also  autoRepeatRate attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 508,
    "title": "backBehavior attribute",
    "url": "58667.htm",
    "text": "The backBehavior attribute specifies whether the fill color in color animation blinks or not.  Within an animations element, the color element within an animateColor element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Line/Fill Solid/Blink on the Animation Color tab  See also  foreBehavior attribute  backBehavior attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 509,
    "title": "backBehavior attribute syntax",
    "url": "336213.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the backBehavior attribute:  backBehavior=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: blink | solid  If you specify blink, set the blinkRate attribute in the animateColor element.  See also  blinkRate attribute  backBehavior attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 510,
    "title": "backColor attribute",
    "url": "58512.htm",
    "text": "The backColor attribute specifies the background color for the display, image, object or state.  Graphic object elements (except selector objects), displaySettings elements , imageSettings elements and state elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: BackColor, St_BackColor, CaptionBackColor, St_CaptionBackColor, ImageBackColor  If the backStyle attribute is transparent, the background color is not used. For objects with a lineStyle attribute other than solid, the background color is used for the spaces between the dots or dashes.  See also  backColor attribute syntax  displaySettings element  imageSettings element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 511,
    "title": "backColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336215.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the backColor attribute:  backColor=\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  See also  RRGGBB color table  backStyle attribute  lineStyle attribute  backColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 512,
    "title": "backColor1/2 attribute",
    "url": "58671.htm",
    "text": "In color animation, the backColor1/2 attribute sets the object's background color for up to 16 tag or expression values (A to P). As the tag or expression value changes, the color of the object changes. Each value can have a different color. If the backBehavior attribute is solid, backColor1 is the same as backColor2. If the backBehavior attribute is blink, backColor2 can be set to a different color than backColor1.  The animateColor elements within an animations element contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Background on the Animation Color tab  See also  backBehavior attribute  backColor1/2 attribute syntax  animateColor element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 513,
    "title": "backColor1/2 attribute syntax",
    "url": "336280.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the backColor1/2 attribute:  backColor1=\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  See also  RRGGBB color table  backColor1/2 attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 514,
    "title": "backStyle attribute",
    "url": "58531.htm",
    "text": "The backStyle attribute specifies whether the back style of an object or a caption in a graphic display will be solid or transparent.  Graphic object elements (except selector and list objects), imageSettings elements and caption elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: BackStyle, CaptionBackStyle, St_CaptionBackStyle, ImageBackStyle  See also  backStyle attribute syntax  imageSettings element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 515,
    "title": "backStyle attribute syntax",
    "url": "336282.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the backStyle attribute:  backStyle=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: solid | transparent  See also  backStyle attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 516,
    "title": "blink attribute",
    "url": "58533.htm",
    "text": "The blink attribute specifies whether an object, an object's background, an object's caption text, or the portion of the object that is at or above a threshold blinks at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  Graphic object elements, imageSettings elements, threshold elements and caption elements contain this attribute.  Tip:  If the object has a configured patternStyle attribute, the pattern also blinks when the object is in this state.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Blink, St_Blink, CaptionBlink, St_CaptionBlink  See also  blink attribute syntax  imageSettings element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 517,
    "title": "blink attribute syntax",
    "url": "336284.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the blink attribute:  blink=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  blink attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 518,
    "title": "blinkRate attribute",
    "url": "58658.htm",
    "text": "The blinkRate attribute specifies the number of seconds a color-animated object whose foreBehavior and/or backBehavior attributes are set to blink will show each color.  An animateColor element within the animations element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Blink rate (Seconds): Note: This property is only available through the Color animation tab.  See also  blinkRate attribute syntax  animateColor element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 519,
    "title": "blinkRate attribute syntax",
    "url": "336286.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the blinkRate attribute:  blinkRate=\"float\"  where float is a floating point value from 0 through 100000.  See also  blinkRate attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 520,
    "title": "bold attribute",
    "url": "58551.htm",
    "text": "The bold attribute specifies whether the font used for the caption, message, or display text should be bold.  Caption elements, list objects, alarm banner objects, text objects, message display objects, list selector objects, list indicator objects, gauge objects, numeric objects and display objects contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Part of Font, CaptionFont, or St_CaptionFont  See also  bold attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmBanner object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 521,
    "title": "bold attribute syntax",
    "url": "336288.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the bold attribute:  bold=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  bold attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 522,
    "title": "borderColor attribute",
    "url": "58517.htm",
    "text": "The borderColor attribute specifies the border color for an object or state.  If the object has no states, the graphic object element contains this attribute. If the object has states, the state element within the states element may contains this attribute, or the borderColor attribute for the object may apply to all states.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: BorderColor  See also  borderColor attribute syntax  Graphic object elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 523,
    "title": "borderColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336290.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the borderColor attribute:  borderColor=\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  This color appears at run time only if the borderUsesBackColor attribute is false.  See also  RRGGBB color table  borderUsesBackColor attribute  borderColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 524,
    "title": "borderStyle attribute",
    "url": "58834.htm",
    "text": "The borderStyle attribute specifies the border style of objects in a graphic display.  Almost all graphic object elements contain the borderStyle attribute. Drawing object elements (except the panel), gauge object elements, and activeX object elements do not have borderStyle attributes.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: BorderStyle  See also  borderStyle attribute syntax  Graphic object elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 525,
    "title": "borderStyle attribute syntax",
    "url": "336292.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the borderStyle attribute:  borderStyle=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: none | raised | inset | raisedInset | line  See also  borderStyle attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 526,
    "title": "borderUsesBackColor attribute",
    "url": "58519.htm",
    "text": "The borderUsesBackColor attribute specifies whether to use the object&#8217;s backColor attribute for the border of the object.  Graphic object elements with borders contain the borderUsesBackColor attribute. Drawing object elements (except the panel), gauge object elements, and activeX object elements do not have borderUsesBackColor attributes.  If borderUsesBackColor is false, you can set the borderColor attribute to a separate color, instead of using the object&#8217;s background color.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: BorderUsesBackColor  See also  backColor attribute  borderColor attribute  borderUsesBackColor attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 527,
    "title": "borderUsesBackColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336294.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the borderUsesBackColor attribute:  borderUsesBackColor=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  borderUsesBackColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 528,
    "title": "borderWidth attribute",
    "url": "58836.htm",
    "text": "The borderWidth attribute specifies the border width of objects in your graphic display.  Graphic object elements with borders contain the borderWidth attribute. Drawing object elements (except the panel), gauge object elements, and activeX object elements do not have borderWidth attributes.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: BorderWidth  See also  borderWidth attribute  Graphic object elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 529,
    "title": "borderWidth attribute",
    "url": "336299.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the borderWidth attribute:  borderWidth=\"integer\"  where integer is a positive number specifying the width of the border in pixels.  See also  borderWidth attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 530,
    "title": "buttonAction attribute",
    "url": "58527.htm",
    "text": "The buttonAction attribute specifies the type of action for the Momentary Push button.  The momentaryButton object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ButtonAction  See also  buttonAction attribute syntax  momentaryButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 531,
    "title": "buttonAction attribute syntax",
    "url": "336301.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the buttonAction attribute:  buttonAction=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of normallyOpen | normallyClosed | value  normallyOpen sends a value of 1 when the object is pressed, and a value of 0 when the object is released.  normallyClosed sends a value of 0 when the object is pressed, and a value of 1 when the object is released.  value sends the value you assign to State 0 when the button is pressed and the value you assign to State 1 when the button is released.  If the button&#8217;s hold time is still in effect when the button is released, the second value is not sent until the hold time expires.  See also  buttonAction attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 532,
    "title": "buttonValue attribute",
    "url": "58917.htm",
    "text": "The buttonValue attribute specifies the value to use for this button. When the operator presses the button, the button changes to State 1 and the application sends this value to the data source.  The interlockedButton graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ButtonValue  See also  buttonValue attribute syntax  Push button objects: interlockedButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 533,
    "title": "buttonValue attribute syntax",
    "url": "336303.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the buttonValue attribute:  buttonValue=\"integer\"  where integer is a positive number.  See also  buttonValue attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 534,
    "title": "cannotBeReplaced attribute",
    "url": "58506.htm",
    "text": "The cannotBeReplaced attribute specifies that a display of whose displayType attribute is onTop will remain open and in front when a display with the replace displayType attribute is opened at run time.  The displaySettings element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Display Type on the General tab of the Display Settings dialog box  See also  displayType attribute  displaySettings element  cannotBeReplaced attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 535,
    "title": "cannotBeReplaced attribute syntax",
    "url": "336305.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the cannotBeReplaced attribute:  cannotBeReplaced=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  cannotBeReplaced attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 536,
    "title": "caption attribute",
    "url": "58559.htm",
    "text": "The caption attribute specifies the text for the object or state's caption. The text appears on the face of the object, to give the operator information about what the object does or about the current state.  The caption element contains the caption attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Caption or St_Caption  See also  Example: Graphic display XML file  caption attribute syntax  caption element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 537,
    "title": "caption attribute syntax",
    "url": "336307.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the caption attribute:  caption=\"string\"  where string is a character string with a maximum length of 30000 characters.  For objects with the usesDisplayName attribute, text entered here is shown only if that attribute is set to False.  See also  caption attribute  usesDisplayName attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 538,
    "title": "captionOnBorder attribute",
    "url": "58894.htm",
    "text": "The captionOnBorder attribute specifies whether the area on which the object's caption or label will be displayed includes the part of the object defined as the object's border.  All push button object elements, multistateIndicator object elements, numericInputEnable and stringInputEnable object elements, gotoButton and returnToButton object elements, displayPrintButton object elements, and goToConfigureModeButton object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: CaptionOnBorder  See also  captionOnBorder attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 539,
    "title": "captionOnBorder attribute syntax",
    "url": "336312.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the captionOnBorder attribute:  captionOnBorder=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  captionOnBorder attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 540,
    "title": "captionTruncate attribute",
    "url": "59013.htm",
    "text": "The captionTruncate attribute specifies whether to cut off captions that exceed the maximum length at the beginning of a new word.  The listIndicator, controlListSelector, pilotedControlListSelector, and displayListSelector objects contain the captionTruncate attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: CaptionTruncate or St_CaptionTruncate  See also  captionTruncate attribute syntax  Display navigation objects: displayListSelector object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 541,
    "title": "captionTruncate attribute syntax",
    "url": "336314.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the captionTruncate attribute:  captionTruncate=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: word | character  If you use the character value, the caption is cut off whenever the maximum caption length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. If you use the word value, the caption is cut off at the end of a word. The maximum caption length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  When a caption has been truncated, the application places an asterisk at the right end of the caption to indicate that text is missing.  See also  captionTruncate attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 542,
    "title": "centerOfRotation attribute",
    "url": "59413.htm",
    "text": "The centerOfRotation attribute specifies the centre of rotation or offset about which an object will revolve at runtime. The center of rotation can be outside of the object, making the object appear to move in an arc.  All the graphic drawing object elements (except panel and image) contain this attribute, within the animateRotation element, nested within the animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Center of rotation  See also  animateRotation element  animations and animate elements  centerOfRotation attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 543,
    "title": "centerOfRotation attribute syntax",
    "url": "336316.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the centerOfRotation attribute:  centerOfRotation=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: topLeft | topCenter | topRight | middleLeft | middleCenter | middleRight | bottomLeft | bottomCenter | bottomRight  centerOfRotation=\"offset\"  where offset is a pixel location on the screen.  See also  centerOfRotation attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 544,
    "title": "charHeight attribute",
    "url": "58814.htm",
    "text": "The charHeight attribute specifies the height of the characters in a text object if the object has been stretched after it was created.  The text graphic object element contains this attribute and the charWidth attribute only if the text object has been resized after it was created.  If charHeight and charWidth appear in the exported XML file, the fontSize attribute does not appear. If the charWidth attribute is imported, the fontSize attribute will not be imported even if it appears in the imported XML file. If the charHeight attribute appears, the fontSize attribute will be imported, but the charHeight attribute will override the fontSize value.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: N/A  See also  charWidth attribute  fontSize attribute  charHeight attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 545,
    "title": "charHeight attribute syntax",
    "url": "336319.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the charHeight attribute:  charHeight=\"float\"  where float is a number from 1 through 999.  See also  charHeight attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 546,
    "title": "charWidth attribute",
    "url": "58816.htm",
    "text": "The charWidth attribute specifies the width of the characters in a text object if the object has been stretched after it was created.  The text graphic object element contains this attribute and the charHeight attribute only if the text object has been resized after it was created.  If charHeight and charWidth appear in the exported XML file, the fontSize attribute does not appear. If the charWidth attribute is imported, the fontSize attribute will not be imported even if it appears in the imported XML file. If the charHeight attribute appears, the fontSize attribute will be imported, but the charHeight attribute will override the fontSize value.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: N/A  See also  fontSize attribute  charHeight attribute  charWidth attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 547,
    "title": "charWidth attribute syntax",
    "url": "336321.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the charWidth attribute:  charWidth=\"integer\"  where integer is a number from 1 through 999.  See also  charWidth attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 548,
    "title": "closeValue attribute",
    "url": "58770.htm",
    "text": "The closeValue attribute specifies the value that will be written out when the button is pressed, if the writeOnClose attribute is true.  The closeButton graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: CloseValue  See also  writeOnClose attribute  closeValue attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 549,
    "title": "closeValue attribute syntax",
    "url": "336323.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the closeValue attribute:  closeValue=\"integer\"  where integer is a number from -2,147,483,648 through 2,147,483,647.  See also  closeValue attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 550,
    "title": "color attribute",
    "url": "58567.htm",
    "text": "The color attribute specifies the caption&#8217;s text color, or the color of a monochromatic image.  Caption elements and imageSettings elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: CaptionColor, St_CaptionColor, ImageColor  See also  color attribute syntax  caption element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 551,
    "title": "color attribute syntax",
    "url": "336325.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the color attribute:  color=\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  See also  RRGGBB color table  color attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 552,
    "title": "columnWidthAuditLocation attribute",
    "url": "311618.htm",
    "text": "The columnWidthAuditLocation attribute specifies the width, in pixels, of the Location column in the audit trail list object.  The auditTrailList object and the auditTrailDetail object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The Column width option on the Audit tab of the Audit Trail List Properties dialog box when the Location column is selected  See also  XML attributes  columnWidthAuditLocation attribute syntax  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 553,
    "title": "columnWidthAuditLocation attribute syntax",
    "url": "312841.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the columnWidthAuditLocation attribute:  columnWidthAuditLocation=\"integer\"  where integer is a positive number specifying the width of the column in pixels.  See also  columnWidthAuditLocation attribute  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 554,
    "title": "columnWidthAuditResource attribute",
    "url": "311619.htm",
    "text": "The columnWidthAuditResource attribute specifies the width, in pixels, of the Resource column in the audit trail list object.  The auditTrailList object and the auditTrailDetail object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The Column width option on the Audit tab of the Audit Trail List Properties dialog box when the Resource column is selected  See also  XML attributes  columnWidthAuditResource attribute syntax  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 555,
    "title": "columnWidthAuditResource attribute syntax",
    "url": "312848.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the columnWidthAuditResource attribute:  columnWidthAuditResource=\"integer\"  where integer is a positive number specifying the width of the column in pixels.  See also  columnWidthAuditResource attribute  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 556,
    "title": "columnWidthAuditSource attribute",
    "url": "311620.htm",
    "text": "The columnWidthAuditSource attribute specifies the width, in pixels, of the Source column in the audit trail list object.  The auditTrailList object and the auditTrailDetail object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The Column width option on the Audit tab of the Audit Trail List Properties dialog box when the Source column is selected  See also  XML attributes  columnWidthAuditSource attribute syntax  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 557,
    "title": "columnWidthAuditSource attribute syntax",
    "url": "312850.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the columnWidthAuditSource attribute:  columnWidthAuditSource=\"integer\"  where integer is a positive number specifying the width of the column in pixels.  See also  columnWidthAuditSource attribute  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 558,
    "title": "columnWidthAuditUsername attribute",
    "url": "311621.htm",
    "text": "The columnWidthAuditUsername attribute specifies the width, in pixels, of the Username column in the audit trail list object.  The auditTrailList object and the auditTrailDetail object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The Column width option on the Audit tab of the Audit Trail List Properties dialog box when the Username column is selected  See also  XML attributes  columnWidthAuditUsername attribute syntax  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 559,
    "title": "columnWidthAuditUsername attribute syntax",
    "url": "312561.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the columnWidthAuditUsername attribute:  columnWidthAuditUsername=\"integer\"  where integer is a positive number specifying the width of the column in pixels.  See also  columnWidthAuditUsername attribute  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 560,
    "title": "currentStateId attribute",
    "url": "58892.htm",
    "text": "The currentStateId attribute specifies the current state of the object.  The interlockedButton, multistateButton, multistateIndicator and symbol graphic objects elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: State  See also  currentStateId attribute syntax  Push button objects: interlockedButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 561,
    "title": "currentStateId attribute syntax",
    "url": "336328.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the currentStateId attribute:  currentStateId=\"state\"  where state is one of the object's numbered states or Error.  See also  currentStateId attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 562,
    "title": "decimalPlaces attribute",
    "url": "58931.htm",
    "text": "The decimalPlaces attribute specifies the maximum number of digits to show after the decimal point in a numeric display or numeric input cursor point.  The numericDisplay and numericInputCursorPoint graphic object elements contain the decimalPlaces attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DecimalPlaces  See also  decimalPlaces attribute syntax  Numeric and string objects: numericDisplay object  Numeric and string objects: numericInputEnable object  Numeric and string objects: numericInputCursorPoint object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 563,
    "title": "decimalPlaces attribute syntax",
    "url": "336331.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the decimalPlaces attribute:  decimalPlaces=\"integer\"  where integer is a value from 0 through 15.  See also  numberOfDigits attribute  decimalPlaces attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 564,
    "title": "decimalPoint attribute",
    "url": "58787.htm",
    "text": "The decimalPoint attribute specifies the type of decimal point to use with the numeric input enable and numeric input cursor point objects.  The numericInputEnable and numericInputCursorPoint graphic object elements contain the decimalPoint attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Decimalpoint  See also  Graphic display XML schema  decimalPoint attribute syntax  Numeric and string objects: numericInputEnable object  Numeric and string objects: numericInputCursorPoint object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 565,
    "title": "decimalPoint attribute syntax",
    "url": "336333.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the decimalPoint attribute:  decimalPoint=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: implicit | fixedPosition  implicit if the operator manually enters the decimal point and you want the decimal point to be used when the value is sent to the Value control.  fixedPosition if the values to enter in the numeric pop-up scratchpad or keypad always have the same number of digits after the decimal point. If you select this type of decimal point, specify a value for the digitsAfterDecimalPoint attribute. The decimal point is stripped when the value is sent to the Value control.  See also  digitsAfterDecimalPoint attribute (numeric objects)  decimalPoint attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 566,
    "title": "description attribute",
    "url": "58832.htm",
    "text": "The description attribute specifies a description for the object. The description is optional. It does not appear at run time, but you can use it during application development to make notes about the graphic object.  Most graphic object elements contain the description attribute. The drawing objects (except the panel) do not contain a description attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Description  See also  description attribute syntax  Graphic object elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 567,
    "title": "description attribute syntax",
    "url": "336335.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the description attribute:  description=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric string describing the object.  See also  description attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 568,
    "title": "description attribute (global parameters)",
    "url": "58637.htm",
    "text": "The parameter graphic object element within a parameters element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Description  See also  parameters and parameter elements  description attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 569,
    "title": "description attribute syntax",
    "url": "336337.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the description attribute (global parameters):  description=\"string\"  where string is any Unicode character string. This attribute is optional and can be empty.  See also  description attribute (global parameters)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 570,
    "title": "digitsAfterDecimalPoint attribute (gauge object)",
    "url": "59049.htm",
    "text": "The digitsAfterDecimalPoint attribute specifies the number of digits to show after the decimal point, for the numbers in the gauge object's legends.  The gauge graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DigitsAfterDecimalPoint  See also  digitsAfterDecimalPoint attribute syntax  Graph and gauge objects: gauge object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 571,
    "title": "digitsAfterDecimalPoint attribute syntax",
    "url": "336340.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the digitsAfterDecimalPoint attribute (gauge object):  digitsAfterDecimalPoint=\"integer\"  where integer is a value from 0 through 8  See also  digitsAfterDecimalPoint attribute (gauge object)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 572,
    "title": "digitsAfterDecimalPoint attribute (numeric objects)",
    "url": "58789.htm",
    "text": "The digitsAfterDecimalPoint attribute specifies the number of digits to show after the decimal point, if you select fixedPosition for the decimalPoint attribute.  The numericInputEnable and numericInputCursorPoint graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DigitsAfterDecimalPoint  See also  decimalPoint attribute  digitsAfterDecimalPoint attribute syntax  Numeric and string objects: numericInputEnable object  Numeric and string objects: numericInputCursorPoint object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 573,
    "title": "digitsAfterDecimalPoint attribute syntax",
    "url": "336342.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the digitsAfterDecimalPoint attribute (numeric objects):  DigitsAfterDecimalPoint=\"integer\"  where integer is a value from 0 through 15.  See also  digitsAfterDecimalPoint attribute (numeric object)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 574,
    "title": "disableFocusHighlight attribute",
    "url": "58587.htm",
    "text": "The disableFocusHighlight attribute specifies whether the object with input focus on the display will be highlighted.  The displaySettings element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The Disable Highlight When Object Has Focus check box on the Behavior tab of the Display Settings dialog box  See also  disableFocusHighlight attribute syntax  displaySettings element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 575,
    "title": "disableFocusHighlight attribute syntax",
    "url": "336348.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the disableFocusHighlight attribute;  disableFocusHighlight=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  disableFocusHighlight attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 576,
    "title": "disableInitialInputFocus attribute",
    "url": "58597.htm",
    "text": "The disableInitialInputFocus attribute specifies whether the display will take input focus when it opens.  The displaySettings element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The Disable Initial Input Focus check box on the General tab of the Display Settings dialog box  See also  disableInitialInputFocus attribute syntax  displaySettings element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 577,
    "title": "disableInitialInputFocus attribute syntax",
    "url": "336352.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the disableInitialInputFocus attribute:  disableInitialInputFocus=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  disableInitialInputFocus attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 578,
    "title": "display attribute (displayListSelector)",
    "url": "59414.htm",
    "text": "Use the display attribute to specify the display to open when the operator highlights this state and presses Enter.  The displayListSelector graphic object element's state element contains this attribute. The state element must be within the displayListSelector's states element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: St_Display  See also  display attribute syntax  Display navigation objects: displayListSelector object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 579,
    "title": "display attribute syntax",
    "url": "336355.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the display attribute (displayListSelector):  display=\"component\"  where component is a display component of the application.  See also  display attribute (displayListSelector)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 580,
    "title": "display attribute (gotoButton)",
    "url": "58989.htm",
    "text": "The display attribute specifies which display to open when the Goto button is pressed.  The gotoButton graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Display  See also  display attribute syntax  Display navigation objects: gotoButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 581,
    "title": "display attribute syntax",
    "url": "336358.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the display attribute (displayListSelector):  display=\"component\"  where component is a display component of the application.  See also  display attribute (gotoButton)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 582,
    "title": "display attribute (Logout button)",
    "url": "59123.htm",
    "text": "The display attribute specifies the display that will open when the Logout button is pressed if the showDisplayOnLogout attribute is True.  The logoutButton graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Display  See also  display attribute syntax  User management objects: logoutButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 583,
    "title": "display attribute syntax",
    "url": "336360.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the display attribute (Logout button):  display=\"component\"  where component is a display component of the application.  See also  display attribute (Logout button)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 584,
    "title": "displayAccumulatedTime attribute",
    "url": "59319.htm",
    "text": "The displayAccumulatedTime attribute specifies whether to show the Accumulated Time column in the Alarm Status list. This column shows the amount of time the alarm has been active.  The alarmStatusList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayAccumulatedTime  See also  displayAccumulatedTime attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 585,
    "title": "displayAccumulatedTime attribute syntax",
    "url": "336362.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayAccumulatedTime attribute:  displayAccumulatedTime=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayAccumulatedTime attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 586,
    "title": "displayAckSymbol attribute",
    "url": "59253.htm",
    "text": "The displayAckSymbol attribute specifies whether to show a symbol next to an acknowledged alarm.  The alamList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: displayAckSymbol  See also  displayAckSymbol attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 587,
    "title": "displayAckSymbol attribute syntax",
    "url": "336364.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayAckSymbol attribute:  displayAckSymbol=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayAckSymbol attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 588,
    "title": "displayAckTime attribute",
    "url": "59199.htm",
    "text": "The displayAckTime attribute specifies whether to show the Acknowledge Time column in the alarm list object. This column shows the time the alarm was acknowledged.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayAckTime  If you set the listType attribute to Unacknowledged alarms only, the DisplayAckTime column is always empty, because as soon as the alarm is acknowledged, the application removes the alarm message.  See also  displayAckTime attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 589,
    "title": "displayAckTime attribute syntax",
    "url": "336366.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayAckTime attribute:  displayAckTime=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayAckTime attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 590,
    "title": "displayActiveAckedAlarms attribute",
    "url": "59213.htm",
    "text": "The displayActiveAckedAlarms attribute specifies whether to show alarms that are currently active (in alarm) and have also been acknowledged.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayActiveAckedAlarms  See also  displayActiveAckedAlarms attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 591,
    "title": "displayActiveAckedAlarms attribute syntax",
    "url": "336368.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayActiveAckedAlarms attribute:  displayActiveAckedAlarms=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayActiveAckedAlarms attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 592,
    "title": "displayActiveSymbol attribute",
    "url": "59257.htm",
    "text": "The displayActiveSymbol attribute specifies whether to show a symbol next to an active alarm.  The alamList graphic object element contains this attribute.  Attribute name: displayActiveSymbol  FactoryTalk View equivalent: displayActiveSymbol  See also  displayActiveSymbol attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 593,
    "title": "displayActiveSymbol attribute syntax",
    "url": "336370.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayActiveSymbol attribute:  displayActiveSymbol=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayActiveSymbol attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 594,
    "title": "displayActiveUnackedAlarms attribute",
    "url": "59215.htm",
    "text": "The displayActiveUnackedAlarms attribute specifies whether to show alarms that are currently active (in alarm) but have not yet been acknowledged.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayActiveUnackedAlarms  See also  displayActiveUnackedAlarms attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 595,
    "title": "displayActiveUnackedAlarms attribute syntax",
    "url": "336374.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayActiveUnackedAlarms attribute:  displayActiveUnackedAlarms=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayActiveUnackedAlarms attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 596,
    "title": "displayAlarmQuantity attribute",
    "url": "59321.htm",
    "text": "The displayAlarmQuantity attribute specifies whether to show the Alarm Quantity column in the Alarm Status list. This column shows the number of times the alarm has been triggered.  The alarmStatusList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayAlarmQuantity  See also  displayAlarmQuantity attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 597,
    "title": "displayAlarmQuantity attribute syntax",
    "url": "336376.htm",
    "text": "Use the following to specify the displayAlarmQuantity attribute:  displayAlarmQuantity=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayAlarmQuantity attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 598,
    "title": "displayAlarmState attribute",
    "url": "59274.htm",
    "text": "The displayAlarmState attribute determines whether the Alarm State column will be shown in the Alarm Status list.  The alarmStatusList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayAlarmState  See also  displayAlarmState attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 599,
    "title": "displayAlarmState attribute syntax",
    "url": "336552.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayAlarmState attribute:  displayAlarmState=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayAlarmState attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 600,
    "title": "displayAlarmTime attribute",
    "url": "59201.htm",
    "text": "The displayAlarmTime attribute specifies whether to show the Alarm Time column in the alarm list object. This column shows the time the alarm was triggered.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayAlarmTime  See also  displayAlarmTime attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 601,
    "title": "displayAlarmTime attribute syntax",
    "url": "336554.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayAlarmTime attribute:  displayAlarmTime=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayAlarmTime attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 602,
    "title": "displayAuditLocation attribute",
    "url": "311622.htm",
    "text": "The displayAuditLocation attribute specifies whether to show the Location column or row in the audit object.  The auditTrailList object and the auditTrailDetail object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The Display column or Display row check box on the Audit tab of an audit object's Properties dialog box when the Location column or row is selected.  See also  XML attributes  displayAuditLocation attribute syntax  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  Audit objects: auditTrailDetail object  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 603,
    "title": "displayAuditLocation attribute syntax",
    "url": "312858.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayAuditLocation attribute:  displayAuditLocation=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayAuditLocation attribute  auditTrailList object example  auditTrailDetail object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 604,
    "title": "displayAuditMessage attribute",
    "url": "311623.htm",
    "text": "The displayAuditMessage attribute specifies whether to show the Message column or row in the audit object.  The auditTrailList object and the auditTrailDetail object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The Display column or Display row check box on the Audit tab of an audit object's Properties dialog box when the Message column or row is selected.  See also  XML attributes  displayAuditMessage attribute syntax  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  Audit objects: auditTrailDetail object  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 605,
    "title": "displayAuditMessage attribute syntax",
    "url": "312861.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayAuditMessage attribute:  displayAuditMessage=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayAuditMessage attribute  auditTrailList object example  auditTrailDetail object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 606,
    "title": "displayAuditOccurredTime attribute",
    "url": "311624.htm",
    "text": "The displayAuditOccurredTime attribute specifies whether to show the Occurred Time column or row in the audit object.  The auditTrailList object and the auditTrailDetail object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The Display column or Display row check box on the Audit tab of an audit object's Properties dialog box when the Occurred Time column or row is selected.  See also  XML attributes  displayAuditOccurredTime attribute syntax  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  Audit objects: auditTrailDetail object  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 607,
    "title": "displayAuditOccurredTime attribute syntax",
    "url": "312863.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayAuditOccurredTime attribute:  displayAuditOccurredTime=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayAuditOccurredTime attribute  auditTrailList object example  auditTrailDetail object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 608,
    "title": "displayAuditResource attribute",
    "url": "311625.htm",
    "text": "The displayAuditResource attribute specifies whether to show the Resource column or row in the audit object.  The auditTrailList object and the auditTrailDetail object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The Display column or Display row check box on the Audit tab of an audit object's Properties dialog box when the Resource column or row is selected.  See also  XML attributes  displayAuditResource attribute syntax  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  Audit objects: auditTrailDetail object  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 609,
    "title": "displayAuditResource attribute syntax",
    "url": "312864.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayAuditResource attribute:  displayAuditResource=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayAuditResource attribute  auditTrailList object example  auditTrailDetail object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 610,
    "title": "displayAuditSource attribute",
    "url": "311626.htm",
    "text": "The displayAuditSource attribute specifies whether to show the Source column or row in the audit object.  The auditTrailList object and the auditTrailDetail object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The Display column or Display row check box on the Audit tab of an audit object's Properties dialog box when the Source column or row is selected.  See also  XML attributes  displayAuditSource attribute syntax  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  Audit objects: auditTrailDetail object  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 611,
    "title": "displayAuditSource attribute syntax",
    "url": "312865.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayAuditSource attribute:  displayAuditSource=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayAuditSource attribute  auditTrailList object example  auditTrailDetail object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 612,
    "title": "displayAuditUsername attribute",
    "url": "311627.htm",
    "text": "The displayAuditUsername attribute specifies whether to show the Username column or row in the audit object.  The auditTrailList object and the auditTrailDetail object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View property: The Display column or Display row check box on the Audit tab of an audit object's Properties dialog box when the Username column or row is selected.  See also  XML attributes  displayAuditUsername attribute syntax  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  Audit objects: auditTrailDetail object  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 613,
    "title": "displayAuditUsername attribute syntax",
    "url": "312866.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayAuditUsername attribute:  displayAuditUsername=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayAuditUsername attribute  auditTrailList object example  auditTrailDetail object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 614,
    "title": "displayCompareStatus attribute",
    "url": "59395.htm",
    "text": "The displayCompareStatus attribute specifies whether to show the Compare column in the RecipePlus table object. This column shows an X if the current tag value of the recipe ingredient differs from the recipe value.  The recipePlusTable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayCompareStatus  See also  displayCompareStatus attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 615,
    "title": "displayCompareStatus attribute syntax",
    "url": "336556.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayCompareStatus attribute:  displayCompareStatus=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayCompareStatus attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 616,
    "title": "displayCurrentValue attribute",
    "url": "59391.htm",
    "text": "The displayCurrentValue attribute specifies whether to display the Current column in the RecipePlus table object. This column shows the current tag value of the recipe ingredient.  The recipePlusTable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayCurrentValue  See also  displayCurrentValue attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 617,
    "title": "displayCurrentValue attribute syntax",
    "url": "336558.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayCurrentValue attribute:  displayCurrentValue=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayCurrentValue attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 618,
    "title": "displayFooter attribute",
    "url": "59365.htm",
    "text": "The displayFooter attribute specifies whether to show the footer at the bottom of the object.  The recipePlusTable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayFooter  See also  displayFooter attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 619,
    "title": "displayFooter attribute syntax",
    "url": "336560.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayFooter attribute:  displayFooter=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayFooter attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 620,
    "title": "displayHeader attribute",
    "url": "59193.htm",
    "text": "The displayHeader attribute specifies whether to show the column heading bar at the top of the list object.  The alarmList, alarmStatusList, recipePlusSelector and recipePlusTable graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayHeader  See also  displayHeader attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 621,
    "title": "displayHeader attribute syntax",
    "url": "336562.htm",
    "text": "Use the following to specify the displayHeader attribute:  displayHeader=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayHeader attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 622,
    "title": "displayInactiveAckedAlarms attribute",
    "url": "59217.htm",
    "text": "The displayInactiveAckedAlarms attribute specifies whether to show alarms that are currently inactive (out of alarm) and have been acknowledged.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayInactiveAckedAlarms  See also  displayInactiveAckedAlarms attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 623,
    "title": "displayInactiveAckedAlarms attribute syntax",
    "url": "336564.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayInactiveAckedAlarms attribute:  displayInactiveAckedAlarms=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayInactiveAckedAlarms attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 624,
    "title": "displayInactiveAlarms attribute",
    "url": "59276.htm",
    "text": "The displayInactiveAlarms attribute specifies whether the alarm banner will show only active unacknowledged alarms, or both active and inactive unacknowledged alarms.  The alarmBanner graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayInactiveAlarms  See also  displayInactiveAlarms attribute sytnax  Alarm objects: alarmBanner object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 625,
    "title": "displayInactiveAlarms attribute sytnax",
    "url": "336566.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayInactiveAlarms attribute:  displayInactiveAlarms=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayInactiveAlarms attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 626,
    "title": "displayInactiveUnackedAlarms attribute",
    "url": "59219.htm",
    "text": "The displayInactiveUnackedAlarms attribute specifies whether to show alarms that are currently inactive (out of alarm) and have not yet been acknowledged.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayInactiveUnackedAlarms  See also  displayInactiveUnackedAlarms attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 627,
    "title": "displayInactiveUnackedAlarms attribute syntax",
    "url": "336568.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayInactiveUnackedAlarms attribute:  displayInactiveUnackedAlarms=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayInactiveUnackedAlarms attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 628,
    "title": "displayIngredientName attribute",
    "url": "59389.htm",
    "text": "The displayIngredientName attribute specifies whether to display the Ingredient column in the RecipePlus table object. This column shows the name of the recipe ingredient.  The recipePlusTable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayIngredientName  See also  displayIngredientName attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 629,
    "title": "displayIngredientName attribute syntax",
    "url": "336570.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayIngredientName attribute:  displayIngredientName=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayIngredientName attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 630,
    "title": "displayLeftPosition attribute",
    "url": "58987.htm",
    "text": "The displayLeftPosition attribute specifies the number of pixels from the left of the screen to position the display. This property applies only to On Top displays (with or without the Cannot Be Replaced option). If the displayPosition attribute is false, this attribute will not be used.  The gotoButton graphic object element contains this attribute, and each of the state elements within the displayListSelector graphic object element's states element contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayLeftPosition  See also  displayPosition attribute  displayLeftPosition attribute syntax  Display navigation objects: gotoButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 631,
    "title": "displayLeftPosition attribute syntax",
    "url": "336572.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayLeftPosition attribute:  displayLeftPosition=\"integer\"  where integer is a signed number from -2147483648 through +2147483647.  See also  displayLeftPosition attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 632,
    "title": "displayMessage attribute",
    "url": "59323.htm",
    "text": "The displayMessage attribute specifies whether to show the Alarm Message column in the alarm status list.  The alarmStatusList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayMessage  See also  displayMessage attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 633,
    "title": "displayMessage attribute syntax",
    "url": "336574.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayMessage attribute:  displayMessage=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayMessage attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 634,
    "title": "displayNumber attribute",
    "url": "58595.htm",
    "text": "The displayNumber attribute specifies the unique run-time display number of a display whose displayType attribute is replace.  The displaySettings element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Display Number on the General tab of the Display Settings dialog box  See also  displayNumber attribute syntax  displaySettings element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 635,
    "title": "displayNumber attribute syntax",
    "url": "336576.htm",
    "text": "Use the following to specify the displayNumber attribute:  displayNumber=\"integer\"  where integer is a value from 1 through 65536.  See also  displayNumber attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 636,
    "title": "displayRecipeValue attribute",
    "url": "59393.htm",
    "text": "The displayRecipeValue attribute specifies whether to display the Recipe column in the RecipePlus table object. This column shows the recipe file value of the recipe ingredient.  The recipePlusTable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayRecipeValue  See also  displayRecipeValue attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 637,
    "title": "displayRecipeValue attribute syntax",
    "url": "336578.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayRecipeValue attribute:  displayRecipeValue=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayRecipeValue attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 638,
    "title": "displayPosition attribute",
    "url": "58983.htm",
    "text": "The displayPosition attribute specifies whether to use the displayTopPosition and displayLeftPosition attributes for the display.  The displayListSelector and gotoButton graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayPosition  See also  displayTopPosition attribute  displayLeftPosition attribute  displayPosition attribute syntax  Display navigation objects: displayListSelector object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 639,
    "title": "displayPosition attribute syntax",
    "url": "336580.htm",
    "text": "Use he following syntax to specify the displayPosition attribute:  displayPosition=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayPosition attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 640,
    "title": "displayTagName attribute",
    "url": "59397.htm",
    "text": "The displayTagName attribute specifies whether to display the Tag Name column in the RecipePlus table object. This column shows the name of the tag associated with the recipe ingredient.  The recipePlusTable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayTagName  See also  displayTagName attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 641,
    "title": "displayTagName attribute syntax",
    "url": "336582.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayTagName attribute:  displayTagName=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayTagName attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 642,
    "title": "displayTitle attribute",
    "url": "59293.htm",
    "text": "The displayTitle attribute determines whether the current mode's title for the alarm status list will be shown.  The alarmStatusList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayTitle  See also  titleActiveAlarmsMode attribute  titleAllAlarmsMode attribute  titlePastAlarmsMode  displayTitle attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 643,
    "title": "displayTitle attribute syntax",
    "url": "336584.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayTitle attribute:  displayTitle=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayTitle attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 644,
    "title": "displayTopPosition attribute",
    "url": "58985.htm",
    "text": "The displayTopPosition attribute specifies the number of pixels from the top of the screen to position the display. This property applies only to On Top displays (with or without the Cannot Be Replaced option). If the displayPosition attribute is false, this attribute will not be used.  The gotoButton graphic object element contains this attribute, and each of the state elements within the displayListSelector graphic object element's states element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayTopPosition  See also  displayPosition attribute  displayTopPosition attribute syntax  Display navigation objects: gotoButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 645,
    "title": "displayTopPosition attribute syntax",
    "url": "336586.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayTopPosition attribute:  displayTopPosition=\"integer\"  where integer is a positive number.  See also  displayTopPosition attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 646,
    "title": "displayTriggerLabel attribute",
    "url": "59278.htm",
    "text": "In the alarm status list object, use displayTriggerLabel attribute to determine whether the Alarms Trigger Label column will be shown. In the alarm banner object, use this attribute to determine whether the alarms trigger label will be shown.  The alarmStatusList and alarmBanner graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayTriggerLabel  See also  displayTriggerLabel attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  Alarm objects: alarmBanner object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 647,
    "title": "displayTriggerLabel attribute syntax",
    "url": "336588.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayTriggerLabel attribute:  displayTriggerLabel=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayTriggerLabel attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 648,
    "title": "displayTriggerValue attribute",
    "url": "59280.htm",
    "text": "In the alarm status list element, use displayTriggerValue attribute to determine whether the Alarm Trigger Value column will be shown. In the alarm banner element, use it to determine whether the alarm's trigger value will be displayed in the banner.  The alarmStatusList and alarmBanner graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: DisplayTriggerValue  See also  displayTriggerValue attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  Alarm objects: alarmBanner object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 649,
    "title": "displayTriggerValue attribute syntax",
    "url": "336590.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayTriggerValue attribute:  displayTriggerValue=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  displayTriggerValue attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 650,
    "title": "displayType attribute",
    "url": "58504.htm",
    "text": "The displayType attribute specifies whether a display will close (replace) any open screens when it is opened at run time, or whether it will appear in front (on top) of any open displays.  The displaySettings element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Display Type (General tab, Display Settings)  See also  displaySettings element  displayType attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 651,
    "title": "displayType attribute syntax",
    "url": "336592.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the displayType attribute:  displayType=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: replace | onTop  See also  displayType attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 652,
    "title": "endAngle attribute",
    "url": "58843.htm",
    "text": "The endAngle attribute specifies the closing angle of an arc or a wedge in relation to its rightmost point (0).  The arc and wedge graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: N/A  See also  endAngle attribute syntax  Drawing objects: wedge object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 653,
    "title": "endAngle attribute syntax",
    "url": "336594.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the endAngle attribute:  endAngle=\"double\"  where double is the number of radians from the object's rightmost point (0). A positive number moves the angle counter-clockwise and a negative number moves it clockwise.  See also  endAngle attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 654,
    "title": "enterKeyControlDelay attribute",
    "url": "58942.htm",
    "text": "The enterKeyControlDelay attribute specifies the length of the delay between the time the operator presses the Enter button and the time the application sets the Enter connection to 1.  The controlListSelector, numericInputCursorPoint, numericInputEnable, pilotedControlListSelector and stringInputEnable graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: EnterKeyControlDelay  See also  enterKeyControlDelay attribute syntax  Numeric and string objects: numericInputCursorPoint object  Advanced objects: controlListSelector object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 655,
    "title": "enterKeyControlDelay attribute syntax",
    "url": "336596.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the enterKeyControlDelay attribute:  enterKeyControlDelay=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of the following number of milliseconds: 0 | 200| 400 | 600 | 800 | 1000 | 2000 | 3000 | 4000 | 5000  See also  enterKeyControlDelay attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 656,
    "title": "enterKeyHandshakeTime attribute",
    "url": "58944.htm",
    "text": "The enterKeyHandshakeTime attribute specifies the maximum time the Enter connection will be set to 1. This time setting applies only if the Enter and Enter Handshake connection elements are both assigned (in the connections element).  The controlListSelector, numericInputCursorPoint, numericInputEnable, pilotedControlListSelector and stringInputEnable graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: EnterKeyHandshakeTime  See also  enterKeyHandshakeTime attribute syntax  Numeric and string objects: numericInputEnable object  Numeric and string objects: numericInputCursorPoint object  Advanced objects: controlListSelector object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 657,
    "title": "enterKeyHandshakeTime attribute syntax",
    "url": "336598.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the enterKeyHandshakeTime attribute:  enterKeyHandshakeTime=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of the following number of seconds: 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 15 | 20 | 25 | 30 | 35 | 40 | 45 | 50 | 55 | 60  See also  enterKeyHandshakeTime attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 658,
    "title": "enterKeyHoldTime attribute",
    "url": "58946.htm",
    "text": "The enterKeyHoldTime attribute specifies the time the Enter connection will be set to 1. This time setting applies only if the Enter connection element is assigned and the Enter Handshake connection element is not assigned (in the connections element).  The controlListSelector, numericInputCursorPoint, numericInputEnable, pilotedControlListSelector and stringInputEnable graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: EnterKeyHoldTime  See also  enterKeyHoldTime attribute syntax  Numeric and string objects: numericInputEnable object  Numeric and string objects: numericInputCursorPoint object  Advanced objects: controlListSelector object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 659,
    "title": "enterKeyHoldTime attribute syntax",
    "url": "336601.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the enterKeyHoldTime attribute:  enterKeyHoldTime=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of the following number of milliseconds: 50 | 250 | 500 | 750 | 1000 | 2000 | 3000 | 4000 | 5000  See also  enterKeyHoldTime attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 660,
    "title": "expression attribute (animation)",
    "url": "58656.htm",
    "text": "The expression attribute defines the expression used to control animation at run time  The animate elements nested within the animations element contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The Expression button on animation tabs  See also  animations and animate elements  expression attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 661,
    "title": "expression attribute syntax",
    "url": "336603.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the expression attribute (animation):  expression=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string of&nbsp;up to 999 characters, validated as an expression by the Expression Editor.  See also  expression attribute (animation)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 662,
    "title": "expression attribute (connections)",
    "url": "58619.htm",
    "text": "The expression attribute defines the tag or expression connected to a graphic object at run time.  The connection elements nested within the connections element contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Tag/Expression  See also  expression attribute syntax  connections and connection elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 663,
    "title": "expression attribute syntax",
    "url": "336605.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the expression attribute (animation):  expression=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string of&nbsp;up to 999 characters, validated as an expression by the Expression Editor or a tag name.  See also  expression attribute (connections)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 664,
    "title": "expressionTrueState attribute",
    "url": "58734.htm",
    "text": "The expressionTrueState attribute specifies whether the object will be visible or invisible when the expression's value is true.  The animateVisibility element within the animations element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Expression true state on the Visibility tab of the Animation dialog box  See also  expressionTrueState attribute syntax  animateVisibility element  animations and animate elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 665,
    "title": "expressionTrueState attribute syntax",
    "url": "336607.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the expressionTrueState attribute:  expressionTrueState=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: visible | invisible  See also  expressionTrueState attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 666,
    "title": "fillCharacter attribute",
    "url": "58975.htm",
    "text": "The fillCharacter attribute specifies what character to fill the entered string with if the operator enters fewer characters than the value for the numberOfInputCharacters attribute. The fill characters are placed after the string the operator enters.  The stringInputEnable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: FillCharacters  See also  fillCharacter attribute syntax  numberOfInputCharacters attribute  Numeric and string objects: numericInputEnable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 667,
    "title": "fillCharacter attribute syntax",
    "url": "336610.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the fillCharacter attribute:  fillCharacter=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: zeros | null | spaces | ff  See also  fillCharacter attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 668,
    "title": "fillColor attribute",
    "url": "58611.htm",
    "text": "The fillColor attribute specifies the fill color for the object.  The barGraph and the gauge graphic object elements contain this attribute. The gauge object only uses this color if you select Fill for the sweepStyle attribute.  If you specify threshold elements for the gauge or bar graph object, you can also assign a fill color to each threshold element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: FillColor  See also  RRGGBB color table  fillColor attribute syntax  sweepStyle attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 669,
    "title": "fillColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336612.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the fillColor attribute:  fillColor=\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  See also  RRGGBB color table  fillColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 670,
    "title": "fillDirection attribute for animation",
    "url": "58679.htm",
    "text": "The fillDirection attribute for animation specifies the direction for fill animation.  Any object element with fill animation will contain this attribute, in an animateFill element within its animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Fill direction on the Animation Fill tab  See also  fillDirection attribute for animation syntax  animateFill element  animations and animate elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 671,
    "title": "fillDirection attribute for animation syntax",
    "url": "336614.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the fillDirection attribute for animation:  fillDirection=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: left | right | up | down  See also  fillDirection attribute for animation  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 672,
    "title": "fillDirection attribute",
    "url": "59029.htm",
    "text": "The fillDirection attribute specifies the direction for filling the bar graph object.  The barGraph graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: FillDirection  See also  fillDirection attribute syntax  Graph and gauge objects: barGraph object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 673,
    "title": "fillDirection attribute syntax",
    "url": "336616.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the fillDirection attribute:  fillDirection=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: bottomToTop | topToBottom | leftToRight | rightToLeft  See also  fillDirection attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 674,
    "title": "fillLeftWith attribute",
    "url": "58935.htm",
    "text": "The fillLeftWith attribute specifies the character to fill the left of the display with if the value at the data source contains fewer digits than the numberOfDigits attribute.  The numericDisplay and the numericInputCursorPoint graphic object elements contain the fillLeftWith attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: FillLeftWith  See also  fillLeftWith attribute syntax  Numeric and string objects: numericDisplay object  Numeric and string objects: numericInputCursorPoint object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 675,
    "title": "fillLeftWith attribute syntax",
    "url": "336618.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the fillLeftWith attribute:  fillLeftWith=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration&nbsp;is one of: none | zeroes | spaces  See also  fillLeftWith attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 676,
    "title": "fillMax attribute",
    "url": "58677.htm",
    "text": "The fillMax attribute specifies the fill level of an object as a percentage of its base size when the tag or expression evaluates to its maximum value.  All the graphic drawing object elements (except for panel and image) contain this attribute, within the animateFill element, nested within the animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Fill (Percent) At maximum (text box)  See also  animations element  fillMax attribute syntax  animateFill element  animations and animate elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 677,
    "title": "fillMax attribute syntax",
    "url": "336620.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the fillMax attribute:  fillMax=\"percentage\"  where percentage is a number from 0 through 100.  See also  fillMax attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 678,
    "title": "fillMin attribute",
    "url": "58674.htm",
    "text": "The fillMin attribute specifies the fill level of an object as a percentage of its base size when the tag or expression evaluates to its minimum value.  All the graphic drawing object elements (except for panel and image) contain this attribute, within the animateFill element, nested within the animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: the At minimum text box in the Fill (Percent) area on the Fill tab of the Animation dialog box  See also  animations element  fillMin attribute syntax  animateFill element  animations and animate elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 679,
    "title": "fillMin attribute syntax",
    "url": "336622.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the fillMin attribute:  fillMin=\"percentage\"  where percentage is a number from 0 through 100.  See also  fillMin attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 680,
    "title": "filteredTriggers attribute",
    "url": "59146.htm",
    "text": "The filteredTriggers attribute specifies which trigger labels the object will use to filter alarms. If the attribute is blank, the object will not filter the alarms.  The alarmList, alarmBanner, alarmStatusList, acknowledgeAllAlarms, clearAlarmHistory, printAlarmHistory, and printAlarmStatus graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: FilteredTriggers  See also  filteredTriggers attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  Alarm objects: alarmBanner object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 681,
    "title": "filteredTriggers attribute syntax",
    "url": "336625.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the filteredTriggers attribute:  filteredTriggers=\"string\"  where string is one or more labels defined on the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor, separated by a comma. The maximum number of characters is 30000.  See also  filteredTriggers attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 682,
    "title": "fixedPosition attribute",
    "url": "58950.htm",
    "text": "The fixedPosition attribute specifies the kind of output to use with the Fixed position decimal point.  The numericInputEnable and numericInputCursorPoint graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: FixedPosition  See also  fixedPosition attribute syntax  Numeric and string objects: numericInputEnable object  Numeric and string objects: numericInputCursorPoint object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 683,
    "title": "fixedPosition attribute syntax",
    "url": "336627.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the fixedPosition attribute:  fixedPosition=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: stripped | displayed  Stripped value The decimal point will be stripped out of the displayed value and the resulting integer will be written to the Value control.  Displayed value The displayed value will be written to the Value control without any changes.  See also  fixedPosition attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 684,
    "title": "focusHighlight attribute",
    "url": "59068.htm",
    "text": "The focusHighlight attribute specifies whether or not the object will have a highlight box shown around it when it has input focus.  ActiveX object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: FocusHighlight  See also  focusHighlight attribute syntax  ActiveX control: activeX object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 685,
    "title": "focusHighlight attribute syntax",
    "url": "336629.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to focusHighlight attribute:  focusHighlight=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  focusHighlight attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 686,
    "title": "focusHighlightColor attribute",
    "url": "58585.htm",
    "text": "The focusHighlightColor attribute specifies the color of the highlight shown at run time around the object that is currently active and has input focus.  The displaySettings element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Highlight Color on the Behavior tab of the Display Settings dialog box  See also  RRGGBB color table  focusHighlightColor attribute syntax  displaySettings element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 687,
    "title": "focusHighlightColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336632.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the focusHighlightColor attribute:  focusHighlightColor=\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  See also  RRGGBB color table  focusHighlightColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 688,
    "title": "fontFamily attribute",
    "url": "58547.htm",
    "text": "The fontFamily attribute specifies what font should be used for the caption, message, legend, or display text.  Caption elements, list object, alarmBanner object, text object, message display object, list selector object, list indicator object, gauge object, numeric object and display object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: part of Font, CaptionFont or St_CaptionFont  See also  fontFamily attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmBanner object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 689,
    "title": "fontFamily attribute syntax",
    "url": "336635.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the fontFamily attribute:  fontFamily=\"string\"  where string is the name of a font available on the terminal.  See also  fontFamily attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 690,
    "title": "fontSize attribute",
    "url": "58549.htm",
    "text": "The fontSize attribute specifies what font size should be used for the caption, message, legend or display text.  Caption elements, list object, alarmBanner object, text object, message display object, list selector object, list indicator object, gauge object, numeric object and display object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: part of Font, CaptionFont or St_CaptionFont  See also  fontSize attribute syntax  caption element  Alarm objects: alarmBanner object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 691,
    "title": "fontSize attribute syntax",
    "url": "336638.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the fontSize attribute:  fontSize=\"float\"  where float is a number from 1 through 999.  See also  fontSize attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 692,
    "title": "footerBackColor attribute",
    "url": "59359.htm",
    "text": "The footerBackColor attribute specifies the color for the footer at the bottom of the recipe table object.  The recipePlusTable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: FooterBackColor  See also  RRGGBB color table  footerBackColor attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 693,
    "title": "footerBackColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336642.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the footerBackColor attribute;  footerBackColor=\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  See also  footerBackColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 694,
    "title": "footerForeColor attribute",
    "url": "59361.htm",
    "text": "The footerForeColor attribute specifies the color for the text in the footer at the bottom of the recipe table object.  The recipePlusTable graphic object element contains this attribute.  Attribute name: footerForeColor  FactoryTalk View equivalent: FooterForeColor  See also  RRGGBB color table  footerForeColor attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 695,
    "title": "footerForeColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336644.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the footerForeColor attribute:  footerForeColor=\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  See also  footerForeColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 696,
    "title": "foreBehavior attribute",
    "url": "58665.htm",
    "text": "The foreBehavior attribute specifies whether the foreground color in color animation blinks or not.  Within an animations element, the color element within an animateColor element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: None  See also  backBehavior attribute  foreBehavior attribute syntax  animations and animate elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 697,
    "title": "foreBehavior attribute syntax",
    "url": "336646.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the foreBehavior attribute:  foreBehavior=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: blink | solid  If you specify blink, set the blinkRate attribute in the animateColor element.  See also  blinkRate attribute  foreBehavior attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 698,
    "title": "foreColor attribute",
    "url": "58810.htm",
    "text": "The foreColor attribute specifies the color for the object&#8217;s text or line.  Objects with caption elements, such as button objects, do not contain foreColor attributes. All other graphic object elements contain the foreColor attribute. For the gauge graphic object element, this attribute applies to the dial outline and tick marks.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ForeColor  See also  foreColor attribute syntax  Graph and gauge objects: gauge object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 699,
    "title": "foreColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336648.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the foreColor attribute:  foreColor=\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  See also  RRGGBB color table  foreColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 700,
    "title": "foreColor1/2 attribute",
    "url": "58669.htm",
    "text": "In color animation, the foreColor1/2 attribute sets the object's line color for up to 16 tag or expression values (A to P). As the tag or expression value changes, the color of the object changes. Each value can have a different color. The foreground color applies to the object's border. If the foreBehavior attribute is solid, foreColor1 is the same as foreColor2. If the foreBehavior attribute is blink, foreColor2 can be set to a different color than foreColor1.  The animateColor elements within an animations element contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: foreground on the Animation Color tab  See also  foreColor1/2 attribute syntax  foreBehavior attribute  animations and animate elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 701,
    "title": "foreColor1/2 attribute syntax",
    "url": "336650.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the foreColor1/2 attribute:  foreColor1=\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  See also  RRGGBB color table  foreColor1/2 attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 702,
    "title": "formatAckTime attribute",
    "url": "59209.htm",
    "text": "The formatAckTime attribute specifies the format in which to show the alarm acknowledge time and date.  The alarmList object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: FormatAckTime  See also  formatAckTime attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 703,
    "title": "formatAckTime attribute syntax",
    "url": "336652.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the formatAckTime attribute:  formatAckTime=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: shortDate | longDate | shortDateTime | longDateTime | time | timeShortDate | timeLongDate  See also  formatAckTime attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 704,
    "title": "formatAlarmTime attribute",
    "url": "59211.htm",
    "text": "The formatAlarmTime attribute specifies the format in which the alarm banner or alarm list shows the alarm time and date.  An alarmBanner or alarmList graphic object element contains the formatAlarmTime attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: FormatAlarmTime  See also  formatAlarmTime attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  Alarm objects: alarmBanner object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 705,
    "title": "formatAlarmTime attribute syntax",
    "url": "336654.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the formatAlarmTime attribute:  formatAlarmTime=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: shortDate | longDate | shortDateTime | longDateTime | time | timeShortDate | timeLongDate  See also  formatAlarmTime attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 706,
    "title": "formatAuditOccurredTime attribute",
    "url": "311628.htm",
    "text": "The formatAuditOccurredTime attribute specifies the date and time format on an audit trail list, at which the software product records the action as having occurred.  The auditTrailList object and the auditTrailDetail object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View property: The Time and date format option on the Audit tab of the Audit Trail List Properties dialog box when the Occurred Time column is selected  See also  XML attributes  formatAuditOccurredTime attribute syntax  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 707,
    "title": "formatAuditOccurredTime attribute syntax",
    "url": "312877.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the formatAuditOccurredTime attribute:  formatAuditOccurredTime=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: shortDateTime | timeShortDate  See also  formatAuditOccurredTime attribute  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 708,
    "title": "gridColor attribute",
    "url": "59363.htm",
    "text": "The gridColor attribute sets the color of the grid lines in the recipe table object.  The recipeTable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: GridColor  See also  RRGGBB color table  gridColor attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 709,
    "title": "gridColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336790.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the gridColor attribute:  gridColor=\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  See also  gridColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 710,
    "title": "handshakeReset attribute",
    "url": "58746.htm",
    "text": "The handshakeReset attribute specifies how the Enter Handshake connection resets the Enter connection to 0.  The controlListSelector, numericInputCursorPoint, numericInputEnable, pilotedControlListSelector, and stringInputEnable graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HandshakeResetType  See also  handshakeReset attribute syntax  Numeric and string objects: numericInputEnable object  Numeric and string objects: numericInputCursorPoint object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 711,
    "title": "handshakeReset attribute syntax",
    "url": "336792.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the handshakeReset attribute:  handshakeReset=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration &nbsp;is one of: nonZeroValue | zeroToNonZeroTransition  nonZeroValue resets the Enter connection when the Enter Handshake connection is a non-zero value.  zeroToNonZeroTransition resets the Enter connection when the Enter Handshake connection changes from 0 to a non-zero value.  See also  handshakeReset attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 712,
    "title": "headerBackColor attribute",
    "url": "59197.htm",
    "text": "The headerBackColor attribute specifies the color for the heading bar at the top of the object.  The alarmList, alarmStatusList, recipePlusSelector and recipePlusTable graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HeaderBackColor  See also  headerBackColor attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 713,
    "title": "headerBackColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336794.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerBackColor attribute:  headerBackColor=\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  See also  RRGGBB color table  headerBackColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 714,
    "title": "headerForeColor attribute",
    "url": "59195.htm",
    "text": "The headerForeColor attribute specifies the color for the text in the heading bar at the top of the object.  The alarmList, alarmStatusList, RecipePlus table and RecipePlus selector graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HeaderForeColor  See also  headerForeColor attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 715,
    "title": "headerForeColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336796.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerForeColor attribute:  headerForeColor=\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  See also  RRGGBB color table  headerForeColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 716,
    "title": "headerTextAccumulatedTime attribute",
    "url": "59309.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextAccumulatedTime attribute specifies the text of the heading, for the Accumulated Time column in the Alarm Status list.  The alarmStatusList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HeaderTextAccumulatedTime  See also  headerTextAccumulatedTime attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 717,
    "title": "headerTextAccumulatedTime attribute syntax",
    "url": "336799.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextAccumulatedTime attribute:  headerTextAccumulatedTime=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric string of up to 80 characters.  See also  headerTextAccumulatedTime attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 718,
    "title": "headerTextAckTime attribute",
    "url": "59203.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextAckTime attribute specifies the text of the heading, up to 80 characters, for the Alarm Acknowledge Time column in the alarm list.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HeaderTextAckTime  See also  headerTextAckTime attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 719,
    "title": "headerTextAckTime attribute syntax",
    "url": "336801.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextAckTime attribute:  headerTextAckTime=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string of up to 80 characters.  See also  headerTextAckTime attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 720,
    "title": "headerTextAlarmQuantity attribute",
    "url": "59311.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextAlarmQuantity attribute specifies the text of the heading for the Alarm Quantity column in the alarm status list.  The alarmStatusList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HeaderTextAlarmQuantity  See also  headerTextAlarmQuantity attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 721,
    "title": "headerTextAlarmQuantity attribute syntax",
    "url": "336805.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextAlarmQuantity attribute:  headerTextAlarmQuantity=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string of up to 80 characters.  See also  headerTextAlarmQuantity attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 722,
    "title": "headerTextAlarmState attribute",
    "url": "59313.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextAlarmState attribute specifies the text of the heading for the Alarm State column in the Alarm Status list.  The alarmStatusList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: headerTextAlarmState  See also  headerTextAlarmState attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 723,
    "title": "headerTextAlarmState attribute syntax",
    "url": "336807.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextAlarmState attribute:  headerTextAlarmState=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string of up to 80 characters.  See also  headerTextAlarmState attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 724,
    "title": "headerTextAlarmTime attribute",
    "url": "59205.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextAlarmTime attribute specifies the text of the heading for the alarm time column in the alarm list.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HeaderTextAlarmTime  See also  headerTextAlarmTime attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 725,
    "title": "headerTextAlarmTime attribute syntax",
    "url": "336809.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextAlarmTime attribute:  headerTextAlarmTime=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string of up to 80 characters.  See also  headerTextAlarmTime attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 726,
    "title": "headerTextAuditLocation attribute",
    "url": "311629.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextAuditLocation attribute specifies the text of the heading for the Location column or row in the audit object.  The auditTrailList object and the auditTrailDetail object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View property: The Header text option on the Audit tab of an audit object's Properties dialog box when the Location column or row is selected.  See also  XML attributes  headerTextAuditLocation attribute syntax  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  Audit objects: auditTrailDetail object  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 727,
    "title": "headerTextAuditLocation attribute syntax",
    "url": "312880.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextAuditLocation attribute:  headerTextAuditLocation=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string.  See also  headerTextAuditLocation attribute  auditTrailList object example  auditTrailDetail object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 728,
    "title": "headerTextAuditMessage attribute",
    "url": "311630.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextAuditMessage attribute specifies the text of the heading for the Message column or row in the audit object.  The auditTrailList object and the auditTrailDetail object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View property: The Header text option on the Audit tab of an audit object's Properties dialog box when the Message column or row is selected.  See also  XML attributes  headerTextAuditMessage attribute syntax  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  Audit objects: auditTrailDetail object  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 729,
    "title": "headerTextAuditMessage attribute syntax",
    "url": "312882.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextAuditMessage attribute:  headerTextAuditMessage=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string.  See also  headerTextAuditMessage attribute  auditTrailList object example  auditTrailDetail object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 730,
    "title": "headerTextAuditOccurredTime attribute",
    "url": "311631.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextAuditOccurredTime attribute specifies the text of the heading for the Occurred Time column or row in the audit object.  The auditTrailList object and the auditTrailDetail object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View property: The Header text option on the Audit tab of an audit object's Properties dialog box when the Occurred Time column or row is selected.  See also  XML attributes  headerTextAuditOccurredTime attribute syntax  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  Audit objects: auditTrailDetail object  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 731,
    "title": "headerTextAuditOccurredTime attribute syntax",
    "url": "312883.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextAuditOccurredTime attribute:  headerTextAuditLocation=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string.  See also  headerTextAuditOccurredTime attribute  auditTrailList object example  auditTrailDetail object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 732,
    "title": "headerTextAuditResource attribute",
    "url": "311632.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextAuditResource attribute specifies the text of the heading for the Resource column or row in the audit object.  The auditTrailList object and the auditTrailDetail object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View property: The Header text option on the Audit tab of an audit object's Properties dialog box when the Resource column or row is selected.  See also  XML attributes  headerTextAuditResource attribute syntax  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  Audit objects: auditTrailDetail object  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 733,
    "title": "headerTextAuditResource attribute syntax",
    "url": "312884.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextAuditResource attribute:  headerTextAuditLocation=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string.  See also  headerTextAuditResource attribute  auditTrailList object example  auditTrailDetail object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 734,
    "title": "headerTextAuditSource attribute",
    "url": "311633.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextAuditSource attribute specifies the text of the heading for the Source column or row in the audit object.  The auditTrailList object and the auditTrailDetail object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View property: The Header text option on the Audit tab of an audit object's Properties dialog box when the Source column or row is selected.  See also  XML attributes  headerTextAuditSource attribute syntax  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  Audit objects: auditTrailDetail object  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 735,
    "title": "headerTextAuditSource attribute syntax",
    "url": "312885.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextAuditSource attribute:  headerTextAuditSource=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string.  See also  headerTextAuditSource attribute  auditTrailList object example  auditTrailDetail object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 736,
    "title": "headerTextAuditUsername attribute",
    "url": "311634.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextAuditUsername attribute specifies the text of the heading for the Username column or row in the audit object.  The auditTrailList object and the auditTrailDetail object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View property: The Header text option on the Audit tab of an audit object's Properties dialog box when the Username column or row is selected.  See also  XML attributes  headerTextAuditUsername attribute syntax  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  Audit objects: auditTrailDetail object  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 737,
    "title": "headerTextAuditUsername attribute syntax",
    "url": "312886.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextAuditUsername attribute:  headerTextAuditUsername=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string.  See also  headerTextAuditUsername attribute  auditTrailList object example  auditTrailDetail object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 738,
    "title": "headerTextCompareStatus attribute",
    "url": "59385.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextCompareStatus attribute specifies the text of the heading for the Compare Status column in the RecipePlus table object.  The recipePlusTable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HeaderTextCompareStatus  See also  headerTextCompareStatus attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 739,
    "title": "headerTextCompareStatus attribute syntax",
    "url": "336811.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextCompareStatus attribute:  headerTextCompareStatus=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string.  See also  headerTextCompareStatus attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 740,
    "title": "headerTextCurrentValue attribute",
    "url": "59381.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextCurrentValue attribute specifies the text of the heading for the Current Value column in the RecipePlus table object.  The recipePlusTable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HeaderTextCurrentValue  See also  headerTextCurrentValue attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 741,
    "title": "headerTextCurrentValue attribute syntax",
    "url": "336813.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextCurrentValue attribute:  headerTextCurrentValue=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string.  See also  headerTextCurrentValue attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 742,
    "title": "headerTextIngredientName attribute",
    "url": "59379.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextIngredientName attribute specifies the text of the heading for the Ingredient column in the RecipePlus table object.  The recipePlusTable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HeaderTextIngredientName  See also  headerTextIngredientName attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 743,
    "title": "headerTextIngredientName attribute syntax",
    "url": "336815.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextIngredientName attribute:  headerTextIngredientName=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string.  See also  headerTextIngredientName attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 744,
    "title": "headerTextMessage attribute",
    "url": "59207.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextMessage attribute specifies the text of the heading for the Message column in the alarm or alarm status list.  The alarmList and alarmStatusList graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HeaderTextMessage  See also  headerTextMessage attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 745,
    "title": "headerTextMessage attribute syntax",
    "url": "336817.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextMessage attribute:  headerTextMessage=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string of up to 80 characters.  See also  headerTextMessage attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 746,
    "title": "headerTextRecipe attribute",
    "url": "59406.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextRecipe attribute specifies the text of the heading for the Recipe column in the RecipePlus selector object.  The recipePlusSelector graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HeaderTextRecipe  See also  headerTextRecipe attribute syntax  recipePlusSelector object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 747,
    "title": "headerTextRecipe attribute syntax",
    "url": "336819.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextRecipe attribute:  headerTextRecipe=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string.  See also  headerTextRecipe attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 748,
    "title": "headerTextRecipeValue attribute",
    "url": "59383.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextRecipeValue attribute specifies the text of the heading for the Recipe Value column in the RecipePlus table object.  The recipePlusTable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HeaderTextRecipeValue  See also  headerTextRecipeValue attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 749,
    "title": "headerTextRecipeValue attribute syntax",
    "url": "336821.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextRecipeValue attribute:  headerTextRecipeValue=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string.  See also  headerTextRecipeValue attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 750,
    "title": "headerTextTagName attribute",
    "url": "59387.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextTagName attribute specifies the text of the heading for the Tag Name column in the RecipePlus table object.  The recipePlusTable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HeaderTextTagName  See also  headerTextTagName attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 751,
    "title": "headerTextTagName attribute syntax",
    "url": "336823.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextTagName attribute:  headerTextTagName=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string.  See also  headerTextTagName attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 752,
    "title": "headerTextTriggerLabel attribute",
    "url": "59315.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextTriggerLabel attribute specifies the text of the heading for the Trigger Label column in the alarm status list.  The alarmStatusList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HeaderTextTriggerLabel  See also  headerTextTriggerLabel attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 753,
    "title": "headerTextTriggerLabel attribute syntax",
    "url": "336825.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextTriggerLabel attribute:  headerTextTriggerLabel=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string of up to 80 characters.  See also  headerTextTriggerLabel attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 754,
    "title": "headerTextTriggerValue attribute",
    "url": "59317.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextTriggerValue attribute specifies the text of the heading for the Trigger Value column in the alarm status list.  The alarmStatusList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HeaderTextTriggerLabel  See also  headerTextTriggerValue attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 755,
    "title": "headerTextTriggerValue attribute syntax",
    "url": "336827.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextTriggerValue attribute:  headerTextTriggerValue=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string of up to 80 characters.  See also  headerTextTriggerValue attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 756,
    "title": "headerTextUnit attribute",
    "url": "59408.htm",
    "text": "The headerTextUnit attribute specifies the text of the heading for the Unit column in the RecipePlus selector object.  The recipePlusSelector graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HeaderTextUnit  See also  headerTextUnit attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 757,
    "title": "headerTextUnit attribute syntax",
    "url": "336829.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headerTextUnit attribute:  headerTextUnit=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string.  See also  headerTextUnit attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 758,
    "title": "headingTitle attribute",
    "url": "59172.htm",
    "text": "The headingTitle attribute specifies a title for the print job sent to the printer when the button is pressed.  The printAlarmHistory and printAlarmStatus graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HeadingTitle  See also  headingTitle attribute syntax  Alarm objects: printAlarmHistory object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 759,
    "title": "headingTitle attribute syntax",
    "url": "336832.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the headingTitle attribute:  headingTitle=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string of up to 80 characters.  See also  headingTitle attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 760,
    "title": "height attribute",
    "url": "58593.htm",
    "text": "The height attribute specifies the number of pixels for the height of the object or group.  All graphic object elements, group elements, and the displaySettings element contain this attribute.  For graphic object elements, the height includes the object&#8217;s borders. If the object&#8217;s shape attribute is Circle or Ellipse, the height applies to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  The displaySettings element's height attribute sets the run-time height of a display whose size attribute is specifySizeInPixels.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Height or GroupHeight  See also  displaySettings element  size attribute  height attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 761,
    "title": "height attribute syntax",
    "url": "336834.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the height attribute:  height=\"integer\"  where integer is a positive number of pixels from 0 through 32000.  See also  height attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 762,
    "title": "highlightColor attribute",
    "url": "58882.htm",
    "text": "The highlightColor attribute specifies the current highlight color. The object&#8217;s border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the object at run time.  All button graphic object element contains this attribute. The numericInputEnable, numericInputCursorPoint, and stringInputEnable graphic object elements also contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HighlightColor  See also  highlightColor attribute syntax  Numeric and string objects: numericInputEnable object  Numeric and string objects: numericInputCursorPoint object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 763,
    "title": "highlightColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336836.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the highlightColor attribute:  highlightColor=\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  See also  RRGGBB color table  highlightColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 764,
    "title": "holdTime attribute",
    "url": "58880.htm",
    "text": "The holdTime attribute specifies a minimum hold time for the button. The application will keep the button pressed for this length of time even if the operator releases the button sooner. The operator cannot press the button again until the hold time has expired. If a display containing the button is closed before the hold time has expired, the hold time will be reset, the button will be reset to state 0 and the value for state 0 will be written out.  The momentaryButton graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HoldTime  See also  holdTime attribute syntax  Push button objects: momentaryButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 765,
    "title": "holdTime attribute syntax",
    "url": "336838.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify holdTime attribute:  holdTime=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of the following number of milliseconds: 50 | 250 | 500 | 750 | 1000 | 2000 | 3000 | 4000 | 5000  See also  holdTime attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 766,
    "title": "horizontalChangeMax attribute",
    "url": "58689.htm",
    "text": "The horizontalChangeMax attribute specifies the width of the object as a percentage of its base size when the tag or expression evaluates to its maximum value.  All the graphic drawing object elements (except for panel and image) contain this attribute, within the animateWidth element, nested within the animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Horizontal change (Percent) At maximum (check box and text box)  See also  animations element  animateWidth element  animations and animate elements  horizontalChangeMax attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 767,
    "title": "horizontalChangeMax attribute syntax",
    "url": "336840.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the horizontalChangeMax attribute:  horizontalChangeMax=\"percentage\"  where percentage is a number from 0 through 100.  See also  horizontalChangeMax attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 768,
    "title": "horizontalChangeMin attribute",
    "url": "58687.htm",
    "text": "The horizontalChangeMin attribute specifies the width of the object as a percentage of its base size when the tag or expression evaluates to its minimum value.  All the graphic drawing object elements (except for panel and image) contain this attribute, within the animateWidth element, nested within the animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Horizontal change (Percent) At minimum (check box and text box)  See also  animations element  horizontalChangeMin attribute syntax  animateWidth element  animations and animate elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 769,
    "title": "horizontalChangeMin attribute syntax",
    "url": "336842.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the horizontalChangeMin attribute:  horizontalChangeMin=\"percentage\"  where percentage is a number from 0 through 100.  See also  horizontalChangeMin attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 770,
    "title": "horizontalMargin attribute",
    "url": "58884.htm",
    "text": "The horizontalMargin attribute specifies the number of pixels for the horizontal touch margin. The horizontal margin is a touch-insensitive margin inside the object&#8217;s left and right edges. If the operator presses the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered. If the shape attribute is circle or ellipse, the touch margin applies to the button&#8217;s bounding box.  All the button graphic object elements, and the numericInputCursorPoint, numericInputEnable, and stringInputEnable graphic object elements, contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: HorizontalMargin  See also  horizontalMargin attribute syntax  shape attribute  Numeric and string objects: numericInputEnable object  Numeric and string objects: numericInputCursorPoint object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 771,
    "title": "horizontalMargin attribute syntax",
    "url": "336845.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the horizontalMargin attribute:  horizontalMargin=\"integer\"  where integer is a positive number.  See also  horizontalMargin attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 772,
    "title": "horizontalOffsetMax attribute",
    "url": "58717.htm",
    "text": "The horizontalOffsetMax attribute specifies the end position, in pixels, of an object in relation to a specified starting point. The value of a related tag changes in relation to the position of the object between its start and end points.  All the graphic drawing object elements (except for panel and image) contain this attribute, within the animateHorizontalSlider and animateHorizontalPosition elements, nested within the animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Horizontal offset (Pixels) At maximum (check box and text box)  See also  animateHorizontalSlider element  animateHorizontalPosition element  animations and animate elements  horizontalOffsetMax attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 773,
    "title": "horizontalOffsetMax attribute syntax",
    "url": "336847.htm",
    "text": "Use the following to specify the horizontalOffsetMax attribute:  horizontalOffsetMax=\"double\"  where double is a number of pixels from -2147483648 to +2147483647.  See also  horizontalOffsetMax attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 774,
    "title": "horizontalOffsetMin attribute",
    "url": "58713.htm",
    "text": "The horizontalOffsetMin attribute specifies the starting position, in pixels, of an object. The value of a related tag changes in relation to the horizontal position of the object between its start and end points.  All the graphic drawing object elements (except for panel and image) contain this attribute, within the animateHorizontalSlider and animateHorizontalPosition elements, nested within the animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Horizontal offset (Pixels) At minimum (check box and text box)  See also  animateHorizontalSlider element  animateHorizontalPosition element  animations and animate elements  horizontalOffsetMin attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 775,
    "title": "horizontalOffsetMin attribute syntax",
    "url": "336849.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the horizontalOffsetMin attribute:  horizontalOffsetMin=\"double\"  where double is a number of pixels from -2147483648 to +2147483647.  See also  horizontalOffsetMin attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 776,
    "title": "imageBackColor attribute",
    "url": "58823.htm",
    "text": "The imageBackColor attribute specifies the color of the background the image is drawn on. It applies only to monochrome images.  The Image graphic object element contains this attribute.  If the imageBackStyle attribute is set to Transparent, the background of the image will be transparent.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ImageBackColor or St_ImageBackColor &nbsp;  See also  imageBackStyle attribute  imageBackColor attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 777,
    "title": "imageBackColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336851.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the imageBackColor attribute:  imageBackColor=\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  See also  RRGGBB color table  imageBackColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 778,
    "title": "imageBackStyle attribute",
    "url": "58821.htm",
    "text": "The imageBackStyle attribute specifies whether the back of an image is solid or transparent. This attribute applies to both monochrome and color images.  The Image graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ImageBackStyle or St_ImageBackStyle  Tip:  For monochrome images, if the imageBackStyle is set to transparent, the background will be transparent.  For color images, if the imageBackStyle is set to Transparent, any parts of the image that are black will be transparent.  See also  imageBackStyle attribute syntax  Drawing objects: image object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 779,
    "title": "imageBackStyle attribute syntax",
    "url": "336853.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the   imageBackStyle=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: solid | transparent  See also  imageBackStyle attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 780,
    "title": "imageBlink attribute",
    "url": "58827.htm",
    "text": "The imageBlink attribute specifies whether an image drawing object blinks at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  The image graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ImageBlink or St_ImageBlink  See also  imageBlink attribute syntax  Drawing objects: image object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 781,
    "title": "imageBlink attribute syntax",
    "url": "336855.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the imageBlink attribute:  imageBlink=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  imageBlink attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 782,
    "title": "imageColor attribute",
    "url": "58825.htm",
    "text": "For monochrome images, the imageColor attribute determines the color the image is drawn in; that is, the foreground color.  The image graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ImageColor or St_ImageColor  See also  imageColor attribute syntax  Drawing objects: image object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 783,
    "title": "imageColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336857.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the imageColor attribute:  imageColor=\"\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  See also  RRGGBB color table  imageColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 784,
    "title": "imageName attribute",
    "url": "58573.htm",
    "text": "The imageName attribute specifies the file name of the graphic image for the object or state. The imageName is optional, but if it is blank or missing, the settings are not used.  The imageSettings element contains the imageName attribute for most graphic objects. The attribute is optional, but if imageName is blank or missing, the other image settings are not used.  The image graphic object element and the symbolIndicator graphic object element contain this attribute.  Tip:  You must use a monochrome image with the symbolIndicator graphic object.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Image or St_Image  See also  imageSettings element  imageName attribute syntax  Drawing objects: image object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 785,
    "title": "imageName attribute syntax",
    "url": "336859.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the imageName attribute:  imageName=\"component\"  where component is the name of an image file that has been imported into the application.  See also  imageName attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 786,
    "title": "inactiveAckedBackColor attribute",
    "url": "59241.htm",
    "text": "The inactiveAckedBackColor attribute specifies the background color of alarms that are no longer in alarm (inactive) and have also been acknowledged. If the inactiveAckedUseAlarmColors attribute is true, this color is not used.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: InactiveAckedBackColor  See also  inactiveAckedBackColor attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 787,
    "title": "inactiveAckedBackColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336861.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the inactiveAckedBackColor attribute:  inactiveAckedBackColor=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  inactiveAckedBackColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 788,
    "title": "inactiveAckedBlink attribute",
    "url": "59225.htm",
    "text": "The inactiveAckedBlink attribute specifies whether alarms that are currently inactive (out of alarm) and have also been acknowledged will blink at run time.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: inactiveAckedBlink  See also  inactiveAckedBlink attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 789,
    "title": "inactiveAckedBlink attribute syntax",
    "url": "336864.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the inactiveAckedBlink attribute:  inactiveAckedBlink=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  inactiveAckedBlink attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 790,
    "title": "inactiveAckedForeColor attribute",
    "url": "59249.htm",
    "text": "The inactiveAckedForeColor attribute specifies the foreground (text) color of alarms that are no longer in alarm (inactive) and have also been acknowledged. If the inactiveAckedUseAlarmColors attribute is true, this color is not used.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: InactiveAckedForeColor  See also  inactiveAckedForeColor attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 791,
    "title": "inactiveAckedForeColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336867.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the inactiveAckedForeColor attribute:  inactiveAckedForeColor=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  inactiveAckedForeColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 792,
    "title": "inactiveAckedUseAlarmColors attribute",
    "url": "59233.htm",
    "text": "The inactiveAckedUseAlarmColors attribute specifies whether the alarm list object will use the colors defined in the Alarm Setup Editor to display alarms that are no longer in alarm (inactive) and have also been acknowledged. If this attribute is false, these alarms will be shown using the colors specified by the inactiveAckedBackColor and inactiveAckedForeColor attributes.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: InactiveAckedUseAlarmColors  See also  inactiveAckedUseAlarmColors attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 793,
    "title": "inactiveAckedUseAlarmColors attribute syntax",
    "url": "336870.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the inactiveAckedUseAlarmColors attribute:  inactiveAckedUseAlarmColors=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  inactiveAckedUseAlarmColors attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 794,
    "title": "inactiveUnackedBackColor attribute",
    "url": "59243.htm",
    "text": "The inactiveUnackedBackColor attribute specifies the background color of alarms that are no longer in alarm (inactive) and have not yet been acknowledged. If the inactiveUnackedUseAlarmColors attribute is true, this color is not used.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: InactiveUnackedBackColor  See also  inactiveUnackedBackColor attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 795,
    "title": "inactiveUnackedBackColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336872.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the inactiveUnackedBackColor attribute:  inactiveUnackedBackColor=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  inactiveUnackedBackColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 796,
    "title": "inactiveUnackedBlink attribute",
    "url": "59227.htm",
    "text": "The inactiveUnackedBlink attribute specifies whether alarms that are currently inactive (out of alarm) and have not yet been acknowledged will blink at run time.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: inactiveUnackedBlink  See also  inactiveUnackedBlink attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 797,
    "title": "inactiveUnackedBlink attribute syntax",
    "url": "336874.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the inactiveUnackedBlink attribute:  inactiveUnackedBlink=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  inactiveUnackedBlink attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 798,
    "title": "inactiveUnackedForeColor attribute",
    "url": "59251.htm",
    "text": "The inactiveUnackedForeColor attribute specifies the foreground (text) color of alarms that are no longer in alarm (inactive) and have not yet been acknowledged. If the inactiveUnackedUseAlarmColors attribute is true, this color is not used.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: InactiveUnackedForeColor  See also  inactiveUnackedForeColor attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 799,
    "title": "inactiveUnackedForeColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336876.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the inactiveUnackedForeColor attribute:  inactiveUnackedForeColor=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  inactiveUnackedForeColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 800,
    "title": "inactiveUnackedUseAlarmColors attribute",
    "url": "59235.htm",
    "text": "The inactiveUnackedUseAlarmColors attribute specifies whether the alarm list object will use the colors defined in the Alarm Setup Editor to show alarms that are no longer in alarm (inactive) but have not been acknowledged. If this attribute is false, these alarms will be displayed using the colors specified by the inactiveUnackedBackColor and inactiveUnackedForeColor attributes.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: InactiveUnackedUseAlarmColors  See also  inactiveUnackedUseAlarmColors attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 801,
    "title": "inactiveUnackedUseAlarmColors attribute syntax",
    "url": "336878.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the inactiveUnackedUseAlarmColors attribute:  inactiveUnackedUseAlarmColors=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  inactiveUnackedUseAlarmColors attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 802,
    "title": "insideOnly attribute",
    "url": "58681.htm",
    "text": "The insideOnly attribute specifies whether the outline of an object will remain constant while the inside fill varies.  All the graphic drawing object elements (except for panel and image) contain this attribute, within the animateFill element, nested within the animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Inside Only (check box)  See also  animations element  animateFill element  animations and animate elements  insideOnly attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 803,
    "title": "insideOnly attribute syntax",
    "url": "336880.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the insideOnly attribute:  insideOnly=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  insideOnly attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 804,
    "title": "isReferenceObject attribute",
    "url": "58630.htm",
    "text": "The isReferenceObject attribute specifies whether the object is a reference object, that is, the object is linked to a base object in a global objects display.  All graphic objects, except ActiveX objects and OLE objects, contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: N/A  See also  isReferenceObject attribute syntax  ActiveX control: activeX object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 805,
    "title": "isReferenceObject attribute syntax",
    "url": "336882.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the isReferenceObject attribute:  isReferenceObject=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  isReferenceObject attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 806,
    "title": "italic attribute",
    "url": "58555.htm",
    "text": "The italic attribute specifies whether the font used for the caption, message, legend, or display text should be italic.  Caption elements, list objects, alarm banner objects, text objects, message display objects, list selector objects, list indicator objects, gauge objects, numeric objects and display objects contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: part of Font, CaptionFont or St_CaptionFont  See also  italic attribute syntax  caption element  Alarm objects: alarmBanner object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 807,
    "title": "italic attribute syntax",
    "url": "336884.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the italic attribute:  italic=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  italic attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 808,
    "title": "keyAssignment attribute",
    "url": "58890.htm",
    "text": "The keyAssignment attribute assigns a function key to the object. Pressing the assigned key on the keyboard will activate the object.  The button graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: KeyAssignment  See also  keyAssignment attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 809,
    "title": "keyAssignment attribute syntax",
    "url": "336886.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the keyAssignment attribute:  keyAssignment=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of function keys F1 through F14, and K1 through K20.  See also  keyAssignment attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 810,
    "title": "keyNavigation attribute",
    "url": "58948.htm",
    "text": "The keyNavigation attribute allows the user to navigate to the object using the keyboard and give the object input focus.  The numericInputEnable, numericInputCursorPoint, stringInputEnable, displayListSelector, controlListSelector, pilotedControlListSelector, alarmList, alarmBanner, alarmStatusList, diagnosticsList, recipePlusSelector, recipePlusTable, and activeX graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: KeyNavigation  See also  keyNavigation attribute syntax  Numeric and string objects: numericInputEnable object  Numeric and string objects: numericInputCursorPoint object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 811,
    "title": "keyNavigation attribute syntax",
    "url": "336888.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the keyNavigation attribute:  keyNavigation=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  keyNavigation attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 812,
    "title": "language attribute",
    "url": "59352.htm",
    "text": "The language attribute specifies the language the application will use when the button is pressed.  The languageSwitchButton graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Language  See also  language attribute syntax  Advanced objects: languageSwitchButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 813,
    "title": "language attribute syntax",
    "url": "336890.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the language attribute:  language=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string representing the RFC1766 name of the language.  See also  language attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 814,
    "title": "latchResetType attribute",
    "url": "58749.htm",
    "text": "The latchResetType specifies how to unlatch the button.  The latchedButton graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: LatchResetType  See also  latchResetType attribute syntax  Push button objects: latchedButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 815,
    "title": "latchResetType attribute syntax",
    "url": "336892.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the latchResetType attribute:  latchResetType=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: nonZeroValue | zeroToNonZeroTransition  nonZeroValue unlatches the button when the Handshake connection is a non-zero value.  zeroToNonZeroTransition unlatches the button when the Handshake connection changes from 0 to a non-zero value.  See also  latchResetType attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 816,
    "title": "left attribute",
    "url": "58646.htm",
    "text": "The left attribute specifies the number of pixels from the left of the display to position the object or group. If the object&#8217;s shape attribute is circle or ellipse, the left position applies to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  All graphic object elements and group elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Left or (GroupLeft)  See also  left attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 817,
    "title": "left attribute syntax",
    "url": "336894.htm",
    "text": "Use th following syntax to specify the left attribute:  left=\"short integer\"  where short integer is a positive or negative number. If you use a negative number, part or all of the object is off screen.  See also  left attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 818,
    "title": "legendColor attribute",
    "url": "59039.htm",
    "text": "The legendColor attribute sets the current legend color.  The gauge graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: LegendColor  See also  legendColor attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 819,
    "title": "legendColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "336896.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the legendColor attribute:  legendColor=\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  See also  RRGGBB color table  legendColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 820,
    "title": "limitValue attribute",
    "url": "58923.htm",
    "text": "If the rampType attribute is rampUp, the limitValue attribute specifies the amount beyond which the button&#8217;s value cannot increase. If the rampType attribute is rampDown, this attribute specifies the amount beyond which the button&#8217;s value cannot decrease.  The rampButton graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: LimitValue  See also  limitValue attribute syntax  Push button objects: rampButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 821,
    "title": "limitValue attribute syntax",
    "url": "336898.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the limitValue attribute:  limitValue=\"double\"  where double is a numeric value from -2147483648 to +2147486367.  See also  limitValue attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 822,
    "title": "line attribute",
    "url": "58858.htm",
    "text": "The line attribute specifies the position of a line drawing object as a pair of X-Y coordinates.  The line graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: N/A  See also  line attribute syntax  Drawing objects: line object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 823,
    "title": "line attribute syntax",
    "url": "336900.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the line attribute:  line=\"linestring\"  where ine string is a pair of X-Y coordinates on a graphic display. The first pair specifies the line's start point and the second specifies the end point.  See also  line attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 824,
    "title": "lineStyle attribute",
    "url": "58577.htm",
    "text": "The lineStyle attribute specifies the line style. If you specify a style other than solid, the lineWidth attribute must be 1 pixel.  The arc, ellipse, freehand, line, polygon, polyline, rectangle, roundedRectangle, wedge, gauge and scale graphic object elements contain this attribute. For the gauge object, this attribute applies to the dial outline and tick marks.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: LineStyle  See also  lineStyle attribute syntax  Drawing objects: wedge object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 825,
    "title": "lineStyle attribute syntax",
    "url": "336902.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the lineStyle attribute:  lineStyle=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: none | solid | dash | dot | dashDot | dashDotDot  See also  lineStyle attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 826,
    "title": "lineWidth attribute",
    "url": "58848.htm",
    "text": "The lineWidth attribute specifies the number of pixels for the width of the object's line.  The arc, ellipse, freehand, line, polygon, polyline, rectangle, roundedRectangle, wedge, gauge and scale graphic object elements contain this attribute. For the gauge object, this attribute applies to the dial outline and tick marks.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: LineWidth  See also  lineWidth attribute syntax  Drawing objects: wedge object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 827,
    "title": "lineWidth attribute syntax",
    "url": "336904.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the lineWidth attribute:  lineWidth=\"positive short integer\"  where positive short integer is a positive number.  See also  lineWidth attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 828,
    "title": "linesPerAlarm attribute",
    "url": "59263.htm",
    "text": "The linesPerAlarm attribute specifies the number of lines each alarm will be given in the alarm list or alarm status list object. Each alarm will take up this many lines even if the alarm text does not fill them.  The alarmList and alarmStatusList graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: LinesPerAlarm  See also  linesPerAlarm attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 829,
    "title": "linesPerAlarm attribute syntax",
    "url": "336906.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the linesPerAlarm attribute:  linesPerAlarm=\"integer\"  where integer is a number from 1 through 10.  See also  linesPerAlarm attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 830,
    "title": "linesPerAudit attribute",
    "url": "314783.htm",
    "text": "The linesPerAudit attribute specifies the number of lines each audit will be given in the audit trail list object. Each audit will take up this many lines even if the audit text does not fill them.  The auditTrailList object and the auditTrailDetail object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View property: The Lines per audit option on the Audit tab of the Audit Trail List Properties dialog box  See also  XML attributes  linesPerAudit attribute syntax  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 831,
    "title": "linesPerAudit attribute syntax",
    "url": "314784.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the linesPerAudit attribute:  linesPerAudit=\"integer\"  where integer is a number from 1 through 10.  See also  linesPerAudit attribute  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 832,
    "title": "linesPerItem attribute",
    "url": "59399.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the number of lines each recipe ingredient will be given in the recipe table or selector object element. Each item will take up this many lines even if the text does not fill them.  The recipePlusTable and recipePlusSelector graphic object elements contain this attribute.  Attribute name: linesPerItem  FactoryTalk View equivalent: LinesPerItem  See also  linesPerItem attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 833,
    "title": "linesPerItem attribute syntax",
    "url": "336908.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the linesPerItem attribute:  linesPerItem=\"integer\"  where integer is a number from 1 through 10.  See also  linesPerItem attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 834,
    "title": "linkAnimations attribute",
    "url": "59415.htm",
    "text": "The linkAnimations attribute specifies whether a reference object linked to a base object in a global objects display will use the animations assigned to the base object, and if the base object's animation is used, whether the expressions assigned to the base object will also be used by the reference object.  Any object whose isReferenceObject attribute is true contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: LinkAnimations  See also  isReferenceObject attribute  linkAnimations attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 835,
    "title": "linkAnimations attribute syntax",
    "url": "336910.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the linkAnimations attribute:  linkAnimations=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of the following: linkWithExpression | linkWithoutExpression | doNotLink  See also  linkAnimations attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 836,
    "title": "linkBaseObject attribute",
    "url": "59416.htm",
    "text": "The linkBaseObject attribute specifies the base object that the reference object is linked to, and its location, using the syntax:  DisplayName.BaseObjectName  Any object whose isReferenceObject attribute is true will contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: LinkBaseObject  See also  isReferenceObject attribute  linkBaseObject attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 837,
    "title": "linkBaseObject attribute syntax",
    "url": "336912.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the linkBaseObject attribute:  linkBaseObject=\"string\"  where string is a character string of up to 287 characters.  See also  linkBaseObject attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 838,
    "title": "linkConnections attribute",
    "url": "59417.htm",
    "text": "The linkConnections attribute specifies whether a reference object linked to a base object in a global objects display will use the connections assigned to the base object.  Any object whose isReferenceObject attribute is true contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: LinkConnections  See also  isReferenceObject attribute  linkConnections attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 839,
    "title": "linkConnections attribute syntax",
    "url": "336915.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the linkConnections attribute:  linkConnections=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  linkConnections attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 840,
    "title": "linkedObject attribute",
    "url": "59059.htm",
    "text": "The linkedObject attribute specifies the object the button press will be sent to if the sendPressTo attribute is set to linkedObject.  All key button graphic object elements, plus the acknowledgeAlarmButton, diagnosticsClearButton, trendPauseButton, trendNextPenButton, alarmStatusModeButton and clearAlarmBannerButton graphic object elements, contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: LinkedObject  See also  linkedObject attribute syntax  Alarm objects: acknowledgeAlarmButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 841,
    "title": "linkedObject attribute syntax",
    "url": "336917.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the linkedObject attribute:  linkedObject=\"component\"  where component is the name of a graphic object element on the display.  See also  linkedObject attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 842,
    "title": "linkSize attribute",
    "url": "59418.htm",
    "text": "The linkSize attribute specifies whether a reference object will use the height and width attributes of its base object.  Any object whose isReferenceObject attribute is true contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: LinkSize  See also  height attribute  width attribute  isReferenceObject attribute  linkSize attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 843,
    "title": "linkSize attribute syntax",
    "url": "336919.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the linkSize attribute:  linkSize=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  linkSize attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 844,
    "title": "macro attribute",
    "url": "59128.htm",
    "text": "The macro attribute specifies the macro to be run when the button is pressed.  The macroButton graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Macro  See also  macro attribute syntax  Advanced objects: macroButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 845,
    "title": "macro attribute syntax",
    "url": "336997.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the macro attribute:  macro=\"component\"  where component is a macro in the application.  See also  macro attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 846,
    "title": "majorTicks attribute",
    "url": "59045.htm",
    "text": "The majorTicks attribute specifies the number of major ticks. You must use at least two major ticks, one for each end point.  The gauge and scale graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: MajorTicks  See also  majorTicks attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 847,
    "title": "majorTicks attribute syntax",
    "url": "336999.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the majorTicks attribute:  majorTicks=\"integer\"  where integer is a number from 2 through 20.  See also  majorTicks attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 848,
    "title": "maskScratchpad attribute",
    "url": "58971.htm",
    "text": "The maskScratchpad attribute specifies whether to show the characters the operator enters in the scratchpad as the # character.  The stringInputEnable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: MaskScratchpad  See also  maskScratchpad attribute syntax  Numeric and string objects: stringInputEnable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 849,
    "title": "maskScratchpad attribute syntax",
    "url": "337001.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the maskScratchpad attribute:  maskScratchpad=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  maskScratchpad attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 850,
    "title": "max attribute (constantExpressionRange)",
    "url": "58703.htm",
    "text": "The max attribute specifies the maximum value to use for controlling the animation of a graphic object.  The constantExpressionRange graphic object element contains this attribute, within an animate element, which is nested within the animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Max on the Animation tabs  See also  animations and animate elements  max attribute syntax  constantExpressionRange element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 851,
    "title": "max attribute syntax",
    "url": "337003.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the max attribute (constantExpressionRange):  max=\"double\"  where double is a numerical value within the range of values for the tag or expression controlling the animation.  See also  max attribute (constantExpressionRange)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 852,
    "title": "maximumTagUpdateRate attribute",
    "url": "58583.htm",
    "text": "The maximumTagUpdateRate attribute specifies the maximum rate at which data servers will send data to the tags used in the display, including tags used in expressions and embedded variables.  The displaySettings element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Maximum Tag Update Rate on the General tab of the Display Settings dialog box  See also  maximumTagUpdateRate attribute syntax  displaySettings element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 853,
    "title": "maximumTagUpdateRate attribute syntax",
    "url": "337005.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the maximumTagUpdateRate attribute:  maximumTagUpdateRate=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of the following number of seconds: 0.05 | 0.1 | 0.25 | 0.5 | 1 | 2 | 5 | 10 | 60 | 120  See also  maximumTagUpdateRate attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 854,
    "title": "maxTag attribute",
    "url": "58709.htm",
    "text": "The maxTag attribute specifies the maximum value to use for controlling the animation of a graphic object.  The readFromTagsExpressionRange graphic object element contains this attribute, within an animate element, which is nested within the animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Max on the Animations tabs  See also  animations and animate elements  maxTag attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 855,
    "title": "maxTag attribute syntax",
    "url": "337007.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the maxTag attribute:  maxTag=\"tag\"  where tag is the name of a tag in the application.  See also  maxTag attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 856,
    "title": "maxValue attribute",
    "url": "58958.htm",
    "text": "The maxValue attribute specifies the maximum value for the graphic object element.  The bar graph, gauge, numericInputCursorPoint and numericInputEnable graphic object elements contain this attribute.  For the barGraph, if the Value connection is at or above this value, the bar graph is full. For the gauge, if the Value connection is at or above this value, the needle is at the right end of the dial.  For the numericInputCursorPoint and numericInputEnable graphic object elements, this attribute specifies the maximum value to send to the Value connection. If the decimalPoint attribute is fixedPosition, the maximum applies to the stripped value, not the displayed value. If you assign a control to the Optional Expression, the maximum also applies to the value sent to the expression.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: MaximumValue  See also  decimalPoint attribute  maxValue attribute syntax  Numeric and string objects: numericInputEnable object  Numeric and string objects: numericInputCursorPoint object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 857,
    "title": "maxValue attribute syntax",
    "url": "337009.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the maxValue attribute:  maxValue=\"double\"  where double is a number from -2147483648 to +2147483647.  See also  maxValue attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 858,
    "title": "messageFile attribute",
    "url": "59112.htm",
    "text": "The messageFile attribute specifies the message file to use with the local message display.  The localMessageDisplay graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: MessageFile  See also  messageFile attribute syntax  Advanced objects: localMessageDisplay object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 859,
    "title": "messageFile attribute syntax",
    "url": "337011.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the messageFile attribute:  messageFile=\"component\"  where component is the name of a message file listed in the Component Browser.  See also  messageFile attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 860,
    "title": "min attribute (constantExpressionRange)",
    "url": "58701.htm",
    "text": "The min attribute specifies the minimum value to use for controlling the animation of a graphic object.  The constantExpressionRange graphic object element contains this attribute, within an animate element, which is nested within the animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Min on the Animations tabs  See also  animations and animate elements  min attribute syntax  constantExpressionRange element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 861,
    "title": "min attribute syntax",
    "url": "337013.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the min attribute (constantExpressionRange):  min=\"double\"  where double is a numerical value within the range of values for the tag or expression controlling the animation.  See also  min attribute (constantExpressionRange)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 862,
    "title": "minorTicks attribute",
    "url": "59047.htm",
    "text": "The minorTicks attribute specifies the number of minor ticks. This number of ticks appears between each major tick.  The gauge and scale graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: MinorTicks  See also  minorTicks attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 863,
    "title": "minorTicks attribute syntax",
    "url": "337015.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the minorTicks attribute:  minorTicks=\"integer\"  where integer is a number from 0 through 20.  See also  minorTicks attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 864,
    "title": "minTag attribute",
    "url": "58707.htm",
    "text": "The minTag attribute specifies the minimum value to use for controlling the animation of a graphic object.  The readFromTagsExpressionRange element contains this attribute, within an animate element, which is nested within the animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Min on the Animation tabs  See also  animations and animate elements  minTag attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 865,
    "title": "minTag attribute syntax",
    "url": "337017.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the minTag attribute:  min=\"tag\"  where tag is the name of a tag in the application.  See also  minTag attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 866,
    "title": "minValue attribute",
    "url": "58956.htm",
    "text": "The minValue attribute specifies the minimum value for the graphic object element.  The bar graph, gauge, numericInputCursorPoint and numericInputEnable graphic object elements contain this attribute.  For the barGraph, if the Value connection is at or below this value, the bar graph is empty. For the gauge, if the Value connection is at or below this value, the needle is at the left end of the dial.  For the numericInputCursorPoint and numericInputEnable graphic object elements, this attribute specifies the minimum value to send to the Value connection. If the decimalPoint attribute is fixedPosition, the minimum applies to the stripped value, not the displayed value. If you assign a control to the Optional Expression, the minimum also applies to the value sent to the expression.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: MinimumValue  See also  decimalPoint attribute  minValue attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 867,
    "title": "minValue attribute syntax",
    "url": "337019.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the minValue attribute:  minValue=\"double\"  where double is a number from -2147483648 to +2147483647.  See also  minValue attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 868,
    "title": "name attribute",
    "url": "58617.htm",
    "text": "The name attribute specifies a name for the element.  Graphic object elements (including activeX object elements), group elements, and connection elements, contain this attribute.  Tip:  Connection name attributes cannot be changed. If you change the name attribute of a connection in an exported xml file and then import the file, you will see an error message in the import status file saying that the specified connection name is not valid for the object.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Name or GroupName  See also  name attribute syntax  ActiveX control: activeX object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 869,
    "title": "name attribute syntax",
    "url": "337021.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the name attribute:  name=\"string\"  where string is a character string up to 30 characters long, for object and group names, or 40 characters long for connection names.You can use letters, numbers, and the underscore character (_) in the object name attribute. The first character must be a letter.  See also  name attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 870,
    "title": "name attribute (global parameters)",
    "url": "58632.htm",
    "text": "The parameter graphic object element within a parameters element contains name attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Name  See also  parameters and parameter elements  name attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 871,
    "title": "name attribute syntax",
    "url": "337023.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the name attribute (global parameters):  name=\"#integer\"  where integer is a positive number from 1 through 2,147,483,648.  See also  name attribute (global parameters)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 872,
    "title": "needleColor attribute",
    "url": "59041.htm",
    "text": "The needleColor attribute sets the needle color for the gauge.  The gauge graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: NeedleColor  See also  needleColor attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 873,
    "title": "needleColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "337025.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the needleColor attribute:  needleColor=\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  See also  RRGGBB color table  needleColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 874,
    "title": "needleWidth attribute",
    "url": "59037.htm",
    "text": "The needleWidth attribute specifies the number of pixels for the width of the gauge&#8217;s needle.  The gauge graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: NeedleWidth  See also  needleWidth attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 875,
    "title": "needleWidth attribute syntax",
    "url": "337027.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the needleWidth attribute:  needleWidth=\"short integer\"  where short integer is a positive number.  See also  needleWidth attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 876,
    "title": "nextStateBasedOn attribute",
    "url": "58782.htm",
    "text": "The nextStateBasedOn attribute specifies how the button changes states.  The maintainedButton and multistateButton graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: NextStateBasedOn  See also  nextStateBasedOn attribute syntax   Push button objects: maintainedButton object  Push button objects: multistateButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 877,
    "title": "nextStateBasedOn attribute syntax",
    "url": "337029.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the nextStateBasedOn attribute:  nextStateBasedOn=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: currentState | valueControl  Current state - the application switches the button from the current state to the other state and writes out the other state value.  Value control - the application reads the value of the Value control, and, if the value matches one of the button&#8217;s two state values, changes the button to the other state and writes out the other state value. Select this option if you want the button to base its state on external changes to the Value control.  If the value does not match one of the button&#8217;s state values, the application changes the button to State 0 and writes out the State 0 value.  When the multistate push button object is in its last configured state, pressing it causes the button to change to State 0 and write out the State 0 value.  See also  nextStateBasedOn attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 878,
    "title": "numberOfDigits attribute",
    "url": "58933.htm",
    "text": "The numberOfDigits attribute specifies the maximum number of digits to display, up to 17 digits. The decimal point and minus sign each count as a digit.  The numericDisplay and numericInputCursorPoint graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: NumberOfDigits  See also  numberOfDigits attribute syntax  Numeric and string objects: numericInputCursorPoint object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 879,
    "title": "numberOfDigits attribute syntax",
    "url": "337031.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the numberOfDigits attribute:  numberOfDigits=\"integer\"  where integer is a number from 1 through 17.  See also  numberOfDigits attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 880,
    "title": "numberOfInputCharacters attribute",
    "url": "58973.htm",
    "text": "The numberOfInputCharacters attribute specifies the maximum number of input characters for the string pop-up scratchpad or keyboard to accept.  The stringInputEnable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: NumberOfInputCharacters  See also  numberOfInputCharacters attribute syntax  Numeric and string objects: stringInputEnable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 881,
    "title": "numberOfInputCharacters attribute syntax",
    "url": "337034.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the numberOfInputCharacters attribute:  numberOfInputCharacters=\"integer\"  where integer is a a number from 0 to 82.  See also  numberOfInputCharacters attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 882,
    "title": "numberOfThresholds attribute",
    "url": "59031.htm",
    "text": "The numberOfThresholds attribute specifies the number of thresholds for the object.  The barGraph and gauge graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: NumberOfThresholds  See also  numberOfThresholds attribute syntax  Graph and gauge objects: barGraph object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 883,
    "title": "numberOfThresholds attribute syntax",
    "url": "337036.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the numberOfThresholds attribute:  numberOfThresholds=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of 0 | 1 | 2. Specify 0 if you don&#8217;t want to use thresholds.  See also  numberOfThresholds attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 884,
    "title": "numericPopup attribute",
    "url": "58952.htm",
    "text": "The numericPopup attribute specifies whether to use the keypad or the scratchpad. To use the scratchpad, the computer running the application must have an external keyboard or keypad.  The numericInputEnable and numericInputCursorPoint graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: NumericPopUp  See also  numericPopup attribute syntax  Numeric and string objects: numericInputEnable object  Numeric and string objects: numericInputCursorPoint object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 885,
    "title": "numericPopup attribute syntax",
    "url": "337038.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the numericPopup attribute:  numericPopup=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of keypad | scratchpad.  See also  numericPopup attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 886,
    "title": "optionalExpression attribute",
    "url": "58621.htm",
    "text": "The optionalExpression attribute specifies the expression to use with the Value connection. At run time, the application calculates the value of the expression and writes the result to the Value control.  The connection element within the connections elements of the numericInputEnable and numericInputCursorPoint graphic object elements contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Value/Optional Expression  See also  connections and connection elements  optionalExpression attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 887,
    "title": "optionalExpression attribute syntax",
    "url": "337040.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the optionalExpression attribute:  optionalExpression=\"string\"  where string is a valid expression as verified by the Expression Editor, up to 999 characters long.  See also  optionalExpression attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 888,
    "title": "parameterFile attribute",
    "url": "58991.htm",
    "text": "The parameterFile attribute specifies the parameter file to run when the button is pressed or when the object is in this state. A parameter file assigns tags to tag placeholders in the display when the display opens.  The gotoButton object element and the states elements of the displayListSelector graphic object element contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ParameterFile  See also  parameterFile attribute syntax  Display navigation objects: gotoButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 889,
    "title": "parameterFile attribute syntax",
    "url": "337043.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the parameterFile attribute:  parameterFile=\"component\"  where component is a parameter file listed in the Component Selector in the application.  See also  parameterFile attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 890,
    "title": "parameterList attribute",
    "url": "58993.htm",
    "text": "The parameterList attribute specifies that the parameter values for the specified display will be supplied by a parameter list when the display opens at run time. A parameter list assigns tags to tag placeholders in the display when the display opens.  The gotoDisplay button and logoutButton graphic object elements and the states elements of the displayListSelector object element contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ParameterList or St_ParameterList  See also  parameterList attribute syntax  Display navigation objects: gotoButton object  Display navigation objects: displayListSelector object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 891,
    "title": "parameterList attribute syntax",
    "url": "337045.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the parameterList attribute:  parameterList=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string.  See also  parameterList attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 892,
    "title": "parameterType attribute",
    "url": "58995.htm",
    "text": "The parameterType attribute specifies whether the Parameter file or Parameter list Radio button is selected. If the parameterType is ParameterFile, the parameter file specified will be passed to the display when it is opened at run time. If the parameterType is parameterList, the list of parameters specified in the parameterList property will be passed to the display when it is opened.  The GotoDisplay button and logoutButton graphic object elements and the states elements of the displayListSelector object element contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ParameterType or St_ParameterType  See also  parameterType attribute syntax  Display navigation objects: displayListSelector object  Display navigation objects: gotoButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 893,
    "title": "parameterType attribute syntax",
    "url": "337047.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the parameterType attribute:  parameterType=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of parameterFile or parameterList.  See also  parameterType attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 894,
    "title": "path attribute",
    "url": "58853.htm",
    "text": "The path attribute specifies the path of a freehand or polyline drawing object as a series of X-Y coordinates.  The freehand and polyline graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: N/A  See also  path attribute syntax  Drawing objects: polyline object  Drawing objects: freehand object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 895,
    "title": "path attribute syntax",
    "url": "337049.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the path attribute:  path=\"path string\"  where path string is a series of X-Y coordinates. The first number of each pair is the X coordinate and the second is the Y coordinate.  See also  path attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 896,
    "title": "patternColor attribute",
    "url": "58521.htm",
    "text": "The patternColor attribute specifies the pattern color for the object or state.  The patternColor attribute must be within an object element or, if the pattern is applied to a state, within a state element that is within a states element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: PatternColor or St_PatternColor  See also  states and state elements  patternColor attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 897,
    "title": "patternColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "337051.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the patternColor attribute:  patternColor=\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  See also  RRGGBB color table  patternColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 898,
    "title": "patternStyle attribute",
    "url": "58529.htm",
    "text": "The patternStyle attribute specifies a pattern for the object or state. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image. If the object&#8217;s backStyle attribute is Transparent, the pattern is not visible.  The patternStyle attribute must be within an object element or, if the pattern is applied to a state, within a state element that is within a states element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: PatternStyle or St_PatternStyle  See also  backStyle attribute  states and state elements  patternStyle attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 899,
    "title": "patternStyle attribute syntax",
    "url": "337174.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the patternStyle attribute:  patternStyle=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: none | dots | checks | small-box | med-box | large-box | vert-line | wide-vert-line | horz-line | wide-horz-line | right-diag | wide-right-diag | left-diag | wide-left-diag | hatch | bricks | ovals | diamonds | scales | waves  See also  patternStyle attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 900,
    "title": "positionX/Y attribute",
    "url": "58508.htm",
    "text": "The positionX/Y attribute specifies the position of a display of whose displayType attribute is onTop, relative to the top left corner of the application window.  The displaySettings element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The Position X and Y text boxes on the General tab of the Display Settings dialog box  See also  displayType attribute  displaySettings element  positionX/Y attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 901,
    "title": "positionX/Y attribute syntax",
    "url": "337177.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the positionX/Y attribute:  positionX or positionY=\"integer\"  where integer is the horizontal (X) or vertical (Y) position of a graphic displays in pixels.  See also  positionX/Y attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 902,
    "title": "printAccumulatedTime attribute",
    "url": "59176.htm",
    "text": "The printAccumulatedTime attribute determines whether the Accumulated Time column of the Alarm Status list will be printed when the Print Alarm Status button is pressed.  The printAlarmStatus graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: PrintAccumulatedTime  See also  printAccumulatedTime attribute syntax  Alarm objects: printAlarmStatus object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 903,
    "title": "printAccumulatedTime attribute syntax",
    "url": "337180.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the printAccumulatedTime attribute:  printAccumulatedTime=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  printAccumulatedTime attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 904,
    "title": "printAcknowledgeTime attribute",
    "url": "59164.htm",
    "text": "The printAcknowledgeTime attribute determines whether the time the alarm was acknowledged will be printed when the Print Alarm History button is pressed.  The printAlarmHistory graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: PrintAcknowledgeTime  See also  printAcknowledgeTime attribute syntax  Alarm objects: printAlarmHistory object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 905,
    "title": "printAcknowledgeTime attribute syntax",
    "url": "337184.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the printAcknowledgeTime attribute:  printAcknowledgeTime=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  printAcknowledgeTime attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 906,
    "title": "printAlarmQuantity attribute",
    "url": "59178.htm",
    "text": "The printAlarmQuantity attribute determines whether the Alarm Quantity column of the alarm status will be printed when the Print Alarm Status button is pressed.  The printAlarmStatus graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: PrintAlarmQuantity  See also  printAlarmQuantity attribute syntax  Alarm objects: printAlarmStatus object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 907,
    "title": "printAlarmQuantity attribute syntax",
    "url": "337187.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the printAlarmQuantity attribute:  printAlarmQuantity=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  printAlarmQuantity attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 908,
    "title": "printAlarmState attribute",
    "url": "59180.htm",
    "text": "The printAlarmState attribute determines whether the Alarm State column of the alarm status will be printed when the Print Alarm Status button is pressed.  The printAlarmStatus graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: PrintAlarmState  See also  printAlarmState attribute syntax  Alarm objects: printAlarmStatus object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 909,
    "title": "printAlarmState attribute syntax",
    "url": "337190.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the printAlarmState attribute:  printAlarmState=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  printAlarmState attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 910,
    "title": "printAlarmTime attribute",
    "url": "59162.htm",
    "text": "The printAlarmTime attribute determines whether or not the Alarm Time column of the alarm history will be printed when the Print Alarm History button is pressed.  The printAlarmHistory graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: PrintAlarmTime  See also  printAlarmTime attribute syntax  Alarm objects: printAlarmHistory object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 911,
    "title": "printAlarmTime attribute syntax",
    "url": "337193.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the printAlarmTime attribute:  printAlarmTime=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  printAlarmTime attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 912,
    "title": "printMessage attribute",
    "url": "59166.htm",
    "text": "The printMessage attribute determines whether the Alarm Message column of the alarm history or Alarm Status list will be printed when the Print Alarm History or Print Alarm Status button is pressed.  The printAlarmHistory and printAlarmStatus graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: PrintMessage  See also  printMessage attribute syntax  Alarm objects: printAlarmHistory object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 913,
    "title": "printMessage attribute syntax",
    "url": "337197.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the printMessage attribute:  printMessage=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  printMessage attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 914,
    "title": "printTriggerLabel attribute",
    "url": "59158.htm",
    "text": "The printTriggerLabel attribute determines whether or not the Trigger Label column of the alarm history or alarm status will be printed when the Print Alarm History or Print Alarm Status button is pressed.  The printAlarmHistory and printAlarmStatus graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: PrintTriggerLabel  See also  printTriggerLabel attribute syntax  Alarm objects: printAlarmStatus object  Alarm objects: printAlarmHistory object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 915,
    "title": "printTriggerLabel attribute syntax",
    "url": "337199.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the printTriggerLabel attribute:  printTriggerLabel=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  printTriggerLabel attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 916,
    "title": "printTriggerValue attribute",
    "url": "59160.htm",
    "text": "The printTriggerValue attribute determines whether the trigger value column of the alarm history or alarm status will be printed when the print alarm history or print alarm status button is pressed.  The printAlarmHistory and printAlarmStatus graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: PrintTriggerValue  See also  printTriggerValue attribute syntax  Alarm objects: printAlarmStatus object  Alarm objects: printAlarmHistory object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 917,
    "title": "printTriggerValue attribute syntax",
    "url": "337201.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the printTriggerValue attribute:  printTriggerValue=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  printTriggerValue attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 918,
    "title": "printType attribute",
    "url": "59182.htm",
    "text": "The printType attribute determines what view will be printed when the operator presses the Print Alarm Status button.  The printAlarmStatus graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: PrintType  See also  printType attribute syntax  Alarm objects: printAlarmStatus object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 919,
    "title": "printType attribute syntax",
    "url": "337203.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the printType attribute:  printType=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: all | active | past  all prints all alarms set up in the Alarm Setup editor, whether active, inactive, or never active  active prints currently active alarms  past prints alarms that are or have been active since the last reset  See also  printType attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 920,
    "title": "queueNewAlarms attribute",
    "url": "59282.htm",
    "text": "The queueNewAlarms attribute determines whether new alarms will replace the displayed alarm in the Alarm Banner as they occur (false), or whether they will be queued and displayed only when the present alarm is cleared (true).  The alarmBanner graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: QueueNewAlarms  See also  queueNewAlarms attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmBanner object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 921,
    "title": "queueNewAlarms attribute syntax",
    "url": "337205.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the queueNewAlarms attribute:  queueNewAlarms=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  queueNewAlarms attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 922,
    "title": "rampType attribute",
    "url": "58796.htm",
    "text": "The rampType attribute specifies whether to increase or decrease the Value control&#8217;s value when the ramp button is pressed.  The rampButton graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: RampType  See also  rampType attribute syntax  rampButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 923,
    "title": "rampType attribute syntax",
    "url": "337207.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the rampType attribute:  rampType=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: up | down  See also  rampType attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 924,
    "title": "rampValue attribute",
    "url": "58794.htm",
    "text": "The rampValue attribute specifies the amount to change the value by.  The rampButton, numericInputEnable and numericInputCursorPoint graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: RampValue  See also  rampValue attribute syntax  rampButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 925,
    "title": "rampValue attribute syntax",
    "url": "337209.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the rampValue attribute:  rampValue=\"integer\"  where integer is a positive (non-zero) number.  For the rampButton, if the rampType attribute is down, the value is decreased by this amount. If the rampType attribute is up, the value is increased by this amount.  For the numericInputEnable and numericInputCursorPoint graphic objects, if the takeFocusOnPress attribute is true, when the user presses a Move Up Key button or the cursor up key, the value is increased by this amount. When the user presses a Move Down Key button or the cursor down key, the value is decreased by this amount. If the ramp value is set to zero, the ramp functionality is disabled.  See also  rampType attribute  takeFocusOnPress attribute  rampValue attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 926,
    "title": "receiveSelectionFrom attribute",
    "url": "316065.htm",
    "text": "The receiveSelectionFrom attribute specifies the audit trail list to receive selection from.  The auditTrailDetail object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The Receive selection from option on the General tab of the Audit Trail Detail Properties dialog box.  See also  XML attributes  receiveSelectionFrom attribute syntax  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  Audit objects: auditTrailDetail object  auditTrailDetail object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 927,
    "title": "receiveSelectionFrom attribute syntax",
    "url": "317489.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the receiveSelectionFrom attribute:  receiveSelectionFrom=\"component\"  where component is a the name of an audit trial list object element on the display.  See also  receiveSelectionFrom attribute  auditTrailDetail object example  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 928,
    "title": "resetAlarmStatus attribute",
    "url": "59154.htm",
    "text": "The resetAlarmStatus attribute specifies whether the alarm status will be reset when the Clear Alarm History button is pressed.  The clearAlarmHistoryButton graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ResetAlarmStatus  See also  Alarm objects: clearAlarmHistoryButton object  resetAlarmStatus attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 929,
    "title": "resetAlarmStatus attribute syntax",
    "url": "337211.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the resetAlarmStatus attribute:  resetAlarmStatus=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  resetAlarmStatus attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 930,
    "title": "rotationMax attribute",
    "url": "58723.htm",
    "text": "The rotationMax attribute specifies an object's angle of rotation, in degrees, when the tag or expression is at its maximum value.  All graphic drawing objects except image and panel have this attribute within the animateRotation element, nested within the animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The At maximum check box and text box in the Rotation (Degrees) area on the Rotation tab of the Animation dialog box  See also  animateRotation element  animations and animate elements  rotationMax attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 931,
    "title": "rotationMax attribute syntax",
    "url": "337213.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the rotationMax attribute:  rotationMax=\"degrees\"  where degrees is a number from 0 to 360.  See also  rotationMax attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 932,
    "title": "rotationMin attribute",
    "url": "58721.htm",
    "text": "The rotationMin attribute specifies an object's angle of rotation, in degrees, when the tag or expression is at its minimum value.  All graphic drawing objects (except image and panel) have this attribute within the animateRotation element, nested within the animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The At minimum check box and text box in the Rotation (Degrees) area on the Rotation tab of the Animation dialog box  See also  animateRotation element  animations and animate elements  rotationMin attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 933,
    "title": "rotationMin attribute syntax",
    "url": "337215.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the rotationMin attribute:  rotationMin=\"degrees\"  where degrees is a number from 0 to 360.  See also  rotationMin attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 934,
    "title": "scaled attribute",
    "url": "58575.htm",
    "text": "The scaled attribute specifies whether to resize the image to fit the object. If the object&#8217;s shape attribute is Circle or Ellipse, the image is resized to fit in the object&#8217;s bounding box, and then clipped to fit the object&#8217;s shape.  The imageSettings element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ImageScaled or St_ImageScaled  See also  scaled attribute syntax  imageSettings element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 935,
    "title": "scaled attribute syntax",
    "url": "337217.htm",
    "text": "Use the following to specify the scaled attribute:  scaled=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  If the scaled attribute is false, the image is first aligned using the Alignment property, then, if larger than the object, the image is clipped to fit the object.  See also  scaled attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 936,
    "title": "securityCode attribute",
    "url": "58510.htm",
    "text": "The securityCode attribute specifies the security code for the graphic display. The default code (*) allows access to the display to all users. Choose a security code from A to P to restrict display access to those users who have that security code specified in their account.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Security Code on the General tab of the Display Settings dialog box  See also  securityCode attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 937,
    "title": "securityCode attribute syntax",
    "url": "337219.htm",
    "text": "Use the syntax to specify the securityCode attribute:  securityCode=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: * | A | B | C | D | E | F | G | H | I | J | K | L | M | N | O | P  See also  securityCode attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 938,
    "title": "selectedAlarmIndicator attribute",
    "url": "59261.htm",
    "text": "The selectedAlarmIndicator attribute specifies whether the selected alarm in the alarm list object will be indicated by a highlight bar or by a cursor.  The alarmList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: SelectedAlarmIndicator  See also  selectedAlarmIndicator attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 939,
    "title": "selectedAlarmIndicator attribute syntax",
    "url": "337221.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the selectedAlarmIndicator attribute:  selectedAlarmIndicator=\"enumeration\"  where numeration is one of : cursor | highlight  See also  selectedAlarmIndicator attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 940,
    "title": "selectionBackColor attribute",
    "url": "59009.htm",
    "text": "The selectionBackColor attribute specifies the color for the highlight bar. The highlight bar indicates the current state or the selected alarm or message at run time.  The alarmList, controlListSelector, diagnosticsList, displayListSelector, listIndicator, pilotedControlListSelector, RecipePlus table, and RecipePlus selector graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: SelectionBackColor  See also  selectionBackColor attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 941,
    "title": "selectionBackColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "337223.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the selectionBackColor attribute:  selectionBackColor=\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  See also  RRGGBB color table  selectionBackColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 942,
    "title": "selectionForeColor attribute",
    "url": "59007.htm",
    "text": "The selectionForeColor attribute specifies the color for the caption on the highlighted state, alarm, or message.  The alarmList, controlListSelector, diagnosticsList, displayListSelector, listIndicator, pilotedControlListSelector, RecipePlus table, and RecipePlus selector graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: SelectionForeColor  See also  selectionForeColor attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 943,
    "title": "selectionForeColor attribute syntax",
    "url": "337225.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the selectionForeColor attribute:  selectionForeColor=\"color\"  where color is the name or the RRGGBB value of the color you want.  See also  RRGGBB color table  selectionForeColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 944,
    "title": "sendPressTo attribute",
    "url": "59061.htm",
    "text": "The sendPressTo attribute specifies whether the button press will be sent to whatever object currently has input focus on the display, or to a specific object linked to the button.  The acknowledgeAlarmButton, acknowledgeAllAlarmsButton, alarmStatusModeButton, clearAlarmBannerButton , diagnosticsClearButton , trendNextPenButton, trendPauseButton, and all the key button graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: SendPressTo  See also  sendPressTo attribute syntax  Alarm objects: acknowledgeAlarmButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 945,
    "title": "sendPressTo attribute syntax",
    "url": "337227.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the sendPressTo attribute:  sendPressTo=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: objectWithFocus | linkedObject  See also  sendPressTo attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 946,
    "title": "setLastStateID attribute",
    "url": "58912.htm",
    "text": "The setLastStateID attribute specifies the number of states for the object. This number does not include the error state, if any. For the display list selector, this attribute specifies the number of displays to list.  The multistateButton, multistateIndicator, listIndicator, symbolIndicator, controlListSelector, pilotedControlListSelector and displayListSelector graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: NumberOfStates  See also  setLastStateID attribute syntax  Push button objects: multistateButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 947,
    "title": "setLastStateID attribute syntax",
    "url": "337230.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the setLastStateID attribute:  setLastStateID=\"integer\"  where integer is the number of states or displays the object will have.  See also  setLastStateID attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 948,
    "title": "shape attribute",
    "url": "58565.htm",
    "text": "The shape attribute specifies the shape of the object. If this attribute is circle or ellipse, the application applies attributes such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Graphic object elements contain the shape attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Shape  See also  shape attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 949,
    "title": "shape attribute syntax",
    "url": "337232.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the shape attribute:  shape=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: rectangle | circle | ellipse  See also  shape attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 950,
    "title": "showDisplayOnLogout attribute",
    "url": "59121.htm",
    "text": "The showDisplayOnLogout attribute specifies whether a display will be opened when the button is pressed.  The logoutButton graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ShowDisplayOnLogout  See also  showDisplayOnLogout attribute syntax  User management objects: logoutButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 951,
    "title": "showDisplayOnLogout attribute syntax",
    "url": "337235.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the showDisplayOnLogout attribute:  showDisplayOnLogout =\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  showDisplayOnLogout attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 952,
    "title": "showLegend attribute",
    "url": "59043.htm",
    "text": "The showLegend attribute specifies whether to include legends on the gauge object.  The gauge graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ShowLegend  See also  showLegend attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 953,
    "title": "showLegend attribute syntax",
    "url": "337237.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the showLegend attribute:  showLegend=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  showLegend attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 954,
    "title": "shutdownMacro attribute",
    "url": "58601.htm",
    "text": "The shutdownMacro attribute specifies a macro to run when the display is closed.  The displaySettings element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Macros: Shutdown on the Behavior tab of the Display Settings dialog box  See also  displaySettings element  shutdownMacro attribute syntax  displaySettings element  "
  },
  {
    "id": 955,
    "title": "shutdownMacro attribute syntax",
    "url": "337239.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the shutdownMacro attribute:  shutdownMacro=\"string\"  where string is the name of a macro in the application.  See also  shutdownMacro attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 956,
    "title": "size attribute",
    "url": "58589.htm",
    "text": "For displays whose displayType attribute is onTop, size attribute specifies whether to set the run-time display size using the mouse or by specifying width and height manually.  The displaySettings element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Size on the General tab of the Display Settings dialog box  See also  displaySettings element  size attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 957,
    "title": "size attribute syntax",
    "url": "337241.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the size attribute:  size=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: useCurrentSize | specifySizeInPixels  If you choose specifySizeInPixels, specify values for the width and height attributes.  See also  width attribute  height attribute  size attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 958,
    "title": "sizeToFit attribute",
    "url": "58812.htm",
    "text": "The sizeToFit attribute specifies whether the text will stretch or shrink to fit if the object is resized at run time.  The graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: SizeToFit  See also  sizeToFit attribute syntax  Drawing objects: text object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 959,
    "title": "sizeToFit attribute syntax",
    "url": "337243.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the the sizeToFit attribute;  sizeToFit=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  If sizeToFit is false, the wordWrap attribute will apply.  See also  wordWrap attribute  sizeToFit attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 960,
    "title": "startAngle attribute",
    "url": "58841.htm",
    "text": "The startAngle attribute specifies the starting angle of an arc or a wedge in radians in relation to its rightmost point.  The arc and wedge graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: N/A  See also  startAngle attribute syntax  Drawing objects: wedge object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 961,
    "title": "startAngle attribute syntax",
    "url": "337245.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the startAngle attribute:  startAngle=\"double\"  where double is the number of radians from the object's rightmost point (0). A positive number moves the angle counter-clockwise and a negative number moves it clockwise.  See also  startAngle attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 962,
    "title": "startupMacro attribute",
    "url": "58599.htm",
    "text": "The startupMacro attribute specifies a macro to run when the display is opened.  The displaySettings element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The Startup text box of Macros area on the Behavior tab of the Display Settings dialog box  See also  displaySettings element  startupMacro attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 963,
    "title": "startupMacro attribute syntax",
    "url": "337247.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the startupMacro attribute:  startupMacro=\"string\"  where string is the name of a macro in the application.  See also  startupMacro attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 964,
    "title": "stateID attribute - 2000 states plus Error",
    "url": "58543.htm",
    "text": "The stateID attribute - 2000 states plus Error identifies the state whose attributes are defined in the state element. The stateId attribute is the first attribute in the state element.  The multistateButton and symbol graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: State  See also  stateID attribute syntax - 2000 states plus Error  Push button objects: multistateButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 965,
    "title": "stateID attribute syntax - 2000 states plus Error",
    "url": "337249.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the stateID attribute - 2000 states plus Error:  stateId=\"state\"  where state is one of: a number from 0 through 1999 | Error  See also  stateID attribute - 2000 states plus Error  "
  },
  {
    "id": 966,
    "title": "stateID attribute - 2 states plus Error",
    "url": "58537.htm",
    "text": "The stateID attribute - 2 states plus Error identifies the state whose attributes are defined in the state element. The stateId attribute is the first attribute in the state element.  The momentaryButton, maintainedButton, and latchedButton graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: State  See also  stateID attribute syntax - 2 states plus Error  Push button objects: maintainedButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 967,
    "title": "stateID attribute syntax - 2 states plus Error",
    "url": "337251.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the stateID attribute - 2 states plus Error:  stateId=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: 0 | 1 | Error  For the momentaryButton, the released state is State 0. The pressed state is State 1.  For the latchedButton, the unlatched state is State 0. The latched state is State 1.  For the maintainedButton, the state toggles between 0 and 1 each time the button is pressed and released.  See also  stateID attribute - 2 states plus Error  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 968,
    "title": "stateID attribute - 256 states, no Error",
    "url": "58541.htm",
    "text": "The stateID attribute - 256 states, no Error identifies the state whose attributes are defined in the state element. The stateId attribute is the first attribute in the state element.  The displayListSelector, listIndicator, controlListSelector and pilotedControlListSelector graphic object elements contain this attribute. These objects do not have an error state.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: State  See also  stateID attribute syntax - 256 states, no Error  Display navigation objects: displayListSelector object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 969,
    "title": "stateID attribute syntax - 256 states, no Error",
    "url": "337253.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the stateID attribute - 256 states, no Error:  stateId=\"integer\"  where integer is a number from 0 through 255.  See also  stateID attribute - 256 states, no Error  "
  },
  {
    "id": 970,
    "title": "stateID attribute - 2 states, no Error",
    "url": "58535.htm",
    "text": "The stateID attribute - 2 states, no Error identifies the state whose attributes are defined in the state element. The stateId attribute is the first attribute in the state element.  The interlockedButton graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: State  See also  stateID attribute syntax - 2 states, no Error  Push button objects: interlockedButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 971,
    "title": "stateID attribute syntax - 2 states, no Error",
    "url": "337256.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the stateID attribute - 2 states, no Error:  stateId=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: 0 | 1  The released state is State 0. The selected state is State 1.  When the button's control tag value equals the value for this button, the button is in state 1. If the control tag is any other value, the button is in state 0.  See also  stateID attribute - 2 states, no Error  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 972,
    "title": "stateID attribute - 255 states plus Error",
    "url": "58539.htm",
    "text": "The stateID attribute - 255 states plus Error identifies the state whose attributes are defined in the state element. The stateId attribute is the first attribute in the state element.  The multistateButton graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: State  See also  stateID attribute syntax- 255 states plus Error  Push button objects: multistateButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 973,
    "title": "stateID attribute syntax- 255 states plus Error",
    "url": "337257.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the stateID attribute - 255 states plus Error:  stateId=\"state\"  where state is one of: a number from 0 through 254 | Error  See also  stateID attribute - 255 states plus Error  "
  },
  {
    "id": 974,
    "title": "strikethrough attribute",
    "url": "58557.htm",
    "text": "The strikethrough attribute specifies whether the font used for the caption, message, legend, or display text should have a strikethrough.  Caption elements, list object, alarmBanner object, text object, message display object, list selector object, list indicator object, gauge object, numeric object and display object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: part of Font, CaptionFont or St_CaptionFont  See also  strikethrough attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmBanner object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 975,
    "title": "strikethrough attribute syntax",
    "url": "337259.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the strikethrough attribute:  strikethrough=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  strikethrough attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 976,
    "title": "stringPopUp attribute",
    "url": "58977.htm",
    "text": "The stringPopUp attribute specifies whether to use the keyboard or the scratchpad. To use the scratchpad, the computer running the application must have an external keyboard or keypad.  The stringInputEnable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: StringPopup  See also  stringPopUp attribute syntax  Numeric and string objects: stringInputEnable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 977,
    "title": "stringPopUp attribute syntax",
    "url": "337261.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the stringPopUp attribute:  stringPopup=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: scratchpad | keyboard  See also  stringPopUp attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 978,
    "title": "sweepStyle attribute",
    "url": "58613.htm",
    "text": "The sweepStyle attribute specifies whether or not to color the area behind the gauge's needle as the value changes. If you specify thresholds for the gauge, you can also assign a fill color to each threshold.  The gauge graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: SweepStyle  See also  sweepStyle attribute sytnax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 979,
    "title": "sweepStyle attribute sytnax",
    "url": "337263.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the sweepStyle attribute:  sweepStyle=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: fill | point  Specify fill if you want to use the fillColor attribute to color the portion of the gauge that has a value less than or equal to the Value control.  See also  fillColor attribute  sweepStyle attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 980,
    "title": "takeFocusOnPress attribute",
    "url": "58798.htm",
    "text": "The takeFocusOnPress attribute specifies whether the object will take input focus when pressed. A press is a mouse click, touch screen press or assigned function key press.  The numericInputEnable and stringInputEnable graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: TakeFocusOnPress  See also  takeFocusOnPress attribute syntax  Numeric and string objects: numericInputEnable object  Numeric and string objects: numericInputCursorPoint object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 981,
    "title": "takeFocusOnPress attribute syntax",
    "url": "337265.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the takeFocusOnPress attribute:  takeFocusOnPress=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  takeFocusOnPress attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 982,
    "title": "thresholdIndex attribute",
    "url": "58605.htm",
    "text": "The thresholdIndex attribute specifies the first or second threshold.  The gauge and barGraph graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: None  See also  thresholdIndex attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 983,
    "title": "thresholdIndex attribute syntax",
    "url": "337267.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the thresholdIndex attribute:  thresholdIndex=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: 1 | 2  See also  thresholdIndex attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 984,
    "title": "thresholdType attribute",
    "url": "58609.htm",
    "text": "The thresholdType attribute specifies whether to use an absolute value, or a percentage of the range between the minimum and maximum values, for the thresholds.  The gauge and barGraph graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent:ThresholdType  See also  thresholdType attribute sytnax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 985,
    "title": "thresholdType attribute sytnax",
    "url": "337269.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the thresholdType attribute:  thresholdType=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: value | percentage.  See also  thresholdType attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 986,
    "title": "thresholdValue attribute",
    "url": "58607.htm",
    "text": "The thresholdValue attribute specifies the value or percentage of the value range for the threshold.  The gauge and barGraph graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Threshold1Value, Threshold2Value  See also  thresholdValue attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 987,
    "title": "thresholdValue attribute syntax",
    "url": "337271.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the thresholdValue attribute:  thresholdValue=\"double\" when thresholdType is value  where double is a number from -2147483648 to +2147483647.  thresholdValue=\"percent\" when thresholdType is percentage  where percentage is a number from 0 through 100.  See also  thresholdType attribute  thresholdValue attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 988,
    "title": "tickDirection attribute",
    "url": "59054.htm",
    "text": "The tickDirection attribute specifies the tick direction. For example, if you select Up the ticks appear on the top side of the scale.  The scale graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: TickDirection  See also  tickDirection attribute syntax  Graph and gauge objects: scale object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 989,
    "title": "tickDirection attribute syntax",
    "url": "337273.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the tickDirection attribute:  tickDirection=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: left | right | up | down  See also  tickDirection attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 990,
    "title": "timeAndDateFormat attribute",
    "url": "59139.htm",
    "text": "The timeAndDateFormat attribute specifies the time and date format to display.  The timeAndDateDisplay graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Format  See also  timeAndDateFormat attribute syntax  Advanced objects: timeAndDateDisplay object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 991,
    "title": "timeAndDateFormat attribute syntax",
    "url": "337275.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the timeAndDateFormat attribute:  timeAndDateFormat=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: shortDate | longDate | shortDateTime | longDateTime | time | timeShortDate | timeLongDate  See also  timeAndDateFormat attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 992,
    "title": "titleActiveAlarmsMode attribute",
    "url": "59287.htm",
    "text": "The titleActiveAlarmsMode attribute sets the title for Active alarms mode.  The alarmStatusList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: TitleActiveAlarmsMode  See also  titleActiveAlarmsMode attribute sytnax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 993,
    "title": "titleActiveAlarmsMode attribute sytnax",
    "url": "337277.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the titleActiveAlarmsMode attribute:  titleActiveAlarmsMode=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string of up to 80 characters.  See also  titleActiveAlarmsMode attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 994,
    "title": "titleAllAlarmsMode attribute",
    "url": "59289.htm",
    "text": "The titleAllAlarmsMode attribute sets the title for All alarms mode.  The alarmStatusList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: TitleAllAlarmsMode  See also  titleAllAlarmsMode attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 995,
    "title": "titleAllAlarmsMode attribute syntax",
    "url": "337279.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the titleAllAlarmsMode attribute:  titleAllAlarmsMode=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string of up to 80 characters.  See also  titleAllAlarmsMode attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 996,
    "title": "titleBar attribute",
    "url": "58579.htm",
    "text": "The titleBar attribute specifies whether a display whose displayType attribute is onTop will include a title bar at run time.  The displaySettings element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The Title Bar checkbox on the General tab of the Display Settings dialog box  See also  displayType attribute  displaySettings element  titleBar attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 997,
    "title": "titleBar attribute syntax",
    "url": "337298.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the titleBar attribute:  titleBar=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  titleBar attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 998,
    "title": "titleBarText attribute",
    "url": "58581.htm",
    "text": "The titleBarText attribute specifies the text that will appear in the title bar at run time for a display whose titleBar attribute is true.  The displaySettings element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The Title Bar text box on the General tab of the Display Settings dialog box  See also  titleBar attribute  displaySettings element  titleBarText attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 999,
    "title": "titleBarText attribute syntax",
    "url": "337300.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the titleBarText attribute:  titleBarText=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string of&nbsp;up to 255 characters.  See also  titleBarText attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1000,
    "title": "titlePastAlarmsMode",
    "url": "59291.htm",
    "text": "The titlePastAlarmsMode sets the title for Past alarms mode.  The alarmStatusList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: TitlePastAlarmsMode  See also  titlePastAlarmsMode syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1001,
    "title": "titlePastAlarmsMode syntax",
    "url": "337302.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the titlePastAlarmsMode:  titlePastAlarmsMode=\"string\"  where string is an alphanumeric character string of up to 80 characters.  See also  titlePastAlarmsMode  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1002,
    "title": "top attribute",
    "url": "58648.htm",
    "text": "The top attribute specifies the number of pixels from the top of the display to position the object or group. If the object&#8217;s shape attribute is circle or ellipse, the left position applies to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  All graphic object elements and group elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Top or (GroupTop)  See also  top attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1003,
    "title": "top attribute syntax",
    "url": "337304.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the top attribute:  top=\"short integer\"  where short integer is a positive or negative number. If you use a negative number, part or all of the object is off screen.  See also  top attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1004,
    "title": "touch attribute",
    "url": "58888.htm",
    "text": "The touch attribute specifies whether the object is touch activated.  The button graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Touch  See also  touch attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1005,
    "title": "touch attribute syntax",
    "url": "337305.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the touch attribute:  touch=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  If you specify true, the operator can press the object using a touch screen or mouse.  If you specify false, the operator must use a keypad or external keyboard to press the object. In this case, use the keyAssignment attribute to assign a function key to the object.  If the object&#8217;s shape attribute is circle or ellipse, the touch area is the object&#8217;s bounding box.  See also  keyAssignment attribute  shape attribute  touch attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1006,
    "title": "triggerType attribute",
    "url": "59018.htm",
    "text": "The triggerType attribute specifies whether the states are triggered based on the value of the object's control or by the position of the least significant bit that is set.  The multistateIndicator, listIndicator and symbol graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: TriggerType  See also  triggerType attribute syntax  Indicator objects: multistateIndicator object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1007,
    "title": "triggerType attribute syntax",
    "url": "337306.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the triggerType attribute:  triggerType=\"enumeration\"  where enumeration is one of: value | LSB  Specify value if you want the object to trigger the state whose value attribute corresponds to the value of the Value control.  Specify LSB if you want the object to trigger the state whose value attribute corresponds to the position of the least significant bit in the object's Value control.  If the TriggerType attribute is set to 1 (LSB), a Value control value of 0 will trigger a state whose St_Value attribute is set to 0.  Tip:  The LSB trigger type attribute does not work with tags that use the Default data type. Default data type is Floating Point, and LSB does not support Floating Point.  See also  triggerType attribute  enumeration  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1008,
    "title": "underline attribute",
    "url": "58553.htm",
    "text": "The underline attribute specifies whether the font used for the caption, message, legend, or display text should be underlined.  Caption elements, list object, alarm banner object, text object, message display object, list selector object, list indicator object, gauge object, numeric object and display object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Part of Font, CaptionFont or St_CaptionFont  See also  underline attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmBanner object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1009,
    "title": "underline attribute syntax",
    "url": "337307.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the underline attribute:  underline=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  underline attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1010,
    "title": "useAlarmColors attribute",
    "url": "59272.htm",
    "text": "The useAlarmColors attribute specifies the foreground and background colors to use for the message text displayed on the alarm banner.  The alarmBanner graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: UseAlarmColors  See also  useAlarmColors attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmBanner object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1011,
    "title": "useAlarmColors attribute syntax",
    "url": "337308.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the useAlarmColors attribute:  useAlarmColors=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  If true, the message text uses the Foreground and Background colors specified in the Alarm Setup editor.  If false, the message text uses the foreColor and backColor attributes for the alarm banner object.  See also  useAlarmColors attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1012,
    "title": "usesDisplayName attribute",
    "url": "58561.htm",
    "text": "The usesDisplayName attribute specifies whether to use the name of the display as the caption for this state. This caption appears in the display list at run time.  The caption elements for each state element within the displayListSelector graphic object element's states element contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: UsesDisplayName  See also  usesDisplayName attribute syntax  Display navigation objects: displayListSelector object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1013,
    "title": "usesDisplayName attribute syntax",
    "url": "337309.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the usesDisplayName attribute:  usesDisplayName=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  usesDisplayName attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1014,
    "title": "UseEchoMessage attribute",
    "url": "302336.htm",
    "text": "The UseEchoMessage attribute specifies whether to use the echo message function.  FactoryTalk View Machine Edition property: The Use echo message check box on the General tab of the Local Message Display Properties dialog box  See also  UseEchoMessage attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1015,
    "title": "UseEchoMessage attribute syntax",
    "url": "337310.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the UseEchoMessage attribute:  UseEchoMessage = \"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  UseEchoMessage attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1016,
    "title": "useVariableLimit attribute",
    "url": "58757.htm",
    "text": "The useVariableLimit attribute specifies whether to use tag or expression values for the object's upper and lower ramp values instead of constant values.  The rampButton graphic object element contains this attribute.  See also  useVariableLimit attribute syntax  Push button objects: rampButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1017,
    "title": "useVariableLimit attribute syntax",
    "url": "337311.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the useVariableLimit attribute:  useVariableLimit =\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  useVariableLimit attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1018,
    "title": "UseVariableMesssageFile attribute",
    "url": "297004.htm",
    "text": "The UseVariableMesssageFile attribute specifies whether to use a variable message file.  FactoryTalk View Machine Edition property: The Use variable message file check box on the General tab of the Local Message Display Properties dialog box  See also  UseVariableMesssageFile attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1019,
    "title": "UseVariableMesssageFile attribute syntax",
    "url": "337312.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the UseVariableMesssageFile attribute:  UseVariableMesssageFile = \"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  UseVariableMesssageFile attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1020,
    "title": "useVariableMinMax attribute",
    "url": "58954.htm",
    "text": "The useVariableMinMax attribute specifies whether to use tag or expression values for the object's minimum and maximum values instead of constant values.  The numericInputEnable and numericInputCursorPoint graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: UseVariableMinMax   See also  useVariableMinMax attribute syntax  Numeric and string objects: numericInputEnable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1021,
    "title": "useVariableMinMax attribute syntax",
    "url": "337313.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the useVariableMinMax attribute:  useVariableMinMax =\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  useVariableMinMax attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1022,
    "title": "useVariableRamp attribute",
    "url": "58764.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to use tag or expression values for the object's ramp value instead of constant values.  The rampButton graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: UseVariableRamp  See also  useVariableRamp attribute syntax  Push button objects: rampButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1023,
    "title": "useVariableRamp attribute syntax",
    "url": "337314.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the useVariableRamp attribute:  useVariableRamp =\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  useVariableRamp attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1024,
    "title": "value attribute color animation",
    "url": "58663.htm",
    "text": "The value attribute color animation specifies a threshold value at which the color changes. Threshold values must be defined in ascending order beginning with 0.  The graphic drawing object elements (except for panel and image) contain this attribute nested within the animateColor element, which is nested within the animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Value (Animations > Color tab)  See also  animateColor element  animations and animate elements  value attribute color animation syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1025,
    "title": "value attribute color animation syntax",
    "url": "337315.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the value attribute color animation:  value=\"integer\"  where integer is a number from 0 through 15.  See also  value attribute color animation  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1026,
    "title": "value attribute (global parameters)",
    "url": "58635.htm",
    "text": "The parameter graphic object element within a parameters element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Value  See also  parameters and parameter elements  value attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1027,
    "title": "value attribute syntax",
    "url": "337476.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the value attribute (global parameters):  value=\"string\"  where string is a Unicode character string that can be up to 1024 characters long. This attribute is optional and can be empty.  See also  value attribute (global parameters)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1028,
    "title": "value attribute (state)",
    "url": "58525.htm",
    "text": "The value attribute specifies the integer value to use for the state. You cannot assign a value to the error state (if the object has an error state).  The state elements within the states element for the maintainedButton, latchedButton, multistateButton, multistateIndicator, symbol, listIndicator, controlListSelector and pilotedCOntrolListSelector graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: St_Value  See also  value attribute syntax  Push button objects: maintainedButton object  Push button objects: multistateButton object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1029,
    "title": "value attribute syntax",
    "url": "337477.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the value attribute (state):  value=\"integer\"  where integer is a number from -2147483648 through 2147483647.  For the momentaryButton object, the value attribute only applies if the buttonAction attribute is set to value.  For the controlListSelector and pilotedControlListSelector objects, if the writeOnEnter attribute is true, the value is written to the data source when the operator presses the Enter key. If the writeOnEnter attribute is false, the value is written to the data source when a new state is selected.  See also  buttonAction attribute  value attribute (state)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1030,
    "title": "verticalChangeMax attribute",
    "url": "58697.htm",
    "text": "The verticalChangeMax attribute specifies the height of the object as a percentage of its base size when the tag or expression evaluates to its maximum value.  All the graphic drawing object elements (except for panel and image) contain this attribute, within the animateHeight element, nested within the animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Vertical change (Percent) At maximum (check box and text box)  See also  animations element  animateHeight element  animations and animate elements  verticalChangeMax attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1031,
    "title": "verticalChangeMax attribute syntax",
    "url": "337478.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the verticalChangeMax attribute:  verticalChangeMax=\"percentage\"  where percentage is a number from 0 through 100.  See also  verticalChangeMax attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1032,
    "title": "verticalChangeMin attribute",
    "url": "58695.htm",
    "text": "The verticalChangeMin attribute specifies the height of the object as a percentage of its base size when the tag or expression evaluates to its minimum value.  All the graphic drawing object elements (except for panel and image) contain this attribute, within the animateHeight element, nested within the animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The At minimum check box and text box in the Vertical change (Percent) area on the Height tab of the Animtion dialog box  See also  animations element  animateHeight element  animations and animate elements  verticalChangeMin attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1033,
    "title": "verticalChangeMin attribute syntax",
    "url": "337479.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the verticalChangeMin attribute:  verticalChangeMin=\"percentage\"  where percentage is a number from 0 through 100.  See also  verticalChangeMin attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1034,
    "title": "verticalMargin attribute",
    "url": "58886.htm",
    "text": "The verticalMargin attribute specifies the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is a touch-insensitive margin inside the object&#8217;s top and bottom edges. If the operator presses the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered. If the shape attribute is circle or ellipse, the touch margin applies to the button&#8217;s bounding box.  All button graphic object elements, as well as the numericInputCursorPoint, numericInputEnable, and stringInputEnable graphic object elements, contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: VerticalMargin  See also  shape attribute  verticalMargin attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1035,
    "title": "verticalMargin attribute syntax",
    "url": "337480.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the verticalMargin attribute:  verticalMargin=\"integer\"  where integer is a positive number.  See also  verticalMargin attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1036,
    "title": "verticalOffsetMax attribute",
    "url": "58731.htm",
    "text": "The verticalOffsetMax attribute specifies the end position, in pixels, of an object in relation to a specified starting point. The value of a related tag changes in relation to the vertical position of the object between its start and end points.  All the graphic drawing object elements (except for panel and image) contain this attribute, within the animateVerticalPosition and animateVerticalSlider elements, nested within the animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The At maximum check box and text box in the Vertical offset (Pixels) area on the Vertical Position tab of the Animation dialog box  See also  animateVerticalPosition element  animateVerticalSlider element  animations and animate elements  verticalOffsetMax attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1037,
    "title": "verticalOffsetMax attribute syntax",
    "url": "337481.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the verticalOffsetMax attribute:  verticalOffsetMax=\"double\"  where double is a number of pixels from -2147483648 to +2147483647.  See also  verticalOffsetMax attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1038,
    "title": "verticalOffsetMin attribute",
    "url": "58727.htm",
    "text": "The verticalOffsetMin attribute specifies the starting position, in pixels, of an object. The value of a related tag changes in relation to the vertical position of the object between its start and end points.  All the graphic drawing object elements (except for panel and image) contain this attribute, within the animateVerticalPosition and animateVerticalSlider elements, nested within the animations element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: The At minimum check box and text box in the Vertical offset (Pixels) area on the Vertical Position tab of the Animation dialog box  See also  animateVerticalPosition element  animateVerticalSlider element  animations and animate elements  verticalOffsetMin attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1039,
    "title": "verticalOffsetMin attribute syntax",
    "url": "337482.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the verticalOffsetMin attribute:  verticalOffsetMin=\"double\"  where double is a number of pixels from -2147483648 to +2147483647.  See also  verticalOffsetMin attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1040,
    "title": "viewOnly attribute",
    "url": "59367.htm",
    "text": "The viewOnly attribute specifies whether the operator can change the data values in the Recipe column of the RecipePlus table object at run time.  The recipePlusTable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ViewOnly  See also  viewOnly attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1041,
    "title": "viewOnly attribute syntax",
    "url": "337483.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the viewOnly attribute:  viewOnly=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  viewOnly attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1042,
    "title": "visible attribute",
    "url": "58650.htm",
    "text": "The visible attribute specifies whether to make the object or group visible.  All graphic objects and groups contain this attribute.  If you are using visibility animation, the visibility animation setting overrides this option.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Visible or (GroupVisible)  See also  visible attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1043,
    "title": "visible attribute syntax",
    "url": "337484.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the visible attribute:  visible=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  visible attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1044,
    "title": "wallpaper attribute",
    "url": "58652.htm",
    "text": "The wallpaper attribute specifies whether the object will be locked into position on the graphic display. Objects that have been converted to wallpaper cannot be selected or edited.  All graphic object elements (except ActiveX objects) contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Edit > Wallpaper > Convert to Wallpaper/Unlock All Wallpaper.  See also  wallpaper attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1045,
    "title": "wallpaper attribute syntax",
    "url": "337485.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the wallpaper attribute:  wallpaper=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  wallpaper attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1046,
    "title": "width attribute",
    "url": "58591.htm",
    "text": "The width attribute specifies the number of pixels for the width of the object or group.  All graphic object elements, group elements and the displaySettings element contain this attribute.  For graphic object elements, the width includes the object&#8217;s borders. If the object&#8217;s shape attribute is Circle or Ellipse, the width applies to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  The displaySettings element's width attribute sets the run-time width of a display whose size attribute is specifySizeInPixels.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: Width or (GroupWidth)  See also  displaySettings element  size attribute  width attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1047,
    "title": "width attribute syntax",
    "url": "337486.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the width attribute:  width=\"integer\"  where integer is a positive number of pixels from 0 through 32000.  See also  width attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1048,
    "title": "widthAccumulatedTime attribute",
    "url": "59297.htm",
    "text": "The widthAccumulatedTime attribute specifies the width, in pixels, of the Accumulated Time column in the Alarm Status list.  The alarmStatusList graphic object element contains this element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ColumnWidthAccumulatedTime  See also  widthAccumulatedTime attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1049,
    "title": "widthAccumulatedTime attribute syntax",
    "url": "337487.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the widthAccumulatedTime attribute:  widthAccumulatedTime=\"integer\"  where integer is a value from 1 through 32,767.  See also  widthAccumulatedTime attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1050,
    "title": "widthAlarmQuantity attribute",
    "url": "59299.htm",
    "text": "The widthAlarmQuantity attribute specifies the width, in pixels, of the Alarm Quantity column in the Alarm Status list.   The alarmStatusList graphic object element contains this element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ColumnWidthAlarmQuantity  See also  widthAlarmQuantity attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1051,
    "title": "widthAlarmQuantity attribute syntax",
    "url": "337488.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the widthAlarmQuantity attribute:  widthAlarmQuantity=\"integer\"  where integer is a value from 1 through 32,767.  See also  widthAlarmQuantity attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1052,
    "title": "widthAlarmState attribute",
    "url": "59307.htm",
    "text": "The widthAlarmState attribute specifies the width, in pixels, of the Alarm State column in the Alarm Status list.   The alarmStatusList graphic object element contains this element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ColumnWidthAlarmState  See also  widthAlarmState attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1053,
    "title": "widthAlarmState attribute syntax",
    "url": "337489.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the widthAlarmState attribute:  widthAlarmState=\"integer\"  where integer is a value from 1 through 32,767.  See also  widthAlarmState attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1054,
    "title": "widthCompareStatus attribute",
    "url": "59375.htm",
    "text": "The widthCompareStatus attribute specifies the width, in pixels, of the Compare status value column in the RecipePlus table object.  The recipePlusTable graphic object element contains this attribute.  Attribute name: widthCompareStatus  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ColumnWidthCompareStatus  See also  widthCompareStatus attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1055,
    "title": "widthCompareStatus attribute syntax",
    "url": "337490.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the widthCompareStatus attribute:  widthCompareStatus=\"integer\"  where integer is a value from 0 through 1000.  See also  widthCompareStatus attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1056,
    "title": "widthCurrentValue attribute",
    "url": "59371.htm",
    "text": "The widthCurrentValue attribute specifies the width, in pixels, of the Current value column in the RecipePlus table object.  The recipePlusTable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ColumnWidthCurrentValue  See also  widthCurrentValue attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1057,
    "title": "widthCurrentValue attribute syntax",
    "url": "337491.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the widthCurrentValue attribute:  widthCurrentValue=\"integer\"  where integer is a value from 0 through 1000.  See also  widthCurrentValue attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1058,
    "title": "widthIngredientName attribute",
    "url": "59369.htm",
    "text": "The widthIngredientName attribute specifies the width, in pixels, of the Ingredient name column in the RecipePlus table object.  The recipePlusTable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ColumnWidthIngredientName  See also  widthIngredientName attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1059,
    "title": "widthIngredientName attribute syntax",
    "url": "337492.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the widthIngredientName attribute:  widthIngredientName=\"integer\"  where integer is a value from 0 through 1000.  See also  widthIngredientName attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1060,
    "title": "widthMessage attribute",
    "url": "59301.htm",
    "text": "The widthMessage attribute specifies the width, in pixels, of the Message column in the Alarm Status list.  The alarmStatusList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ColumnWidthMessage  See also  widthMessage attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1061,
    "title": "widthMessage attribute syntax",
    "url": "337493.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the widthMessage attribute:  widthMessage=\"integer\"  where integer is a value from 1 through 32,767.  See also  widthMessage attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1062,
    "title": "widthRecipe attribute",
    "url": "59402.htm",
    "text": "The widthRecipe attribute specifies the width, in pixels, of the Recipe column in the RecipePlus selector object.  The recipePlusSelector graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ColumnWidthRecipe  See also  widthRecipe attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusSelector object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1063,
    "title": "widthRecipe attribute syntax",
    "url": "337494.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the widthRecipe attribute:  widthRecipe=\"integer\"  where integer is a value from 0 through 1000.  See also  widthRecipe attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1064,
    "title": "widthRecipeValue attribute",
    "url": "59373.htm",
    "text": "The widthRecipeValue attribute specifies the width, in pixels, of the Recipe value column in the RecipePlus table object.  The recipePlusTable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ColumnWidthRecipeValue  See also  widthRecipeValue attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1065,
    "title": "widthRecipeValue attribute syntax",
    "url": "337495.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the widthRecipeValue attribute:  widthRecipeValue=\"integer\"  where integer is a value from 0 through 1000.  See also  widthRecipeValue attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1066,
    "title": "widthTagName attribute",
    "url": "59377.htm",
    "text": "The widthTagName specifies the width, in pixels, of the Tag name column in the RecipePlus table object.The recipePlusTable graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ColumnWidthTagName  See also  widthTagName attribute syntax  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1067,
    "title": "widthTagName attribute syntax",
    "url": "337496.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the widthTagName attribute:  widthTagName=\"integer\"  where integer is a value from 0 through 1000.  See also  widthTagName attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1068,
    "title": "widthTriggerLabel attribute",
    "url": "59303.htm",
    "text": "The widthTriggerLabel attribute specifies the width, in pixels, of the Trigger label column in the alarm status list.  The alarmStatusList graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ColumnWidthTriggerLabel  See also  widthTriggerLabel attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1069,
    "title": "widthTriggerLabel attribute syntax",
    "url": "337497.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the widthTriggerLabel attribute;  widthTriggerLabel=\"integer\"  where integer is a value from 1 through 32,767.  See also  widthTriggerLabel attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1070,
    "title": "widthTriggerLabel attribute (print)",
    "url": "59168.htm",
    "text": "The widthTriggerLabel attribute specifies the width, in characters, of the Trigger label column that will be printed when the button is pressed.  The printAlarmHistory and printAlarmStatus button graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: WidthTriggerLabel  See also  widthTriggerLabel attribute syntax  Alarm objects: printAlarmHistory object  Alarm objects: printAlarmStatus object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1071,
    "title": "widthTriggerLabel attribute syntax",
    "url": "337498.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the widthTriggerLabel attribute (print);  widthTriggerLabel=\"integer\"  where integer is a number from 1 through 255.  See also  widthTriggerLabel attribute (print)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1072,
    "title": "widthTriggerValue attribute",
    "url": "59305.htm",
    "text": "The widthTriggerValue attribute specifies the width, in pixels, of the Trigger Value column in the Alarm Status list.  The alarmStatusList object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ColumnWidthTriggerValue  See also  widthTriggerValue attribute syntax  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1073,
    "title": "widthTriggerValue attribute syntax",
    "url": "337499.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the widthTriggerValue attribute:  widthTriggerValue=\"integer\"  where integer is a value from 1 through 32,767.  See also  widthTriggerValue attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1074,
    "title": "widthTriggerValue attribute (print)",
    "url": "59170.htm",
    "text": "The widthTriggerValue attribute specifies the width, in characters, of the Trigger value column that will be printed when the button is pressed.  The printAlarmHistory and printAlarmStatus button graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: widthTriggerValue  See also  Graphic display XML file elements and attributes  Graphic display XML file structure  Graphic display XML schema  widthTriggerValue attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1075,
    "title": "widthTriggerValue attribute syntax",
    "url": "337500.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the widthTriggerValue attribute (print):  widthTriggerValue=\"integer\"  where integer is a number from 1 through 255.  See also  widthTriggerValue attribute (print)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1076,
    "title": "widthUnit attribute",
    "url": "59404.htm",
    "text": "The widthUnit attribute specifies the width, in pixels, of the Unit column in the RecipePlus selector object.  The recipePlusSelector graphic object element contains this element.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: ColumnWidthUnit  See also  Graphic display XML file elements and attributes  Graphic display XML file structure  Graphic display XML schema  widthUnit attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1077,
    "title": "widthUnit attribute syntax",
    "url": "337501.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the widthUnit attribute:  widthUnit=\"integer\"  where integer is a value from 0 through 1000.  See also  widthUnit attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1078,
    "title": "wordWrap attribute",
    "url": "58569.htm",
    "text": "The wordWrap attribute specifies whether the caption or message continues onto the next line at the beginning of a new word.  Caption elements, alarm banner object, text object, RecipePlus table and selector object, message string object, and time and date display object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: WordWrap, CaptionWordWrap or St_CaptionWordWrap  See also  Graphic display XML file elements and attributes  Graphic display XML file structure  Graphic display XML schema  wordWrap attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1079,
    "title": "wordWrap attribute syntax",
    "url": "337502.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the wordWrap attribute:  wordWrap=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  If wordWrap is false, the caption or message continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum caption length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  See also  wordWrap attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1080,
    "title": "wrapAround attribute",
    "url": "59011.htm",
    "text": "The wrapAround attribute sets whether the list will wrap from the end of the list to the beginning when scrolling down and from the beginning of the list to the end when scrolling up.  The alarmList, alarmStatusList, controlListSelector, diagnosticsList, displayListSelector, pilotedControlListSelector, RecipePlus table and RecipePlus selector graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: WrapAround  See also  Graphic display XML file elements and attributes  Graphic display XML file structure  Graphic display XML schema  wrapAround attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1081,
    "title": "wrapAround attribute syntax",
    "url": "337504.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the wrapAround attribute:  wrapAround=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  See also  wrapAround attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1082,
    "title": "writeOnClose attribute",
    "url": "58772.htm",
    "text": "The writeOnClose attribute specifies whether a value will be written out when the button is pressed.  The closeButton graphic object element contains this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: WriteOnClose  See also  Graphic display XML file elements and attributes  Graphic display XML file structure  Graphic display XML schema  writeOnClose attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1083,
    "title": "writeOnClose attribute syntax",
    "url": "337505.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the writeOnClose attribute:  writeOnClose=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  If you specify true, the value must be specified in the closeValue attribute.  See also  closeValue attribute  writeOnClose attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1084,
    "title": "writeOnEnter attribute",
    "url": "58741.htm",
    "text": "The writeOnEnter attribute specifies whether to write to the data source when the operator presses an Enter key button object or the Enter key on an external keyboard/keypad while the control list selector or piloted control list selector is the selected object on the display.  The controlListSelector and pilotedControlListSelector graphic object elements contain this attribute.  FactoryTalk View equivalent: WriteOnEnter  See also  Graphic display XML file elements and attributes  Graphic display XML file structure  Graphic display XML schema  writeOnEnter attribute syntax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1085,
    "title": "writeOnEnter attribute syntax",
    "url": "337507.htm",
    "text": "Use the following syntax to specify the writeOnEnter attribute:  writeOnEnter=\"boolean\"  where boolean is a Boolean value: true | false  If you specify false, the application writes the state value to the data source as soon as a new state is highlighted.  See also  writeOnEnter attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1086,
    "title": "Graphic object elements",
    "url": "58803.htm",
    "text": "This section introduces the graphic object elements in FactoryTalk View Studio.  See also  XML elements and attributes  Drawing objects: text object  Push button objects: momentaryButton object  Numeric and string objects: numericDisplay object  Display navigation objects: gotoButton object  ",
    "keywords": {
      "element": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1087,
    "title": "Drawing objects: text object",
    "url": "58806.htm",
    "text": "The text graphic object element corresponds to the text graphic object in FactoryTalk View Studio.  A text element must always be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  text object attributes and elements  text object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1088,
    "title": "text object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337694.htm",
    "text": "The text object has the following attributes and elements:  text object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject\"  backStyl  backColor  foreColor  wordWrap  sizeToFit  alignment  fontFamily  fontSize  charHeight  charWidth  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  animations element:  animateVisibility  animateRotation  animateWidth  animateHeight  animateHorizontalPosition  animateVerticalPosition  animateHorizontalSlider  animateVerticalSlider  animateFill  animateColor  See also  Drawing objects: text object  text object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1089,
    "title": "text object example",
    "url": "337695.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the text object:  Example 1  <text name=\"Text1\" height=\"21\" width=\"243\" left=\"237\" top=\"288\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backStyle=\"transparent\" backColor=\"#F0F000\" foreColor=\"#00C000\" wordWrap=\"true\" sizeToFit=\"true\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" fontFamily=\"Gill Sans MT Ext Condensed Bold\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"true\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"This is a text object.\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TagTest2 > 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"invisible\" />  <animateRotation expression=\"TagTest2 \" rotationMin=\"0\" rotationMax=\"358\" centerOfRotation=\"(90,40)\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateRotation>  <animateWidth expression=\"TagTest2 \" horizontalChangeMin=\"10\" horizontalChangeMax=\"100\" anchor=\"left\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateWidth>  <animateHeight expression=\"TagTest2 \" verticalChangeMin=\"0\" verticalChangeMax=\"100\" anchor=\"top\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateHeight>  <animateHorizontalPosition expression=\"TagTest2 \" horizontalOffsetMin=\"0\" horizontalOffsetMax=\"-250\">  <constantExpressionRange min=\"0\" max=\"100\" />  </animateHorizontalPosition>  <animateVerticalPosition expression=\"TagTest2 \" verticalOffsetMin=\"0\" verticalOffsetMax=\"240\">  <constantExpressionRange min=\"0\" max=\"200\" />  </animateVerticalPosition>  <animateHorizontalSlider expression=\"TagS2\" horizontalOffsetMin=\"10\" horizontalOffsetMax=\"100\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateHorizontalSlider>  <animateVerticalSlider expression=\"TestS2\" verticalOffsetMin=\"0\" verticalOffsetMax=\"250\">  <constantExpressionRange min=\"0\" max=\"100\" />  </animateVerticalSlider>  <animateFill expression=\"TagTest2 \" fillMin=\"0\" fillMax=\"100\" fillDirection=\"down\" insideOnly=\"true\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateFill>  <animateColor expression=\"If TagTest2< 20 Then 1 Else 2\" blinkRate=\"2\">  <color value=\"0\" foreBehavior=\"blink\" foreColor1=\"yellow\" foreColor2=\"#40FF10\" backBehavior=\"blink\" backColor1=\"red\" backColor2=\"#8C0000\" />  <color value=\"1\" foreBehavior=\"blink\" foreColor1=\"black\" foreColor2=\"white\" backBehavior=\"blink\" backColor1=\"lime\" backColor2=\"#004000\" />  </animateColor>  </animations>  </text>  Example 2  <text name=\"Text1\" height=\"44\" width=\"134\" left=\"308\" top=\"91\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" backStyle=\"transparent\" backColor=\"#F0F000\" foreColor=\"#00C000\" wordWrap=\"true\" sizeToFit=\"true\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" charHeight=\"44\" charWidth=\"7\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"This is another text object\"/>  See also  Drawing objects: text object  text object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1090,
    "title": "Drawing objects: image object",
    "url": "58819.htm",
    "text": "The XML image object element creates or modifies an image graphic object on a graphic display.  An image element must always be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  image object attributes and elements  image object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1091,
    "title": "image object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337696.htm",
    "text": "The image object has the following attributes and the elements:  image object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  imageBackStyle  imageBackColor  imageColor  imageName  imageBlink  animations element:  animateVisibility  See also  Drawing objects: image object  image object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1092,
    "title": "image object example",
    "url": "337697.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the image object:  <image name=\"Image2\" height=\"44\" width=\"44\" left=\"580\" top=\"22\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" imageBackStyle=\"solid\" imageBackColor=\"silver\" imageColor=\"red\" imageBlink=\"true\" description=\"\" imageName=\"Home\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TestTag2 > 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"invisible\" />  </animations>  </image>  See also  Drawing objects: image object  image object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1093,
    "title": "Drawing objects: panel object",
    "url": "58830.htm",
    "text": "The panel object element creates or modifies a panel graphic object on a graphic display.  A panel element must always be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  panel object attributes and elements  panel object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1094,
    "title": "panel object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337699.htm",
    "text": "The panel object has the following attributes and elements:  panel object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backStyle  patternStyle  backColor  patternColor  blink  description  borderColor  borderStyle  borderWidth  borderUsesBackColor  animations element:  animateVisibility  See also  Drawing objects: panel object  panel object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1095,
    "title": "panel object example",
    "url": "337698.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the panel object:  <panel name=\"Panel1\" height=\"63\" width=\"156\" left=\"27\" top=\"101\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backStyle=\"solid\" patternStyle=\"none\" backColor=\"#784000\" patternColor=\"white\" blink=\"false\" description=\"\" borderColor=\"#FFE0C0\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderWidth=\"2\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TestTag2 > 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"invisible\" />  </animations>  </panel>  See also  Drawing objects: panel object  panel object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1096,
    "title": "Drawing objects: arc object",
    "url": "58839.htm",
    "text": "The arc object element creates or modifies an arc graphic object on a graphic display.  The arc object element must always be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  arc object attributes and elements  arc object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1097,
    "title": "arc object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337701.htm",
    "text": "The arc object has the following attributes and elements:  arc object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backStyle  backColor  patternStyle  patternColor  foreColor  startAngle  endAngle  additional element:  transform  animations element:  animateRotation  See also  Drawing objects: arc object  arc object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1098,
    "title": "arc object example",
    "url": "337700.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the arc object:  <arc name=\"Arc2\" height=\"2\" width=\"2\" left=\"138\" top=\"222\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backStyle=\"solid\" backColor=\"aquamarine\" foreColor=\"#00C000\" lineStyle=\"solid\" lineWidth=\"1\" patternStyle=\"none\" patternColor=\"#00C000\" startAngle=\"3.14159265358979\" endAngle=\"3.14159265358979\">  <transform scaleWidth=\"-0.5\" scaleHeight=\"-0.5\" shearWidth=\"0\" shearHeight=\"0\" offsetWidth=\"138.5\" offsetHeight=\"222.5\" />  <animations>  <animateRotation expression=\"TST2\" rotationMin=\"0\" rotationMax=\"358\" centerOfRotation=\"(90,40)\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateRotation>  </animations>  </arc>  See also  Drawing objects: arc object  arc object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1099,
    "title": "Drawing objects: ellipse object",
    "url": "58846.htm",
    "text": "The ellipse object element creates or modifies an ellipse graphic object on a graphic display.  The ellipse object element must always be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  ellipse object attributes and elements  ellipse object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1100,
    "title": "ellipse object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337702.htm",
    "text": "The ellipse object has the following attributes and elements:  ellipse object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backStyle  backColor  foreColor  lineStyle  lineWidth  patternStyle  patternColor  animations element:  animateVisibility  animateColor  animateFill  animateHorizontalPosition  animateVerticalPosition  animateWidth  animateHeight  animateRotation  animateHorizontalSlider  animateVerticalSlider  additional elements  transform  See also  Drawing objects: ellipse object  ellipse object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1101,
    "title": "ellipse object example",
    "url": "337703.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the ellipse object:  <ellipse name=\"Ellipse1\" height=\"69\" width=\"92\" left=\"363\" top=\"190\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backStyle=\"solid\" backColor=\"#F0F000\" foreColor=\"#00C000\" lineStyle=\"solid\" lineWidth=\"4\" patternStyle=\"diamonds\" patternColor=\"#00C000\">  <transform scaleWidth=\"-43.5\" scaleHeight=\"32\" shearWidth=\"0\" shearHeight=\"0\" offsetWidth=\"408.5\" offsetHeight=\"224\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TestTag2 > 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"invisible\" />  <animateColor expression=\"TestTag2\" blinkRate=\"2\">  <color value=\"0\" foreBehavior=\"blink\" foreColor1=\"black\" foreColor2=\"#FFFF80\" backBehavior=\"blink\" backColor1=\"red\" backColor2=\"#8C008C\" />  <color value=\"1\" foreBehavior=\"blink\" foreColor1=\"magenta\" foreColor2=\"#8C8C00\" backBehavior=\"blink\" backColor1=\"lime\" backColor2=\"#C00000\" />  </animateColor>  <animateFill expression=\"TestTag2\" fillMin=\"0\" fillMax=\"100\" fillDirection=\"right\" insideOnly=\"true\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateFill>  <animateHorizontalPosition expression=\"TestTag2\" horizontalOffsetMin=\"0\" horizontalOffsetMax=\"-250\">  <constantExpressionRange min=\"0\" max=\"100\" />  </animateHorizontalPosition>  <animateVerticalPosition expression=\"TestTag2\" verticalOffsetMin=\"0\" verticalOffsetMax=\"240\">  <constantExpressionRange min=\"0\" max=\"200\" />  </animateVerticalPosition>  <animateWidth expression=\"TestTag2\" horizontalChangeMin=\"10\" horizontalChangeMax=\"100\" anchor=\"left\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateWidth>  <animateHeight expression=\"TestTag2\" verticalChangeMin=\"0\" verticalChangeMax=\"100\" anchor=\"top\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateHeight>  <animateRotation expression=\"TestTag2\" rotationMin=\"0\" rotationMax=\"358\" centerOfRotation=\"(90,40)\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateRotation>  <animateHorizontalSlider expression=\"TagS2\" horizontalOffsetMin=\"10\" horizontalOffsetMax=\"100\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateHorizontalSlider>  <animateVerticalSlider expression=\"TestS2\" verticalOffsetMin=\"0\" verticalOffsetMax=\"250\">  <constantExpressionRange min=\"0\" max=\"100\" />  </animateVerticalSlider>  </animations>  </ellipse>  See also  Drawing objects: ellipse object  ellipse object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1102,
    "title": "Drawing objects: freehand object",
    "url": "58851.htm",
    "text": "The freehand object element creates or modifies a freehand drawing object on a graphic display.  The freehand element must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  freehand object attributes and elements  freehand object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1103,
    "title": "freehand object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337704.htm",
    "text": "The freehand object has the following attributes and elements:  freehand object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backStyle  backColor  foreColor  lineStyle  lineWidth  patternStyle  patternColor  path  animations element:  animateVisibility  animateRotation  animateWidth  animateHeight  animateHorizontalPosition  animateVerticalPosition  animateHorizontalSlider  animateVerticalSlider  animateFill  animateColor  See also  Drawing objects: freehand object  freehand object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1104,
    "title": "freehand object example",
    "url": "337705.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the freehand object:  <freehand name=\"Freehand1\" height=\"82\" width=\"66\" left=\"445\" top=\"121\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backStyle=\"solid\" backColor=\"blueviolet\" foreColor=\"#00C000\" lineStyle=\"solid\" lineWidth=\"4\" patternStyle=\"none\" patternColor=\"#00C000\" path=\"458 159 458 163 458 163 458 164 459 166 460 167 460 168 460 169 460 170 459 170 459 171 458 172 458 173 457 174 457 175 457 177 458 178 458 179 458 180 459 181 459 182 459 183 459 184 459 185 459 186 459 187 459 188 460 189 460 190 461 192 462 193 463 194 464 195 465 195 467 195 468 196 469 196 470 196 471 197 472 197 474 198 475 198 476 199 479 199 480 199 482 199 485 200 487 200 489 201 490 201 491 201 492 201 493 201 493 200 494 199 495 198 496 197 497 194 498 193 499 192 499 191 500 190 501 189 501 188 502 187 503 186 503 185 503 184 503 186 503 187 504 188 504 189 505 189 507 189 508 188 509 187 509 186 509 185 509 184 509 182 507 179 506 179 505 177 503 175 502 173 501 171 500 169 500 168 499 166 499 164 499 163 499 162 499 161 499 160 499 159 499 158 498 158 496 158 495 158 494 158 493 158 492 158 491 158 490 158 489 158 488 158 487 158 486 158 486 159 485 159 485 160 484 160 484 161 483 162 482 163 482 164 482 165 482 166 482 168 482 171 482 173 484 175 485 176 485 177 485 178 484 179 483 179 483 180 482 180 482 178 482 177 482 176 482 174 482 173 481 170 481 169 480 168 479 166 478 166 478 165 477 164 476 163 475 163 474 163 473 163 472 163 471 162 470 162 469 162 468 162 467 162 467 161 467 160 466 159 466 158 466 157 466 156 467 155 467 154 468 154 468 153 469 152 469 151 470 150 470 149 470 148 470 147 470 146 471 145 471 144 471 143 471 142 471 141 471 140 470 139 469 137 467 136 466 135 464 134 463 133 460 131 459 131 458 131 457 129 455 129 455 128 454 128 453 127 452 127 452 126 451 126 451 125 451 124 451 123 450 123 449 123 448 124 448 125 447 126 447 127 447 129 447 131 447 132 447 134 447 135 449 136 449 138 449 139 450 140 450 141 450 142 450 143 450 144 450 145 450 147 450 149 450 151 450 152 450 155 450 156 450 157 451 158 451 159 452 160 453 161 454 161 455 162 456 162 456 163 456 164 456 165 455 166 455 167 455 168 455 168\">  <animations>  <animateColor expression=\"If TTS2 < 20 Then 1 Else 0\" blinkRate=\"2\">  <color value=\"0\" foreBehavior=\"blink\" foreColor1=\"yellow\" foreColor2=\"#40FF10\" backBehavior=\"blink\" backColor1=\"red\" backColor2=\"#8C0000\" />  <color value=\"1\" foreBehavior=\"blink\" foreColor1=\"black\" foreColor2=\"white\" backBehavior=\"blink\" backColor1=\"lime\" backColor2=\"#004000\" />  </animateColor>  </animations>  </freehand>  See also  Drawing objects: freehand object  freehand object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1105,
    "title": "Drawing objects: line object",
    "url": "58856.htm",
    "text": "The line object element creates or modifies a line drawing object on a graphic display.  The line element must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  line object attributes and elements  line object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1106,
    "title": "line object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337706.htm",
    "text": "The line object has the following attributes and elements:  line object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backStyle  backColor  foreColor  lineStyle  lineWidth  line  animations element:  animateVisibility  animateRotation  animateWidth  animateHeight  animateHorizontalPosition  animateVerticalPosition  animateHorizontalSlider  animateVerticalSlider  animateFill  animateColor  See also  Drawing objects: line object  line object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1107,
    "title": "line object example",
    "url": "337707.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the line object:  <line name=\"Line1\" height=\"12\" width=\"178\" left=\"21\" top=\"318\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" line=\"26 324 193 323\" backStyle=\"solid\" lineStyle=\"solid\" lineWidth=\"11\" backColor=\"palevioletred\" foreColor=\"#00C000\">  <animations>  <animateRotation expression=\"system\\Second\" rotationMin=\"0\" rotationMax=\"358\" centerOfRotation=\"(90,40)\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateRotation>  </animations>  </line>  See also  Drawing objects: line object  line object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1108,
    "title": "Drawing objects: polygon object",
    "url": "58861.htm",
    "text": "The polygon object element creates or modifies a polygon drawing object on a graphic display.  The polygon element must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  polygon object attributes and elements  polygon object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1109,
    "title": "polygon object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337708.htm",
    "text": "The polygon object has the following attributes and elements:  polygon object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backStyle  backColor  foreColor  lineStyle  lineWidth  patternStyle  patternColor  path  animations element:  animateVisibility  animateRotation  animateWidth  animateHeight  animateHorizontalPosition  animateVerticalPosition  animateHorizontalSlider  animateVerticalSlider  animateFill  animateColor  See also  Drawing objects: polygon object  polygon object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1110,
    "title": "polygon object example",
    "url": "337709.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the polygon object:  <polygon name=\"Polygon4\" height=\"85\" width=\"78\" left=\"175\" top=\"154\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backStyle=\"solid\" backColor=\"#F0F000\" foreColor=\"#00C000\" lineStyle=\"solid\" lineWidth=\"8\" patternStyle=\"none\" patternColor=\"#00C000\" path=\"194 189 179 234 248 235 249 158 219 196\">  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TestTag2 > 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"invisible\" />  <animateHorizontalSlider expression=\"TagS2\" horizontalOffsetMin=\"10\" horizontalOffsetMax=\"100\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateHorizontalSlider>  <animateFill expression=\"TestTag2\" fillMin=\"0\" fillMax=\"100\" fillDirection=\"up\" insideOnly=\"false\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateFill>  <animateColor expression=\"If TestTag2 < 30 Then 0 Else 1\" blinkRate=\"1\">  <color value=\"0\" foreBehavior=\"blink\" foreColor1=\"blue\" foreColor2=\"cyan\" backBehavior=\"blink\" backColor1=\"red\" backColor2=\"#FFFF80\" />  <color value=\"1\" foreBehavior=\"blink\" foreColor1=\"#8C008C\" foreColor2=\"#FFC0FF\" backBehavior=\"blink\" backColor1=\"lime\" backColor2=\"#008C00\" />  </animateColor>  </animations>  </polygon>  See also  Drawing objects: polygon object  polygon object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1111,
    "title": "Drawing objects: polyline object",
    "url": "58864.htm",
    "text": "The polyline object element creates or modifies a polyline drawing object on a graphic display.  The polyline element must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  polyline object attributes and elements  polyline object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1112,
    "title": "polyline object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337710.htm",
    "text": "The polyline object has the following attributes and elements:  polyline object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backStyle  backColor  foreColor  lineStyle  lineWidth  patternStyle  patternColor  path  animations element:  animateVisibility  animateRotation  animateWidth  animateHeight  animateHorizontalPosition  animateVerticalPosition  animateHorizontalSlider  animateVerticalSlider  animateFill  animateColor  See also  Drawing objects: polyline object  polyline object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1113,
    "title": "polyline object example",
    "url": "337711.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the polyline object:  <polyline name=\"Polyline1\" height=\"112\" width=\"111\" left=\"235\" top=\"368\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backStyle=\"solid\" backColor=\"palegoldenrod\" foreColor=\"#40FF10\" lineStyle=\"solid\" lineWidth=\"1\" patternStyle=\"none\" patternColor=\"#00C000\" path=\"284 370 261 406 299 415 235 429 345 479 344 466 335 403 329 406 326 377 290 368\">  <animations>  <animateFill expression=\"system\\Second\" fillMin=\"0\" fillMax=\"100\" fillDirection=\"down\" insideOnly=\"true\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateFill>  </animations>  </polyline>  See also  Drawing objects: polyline object  polyline object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1114,
    "title": "Drawing objects: rectangle object",
    "url": "58867.htm",
    "text": "The rectangle object element creates or modifies a rectangle drawing object on a graphic display.  A rectangle element must always be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  rectangle object attributes and elements  rectangle object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1115,
    "title": "rectangle object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337712.htm",
    "text": "The rectangle object has the following attributes and elements:  rectangle object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backStyle  backColor  foreColor  lineStyle  lineWidth  patternStyle  patternColor  animations element:  animateVisibility  animateRotation  animateWidth  animateHeight  animateHorizontalPosition  animateVerticalPosition  animateHorizontalSlider  animateVerticalSlider  animateFill  animateColor  See also  Drawing objects: rectangle object  rectangle object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1116,
    "title": "rectangle object example",
    "url": "337715.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the rectangle object:  <rectangle name=\"Polygon2\" height=\"97\" width=\"209\" left=\"356\" top=\"12\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backStyle=\"solid\" backColor=\"moccasin\" foreColor=\"#784000\" lineStyle=\"solid\" lineWidth=\"6\" patternStyle=\"none\" patternColor=\"#00C000\">  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TestTag2 > 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"invisible\" />  <animateColor expression=\"TestTag2\" blinkRate=\"2\">  <color value=\"0\" foreBehavior=\"blink\" foreColor1=\"black\" foreColor2=\"#FFFF80\" backBehavior=\"blink\" backColor1=\"red\" backColor2=\"#8C008C\" />  <color value=\"1\" foreBehavior=\"blink\" foreColor1=\"magenta\" foreColor2=\"#8C8C00\" backBehavior=\"blink\" backColor1=\"lime\" backColor2=\"#C00000\" />  </animateColor>  <animateFill expression=\"TestTag2\" fillMin=\"0\" fillMax=\"100\" fillDirection=\"right\" insideOnly=\"true\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateFill>  <animateHorizontalPosition expression=\"TestTag2\" horizontalOffsetMin=\"0\" horizontalOffsetMax=\"-250\">  <constantExpressionRange min=\"0\" max=\"100\" />  </animateHorizontalPosition>  <animateVerticalPosition expression=\"TestTag2\" verticalOffsetMin=\"0\" verticalOffsetMax=\"240\">  <constantExpressionRange min=\"0\" max=\"200\" />  </animateVerticalPosition>  <animateWidth expression=\"TestTag2\" horizontalChangeMin=\"10\" horizontalChangeMax=\"100\" anchor=\"left\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateWidth>  <animateHeight expression=\"TestTag2\" verticalChangeMin=\"0\" verticalChangeMax=\"100\" anchor=\"top\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateHeight>  <animateRotation expression=\"TestTag2\" rotationMin=\"0\" rotationMax=\"358\" centerOfRotation=\"(90,40)\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateRotation>  <animateHorizontalSlider expression=\"TagS2\" horizontalOffsetMin=\"10\" horizontalOffsetMax=\"100\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateHorizontalSlider>  <animateVerticalSlider expression=\"TestS2\" verticalOffsetMin=\"0\" verticalOffsetMax=\"250\">  <constantExpressionRange min=\"0\" max=\"100\" />  </animateVerticalSlider>  </animations>  </rectangle>  See also  Drawing objects: rectangle object  rectangle object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1117,
    "title": "Drawing objects: roundedRectangle object",
    "url": "58870.htm",
    "text": "The roundedRectangle object element creates or modifies a rounded rectangle drawing object on a graphic display.  A roundedRectangle element must always be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  roundedRectangle object attributes and elements  roundedRectangle object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1118,
    "title": "roundedRectangle object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337713.htm",
    "text": "The roundedRectangle object has the following attributes and elements:  roundedRectangle object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backStyle  backColor  foreColor  lineStyle  lineWidth  patternStyle  patternColor  additional element:  transform  animations element:  animateVisibility  animateWidth  animateHeight  animateHorizontalPosition  animateVerticalPosition  animateHorizontalSlider  animateVerticalSlider  animateFill  animateColor  See also  Drawing objects: roundedRectangle object  roundedRectangle object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1119,
    "title": "roundedRectangle object example",
    "url": "337714.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the roundedRectangle object:  <roundedRectangle name=\"RoundedRectangle1\" height=\"59\" width=\"185\" left=\"428\" top=\"383\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backStyle=\"solid\" backColor=\"#F0F000\" foreColor=\"#00C000\" lineStyle=\"solid\" lineWidth=\"1\" patternStyle=\"none\" patternColor=\"#00C000\" roundingWidth=\"93\" roundingHeight=\"30\">  <transform scaleWidth=\"-0.919597983360291\" scaleHeight=\"0.291457295417786\" shearWidth=\"0\" shearHeight=\"0\" offsetWidth=\"612\" offsetHeight=\"383\" />  <animations>  <animateWidth expression=\"system\\Second\" horizontalChangeMin=\"1\" horizontalChangeMax=\"100\" anchor=\"center\">  <readFromTagExpressionRange min=\"system\\Hour\" max=\"system\\DayOfYear\" />  </animateWidth>  <animateHorizontalPosition expression=\"system\\Second\" horizontalOffsetMin=\"0\" horizontalOffsetMax=\"-250\">  <constantExpressionRange min=\"0\" max=\"100\" />  </animateHorizontalPosition>  </animations>  </roundedRectangle>  See also  Drawing objects: roundedRectangle object  roundedRectangle object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1120,
    "title": "Drawing objects: wedge object",
    "url": "58873.htm",
    "text": "The wedge object element creates or modifies a wedge graphic object on a graphic display.  The wedge element must always be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  wedge object attributes and elements  wedge object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1121,
    "title": "wedge object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337717.htm",
    "text": "The wedge object has the following attributes and elements:  wedge object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backStyle  backColor  patternStyle  patternColor  foreColor  startAngle  endAngle  additional element:  transform  animations element:  animateVisibility  animateRotation  animateWidth  animateHeight  animateHorizontalPosition  animateVerticalPosition  animateHorizontalSlider  animateVerticalSlider  animateFill  animateColor  See also  Drawing objects: wedge object  wedge object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1122,
    "title": "wedge object example",
    "url": "337718.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the wedge object:  <wedge name=\"Wedge1\" height=\"48\" width=\"72\" left=\"325\" top=\"352\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backStyle=\"solid\" backColor=\"magenta\" foreColor=\"#00C000\" lineStyle=\"solid\" lineWidth=\"1\" patternStyle=\"none\" patternColor=\"#00C000\" startAngle=\"4.71238898038469\" endAngle=\"4.34508953915307E-02\">  <transform scaleWidth=\"-70.5\" scaleHeight=\"45.5\" shearWidth=\"0\" shearHeight=\"0\" offsetWidth=\"395.5\" offsetHeight=\"353.499877929688\" />  <animations>  <animateRotation expression=\"TST2\" rotationMin=\"0\" rotationMax=\"358\" centerOfRotation=\"(90,40)\">  <defaultExpressionRange />  </animateRotation>  </animations>  </wedge>  See also  Drawing objects: wedge object  wedge object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1123,
    "title": "Push button objects: momentaryButton object",
    "url": "58876.htm",
    "text": "The momentaryButton graphic object element creates or modifies a momentary push button object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  momentaryButton object attributes and elements  momentaryButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1124,
    "title": "momentaryButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337719.htm",
    "text": "The momentaryButton object has the following attributes and elements:  momentaryButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  buttonAction  description  holdTime  highlightColor  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  currentStateId  captionOnBorder  keyAssignment  elements:  States  The states element corresponds to the States tab of the momentary push button object.  State element  The state element must be located within a states element.  State element attributes:  stateId  borderColor  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the States tab of the momentary push button object. The caption element must be located within a state element.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  imageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the States tab of the momentary push button object. The imageSettings element must be located within a state element.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the momentary push button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the momentary push button object. The connections element must be located within an object element.  connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the momentary push button object. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  name  name  expression  See also  Push button objects: momentaryButton object  momentaryButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1125,
    "title": "momentaryButton object example",
    "url": "337720.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the momentaryButton object:  <momentaryButton name=\"MomentaryPushButton2\" height=\"59\" width=\"111\" left=\"17\" top=\"72\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" buttonAction=\"normallyOpen\" description=\"Momentary PB2\" holdTime=\"250\" highlightColor=\"lime\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" currentStateId=\"0\" captionOnBorder=\"False\" keyAssignment=\"F16\">  <states>  <state stateId=\"Error\" backColor=\"navy\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Error\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"0\" backColor=\"#8C008C\" borderColor=\"#004000\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Georgia\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Momentary No State\" color=\"#FFC0FF\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"topCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Backspace\" alignment=\"bottomLeft\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"#F00000\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"1\" backColor=\"navy\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  </states>  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TagS2\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Value\" expression=\"TagS2\" />  <connection name=\"Indicator\" expression=\"TestS2\" />  </connections>  </momentaryButton>  See also  Push button objects: momentaryButton object  momentaryButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1126,
    "title": "Push button objects: maintainedButton object",
    "url": "58898.htm",
    "text": "The maintainedButton graphic object element creates or modifies a maintained push button object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  maintainedButton object attributes and elements  maintainedButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1127,
    "title": "maintainedButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337721.htm",
    "text": "The maintainedButton object has the following attributes and elements:  maintainedButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  nextStateBasedOn  currentStateId  captionOnBorder  keyAssignment  elements:  States  The states element corresponds to the States tab of the maintained push button object.  State element  The state element must be located within a states element.  State element attributes:  stateId  backColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  blink  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the States tab of the maintained push button object. The caption element must be located within a state element.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the States tab of the maintained push button object. The imageSettings element must be located within a state element.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the maintained push button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the maintained push button object. The connections element must be located within an object element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the &nbsp;maintained push button object. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  name  name  expression  See also  Push button objects: maintainedButton object  maintainedButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1128,
    "title": "maintainedButton object example",
    "url": "337722.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the maintainedButton object:  <maintainedButton name=\"MaintainedPushButton1\" height=\"43\" width=\"111\" left=\"11\" top=\"144\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" nextStateBasedOn=\"currentState\" currentStateId=\"0\" captionOnBorder=\"False\" keyAssignment=\"F11\">  <states>  <state stateId=\"Error\" backColor=\"#8C0000\" borderColor=\"#FF6800\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" blink=\"true\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Error\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"0\" value=\"0\" backColor=\"#008C00\" borderColor=\"#80FF80\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"maintained 0\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"1\" value=\"1\" backColor=\"#80FF80\" borderColor=\"#008C00\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Baskerville Old Face\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"State1\" color=\"#004000\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  </states>  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TagS2\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Value\" expression=\"TagS2\" />  <connection name=\"Indicator\" expression=\"TestS2\" />  </connections>  </maintainedButton>  See also  Push button objects: maintainedButton object  maintainedButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1129,
    "title": "Push button objects: latchedButton object",
    "url": "58902.htm",
    "text": "The latchedButton graphic object element creates or modifies a latched push button object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  latchedButton object attributes and elements  latchedButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1130,
    "title": "latchedButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337723.htm",
    "text": "The latchedButton object has the following attributes and elements:  latchedButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  latchResetType  currentStateId  captionOnBorder  keyAssignment  elements  States  The states element corresponds to the States tab of the latched push button object.  State element  The state element must be located within a states element.  State element attributes:  stateId  backColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  blink  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the States tab of the latched push button object. The caption element must be located within a state element.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the States tab of the latched push button object. The imageSettings element must be located within a state element.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the latched push button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the &nbsp;maintained push button object. The connections element must be located within an object element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the latched push button object. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  name  name  name  expression  See also  Push button objects: latchedButton object  latchedButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1131,
    "title": "latchedButton object example",
    "url": "337724.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the latchedButton object:  <latchedButton name=\"LatchedPushButton1\" height=\"45\" width=\"99\" left=\"19\" top=\"276\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" latchResetType=\"nonZeroValue\" currentStateId=\"0\" captionOnBorder=\"False\" keyAssignment=\"F8\">  <states>  <state stateId=\"Error\" backColor=\"navy\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"latched Error\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"0\" value=\"0\" backColor=\"#008C00\" borderColor=\"#404000\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Baskerville Old Face\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"LATCHED\" color=\"magenta\" backColor=\"#FFC0FF\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"1\" value=\"1\" backColor=\"navy\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"LATCHED 1\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  </states>  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TagS2\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Value\" expression=\"TagS2\" />  <connection name=\"Indicator\" expression=\"TestS2\" />  <connection name=\"Handshake\" expression=\"n7\" />  </connections>  </latchedButton>  See also  Push button objects: latchedButton object  latchedButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1132,
    "title": "Push button objects: multistateButton object",
    "url": "58906.htm",
    "text": "The multistateButton graphic object element creates or modifies a multistate push button object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  multistateButton object attributes and elements  multistateButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1133,
    "title": "multistateButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337725.htm",
    "text": "The multistateButton object has the following attributes and elements:  multistateButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  nextStateBasedOn  autoRepeatDelay  autoRepeatRate  currentStateId  setLastStateId  captionOnBorder  keyAssignment  elements:  States  The states element corresponds to the States tab of the multistate push button object.  State element  The state element must be located within a states element.  State element attributes:  stateId  backColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  blink  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the States tab of the multistate push button object. The caption element must be located within a state element.  caption element attributes:  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the States tab of the multistate push button object. The imageSettings element must be located within a state element.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the multistate push button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  connections:  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the multistate push button object. The connections element must be located within an object element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the multistate push button object. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  name  name  name  expression  See also  Push button objects: multistateButton object  multistateButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1134,
    "title": "multistateButton object example",
    "url": "337726.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the multistateButton object:  <multistateButton name=\"MultistatePushButton1\" height=\"39\" width=\"112\" left=\"7\" top=\"213\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" nextStateBasedOn=\"currentState\" autoRepeatDelay=\"400\" autoRepeatRate=\"0\" currentStateId=\"0\" setLastStateId=\"2\" captionOnBorder=\"False\" keyAssignment=\"F9\">  <states>  <state stateId=\"Error\" backColor=\"navy\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Error\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"0\" value=\"0\" backColor=\"#8C0000\" borderColor=\"#F00000\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Multistate 0\" color=\"black\" backColor=\"#FFFF80\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"1\" value=\"1\" backColor=\"navy\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  </states>  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TagS2\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Value\" expression=\"TagS2\" />  <connection name=\"Indicator\" expression=\"TestS2\" />  </connections>  </multistateButton>  See also  Push button objects: multistateButton object  multistateButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1135,
    "title": "Push button objects: interlockedButton object",
    "url": "58915.htm",
    "text": "The interlockedButton graphic object element creates or modifies a interlocked push button object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  interlockedButton object attributes and elements  interlockedButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1136,
    "title": "interlockedButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337727.htm",
    "text": "The interlockedButton object has the following attributes and elements:  interlockedButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  buttonValue  currentStateId  captionOnBorder  keyAssignment  elements  States  The states element corresponds to the States tab of the interlocked push button object.  State element  The state element must be located within a states element.  State element attributes:  stateId  backColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  blink  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the States tab of the interlocked push button object. The caption element must be located within a state element.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the States tab of the interlocked push button object. The imageSettings element must be located within a state element.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the interlocked push button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  Connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the interlocked push button object. The connections element must be located within an object element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the interlocked push button object. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  name  expression  See also  Push button objects: interlockedButton object  interlockedButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1137,
    "title": "interlockedButton object example",
    "url": "337728.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the interlockedButton object:  <interlockedButton name=\"InterlockedPushButton1\" height=\"44\" width=\"96\" left=\"18\" top=\"350\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" buttonValue=\"214748694\" currentStateId=\"1\" captionOnBorder=\"False\" keyAssignment=\"F6\">  <states>  <state stateId=\"0\" backColor=\"navy\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"State0\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"1\" backColor=\"black\" borderColor=\"red\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Intrlckd State1\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  </states>  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TagS2\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Value\" expression=\"TestS2\" />  </connections>  </interlockedButton>  See also  Push button objects: interlockedButton object  interlockedButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1138,
    "title": "Push button objects: rampButton object",
    "url": "58921.htm",
    "text": "The rampButton graphic object element creates or modifies a ramp push button object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  rampButton object attributes and elements  rampButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1139,
    "title": "rampButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337729.htm",
    "text": "The rampButton object has the following attributes and elements:  rampButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  autoRepeatDelay  autoRepeatRate  blink  limitValue  rampType  rampValue  useVariableLimit  useVariableRamp  captionOnBorder  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the ramp push button object.  caption element attributes  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the ramp push button object.  imageSettings element attributes  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the ramp push button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes  expression  expressionTrueState  connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the ramp push button object. The connections element must be located within an object element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the ramp push button object. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes  name  expression  name  expression  name  expression  See also  Push button objects: rampButton object  rampButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1140,
    "title": "rampButton object example",
    "url": "337730.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the rampButton object:  <rampButton name=\"RampButton1\" height=\"34\" width=\"94\" left=\"16\" top=\"21\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" autoRepeatDelay=\"400\" autoRepeatRate=\"0\" blink=\"false\" limitValue=\"100\" rampType=\"up\" rampValue=\"1\" useVariableLimit=\"true\" useVariableRamp=\"true\" captionOnBorder=\"false\" keyAssignment=\"F18\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Braggadocio\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"ROMP\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TagS2\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Value\" expression=\"TagS2\" />  <connection name=\"Ramp\" expression=\"TagS3\" />  <connection name=\"Limit\" expression=\"TagS4\" />  </connections>  </rampButton>  See also  Push button objects: rampButton object  rampButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1141,
    "title": "Numeric and string objects: numericDisplay object",
    "url": "58929.htm",
    "text": "The numericDisplay graphic object element creates or modifies a numeric display object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  numericDisplay object attributes and elements  numericDisplay object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1142,
    "title": "numericDisplay object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337731.htm",
    "text": "The numericDisplay object has the following attributes and elements:  numericDisplay object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backColor  backStyle  borderColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  foreColor  alignment  blink  patternColor  patternStyle  description  decimalPlaces  numberOfDigits  fillLeftWith  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  elements  animations elment:  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the numeric display object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression\"  expressionTrueState  connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the numeric display object. The connections element must be located within an object&nbsp;element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the numeric display. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  name  name  expression  See also  Numeric and string objects: numericDisplay object  numericDisplay object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1143,
    "title": "numericDisplay object example",
    "url": "337732.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the numericDisplay object:  <numericDisplay name=\"NumericDisplay1\" height=\"54\" width=\"137\" left=\"7\" top=\"93\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backColor=\"#004000\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderColor=\"cyan\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"8\" foreColor=\"#80FF80\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" blink=\"false\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" description=\"Numeric Display 1\" decimalPlaces=\"0\" numberOfDigits=\"5\" fillLeftWith=\"none\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\">  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TagS2\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Value\" expression=\"TagS2\" />  <connection name=\"Polarity\" expression=\"TestS2\" />  </connections>  </numericDisplay>  See also  Numeric and string objects: numericDisplay object  numericDisplay object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1144,
    "title": "Numeric and string objects: numericInputEnable object",
    "url": "58940.htm",
    "text": "The numericInputEnable graphic object element creates or modifies a numeric input enable object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  numericInputEnable object attributes and elements  numericInputEnable object: example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1145,
    "title": "numericInputEnable object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337733.htm",
    "text": "The numericInputEnable object has the following attributes and elements:  numericInputEnable object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  enterKeyControlDelay  enterKeyHandshakeTime  enterKeyHoldTime  handshakeReset  keyNavigation  decimalPoint  digitsAfterDecimalPoint  fixedPosition  numericPopup  rampValue  useVariableMinMax  takeFocusOnPress  minValue  maxValue  captionOnBorder  keyAssignment  elements  Caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the numeric input enable object. The caption element must be located within a state element.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the numeric input enable object. The imageSettings element must be located within a state element.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the numeric input enable object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the numeric input enable object. The connections element must be located within an object element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the numeric input enable object. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  name  optionalExpression  name  name  expression  name  name  See also  Numeric and string objects: numericInputEnable object  numericInputEnable object: example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1146,
    "title": "numericInputEnable object: example",
    "url": "337734.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the numericInputEnable object:  <numericInputEnable name=\"NumericInputEnable1\" height=\"53\" width=\"86\" left=\"25\" top=\"158\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"#004000\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"Numeric Input Enable 1\" highlightColor=\"magenta\" borderColor=\"#580058\" patternColor=\"#580058\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"true\" enterKeyControlDelay=\"400\" enterKeyHandshakeTime=\"4\" enterKeyHoldTime=\"250\" handshakeReset=\"nonZeroValue\" keyNavigation=\"false\" decimalPoint=\"fixedPosition\" digitsAfterDecimalPoint=\"0\" fixedPosition=\"displayed\" numericPopup=\"keypad\" rampValue=\"0\" UseVariableMinMax=\"true\" takeFocusOnPress=\"false\" minValue=\"0\" maxValue=\"2147\" captionOnBorder=\"False\" keyAssignment=\"F18\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Num Input Nable\" color=\"#FFC0FF\" backColor=\"#004000\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"End\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"#580058\" backColor=\"#004000\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag4\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Value\" expression=\"TagS2\" optionalExpression=\"If TagS2 < 22 Then 1 Else 0\" />  <connection name=\"Enter\" expression=\"n7\" />  <connection name=\"Enter Handshake\" expression=\"TestS2\" />  <connection name=\"Minimum\" expression=\"TestTag9\" />  <connection name=\"Maximum\" expression=\"TestTag6\" />   </connections>  </numericInputEnable>  See also  Numeric and string objects: numericInputEnable object  numericInputEnable object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1147,
    "title": "Numeric and string objects: numericInputCursorPoint object",
    "url": "58962.htm",
    "text": "The numericInputCursorPoint graphic object element creates or modifies a numeric input cursor point object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  numericInputCursorPoint object attributes and elements  numericInputCursorPoint object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1148,
    "title": "numericInputCursorPoint object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337735.htm",
    "text": "The numericInputCursorPoint object has the following attributes and elements:  numericInputCursorPoint object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  alignment  audio  backStyle  backColor  foreColor  blink  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  touch  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  enterKeyControlDelay  enterKeyHandshakeTime  enterKeyHoldTime  handshakeReset  keyNavigation  decimalPoint  digitsAfterDecimalPoint  numberOfDigits  decimalPlaces  fixedPosition  fillLeftWith  numericPopup  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  rampValue  useVariableMinMax  captionOnPad  minValue  maxValue  keyAssignment  elements  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the numeric input cursor point object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the numeric input cursor point object. The connections element must be located within an object element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the numeric input cursor point object. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  name  optionalExpression  name  name  name  expression  name  name  See also  Numeric and string objects: numericInputCursorPoint object  numericInputCursorPoint object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1149,
    "title": "numericInputCursorPoint object example",
    "url": "337736.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the numericInputCursorPoint object:  <numericInputCursorPoint name=\"NumericInputCursorPoint1\" height=\"60\" width=\"125\" left=\"8\" top=\"10\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" audio=\"true\" backStyle=\"solid\" backColor=\"#004000\" foreColor=\"cyan\" blink=\"false\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"8\" description=\"NumInputCursPoint1\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"yellow\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" touch=\"true\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" enterKeyControlDelay=\"400\" enterKeyHandshakeTime=\"4\" enterKeyHoldTime=\"250\" handshakeReset=\"nonZeroValue\" keyNavigation=\"true\" decimalPoint=\"fixedPosition\" digitsAfterDecimalPoint=\"0\" numberOfDigits=\"5\" decimalPlaces=\"0\" fixedPosition=\"stripped\" fillLeftWith=\"none\" numericPopup=\"keypad\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" rampValue=\"0\" useVariableMinMax=\"true\" captionOnPad=\"CAPTION\" &nbsp;minValue=\"0\" maxValue=\"2147483647\">  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TagS2\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Value\" expression=\"n7\" optionalExpression=\"if n7 > 0 then 42 Else 9\" />  <connection name=\"Indicator\" expression=\"TestS2\" />  <connection name=\"Enter\" expression=\"TagS2\" />  <connection name=\"Enter Handshake\" expression=\"TestTag4\" />  <connection name=\"Minimum\" expression=\"TestTag9\" />  <connection name=\"Maximum\" expression=\"TestTag6\" />   </connections>  </numericInputCursorPoint>  See also  Numeric and string objects: numericInputCursorPoint object  numericInputCursorPoint object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1150,
    "title": "Numeric and string objects: stringDisplay object",
    "url": "58965.htm",
    "text": "The stringDisplay graphic object element creates or modifies a string display object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  stringDisplay object attributes and elements  stringDisplay object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1151,
    "title": "stringDisplay object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337737.htm",
    "text": "The stringDisplay object has the following attributes and elements:  stringDisplay object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backColor  backStyle  borderColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  foreColor  alignment  blink  wordWrap  patternColor  patternStyle  description  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  elements  animations  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the string display object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the string display object. The connections element must be located within an object&nbsp;element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the string display. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  name  expression  See also  Numeric and string objects: stringDisplay object  stringDisplay object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1152,
    "title": "stringDisplay object example",
    "url": "337738.htm",
    "text": "The following example show the stringDisplay object:  <stringDisplay name=\"StringDisplay1\" height=\"51\" width=\"170\" left=\"212\" top=\"79\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backColor=\"#404000\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderColor=\"#F0F000\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"8\" foreColor=\"#FFFF80\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" blink=\"false\" wordWrap=\"true\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" description=\"String Display\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\">  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TagS2\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Value\" expression=\"TestTag4\" />  </connections>  </stringDisplay>  See also  Numeric and string objects: stringDisplay object  stringDisplay object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1153,
    "title": "Numeric and string objects: stringInputEnable object",
    "url": "58969.htm",
    "text": "The stringInputEnable graphic object element creates or modifies a string input enable object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  stringInputEnable object attributes and elements  stringInputEnable object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1154,
    "title": "stringInputEnable object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337739.htm",
    "text": "The stringInputEnable object has the following attributes and elements:  stringInputEnable object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  enterKeyControlDelay  enterKeyHandshakeTime  enterKeyHoldTime  handshakeReset  keyNavigation  maskScratchpad  takeFocusOnPress  numberOfInputCharacters  fillCharacter  stringPopup  captionOnBorder  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the States tab of the string input enable object. The caption element must be located within a state element.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the States tab of the string input enable object. The imageSettings element must be located within a state element.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the string input enable object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the string input enable object. The connections element must be located within an object element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the string input enable object. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  name  name  name  expression  See also  Numeric and string objects: stringInputEnable object  stringInputEnable object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1155,
    "title": "stringInputEnable object example",
    "url": "337740.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the stringInputEnable object:  <stringInputEnable name=\"StringInputEnable1\" height=\"50\" width=\"200\" left=\"187\" top=\"9\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"gray\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"Stringinputunable\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"black\" patternColor=\"#8C0000\" patternStyle=\"scales\" horizontalMargin=\"4\" verticalMargin=\"4\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" enterKeyControlDelay=\"400\" enterKeyHandshakeTime=\"4\" enterKeyHoldTime=\"250\" handshakeReset=\"nonZeroValue\" keyNavigation=\"true\" maskScratchpad=\"true\" takeFocusOnPress=\"true\" numberOfInputCharacters=\"8\" fillCharacter=\"null\" stringPopup=\"scratchpad\" captionOnBorder=\"False\" keyAssignment=\"F14\">  <caption fontFamily=\"French Script MT\" fontSize=\"12\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"String Input Enable\" color=\"#8C008C\" backColor=\"white\" backStyle=\"solid\" alignment=\"topCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"End\" alignment=\"bottomCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"green\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"n7\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Value\" expression=\"TagS2\" />  <connection name=\"Enter\" expression=\"TestS2\" />  <connection name=\"Enter Handshake\" expression=\"TestTag4\" />  </connections>  </stringInputEnable>  See also  Numeric and string objects: stringInputEnable object  stringInputEnable object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1156,
    "title": "Display navigation objects: gotoButton object",
    "url": "58981.htm",
    "text": "The gotoButton object creates or modifies a goto button graphic object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  gotoButton object attributes and elements  gotoButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1157,
    "title": "gotoButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337741.htm",
    "text": "The gotoButton object has the following attributes and elements:  gotoButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  displayPosition  displayLeftPosition  displayTopPosition  display  parameterFile  parameterList  parameterType  captionOnBorder  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the goto button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the goto button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the goto button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Display navigation objects: gotoButton object  gotoButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1158,
    "title": "gotoButton object example",
    "url": "337742.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the gotoButton object:  <gotoButton name=\"GotoDisplayButton2\" height=\"68\" width=\"112\" left=\"19\" top=\"18\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"magenta\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"#F890F8\" borderColor=\"#8C008C\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"10\" verticalMargin=\"10\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" displayPosition=\"true\" displayLeftPosition=\"50\" displayTopPosition=\"10\" display=\"[DIAGNOSTICS]\" parameterFile=\"params1\" parameterList=\"\" parameterType=\"parameterFile\" captionOnBorder=\"false\" keyAssignment=\"F5\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Bodoni Book\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"GOTODIAG\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Arrow Right\" alignment=\"bottomLeft\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag4\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </gotoButton>  See also  Display navigation objects: gotoButton object  gotoButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1159,
    "title": "Display navigation objects: returnToButton object",
    "url": "58998.htm",
    "text": "The returnToButton object creates or modifies a return to button graphic object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  returnToButton object attributes and elements  returnToButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1160,
    "title": "returnToButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337743.htm",
    "text": "The returnToButton object has the following attributes and elements:  returnToButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  captionOnBorder  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the return to button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the return to button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations elment  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the return to button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Display navigation objects: returnToButton object  returnToButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1161,
    "title": "returnToButton object example",
    "url": "337744.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the returnToButton object:  <returnToButton name=\"ReturntoDisplayButton1\" height=\"53\" width=\"162\" left=\"382\" top=\"81\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"RETURN\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"2\" verticalMargin=\"2\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" captionOnBorder=\"False\" keyAssignment=\"F3\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Garamond\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"RETURN TO LAST\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"topCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Arrow Left\" alignment=\"bottomRight\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TestTag4 > 10 Then 1 Else 0\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </returnToButton>  See also  Display navigation objects: returnToButton object  returnToButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1162,
    "title": "Display navigation objects: closeButton object",
    "url": "59001.htm",
    "text": "The closeButton object creates or modifies a close button graphic object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  closeButton object attributes and elements  closeButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1163,
    "title": "closeButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337745.htm",
    "text": "The closeButton object has the following attributes and elements:  closeButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  closeValue  writeOnClose  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the close button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the close button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the close button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the close button object. The connections element must be located within an object &nbsp;element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the close button. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  name  See also  Display navigation objects: closeButton object  closeButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1164,
    "title": "closeButton object example",
    "url": "337746.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the closeButton object:  <closeButton name=\"CloseDisplayButton2\" height=\"100\" width=\"142\" left=\"400\" top=\"170\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"CLOSE DIS PLAY\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"#FFFF80\" patternStyle=\"ovals\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" closeValue=\"0\" writeOnClose=\"false\" keyAssignment=\"F2\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Braggadocio\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"CLOSE DIS PLAY\" color=\"#A0A0A4\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"solid\" alignment=\"topCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Home\" alignment=\"bottomCenter\" backStyle=\"solid\" color=\"#784000\" backColor=\"magenta\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TestTag4 > 10 Then 1 Else 0\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Value\" expression=\"TagS2\" />  </connections>  </closeButton>  See also  Display navigation objects: closeButton object  closeButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1165,
    "title": "Display navigation objects: displayListSelector object",
    "url": "59005.htm",
    "text": "The displayListSelector object creates or modifies a display list selector graphic object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  displayListSelector object attributes and elements  displayListSelector object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1166,
    "title": "displayListSelector object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337747.htm",
    "text": "The displayListSelector object has the following attributes and elements:  displayListSelector object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  selectionForeColor  selectionBackColor  description  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  blink  keyNavigation  wrapAround  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  captionTruncate  setLastStateId  elements  States  The states element corresponds to the States tab of the display list selector object.  State element  The state element must be located within a states element.  State element attributes:  stateId  displayPosition  displayLeftPosition  displayTopPosition\"  display  parameterFile  parameterList  parameterType  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the States tab of the display list selector object. The caption element must be located within a state element.  caption element attributes:  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  blink  usesDisplayName  animations element:  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the display list selector object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Display navigation objects: displayListSelector object  displayListSelector object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1167,
    "title": "displayListSelector object example",
    "url": "337748.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the displayListSelector object:  <displayListSelector name=\"DisplayListSelector1\" height=\"143\" width=\"235\" left=\"390\" top=\"291\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backColor=\"#FF6800\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"8\" selectionForeColor=\"#004000\" selectionBackColor=\"lime\" description=\"SELECT DISPLAY\" borderColor=\"#400000\" patternColor=\"#FFFF80\" patternStyle=\"bricks\" blink=\"true\" keyNavigation=\"true\" wrapAround=\"true\" fontFamily=\"Maiandra GD\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" captionTruncate=\"character\" setLastStateId=\"3\">  <states>  <state stateId=\"0\" displayPosition=\"true\" displayLeftPosition=\"110\" displayTopPosition=\"60\" display=\"[DIAGNOSTICS]\" parameterFile=\"params1\" parameterList=\"\" parameterType=\"parameterFile\">  <caption caption=\"\" color=\"navy\" backColor=\"cyan\" backStyle=\"solid\" alignment=\"left\" blink=\"false\" usesDisplayName=\"true\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"1\" displayPosition=\"true\" displayLeftPosition=\"50\" displayTopPosition=\"10\" display=\"[ALARM]\" parameterFile=\"params1\" parameterList=\"\" parameterType=\"parameterFile\">  <caption caption=\"\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"solid\" alignment=\"left\" blink=\"false\" usesDisplayName=\"true\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"2\" displayPosition=\"true\" displayLeftPosition=\"50\" displayTopPosition=\"10\" display=\"[INFORMATION]\" parameterFile=\"\" parameterList=\"system\\Second,system\\Time\" parameterType=\"parameterList\">  <caption caption=\"\" color=\"purple\" backColor=\"#F890F8\" backStyle=\"solid\" alignment=\"left\" blink=\"false\" usesDisplayName=\"true\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"2\" displayPosition=\"true\" displayLeftPosition=\"0\" displayTopPosition=\"0\" display=\"[ALARM]\" parameterFile=\"twoparm\" parameterList=\"\" parameterType=\"parameterFile\">  <caption caption=\"\" color=\"silver\" backColor=\"black\" backStyle=\"solid\" alignment=\"left\" blink=\"false\" usesDisplayName=\"true\" />  </state>  </states>  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TestTag4 < 5 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </displayListSelector>  See also  Display navigation objects: displayListSelector object  displayListSelector object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1168,
    "title": "Indicator objects: multistateIndicator object",
    "url": "59016.htm",
    "text": "lThe multistateIndicator graphic object element creates or modifies a multistate indicator graphic object on a graphic display.  The multistateIndicator element must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  multistateIndicator object attributes and elements  multistateIndicator object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1169,
    "title": "multistateIndicator object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337749.htm",
    "text": "The multistateIndicator object has the following attributes and elements:  multistateIndicator object attributes:  These attributes correspond to the properties on the General and Common tabs of the multistate indicator object.  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  shape  triggerType  currentStateId  captionOnBorder  setLastStateId  elements  States  The states element corresponds to the States tab of the multistate indicator.  State element  The state element must be located within a states element.  State element attributes:  stateId  value  backColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  blink  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the States tab of the multistate indicator. The caption element must be located within a state element.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the States tab of the multistate indicator. The imageSettings element must be located within a state element.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the multistate indicator object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the multistate indicator object. The connections element must be located within an object &nbsp;element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the multistate indicator. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  name  expression  See also  Indicator objects: multistateIndicator object  multistateIndicator object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1170,
    "title": "multistateIndicator object example",
    "url": "337751.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the multistateIndicator object:  <multistateIndicator name=\"MultistateIndicator1\" height=\"91\" width=\"205\" left=\"8\" top=\"275\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"8\" description=\"\" shape=\"rectangle\" triggerType=\"value\" currentStateId=\"Error\" setLastStateId=\"4\" captionOnBorder=\"False\">  <states>  <state stateId=\"Error\" backColor=\"#8C0000\" borderColor=\"#400000\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Algerian\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Error\" color=\"#FFFF80\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"End\" alignment=\"bottomCenter\" backStyle=\"solid\" color=\"yellow\" backColor=\"#784000\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"0\" value=\"0\" backColor=\"#80FF80\" borderColor=\"#004000\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial Black\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"true\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"MultiState0\" color=\"black\" backColor=\"silver\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleLeft\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Arrow Up\" alignment=\"middleRight\" backStyle=\"solid\" color=\"yellow\" backColor=\"#008C00\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"1\" value=\"1\" backColor=\"#FF6800\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\"patternStyle=\"none\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial Rounded MT Bold\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"true\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"MultiState1\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"topRight\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Arrow Right\" alignment=\"bottomLeft\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"#8C0000\" backColor=\"#FF8080\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"2\" value=\"2\" backColor=\"navy\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"#FFC0FF\" patternStyle=\"diamonds\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Gill Sans MT Ext Condensed Bold\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"true\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"MultiState2\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"topLeft\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Arrow Right\" alignment=\"bottomRight\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"#8C008C\" backColor=\"#C000C0\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"3\" value=\"3\" backColor=\"#FFFF80\" borderColor=\"#8C8C00\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Franklin Gothic Medium Cond\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"MultiState3\" color=\"#404000\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"topCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Home\" alignment=\"bottomCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"#784000\" backColor=\"#FF8000\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  </states>  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"n7\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Indicator\" expression=\"Form2\\TagTest2\" />  </connections>  </multistateIndicator>  See also  Indicator objects: multistateIndicator object  multistateIndicator object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1171,
    "title": "Indicator objects: listIndicator object",
    "url": "59024.htm",
    "text": "The listIndicator graphic object element creates or modifies a list indicator graphic object on a graphic display.  The listIndicator element must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  listIndicator object attributes and elements  listIndicator object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1172,
    "title": "listIndicator object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337752.htm",
    "text": "The listIndicator object has the following attriibutes and elements:  listIndicator object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  selectionForeColor  selectionBackColor  description  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  blink  triggerType  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  captionTruncate  setLastStateId  elements  States  The states element corresponds to the States tab of the list indicator.  State element  The state element must be located within a states element.  State element attributes:  stateId  value  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the States tab of the list indicator. The caption element must be located within a state element.  caption element attributes:  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  blink  Animations  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the list indicator object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  Connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the list indicator object. The connections element must be located within an object&nbsp;element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the list indicator. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  name  expression  See also  Indicator objects: listIndicator object  listIndicator object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1173,
    "title": "listIndicator object example",
    "url": "337754.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the listIndicator object:  <listIndicator name=\"ListIndicator1\" height=\"111\" width=\"136\" left=\"241\" top=\"269\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backColor=\"#80FF80\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"8\" selectionForeColor=\"cyan\" selectionBackColor=\"blue\" description=\"\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"#004000\" patternStyle=\"scales\" blink=\"false\" triggerType=\"value\" fontFamily=\"Arial Rounded MT Bold\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"true\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" captionTruncate=\"word\" setLastStateId=\"3\">  <states>  <state stateId=\"0\" value=\"0\">  <caption caption=\"List\" color=\"maroon\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"left\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"1\" value=\"1\">  <caption caption=\"Indicator\" color=\"#580058\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"left\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"2\" value=\"2\">  <caption caption=\"S2\" color=\"#580058\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"left\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  </states>  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"n7\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Indicator\" expression=\"TestTag2\" />  </connections>  </listIndicator>  See also  Indicator objects: listIndicator object  listIndicator object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1174,
    "title": "Indicator objects: symbol object",
    "url": "59021.htm",
    "text": "The symbol graphic object element creates or modifies a symbol graphic object on a FactoryTalk View graphic display.  The symbol element must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  symbol object attributes and elements  symbol object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1175,
    "title": "symbol object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337755.htm",
    "text": "The symbol object has the following attributes and elements:  symbol object attributes:  These attributes correspond to the properties on the General and Common tabs of the symbol object.  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  borderStyle  borderWidth  description  shape  triggerType  imageName  currentStateId  setLastStateId  elements  States  The states element corresponds to the States tab of the symbol object.  State element  The state element must be located within a states element.  State element attributes:  stateId  borderColor  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the States tab of the symbol object. The imageSettings element must be located within a state element.  imageSettings element attributes:  backStyle  color  backColor  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the symbol object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the symbol object. The connections element must be located within an object element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the symbol object. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  name  expression  See also  Indicator objects: symbol object  symbol object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1176,
    "title": "symbol object example",
    "url": "337756.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the symbol object:  <symbol name=\"Symbol1\" height=\"44\" width=\"44\" left=\"418\" top=\"306\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderWidth=\"6\" description=\"\" shape=\"rectangle\" triggerType=\"value\" imageName=\"Backspace\" currentStateId=\"Error\" setLastStateId=\"4\">  <states>  <state stateId=\"Error\" borderColor=\"black\">  <imageSettings backStyle=\"solid\" color=\"#008C00\" backColor=\"#80FF80\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"0\" value=\"0\" borderColor=\"black\">  <imageSettings backStyle=\"solid\" color=\"#8C0000\" backColor=\"yellow\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"1\" value=\"1\" borderColor=\"black\">  <imageSettings backStyle=\"solid\" color=\"cyan\" backColor=\"navy\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"2\" value=\"2\" borderColor=\"black\">  <imageSettings backStyle=\"solid\" color=\"#F890F8\" backColor=\"#580058\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"3\" value=\"3\" borderColor=\"black\">  <imageSettings backStyle=\"solid\" color=\"#FFFF80\" backColor=\"#404000\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  </states>  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"n7\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Indicator\" expression=\"TestTag2\" />  </connections>  </symbol>  See also  Indicator objects: symbol object  symbol object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1177,
    "title": "Graph and gauge objects: gauge object",
    "url": "59035.htm",
    "text": "The gauge graphic object element creates or modifies a gauge graphic object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  gauge object attributes and elements  gauge object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1178,
    "title": "gauge object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337757.htm",
    "text": "The gauge object has the following attributes and elements:  gauge object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backColor  backStyle  lineStyle  lineWidth  needleWidth  fillColor  foreColor  legendColor  needleColor  showLegend  sweepStyle  minValue  maxValue  majorTicks  minorTicks  digitsAfterDecimalPoint  description  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  thresholdType  numberOfThresholds  elements  threshold  The threshold element must be located within a gauge or bar graph graphic object element.  threshold element attributes:  thresholdIndex  thresholdValue  fillColor  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the gauge object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the gauge object. The connections element must be located within an object element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the gauge object. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  Name  expression  See also  Graph and gauge objects: gauge object  gauge object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1179,
    "title": "gauge object example",
    "url": "337758.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the gauge object:  <gauge name=\"Gauge1\" height=\"92\" width=\"214\" left=\"341\" top=\"17\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backColor=\"#FFFF80\" backStyle=\"solid\" lineStyle=\"solid\" lineWidth=\"4\" needleWidth=\"2\" fillColor=\"#FF8080\" foreColor=\"#004000\" legendColor=\"#400000\" needleColor=\"#0000C0\" showLegend=\"true\" sweepStyle=\"fill\" minValue=\"0\" maxValue=\"60\" majorTicks=\"3\" minorTicks=\"1\" digitsAfterDecimalPoint=\"0\" description=\"Narrow Gauge\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" thresholdType=\"percentage\" numberOfThresholds=\"2\">  <threshold thresholdIndex=\"1\" thresholdValue=\"25\" fillColor=\"purple\" blink=\"true\" />  <threshold thresholdIndex=\"2\" thresholdValue=\"50\" fillColor=\"#FFC0FF\" blink=\"true\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TagS2 < 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Value\" expression=\"TestTag4\" />  </connections>  </gauge>  See also  Graph and gauge objects: gauge object  gauge object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1180,
    "title": "Graph and gauge objects: barGraph object",
    "url": "59027.htm",
    "text": "The barGraph graphic object element creates or modifies a bar graph object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  barGraph object attributes and elements  barGraph object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1181,
    "title": "barGraph object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337760.htm",
    "text": "The barGraph object has the following attributes and elements:  barGraph object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backColor  backStyle  borderColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  fillColor  fillDirection  minValue  maxValue  thresholdType  numberOfThresholds  elements  threshold  The threshold element must be located within a gauge or bar graph graphic object element.  threshold element attributes:  thresholdIndex  thresholdValue  fillColor  blink  animations element:  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the bar graph object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the bar graph object. The connections element must be located within an object element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the bar graph object. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  Name  expression  See also  Graph and gauge objects: barGraph object  barGraph object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1182,
    "title": "barGraph object example",
    "url": "337761.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the barGraph object:  <barGraph name=\"BarGraph1\" height=\"238\" width=\"32\" left=\"580\" top=\"13\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backColor=\"lime\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderColor=\"navy\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"Bar20\" fillColor=\"navy\" fillDirection=\"bottomToTop\" minValue=\"0\" maxValue=\"60\" thresholdType=\"percentage\" numberOfThresholds=\"1\">  <threshold thresholdIndex=\"1\" thresholdValue=\"50\" fillColor=\"yellow\" blink=\"true\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TagS2 < 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Value\" expression=\"TestTag4\" />  </connections>  </barGraph>  See also  Graph and gauge objects: barGraph object  barGraph object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1183,
    "title": "Graph and gauge objects: scale object",
    "url": "59052.htm",
    "text": "The scale graphic object element creates or modifies a scale object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  scale object attributes and elements  scale object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1184,
    "title": "scale object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337762.htm",
    "text": "The scale object has the following attributes and elements:  scale object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  borderColor  tickDirection  foreColor  lineStyle  lineWidth  majorTicks  minorTicks  description  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the scale object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Graph and gauge objects: scale object  scale object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1185,
    "title": "scale object example",
    "url": "337763.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the scale object:  <scale name=\"Scale1\" height=\"67\" width=\"149\" left=\"386\" top=\"123\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"2\" borderColor=\"navy\" tickDirection=\"right\" foreColor=\"#8C0000\" lineStyle=\"solid\" lineWidth=\"1\" majorTicks=\"3\" minorTicks=\"1\" description=\"Minor Scale\" blink=\"false\">  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TagS2 < 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </scale>  See also  Graph and gauge objects: scale object  scale object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1186,
    "title": "Trend objects: trend object",
    "url": "59066.htm",
    "text": "For XML purposes, the trend object is considered to be an ActiveX control.  The only editable attributes are those that correspond to the properties on the Common and Connections tabs of the Trend object's Properties dialog box, the Wallpaper option, and the object's visibility animation. All other aspects of the trend's appearance and behavior are contained in the data element's binary information. Do not attempt to edit these attributes in the exported file.  See also  Graphic object elements  trend object attributes and elements  trend object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1187,
    "title": "trend object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337765.htm",
    "text": "The trend object has the following attributes and elements:  trend object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  keyNavigation  focusHighlight  classID  elements  data element  Data element attributes are provided by the ActiveX control and are not editable by the user.  data element attributes:  progID  filename  fileversion  typeLibrary  typeLibVersion  data  animations element:  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the trend object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the trend object. The connections element must be located within an object element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the trend object. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  name  name  name  expression  See also  Trend objects: trend object  trend object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1188,
    "title": "trend object example",
    "url": "337766.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the trend object:  <activeX name=\"TrendObject1\" height=\"141\" width=\"623\" left=\"7\" top=\"329\" visible=\"true\" classId=\"{EC66E436-280E-11D4-AB9C-00C04F9915E3}\" keyNavigation=\"true\" focusHighlight=\"true\">  <data progId=\"HMI.TrendObjectME.1\" fileName=\"METXView.ocx\" fileVersion=\"4.0.1.0\" typeLibrary=\"{EC66E430-280E-11D4-AB9C-00C04F9915E3}\" typeLibVersion=\"4.0\" data=\"AAAEAIMzAACpCwAAAAAAAAwAAAD//v8AAgAAAAEAAAAAAAAAyAAAAAAAAAAAA1LjC5GPzhGd 4wCqAEu4UQEAAAKQAXCOAQAKQmF1aGF1cyA5MwAAAAAAAAAAAQAAAAAAAAD//v8A//7/AACY OgAAAAAgQQD/2AABAAAAAQAAAOcHAAAIAP//AQANAENWaWV3TGluZUluZm8DAAAAAQAAAAAA AAAAAMhC//7/AP/+/wAAAAAAAQAAAAMAAAABAAAA//7/FFIAUwBWAGkAZQB3ADMAMgAuAEEA cABwAGwAaQBjAGEAdABpAG8AbgD//v8A//7/Am4ANwD//v8FUABlAG4AIAAxACABAAAA//7/ AP/+/wABgAMAAAABAAAAAAAAAAAAyEL//v8A//7/AAAAAAABAAAAAwAAAAEAAAD//v8UUgBT AFYAaQBlAHcAMwAyAC4AQQBwAHAAbABpAGMAYQB0AGkAbwBuAP/+/wD//v8FVABhAGcAUwAy AP/+/wVQAGUAbgAgADIAIAEAAAD//v8A//7/AAGAAwAAAAEAAAAAAAAAAADIQv/+/wD//v8A AAAAAAAAAAADAAAAAQAAAP/+/xRSAFMAVgBpAGUAdwAzADIALgBBAHAAcABsAGkAYwBhAHQA aQBvAG4A//7/AP/+/wZUAGUAcwB0AFMAMgD//v8FUABlAG4AIAAzACABAAAA//7/AP/+/wAB gAMAAAABAAAAAAAAAAAAyEL//v8A//7/AAAAAAAAAAAAAwAAAAEAAAD//v8UUgBTAFYAaQBl AHcAMwAyAC4AQQBwAHAAbABpAGMAYQB0AGkAbwBuAP/+/wD//v8IVABlAHMAdABUAGEAZwA0 AP/+/wVQAGUAbgAgADQAIAEAAAD//v8A//7/AAGAAwAAAAEAAAAAAAAAAADIQv/+/wD//v8A AAAAAAAAAAADAAAAAQAAAP/+/xRSAFMAVgBpAGUAdwAzADIALgBBAHAAcABsAGkAYwBhAHQA aQBvAG4A//7/AP/+/x9JAGYAIABUAGUAcwB0AFQAYQBnADcAIAA+ADEAMAAgACAAVABoAGUA bgAgADAAIAAgAEUAbABzAGUAIAAxAP/+/wVQAGUAbgAgADUAIAEAAAD//v8A//7/AAGAAwAA AAEAAAAAAAAAAADIQv/+/wD//v8AAAAAAAAAAAADAAAAAQAAAP/+/xRSAFMAVgBpAGUAdwAz ADIALgBBAHAAcABsAGkAYwBhAHQAaQBvAG4A//7/AP/+/whUAGUAcwB0AFQAYQBnADYA//7/ BVAAZQBuACAANgAgAQAAAP/+/wD//v8AAYADAAAAAQAAAAAAAAAAAMhC//7/AP/+/wAAAAAA AAAAAAMAAAABAAAA//7/FFIAUwBWAGkAZQB3ADMAMgAuAEEAcABwAGwAaQBjAGEAdABpAG8A bgD//v8A//7/CFQAZQBzAHQAVABhAGcANwD//v8FUABlAG4AIAA3ACABAAAA//7/AP/+/wAB gAMAAAABAAAAAAAAAAAAyEL//v8A//7/AAAAAAABAAAAAwAAAAEAAAD//v8UUgBTAFYAaQBl AHcAMwAyAC4AQQBwAHAAbABpAGMAYQB0AGkAbwBuAP/+/wD//v8IVABlAHMAdABUAGEAZwA4 AP/+/wVQAGUAbgAgADgAIAEAAAD//v8A//7/AAcAAAACAAAAAAAAAAEAAAABAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAEAAAABAAAAAAAAAAEAAAABAAAAAQAAAAAAAAAIAAAA/wAA/wAA/wAAAP8A /wD///8AAP//AP//AAAAgAAA/wD/AAAAAAAEAAAABAAAAAEAAAAAAAAAAADIQgAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAABAAAAAAAAAAgAAQAAAAEAAAABAAAAAQAAAAEAAAABAAAAAQAAAAEAAAAIAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAACAABAAAAAQAAAAEAAAABAAAAAQAAAAEA AAABAAAAAQAAAAgAAQAAAAIAAAADAAAABAAAAAEAAAACAAAAAwAAAAAAAAD/////AAAAACwA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAgICAAICAgAD/7//+ /7///9DptEABAAAArAMAAEjqtEABAAAArAMAAP/+/wABAAAAAQAAAAgAAQAAAAIAAAADAAAA BAAAAAUAAAABAAAAAgAAAAMAAAABAAAAAAAAAOgDAAACAAAAAQAAAFwAAADv////AAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAkAEAAAEAAAAAAAAAAwACAAEAUgD//v8KQgBhAHUAaABhAHUAcwAgADkAMwAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAQAAAAEAAAADAAAAAQAAAP/+/xRSAFMAVgBpAGUAdwAzADIALgBBAHAAcABsAGkA YwBhAHQAaQBvAG4A//7/AP/+/wD//v8IVABlAHMAdABUAGEAZwA1ACABAAAA//7/AP/+/wAD AAAAAQAAAP/+/xRSAFMAVgBpAGUAdwAzADIALgBBAHAAcABsAGkAYwBhAHQAaQBvAG4A//7/ AP/+/wD//v8IVABlAHMAdABUAGEAZwAzACABAAAA//7/AP/+/wABAAAAAAAAAP///wAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAABAAAACAAAAAAAAABYAFgAAAARAAAABgAAAAcAAAAIAAAACQAAAAoAAAALAAAA DAAAAA0AAAAOAAAADwAAABAAAAARAAAAEgAAABMAAAAUAAAAFQAAABYAAAAAAAAC\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TagS2 < 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Pen 1\" expression=\"n7\" />  <connection name=\"Pen 2\" expression=\"TagS2\" />  <connection name=\"Pen 3\" expression=\"TestS2\" />  <connection name=\"Pen 4\" expression=\"TestTag4\" />  <connection name=\"Pen 5\" expression=\"If TestTag7 >10 Then 0 Else 1\" />  <connection name=\"Pen 6\" expression=\"TestTag6\" />  <connection name=\"Pen 7\" expression=\"TestTag7\" />  <connection name=\"Pen 8\" expression=\"TestTag8\" />  <connection name=\"Minimum\" expression=\"TestTag5\" />  <connection name=\"Maximum\" expression=\"TestTag3\" />  </connections>  </activeX>  See also  Trend objects: trend object  trend object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1189,
    "title": "Trend objects: trendNextPenButton object",
    "url": "59064.htm",
    "text": "The trendNextPenButton graphic object element creates or modifies a trend next pen button object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  trendNextPenButton object attributes and elements  trendNextPenButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1190,
    "title": "trendNextPenButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337769.htm",
    "text": "The trendNextPenButton object has the following attributes and elements:  trendNextPenButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  linkedObject  sendPressTo  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the next pen button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the next pen button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the next pen button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Trend objects: trendNextPenButton object  trendNextPenButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1191,
    "title": "trendNextPenButton object example",
    "url": "337770.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the trendNextPenButton object:  <trendNextPenButton name=\"NextPenButton2\" height=\"51\" width=\"108\" left=\"43\" top=\"325\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" linkedObject=\"\" sendPressTo=\"objectWithFocus\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TagS2 < 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </trendNextPenButton>  See also  Trend objects: trendNextPenButton object  trendNextPenButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1192,
    "title": "Trend objects: trendPauseButton object",
    "url": "59057.htm",
    "text": "The trendPauseButton graphic object element creates or modifies a trend pause pen button object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  trendPauseButton object attributes and elements  trendPauseButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1193,
    "title": "trendPauseButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337989.htm",
    "text": "The trendPauseButton object has the following attributes and elements:  trendPauseButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  linkedObject  sendPressTo  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the pause pen button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the pause pen button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations eelment  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the pause pen button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Trend objects: trendPauseButton object  trendPauseButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1194,
    "title": "trendPauseButton object example",
    "url": "337990.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the trendPauseButton object:  <trendPauseButton name=\"PausePenButton1\" height=\"59\" width=\"80\" left=\"39\" top=\"214\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"true\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" linkedObject=\"\" sendPressTo=\"objectWithFocus\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TagS2 < 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </trendPauseButton>  See also  Trend objects: trendPauseButton object  trendPauseButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1195,
    "title": "RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object",
    "url": "59357.htm",
    "text": "The recipePlusTable graphic object element creates or modifies a RecipePlus table object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  recipePlusTable object attributes and elements  recipePlusTable object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1196,
    "title": "recipePlusTable object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337991.htm",
    "text": "The recipePlusTable object has the following attributes and elements:  recipePlusTable object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  borderColor  keyNavigation  foreColor  selectionBackColor  selectionForeColor  footerBackColor  footerForeColor  gridColor  fontFamily  fontSize\"  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  wrapAround  headerForeColor  headerBackColor  displayHeader  displayFooter  viewOnly  widthIngredientName  widthCurrentValue  widthRecipeValue  widthCompareStatus  widthTagName  headerTextIngredientName  headerTextCurrentValue  headerTextRecipeValue  headerTextCompareStatus  headerTextTagName  displayIngredientName  displayCurrentValue  displayRecipeValue  displayCompareStatus  displayTagName  linesPerItem  wordWrap  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the RecipePlus table object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  recipePlusTable object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1197,
    "title": "recipePlusTable object example",
    "url": "337992.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the recipePlusTable object:  <recipePlusTable name=\"RecipePlusTable1\" height=\"121\" width=\"494\" left=\"89\" top=\"324\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backColor=\"maroon\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"8\" description=\"\" borderColor=\"maroon\" keyNavigation=\"true\" foreColor=\"white\" selectionBackColor=\"navy\" selectionForeColor=\"white\" footerBackColor=\"gray\" footerForeColor=\"black\" gridColor=\"black\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" wrapAround=\"false\" headerForeColor=\"black\" headerBackColor=\"gray\" displayHeader=\"true\" displayFooter=\"true\" viewOnly=\"false\" widthIngredientName=\"100\" widthCurrentValue=\"55\" widthRecipeValue=\"55\" widthCompareStatus=\"55\" widthTagName=\"100\" headerTextIngredientName=\"Ingredient\" headerTextCurrentValue=\"Current\" headerTextRecipeValue=\"Recipe\" headerTextCompareStatus=\"Compare\" headerTextTagName=\"Tag Name\" displayIngredientName=\"true\" displayCurrentValue=\"true\" displayRecipeValue=\"true\" displayCompareStatus=\"true\" displayTagName=\"true\" linesPerItem=\"1\" wordWrap=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TagS2\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  See also  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusTable object  recipePlusTable object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1198,
    "title": "RecipePlus objects: recipePlusSelector object",
    "url": "59400.htm",
    "text": "The recipePlusSelector graphic object element creates or modifies a RecipePlus selector graphic object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  recipePlusSelector object attributes and elements  recipePlusSelector object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1199,
    "title": "recipePlusSelector object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337993.htm",
    "text": "The recipePlusSelector object has the following attributes and elements:  recipePlusSelector object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  borderColor  keyNavigation  foreColor  selectionBackColor  selectionForeColor  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  wrapAround  headerForeColor  headerBackColor  displayHeader  widthRecipe  widthUnit  headerTextRecipe  headerTextUnit  linesPerItem  wordWrap  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the RecipePlus selector object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusSelector object  recipePlusSelector object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1200,
    "title": "recipePlusSelector object example",
    "url": "337994.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the recipePlusSelector object:  <recipePlusSelector name=\"RecipePlusSelector1\" height=\"128\" width=\"378\" left=\"65\" top=\"14\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backColor=\"#FF8080\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"8\" description=\"\" borderColor=\"maroon\" keyNavigation=\"true\" foreColor=\"white\" selectionBackColor=\"navy\" selectionForeColor=\"white\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"1\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" wrapAround=\"false\" headerForeColor=\"black\" headerBackColor=\"gray\" displayHeader=\"true\" widthRecipe=\"150\" widthUnit=\"150\" headerTextRecipe=\"Recipe\" headerTextUnit=\"Unit\" linesPerItem=\"1\" wordWrap=\"true\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TagS2\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  See also  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusSelector object  recipePlusSelector object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1201,
    "title": "RecipePlus objects: recipePlusButton object",
    "url": "59409.htm",
    "text": "The recipePlusButton graphic object element creates or modifies a recipePlus button object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  recipePlusButton object attributes and elements  recipePlusButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1202,
    "title": "recipePlusButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337995.htm",
    "text": "The recipePlusButton object has the following attributes and elements:  recipePlusButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  action  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the RecipePlus button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the RecipePlus button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the RecipePlus button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusButton object  recipePlusButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1203,
    "title": "recipePlusButton object example",
    "url": "337996.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the recipePlusButton object:  <recipePlusButton name=\"RecipePlusButton2\" height=\"64\" width=\"91\" left=\"480\" top=\"30\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" action=\"download\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"red\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"maroon\" patternColor=\"#FF6800\" patternStyle=\"scales\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Gill Sans MT Ext Condensed Bold\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"true\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Download\" color=\"#400000\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"topCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Page Down\" alignment=\"bottomCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"#400000\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TagS2\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </recipePlusButton>  See also  RecipePlus objects: recipePlusButton object  recipePlusButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1204,
    "title": "Key objects: backSpaceKey object",
    "url": "59074.htm",
    "text": "The backSpaceKey graphic object element creates or modifies a backspace key object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  backSpaceKey object attributes and elements  backSpaceKey object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1205,
    "title": "backSpaceKey object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337997.htm",
    "text": "The backSpaceKey object has the following attributes and elements:  backSpaceKey object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  blink  description  highlightColor  shape  linkedObject  sendPressTo  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  touch  borderColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  backStyle  backColor  patternColor  patternStyle  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the backspace key object.  caption element attributes:  caption  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the backspace key object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the backspace key object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Key objects: backSpaceKey object  backSpaceKey object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1206,
    "title": "backSpaceKey object example",
    "url": "337998.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the backSpaceKey object:  <backspaceKey name=\"BackspaceButton1\" height=\"36\" width=\"62\" left=\"10\" top=\"25\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" blink=\"false\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" shape=\"rectangle\" linkedObject=\"\" sendPressTo=\"objectWithFocus\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" touch=\"true\" borderColor=\"navy\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" backStyle=\"solid\" backColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\">  <caption caption=\"Backspace\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Backspace\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TagS2 < 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </backspaceKey>  See also  Key objects: backSpaceKey object  backSpaceKey object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1207,
    "title": "Key objects: endKey object",
    "url": "59076.htm",
    "text": "The endKey graphic object element creates or modifies an end key object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  endKey object attributes and elements  endKey object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1208,
    "title": "endKey object attributes and elements",
    "url": "337999.htm",
    "text": "The endKey object has the following attributes and elements:  endKey object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  blink  description  highlightColor  shape  linkedObject  sendPressTo  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  touch  borderColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  backStyle  backColor  patternColor  patternStyle  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the end key object.  caption element attributes:  caption  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the end key object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the end key object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Key objects: endKey object  endKey object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1209,
    "title": "endKey object example",
    "url": "338000.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the endKey object:  <endKey name=\"EndButton1\" height=\"39\" width=\"60\" left=\"11\" top=\"73\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" blink=\"false\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" shape=\"rectangle\" linkedObject=\"\" sendPressTo=\"objectWithFocus\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" touch=\"true\" borderColor=\"navy\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" backStyle=\"solid\" backColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\">  <caption caption=\"End\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"End\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TagS2 < 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </endKey>  See also  Key objects: endKey object  endKey object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1210,
    "title": "Key objects: enterKey object",
    "url": "59078.htm",
    "text": "The enterKey graphic object element creates or modifies an enter key object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  enterKey object attributes and elements  enterKey object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1211,
    "title": "enterKey object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338001.htm",
    "text": "The enterKey object has the following attributes and elements:  enterKey object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  blink  description  highlightColor  shape  linkedObject  sendPressTo  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  touch  borderColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  backStyle  backColor  patternColor  patternStyle  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the enter key object.  caption element attributes:  caption  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the enter key object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the enter key object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Key objects: enterKey object  enterKey object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1212,
    "title": "enterKey object example",
    "url": "338002.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the enterKey object:  <enterKey name=\"EnterButton1\" height=\"34\" width=\"56\" left=\"12\" top=\"127\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" blink=\"false\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" shape=\"rectangle\" linkedObject=\"\" sendPressTo=\"objectWithFocus\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" touch=\"true\" borderColor=\"navy\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" backStyle=\"solid\" backColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\">  <caption caption=\"Enter\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Enter\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TagS2 < 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </enterKey>  See also  Key objects: enterKey object  enterKey object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1213,
    "title": "Key objects: homeKey object",
    "url": "59080.htm",
    "text": "The homeKey graphic object element creates or modifies a home key object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  homeKey object attributes and elements  homeKey object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1214,
    "title": "homeKey object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338003.htm",
    "text": "The homeKey object has the following attributes and elements:  homeKey object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  blink  description  highlightColor  shape  linkedObject  sendPressTo  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  touch  borderColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  backStyle  backColor  patternColor  patternStyle  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the home key object.  caption element attributes:  caption  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment\"  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the home key object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the home key object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Key objects: homeKey object  homeKey object example   XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1215,
    "title": "homeKey object example",
    "url": "338004.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the homeKey object:  <homeKey name=\"HomeButton1\" height=\"36\" width=\"54\" left=\"16\" top=\"173\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" blink=\"false\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" shape=\"rectangle\" linkedObject=\"\" sendPressTo=\"objectWithFocus\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" touch=\"true\" borderColor=\"navy\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" backStyle=\"solid\" backColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\">  <caption caption=\"Home\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Home\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TagS2 < 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </homeKey>  See also  Key objects: homeKey object  homeKey object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1216,
    "title": "Key objects: moveDownKey object",
    "url": "59086.htm",
    "text": "The moveDownKey graphic object element creates or modifies a move down key object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  moveDownKey object attributes and elements  moveDownKey object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1217,
    "title": "moveDownKey object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338005.htm",
    "text": "The moveDownKey object has the following attributes and elements:  moveDownKey object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  blink  description  highlightColor  shape  linkedObject  sendPressTo  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  touch  borderColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  backStyle  backColor  patternColor  patternStyle  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the move down key object.  caption element attributes:  caption  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the move down key object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the move down key object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Key objects: moveDownKey object  moveDownKey object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1218,
    "title": "moveDownKey object example",
    "url": "338006.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the moveDownKey object:  <moveDownKey name=\"MoveDownButton1\" height=\"33\" width=\"52\" left=\"91\" top=\"126\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" autoRepeatDelay=\"400\" autoRepeatRate=\"0\" audio=\"true\" blink=\"false\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" shape=\"rectangle\" linkedObject=\"\" sendPressTo=\"objectWithFocus\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" touch=\"true\" borderColor=\"navy\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" backStyle=\"solid\" backColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" keyAssignment=\"K4\">  <caption caption=\"\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Arrow Down\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TagS2 < 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </moveDownKey>  See also  Key objects: moveDownKey object  moveDownKey object attributes and elements   "
  },
  {
    "id": 1219,
    "title": "Key objects: moveLeftKey object",
    "url": "59082.htm",
    "text": "The moveLeftKey graphic object element creates or modifies a move left key object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  moveLeftKey object attributes and elements  moveLeftKey object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1220,
    "title": "moveLeftKey object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338007.htm",
    "text": "The moveLeftKey object has the following attributes and elements:  moveLeftKey object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  blink  description  highlightColor  shape  linkedObject  sendPressTo  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  touch  borderColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  backStyle  backColor  patternColor  patternStyle  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the move left key object.  caption element attributes:  caption  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the move left key object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the move left key object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Key objects: moveLeftKey object  moveLeftKey object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1221,
    "title": "moveLeftKey object example",
    "url": "338008.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the moveLeftKey object:  <moveLeftKey name=\"MoveLeftButton1\" height=\"37\" width=\"52\" left=\"87\" top=\"27\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" autoRepeatDelay=\"400\" autoRepeatRate=\"0\" audio=\"true\" blink=\"false\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" shape=\"rectangle\" linkedObject=\"\" sendPressTo=\"objectWithFocus\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" touch=\"true\" borderColor=\"navy\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" backStyle=\"solid\" backColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\">  <caption caption=\"Move Left\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Arrow Left\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TagS2 < 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </moveLeftKey>  See also  Key objects: moveLeftKey object  moveLeftKey object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1222,
    "title": "Key objects: moveRightKey object",
    "url": "59084.htm",
    "text": "The moverightKey graphic object element creates or modifies a move right key object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  moveRightKey object attributes and elements  moveRightKey object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1223,
    "title": "moveRightKey object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338009.htm",
    "text": "The moveRightKey object has the following attributes and elements;  moveRightKey object attributes:  name  height  width  right  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  blink  description  highlightColor  shape  linkedObject  sendPressTo  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  touch  borderColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  backStyle  backColor  patternColor  patternStyle  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the move right key object.  caption element attributes:  caption  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the move right key object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the move right key object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Key objects: moveRightKey object  moveRightKey object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1224,
    "title": "moveRightKey object example",
    "url": "338010.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the moveRightKey object:  <moverightKey name=\"MoveRightButton1\" height=\"37\" width=\"52\" right=\"87\" top=\"27\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" autoRepeatDelay=\"400\" autoRepeatRate=\"0\" audio=\"true\" blink=\"false\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" shape=\"rectangle\" linkedObject=\"\" sendPressTo=\"objectWithFocus\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" touch=\"true\" borderColor=\"navy\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" backStyle=\"solid\" backColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\">  <caption caption=\"Move Right\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Arrow right\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TagS2 < 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </moverightKey>  See also  Key objects: moveRightKey object  moveRightKey object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1225,
    "title": "Key objects: moveUpKey object",
    "url": "59088.htm",
    "text": "The moveUpKey graphic object element creates or modifies a move up key object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  moveUpKey object attributes and elements  moveUpKey object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1226,
    "title": "moveUpKey object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338011.htm",
    "text": "The moveUpKey object has the following attributes and elements:  moveUpKey object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  blink  description  highlightColor  shape  linkedObject  sendPressTo  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  touch  borderColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  backStyle  backColor  patternColor  patternStyle  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the move up key object.  caption element attributes:  caption  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the move up key object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the move up key object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Key objects: moveUpKey object  moveUpKey object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1227,
    "title": "moveUpKey object example",
    "url": "338012.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the moveUpKey object:  <moveUpKey name=\"MoveUpButton2\" height=\"36\" width=\"56\" left=\"93\" top=\"171\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" autoRepeatDelay=\"400\" autoRepeatRate=\"0\" audio=\"true\" blink=\"false\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" shape=\"rectangle\" linkedObject=\"\" sendPressTo=\"objectWithFocus\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" touch=\"true\" borderColor=\"navy\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" backStyle=\"solid\" backColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" keyAssignment=\"K3\">  <caption caption=\"\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Arrow Up\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TagS2 < 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </moveUpKey>  See also  Key objects: moveUpKey object  moveUpKey object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1228,
    "title": "Key objects: pageDownKey object",
    "url": "59090.htm",
    "text": "The pageDownKey graphic object element creates or modifies a page down key object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  pageDownKey object attributes and elements  pageDownKey object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1229,
    "title": "pageDownKey object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338014.htm",
    "text": "The pageDownKey object has the following attributes and elements:  pageDownKey object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  blink  description  highlightColor  shape  linkedObject  sendPressTo  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  touch  borderColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  backStyle  backColor  patternColor  patternStyle  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the page down key object.  caption element attributes:  caption  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the page down key object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the page down key object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Key objects: pageDownKey object  pageDownKey object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1230,
    "title": "pageDownKey object example",
    "url": "338015.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the pageDownKey object:  <pageDownKey name=\"PageDownButton1\" height=\"41\" width=\"52\" left=\"21\" top=\"222\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" autoRepeatDelay=\"400\" autoRepeatRate=\"0\" audio=\"true\" blink=\"false\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" shape=\"rectangle\" linkedObject=\"\" sendPressTo=\"objectWithFocus\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" touch=\"true\" borderColor=\"navy\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" backStyle=\"solid\" backColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" keyAssignment=\"K2\">  <caption caption=\"\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Page Down\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TagS2 < 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </pageDownKey>  See also  Key objects: pageDownKey object  pageDownKey object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1231,
    "title": "Key objects: pageUpKey object",
    "url": "59092.htm",
    "text": "The pageUpKey graphic object element creates or modifies a page down key object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  pageUpKey object attributes and elements  pageUpKey object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1232,
    "title": "pageUpKey object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338016.htm",
    "text": "The pageUpKey object has the following attributes and elements:  pageUpKey object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  blink  description  highlightColor  shape  linkedObject  sendPressTo  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  touch  borderColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  backStyle  backColor  patternColor  patternStyle  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the page up key object.  caption element attributes:  caption  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the page up key object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the page up key object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Key objects: pageUpKey object  pageUpKey object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1233,
    "title": "pageUpKey object example",
    "url": "338017.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the pageUpKey object:  <pageUpKey name=\"PageUpButton1\" height=\"37\" width=\"52\" left=\"102\" top=\"222\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" autoRepeatDelay=\"400\" autoRepeatRate=\"0\" audio=\"true\" blink=\"false\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" shape=\"rectangle\" linkedObject=\"\" sendPressTo=\"objectWithFocus\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" touch=\"true\" borderColor=\"navy\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" backStyle=\"solid\" backColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" keyAssignment=\"K1\">  <caption caption=\"\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Page Up\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"If TagS2 < 10 Then 0 Else 1\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </pageUpKey>  See also  Key objects: pageUpKey object  pageUpKey object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1234,
    "title": "User management objects: addUserGroup object",
    "url": "311610.htm",
    "text": "The addUserGroup object element creates or modifies an add user/group button object on a graphic display.  The addUserGroup object element must be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  addUserGroup object attributes and elements  addUserGroup object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1235,
    "title": "addUserGroup object attributes and elements",
    "url": "314660.htm",
    "text": "The addUserGroup object has the following attributes and elements:  addUserGroup attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  rectangle  touch  blink  endColor  gradientStop  gradientDirection  gradientShadingStyle  RequireElectronicSignature  AllowBlankComment  RequireReAuthentication  RequireCounterSignature  AuthorizedGroup  ESDomainNameVisible  ESDomainNameType  ESDomainName  VariableDomainName  ESDomainNameDisable  caption element and attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  imageSettings element and attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  animateVisibilit element  animateVisibilit attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  User management objects: addUserGroup object  addUserGroup object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1236,
    "title": "addUserGroup object example",
    "url": "314661.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the addUserGroup object.  <addUserGroupButton name=\"AddUserGroupButton1\" height=\"100\" width=\"100\" left=\"27\" top=\"114\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"#E0E0E0\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" endColor=\"white\" gradientStop=\"50\" gradientDirection=\"gradientDirectionHorizontal\" gradientShadingStyle=\"gradientHorizontalFromRight\" RequireElectronicSignature=\"false\" AllowBlankComment=\"false\" RequireReAuthentication=\"false\" RequireCounterSignature=\"false\" AuthorizedGroup=\"Administrators\" ESDomainNameVisible=\"false\" ESDomainNameType=\"ESDomainNameConstant\" ESDomainName=\"\" VariableDomainName=\"\" ESDomainNameDisable=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"true\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Add\" color=\"navy\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"bottomCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"48x48 Add User\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"Visible\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </addUserGroupButton>  See also  User management objects: addUserGroup object  addUserGroup object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1237,
    "title": "User management objects: deleteUserGroup object",
    "url": "311611.htm",
    "text": "The deleteUserGroup object element creates or modifies a delete user/group button object on a graphic display.  The deleteUserGroup object element must be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  deleteUserGroup object attributes and elements  deleteUserGroup object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1238,
    "title": "deleteUserGroup object attributes and elements",
    "url": "314662.htm",
    "text": "The deleteUserGroup object has the following attributes and elements:  deleteUserGroup attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  endColor  gradientStop  gradientDirection  gradientShadingStyle  RequireElectronicSignature  AllowBlankComment  RequireReAuthentication  RequireCounterSignature  AuthorizedGroup  ESDomainNameVisible  ESDomainNameType  ESDomainName  VariableDomainName  ESDomainNameDisable  caption element and attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  imageSettings element and attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  animateVisibilit element  animateVisibilit attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  User management objects: deleteUserGroup object  deleteUserGroup object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1239,
    "title": "deleteUserGroup object example",
    "url": "314663.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the deleteUserGroup object.  <deleteUserGroupButton name=\"DeleteUserGroupButton1\" height=\"100\" width=\"100\" left=\"26\" top=\"224\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"#E0E0E0\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" endColor=\"white\" gradientStop=\"50\" gradientDirection=\"gradientDirectionHorizontal\" gradientShadingStyle=\"gradientHorizontalFromRight\" RequireElectronicSignature=\"false\" AllowBlankComment=\"false\" RequireReAuthentication=\"false\" RequireCounterSignature=\"false\" AuthorizedGroup=\"\" ESDomainNameVisible=\"false\" ESDomainNameType=\"ESDomainNameConstant\" ESDomainName=\"\" VariableDomainName=\"\" ESDomainNameDisable=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"true\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Delete\" color=\"navy\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"bottomCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"48x48 Delete User\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"Visible\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </deleteUserGroupButton>  See also  User management objects: deleteUserGroup object  deleteUserGroup object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1240,
    "title": "User management objects: modifyGroupMembership object",
    "url": "311612.htm",
    "text": "The modifyGroupMembership object element creates or modifies a modify group membership button object on a graphic display.  The modifyGroupMembership object element must be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  modifyGroupMembership object attributes and elements  modifyGroupMembership object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1241,
    "title": "modifyGroupMembership object attributes and elements",
    "url": "314664.htm",
    "text": "The modifyGroupMembership object has the following attributes and elements:  modifyGroupMembership attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  endColor  gradientStop  gradientDirection  gradientShadingStyle  RequireElectronicSignature  AllowBlankComment  RequireReAuthentication  RequireCounterSignature  AuthorizedGroup  ESDomainNameVisible  ESDomainNameType  ESDomainName  VariableDomainName  ESDomainNameDisable  caption element and attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  imageSettings element and attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  animateVisibilit element  animateVisibilit attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  User management objects: modifyGroupMembership object  modifyGroupMembership object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1242,
    "title": "modifyGroupMembership object example",
    "url": "314665.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the modifyGroupMembership object.  <modifyGroupMembershipButton name=\"ModifyGroupMembershipButton1\" height=\"100\" width=\"100\" left=\"140\" top=\"224\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"#E0E0E0\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" endColor=\"white\" gradientStop=\"50\" gradientDirection=\"gradientDirectionHorizontal\" gradientShadingStyle=\"gradientHorizontalFromRight\" RequireElectronicSignature=\"false\" AllowBlankComment=\"false\" RequireReAuthentication=\"false\" RequireCounterSignature=\"false\" AuthorizedGroup=\"\" ESDomainNameVisible=\"false\" ESDomainNameType=\"ESDomainNameConstant\" ESDomainName=\"\" VariableDomainName=\"\" ESDomainNameDisable=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"true\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Change Group\" color=\"navy\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"bottomCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"48x48 Change Group\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"Visible\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </modifyGroupMembershipButton>  See also  User management objects: modifyGroupMembership object  modifyGroupMembership object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1243,
    "title": "User management objects: unlockUser object",
    "url": "311613.htm",
    "text": "The unlockUser object element creates or modifies an unlock user button object on a graphic display.  The unlockUser object element must be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  unlockUser object attributes and elements  unlockUser object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1244,
    "title": "unlockUser object attributes and elements",
    "url": "314666.htm",
    "text": "The unlockUser object has the following attributes and elements:  unlockUser attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  endColor  gradientStop  gradientDirection  gradientShadingStyle  RequireElectronicSignature  AllowBlankComment  RequireReAuthentication  RequireCounterSignature  AuthorizedGroup  ESDomainNameVisible  ESDomainNameType  ESDomainName  VariableDomainName  ESDomainNameDisable  caption element and attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  imageSettings element and attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  animateVisibilit element  animateVisibilit attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  User management objects: unlockUser object  unlockUser object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1245,
    "title": "unlockUser object example",
    "url": "314667.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the unlockUser object.  <unlockUserButton name=\"UnlockUserButton3\" height=\"100\" width=\"100\" left=\"253\" top=\"339\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"#E0E0E0\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" endColor=\"white\" gradientStop=\"50\" gradientDirection=\"gradientDirectionHorizontal\" gradientShadingStyle=\"gradientHorizontalFromRight\" RequireElectronicSignature=\"false\" AllowBlankComment=\"false\" RequireReAuthentication=\"false\" RequireCounterSignature=\"false\" AuthorizedGroup=\"\" ESDomainNameVisible=\"false\" ESDomainNameType=\"ESDomainNameConstant\" ESDomainName=\"\" VariableDomainName=\"\" ESDomainNameDisable=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"true\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Unlock\" color=\"navy\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"bottomCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"48x48 Unlock User\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"Visible\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </unlockUserButton>  See also  User management objects: unlockUser object  unlockUser object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1246,
    "title": "User management objects: enableUser object",
    "url": "311614.htm",
    "text": "The enableUser object element creates or modifies an enable user button object on a graphic display.  The enableUser object element must be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  enableUser object attributes and elements  enableUser object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1247,
    "title": "enableUser object attributes and elements",
    "url": "314668.htm",
    "text": "The enableUser object has the following attributes and elements:  enableUser attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  endColor  gradientStop  gradientDirection  gradientShadingStyle  RequireElectronicSignature  AllowBlankComment  RequireReAuthentication  RequireCounterSignature  AuthorizedGroup  ESDomainNameVisible  ESDomainNameType  ESDomainName  VariableDomainName  ESDomainNameDisable  caption element and attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  imageSettings element and attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  animateVisibilit element  animateVisibilit attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  User management objects: enableUser object  enableUser object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1248,
    "title": "enableUser object example",
    "url": "314669.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the enableUser object.  <enableUserButton name=\"EnableUserButton2\" height=\"100\" width=\"100\" left=\"253\" top=\"114\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"#E0E0E0\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" endColor=\"white\" gradientStop=\"50\" gradientDirection=\"gradientDirectionHorizontal\" gradientShadingStyle=\"gradientHorizontalFromRight\" RequireElectronicSignature=\"false\" AllowBlankComment=\"false\" RequireReAuthentication=\"false\" RequireCounterSignature=\"false\" AuthorizedGroup=\"\" ESDomainNameVisible=\"false\" ESDomainNameType=\"ESDomainNameConstant\" ESDomainName=\"\" VariableDomainName=\"\" ESDomainNameDisable=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"true\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Enable\" color=\"navy\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"bottomCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"48x48 Enable User\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"Visible\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </enableUserButton>  See also  User management objects: enableUser object  enableUser object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1249,
    "title": "User management objects: disableUser object",
    "url": "311615.htm",
    "text": "The disableUser object element creates or modifies a disable user button object on a graphic display.  The disableUser object element must be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  disableUser object attributes and elements  diableUser object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1250,
    "title": "disableUser object attributes and elements",
    "url": "314670.htm",
    "text": "The disableUser object has the following attributes and elements:  disableUser attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  endColor  gradientStop  gradientDirection  gradientShadingStyle  RequireElectronicSignature  AllowBlankComment  RequireReAuthentication  RequireCounterSignature  AuthorizedGroup  ESDomainNameVisible  ESDomainNameType  ESDomainName  VariableDomainName  ESDomainNameDisable  caption element and attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  imageSettings element and attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  animateVisibilit element  animateVisibilit attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  User management objects: disableUser object  diableUser object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1251,
    "title": "diableUser object example",
    "url": "314671.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the diableUser object.  <disableUserButton name=\"DisableUserButton1\" height=\"100\" width=\"100\" left=\"253\" top=\"224\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"#E0E0E0\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" endColor=\"white\" gradientStop=\"50\" gradientDirection=\"gradientDirectionHorizontal\" gradientShadingStyle=\"gradientHorizontalFromRight\" RequireElectronicSignature=\"false\" AllowBlankComment=\"false\" RequireReAuthentication=\"false\" RequireCounterSignature=\"false\" AuthorizedGroup=\"\" ESDomainNameVisible=\"false\" ESDomainNameType=\"ESDomainNameConstant\" ESDomainName=\"\" VariableDomainName=\"\" ESDomainNameDisable=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"true\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Disable\" color=\"navy\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"bottomCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"48x48 Disable User\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"Visible\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </disableUserButton>  See also  User management objects: disableUser object  disableUser object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1252,
    "title": "User management objects: loginButton object",
    "url": "59116.htm",
    "text": "The loginButton object element creates or modifies a login button object on a graphic display.  The loginButton object element must be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  loginButton object attributes and elements  loginButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1253,
    "title": "loginButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "314672.htm",
    "text": "The loginButton object has the following attributes and elements:  loginButton attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  endColor  gradientStop  gradientDirection  gradientShadingStyle  domainNameVisible  domainNameDisable  hideUserNameEntry  useVariableDomainName  domainName  caption element and attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  imageSettings element and attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  animateVisibilit element  animateVisibilit attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  User management objects: loginButton object  loginButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1254,
    "title": "loginButton object example",
    "url": "314673.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the loginButton object.  <loginButton name=\"LoginButton1\" height=\"50\" width=\"50\" left=\"27\" top=\"50\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"silver\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"blue\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" endColor=\"white\" gradientStop=\"50\" gradientDirection=\"gradientDirectionHorizontal\" gradientShadingStyle=\"gradientHorizontalFromRight\" domainNameVisible=\"false\" domainNameDisable=\"false\" hideUserNameEntry=\"false\" useVariableDomainName=\"false\" domainName=\"\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"\" color=\"#0000C0\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"solid\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"48x48 Login\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"Visible\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </loginButton>  See also  User management objects: loginButton object  loginButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1255,
    "title": "User management objects: logoutButton object",
    "url": "59119.htm",
    "text": "The logoutButton object element creates or modifies a logout button object on a graphic display.  The logoutButton object element must be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  logoutButton object attributes and elements  logoutButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1256,
    "title": "logoutButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "314674.htm",
    "text": "The logoutButton object has the following attributes and elements:  logoutButton attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  endColor  gradientStop  gradientDirection  gradientShadingStyle  showDisplayOnLogout  display  parameterFile  parameterList  parameterType  caption element and attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  imageSettings element and attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  animateVisibilit element  animateVisibilit attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  User management objects: logoutButton object  logoutButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1257,
    "title": "logoutButton object example",
    "url": "314675.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the logoutButton object.  <logoutButton name=\"LogoutButton2\" height=\"50\" width=\"50\" left=\"253\" top=\"50\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"#A0A0A4\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" endColor=\"white\" gradientStop=\"50\" gradientDirection=\"gradientDirectionHorizontal\" gradientShadingStyle=\"gradientHorizontalFromRight\" showDisplayOnLogout=\"false\" display=\"\" parameterFile=\"\" parameterList=\"\" parameterType=\"parameterFile\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Logout\" color=\"#0000C0\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"48x48 Logout\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"Visible\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </logoutButton>  See also  User management objects: logoutButton object  logoutButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1258,
    "title": "User management objects: passwordButton object",
    "url": "59353.htm",
    "text": "The passwordButton object element creates or modifies a password button object on a graphic display.  The passwordButton object element must be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  passwordButton object attributes and elements  passwordButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1259,
    "title": "passwordButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "314676.htm",
    "text": "The passwordButton object has the following attributes and elements:  passwordButton attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  endColor  gradientStop  gradientDirection  gradientShadingStyle  modeType  RequireElectronicSignature  AllowBlankComment  RequireReAuthentication  RequireCounterSignature  AuthorizedGroup  ESDomainNameVisible  ESDomainNameType  ESDomainName  VariableDomainName  ESDomainNameDisable  caption element and attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  imageSettings element and attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  animateVisibilit element  animateVisibilit attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  User management objects: passwordButton object  passwordButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1260,
    "title": "passwordButton object example",
    "url": "314677.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the passwordButton object.  <passwordButton name=\"PasswordButton1\" height=\"100\" width=\"100\" left=\"140\" top=\"114\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"#E0E0E0\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" endColor=\"white\" gradientStop=\"50\" gradientDirection=\"gradientDirectionHorizontal\" gradientShadingStyle=\"gradientHorizontalFromRight\" modeType=\"AnyUserMode\" RequireElectronicSignature=\"false\" AllowBlankComment=\"false\" RequireReAuthentication=\"false\" RequireCounterSignature=\"false\" AuthorizedGroup=\"\" ESDomainNameVisible=\"false\" ESDomainNameType=\"ESDomainNameConstant\" ESDomainName=\"\" VariableDomainName=\"\" ESDomainNameDisable=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"true\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Set Password\" color=\"navy\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"bottomCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"48x48 Config User\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"Visible\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </passwordButton>  See also  User management objects: passwordButton object  passwordButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1261,
    "title": "User management objects: changeUserProperties object",
    "url": "311616.htm",
    "text": "The changeUserProperties object element creates or modifies a change user properties button object on a graphic display.  The changeUserProperties object element must be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  changeUserProperties object attributes and elements  changeUserProperties object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1262,
    "title": "changeUserProperties object attributes and elements",
    "url": "314678.htm",
    "text": "The changeUserProperties object has the following attributes and elements:  changeUserProperties attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  endColor  gradientStop  gradientDirection  gradientShadingStyle  RequireElectronicSignature  AllowBlankComment  RequireReAuthentication  RequireCounterSignature  AuthorizedGroup  ESDomainNameVisible  ESDomainNameType  ESDomainName  VariableDomainName  ESDomainNameDisable  caption element and attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  imageSettings element and attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  animateVisibilit element  animateVisibilit attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  User management objects: changeUserProperties object  changeUserProperties object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1263,
    "title": "changeUserProperties object example",
    "url": "314679.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the changeUserProperties object.  <changeUserPropertiesButton name=\"ChangeUserPropertiesButton1\" height=\"100\" width=\"100\" left=\"140\" top=\"339\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"#E0E0E0\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" endColor=\"white\" gradientStop=\"50\" gradientDirection=\"gradientDirectionHorizontal\" gradientShadingStyle=\"gradientHorizontalFromRight\" RequireElectronicSignature=\"false\" AllowBlankComment=\"false\" RequireReAuthentication=\"false\" RequireCounterSignature=\"false\" AuthorizedGroup=\"\" ESDomainNameVisible=\"false\" ESDomainNameType=\"ESDomainNameConstant\" ESDomainName=\"\" VariableDomainName=\"\" ESDomainNameDisable=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"true\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Chg Property\" color=\"navy\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"bottomCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"48x48 Chg User Property\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"Visible\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </changeUserPropertiesButton>  See also  User management objects: changeUserProperties object  changeUserProperties object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1264,
    "title": "Advanced objects: controlListSelector object",
    "url": "59095.htm",
    "text": "The controlListSelector graphic object element creates or modifies a control list selector graphic object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  controlListSelector object attributes and elements  controlListSelector object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1265,
    "title": "controlListSelector object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338150.htm",
    "text": "The controlListSelector object has the following attributes and elements:  controlListSelector object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  selectionForeColor  selectionBackColor  description  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  keyNavigation  blink  wrapAround  writeOnEnter  enterKeyControlDelay  enterKeyHandshakeTime  enterKeyHoldTime  handshakeReset  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  captionTruncate  setLastStateId  elements  States  The states element corresponds to the States tab of the control list selector object.  State element  The state element must be located within a states element.  State element attributes:  stateId  value  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the States tab of the control list selector object. The caption element must be located within a state element.  caption element attributes:  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the control list selector object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the control list selector object. The connections element must be located within an object element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the control list selector object. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  name  name  name  expression  See also  Advanced objects: controlListSelector object  controlListSelector object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1266,
    "title": "controlListSelector object example",
    "url": "338152.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the controlListSelector object:  <controlListSelector name=\"ControlListSelector1\" height=\"114\" width=\"100\" left=\"11\" top=\"2\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backColor=\"navy\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"8\" selectionForeColor=\"navy\" selectionBackColor=\"white\" description=\"Control List Selector 1\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" keyNavigation=\"true\" blink=\"false\" wrapAround=\"true\" writeOnEnter=\"true\" enterKeyControlDelay=\"400\" enterKeyHandshakeTime=\"4\" enterKeyHoldTime=\"250\" handshakeReset=\"nonZeroValue\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" captionTruncate=\"word\" setLastStateId=\"5\">  <states>  <state stateId=\"0\" value=\"0\">  <caption caption=\"Control\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"left\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"1\" value=\"1\">  <caption caption=\"List\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"left\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"2\" value=\"2\">  <caption caption=\"Selector\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"left\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"3\" value=\"3\">  <caption caption=\"Three\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"left\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"4\" value=\"4\">  <caption caption=\"Fore!\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"left\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  </states>  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag4\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Value\" expression=\"TagS2\" />  <connection name=\"Enter\" expression=\"TestS2\" />  <connection name=\"Enter Handshake\" expression=\"n7\" />  </connections>  </controlListSelector>  See also  Advanced objects: controlListSelector object  controlListSelector object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1267,
    "title": "Advanced objects: pilotedControlListSelector object",
    "url": "59099.htm",
    "text": "The pilotedControlListSelector graphic object element creates or modifies a piloted control list selector graphic object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  pilotedControlListSelector object attributes and elements  pilotedControlListSelector object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1268,
    "title": "pilotedControlListSelector object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338153.htm",
    "text": "The pilotedControlListSelector object has the following attributes and elements:  pilotedControlListSelector object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  selectionForeColor  selectionBackColor  description  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  keyNavigation  blink  wrapAround  writeOnEnter  enterKeyControlDelay  enterKeyHandshakeTime  enterKeyHoldTime  handshakeReset  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  captionTruncate  setLastStateId  elements  States  The states element corresponds to the States tab of the piloted control list selector object.  State element  The state element must be located within a states element.  State element attributes:  stateId  value  access  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the States tab of the piloted control list selector object. The caption element must be located within a state element.  caption element attributes:  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the piloted control list selector object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the piloted control list selector object. The connections element must be located within an object element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the piloted control list selector object. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  name  name  name  name  name  name  name  expression  See also  Advanced objects: pilotedControlListSelector object  pilotedControlListSelector object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1269,
    "title": "pilotedControlListSelector object example",
    "url": "338154.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the pilotedControlListSelector object:  <pilotedControlListSelector name=\"PilotedListSelector1\" height=\"107\" width=\"130\" left=\"13\" top=\"124\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backColor=\"#00FFD8\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"8\" selectionForeColor=\"#E0E0E0\" selectionBackColor=\"red\" description=\"\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" keyNavigation=\"true\" blink=\"false\" wrapAround=\"true\" writeOnEnter=\"true\" enterKeyControlDelay=\"400\" enterKeyHandshakeTime=\"4\" enterKeyHoldTime=\"250\" handshakeReset=\"nonZeroValue\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" captionTruncate=\"word\" setLastStateId=\"5\">  <states>  <state stateId=\"0\" value=\"0\" access=\"operatorAndRemote\">  <caption caption=\"/*S:0 system\\Minute*/Piloted State 0\" color=\"purple\" backColor=\"#FFC0FF\" backStyle=\"solid\" alignment=\"left\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"1\" value=\"1\" access=\"operator\">  <caption caption=\"/*N:5 system\\Second NOFILL DP:0*/Piloted State 1\" color=\"#008C00\" backColor=\"#80FF80\" backStyle=\"solid\" alignment=\"left\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"2\" value=\"2\" access=\"remote\">  <caption caption=\"/*SDT*/Piloted State 2\" color=\"black\" backColor=\"#E0E0E0\" backStyle=\"solid\" alignment=\"left\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"3\" value=\"3\" access=\"none\">  <caption caption=\"Piloted State 3\" color=\"#404000\" backColor=\"#C0C000\" backStyle=\"solid\" alignment=\"left\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  <state stateId=\"4\" value=\"4\" access=\"operatorAndRemote\">  <caption caption=\"Piloted State 4\" color=\"#000058\" backColor=\"#00FFD8\" backStyle=\"solid\" alignment=\"left\" blink=\"false\" />  </state>  </states>  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag4\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Value\" expression=\"TagS2\" />  <connection name=\"Indicator\" expression=\"If TestS2 > 20 Then 1 Else 0\" />  <connection name=\"Remote Access\" expression=\"If system\\Hour < 20 Then 0 Else 1\" />  <connection name=\"Top Position\" expression=\"TestS2\" />  <connection name=\"Visible States\" expression=\"TestTag4\" />  <connection name=\"Enter\" expression=\"n7\" />  <connection name=\"Enter Handshake\" expression=\"TestTag7\" />  </connections>  </pilotedControlListSelector>  See also  Advanced objects: pilotedControlListSelector object  pilotedControlListSelector object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1270,
    "title": "Advanced objects: displayPrintButton object",
    "url": "59107.htm",
    "text": "The displayPrintButton graphic object element creates or modifies a display print button graphic object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  displayPrintButton object attributes and elements  displayPrintButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1271,
    "title": "displayPrintButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338157.htm",
    "text": "The displayPrintButton object has the following attributes and elements:  displayPrintButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  captionOnBorder  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the display print button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the display print button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the display print button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Advanced objects: displayPrintButton object  displayPrintButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1272,
    "title": "displayPrintButton object example",
    "url": "338158.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the displayPrintButton object:  <displayPrintButton name=\"DisplayPrintButton3\" height=\"78\" width=\"88\" left=\"14\" top=\"239\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"Print Display\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" captionOnBorder=\"False\" keyAssignment=\"F3\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Goudy Old Style\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"DISPLAY PRINT\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"topCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Page Up\" alignment=\"bottomCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag4\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </displayPrintButton>  See also  Advanced objects: displayPrintButton object  displayPrintButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1273,
    "title": "Advanced objects: languageSwitchButton object",
    "url": "59350.htm",
    "text": "The languageSwitchButton graphic object element creates or modifies a language switch button graphic object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  languageSwitchButton object attributes and elements  languageSwitchButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1274,
    "title": "languageSwitchButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338159.htm",
    "text": "The languageSwitchButton object has the following attributes and elements:  languageSwitchButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  language  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the language switch button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the language switch button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the language switch button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Advanced objects: languageSwitchButton object  languageSwitchButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1275,
    "title": "languageSwitchButton object example",
    "url": "338161.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the languageSwitchButton object:  <languageSwitchButton name=\"LanguageSwitchButton1\" height=\"101\" width=\"157\" left=\"38\" top=\"37\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" language=\"en-US\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"cyan\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Goudy Stout\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"SWITCH\" color=\"cyan\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"solid\" alignment=\"topCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag4\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </languageSwitchButton>  See also  Advanced objects: languageSwitchButton object  languageSwitchButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1276,
    "title": "Advanced objects: localMessageDisplay object",
    "url": "59110.htm",
    "text": "The localMessageDisplay graphic object element creates or modifies a local message display graphic object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  localMessageDisplay object attributes and elements  localMessageDisplay object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1277,
    "title": "localMessageDisplay object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338162.htm",
    "text": "The localMessageDisplay object has the following attributes and elements:  localMessageDisplay object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backColor  backStyle  foreColor  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  borderColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  patternColor  patternStyle  blink  description  messageFile  wordWrap  alignment  elements  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the local message display object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the local message display object. The connections element must be located within an object element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the local message display object. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  name  See also  Advanced objects: localMessageDisplay object  localMessageDisplay object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1278,
    "title": "localMessageDisplay object example",
    "url": "338163.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the localMessageDisplay object:  <localMessageDisplay name=\"LocalMessageDisplay1\" height=\"59\" width=\"203\" left=\"16\" top=\"342\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"solid\" foreColor=\"white\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" borderColor=\"navy\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"8\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" blink=\"false\" description=\"Local Messages\" messageFile=\"Lclmsg2\" wordWrap=\"true\" alignment=\"middleCenter\">  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag4\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Value\" expression=\"n7\" />  </connections>  </localMessageDisplay>  See also  Advanced objects: localMessageDisplay object  localMessageDisplay object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1279,
    "title": "Advanced objects: macroButton object",
    "url": "59126.htm",
    "text": "The macroButton graphic object element creates or modifies a macro button graphic object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  macroButton object attributes and elements  macroButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1280,
    "title": "macroButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338164.htm",
    "text": "The macroButton object has the following attributes and elements:  macroButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  macro  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the macro button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the macro button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the macro button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Advanced objects: macroButton object  macroButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1281,
    "title": "macroButton object example",
    "url": "338165.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the macroButton object:  <macroButton name=\"MacroButton1\" height=\"53\" width=\"100\" left=\"152\" top=\"104\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" macro=\"macro 2\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"olive\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"MACROII\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"yellow\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" keyAssignment=\"F1\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Lucida Blackletter\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"MACROBE\" color=\"maroon\" backColor=\"magenta\" backStyle=\"solid\" alignment=\"topCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"End\" alignment=\"bottomCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag4\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </macroButton>  See also  Advanced objects: macroButton object  macroButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1282,
    "title": "Advanced objects: shutdownButton object",
    "url": "59131.htm",
    "text": "The shutdownButton graphic object element creates or modifies a shutdown button graphic object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  shutdownButton object attributes and elements  shutdownButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1283,
    "title": "shutdownButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338166.htm",
    "text": "The shutdownButton object has the following attributes and elements:  shutdownButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the shutdown button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the shutdown button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the shutdown button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Advanced objects: shutdownButton object  shutdownButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1284,
    "title": "shutdownButton object example",
    "url": "338168.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the shutdownButton object:  <shutdownButton name=\"ShutdownButton6\" height=\"62\" width=\"115\" left=\"158\" top=\"171\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"#A0A0A4\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"Shut Down\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"black\" patternColor=\"#3F3F3F\" patternStyle=\"bricks\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" keyAssignment=\"F6\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"SHUTDOWN\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"topCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Page Down\" alignment=\"bottomCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag4\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </shutdownButton>  See also  Advanced objects: shutdownButton object  shutdownButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1285,
    "title": "Advanced objects: gotoConfigureModeButton object",
    "url": "59134.htm",
    "text": "The gotoConfigureModeButton graphic object element creates or modifies a goto configure mode button graphic object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  gotoConfigureModeButton object attributes and elements  gotoConfigureModeButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1286,
    "title": "gotoConfigureModeButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338169.htm",
    "text": "The gotoConfigureModeButton object has the following attributes and elements:  gotoConfigureModeButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  captionOnBorder  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the goto configure mode button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the goto configure mode button object.  imageSettings element attributes  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the goto configure mode button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Advanced objects: gotoConfigureModeButton object  gotoConfigureModeButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1287,
    "title": "gotoConfigureModeButton object example",
    "url": "338170.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the gotoConfigureModeButton object:  <gotoConfigureModeButton name=\"GotoConfigureModeButton7\" height=\"63\" width=\"186\" left=\"125\" top=\"245\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"#C00000\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"Configure Mode\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"#784000\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" captionOnBorder=\"False\" keyAssignment=\"F7\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial Rounded MT Bold\" fontSize=\"10.2\" bold=\"true\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"CONFIGURE MODE\" color=\"#FFE0C0\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"topLeft\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Home\" alignment=\"bottomRight\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag4\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </gotoConfigureModeButton>  See also  Advanced objects: gotoConfigureModeButton object  gotoConfigureModeButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1288,
    "title": "Advanced objects: timeAndDateDisplay object",
    "url": "59137.htm",
    "text": "The timeAndDateDisplay graphic object element creates or modifies a time and date display graphic object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  timeAndDateDisplay object attributes and elements  timeAndDateDisplay object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1289,
    "title": "timeAndDateDisplay object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338172.htm",
    "text": "The timeAndDateDisplay object has the following attributes and elements:  timeAndDateDisplay object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backColor  foreColor  backStyle  borderColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  patternColor  patternStyle  description  blink  wordWrap  alignment  timeAndDateFormat  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the time and date display object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Advanced objects: timeAndDateDisplay object  timeAndDateDisplay object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1290,
    "title": "timeAndDateDisplay object example",
    "url": "338173.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the timeAndDateDisplay object:  <timeAndDateDisplay name=\"TimeDateDisplay1\" height=\"102\" width=\"259\" left=\"282\" top=\"12\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backColor=\"#FFFF80\" foreColor=\"#004000\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderColor=\"blue\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"8\" patternColor=\"#80FF80\" patternStyle=\"scales\" description=\"Time and Date\" blink=\"true\" wordWrap=\"true\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" timeAndDateFormat=\"shortDateTime\" fontFamily=\"Eras Bold ITC\" fontSize=\"12\" bold=\"true\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag4\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </timeAndDateDisplay>  See also  Advanced objects: timeAndDateDisplay object  timeAndDateDisplay object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1291,
    "title": "Alarm objects: alarmBanner object",
    "url": "59270.htm",
    "text": "The alarmBanner object creates or modifies an alarm banner object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  alarmBanner object attributes and elements  alarmBanner object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1292,
    "title": "alarmBanner object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338175.htm",
    "text": "The alarmBanner object has the following attributes and elements:  alarmBanner object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  borderColor  keyNavigation  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  displayAlarmTime  filteredTriggers  formatAlarmTime  patternStyle  patternColor  foreColor  alignment  useAlarmColors  blink  wordWrap  displayAlarmState  displayInactiveAlarms  displayTriggerLabel  displayTriggerValue  queueNewAlarms  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the alarm banner object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Alarm objects: alarmBanner object  alarmBanner object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1293,
    "title": "alarmBanner object example",
    "url": "338176.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the alarmBanner object:  <alarmBanner name=\"AlarmBanner5\" height=\"39\" width=\"608\" left=\"17\" top=\"189\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backColor=\"#00FFD8\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"8\" description=\"Alarm Banner\" borderColor=\"#0088C8\" keyNavigation=\"true\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" displayAlarmTime=\"true\" filteredTriggers=\"Label2\" formatAlarmTime=\"shortDateTime\" patternStyle=\"none\" patternColor=\"white\" foreColor=\"#400000\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" useAlarmColors=\"false\" blink=\"false\" wordWrap=\"true\" displayAlarmState=\"true\" displayInactiveAlarms=\"false\" displayTriggerLabel=\"false\" displayTriggerValue=\"false\" queueNewAlarms=\"false\">  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag4\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </alarmBanner>  See also  Alarm objects: alarmBanner object  alarmBanner object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1294,
    "title": "Alarm objects: alarmList object",
    "url": "59191.htm",
    "text": "The alarmList graphic object element creates or modifies an alarm list object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  alarmList object attributes and elements  alarmList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1295,
    "title": "alarmList object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338177.htm",
    "text": "The alarmList object has the following attributes and elements:  alarmList object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  selectionForeColor  selectionBackColor  description  borderColor  keyNavigation  wrapAround  displayHeader  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  headerForeColor  headerBackColor  displayAckTime  displayAlarmTime  filteredTriggers  headerTextAckTime  headerTextAlarmTime  headerTextMessage  formatAckTime  formatAlarmTime  displayActiveAckedAlarms  displayActiveUnackedAlarms  displayInactiveAckedAlarms  displayInactiveUnackedAlarms  activeAckedBlink  activeUnackedBlink  inactiveAckedBlink  inactiveUnackedBlink  activeAckedUseAlarmColors  activeUnackedUseAlarmColors  inactiveAckedUseAlarmColors  inactiveUnackedUseAlarmColors  activeAckedBackColor  activeUnackedBackColor  inactiveAckedBackColor  inactiveUnackedBackColor  activeAckedForeColor  activeUnackedForeColor  inactiveAckedForeColor  inactiveUnackedForeColor  displayAckSymbol  ackSymbol  displayActiveSymbol  activeSymbol  selectedAlarmIndicator  linesPerAlarm  wordWrap  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the alarm list object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  connections  This element corresponds to the Connections tab of the alarm list object. The connections element must be located within an object element.  Connection element  This element corresponds to the settings in the Connections tab of the alarm list object. The connection element must be located within a connections element.  connection element attributes:  name  name  name  name  expression  See also  Alarm objects: alarmList object  alarmList object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1296,
    "title": "alarmList object example",
    "url": "338205.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the alarmList object:  <alarmList name=\"AlarmList4\" height=\"105\" width=\"612\" left=\"10\" top=\"228\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backColor=\"#F890F8\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"8\" selectionForeColor=\"#404000\" selectionBackColor=\"#C000C0\" description=\"Alarm List\" borderColor=\"#008C00\" keyNavigation=\"true\" wrapAround=\"false\" displayHeader=\"true\" fontFamily=\"Kino MT\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" headerForeColor=\"#004000\" headerBackColor=\"#80FF80\" displayAckTime=\"true\" displayAlarmTime=\"true\" filteredTriggers=\"Label2\" headerTextAckTime=\"Acknowledge time\" headerTextAlarmTime=\"Alarm time\" headerTextMessage=\"Message\" formatAckTime=\"shortDateTime\" formatAlarmTime=\"shortDateTime\" displayActiveAckedAlarms=\"true\" displayActiveUnackedAlarms=\"true\" displayInactiveAckedAlarms=\"true\" displayInactiveUnackedAlarms=\"true\" activeAckedBlink=\"false\" activeUnackedBlink=\"false\" inactiveAckedBlink=\"false\" inactiveUnackedBlink=\"false\" activeAckedUseAlarmColors=\"true\" activeUnackedUseAlarmColors=\"true\" inactiveAckedUseAlarmColors=\"true\" inactiveUnackedUseAlarmColors=\"true\" activeAckedBackColor=\"red\" activeUnackedBackColor=\"red\" inactiveAckedBackColor=\"red\" inactiveUnackedBackColor=\"red\" activeAckedForeColor=\"white\" activeUnackedForeColor=\"white\" inactiveAckedForeColor=\"white\" inactiveUnackedForeColor=\"white\" displayAckSymbol=\"true\" ackSymbol=\"a\" displayActiveSymbol=\"true\" activeSymbol=\"#\" selectedAlarmIndicator=\"cursor\" linesPerAlarm=\"4\" wordWrap=\"true\">  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag7\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  <connections>  <connection name=\"ActiveAcknowledged\" expression=\"TagS2\" />  <connection name=\"ActiveUnacknowledged\" expression=\"TestTag3\" />  <connection name=\"InactiveAcknowledged\" expression=\"TestTag5\" />  <connection name=\"InactiveUnacknowledged\" expression=\"TestTag8\" />  </connections>  </alarmList>  See also  Alarm objects: alarmList object  alarmList object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1297,
    "title": "Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object",
    "url": "59285.htm",
    "text": "The alarmStatusList graphic object element creates or modifies an alarm status list object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  alarmStatusList object attributes and elements  alarmStatusList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1298,
    "title": "alarmStatusList object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338178.htm",
    "text": "The alarmStatusList object has the following attributes and elements:  alarmStatusList object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  borderColor  keyNavigation  foreColor  selectionForeColor  selectionBackColor  useAlarmColors  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  filteredTriggers  displayTriggerLabel  displayTriggerValue  wrapAround  headerForeColor  headerBackColor  titleActiveAlarmsMode  titleAllAlarmsMode  titlePastAlarmsMode  displayHeader  displayTitle  alarmListMode  widthAccumulatedTime  widthAlarmQuantity  widthMessage  widthTriggerLabel  widthTriggerValue  widthAlarmState  headerTextAccumulatedTime  headerTextAlarmQuantity  headerTextAlarmState  headerTextMessage  headerTextTriggerLabel  headerTextTriggerValue  displayAccumulatedTime  displayAlarmQuantity  displayAlarmState  displayMessage  linesPerAlarm  wordWrap  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the alarm status list object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  alarmStatusList object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1299,
    "title": "alarmStatusList object example",
    "url": "338179.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the alarmStatusList object:  <alarmStatusList name=\"AlarmStatusList5\" height=\"93\" width=\"616\" left=\"21\" top=\"8\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backColor=\"yellow\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"8\" description=\"Alarm Status List\" borderColor=\"maroon\" keyNavigation=\"true\" foreColor=\"magenta\" selectionBackColor=\"navy\" selectionForeColor=\"white\" useAlarmColors=\"false\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" filteredTriggers=\"Label1\" displayTriggerLabel=\"true\" displayTriggerValue=\"true\" wrapAround=\"false\" headerForeColor=\"black\" headerBackColor=\"gray\" titleActiveAlarmsMode=\"Active Alarms\" titleAllAlarmsMode=\"All Alarms\" titlePastAlarmsMode=\"Past Alarms\" displayHeader=\"true\" displayTitle=\"false\" alarmListMode=\"activeAlarms\" widthAccumulatedTime=\"58\" widthAlarmQuantity=\"36\" widthMessage=\"334\" widthTriggerLabel=\"130\" widthTriggerValue=\"42\" widthAlarmState=\"24\" headerTextAccumulatedTime=\"Acc Time\" headerTextAlarmQuantity=\"QTY\" headerTextAlarmState=\"On\" headerTextMessage=\"Message\" headerTextTriggerLabel=\"Trigger\" headerTextTriggerValue=\"Value\" displayAccumulatedTime=\"true\" displayAlarmQuantity=\"true\" displayAlarmState=\"true\" displayMessage=\"true\" linesPerAlarm=\"1\" wordWrap=\"false\">  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag7\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </alarmStatusList>  See also  Alarm objects: alarmStatusList object  alarmStatusList object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1300,
    "title": "Alarm objects: acknowledgeAlarmButton object",
    "url": "59142.htm",
    "text": "The acknowledgeAlarmButton graphic object element creates or modifies an acknowledge alarm button object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  acknowledgeAlarmButton object attributes and elements  acknowledgeAlarmButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1301,
    "title": "acknowledgeAlarmButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338180.htm",
    "text": "The acknowledgeAlarmButton object has the following attributes and elements:  acknowledgeAlarmButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  linkedObject  sendPressTo  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the acknowledge alarm button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the acknowledge alarm button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the acknowledge alarm button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Alarm objects: acknowledgeAlarmButton object  acknowledgeAlarmButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1302,
    "title": "acknowledgeAlarmButton object example",
    "url": "338182.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the acknowledgeAlarmButton object:  <acknowledgeAlarmButton name=\"AcknowledgeAlarmButton1\" height=\"46\" width=\"90\" left=\"14\" top=\"236\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"#FFFF80\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"Acknowledge Alarm Button\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"#00FFD8\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" linkedObject=\"AlarmBanner5\" sendPressTo=\"linkedObject\" keyAssignment=\"F17\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"ACK ALARMS\" color=\"#0000C0\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Enter\" alignment=\"bottomRight\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"#004000\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag4\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </acknowledgeAlarmButton>  See also  Alarm objects: acknowledgeAlarmButton object  acknowledgeAlarmButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1303,
    "title": "Alarm objects: acknowledgeAllAlarmsButton object",
    "url": "59144.htm",
    "text": "The acknowledgeAllAlarmButton graphic object element creates or modifies an acknowledge alarm button object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  acknowledgeAllAlarmsButton object attributes and elements  acknowledgeAllAlarmsButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1304,
    "title": "acknowledgeAllAlarmsButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338183.htm",
    "text": "The acknowledgeAllAlarmsButton object has the following attributes and elements:  acknowledgeAllAlarmsButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  filteredTriggers  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the acknowledge all alarms button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  colo  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the acknowledge all alarms button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the acknowledge all alarms button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Alarm objects: acknowledgeAllAlarmsButton object  acknowledgeAllAlarmsButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1305,
    "title": "acknowledgeAllAlarmsButton object example",
    "url": "338184.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the acknowledgeAllAlarmsButton object:  <acknowledgeAllAlarmsButton name=\"AcknowledgeAllAlarmsButton2\" height=\"70\" width=\"80\" left=\"18\" top=\"290\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"yellow\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"line\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"8\" description=\"Acknowledge All Alarms\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" filteredTriggers=\"Label1, Label2\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Bodoni Book\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Ack All\" color=\"#404000\" backColor=\"#C0C000\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"topLeft\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Enter\" alignment=\"bottomRight\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"purple\" backColor=\"#FFC0FF\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag4\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </acknowledgeAllAlarmsButton>  See also  Alarm objects: acknowledgeAllAlarmsButton object  acknowledgeAllAlarmsButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1306,
    "title": "Alarm objects: alarmStatusModeButton object",
    "url": "59148.htm",
    "text": "The alarmStatusModeButton graphic object element creates or modifies an alarm status mode button object  on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  alarmStatusModeButton object attributes and elements  alarmStatusModeButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1307,
    "title": "alarmStatusModeButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338185.htm",
    "text": "The alarmStatusModeButton object has the following attributes and elements:  alarmStatusModeButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpape  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  linkedObject  sendPressTo  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the alarm status mode button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the alarm status mode button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the alarm status mode button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Alarm objects: alarmStatusModeButton object  alarmStatusModeButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1308,
    "title": "alarmStatusModeButton object example",
    "url": "338186.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the alarmStatusModeButton object:  <alarmStatusModeButton name=\"AlarmStatusModeButton2\" height=\"72\" width=\"80\" left=\"18\" top=\"379\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"Alarm Status Mode\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" linkedObject=\"AlarmList4\" sendPressTo=\"linkedObject\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Bradley Hand ITC\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Alarm Status Mode\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag7\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </alarmStatusModeButton>  See also  Alarm objects: alarmStatusModeButton object  alarmStatusModeButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1309,
    "title": "Alarm objects: clearAlarmBannerButton object",
    "url": "59150.htm",
    "text": "The clearAlarmBannerButton graphic object element creates or modifies a clear alarm banner button object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  clearAlarmBannerButton object attributes and elements  clearAlarmBannerButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1310,
    "title": "clearAlarmBannerButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338187.htm",
    "text": "The clearAlarmBannerButton object has the following attributes and elements:  clearAlarmBannerButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  linkedObject  sendPressTo  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the clear alarm banner button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the clear alarm banner button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the clear alarm banner button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Alarm objects: clearAlarmBannerButton object  clearAlarmBannerButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1311,
    "title": "clearAlarmBannerButton object example",
    "url": "338188.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the clearAlarmBannerButton object:  <clearAlarmBannerButton name=\"ClearAlarmBannerButton2\" height=\"28\" width=\"219\" left=\"130\" top=\"242\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"cyan\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"Clear Alarm Banner\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" linkedObject=\"AlarmBanner5\" sendPressTo=\"linkedObject\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Cooper Black\" fontSize=\"9\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"CLEAR ALARM BANNER\" color=\"#000058\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag7\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </clearAlarmBannerButton>  See also  Alarm objects: clearAlarmBannerButton object  clearAlarmBannerButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1312,
    "title": "Alarm objects: clearAlarmHistoryButton object",
    "url": "59152.htm",
    "text": "The clearAlarmHistoryButton graphic object element creates or modifies a clear alarm history button object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  clearAlarmHistoryButton object attributes and elements  clearAlarmHistoryButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1313,
    "title": "clearAlarmHistoryButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338189.htm",
    "text": "The clearAlarmHistoryButton object has the following attributes and elements:  clearAlarmHistoryButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  filteredTriggers  resetAlarmStatus  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the clear alarm history button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the clear alarm history button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the clear alarm history button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Alarm objects: clearAlarmHistoryButton object  clearAlarmHistoryButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1314,
    "title": "clearAlarmHistoryButton object example",
    "url": "338190.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the clearAlarmHistoryButton object:  <clearAlarmHistoryButton name=\"ClearAlarmHistoryButton1\" height=\"33\" width=\"168\" left=\"128\" top=\"280\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"#00FFD8\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" filteredTriggers=\"Label1\" &nbsp;resetAlarmStatus=\"true\" keyAssignment=\"F16\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Clear alarm history\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"topLeft\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Arrow Right\" alignment=\"middleRight\" backStyle=\"solid\" color=\"purple\" backColor=\"white\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag7\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </clearAlarmHistoryButton>  See also  Alarm objects: clearAlarmHistoryButton object  clearAlarmHistoryButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1315,
    "title": "Alarm objects: printAlarmHistory object",
    "url": "59156.htm",
    "text": "The printAlarmHistory graphic object element creates or modifies a print alarm history button object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  printAlarmHistory object attributes and elements  printAlarmHistory object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1316,
    "title": "printAlarmHistory object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338191.htm",
    "text": "The printAlarmHistory object has the following attributes and elements:  printAlarmHistory object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  printTriggerLabel  printTriggerValue  printAlarmTime  printAcknowledgeTime  printMessage  widthTriggerLabel  widthTriggerValue  headingTitle  filteredTriggers  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the print alarm history button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the print alarm history button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the print alarm history button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Alarm objects: printAlarmHistory object  printAlarmHistory object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1317,
    "title": "printAlarmHistory object example",
    "url": "338192.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the printAlarmHistory object:  <printAlarmHistory name=\"PrintAlarmHistoryButton2\" height=\"48\" width=\"98\" left=\"158\" top=\"322\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"#8C008C\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"Print Alarm History Button\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"#004000\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" printTriggerLabel=\"true\" printTriggerValue=\"true\" printAlarmTime=\"true\" printAcknowledgeTime=\"true\" printMessage=\"true\" widthTriggerLabel=\"20\" widthTriggerValue=\"11\" headingTitle=\"Alarm History\" filteredTriggers=\"Label1, Label2\" keyAssignment=\"F19\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Placard Condensed\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"true\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"PRINT ALARM HISTORY\" color=\"#FF6800\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag4\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </printAlarmHistory>  See also  Alarm objects: printAlarmHistory object  printAlarmHistory object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1318,
    "title": "Alarm objects: printAlarmStatus object",
    "url": "59174.htm",
    "text": "The printAlarmStatus graphic object element creates or modifies a print alarm status button object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  printAlarmStatus object attributes and elements  printAlarmStatus object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1319,
    "title": "printAlarmStatus object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338193.htm",
    "text": "The printAlarmStatus object has the following attributes and elements:  printAlarmStatus object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  printTriggerLabel  printTriggerValue  printMessage  widthTriggerLabel  widthTriggerValue  headingTitle  printAccumulatedTime  printAlarmQuantity  printAlarmState  printType  filteredTriggers  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the print alarm status button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the print alarm status button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the print alarm status button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Alarm objects: printAlarmStatus object  printAlarmStatus object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1320,
    "title": "printAlarmStatus object example",
    "url": "338194.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the printAlarmStatus object:  <printAlarmStatus name=\"PrintAlarmStatusButton3\" height=\"75\" width=\"139\" left=\"129\" top=\"383\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"#004000\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"PRALSTAT\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"#8C8C00\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" printTriggerLabel=\"true\" printTriggerValue=\"true\" printMessage=\"true\" widthTriggerLabel=\"20\" widthTriggerValue=\"11\" headingTitle=\"Alarm Status\" printAccumulatedTime=\"true\" printAlarmQuantity=\"true\" printAlarmState=\"true\" printType=\"all\" filteredTriggers=\"Label1, Label2\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Wide Latin\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"PRINT ALARM STATUS\" color=\"#F890F8\" backColor=\"#580058\" backStyle=\"solid\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag4\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </printAlarmStatus>  See also  Alarm objects: printAlarmStatus object  printAlarmStatus object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1321,
    "title": "Alarm objects: resetAlarmStatusButton object",
    "url": "59184.htm",
    "text": "The resetAlarmStatusButton graphic object element creates or modifies a reset alarm status button object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  resetAlarmStatusButton object attributes and elements  resetAlarmStatusButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1322,
    "title": "resetAlarmStatusButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338195.htm",
    "text": "The resetAlarmStatusButton object has the following attributes and elements:  resetAlarmStatusButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the reset alarm status button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the reset alarm status button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the reset alarm status button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Alarm objects: resetAlarmStatusButton object  resetAlarmStatusButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1323,
    "title": "resetAlarmStatusButton object example",
    "url": "338196.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the resetAlarmStatusButton object:  <resetAlarmStatusButton name=\"ResetAlarmStatusButton4\" height=\"63\" width=\"100\" left=\"495\" top=\"237\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"#FFFF80\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"Reset Alarm Status\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"#404000\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Lucida Blackletter\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"RESET\" color=\"#8C8C00\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Enter\" alignment=\"bottomRight\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"#784000\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag4\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </resetAlarmStatusButton>  See also  Alarm objects: resetAlarmStatusButton object  resetAlarmStatusButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1324,
    "title": "Alarm objects: silenceAlarmsButton object",
    "url": "59186.htm",
    "text": "The silenceAlarmsButton graphic object element creates or modifies a silence alarms button object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  silenceAlarmsButton object attributes and elements  silenceAlarmsButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1325,
    "title": "silenceAlarmsButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338197.htm",
    "text": "The silenceAlarmsButton object has the following attributes and elements:  silenceAlarmsButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the silence alarms button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the silence alarms button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the silence alarms button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Alarm objects: silenceAlarmsButton object  silenceAlarmsButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1326,
    "title": "silenceAlarmsButton object example",
    "url": "338198.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the silenceAlarmsButton object:  <silenceAlarmsButton name=\"SilenceAlarmsButton3\" height=\"66\" width=\"109\" left=\"466\" top=\"306\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"green\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"Silence Alarms\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"#C00000\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" keyAssignment=\"F15\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Lucida Blackletter\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"true\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"SILENCE\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Page Up\" alignment=\"bottomRight\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag7\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </silenceAlarmsButton>  See also  Alarm objects: silenceAlarmsButton object  silenceAlarmsButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1327,
    "title": "Alarm objects: sortAlarmsButton object",
    "url": "59188.htm",
    "text": "The sortAlarmsButton graphic object element creates or modifies a sort alarms button object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  sortAlarmsButton object attributes and elements  sortAlarmsButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1328,
    "title": "sortAlarmsButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338199.htm",
    "text": "The sortAlarmsButton object has the following attributes and elements:  sortAlarmsButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the sort alarms button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the sort alarms button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the sort alarms button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Alarm objects: sortAlarmsButton object  sortAlarmsButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1329,
    "title": "sortAlarmsButton object example",
    "url": "338200.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the sortAlarmsButton object:  <sortAlarmsButton name=\"SortAlarmsButton4\" height=\"78\" width=\"103\" left=\"515\" top=\"386\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"#C0C000\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"Sort Alarms\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"#404000\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" keyAssignment=\"F13\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Impact\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"SORT ALARMS\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Page Down\" alignment=\"bottomRight\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag7\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </sortAlarmsButton>  See also  Alarm objects: sortAlarmsButton object  sortAlarmsButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1330,
    "title": "Audit objects: auditTrailList object",
    "url": "311608.htm",
    "text": "The auditTrailList object element creates or modifies an audit trail list graphic object on a graphic display.  The auditTrailList object element must be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  auditTrailList object attributes and elements  auditTrailList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1331,
    "title": "auditTrailList object attributes and elements",
    "url": "312765.htm",
    "text": "The auditTrailList object has the following attributes and elements:  auditTrailList attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  borderStyle  borderWidth  borderUsesBackColor  backColor  borderColor  foreColor  headerForeColor  headerBackColor  selectionForeColor  selectionBackColor  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  keyNavigation  wrapAround  endColor  gradientStop  gradientDirection  gradientShadingStyle  fillStyle  displayHeader  wordWrap  linesPerAudit  displayAuditOccurredTime  displayAuditSource  displayAuditLocation  displayAuditResource  displayAuditUsername  displayAuditMessage  formatAuditOccurredTime  headerTextAuditOccurredTime  headerTextAuditSource  headerTextAuditLocation  headerTextAuditResource  headerTextAuditUsername  headerTextAuditMessage  columnWidthAuditSource  columnWidthAuditLocation  columnWidthAuditResource  columnWidthAuditUsername  animations element:  animateVisibilit element  animateVisibilit attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  auditTrailList object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1332,
    "title": "auditDetail object example",
    "url": "312767.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the auditTrailList object.  <auditTrailList name=\"AuditTrailList1\" height=\"240\" width=\"639\" left=\"2\" top=\"7\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderWidth=\"8\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" backColor=\"#F0F0F0\" borderColor=\"#F0F0F0\" foreColor=\"black\" headerForeColor=\"black\" headerBackColor=\"silver\" selectionForeColor=\"black\" selectionBackColor=\"#80FFFF\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" keyNavigation=\"true\" wrapAround=\"false\" endColor=\"white\" gradientStop=\"50\" gradientDirection=\"gradientDirectionHorizontal\" gradientShadingStyle=\"gradientHorizontalFromRight\" fillStyle=\"solid\" displayHeader=\"true\" wordWrap=\"true\" linesPerAudit=\"1\" displayAuditOccurredTime=\"true\" displayAuditSource=\"true\" displayAuditLocation=\"true\" displayAuditResource=\"true\" displayAuditUsername=\"true\" displayAuditMessage=\"true\" formatAuditOccurredTime=\"shortDateTime\" headerTextAuditOccurredTime=\"Occurred Time\" headerTextAuditSource=\"Source\" headerTextAuditLocation=\"Location\" headerTextAuditResource=\"Resource\" headerTextAuditUsername=\"Username\" headerTextAuditMessage=\"Message\" columnWidthAuditSource=\"90\" columnWidthAuditLocation=\"90\" columnWidthAuditResource=\"90\" columnWidthAuditUsername=\"90\">  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"AuditTrailListVisibility\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </auditTrailList>  See also  Audit objects: auditTrailList object  auditTrailList object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1333,
    "title": "Audit objects: clearAuditTrailButton object",
    "url": "311607.htm",
    "text": "The clearAuditTrailButton object element creates or modifies a clear audit trail graphic object on a graphic display.  The clearAuditTrailButton object element must be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  clearAuditTrailButton object attributes and elements  clearAuditTrailButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1334,
    "title": "auditTrailList object attributes and elements",
    "url": "312770.htm",
    "text": "The clearAuditTrailButton object has the following attributes and elements:  clearAuditTrailButton attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  endColor  gradientStop  gradientDirection  gradientShadingStyle  RequireElectronicSignature  AllowBlankComment  RequireReAuthentication  RequireCounterSignature  AuthorizedGroup  ESDomainNameVisible  ESDomainNameType  ESDomainName  VariableDomainName  ESDomainNameDisable  caption element and attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  imageSettings element and attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element:  animateVisibilit element  animateVisibilit attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Audit objects: clearAuditTrailButton object  clearAuditTrailButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1335,
    "title": "clearAuditTrailButton object example",
    "url": "312771.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the clearAuditTrailButton object.  <clearAuditTrailButton name=\"ClearAuditTrailButton2\" height=\"48\" width=\"168\" left=\"465\" top=\"256\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raised\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" endColor=\"white\" gradientStop=\"50\" gradientDirection=\"gradientDirectionHorizontal\" gradientShadingStyle=\"gradientHorizontalFromRight\" RequireElectronicSignature=\"true\" AllowBlankComment=\"false\" RequireReAuthentication=\"true\" RequireCounterSignature=\"false\" AuthorizedGroup=\"Administrators\" ESDomainNameVisible=\"false\" ESDomainNameType=\"ESDomainNameConstant\" ESDomainName=\"\" VariableDomainName=\"\" ESDomainNameDisable=\"false\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"Clear Audit Trail\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"clearaudit\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"ClearAuditTrailVisibility\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </clearAuditTrailButton>  See also  Audit objects: clearAuditTrailButton object  clearAuditTrailButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1336,
    "title": "Audit objects: auditTrailDetail object",
    "url": "311609.htm",
    "text": "The auditTrailDetail object element creates or modifies an audit trail detail graphic object on a graphic display.  The auditTrailDetail object element must be within the gfx element, and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  auditTrailDetail object attributes and elements  auditTrailDetail object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1337,
    "title": "auditTrailDetail object attributes and elements",
    "url": "312760.htm",
    "text": "The auditTrailDetail object has the following attributes and elements:  auditTrailDetail attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  borderStyle  borderWidth  borderUsesBackColor  backColor  borderColor  foreColor  headerForeColor  headerBackColor  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  keyNavigation  wrapAround  endColor  gradientStop  gradientDirection  gradientShadingStyle  fillStyle  receiveSelectionFrom  wordWrap  displayAuditOccurredTime  displayAuditSource  displayAuditLocation  displayAuditResource  displayAuditUsername  displayAuditMessage  formatAuditOccurredTime  headerTextAuditOccurredTime  headerTextAuditSource  headerTextAuditLocation  headerTextAuditResource  headerTextAuditUsername  headerTextAuditMessage  animations element:  animateVisibilit element  animateVisibilit attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Audit objects: auditTrailDetail object  auditTrailDetail object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1338,
    "title": "auditTrailDetail object example",
    "url": "312761.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the auditTrailDetail object.  <auditTrailDetail name=\"AuditTrailDetail2\" height=\"144\" width=\"375\" left=\"12\" top=\"227\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderWidth=\"8\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" backColor=\"#F0F0F0\" borderColor=\"#F0F0F0\" foreColor=\"black\" headerForeColor=\"black\" headerBackColor=\"silver\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" keyNavigation=\"true\" wrapAround=\"false\" endColor=\"white\" gradientStop=\"50\" gradientDirection=\"gradientDirectionHorizontal\" gradientShadingStyle=\"gradientHorizontalFromRight\" fillStyle=\"solid\" receiveSelectionFrom=\"AuditTrailList1\" wordWrap=\"true\" displayAuditOccurredTime=\"true\" displayAuditSource=\"true\" displayAuditLocation=\"true\" displayAuditResource=\"true\" displayAuditUsername=\"true\" displayAuditMessage=\"true\" formatAuditOccurredTime=\"shortDateTime\" headerTextAuditOccurredTime=\"Occurred Time\" headerTextAuditSource=\"Source\" headerTextAuditLocation=\"Location\" headerTextAuditResource=\"Resource\" headerTextAuditUsername=\"Username\" headerTextAuditMessage=\"Message\">   <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"AuditDetailVisible\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </auditTrailDetail>  See also  Audit objects: auditTrailDetail object  auditTrailDetail object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1339,
    "title": "Diagnostic and information objects: diagnosticsClearAllButton object",
    "url": "59328.htm",
    "text": "The diagnosticsClearAllButton graphic object element creates or modifies a diagnostics clear all button object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  diagnosticsClearAllButton object attributes and elements  diagnosticsClearAllButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1340,
    "title": "diagnosticsClearAllButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338255.htm",
    "text": "The diagnosticsClearAllButton object has the following attributes and elements:  diagnosticsClearAllButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the diagnostics clear all button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the diagnostics clear all button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the diagnostics clear all button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Diagnostic and information objects: diagnosticsClearAllButton object  diagnosticsClearAllButton object example   XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1341,
    "title": "diagnosticsClearAllButton object example",
    "url": "338256.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the diagnosticsClearAllButton object:  <diagnosticsClearAllButton name=\"DiagnosticsClearAllButton2\" height=\"56\" width=\"138\" left=\"24\" top=\"88\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"Clear All Diagnostics\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" keyAssignment=\"F2\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"DIAGNOSTIX CLEAR ALL\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Home\" alignment=\"bottomCenter\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag4\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </diagnosticsClearAllButton>  See also  Diagnostic and information objects: diagnosticsClearAllButton object  diagnosticsClearAllButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1342,
    "title": "Diagnostic and information objects: diagnosticsClearButton object",
    "url": "59326.htm",
    "text": "The diagnosticsClearButton graphic object element creates or modifies a diagnostics clear button object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  diagnosticsClearButton object attributes and elements  diagnosticsClearButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1343,
    "title": "diagnosticsClearButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338257.htm",
    "text": "The diagnosticsClearButton object has the following attributes and elements:  diagnosticsClearButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  linkedObject  sendPressTo  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the diagnostics clear button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the diagnostics clear button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the diagnostics clear button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Diagnostic and information objects: diagnosticsClearButton object  diagnosticsClearButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1344,
    "title": "diagnosticsClearButton object example",
    "url": "338258.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the diagnosticsClearButton object:  <diagnosticsClearButton name=\"DiagnosticsClearButton1\" height=\"46\" width=\"140\" left=\"14\" top=\"16\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"Clear Diagnostics\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" linkedObject=\"DiagnosticsList1\" sendPressTo=\"linkedObject\" keyAssignment=\"K8\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"DIAGNOSTICS CLEAR\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Enter\" alignment=\"bottomRight\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag7\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </diagnosticsClearButton>  See also  Diagnostic and information objects: diagnosticsClearButton object  diagnosticsClearButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1345,
    "title": "Diagnostic and information objects: diagnosticsList object",
    "url": "59331.htm",
    "text": "The diagnosticsList graphic object element creates or modifies a diagnostics list object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  diagnosticsList object attributes and elements  diagnosticsList object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1346,
    "title": "diagnosticsList object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338259.htm",
    "text": "The diagnosticsList object has the following attributes and elements:  diagnosticsList object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backColor  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  selectionForeColor  selectionBackColor  foreColor  description  borderColor  keyNavigation  wrapAround  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the diagnostics list object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Diagnostic and information objects: diagnosticsList object  diagnosticsList object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1347,
    "title": "diagnosticsList object example",
    "url": "338260.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the diagnosticsList object:  <diagnosticsList name=\"DiagnosticsList7\" height=\"63\" width=\"438\" left=\"18\" top=\"238\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backColor=\"#E0E0E0\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"8\" selectionForeColor=\"navy\" selectionBackColor=\"white\" foreColor=\"blue\" description=\"\" borderColor=\"gray\" keyNavigation=\"true\" wrapAround=\"false\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\">  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestS2\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </diagnosticsList>  See also  Diagnostic and information objects: diagnosticsList object  diagnosticsList object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1348,
    "title": "Diagnostic and information objects: informationAckButton object",
    "url": "59334.htm",
    "text": "The informationAckButton graphic object element creates or modifies an information acknowledge button object  on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  informationAckButton object attributes and elements  informationAckButton object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1349,
    "title": "informationAckButton object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338261.htm",
    "text": "The informationAckButton object has the following attributes and elements:  informationAckButton object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  audio  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  borderWidth  description  highlightColor  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  horizontalMargin  verticalMargin  shape  touch  blink  keyAssignment  elements  caption element  This element corresponds to the Caption settings in the Label tab of the information acknowledge button object.  caption element attributes:  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  caption  color  backColor  backStyle  alignment  wordWrap  blink  ImageSettings element  The imageSettings element corresponds to the image settings in the Label tab of the information acknowledge button object.  imageSettings element attributes:  imageName  alignment  backStyle  color  backColor  scaled  blink  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the information acknowledge button object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  Diagnostic and information objects: informationAckButton object  informationAckButton object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1350,
    "title": "informationAckButton object example",
    "url": "338262.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the informationAckButton object:  <informationAckButton name=\"InformationAckButton3\" height=\"41\" width=\"360\" left=\"29\" top=\"326\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" audio=\"true\" backColor=\"#580058\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"false\" borderWidth=\"4\" description=\"Acknowledge Information\" highlightColor=\"lime\" borderColor=\"#FFC0FF\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" horizontalMargin=\"0\" verticalMargin=\"0\" shape=\"rectangle\" touch=\"true\" blink=\"false\" keyAssignment=\"F3\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Bell MT\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" caption=\"INFORMATION ACK\" color=\"#FFC0FF\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"transparent\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\" blink=\"false\" />  <imageSettings imageName=\"Page Up\" alignment=\"middleRight\" backStyle=\"transparent\" color=\"white\" backColor=\"navy\" scaled=\"false\" blink=\"false\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TagS2\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </informationAckButton>  See also  Diagnostic and information objects: informationAckButton object  informationAckButton object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1351,
    "title": "Diagnostic and information objects: informationMessageDisplay object",
    "url": "59337.htm",
    "text": "The informationMessageDisplay graphic object element creates or modifies an information message display object on a graphic display.  Graphic object elements must be within the gfx element and may be within a group element.  See also  Graphic object elements  informationMessageDisplay object attributes and elements  informationMessageDisplay object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1352,
    "title": "informationMessageDisplay object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338263.htm",
    "text": "The informationMessageDisplay object has the following attributes and elements:  informationMessageDisplay object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  foreColor  borderWidth  description  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  blink  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  alignment  wordWrap  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the information message display object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  isReferenceObject  backColor  backStyle  borderStyle  borderUsesBackColor  foreColor  borderWidth  description  borderColor  patternColor  patternStyle  blink  fontFamily  fontSize  bold  italic  underline  strikethrough  alignment  wordWrap  See also  Diagnostic and information objects: informationMessageDisplay object  informationMessageDisplay object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1353,
    "title": "informationMessageDisplay object example",
    "url": "338265.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the informationMessageDisplay object:  <informationMessageDisplay name=\"InformationMessageDisplay4\" height=\"52\" width=\"352\" left=\"35\" top=\"389\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" isReferenceObject=\"false\" backColor=\"navy\" backStyle=\"solid\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\" borderUsesBackColor=\"true\" borderWidth=\"8\" foreColor=\"white\" description=\"Inoformation Message Display\" borderColor=\"navy\" patternColor=\"white\" patternStyle=\"none\" blink=\"false\" fontFamily=\"Arial\" fontSize=\"10\" bold=\"false\" italic=\"false\" underline=\"false\" strikethrough=\"false\" alignment=\"middleCenter\" wordWrap=\"true\">  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag7\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </informationMessageDisplay>  See also  Diagnostic and information objects: informationMessageDisplay object  informationMessageDisplay object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1354,
    "title": "ActiveX control: activeX object",
    "url": "59340.htm",
    "text": "The activeX graphic object element creates or modifies an ActiveX control on a graphic display.  The only editable attributes are those that correspond to the properties on the Common tab of the object's Properties dialog box, the Wallpaper option, and the object's visibility animation. All other aspects of the ActiveX control's appearance and behavior are contained in the data element's binary information. Do not attempt to edit these attributes in the exported file.  See also  Graphic object elements  activeX object attributes and elements  activeX object example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1355,
    "title": "activeX object attributes and elements",
    "url": "338266.htm",
    "text": "The activeX object has the following attributes and elements:  activeX object attributes:  name  height  width  left  top  visible  wallpaper  keyNavigation  focusHighlight  classID  elements  data element  Data element attributes are provided by the ActiveX control and are not editable by the user.  data element attributes:  progID  filename  fileversion  typeLibrary  typeLibVersion  data  animations element  The animations element must be located within an object element.  animateVisibility element  This element corresponds to visibility animation defined for the trend object. The animateVisibility element must be located within an animations element.  animateVisibility element attributes:  expression  expressionTrueState  See also  ActiveX control: activeX object  activeX object example  XML attributes  XML elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1356,
    "title": "activeX object example",
    "url": "338267.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows the activeX object:  <activeX name=\"adbannerClass1\" height=\"77\" width=\"90\" left=\"357\" top=\"54\" visible=\"true\" wallpaper=\"false\" classId=\"{89643D21-7B2A-11D1-8271-00A0C91F9CA0}\" keyNavigation=\"true\" focusHighlight=\"true\">  <data progId=\"adbanner.adbanner.1\" fileName=\"msdxm.ocx\" fileVersion=\"6.4.9.1128\" typeLibrary=\"{00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000}\" typeLibVersion=\"1.0\" data=\"AgIAAHEHAABeBgAA\" />  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"TestTag7\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\" />  </animations>  </activeX>  See also  ActiveX control: activeX object  activeX object attributes and elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1357,
    "title": "Special characters",
    "url": "298359.htm",
    "text": "Some characters in XML need special handling because they are needed for XML syntax purposes and, therefore, cannot be used within string attributes of the graphic objects.  The syntax for specifying an attribute is:  attribute name=\"value\"  Element names are case-sensitive. All element names in a graphic display XML document begin with lower case.  See also  FactoryTalk View graphic XML file  XML string equivalents for special characters  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1358,
    "title": "XML string equivalents for special characters",
    "url": "298361.htm",
    "text": "If one of the following characters is needed within a string attribute, the XML equivalent string must be used instead.  Characters  XML string equivalents  <  &gt;  >  &lt;  &  &amp;  &#8220;  \"  Carriage return  &#xA;  See also  FactoryTalk View graphic XML file  Special characters  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1359,
    "title": "RRGGBB color table",
    "url": "58514.htm",
    "text": "Use this table to define color values in your XML files. You can use the names or the RRGGBB hexadecimal values in the graphics XML file to specify colors.  See also  backColor attribute  borderColor attribute  borderUsesBackColor attribute  highlightColor attribute  patternColor attribute  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1360,
    "title": "Batch Import File Format",
    "url": "58625.htm",
    "text": "The batch import file is used when the user wishes to import multiple XML files into multiple graphic displays in one step. The file is created automatically when the user does an export, and is named BatchImport_<HMI Project name>.xml. The file is created in the same directory as the XML files exported for each graphic display, that is, the location specified in the Export Folder dialog box of the Graphics Import Export Wizard.  The batch import file is in XML format and must be structured as follows:  <gfxImport importFolder=\"\">  <import importFile=\"\" importType=\"\" display=\"\" />  <import importFile=\"\" importType=\"\" display=\"\" />  \u2026  </gfxImport>  where:  importFolder is an optional attribute specifying the folder where the import files are located (for example, importFolder=\"C:\\Imports\").  importFile is the name of the XML file to import (for example, importFile=\"Pump.xml\"). This attribute must be there, and must not contain a path.  importType is an optional attribute that can set to 'create' or 'update'.  display is an optional name of the graphic display to import into (for example, display=\"Pump\").  The root <gfxImport> element must contain at least the importFile attribute. The importFolder, importType, and display attributes are optional attributes of this element.  The importFile attribute is the name of the XML file used in one import operation. The importFile attribute must not contain a path. If the importFolder attribute is present, the file specified in the importFile attribute is assumed to exist in this folder, otherwise the file is assumed to exist in the same folder as the batch import file.  The optional attribute importType can have a value of create or update and defines whether the import operation will create new graphic objects or update existing objects during importing. This attribute overrides the setting in the Batch Import File dialog box of the Graphics Import Export Wizard.  The optional attribute display defines the graphic display or displays that the import XML file will be imported into. If the display attribute is set to '*' it means that the XML file will be imported into all the graphic displays. The display attribute can also be set to the name of a single graphic display which that XML file will be imported into. If this attribute is omitted, the display with the same name as the XML file is used.  The following is a sample batch import file:  <gfxImport importFolder=\"C:\\Imports\">  <import importFile=\"alarms.xml\" importType=\"update\" display=\"Assembly\" />  <import importFile=\"indicators.xml\" importType=\"create\" display=\"*\" />  <import importFile=\"misc.xml\" importType=\"update\" display=\"Assembly\" />  <import importFile=\"indicators.xml\" importType=\"create\" display=\"Fault History\" />  <import importFile=\"alarms.xml \"display=\"Fault History\" />  <import importFile=\"pumps.xml \" />  </gfxImport>  See also  About XML (Extensible Markup Language)  Graphic display XML file structure  Graphic display XML schema  Graphic display XML file elements and attributes  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1361,
    "title": "enumeration",
    "url": "58808.htm",
    "text": "enumeration means that the value for the attribute must be chosen from a predefined list.  See also  XML elements  XML attributes  Graphic object elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1362,
    "title": "Example: graphic display XML file structure",
    "url": "58492.htm",
    "text": "An XML file has the extension .xml. The basic structure of the ME graphic display XML file is:  <?xml version=\"1.0\" encoding=\"UTF-8\"?>  <gfx>  <displaySettings/>  <someObject1> (The &#8217;someObject&#8217; element can represent any ME graphic object)  <connections>  <connection/>  </connections>  <animations>  <animateSomeanimation/>  </animations>  </someObject1>  <someObject2/>  <group>  <someGroupedObject1> (The &#8217;someGroupedObject&#8217; element can represent any ME graphic object)  <connections>  <connection/>  </connections>  <animations>  <animateSomeAnimation/> (The &#8217;SomeAnimation&#8217; element can represent any type of animation)  </animations>  </someGroupedObject1>  <someGroupedObject2>  </someGroupedObject2>  </group>  </gfx>  See also  Graphic display XML file elements and attributes  Graphic display XML schema  Example: Graphic display XML file  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1363,
    "title": "Example: Graphic display XML file",
    "url": "58496.htm",
    "text": "The FactoryTalk View graphic XML file is an XML document that describes an entire graphic display, including display settings, graphic objects, properties, connections, animations, key assignments, grouping, and wallpaper.  This is an example of an XML document describing a Machine Edition graphic display with a few objects on it, including a text object, a numeric display object, a numeric input enable object and a group containing two rectangles, one of which is animated. Not all the possible properties for these objects are shown in this file. Any objects or properties that are not listed will not be modified when the file is imported.  You can specify multiple attributes for an element, and have multiple elements.  <?xml version=\"1.0\" encoding=\"UTF-8\"?>  <gfx xmlns:xsi=\"http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance\" xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocation=\"Gfx-ME1.xsd\">  <displaySettings displayType=\"replace\" backColor=\"white\" width=\"640\" height=\"480\"/>  <text name=\"Text1\" height=\"16\" width=\"87\" left=\"69\" top=\"42\" caption=\"Pump House 1\"/>  <numericDisplay name=\"NumericDisplay1\" height=\"44\" width=\"104\" left=\"234\" top=\"150\" borderStyle=\"raisedInset\">  <connections>  <connection name=\"Value\" expression=\"{[clx1]Count_Up[0]}\"/>  </connections>  </numericDisplay>  <group name=\"Group1\" wallpaper=\"false\">  <rectangle name=\"Polygon1\" height=\"35\" width=\"53\" left=\"378\" top=\"40\" visible=\"true\"/>  <rectangle name=\"Polygon2\" height=\"35\" width=\"56\" left=\"428\" top=\"85 visible=\"true\"/>  <animations>  <animateVisibility expression=\"system\\BlinkFast\" expressionTrueState=\"visible\"/>  </animations>  </group>  <numericInputEnable name=\"NumericInputEnable1\" height=\"55\" width=\"80\" left=\"57\" top=\"142\" keyAssignment=\"F1\">  <caption fontFamily=\"Arial\" caption=\"Stop\"/>  <connections>  <connection name=\"Value\" expression=\"{[clx1]n7[0]}\"/>  </connections>  </numericInputEnable>  </gfx>  See also  Graphic display XML file elements and attributes  Graphic display XML file structure  Graphic display XML schema  Example: graphic display file structure  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1364,
    "title": "About the Graphics Import Export Wizard",
    "url": "67777.htm",
    "text": "The Graphics Import Export Wizard provides the ability to generate complete graphic displays from an XML (Extensible Markup Language) text file, or to export complete graphic displays to an XML file. An XML file has an .xml extension.  With the Wizard, you can use an XML import operation to:  Create a new graphic display, including display settings and objects  Modify the display settings of one or more graphic displays  Create new graphic objects on a new or existing display  Update existing graphic objects on a display  Modify the following aspects of graphic objects, whether new or updated:  Properties  Connections  Animations  Groupings  Wallpaper attribute  Key assignments  Import multiple XML files in a single step  Using an export operation, you can:  Create an XML file that completely describes a graphic display  Export multiple XML files in a single step.  To open the Graphics Import Export Wizard  Open the Graphics folder in the Explorer window.  Right-click Displays and select Import and Export from the Context menu.  Tip:  The Graphics Import Export Wizard does not support language switching. When an application's graphic displays are exported using the Graphics Import Export Wizard, the strings on the displays are exported in the application's current language. When the displays are imported, the strings that were exported are imported into the application's current language. If the application's current language has changed since the displays were exported, the imported strings will overwrite the strings in the current language with the strings in the language that was exported. For example, your application has two languages, French and English. If you open it in English and then export a display, only the English strings are exported. If you then open the application in French, and import the XML file of the display, the English strings will overwrite the French strings.  See also  FactoryTalk View graphic XML file  XML elements and attributes  XML declaration  ",
    "keywords": {
      "graphic display": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1365,
    "title": "Select a graphic display import or export operation",
    "url": "67781.htm",
    "text": "When you right-click Displays in the Graphics folder of the Explorer window and select Import and Export, the Graphics Import Export Wizard opens to the Operation Type dialog box. Choose whether to export or import graphic display files and then click Next.  Tip:  When you export graphic displays, an XML file with the same name as the display and with the file extension .xml is created for each display exported. In addition, a batch import file is created that is given the name BatchImport_<applicationname>.xml, where <applicationname> is the name of the application where the display(s) resides. This file is overwritten each time an export from the application is performed.  Options  Select the operation to perform:  Export graphic information from displays  Click this option to export information about some or all the graphic displays in the application in the form of XML text files. You can then modify the XML files in Notepad and then import the modified file into the application.  When you select this option, the next dialog box is Displays to Export.  Import graphic information into displays  Click this option to import one or more XML text files into your application. Each imported file will create a new graphic display or overwrite an existing display of the same name.  When you select this option, the next dialog box is Backup.  See also  Select displays to export  Select an export folder  Graphics displays backup  Back up graphics displays before an import  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1366,
    "title": "Select displays to export",
    "url": "67783.htm",
    "text": "Choose which of the displays in your application you want to export as XML files. By default, all the displays are selected for export (checked).  To select displays to export  Clear the check boxes for those displays you do not want to export.  Click Next.  Options  Select the displays to export  The list displays all the displays in your application, including default displays.  Select All  Click this box to select all the displays for export. By default, all the displays are selected.  Clear All  Click this box to clear the check boxes for all the displays in the application. When you clear all the displays, the Next button becomes unavailable.  See also  Select a graphics import-export operation  Select an export folder  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1367,
    "title": "Select an export folder",
    "url": "67786.htm",
    "text": "Select the folder where you want the exported graphics XML files stored. By default, these files are exported to the My Documents folder.  To accept the backup location, click Next.  To select a new export folder  Click the Browse button to open the Browse for Folder dialog box.  Select a folder from the tree, or create a new folder.  To create a new folder, navigate to the location for the new folder. Click Make New Folder, and then rename the new folder.  When you have selected a folder, click OK. The folder name and the path to its location appear in the text box.  Click Finish. The selected graphic display files are exported to the folder as XML files.  See also  Select a graphics import-export operation  Select displays to export  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1368,
    "title": "Back up graphics displays before an import",
    "url": "67788.htm",
    "text": "When you select the import operation in the Graphics Import Export Wizard, you are offered an opportunity to make backup copies of the files that will be overwritten when the selected files are imported. By default, Yes is selected.  Backup copies of graphic displays are stored as .gfx files.  Options  Yes  Choose Yes to create backup copies of the selected files. When you click Next, the Backup Folder dialog opens.  No  Choose No to overwrite the files in the application with the files being imported. When you click Next, the Import File Type dialog opens.  See also  Select a graphics import-export operation  Select a backup folder  Select the import file type  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1369,
    "title": "Select a backup folder",
    "url": "67790.htm",
    "text": "Select the folder where you want the backup graphic files stored. The backup copies are made and stored in this location when the Finish button is clicked, just before the file or files are imported.  By default, the application stores these files in the folder My Documents. To accept the backup location, click Next.  To select a new backup folder  Click the Browse button to open the Browse for Folder dialog box.  Select a folder from the tree, or create a new folder.  To create a new folder, navigate to the location for the new folder. Click Make New Folder, and then rename the new folder.  When you have selected a folder, click OK. The folder name and the path to its location appear in the text box.  Click Next. The Import File Type dialog box opens.  See also  Select a graphics import-export operation  Graphics displays backup  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1370,
    "title": "Select the import file type",
    "url": "67792.htm",
    "text": "Specify whether you are importing a single graphic XML file or more than one. Then click Next.  Options  Select the type of file to import:  Single display import file  Select this option to import a single graphic XML file.  When you select this option, the next dialog box is the Single Import File dialog box.  Multiple displays batch import file  Select this option to import multiple XML files in a single operation.  When you select this option, the next dialog box is the Batch Import File dialog box.  See also  Select a graphics import-export operation  Back up graphic displays before an import  Select a backup folder  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1371,
    "title": "Import a single display XML file",
    "url": "67793.htm",
    "text": "When you select the Single display import file option in the Import File Type dialog box, you complete the import specifications in this dialog box.  To import a single graphic display file  Click the Browse button to navigate to the graphic display XML file to import.  Select the file and click Open. The selected file name appears in the text box in the Single Import File dialog box.  From the drop-down list, select the name of the display you want to modify. All the displays in the application are listed.  Specify whether to create new objects on the display or update existing objects.  Click Finish to complete the import. A progress bar with a Cancel button monitors the import process.  Tip:  You cannot create new objects and update existing objects with the same file import.  If the display is open, the import cannot occur.  Cancelling during import does not return the display to its previous state. If you cancel the operation before it is completed, any changes that have already been made to the display will be retained.  When you export graphic displays, an XML file with the same name as the display and with the file extension .xml is created for each display exported. In addition, a batch import file is created that is given the name  BatchImport_<applicationname>.xml.  If the file to be imported contains any characters other than English, be sure the file is saved in UTF-8 format before importing.  Options  Select the single display import file to use  Navigate to and select the graphics display XML file to import.  Select the display to import to  Select the display into which to import the file.  When importing  Create new objects on the display  Choose this option if the XML file you are importing creates new objects on the specified display.  Update existing objects on the display  Choose this option if the XML file you are importing modifies the properties of objects already on the display.  Tip:  Each graphic display file included in the batch import can be defined to create new objects or to update existing objects by manually adding the importType attribute to the import element. If the importType attribute is specified in the file, what appears there will override the setting in this dialog. If nothing is specified, this setting will be applied to the file during import.  See also  Select a graphics import-export operation  Graphics displays backup  Select a backup folder  Select the import file type  ",
    "keywords": {
      "import": "100",
      "XML file": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1372,
    "title": "Import multiple displays using an XML batch file",
    "url": "67794.htm",
    "text": "When you select the batch file import option in the Import File Type dialog box, this dialog box opens. You complete the import specifications in this dialog box.  To import a batch file modifying multiple graphics displays  Click the Browse button to navigate to the batch XML file you want to import.  Select the file and click Open. The selected file name appears in the text box in the Multiple Import File dialog box.  Specify whether to create new objects on the display or update existing objects.  Click Finish to complete the import. A progress bar with a Cancel button monitors the import process.  Tip:  You cannot create new objects and update existing objects with the same file import.  If a display is open, the import for that display cannot occur.  Cancelling during import does not return the displays to their previous state. If you cancel the operation before it is completed, any changes that have already been made to the displays will be retained.  If any of the files to be imported contain any characters other than English, be sure the file is saved in UTF-8 format before importing.  PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications have a limit of 100 displays (50 On Top displays and 50 Replace displays). Compact Machine Edition applications (applications running on PanelView Plus 6 Compact or PanelView Plus Compact terminals) have a limit of 25 displays. If a batch file with more displays than the limit is imported into a PanelView Plus 7 Standard application, or a Compact Machine Edition application, displays will only be imported up to the supported limit. Additional displays will not be imported.  Options  Select the multiple display batch import file  Specify the batch XML file to import.  When importing  Create new objects on the display  Choose this option if the graphic display XML files in the batch file you are importing create new objects on the specified displays.  Update existing objects on the display  Choose this option if the graphic display XML files in the XML batch file you are importing modify the properties of objects already on the displays.  Tip:  Each graphic display file included in the batch import can be defined to create new objects or to update existing objects by manually adding the importType attribute to the import element. If the importType attribute is specified in the file, what appears there will override the setting in this dialog. If nothing is specified, this setting will be applied to the file during import.  When you export graphic displays, an XML file with the same name as the display and with the file extension .xml is created for each display exported. In addition, a batch import file is created that is given the name  BatchImport_<applicationname>.xml  See also  Select a graphics import-export operation  Graphics displays backup  Select a backup folder  Select the import file type  Import single file  ",
    "keywords": {
      "import": "100",
      "XML file": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1373,
    "title": "Graphic objects and drawing elements",
    "url": "67396.htm",
    "text": "The Objects menu in the Graphics editor provides the graphic objects and drawing elements that you use to create visual representations of processes and activity in a plant.  Graphic objects are of three types:  Simple drawing objects - The objects on the Drawing submenu are simple drawing elements that require no setup. These include geometric and freehand shapes, text, and images. You can combine these to create more complex objects and animate them by attaching a tag or expression.  Objects that require setup - Other objects need the user to enter specific information about the object's runtime appearance and behavior. These include push buttons, numeric and string input and display objects, indicators, gauges, graphs, keys, and the objects on the Advanced submenu.  ActiveX objects - consist of third-party ActiveX controls that can provide functionality such as sliders, check boxes, radio buttons, Web browsers, and so on. The ActiveX objects available to you depend on the software installed on your system.  Graphic objects can be:  created on a display using the Graphics editor  copied and pasted from a standard graphic display, global object display, library, or another Windows application  dragged and dropped from a standard graphic display, global object display, library, or another Windows application  copied to the clipboard from another Windows application, then pasted into the graphic display  created by another Windows application and inserted into the graphic display using object linking and embedding  Tip:  You can use all the items on the Objects menu, except ActiveX objects, to create global object displays.  See also  Create graphic displays  Attach animation to graphic objects  About ActiveX objects  ",
    "keywords": {
      "graphic object": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1374,
    "title": "Interactive objects",
    "url": "60632.htm",
    "text": "Use interactive objects in your displays to allow the operator to monitor and control a machine or process. Interactive objects initiate an action or show the current state of a process by interacting with the data source, project, or run-time computer.  Many of the objects in FactoryTalk View Machine Edition allow the operator to interact with the data source. For example, you can use a gauge to dynamically reflect a value in a programmable controller at run time, or use a maintained push button to set a value at an OPC server.  The objects that interact with the data source use connections (tags or expressions) to write or read data. Write connections send numeric or string values to the data source. Read connections read numeric or string values from the data source. Some objects, such as the interlocked push button, use read-write connections. For these objects, the data can flow in both directions.  Objects such as login buttons and goto display buttons allow the operator to interact with the project, initiating actions such as logging in and changing graphic displays.  An example of an object that interacts with the run-time computer is the time and date display, which displays the current system date and time.  All of the graphic objects are interactive except the drawing objects and the scale object.  Tip:  To see examples of how to use interactive objects in your graphic displays, look through the sample graphic displays in the Graphics Library. The samples also show how to set up the different objects to interact with each other.  When you need to position multiple buttons close together, use touch margins to make sure the operator does not press the wrong button by mistake.  To create an interactive object  In the Graphics Display editor, select the object from the Objects menu or Object Toolbox.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the object to be.  Double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the object looks, its behavior, and connections.  See also  Use drawing objects  Create gauges  Create Maintained Push buttons  Create Interlocked push buttons  Create Login buttons  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1375,
    "title": "Drawing objects",
    "url": "60143.htm",
    "text": "Drawing objects are static objects used to illustrate your graphic displays. Create drawing objects on your graphic displays to help the operator understand how to use the display. For example, draw a rectangle around a group of buttons to separate the group from other elements in the display, or place text on the display to give the operator instructions.  All the objects on the Object > Drawing menu are drawing objects.  Use drawing objects to interact with the data source if you attach animation to them.  You can attached the following types of animation to drawing objects:  Color  Fill  Height  Horizontal position  Horizontal slider  Rotation  Vertical position  Vertical slider  Visibility  Width  The exceptions are:  Image and panel objects support visibility animation only.  Rounded rectangle object does not support rotation animation.  Tip:  To see examples of how to use drawing objects on your graphic displays, look through the sample graphic displays in the Graphics Library. The samples show how to use visual design elements, such as color and arrangement, to make your displays easy to use.  For better run-time performance, convert static background drawing objects such as image objects, ellipses, arcs, or wedges, into wallpaper.  Wallpaper objects do not print.  See also  static objects  Create text  Create images  Create panels  Create rectangles and squares  ",
    "keywords": {
      "drawing object": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1376,
    "title": "Create a text object",
    "url": "60147.htm",
    "text": "Use the text tool to draw a text object to use for labels or instructions on the display.  To create a text object  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > Drawing > Text or click @.on the toolbar.  Press the mouse button, drag the mouse diagonally to draw the object to the desired size, and release the button.  The Text Properties dialog box opens.  Enter the text and specify the options.  Tip:  To move the cursor to the next line of text, press Enter.  To use an embedded variable in the text, click Insert Variable.  To create another text object, move to an empty spot in the drawing area, click and drag to create another text object.  Click OK.  See also  Drawing objects  Set up general properties for a text object  Options on the General tab of the Text Properties dialog box  Embed a variable in a text object  ",
    "keywords": {
      "text": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1377,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a text object",
    "url": "60603.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Text Properties dialog box to set up how a text object looks.  To set up how a text object looks  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the text object to open the Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, specify the options.  See also  Create a text object  Options on the General tab of the Text Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1378,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Text Properties dialog box",
    "url": "323186.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Text Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Text  Enter the text to use.  Insert Variable  Click this button to select the type of variable to be inserted.  Font  Select the font to use for the text.  Font size  Select the font size to use for the caption or message.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the caption or message, if required.  . . .  Click the browse button @ to open the Font dialog box and select font attributes for the object.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  Fore color  This box shows the color of the text shown on the object. Click it to select another color.  Size to fit  Select this box if you want the text to stretch or shrink to fit if the object is resized.  If this box is cleared, the Word wrap selection applies.  If your application is using language switching, the text size may be different when shown in different languages.  Word wrap  Select this check box if you want the text to continue on the next line at the beginning of a new word.  If this check box is cleared, the text continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  Word wrap only applies if Size to fit is not selected.  Alignment  Select how you want the text to be positioned relative to the text object's bounding box.  Back style  Select whether the object background is solid or transparent. If you select Transparent, the object&#8217;s background is not filled in and any objects behind it show through. The bounding box for the text is not filled in and any objects behind the text shows through between the letters.  See also  Create a text object  Set up general properties for a text object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1379,
    "title": "Create an image object",
    "url": "60606.htm",
    "text": "Use the image graphic object to place images on your graphic displays. You can use images already contained in the Images folder or use Symbol Factory to select and add a graphic to the display and the Images folder.  Prerequisite  Import the image into your project.  To create an image object  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > Drawing > Image or click @ on the toolbar.  Press the mouse button, drag the mouse diagonally to draw the object to the desired size, and release the button.  The Image Browser opens.  From the Select image list, select the image to be shown on the object.  Click OK.  The image is placed where you drew the rectangle, but the actual size of the image is used, rather than the size of the rectangle you drew. To change the image&#8217;s attributes, double-click the image to open the Image Properties dialog box and specify the options.  Tip:  For monochrome images, you can set up the image to blink at run time.  Images support visibility animation only.   FactoryTalk View supports 256 color (grayscale) and 16 million color JPEG images only. For all other color types, use bitmaps.  Use a color depth and resolution appropriate to the application. For example, a 640x480 pixel bitmap with a 16 or 24 bit color palette uses significantly more storage space and RAM than the same image with a depth of 8 bit (256) colors.  For large color images (16 million color, 320 x 240 pixels or larger), JPEG images load faster than bitmaps. In all other cases, bitmaps load faster than JPEGs.  Color JPEG images have a much smaller file size than equivalent bitmap images, and therefore require less disk space at run time. However, since they are shown as bitmaps, they will require the same amount of RAM.  See also  Drawing objects  Set up general properties for an image object  Options on the General tab of the Image Properties dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "image": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1380,
    "title": "Set up general properties for an image object",
    "url": "60608.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Image Properties dialog box to set up how an image object looks.  To set up general properties for an image object  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the image to open its Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, specify the image to use and its appearance.  See also  Create an image object  Options on the General tab of the Image Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1381,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Image Properties dialog box",
    "url": "323199.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Image Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Image  Enter the file name of the graphic image or click the Browse button to select the file name in the Image Browser. The image appears on the face of the object, to show the information about what the object does.  Before you can place an image on the object, you must import the image into the project.  Image back style  This property applies to monochrome and color images. Use it to set the background style to Solid or Transparent.  If Image back style is Transparent:  For monochrome images, the background will be transparent .  For color images that are not PNG with Alpha channel, any parts of the images that are black will be transparent.  Image color  This property applies to monochrome images. It determines the color the image is drawn in; that is, the foreground color.  Click the colored box to select another color.  Image back color  This property applies to monochrome images. It determines the color of the background the image is drawn on. Click the colored box to select another color.  If the Image back style is Transparent, the background of the image will be transparent.  Image blink  Select this check box to let the monochrome image blink at run time. The image blinks twice per second.  See also  Create an image object  Set up general properties for an image object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1382,
    "title": "Create a panel object",
    "url": "60610.htm",
    "text": "Use the panel tool to draw rectangles and squares that have borders. You can set up panel objects to blink at run time. The panel object only supports visibility animation.  To create a panel object  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > Drawing > Panel or click @ on the toolbar.  Press the mouse button, drag the mouse diagonally to draw the object to the desired size, and release the button.  Tip:  Press Ctrl as you drag the mouse to draw a square panel.  Double-click the panel to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how you want the panel to look.  Click OK.  See also  Drawing objects  Set up general properties for a panel object  Options on the General tab of the Panel Properties dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "panel": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1383,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a panel object",
    "url": "60612.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Panel Properties dialog box to set up how a panel object looks.  To set up general properties for a panel object  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the panel to open its Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, specify the object appearance.  See also  Create a panel object  Options on the General tab of the Panel Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1384,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Panel Properties dialog box",
    "url": "323200.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Panel Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Specifies a pattern for the object. The pattern shows on the face of the object.  The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image.  If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  For objects with a line style other than solid, the background color is used for the spaces between the dots or dashes.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object or state.  Click it to select another color.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink when the object is in this state at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  See also  Create a panel object  Set up general properties for a panel object  Options in the Gradient Fill dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1385,
    "title": "Create an arc object",
    "url": "60624.htm",
    "text": "Use the arc tool to draw arcs. The arc shape is a segment of an ellipse's perimeter. To create an arc, you first draw an ellipse or circle, and then edit it to form an arc.  To create an arc object  In the Graphics Display editor, from the Objects menu, select Drawing > Arc.  Press the mouse button and drag the mouse diagonally to draw an ellipse the size you want.  When you release the mouse button, a set of handles appears so you can reshape the ellipse.  Tip:  Press Ctrl as you drag the mouse to base the arc on a circle.  Grab a handle and drag the mouse to change the size of the arc.  To grab a handle, point the mouse cursor at it and when the arrow changes to a cross-hair cursor, click the left mouse button.  Double-click the arc to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how you want the arc to look.  Click OK.  Tip:  If you apply rotation animation to an arc object, when the display is run on a PanelView Plus family terminal, the arc may change to an ellipse at one point in the rotation, but does not affect the arc's function.  Because of a limitation in the Windows CE operating system, arcs that look fine on the desktop may appear ragged when shown on a PanelView Plus family terminal. To avoid this, do not use arcs with a line width greater than 1 pixel.  See also  Drawing objects  Set up general properties for an arc object  Options on the General tab of the Arc Properties dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "arc": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1386,
    "title": "Set up general properties for an arc object",
    "url": "60626.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Arc Properties dialog box to set up how an arc object looks.  To set up general properties for an arc object  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the arc to open its Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, specify the object appearance.  See also  Create an arc object  Options on the General tab of the Arc Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1387,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Arc Properties dialog box",
    "url": "323201.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Arc Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Line style  Select the line style. If you select a style other than Solid, the line width must be 1 pixel.  Dash-Dot and Dash-Dot-Dot show as Dot on the PanelView Plus family terminals.  Line width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object's line. Any line style other than solid must have a width of 1 pixel.  Fore color  This box shows the color for the object&#8217;s line. Click it to select another color.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  For objects with a line style other than solid, the background color is used for the spaces between the dots or dashes.  Pattern style  Specifies a pattern for the object. The pattern shows on the face of the object.  The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image.  If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object or state.  Click it to select another color.  See also  Create an arc object  Set up general properties for an arc object  Options in the Gradient Fill dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1388,
    "title": "Create an ellipse or a circle object",
    "url": "60620.htm",
    "text": "Use the ellipse tool to draw ellipses and circles.  To create an ellipse or a circle object  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > Drawing > Ellipse or click @ on the toolbar.  Press the mouse button, drag the mouse diagonally to draw the object to the desired size, and release the button.  Press Ctrl as you drag the mouse to draw a circle  Double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how you want the object to look.  Click OK.  Tip:  Because of a limitation in the Windows CE operating system, ellipses or circles that look fine on the desktop may appear ragged when shown on the PanelView Plus family terminals. To avoid this, do not use ellipses with a line width greater than 1 pixel.  See also  Drawing objects  Set up general properties for an ellipse or a circle object  Options on the General tab of the Ellipse Properties dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "ellipse": "100",
      "circle": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1389,
    "title": "Set up general properties for an ellipse or a circle object",
    "url": "60622.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Ellipse Properties dialog box to set up how an ellipse or a circle object looks.  To set up general properties for an ellipse or a circle object  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the ellipse or circle to open its Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, specify the object appearance.  See also  Create an ellipse or a circle object  Options on the General tab of the Ellipse Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1390,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Ellipse Properties dialog box",
    "url": "323211.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Ellipse Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Line style  Select the line style. If you select a style other than Solid, the line width must be 1 pixel.  Dash-Dot and Dash-Dot-Dot show as Dot on the PanelView Plus family terminals.  Line width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object's line. Any line style other than solid must have a width of 1 pixel.  Fore color  This box shows the color for the object&#8217;s line. Click it to select another color.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  For objects with a line style other than solid, the background color is used for the spaces between the dots or dashes.  Pattern style  Specifies a pattern for the object. The pattern shows on the face of the object.  The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image.  If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object or state.  Click it to select another color.  See also  Create an ellipse or a circle object  Set up general properties for an ellipse or a circle object  Options in the Gradient Fill dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1391,
    "title": "Create a freehand object",
    "url": "60731.htm",
    "text": "Use the freehand tool to draw shapes as you would with a pen on paper.  To create a freehand object  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > Drawing > Freehand or click @ on the toolbar.  Press the mouse button, drag the mouse diagonally to draw the object to the desired size, and release the button.  Double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how you want the object to look.  Click OK.  See also  Drawing objects  Set up general properties for a freehand object  Options on the General tab of the Freehand Properties dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "freehand": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1392,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a freehand object",
    "url": "60733.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Freehand Properties dialog box to set up how a freehand object looks.  To set up general properties for a freehand object  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the freehand object to open its Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, specify the object appearance.  Tip:  Freehand objects have no edit mode.  See also  Create a freehand object  Options on the General tab of the Freehand Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1393,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Freehand Properties dialog box",
    "url": "323202.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Freehand Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Line style  Select the line style. If you select a style other than Solid, the line width must be 1 pixel.  Dash-Dot and Dash-Dot-Dot show as Dot on the PanelView Plus family terminals.  Line width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object's line. Any line style other than solid must have a width of 1 pixel.  Fore color  This box shows the color for the object&#8217;s line. Click it to select another color.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  For objects with a line style other than solid, the background color is used for the spaces between the dots or dashes.  Pattern style  Specifies a pattern for the object. The pattern shows on the face of the object.  The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image.  If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object or state.  Click it to select another color.  See also  Create a freehand object  Set up general properties for a freehand object  Options in the Gradient Fill dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1394,
    "title": "Create a line object",
    "url": "60736.htm",
    "text": "Use the line tool to draw straight diagonal, horizontal, and vertical lines.  To create a line object  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > Drawing > Line or click @ on the toolbar.  Press the mouse button and drag the mouse to draw a line.  Tip:  Press Ctrl as you drag the mouse to draw a horizontal or vertical line.  Double-click the line to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how you want the line to look.  Click OK.  Tip:  When you put a line into Edit mode and add a point to it, it is converted into a polyline object. If you remove a point from a polyline with three points, it becomes a line object.  See also  Drawing objects  Set up general properties for a line object  Options on the General tab of the Line Properties dialog box  Create a polyline object  ",
    "keywords": {
      "line": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1395,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a line object",
    "url": "60738.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Line Properties dialog box to set up how a line object looks.  To set up general properties for a line object  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the line to open its Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, specify the object appearance.  See also  Create a line object  Options on the General tab of the Line Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1396,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Line Properties dialog box",
    "url": "323204.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Line Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Line style  Select the line style. If you select a style other than Solid, the line width must be 1 pixel.  Dash-Dot and Dash-Dot-Dot show as Dot on the PanelView Plus family terminals.  Back style  Select whether the object background is solid or transparent. If you select Transparent, the object&#8217;s background is not filled in and any objects behind it show through. If you choose Solid, the spaces between dots and dashes (if the Line style is other than solid) will be filled with the back color.  Fore color  This box shows the color for the object&#8217;s line. Click it to select another color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  For a line style other than Solid, the background color is used for the spaces between the dots or dashes.  Line width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the line. Any line style other than solid must have a width of 1 pixel.  See also  Create a line object  Set up general properties for a line object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1397,
    "title": "Create a polygon object",
    "url": "60618.htm",
    "text": "Use the polygon tool to draw a series of connected straight lines forming a closed shape.  To create a polygon object  In the Graphics Display editor, from the Objects menu, select Drawing > Polygon.  Press the Mouse button and drag the mouse to draw the first line segment.  Tip:  Press Ctrl as you drag or click the mouse to draw a horizontal or vertical line segment.  To create the next line segment, point the mouse where you want the next segment to end, and then click the Left mouse button.  The application automatically connects the last segment to the first. Keep clicking to add more line segments.  Double-click the polygon to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how you want the polygon to look.  Tip:  Squares and rectangles are classified as specialized forms of polygons, but you use the rectangle tool to create them.  Creating a polygon with only two points actually creates a line.  See also  Drawing objects  Set up general properties for a polygon object  Options on the General tab of the Polygon Properties dialog box  Create a rectangle or square object  ",
    "keywords": {
      "polygon": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1398,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a polygon object",
    "url": "60616.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Polygon Properties dialog box to set up how a polygon object looks.  To set up general properties for a polygon object  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the polygon to open its Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, specify the object appearance.  See also  Create a polygon object  Options on the General tab of the Polygon Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1399,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Polygon Properties dialog box",
    "url": "323206.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Polygon Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Line style  Select the line style. If you select a style other than Solid, the line width must be 1 pixel.  Dash-Dot and Dash-Dot-Dot show as Dot on the PanelView Plus family terminals.  Line width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object's line. Any line style other than solid must have a width of 1 pixel.  Fore color  This box shows the color for the object&#8217;s line. Click it to select another color.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  For objects with a line style other than solid, the background color is used for the spaces between the dots or dashes.  Pattern style  Specifies a pattern for the object. The pattern shows on the face of the object.  The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image.  If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object or state.  Click it to select another color.  See also  Create a polygon object  Set up general properties for a polygon object  Options in the Gradient Fill dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1400,
    "title": "Create a polyline object",
    "url": "60628.htm",
    "text": "Use the polyline tool to draw a series of connected straight lines.  To create a polyline object  In the Graphics Display editor, from the Objects menu, select Drawing > Polyline.  Press the mouse button and drag the mouse to draw the first line segment.  Tip:  Press Ctrl as you drag or click the mouse to draw a horizontal or vertical line segment.  To create the next line segment, point the mouse where you want the next segment to end, and then click the Left mouse button.  Repeat for each line segment.  Double-click the polyline to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how you want the polyline to look.  Tip:  If you use the polyline tool to create an object with two points, it will create a line object.  If you edit a polyline object by deleting its points until it has two points, it will convert to a line object.  See also  Drawing objects  Set up general properties for a polyline object  Options on the General tab of the Polyline Properties dialog box  Create a line object  ",
    "keywords": {
      "polyline": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1401,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a polyline object",
    "url": "60630.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Polyline Properties dialog box to set up how a polyline object looks.  To set up general properties for a polyline object  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the polyline to open its Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, specify the object appearance.  See also  Create a polyline object  Options on the General tab of the Polyline Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1402,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Polyline Properties dialog box",
    "url": "323207.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Polyline Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Line style  Select the line style. If you select a style other than Solid, the line width must be 1 pixel.  Dash-Dot and Dash-Dot-Dot show as Dot on the PanelView Plus family terminals.  Line width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object's line. Any line style other than solid must have a width of 1 pixel.  Fore color  This box shows the color for the object&#8217;s line. Click it to select another color.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  If you select Solid, the application fills the object as accurately as possible even if it is not a closed figure.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  For objects with a line style other than solid, the background color is used for the spaces between the dots or dashes.  Pattern style  Specifies a pattern for the object. The pattern shows on the face of the object.  The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image.  If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object or state.  Click it to select another color.  See also  Create a polyline object  Set up general properties for a polyline object  Options in the Gradient Fill dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1403,
    "title": "Create a rectangle or square object",
    "url": "60614.htm",
    "text": "Use the rectangle tool to draw rectangles and squares.  Tip:  Squares and rectangles are specialized polygons, so the Properties dialog boxes are the same as for the polygon object.  To create a rectangle or square object  In the Graphics Display editor, select Object > Drawing > Rectangle or click @ on the toolbar.  Press the mouse button, drag the mouse diagonally to draw the object to the desired size, and release the button.  Tip:  Press Ctrl as you drag the mouse to draw a square.  Double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how you want the rectangle to look.  Click OK.  See also  Drawing objects  Set up general properties for a rectangle or square object  Options on the General tab of the Rectangle Properties dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "rectangle": "100",
      "square": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1404,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a rectangle or square object",
    "url": "60743.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Rectangle Properties dialog box to set up how a rectangle or square object looks.  To set up general properties for a rectangle or square object  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the rectangle or square to open its Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, specify the object appearance.  See also  Create a rectangle or square object  Options on the General tab of the Rectangle Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1405,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Rectangle Properties dialog box",
    "url": "323208.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Rectangle Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Line style  Select the line style. If you select a style other than Solid, the line width must be 1 pixel.  Dash-Dot and Dash-Dot-Dot show as Dot on the PanelView Plus family terminals.  Line width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object's line. Any line style other than solid must have a width of 1 pixel.  Fore color  This box shows the color for the object&#8217;s line. Click it to select another color.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  For objects with a line style other than solid, the background color is used for the spaces between the dots or dashes.  Pattern style  Specifies a pattern for the object. The pattern shows on the face of the object.  The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image.  If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object or state.  Click it to select another color.  See also  Create a rectangle or square object  Set up general properties for a rectangle or square object  Options in the Gradient Fill dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1406,
    "title": "Create a rounded rectangle or square object",
    "url": "60745.htm",
    "text": "Use the rounded rectangle tool to draw rectangles and squares with rounded corners.  To create a rounded rectangle or square object  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > Drawing > Rounded Rectangle or click @ on the toolbar.  Press the mouse button, drag the mouse diagonally to draw the object to the desired size, and release the button.  Tip:  Press Ctrl as you drag the mouse to draw a rounded square.  To change the degree of rounding, click and drag the single handle that appears inside the object, until the object is the desired shape.  Double-click the rectangle to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how you want the rounded rectangle to look.  Click OK.  Tip:  To change the degree of roundness after the object has been created, right-click the object and select Edit. The single handle will appear in the object.  Due to a Windows limitation, you cannot rotate rounded rectangles and rounded squares.  See also  Drawing objects  Set up general properties for a rounded rectangle or square object  Options on the General tab of the Rounded Rectangle Properties dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "rectangle": "100",
      "square": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1407,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a rounded rectangle or square object",
    "url": "60747.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Rounded Rectangle Properties dialog box to set up how a rounded rectangle or square object looks.  To set up general properties for a rounded rectangle or square object  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the rounded rectangle or square to open its Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, specify the object appearance.  See also  Create a rounded rectangle or square object  Options on the General tab of the Rounded Rectangle Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1408,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Rounded Rectangle Properties dialog box",
    "url": "323209.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Rounded Rectangle Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Line style  Select the line style. If you select a style other than Solid, the line width must be 1 pixel.  Dash-Dot and Dash-Dot-Dot show as Dot on the PanelView Plus family terminals.  Line width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object's line. Any line style other than solid must have a width of 1 pixel.  Fore color  This box shows the color for the object&#8217;s line. Click it to select another color.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  For objects with a line style other than solid, the background color is used for the spaces between the dots or dashes.  Pattern style  Specifies a pattern for the object. The pattern shows on the face of the object.  The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image.  If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object or state.  Click it to select another color.  See also  Create a rounded rectangle or square object  Set up general properties for a rounded rectangle or square object  Options in the Gradient Fill dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1409,
    "title": "Create a wedge object",
    "url": "60750.htm",
    "text": "Use the wedge tool to draw wedges. The wedge shape is a segment of an ellipse's perimeter. To create a wedge, draw an ellipse or circle and then edit it to form a wedge.  To create a wedge object  In the Graphics Display editor, from the Objects menu, select Drawing > Wedge.  Press the Mouse button and drag the mouse diagonally to draw an ellipse the size you want.  When you release the mouse button, a set of handles appears so you can reshape the ellipse.  Tip:  Press Ctrl as you drag the mouse to base the wedge on a circle.  Grab a handle and drag the mouse to change the size of the wedge.  To grab a handle, point the mouse cursor at it and when the arrow changes to a crosshair cursor, click the Left mouse button.  Double-click the wedge to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how you want the wedge to look.  See also  Drawing objects  Set up general properties for a wedge object  Options on the General tab of the Wedge Properties dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "wedge": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1410,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a wedge object",
    "url": "60752.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Wedge Properties dialog box to set up how a wedge object looks.  To set up general properties for a wedge object  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the wedge to open its Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, specify the object appearance.  See also  Create a wedge object  Options on the General tab of the Wedge Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1411,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Wedge Properties dialog box",
    "url": "323210.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Wedge Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Line style  Select the line style. If you select a style other than Solid, the line width must be 1 pixel.  Dash-Dot and Dash-Dot-Dot show as Dot on the PanelView Plus family terminals.  Line width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object's line. Any line style other than solid must have a width of 1 pixel.  Fore color  This box shows the color for the object&#8217;s line. Click it to select another color.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  For objects with a line style other than solid, the background color is used for the spaces between the dots or dashes.  Pattern style  Specifies a pattern for the object. The pattern shows on the face of the object.  The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image.  If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object or state.  Click it to select another color.  See also  Create a wedge object  Set up general properties for a wedge object  Options in the Gradient Fill dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1412,
    "title": "Create Momentary push buttons",
    "url": "60475.htm",
    "text": "Use the Momentary push button object to create a button that starts a process or action by sending a value to the data source. Momentary Push buttons send one value to the data source when pressed and another value when released.  A Momentary push button can perform three types of actions:  Normally open sends a value of 1 when the button is pressed, and a value of 0 when the button is released.  Normally closed sends a value of 0 when the button is pressed, and a value of 1 when the button is released.  Value sends the values you assign to the button press and release actions.  If the button&#8217;s hold time is still in effect when the button is released, the second value is not sent until the hold time expires. You set up the hold time on the General tab.  Important:  Do not use push buttons for emergency stops. Emergency stop buttons must be hard-wired.  To create a momentary push button  In the Graphics Display editor, from the Objects menu, select Push Button > Momentary.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks, the action to be initiated by the button, and its tags.  See also  How the Momentary push button works at run time  Set up general properties for a Momentary push button  Set up states for the Momentary push button  Set up connections for the Momentary Push button  About the Momentary push button&#8217;s error state  ",
    "keywords": {
      "push button": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1413,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Momentary push button",
    "url": "60477.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Momentary Push Button Properties dialog box to set up how a Momentary push button looks.  To set up general properties for a Momentary push button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the States tab to specify how the object looks in each state at run time.  See also  Create Momentary push buttons  Options on the General tab of the Momentary Push Button Properties dialog box  Set up states for a Momentary push button  Set up connections for the Momentary push button  How the Momentary push button works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1414,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Momentary Push Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "326385.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Momentary Push Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Specify the color for the background (Back color) on the States tab.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Specify the background color and the border color on the States tab.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Button settings  Button action  Select the type of action for the button:  Normally open sends a value of 1 when the button is pressed, and a value of 0 when the button is released.  Normally closed sends a value of 0 when the button is pressed, and a value of 1 when the button is released.  Value sends the value you assign to State 0 when the button is pressed and the value you assign to State 1 when the button is released.  If the button&#8217;s hold time is still in effect when the button is released, the second value is not sent until the hold time expires.  Hold time  Select a minimum hold time for the push button. The application keeps the button pressed for this length of time even if the operator releases the button sooner.  The hold time should reflect network traffic. Increasing the hold time prevents a very quick button press from being missed by the data source. If the data source is a memory tag, network traffic is not an issue. If you are using a memory tag, click the shortest hold time.  The operator cannot press the button again until the hold time has expired. If a display containing the button is closed before the hold time has expired, the hold time will be reset, the button will be reset to state 0 and the value for state 0 will be written out immediately.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Create Momentary push buttons  Set up general properties for a Momentary push button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1415,
    "title": "Set up states for a Momentary push button",
    "url": "60469.htm",
    "text": "Use the States tab of the Momentary Push button Properties dialog box to set up states for the button.  To set up states for a Momentary push button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the States tab.  From the Select state list, select State 0.  Specify these properties for State 0:  Value (for Momentary push buttons with the Value button action); when the Indicator connection changes to this value, the button's appearance changes to the settings you specify for the state.  General appearance  Caption, if any  Image, if any  Repeat steps 3 and 4 for State 1 and the Error state.  Once you set up the properties for one state, you can copy and paste the state&#8217;s properties to another state or to all states.  See also  About the Momentary push button&#8217;s error state  Create Momentary push buttons  Set up general properties for a Momentary push button  Set up connections for the Momentary push button  Copy and paste state properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1416,
    "title": "Options on the States tab of the Momentary Push Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330650.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the States tab of the Momentary Push Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Select state  Click the state for which to set up properties.  The released state is State 0. The pressed state is State 1. There is also an error state, which is labeled Error.  General  Value  Type the integer value to use for each state. You cannot assign a value to the error state.  If you selected Momentary Open in the Button action box, State 0 has a value of 0, and State 1 has a value of 1. You cannot change these values.  If you selected Momentary Closed in the Button action box, State 0 has a value of 1, and State 1 has a value of 0. You cannot change these values.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the state. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the state. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected on the General tab, this color appears at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink when the object is in this state at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the state. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object).  If the indicator&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient (as specified in the General tab), the pattern is not visible.  Pattern color  This box displays the current pattern color for the state. Click it to select another color.  Caption  Enter the text for the state. The text appears on the face of the object, to give the operator information about the current state.  The default caption for the error state is Error. You can change it if required.  Insert Variable  Click this button to select the type of variable to be inserted.  Font  Select the font to use for the caption.  Size  Select the font size to use for the caption.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the caption, if required.  Caption color  This box shows the current text color for the caption. Click it to select another color.  Caption back color  This box shows the current background color for the caption. Click it to select another color.  If the caption background style is transparent, the application does not use this caption background color.  Caption blink  Select this check box if you want the caption to blink at run time. The caption blinks twice per second.  Word wrap  Select this check box if you want the text to continue on the next line at the beginning of a new word.  If this check box is cleared, the text continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  Caption back style  Select whether the caption&#8217;s background is Solid or Transparent.  If you select Transparent, the object&#8217;s background is not filled in and any objects behind it show through.  Alignment  Specifies how the caption is positioned on the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the position is relative to the object's bounding box.  Image settings  Image  Enter the file name of the graphic image for the state or click the Browse button to select the image in the Image Browser. The image appears on the face of the object to show the information about the current state.  Before you can place an image on the object, you must import the image into your project.  Image color  This property applies to monochrome images. It determines the color the image is drawn in; that is, the foreground color.  Click the colored box to select another color.  Image back color  This property applies to monochrome images. It determines the color of the background the image is drawn on. Click the colored box to select another color.  If the Image back style is Transparent, the background of the image will be transparent.  Image blink  Select this check box to let the monochrome image blink at run time. The image blinks twice per second.  Image scaled  Select this check box to let the application resize the image to fit the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the image is resized to fit in the object&#8217;s bounding box and clipped to fit the object&#8217;s shape.  If this is not selected, the image is first aligned using the Alignment setting, and then, if larger than the object, the image is clipped to fit the object.  Image back style  This property applies to monochrome and color images. Use it to set the background style to Solid or Transparent.  If Image back style is Transparent:  For monochrome images, the background will be transparent .  For color images that are not PNG with Alpha channel, any parts of the images that are black will be transparent.  Alignment  Specifies how the image is positioned on the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the position is relative to the object's bounding box.  See also  About the Momentary push button&#8217;s error state  Create Momentary push buttons  Set up general properties for a Momentary push button  Set up connections for the Momentary push button  Copy and paste state properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1417,
    "title": "Set up connections for the Momentary Push button",
    "url": "60479.htm",
    "text": "To set up tags and expressions for the Momentary push button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag or expression to these connections:  Value  A write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. The application writes the value corresponding to the current state (pressed or released) to the tag's data source.  Indicator  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. The application reads the value of the connection at the data source, and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the state corresponding to the value.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the state corresponding to the value.  If you assign this connection, the button does not display the current state until it receives a response from the Indicator connection. If you do not assign this connection, the button's state corresponds to the value at the Value connection.  Tip:  To provide visual feedback that the Value connection has been written to the data source, assign different tags to the Value and Indicator connections. Configure the data source to pass the Value connection&#8217;s value to the Indicator connection.  See also  Create Momentary push buttons  Configure the Momentary push button (General tab)  Set up states for the Momentary push button (States tab)  How the Momentary push button works at run time  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1418,
    "title": "How the Momentary push button works at run time",
    "url": "60481.htm",
    "text": "When the operator presses the button, it changes from State 0 to State 1 and sends the State 1 value to the data source. When the operator releases the button, it changes from State 1 back to State 0 and sends the State 0 value to the data source.  The Momentary push button&#8217;s behavior at run time also depends on how you set up the hold time and controls.  Use hold times  The button&#8217;s hold time (specified on the General tab of the Momentary Push Button dialog box) ensures that the Value connection&#8217;s value is held for at least the specified time.  Use controls  If you assign just the Value connection and not the Indicator connection, the button&#8217;s pressed state is shown as soon as the button is pressed. The feedback for this connection is local and immediate. It does not necessarily reflect the Value connection&#8217;s value in the data source.  If you assign the same tag to the Value and Indicator controls, at run time the shown button state is based on the Indicator connection. If network traffic is heavy, the display response might be delayed.  If the Indicator connection value is a floating point value, the application rounds the value to the nearest integer to determine the state to display.  Start projects  When your display is opened at run time, the button is set to State 0 but the state value is not written to the Value connection.  Open graphic displays  When you open a display at run time, the button is set to State 0 but the state value is not written to the Value connection.  When you open a display at run time, the application reads the Indicator connection value and updates the display based on the value.  Close graphic displays  If the display containing the button is closed before the hold time has expired, the hold time will be reset, the button will be reset to state 0 and the value for state 0 will be sent to the data source.  See also  Causes of run-time errors for the Momentary push button  About the Momentary push button's error state  Set up controls for the Momentary push button  Configure the Momentary push button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1419,
    "title": "Example: Use a Momentary push button",
    "url": "60483.htm",
    "text": "In this example, the Momentary push button controls the state of a valve. The valve can be open, closed, or partially open.  To configure the valve to be open when the button is not pressed (that is, normally open), and closed when the button is pressed  Create a Momentary push button and select the \"Normally open\" button action. Add the caption \"Open\" for State 0 and \"Closed\" for State 1. Assign a tag to the Value connection.  When the operator presses the button, the application sets the button to State 1 and the caption changes to Closed. The data source registers the change to the tag assigned to the Value connection and closes the valve.  When the operator releases the button or the hold time has elapsed, whichever is later, the application sets the button to State 0 and the caption changes to Open. The data source registers the change to the tag assigned to the Value connection and opens the valve.  To configure the valve to be closed when the button is not pressed (that is, normally closed), and open when the button is pressed  Create a Momentary push button and select the \"Normally closed\" button action. Add the caption \"Closed\" for State 0 and \"Open\" for State 1.  When the operator presses the button, the application sets the button to State 1 and the caption changes to Open. The data source registers the change to the tag assigned to the Value connection and opens the valve.  When the operator releases the button or the hold time has elapsed, whichever is later, the application sets the button to State 0 and the caption changes to Closed. The data source registers the change to the tag assigned to the Value connection and closes the valve.  To configure the valve to be closed when the button is not pressed, and open 50% when the button is pressed  Create a Momentary push button and select the Value button action. Change the value for State 0 to 100 and the value for State 1 to 50. Add the caption \"Closed\" for State 0 and \"Open 50%\" for State 1.  When the operator presses the button, the application sets the button to State 1 and the caption changes to Open 50%. The data source registers the change to the tag assigned to the Value connection and opens the valve 50%.  When the operator releases the button or the hold time has elapsed, whichever is later, the application sets the button to State 0 and the caption changes to Closed. The data source registers the change to the tag assigned to the Value connection and closes the valve.  See also  Causes of run-time errors for the Momentary push button  About the Momentary push buttons error state  Create Momentary push buttons  Configure the Momentary push button  Set up states for the Momentary push button  Set up controls for the Momentary push button  How the Momentary push button works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1420,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the Momentary push button",
    "url": "60473.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs errors about the Momentary push button to diagnostics under these circumstances:  Invalid values  If the button&#8217;s state value is too large for the data type of the tag assigned to the Value connection, or if the value is outside the assigned tag&#8217;s minimum and maximum values, the application does not write the value to the Value connection, the state does not change, and the application logs an error.  For example, the state value is too large for the tag&#8217;s data type if your data source is a PLC-5, the state value is 2,147,483,647, and the assigned tag is an integer tag using the address N7:0. Integer tags have a range of -32,768 to 32,767.  If the Indicator connection value does not match any of the state values for the push button, the button displays the error state.  Unassigned connections  If the Value connection is not assigned, the error state is shown. When an operator presses the button, the state does not change and the application logs an error.  See also  About the Momentary push button&#8217;s error state  Create Momentary push buttons  Configure the Momentary push button (General tab)  Set up states for the Momentary push button (States tab)  Set up controls for the Momentary push button (Connections tab)  How the Momentary push button works at run time  Example: Use a Momentary push button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1421,
    "title": "About the Momentary push button\u2019s error state",
    "url": "60471.htm",
    "text": "The error state shows at run time if:  The Value connection is unassigned  The Indicator connection value does not match one of the configured state values  See also  Causes of run-time errors for the Momentary push button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1422,
    "title": "Create Maintained push buttons",
    "url": "60459.htm",
    "text": "Use the Maintained push button object to create a button that toggles between two values. This type of button is useful for changing a setting within a machine or process, but not for starting the machine or process.  A Maintained push button sends one value to the data source the first time it is pressed, and a second value the next time it is pressed and released.  Important:  Do not use push buttons for emergency stops. Emergency stop buttons must be hard-wired.  To create a Maintained push button  In the Graphics Display editor, from the Objects menu, select Push Button > Maintained.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks, how to change states, and its tags.  See also  How the Maintained push button works at run time  Set up general properties for a Maintained push button  Set up states for the Maintained push button  Set up controls for the Maintained push button  About the Maintained push button&#8217;s error state  ",
    "keywords": {
      "push button": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1423,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Maintained push button",
    "url": "60463.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Maintained Push Button Properties dialog box to set up how a Maintained push button looks.  To set up general options for a Maintained push button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the States tab to specify how the object looks in each state at run time.  See also  Create Maintained push buttons  Options on the General tab of the Maintained Push Button Properties dialog box  Example: Use a Maintained push button  Set up states for a Maintained push button  How the Maintained push button works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1424,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Maintained Push Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "326827.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Maintained Push Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Specify the color for the background (Back color) on the States tab.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Specify the background color and the border color on the States tab.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  State settings  Next state based on  Select how the button changes states:  Current state. The application switches the button from the current state to the other state and writes out the other state value.  Value connection.The application reads the value of the Value connection, and, if the value matches one of the button&#8217;s state values, changes the button to the other state and writes out the other state value. Select this option if you want the button to base its state on external changes to the Value connection.  If the value does not match one of the button&#8217;s state values, the application changes the button to State 0 and writes out the State 0 value.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Create Maintained push buttons  Set up general properties for a Maintained push button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1425,
    "title": "Set up states for a Maintained Push button",
    "url": "60453.htm",
    "text": "se the States tab of the Maintained Push button Properties dialog box to set up states for the button.  To set up states for a Maintained push button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the States tab.  In the Select state list, click State 0.  Specify these properties for State 0:  Value  General appearance  Caption, if any  Image, if any  Repeat steps 3 and 4 for State 1 and the Error state.  Once you set up the general, caption, and image properties for one state, copy and paste the state&#8217;s properties to another state or to all states.  See also  About the Maintained push button&#8217;s error state  Create Maintained push buttons  Configure the Maintained push button (General tab)  Set up controls for the Maintained push button (Connections tab)  Copy and paste state properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1426,
    "title": "Options on the States tab of the Maintained Push Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330664.htm",
    "text": "The following table show s the options on the States tab of the Maintained Push Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Table Heading  Select state  Click the state for which to set up properties.  There is an error state, which is labeled Error.  General  Value  Type the integer value to use for each state. You cannot assign a value to the error state.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the state. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the state. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected on the General tab, this color appears at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink when the object is in this state at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the state. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object).  If the indicator&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient (as specified in the General tab), the pattern is not visible.  Pattern color  This box displays the current pattern color for the state. Click it to select another color.  Caption  Enter the text for the state. The text appears on the face of the object, to give the operator information about the current state.  The default caption for the error state is Error. You can change it if required.  Insert Variable  Click this button to select the type of variable to be inserted.  Font  Select the font to use for the caption.  Size  Select the font size to use for the caption.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the caption, if required.  Caption color  This box shows the current text color for the caption. Click it to select another color.  Caption back color  This box shows the current background color for the caption. Click it to select another color.  If the caption background style is transparent, the application does not use this caption background color.  Caption blink  Select this check box if you want the caption to blink at run time. The caption blinks twice per second.  Word wrap  Select this check box if you want the text to continue on the next line at the beginning of a new word.  If this check box is cleared, the text continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  Caption back style  Select whether the caption&#8217;s background is Solid or Transparent.  If you select Transparent, the object&#8217;s background is not filled in and any objects behind it show through.  Alignment  Specifies how the caption is positioned on the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the position is relative to the object's bounding box.  Image settings  Image  Enter the file name of the graphic image for the state or click the Browse button to select the image in the Image Browser. The image appears on the face of the object to show the information about the current state.  Before you can place an image on the object, you must import the image into your project.  Image color  This property applies to monochrome images. It determines the color the image is drawn in; that is, the foreground color.  Click the colored box to select another color.  Image back color  This property applies to monochrome images. It determines the color of the background the image is drawn on. Click the colored box to select another color.  If the Image back style is Transparent, the background of the image will be transparent.  Image blink  Select this check box to let the monochrome image blink at run time. The image blinks twice per second.  Image scaled  Select this check box to let the application resize the image to fit the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the image is resized to fit in the object&#8217;s bounding box and clipped to fit the object&#8217;s shape.  If this is not selected, the image is first aligned using the Alignment setting, and then, if larger than the object, the image is clipped to fit the object.  Image back style  This property applies to monochrome and color images. Use it to set the background style to Solid or Transparent.  If Image back style is Transparent:  For monochrome images, the background will be transparent .  For color images that are not PNG with Alpha channel, any parts of the images that are black will be transparent.  Alignment  Specifies how the image is positioned on the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the position is relative to the object's bounding box.  See also  About the Maintained push button&#8217;s error state  Create Maintained push buttons  Configure the Maintained push button  Set up controls for the Maintained push button  Copy and paste state properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1427,
    "title": "Set up connections for the Maintained push button (Connections tab)",
    "url": "60467.htm",
    "text": "To set up tags and expressions for the Maintained push button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag or expression to these connections:  Value  A read-write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. The application writes the value corresponding to the new state to the tag&#8217;s data source. If the \"Next state based on\" option (in the General tab) is set to Value connection, the application reads this tag to determine which state to display next.  Indicator  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. The application reads the value of the connection at the data source, and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the state corresponding to the value.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the state corresponding to the value.  If you assign this connection, the button does not display the current state until it receives a response from the Indicator connection. If you do not assign this connection, the button's state corresponds to the value at the Value connection.  Tip:  To provide visual feedback that the Value connection has been written to the data source, assign different tags to the Value and Indicator connections. Configure the data source to pass the Value connection&#8217;s value to the Indicator connection.  See also  Create Maintained push buttons  Configure the Maintained push button (General tab)  Set up states for the Maintained push button (States tab)  How the Maintained push button works at run time  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1428,
    "title": "How the Maintained push button works at run time",
    "url": "60461.htm",
    "text": "This button works like a hard-wired switch. When the operator first presses the button, it changes from State 0 to State 1 and sends the State 1 value to the data source. When the operator presses and releases the button a second time, it changes from State 1 back to State 0 and sends the State 0 value to the data source.  The Maintained push button&#8217;s behavior at run time also depends on how you set up the Next state based on option and controls.  Change states  The application uses the Next state based on option (specified on the General tab of the Maintained Push Button dialog box) to determine how to change the button&#8217;s state.  Example: Using a Maintained push button  If Next state based on is set to Value connection, and the control&#8217;s value does not match either state&#8217;s value, the button is set to State 0 and the application writes the State 0 value to the data source.  Use controls  If you assign just the Value connection and not the Indicator connection, the button&#8217;s state is shown as soon as the button is pressed. The feedback for this connection is local and immediate. It does not necessarily reflect the Value connection&#8217;s value in the data source.  If you assign the same tag to the Value and Indicator controls, at run time the shown button state is based on the Indicator connection. If network traffic is heavy, the display response might be delayed.  If the Indicator connection value is a floating point value, the application rounds the value to the nearest integer to determine the state to display.  Start projects  When your display is opened at run time, the application reads the Value connection and sets the button to the state for that value, regardless of the Next state based on setting.  Open graphic displays  When you open a display at run time, the application reads the button&#8217;s Value connection and sets the button to the state for that value. If the Indicator connection is not assigned, the shown state is based on this value.  When you open a display at run time, the application reads the Indicator connection value and updates the display based on the value.  If the value does not match either state&#8217;s value, the error state is shown. When the operator presses the button, it changes to State 0.  See also  Causes of run-time errors for the Maintained push button  About the Maintained push button's error state  Set up controls for the Maintained push button  Configure the Maintained push button  Example: Use a Maintained push button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1429,
    "title": "Example: Use a Maintained push button",
    "url": "60465.htm",
    "text": "In this example, the Maintained push button controls the type of label to print for the bag filler machine. The machine can print labels with metric or imperial weights.  If the operator controls the type of label to print  Create a Maintained push button with the caption \"Metric selected\" for State 0 and \"Imperial selected\" for State 1. The application monitors the tag you assign to the Value connection to control the label print mode. If the operator presses the button to change the mode, the Value connection value changes, and the machine switches modes.  If a supervisory system controls the type of label to print  If the label print mode can also be set by a supervisory system, the operator must be able to view the application&#8217;s local display to see which mode the machine is currently using. In this case, set the \"Next state based on\" option to Value. This causes the application to read the Value connection and update the button&#8217;s state before changing to the next state.  Assign the same tag to the Value connection and the Indicator control. This ensures that the Maintained push button always displays the current printing mode.  See also  Causes of run-time errors for the Maintained push button  About the Maintained push buttons error state  Create Maintained push buttons  Configure the Maintained push button  Set up states for the Maintained push button  Set up controls for the Maintained push button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1430,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the Maintained push button",
    "url": "60457.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs errors about the Maintained push button to diagnostics under these circumstances:  Invalid values  If the button&#8217;s state value is too large for the data type of the tag assigned to the Value connection, or if the value is outside the assigned tag&#8217;s minimum and maximum values, the application does not write the value to the Value connection, the state does not change, and the application logs an error.  For example, the state value is too large for the tag&#8217;s data type if your data source is a PLC-5, the state value is 2,147,483,647, and the assigned tag is an integer tag using the address N7:0. Integer tags have a range of -32,768 to 32,767  If the Indicator connection value does not match any of the state values for the push button, the button displays the error state.  Unassigned connections  If the Value connection is not assigned, the error state is shown. When an operator presses the button the state does not change and the application logs an error.  See also  About the Maintained push button&#8217;s error state  Create Maintained push buttons  Set up controls for the Maintained push button (Connections tab)  Configure the Maintained push button (General tab)  Set up states for the Maintained push button (States tab)  How the Maintained push button works at run time  Example: Use a Maintained push button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1431,
    "title": "About the Maintained push button\u2019s error state",
    "url": "60455.htm",
    "text": "The error state shows at run time if:  When the display opens, the Value connection value does not match any of the configured state values  The Indicator connection value does not match one of the configured state values  See also  Causes of run-time errors for the maintained push button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1432,
    "title": "Create Latched push buttons",
    "url": "60443.htm",
    "text": "Use the Latched push button object to create a button with a latched and unlatched state. This type of button is useful for starting a machine or process.  For example, use the Latched push button when you want the Value connection to start a process within a programmable logic controller (PLC) and remain set until the process is completed. You can also use a latched push button when you have a PLC with a long program or long update times.  To create a Latched push button  In the Graphics Display editor, select Push Button > Latched from the Objects menu.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks, how to unlatch the button, and its tags.  Important:  Do not use push buttons for emergency stops. Emergency stop buttons must be hard-wired.  Tip:  Use the Handshake connection to signal that the program has read the Value connection.  The Latched push button sends a value to the data source when pressed, and retains this value until reset by the Handshake connection.  See also  Set up general properties for a Latched push button  Set up states for a Latched push button  Set up connections for the Latched push button  How the Latched push button works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the Latched push button  ",
    "keywords": {
      "push button": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1433,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Latched push button",
    "url": "60447.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Latched Push button Properties dialog box to set up how a Latched push button looks.  To set up general options for a Latched push button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the States tab to specify how the object looks in each state at run time.  See also  Create Latched push buttons  Options on the General tab of the Latched Push Button Properties dialog box  Set up states for a Latched push button  Set up connections for the Latched push button  How the Latched push button works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1434,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Latched Push Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "326870.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Latched Push Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Specify the color for the background (Back color) on the States tab.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Specify the background color and the border color on the States tab.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Button settings  Latch reset type  Specify how to unlatch the button:  Non-zero value unlatches the button when the Handshake connection is a non-zero value.  Zero to non-zero transition unlatches the button when the Handshake connection changes from 0 to a non-zero value.  Assign values to the latched and unlatched states on the States tab. Assign a tag or expression to the Handshake connection on the Connections tab.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Create Latched push buttons  Set up general properties for a Latched push button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1435,
    "title": "Set up states for a Latched push button (States tab)",
    "url": "60437.htm",
    "text": "Use the States tab of the Latched Push button Properties dialog box to set up states for the button.  To set up states for a Latched push button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the States tab.  In the Select state list, click State 0.  Specify these properties for State 0:  Value  General appearance  Caption, if any  Image, if any  Repeat steps 3 and 4 for State 1 and the Error state.  Once you set up the general, caption, and image properties for one state, copy and paste the state&#8217;s properties to another state or to all states.  See also  About the Latched push button&#8217;s error state  Create Latched push buttons  Configure the Latched push button (General tab)  Set up controls for the Latched push button (Connections tab)  Copy and paste state properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1436,
    "title": "Options on the States tab of the Latched Push Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330668.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the States tab of the Latched Push Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Select state  Click the state for which to set up properties.  The unlatched state is State 0. The latched state is State 1. There is also an error state, which is labeled Error.  General  Value  Type the integer value to use for each state. You cannot assign a value to the error state.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the state. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the state. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected on the General tab, this color appears at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink when the object is in this state at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the state. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object).  If the indicator&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient as specified on the General tab, the pattern is not visible.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the state. Click it to select another color.  Caption  Enter the text for the state. The text appears on the face of the object, to give the operator information about the current state.  The default caption for the error state is Error. You can change it if required.  Insert Variable  Click this button to select the type of variable to be inserted.  Font  Select the font to use for the caption.  Size  Select the font size to use for the caption.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the caption, if required.  Caption color  This box shows the current text color for the caption. Click it to select another color.  Caption back color  This box shows the current background color for the caption. Click it to select another color.  If the caption background style is transparent, the application does not use this caption background color.  Caption blink  Select this check box if you want the caption to blink at run time. The caption blinks twice per second.  Word wrap  Select this check box if you want the text to continue on the next line at the beginning of a new word.  If this check box is cleared, the text continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  Caption back style  Select whether the caption&#8217;s background is Solid or Transparent.  If you select Transparent, the object&#8217;s background is not filled in and any objects behind it show through.  Alignment  Specifies how the caption is positioned on the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the position is relative to the object's bounding box.  Image settings  Image  Enter the file name of the graphic image for the state or click the Browse button to select the image in the Image Browser. The image appears on the face of the object to show the information about the current state.  Before you can place an image on the object, you must import the image into your project.  Image color  This property applies to monochrome images. It determines the color the image is drawn in; that is, the foreground color.  Click the colored box to select another color.  Image back color  This property applies to monochrome images. It determines the color of the background the image is drawn on. Click the colored box to select another color.  If the Image back style is Transparent, the background of the image will be transparent.  Image blink  Select this check box to let the monochrome image blink at run time. The image blinks twice per second.  Image scaled  Select this check box to let the application resize the image to fit the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the image is resized to fit in the object&#8217;s bounding box and clipped to fit the object&#8217;s shape.  If this is not selected, the image is first aligned using the Alignment setting, and then, if larger than the object, the image is clipped to fit the object.  Image back style  This property applies to monochrome and color images. Use it to set the background style to Solid or Transparent.  If Image back style is Transparent:  For monochrome images, the background will be transparent .  For color images that are not PNG with Alpha channel, any parts of the images that are black will be transparent.  Alignment  Specifies how the image is positioned on the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the position is relative to the object's bounding box.  See also  About the Latched push button&#8217;s error state  Create Latched push buttons  Configure the Latched push button  Set up controls for the Latched push button  Copy and paste state properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1437,
    "title": "Set up connections for the Latched push button (Connections tab)",
    "url": "60449.htm",
    "text": "To set up tags and expressions for the Latched push button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag or expression to these connections:  Value  A read-write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. When the operator presses the button, the application writes the value corresponding to the latched state (State 1) to the tag&#8217;s data source, unless the Latch Reset Type option (on the General tab) is \"Non-zero\" and the Handshake connection is currently a non-zero value.  When the Handshake connection unlatches the button, the application sends the value corresponding to the unlatched state (State 0) to the Value connection.  When you open a display containing a Latched push button, the application reads the value of the Value connection to determine its current state.  Indicator  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. The application reads the value of the connection at the data source, and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the state corresponding to the value.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the state corresponding to the value.  If you assign this connection, the button does not show the current state until it receives a response from the Indicator connection. If you do not assign this connection, the button's state corresponds to the value at the Value connection.  Handshake  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. The application reads the value of this connection at the data source, and resets the button to its unlatched state when this connection changes to meet the conditions of the Latch reset type option specified in the General tab.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and resets the button to its unlatched state when this connection changes to meet the conditions of the Latch reset type option.  Tip:  To provide visual feedback that the Value connection has been written to the data source, assign different tags to the Value and Indicator connections. Configure the data source to pass the Value connection&#8217;s value to the Indicator connection.  See also  Create Latched push buttons  Configure the Latched push button (General tab)  Set up states for the Latched push button (States tab)  How the Latched push button works at run time  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1438,
    "title": "How the Latched push button works at run time",
    "url": "60451.htm",
    "text": "When the operator first presses the button, it changes from State 0 to State 1 and sends the State 1 value to the data source. The button retains this value until unLatched by the Handshake connection.  The Latched push button&#8217;s behavior at run time also depends on how you set up the latch reset type and controls.  Unlatch the button  If the Latch reset type (specified on the General tab of the Latched Push Button dialog box) is \"Non-zero,\" when the Handshake connection is a non-zero value, the application unlatches the button. If the operator presses the button while the Handshake connection is a non-zero value, the button remains unlatched.  If the latch reset type is \"Zero to non-zero transition,\" when the Handshake connection changes from 0 to a non-zero value, the application unlatches the button.  If the button is in the latched state and the operator presses the button, the application writes out the latched (State 1) value again.  Use controls  If you assign just the Value connection and not the Indicator connection, the button&#8217;s pressed state is shown as soon as the button is pressed. The feedback for this connection is local and immediate. It does not necessarily reflect the Value connection&#8217;s value in the data source.  If you assign the same tag to the Value and Indicator controls, at run time the shown button state is based on the Indicator connection. If network traffic is heavy, the display response might be delayed.  If the Indicator connection value is a floating point value, the application rounds the value to the nearest integer to determine the state to display.  Open and close graphic displays  When you open a display at run time, the application reads the Indicator connection and sets the button to that state.  If the value does not match either state&#8217;s value, the error state is shown. When the operator presses the button, it changes to State 1.  When you open a display at run time, the application reads the Indicator connection value and updates the display based on the value.  When you open a display at run time, the application reads the value of the Handshake connection.  When you close a display at run time, subsequent changes to the Handshake connection do not affect the Latched push button.  See also  Causes of run-time errors for the Latched push button  About the Latched push button's error state  Set up controls for the Latched push button  Configure the Latched push button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1439,
    "title": "Example: Use a Latched push button",
    "url": "60445.htm",
    "text": "In this example, the Latched push button controls the filling process for the bag filler machine.  Create a Latched push button with the caption \"Fill\" for State 0 and \"Filling\" for State 1. Assign a tag called Fill to the Value connection. Assign a tag called Handshake to the Handshake connection.  When the operator presses the button, the application sets the button to State 1 and the caption changes to Filling. The data source registers the state change for the Fill tag and starts the bag filler machine. When the machine finishes filling the bag, the data source momentarily sets the Handshake connection to a non-zero value. This unlatches the button, returning it to State 0.  See also  About the Latched push buttons error state  Causes of run-time errors for the Latched push button  Create Latched push buttons  Configure the Latched push button (General tab)  Set up controls for the Latched push button  Set up states for the Latched push button (States tab)  How the Latched push button works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1440,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the Latched push button",
    "url": "60441.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs errors about the Latched push button to diagnostics under these circumstances:  Invalid values  If the button&#8217;s state value is too large for the data type of the tag assigned to the Value connection, or if the value is outside the assigned tag&#8217;s minimum and maximum values, the application does not write the value to the Value connection, the state does not change, and the application logs an error.  For example, the state value is too large for the tag&#8217;s data type if your data source is a PLC-5, the state value is 2,147,483,647, and the assigned tag is an integer tag using the address N7:0. Integer tags have a range of -32,768 to 32,767.  If the Indicator connection value does not match any of the state values for the push button, the button displays the error state.  Unassigned connections  If the Value connection is not assigned, the button is shown in its error state. When an operator presses the button, it does not latch and the application logs an error.  If the Handshake connection is not assigned, the button is shown in its error state. When an operator presses the button, it does not latch and the application logs an error.  See also  About the Latched push button&#8217;s error state  Create Latched push buttons  Configure the Latched push button (General tab)  Set up states for the Latched push button (States tab)  Set up controls for the Latched push button (Connections tab)  How the Latched push button works at run time  Example: Use a Latched push button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1441,
    "title": "About the Latched push button\u2019s error state",
    "url": "60439.htm",
    "text": "The error state shows at run time if:  The Value connection is unassigned  When the display opens, the Value connection value does not match any of the configured state values  The Indicator connection value does not match one of the configured state values  See also  Causes of run-time errors for the latched push button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1442,
    "title": "Create Multistate push buttons",
    "url": "60491.htm",
    "text": "Use the Multistate push button object when you want the operator to be able to show and select multiple options using a single button. The Multistate push button displays the current state of a process or operation by showing a different color, caption, or image to reflect different states.  Each time the operator presses the button, the application sends the value for the next state to the data source. When the button is in its last configured state, pressing it causes the button to change to its first state and write out the first state value.  Important:  Do not use push buttons for emergency stops. Emergency stop buttons must be hard-wired.  To create a Multistate push button  In the Graphics Display editor, select Push Button > Multistate from the Objects menu.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks, how to change states, and its tags.  See also  Set up general properties for a Multistate Push button  Set up states for a Multistate push button  Set up auto repeat for a Multistate push button  Set up connections for the Multistate push button  How the Multistate push button works at run time  ",
    "keywords": {
      "push button": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1443,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Multistate Push button",
    "url": "60497.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Multistate Push Button Properties dialog box to set up how a Multistate push button looks.  To set up general options for a Multistate push button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the States tab to specify how the object looks in each state at run time.  See also  Create Multistate push buttons  Options on the General tab of the Multistate Push Button Properties dialog box  Set up states for a Multistate push button  Set up auto repeat for the Multistate push button  How the Multistate push button works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1444,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Multistate Push Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "326886.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Multistate Push Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Specify the color for the background (Back color) on the States tab.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Specify the background color and the border color on the States tab.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  State settings  Number of states  Select the number of states for the object.  Next state based on  Select how the button changes states:  Current state. The application switches the button from the current state to the other state and writes out the other state value.  Value connection.The application reads the value of the Value connection, and, if the value matches one of the button&#8217;s state values, changes the button to the other state and writes out the other state value. Select this option if you want the button to base its state on external changes to the Value connection.  If the value does not match one of the button&#8217;s state values, the application changes the button to State 0 and writes out the State 0 value. When the button is in its last configured state, pressing it causes the button to change to State 0 and write out the State 0 value.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Create Multistate push buttons  Set up general properties for a Multistate push button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1445,
    "title": "Set up states for the Multistate push button",
    "url": "60485.htm",
    "text": "Use the States tab of the Multistate push button Properties dialog box to set up states for the button.  To set up states for a Multistate push button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the States tab.  In the Select state list, click State 0.  Specify these properties for State 0:  Value  General appearance  Caption, if any  Image, if any  Repeat steps 3 and 4 for State 1 and the Error state.  Once you set up the general, caption, and image properties for one state, copy and paste the state&#8217;s properties to another state or to all states.  See also  About the Multistate push button&#8217;s error state  Create Multistate push buttons  Set up general properties for a Multistate push button  Set up auto repeat for the Multistate push button  Copy and paste state properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1446,
    "title": "Options on the States tab of the Multistate Push Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330845.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the States tab of the Multistate Push Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Select state  Click the state for which to set up properties.  The first state is State 0. There is also an error state, which is labeled Error.  General  Value  Type the integer value to use for each state. You cannot assign a value to the error state.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the state. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the state. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected on the General tab, this color appears at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink when the object is in this state at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the state. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object).  If the object&#8217;s back style is specified as transparent or gradient in the General tab, the pattern is not visible.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the state. Click it to select another color.  Caption  Enter the text for the state. The text appears on the face of the object, to give the operator information about the current state.  The default caption for the error state is Error. You can change it if required.  Insert Variable  Click this button to select the type of variable to be inserted.  Font  Select the font to use for the caption.  Size  Select the font size to use for the caption.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the caption, if required.  Caption color  This box shows the current text color for the caption. Click it to select another color.  Caption back color  This box shows the current background color for the caption. Click it to select another color.  If the caption background style is transparent, the application does not use this caption background color.  Caption blink  Select this check box if you want the caption to blink at run time. The caption blinks twice per second.  Word wrap  Select this check box if you want the text to continue on the next line at the beginning of a new word.  If this check box is cleared, the text continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  Caption back style  Select whether the caption&#8217;s background is Solid or Transparent.  If you select Transparent, the object&#8217;s background is not filled in and any objects behind it show through.  Alignment  Specifies how the caption is positioned on the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the position is relative to the object's bounding box.  Image settings  Image  Type the file name of the graphic image for the state, or click the Browse button to open the Image Browser. The image appears on the face of the object, to give the operator information about the current state. Before you can place an image on the object, you must import the image into your project.  Image color  This property applies to monochrome images. It determines the color the image is drawn in; that is, the foreground color.  Click the colored box to select another color.  Image back color  This property applies to monochrome images. It determines the color of the background the image is drawn on. Click the colored box to select another color.  If the Image back style is Transparent, the background of the image will be transparent.  Image blink  Select this check box to let the monochrome image blink at run time. The image blinks twice per second.  Image scaled  Select this check box to let the application resize the image to fit the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the image is resized to fit in the object&#8217;s bounding box and clipped to fit the object&#8217;s shape.  If this is not selected, the image is first aligned using the Alignment setting, and then, if larger than the object, the image is clipped to fit the object.  Image back style  This property applies to monochrome and color images. Use it to set the background style to Solid or Transparent.  If Image back style is Transparent:  For monochrome images, the background will be transparent .  For color images that are not PNG with Alpha channel, any parts of the images that are black will be transparent.  Alignment  Specifies how the image is positioned on the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the position is relative to the object's bounding box.  See also  About the Multistate push button&#8217;s error state  Create Multistate push buttons  Configure the Multistate push button  Set up auto repeat for the Multistate push button  Set up controls for the Multistate push button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1447,
    "title": "Set up auto repeat for a Multistate push button",
    "url": "60499.htm",
    "text": "If you set up auto repeat, when the operator presses and holds down the push button, repeated button presses are registered until the operator releases the button. For each button press, the application sends the value for the next state to the data source.  To set up auto repeat for a Multistate push button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Timing tab.  Specify the auto repeat settings to use with the push button.  See also  Create Multistate push buttons  Set up general properties for a Multistate Push button  Set up states for a Multistate push button  Set up connections for the Multistate push button  How the Multistate push button works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1448,
    "title": "Options on the",
    "url": "332843.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Timing tab of the Multistate Push Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Auto repeat settings  Auto repeat rate  Select the number of times per second a button press is registered when the button goes into auto repeat mode. Select 0 if you don&#8217;t want to use auto repeat.  Auto repeat delay  Select the length of time the button has to be pressed and held down before auto repeat starts.  See also  Create Multistate push buttons  Set up general properties for a Multistate Push button  Set up states for a Multistate push button  Set up auto repeat for a Multistate push button  How the Multistate push button works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1449,
    "title": "Set up connections for the Multistate push button (Connections tab)",
    "url": "60501.htm",
    "text": "To set up tags and expressions for the Multistate push button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag or expression to these connections:  Value  A read-write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. The application writes the value corresponding to the new state to the tag&#8217;s data source. If the Next state based on option (in the General tab) is set to Value connection, the application reads this tag to determine which state to show next.  Indicator  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. The application reads the value of the connection at the data source, and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the state corresponding to the value.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the state corresponding to the value.  If you assign this connection, the button does not show the current state until it receives a response from the Indicator connection. If you do not assign this connection, the button's state corresponds to the value at the Value connection.  Tip:  To provide visual feedback that the Value connection has been written to the data source, assign different tags to the Value and Indicator connections. Configure the data source to pass the Value connection&#8217;s value to the Indicator connection.  See also  Configure the Multistate push button (General tab)  Set up auto repeat for the Multistate push button (Timing tab)  Set up states for the Multistate push button (States tab)  How the Multistate push button works at run time  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1450,
    "title": "How the Multistate push button works at run time",
    "url": "60493.htm",
    "text": "When the operator first presses the button, it changes from State 0 to State 1 and sends the State 1 value to the data source. When the operator presses the button a second time, it changes from State 1 to State 2 and sends the State 2 value to the data source. Thus the state is incremented by one for each button press. When the button is in the last configured state and the operator presses it, it changes to State 0 and sends the State 0 value to the data source.  The Multistate push button&#8217;s behavior at run time also depends on how you set up the Next state based on option, auto repeat options, and controls.  Change states  The application uses the Next state based on option (specified on the General tab of the Multistate Push Button dialog box) to determine how to change the button&#8217;s state.  When the operator presses the button, if Next state based on is set to Value, and the control&#8217;s value does not match any of the states&#8217; values, the button is set to State 0 and the application writes the State 0 value to the data source.  Use auto repeat  Set up the Auto repeat rate and Auto repeat delay options on the Timing tab of the Multistate Push Button dialog box.  When the operator presses the button, the auto repeat delay starts timing. The application continues timing until the operator releases the button or until the time reaches the Auto repeat delay time. If the Auto repeat delay time is reached, the button goes into auto repeat mode until the operator releases the button. Once in auto repeat mode, the application uses the Auto repeat rate option to determine the number of button presses per second to send to the data source.  When in auto repeat mode, the application does not read the Value connection to determine the next value to write out, regardless of the Next state based on setting. The application uses the last value written out to determine the next value to write out.  Use controls  If you assign just the Value connection and not the Indicator connection, the button&#8217;s pressed state is shown as soon as the button is pressed. The feedback for this connection is local and immediate. It does not necessarily reflect the Value connection&#8217;s value in the data source.  If you assign the same tag to the Value and Indicator controls, at run time the shown button state is based on the Indicator connection. If network traffic is heavy, the display response might be delayed.  If the Indicator connection value is a floating point value, the application rounds the value to the nearest integer to determine the state to display.  Start projects  When you open the display at run time, the application reads the Value connection and sets the button to this state, regardless of the Next state based on setting.  Open and close graphic displays  When you open a display at run time, the application reads the Value connection value, but does not write the value to the data source.  When you open a display at run time, the application reads the Indicator connection value and updates the display based on the value, unless the Value connection is unassigned.  When you close a display at run time, if the button is in auto repeat mode, the button is released and the application writes the current value to the Value connection.  See also  Causes of run-time errors for the Multistate push button  About the Multistate push button's error state  Set up controls for the Multistate push button  Configure the Maintained push button  Example: Use a Multistate push button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1451,
    "title": "Example: Use a Multistate push button",
    "url": "60495.htm",
    "text": "In this example, the Multistate push button controls the mode of operation for the bag filler machine. The machine can operate manually or automatically, or it can be turned off.  If the operator controls the mode of operation  Create a Multistate push button with the captions \"Off\" for State 0, \"Manual\" for State 1, and \"Automatic\" for State 2. The application monitors the tag you assign to the Value connection to control the operation mode. If the operator presses the button to change to the next mode, the Value connection value changes, and the machine switches modes.  If a supervisory system controls the mode of operation  If the operation mode can also be set by a supervisory system, the operator must be able to view the application&#8217;s local display to see which mode the machine is currently in. In this case, set the \"Next state based on\" option to Value. This causes the application to read the Value connection and update the button&#8217;s state before changing to the next state.  Assign the same tag to the Value connection and the Indicator connection. This ensures that the Multistate push button always displays the current operation mode.  See also  Causes of run-time errors for the Multistate push button  About the Multistate push button's error state  Create Multistate push buttons  Configure the Multistate push button  Set up states for the Multistate push button  Set up controls for the Multistate push button  Set up auto repeat for the Multistate push button  How the Multistate push button works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1452,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the Multistate push button",
    "url": "60489.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs errors about the Multistate push button to diagnostics under these circumstances:  Invalid values  If the button&#8217;s state value is too large for the data type of the tag assigned to the Value connection, or if the value is outside the assigned tag&#8217;s minimum and maximum values, the application does not write the value to the Value connection, the state does not change, and the application logs an error.  For example, the state value is too large for the tag&#8217;s data type if your data source is a PLC-5, the state value is 2,147,483,647, and the assigned tag is an integer tag using the address N7:0. Integer tags have a range of -32,768 to 32,767.  If the button is in auto repeat mode when the error occurs, then auto repeat mode ends and the application resets the Auto repeat delay timer.  If the Indicator connection value does not match any of the state values for the push button, the button displays the error state.  Unassigned connections  If the Value connection is not assigned, the button is shown in its error state. When an operator presses the button, the state does not change and the application logs an error.  See also  Create Multistate push buttons  About the Multistate push button&#8217;s error state  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1453,
    "title": "About the Multistate push button\u2019s error state",
    "url": "60487.htm",
    "text": "The error state shows at run time if:  The Value connection is unassigned  The Value connection value does not match one of the configured state values  The Indicator connection value does not match one of the configured state values  See also  Causes of run-time errors for the Multistate push button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1454,
    "title": "Create Interlocked push buttons",
    "url": "60425.htm",
    "text": "An Interlocked push button is one of a group of buttons that have the same connection tag. The buttons function together in much the same way as the station selector buttons on a car radio: pressing one cancels the other and makes a new selection. Although Interlocked push button function as a group, you add them to the screen one at a time.  When the operator presses the Interlocked push button, the application sends the button&#8217;s value to the data source and highlights the selected button.  The Interlocked push button remains highlighted as long as the value at the data source is the same as the button value. Therefore, only one button in the group is active and highlighted at any given time, unless you assign the same value to two or more Interlocked push buttons.  Important:  Do not use push buttons for emergency stops. Emergency stop buttons must be hard-wired.  Tip:  You can use a single Interlocked push button to set a value.  To create an Interlocked push button  In the Graphics Display editor, select Push Button > Interlocked from the Objects menu.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks, the button&#8217;s value, and its tags.  See also  Set up general properties for an Interlocked push button  Set up states for an Interlocked push button  Set up connections for the Interlocked push button  How the Interlocked push button works at run time  Example: Use Interlocked push buttons  ",
    "keywords": {
      "push button": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1455,
    "title": "Set up general properties for an Interlocked push button",
    "url": "60431.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Interlocked Push button Properties dialog box to set up how an Interlocked push button looks.  To set up general options for an Interlocked push button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the States tab to specify how the object looks in each state at run time.  See also  Create Interlocked push buttons  Options on the General tab of the Interlocked Push Button Properties dialog box  Set up states for an Interlocked push button  Set up connections for the Interlocked push button  How the Interlocked push button works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1456,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Interlocked Push Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "326912.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Interlocked Push Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Specify the color for the background (Back color) on the States tab.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Specify the background color and the border color on the States tab.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Button Value  Type the integer value to use for this button. When the operator presses the button, the button changes to State 1 and the application sends this value to the data source.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Create Interlocked push buttons  Set up general properties for an Interlocked push button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1457,
    "title": "Set up states for an Interlocked push button",
    "url": "60423.htm",
    "text": "Use the States tab of the Interlocked Push button Properties dialog box to set up states for the button.  To set up states for an Interlocked push button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the States tab.  From the Select state list, select State 0.  Specify these properties for State 0:  General appearance  Caption, if any  Image, if any  Repeat steps 3 and 4 for State 1.  Once you set up the properties for one state, you can copy and paste the state&#8217;s properties to another state or to all states.  See also  Create Interlocked push buttons  Set up general properties for an Interlocked push button  Options on the States tab of the Interlocked Push Button Properties dialog box  How the Interlocked push button works at run time  Copy and paste state properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1458,
    "title": "Options on the States tab of the Interlocked Push Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330849.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the States tab of the Interlocked Push Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Select state  Click the state for which to set up properties.  The released state is State 0. The selected state is State 1.  When the button&#8217;s connection tag value equals the button value you set up in the General tab, the button is in State 1. If the connection tag is any other value, the button is in State 0.  General  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the state. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the state. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected on the General tab, this color appears at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink when the object is in this state at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the state. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object).  If the object&#8217;s back style is specified as transparent or gradient in the General tab, the pattern is not visible.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the state. Click it to select another color.  Caption  Enter the text for the state. The text appears on the face of the object, to give the operator information about the current state.  Insert Variable  Click this button to select the type of variable to be inserted.  Font  Select the font to use for the caption.  Size  Select the font size to use for the caption.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the caption, if required.  Caption color  This box shows the current text color for the caption. Click it to select another color.  Caption back color  This box shows the current background color for the caption. Click it to select another color.  If the caption background style is transparent, the application does not use this caption background color.  Caption blink  Select this check box if you want the caption to blink at run time. The caption blinks twice per second.  Word wrap  Select this check box if you want the text to continue on the next line at the beginning of a new word.  If this check box is cleared, the text continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  Caption back style  Select whether the caption&#8217;s background is Solid or Transparent.  If you select Transparent, the object&#8217;s background is not filled in and any objects behind it show through.  Alignment  Specifies how the caption is positioned on the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the position is relative to the object's bounding box.  Image settings  Image  Enter the file name of the graphic image for the state or click the Browse button to select the image in the Image Browser. The image appears on the face of the object to show the information about the current state.  Before you can place an image on the object, you must import the image into your project.  Image color  This property applies to monochrome images. It determines the color the image is drawn in; that is, the foreground color.  Click the colored box to select another color.  Image back color  This property applies to monochrome images. It determines the color of the background the image is drawn on. Click the colored box to select another color.  If the Image back style is Transparent, the background of the image will be transparent.  Image blink  Select this check box to let the monochrome image blink at run time. The image blinks twice per second.  Image scaled  Select this check box to let the application resize the image to fit the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the image is resized to fit in the object&#8217;s bounding box and clipped to fit the object&#8217;s shape.  If this is not selected, the image is first aligned using the Alignment setting, and then, if larger than the object, the image is clipped to fit the object.  Image back style  This property applies to monochrome and color images. Use it to set the background style to Solid or Transparent.  If Image back style is Transparent:  For monochrome images, the background will be transparent .  For color images that are not PNG with Alpha channel, any parts of the images that are black will be transparent.  Alignment  Specifies how the image is positioned on the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the position is relative to the object's bounding box.  See also  Create Interlocked push buttons  Configure the Interlocked push button  Set up connections for the Interlocked push button  How the Interlocked push button works at run time  Copy and paste state properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1459,
    "title": "Set up connections for the Interlocked push button (Connections tab)",
    "url": "60433.htm",
    "text": "To set up tags for the Interlocked push button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag to this connection:  Value  A read-write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. When the operator presses the button, the application writes the value for this button to the tag&#8217;s data source. The application also reads this tag to determine which state to display.  Assign the same tag to the Value connection for each Interlocked push button in the group.  See also  Create Interlocked push buttons  Configure the Interlocked push button (General tab)  Set up states for the Interlocked push button (States tab)  How the Interlocked push button works at run time  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1460,
    "title": "How the Interlocked push button works at run time",
    "url": "60435.htm",
    "text": "When the operator presses an Interlocked push button, it changes from State 0 to State 1 and sends the button value to the data source. When the operator presses another Interlocked push button, it changes from State 0 to State 1 and sends its button value to the data source, and the first button is set back to State 0.  When you open a display at run time, the application reads the Value connection. If the value matches the button value, the button is set to State 1. Otherwise, the button is set to State 0.  See also  Causes of run-time errors for the Interlocked push button  Set up controls for the Interlocked push button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1461,
    "title": "Example: Use Interlocked push buttons",
    "url": "60427.htm",
    "text": "In this example, the Interlocked push buttons control the position of a guide that directs bottles from the main conveyor to one of three secondary conveyors. Only one secondary conveyor can be operational at any moment.  Create an Interlocked push button with back color and border color for State 0 as red, and State 1 as green. Make the State 0 and State 1 captions \"Conveyor 1.\" Assign a tag to the Value connection.  Copy the Interlocked push button and paste two additional copies of it.  For the first copy, change the button value property to 1 and the State 0 and State 1 captions to \"Conveyor 2.\"  For the second copy, change the value property to 2 and the State 0 and State 1 captions to \"Conveyor 3.\"  When the operator presses one of these three Interlocked push buttons the button&#8217;s value property is written to the Value connection. The data source registers the value change and the appropriate conveyor becomes the active conveyor.  See also  Causes of run-time errors for the Interlocked push button  Create Interlocked push buttons  Configure the Interlocked push button  Set up states for the Interlocked push button  Se up controls for the Interlocked push button  How the Interlocked push button works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1462,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the Interlocked push button",
    "url": "60429.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs errors about the Interlocked push button to diagnostics under these circumstances:  Invalid values  If the button value is too large for the data type of the tag assigned to the Value connection, or if the value is outside the assigned tag&#8217;s minimum and maximum values, the application does not write the value to the Value connection, the state does not change, and the application logs an error.  For example, the state value is too large for the tag&#8217;s data type if your data source is a PLC-5, the state value is 2,147,483,647, and the assigned tag is an integer tag using the address N7:0. Integer tags have a range of -32,768 to 32,767.  Unassigned connections  If the Value connection is not assigned, the application sets the button to State 0 and logs an error.  See also  Create Interlocked push buttons  Configure the Interlocked push button (General tab)  Set up states for the Interlocked push button (States tab)  Set up controls for the Interlocked push button (Connections tab)  How the Interlocked push button works at run time  Example: Use Interlocked push buttons  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1463,
    "title": "Create Ramp buttons",
    "url": "60676.htm",
    "text": "At run time the operator can use the Ramp button to increase or decrease the value of a tag. Ramp buttons can change a value by either an integer or floating point value. You can use two Ramp buttons together to create a raise/lower control.  Tip:  Configure a numeric display object to show the value of the Ramp button&#8217;s Value connection.  To create a Ramp button  In the Graphics Display editor, choose Push Button > Ramp from the Objects menu.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify the how the button looks, its tags, and whether to use auto repeat.  See also  How the Ramp button works at run time  Set up general properties for a Ramp button  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up connections for the Ramp button  Set up auto repeat for the Ramp button  ",
    "keywords": {
      "push button": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1464,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Ramp button",
    "url": "60682.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Ramp Button Properties dialog box to set up how a Ramp push button looks.  To set up general options for a Ramp button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create Ramp buttons  Options on the General tab of the Ramp Button Properties dialog box  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up auto repeat for a Ramp button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1465,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Ramp Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "326924.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Ramp Push Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Specify the color for the background (Back color) on the States tab.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Specify the background color and the border color on the States tab.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Button settings  Use variable lower/upper limit  Check this box to use tag or expression values for the object's highest (if Ramp up is selected) or lowest (if Ramp down is selected) value. If this box is checked, the Upper/Lower limit value text box is disabled, and the object's ramp value is controlled by the Limit connection  Use variable ramp value  Check this box to use tag or expression values for the object's ramp value. If this box is checked, the Ramp value text box is disabled, and the object's ramp value is controlled by the Ramp connection  Ramp up  Select this option to create a Ramp button that increases the Value connection&#8217;s value.  Ramp down  Select this option to create a Ramp button that decreases the Value connection&#8217;s value.  Upper/Lower limit  For Ramp up buttons, type the button&#8217;s upper limit, that is, the amount beyond which the button&#8217;s value cannot increase. For Ramp down buttons, type the button&#8217;s lower limit, that is, the amount beyond which the button&#8217;s value cannot decrease.  Ramp value  Type the amount to change the value by. Type a positive number. For a Ramp down button, the value is decreased by this amount. For a Ramp up button, the value is increased by this amount.  If the ramp value is floating point and the Value connection is an integer tag, the application rounds the value before writing it to the connection.  Pressing a Ramp button a second time before the previous increment or decrement has finished updating can affect the accuracy of the resulting numeric value. Wait for each increment or decrement to finish updating before pressing the Ramp button again.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Configuring the gradient fill  Create Ramp buttons  Ramp  Set up general properties for a Ramp button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1466,
    "title": "Set up auto repeat for a Ramp button",
    "url": "60695.htm",
    "text": "If you set up auto repeat, when the operator presses and holds down the Ramp button, repeated button presses are registered until the operator releases the button. For each button press, the application sends the new ramped value to the data source.  Tip:  If the Ramp button is in auto repeat mode, the application ramps the value that was previously sent to the Value connection, rather than reading the connection from the data source and ramping the current connection value. This means that external changes to the Value connection are not recognized while the button is in auto repeat mode.  To set up auto repeat for the Ramp button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Timing tab.  Specify the auto repeat settings to use with the Ramp button.  See also  Create Ramp buttons  Set up general properties for a Ramp button  Set up connections for the Ramp button  How the Ramp button works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the Ramp button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1467,
    "title": "Options on the Timing tab of the Ramp Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330852.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Timing tab of the Ramp Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Auto repeat rate  Specifies the number of times per second a button press is registered when the button goes into auto repeat mode.  Select 0 if you don&#8217;t want to use auto repeat.  Auto repeat delay  Specifies the length of time the button has to be pressed and held down before auto repeat starts.  See also  Create Ramp buttons  How the Ramp button works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1468,
    "title": "Set up connections for the Ramp button (Connections tab)",
    "url": "60690.htm",
    "text": "To set up tags for the Ramp button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag to these connections:  Value  A read-write connection. The application keeps a copy of the Value connection on the computer. When the operator presses the Ramp button, the application adds or subtracts the \"Ramp value\" amount (specified in the General tab) from the local Value connection value and writes the result to the Value connection tag&#8217;s data source.  If the \"Ramp value\" amount &nbsp;is a floating point value and the Value connection is an integer tag, the application rounds the value before writing it to the connection.  Ramp  A read connection. Assign a tag or an expression. The application reads the connection to determine by what value the object will increase or decrease the data source.  This connection is only used if the Use variable ramp check box on the General tab is selected.  Limit  A read connection. Assign a tag or an expression. The application reads the connection value to determine the highest or lowest ramp value the object can write to the data source.  This connection is only used if the Use variable lower/upper limit check box on the General tab is checked.  See also  Create Ramp buttons  How the Ramp button works at run time  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1469,
    "title": "How the Ramp button works at run time",
    "url": "60678.htm",
    "text": "When the operator presses the Ramp button, the application reads the Value connection value, stores a local copy of the value, adds or subtracts the ramp amount from the local value, and writes the result to the Value connection at the data source.  The Ramp button&#8217;s behavior at run time also depends on whether you set up auto repeat.  Tip:  Pressing a Ramp button a second time before the previous increment or decrement has finished updating can affect the accuracy of the resulting numeric value. Wait for each increment or decrement to finish updating before pressing the Ramp button again.  Open and close graphic displays  When you open a display at run time, the application reads the Value connection value.  When you close a display at run time, if the button is in auto repeat mode, the button is released and the value of the button at the moment it is released is written to the Value connection.  See also  Causes of run-time errors for the Ramp button  Set up connections for the Ramp button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1470,
    "title": "Example: Use a Ramp button",
    "url": "60674.htm",
    "text": "This example shows you how to use two Ramp buttons together to create a raise/lower control.  Create two Ramp buttons. Configure one button like this:  Caption: Raise  Ramp type: Ramp up  Ramp value: 1  Upper Limit: 100  Auto repeat rate: 5  Configure the second button like this:  Caption: Lower  Ramp type: Ramp down  Ramp value: 1  Lower Limit: 0  Auto repeat rate: 5  Assign the same tag to each button&#8217;s Value connection. Create a numeric display object to view the tag assigned to the Ramp buttons&#8217; Value connection.  When the operator presses the Raise button, the tag assigned to the Value connection increases by one. If the operator holds down the button the value continues to increase at a rate of five times per second. If the operator presses the Lower button the value decreases.  See also  Create Ramp buttons  Create numeric displays  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1471,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the Ramp button",
    "url": "60680.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs errors about the Ramp button to diagnostics under these circumstances:  Invalid values  If the button&#8217;s value is too large for the data type of the tag assigned to the Value connection, or if the value is outside the assigned tag&#8217;s minimum and maximum values, the application does not write the value to the Value connection and the application logs an error.  For example, the value is too large for the tag&#8217;s data type if the data source is a PLC-5, the value is 2,147,483,647, and the assigned tag is an integer tag using the address N7:0. Integer tags have a range of -32,768 to 32, 767 only.  If the button&#8217;s value is beyond the Value limit (specified on the Ramp button&#8217;s General tab), the new value is not written to the Value connection and the application logs an error.  Unassigned connections  If the Value connection is not assigned, when an operator presses the button the application logs an error.  See also  Create Ramp buttons  Configure the Ramp button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1472,
    "title": "Create numeric displays",
    "url": "60525.htm",
    "text": "Use the numeric display object to show the operator numeric information from the data source. For example, you might use a numeric display to show the current temperature of an oven in a bakery.  To create a numeric display  In the Graphics Display editor, select Numeric and String > Numeric Display from the Objects menu.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the display to be.  Double-click the display to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box tabs, specify how the display looks and its tags.  See also  Set up general properties for a numeric display  Set up connections for the numeric display  How the numeric display works at run time  How values are calculated  How values are rounded  ",
    "keywords": {
      "numeric": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1473,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a numeric display",
    "url": "60527.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Numeric Display Properties dialog box to set up how a numeric display looks.  To set up general options for a numeric display  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  See also  Create numeric displays  Options on the General tab of the Numeric Display Properties dialog box  Set up connections for the numeric display  How the numeric display works at run time  How values are calculated  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1474,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Numeric Display Properties dialog box",
    "url": "326933.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Numeric Display Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border or displayed value. If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Fore color  This box shows the color of the text shown on the object. Click it to select another color.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the text to blink at run time. The text blinks twice per second.  Text  The text settings apply to the numeric values in the display.  Font  Select the font to use for the text.  Size  Select the font size to use for the text.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the text, if required.  Alignment  Specifies how the shown text is positioned on the object.  Value settings  Number of digits  Select the maximum number of digits to show, up to 17 digits. The decimal point and minus sign each count as a digit.  Fill left with  Select a character to fill the left of the display with if the value at the data source contains fewer than the maximum number of digits.  If you don&#8217;t want to use a fill character, select None.  Decimal places  Type the maximum number of digits to show after the decimal point.  The possible range is 0 to (Number of digits - 2). 2 is subtracted from the number of digits to allow for a leading digit and a decimal point. For example, .12 is shown as 0.12.  See also  Create numeric displays  Set up general properties for a numeric display object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1475,
    "title": "Set up connections for the numeric display (Connections tab)",
    "url": "60523.htm",
    "text": "To set up tags and expressions for the numeric display  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the display to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag or expression to these connections:  Value  You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. The application reads the value of the Value connection&#8217;s tag at the data source and displays this value in the numeric display.  If you assign an expression to this connection, the application calculates the value of the expression and shows the result in the numeric display.  Polarity  You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. This connection determines whether or not a minus sign is shown. A minus sign is shown when this connection has a positive non-zero value. If this connection is assigned, it overrides the polarity of the Value connection&#8217;s value.  If you assign an expression to this connection, the application calculates the value of the expression and uses the result to determine whether to display a minus sign.  If the Polarity connection uses a tag with a floating point address, values less than .5 will be rounded down and values greater than or equal to .5 will be rounded up.  See also  Create numeric displays  How the numeric display works at run time  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1476,
    "title": "How the numeric display works at run time",
    "url": "60521.htm",
    "text": "The numeric display shows the value of the Value connection at the data source. The application clears the display before showing a new value.  Open graphic displays  When an operator opens a display at run time, the application reads the values of all assigned connections and updates the display based on these values.  What is shown  If the Value connection is unassigned, the numeric display is filled with asterisks (*).  If the value, including the decimal point or minus sign, contains more digits than specified for the Number of digits option (in the General tab), the display is filled with asterisks (*).  If the numeric display is sized so that the value cannot be fully shown (and the value including decimal point and minus sign, is within the configured number of digits for the display), any parts of the value that cannot be shown are truncated and the last displayable digit is replaced with an asterisk.  If the value doesn&#8217;t fit on the first line of the display, and there is room for a second line, the value continues onto the second line.  If the \"Fill left with\" option is None, and the displayed value is a floating point value between 0 and 1, a leading 0 is placed in front of the decimal point.  If the number of places after the decimal point in the returned value is greater than the Decimal places value, the displayed value will be rounded off.  See also  How values are shown  Set up connections for the numeric display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1477,
    "title": "How values are calculated",
    "url": "60201.htm",
    "text": "When the operator presses the Enter button, the value that is sent to the Value connection depends on the type of decimal point and whether the Optional Expression is assigned.  If the decimal point is set to Fixed Position, the decimal point is stripped before sending the value to the Value connection. For example, if the shown value is 9.25, the value sent to the Value connection is 925.  Decimal point  Optional Expression not assigned  Optional Expression assigned  Implicit  Displayed value compared to the minimum and maximum range*.  Floating point values are rounded if the Value connection is an integer connection.  Displayed value is compared to the minimum and maximum range. If OK, substituted for ? in the expression. Result is written to Value connection.  Floating point values are rounded if the Value connection is an integer connection.  Fixed position,  Digits after decimal = 0  Displayed value compared to the minimum and maximum range*.  Displayed value is compared to the minimum and maximum range*. If OK, substituted for ? in the expression. Result is written to Value connection.  Fixed position,  Digits after decimal > 0  Fixed position output = Stripped  Decimal point is stripped from the displayed value. Result compared to the minimum and maximum range*.  Decimal point is stripped from displayed value. Result compared to the minimum and maximum range*. Result is substituted for ? in the expression. Expression result is written to Value connection.  Fixed position,  Digits after decimal > 0  Fixed position output = Displayed Value  Displayed value compared to the minimum and maximum range*.  Displayed value is compared to the minimum and maximum range*. If OK, substituted for ? in the expression. Result is written to Value connection.  *The minimum and maximum range is specified on the Numeric tab for the numeric input enable button. If the value is within the range, it is sent to the Value connection.  Tip:  Floating point values (the default values for numeric input objects) are rounded to six digits. Therefore, using a floating point data type and adding to it a value that exceeds the six significant digits will result in a loss of precision.  See also  Use the numeric pop-up scratchpad  Use the numeric pop-up keypad  How values are rounded  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1478,
    "title": "How values are shown",
    "url": "60519.htm",
    "text": "The numeric display shows the value of the Value connection at the data source. The value shown depends on whether the Value connection value is a floating point or integer value.  Tip:  In 32-bit floating point values, 1 bit is used for the sign (if any), 8 bits for the exponent, and 23 bits for the significant. This allows no more than 7 digits. In FactoryTalk Machine Edition, floating point values are rounded to 6 digits. Therefore, using a floating point data type and adding to it a value that exceeds the 6 significant digits will result in a loss of precision.  Floating point value  Integer value  Value rounded to fit the display based on the Number of digits and Decimal places properties:  Example:  &nbsp;If \"Number of digits\" = 6,<br />and Decimal places = 2,<br />1234.56 rounded to 1234.6.  If \"Number of digits\" = 6,<br />Decimal places = 1,<br />123.456 rounded to 123.5.  If Decimal places property = 0, value shown as is.  If Decimal places property is greater than 0, the integer value will be shown, followed by enough zeroes to equal the Decimal places property.  Example:  If Number of digits = 6<br />and Decimal places = 2<br />123 displays as 123.00  If Number of digits = 6<br />and Decimal places = 4<br />123 would also be shown as 123.00  See also  How the numeric display works at run time  Set up connections for the numeric display  How values are rounded  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1479,
    "title": "How values are rounded",
    "url": "60199.htm",
    "text": "Floating point number is rounded to an integer before it is sent to the connection when an analog tag of the floating point data type is assigned to a:  Write connection.  Read connection that will be used to trigger a state, alarm, information message, or local message.  When a floating-point value is rounded to an integer:  If the number after the decimal is 4 or less, the value is rounded down. For example, 8.495 is rounded to 8.  If the number after the decimal is 6 or more, the value is rounded up. For example, 8.6 is rounded to 9.  If the number after the decimal is 5, the value is rounded using a \"banker&#8217;s algorithm,\" to average out the rounding over time:  If the number before the decimal is 0, the value is rounded down. For example, 10.5 is rounded to 10.  If the number before the decimal is an odd number, the value is rounded up. For example, 11.5 is rounded to 12.  If the number before the decimal is an even number, the value is rounded down. For example, 12.5 is rounded to 12.  Floating point values are rounded to a maximum of six digits. Therefore, using a floating-point data type and adding to it a value that exceeds the six significant digits will result in a rounding error. For example, adding any number to 999,999 will result in a rounding error.  Tip:  Floating point values (the default values for numeric input objects) are rounded to six digits. Therefore, using a floating point data type and adding to it a value that exceeds the six significant digits will result in a loss of precision.  See also  How values are calculated  How values are shown  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1480,
    "title": "Create Numeric Input Enable buttons",
    "url": "60207.htm",
    "text": "At run time the operator can use the Numeric Input Enable button to open a numeric pop-up keypad or scratchpad. When the operator presses the button, the pop-up opens. The operator can use the pop-up to enter a numeric value to send to the Value connection at the data source, or to ramp a displayed value up or down.  To create a Numeric Input Enable button  In the Graphics Display editor, select Numeric and String > Numeric Input Enable from the Objects menu.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks and how it will work at run time.  See also  How the Numeric Input Enable button works at run time  Set up general properties for a Numeric Input Enable button  Set up numeric options for the Numeric Input Enable button  Set up connections for the Numeric Input Enable button  Set up handshaking for the Numeric Input Enable button  ",
    "keywords": {
      "numeric": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1481,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Numeric Input Enable button",
    "url": "60203.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Numeric Input Enable Properties dialog box to set up how a Numeric Input Enable button looks.  To set up general options for a Numeric Input Enable button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Tip:  The button does not need to have input focus to invoke a pop-up. It does need to have input focus to ramp the input value.  To make this object behave like the PanelBuilder 32 Numeric Entry Enable object, clear the Key navigation and Take focus on press check boxes.  To make this object behave like the PanelBuilder 32 Numeric Cursor Point object, select the Key navigation and Take focus on press check boxes.  To make this object behave like the PanelBuilder 32 Increment/Decrement Entry object, select the Key Navigation and Take focus on press check boxes, and set the Numeric pop-up on the Numeric tab to None.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create Numeric Input Enable buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up numeric options for the Numeric Input Enable button  Set up handshaking for the Numeric Input Enable button  Set up connections for the Numeric Input Enable button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1482,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Numeric Input Enable Properties dialog box",
    "url": "329239.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Numeric Input Enable Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border or displayed value. If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the text to blink at run time. The text blinks twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  Key navigation  Select this check box to allow the user to navigate to the object using the keyboard and give the object input focus.  Take focus on press  Select this check box if you want the object to take the focus when pressed.  See also  Create Numeric Input Enable buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  How the Numeric Input Enable button works at run time  Configure the gradient fill  Set up general properties for a Numeric Input Enable button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1483,
    "title": "Set up numeric options for a Numeric Input Enable button",
    "url": "60511.htm",
    "text": "Use the Numeric tab of the Numeric Input Enable Properties dialog box to set up numeric options for a Numeric Input Enable button.  To set up a numeric pop-up for the button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Numeric tab.  Select a numeric pop-up option:  Keypad  Scratchpad  None  Specify these properties for the pop-up:  Maximum and minimum values  Ramp values (if any)  Decimal point settings  Tip:  If you only want to use the Numeric Input Enable button to ramp values, select None from the numeric pop-up options below. Once the button has input focus, the value can be ramped using the Move Up/Down key buttons or the cursor control keys.  To give the object input focus, have either of the following turned on on the General tab:  Key Navigation (navigate to the object and give it input focus using the keyboard  Take focus on press, with a function key assigned to the object (press the function key to give the object input focus)  Tip:  If the ramp value is floating point and the Value connection is an integer tag, the application rounds the value before writing it to the connection.  If an Optional Expression is assigned, ramping is disabled.  Tip:  See also  Create Numeric Input Enable buttons  Set up general properties for a Numeric Input Enable button  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up handshaking for the Numeric Input Enable button  Set up connections for the Numeric Input Enable button (Connections tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1484,
    "title": "Options on the Numeric tab of the Numeric Input Enable Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330854.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Numeric tab of the Numeric Input Enable Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Pop-up settings  Numeric pop-up  Select the kind of pop-up to use:  Keypad. Pressing the object will invoke the numeric keypad.  Scratchpad. Pressing the object will invoke the numeric scratchpad. To use the scratchpad, the computer running the application must have an external keyboard or keypad.  None. If you choose None, pressing the object will not invoke a pop-up.  Min/max range and ramp settings  Minimum and maximum values  Specify the minimum and maximum values the object can write to the Value connection.  If the Decimal point selection is Implicit, the minimum and maximum values applies to the value shown in the pop-up. The possible range is -9.9E15 to 9.9E16.  If the Decimal point selection is Fixed position, the possible range is -2147483648 to 2147483647.  If the Decimal point selection is Fixed position, and the Fixed position output selection is Displayed value, the minimum or maximum value applies to the value shown in the pop-up.  If the Decimal point selection is Fixed position, and the Fixed position output selection is Stripped value, the minimum or maximum value applies to the stripped value, not the shown value.  If you assign a connection to the Optional Expression, the minimum or maximum applies to the value sent to the expression, and not to the value written to the Value connection.  If you are using the button only for ramping, with no pop-up, the minimum and maximum value applies to the values being written to the Value connection, no matter what the decimal point selection is.  Ramp value  Specify the amount by which the Value connection will change when the associated key is pressed. The key can be the Move up or Move Down key, or the cursor up or cursor down key.  Permitted range is 1.175494E-38 to 3.402823E38. If the value is set to 0, the ramp functionality is disabled. No negative numbers can be entered.  Use variable Minimum/Maximum  Select this check box to use the Minimum and Maximum connections specified on the Connections tab to control the object's minimum and maximum values.  Decimal point settings  Decimal point  Select the type of decimal point to use:  Implicit. If the operator manually enters the decimal point and you want the decimal point to be used when the value is sent to the Value connection.  Fixed position. If the values to enter in the pop-up always have the same number of digits after the decimal point. If you select this type of decimal point, specify a \"Digits after decimal point\" value.  Fixed position output  Select the kind of output to use with the Fixed position decimal point:  Stripped value. The decimal point will be stripped out of the displayed value and the resulting integer will be written to the Value connection. For example, if the displayed value is 1.25, 125 will be written to the Value connection.  Displayed value. The displayed value will be written to the Value connection without any changes.  Digits after decimal point  Specify the number of digits to appear after the decimal point. This option is available when Fixed Position is selected for the Decimal point option.  Tip:  If the ramp value is floating point and the Value connection is an integer tag, the application rounds the value before writing it to the connection.  If an Optional Expression is assigned, ramping is disabled.  If you are using the button only for ramping, decimal point settings are not applied.  See also  Create Numeric Input Enable buttons  Configure the Numeric Input Enable button  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up handshaking for the Numeric Input Enable button  Set up connections for the Numeric Input Enable button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1485,
    "title": "Set up handshaking for a Numeric Input Enable button",
    "url": "60231.htm",
    "text": "When the operator presses the Enter button, the numeric pop-up keypad or scratchpad writes a value to the data source. Use Enter key handshaking to hold the value at the data source for a specific period of time to ensure it is read before the operator sends a new value to the Value connection.  Tip:  For these settings to take effect, you must assign connections to Enter and Enter handshake on the Connections tab.  These settings do not apply when ramping a value.  To set up handshaking for the button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  On the Timing tab, specify the handshaking settings to use with the button.  See also  Create Numeric Input Enable buttons  How the Numeric Input Enable button works at run time  How Enter key handshaking works at run time  Set up general properties for a Numeric Input Enable button  Set up a caption and image for a button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1486,
    "title": "Options on the Timing tab of the Numeric Input Enable Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330864.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Timing tab of the Numeric Input Enable Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Timing and handshaking settings  Enter key control delay  Select the time to delay between the time the operator presses the Enter button and the time the application sets the Enter connection to 1.  Enter key hold time  Select the time the Enter connection will be set to 1. This time setting applies only if the Enter connection is assigned and the Enter Handshake connection is not assigned.  Enter key handshake time  Select the maximum time the Enter connection will be set to 1. This time setting applies only if the Enter and Enter Handshake connections are both assigned.  Handshake reset type  Select how the Enter Handshake connection resets the Enter connection to 0:  Non-zero value resets the Enter connection when the Enter Handshake connection is a non-zero value.  Zero to non-zero transition resets the Enter connection when the Enter Handshake connection changes from 0 to a non-zero value.  See also  Create Numeric Input Enable buttons  How the Numeric Input Enable button works at run time  How Enter key handshaking works at run time  Configure the Numeric Input Enable button  Set up a caption and image for a button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1487,
    "title": "Set up connections for the numeric input enable button",
    "url": "60229.htm",
    "text": "To set up tags and expressions for the button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag or expression to these controls:  Value  A write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. When the operator presses the pop-up's Enter key or ramps a value, the application writes the numeric value to the tag&#8217;s data source.  If you do not assign the Value connection, at run time when the operator presses the button, the numeric pop-up does not open.  Optional Expression  The Optional Expression connection is an optional write connection that works with the Value connection. To use it, assign a write expression to the Optional Expression connection. The application calculates the value of the expression and writes the result to the Value connection. All write expressions must contain a question mark (?) as a placeholder for the value the operator enters at run time.  If the Decimal Point option is set to Fixed position, the Fixed position output is Stripped Value, and the Digits after decimal point option value is not 0, the decimal point is removed from the shown value and the resulting value is used.  Tip:  If an Optional Expression is assigned, ramping is disabled.  Enter  A write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. This connection accepts values of 0 and 1 only. The connection determines how long the Enter key press is registered. Use this connection for Enter key handshaking.  Enter Handshake  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. This connection resets the Enter connection, using the Handshake Reset Type option specified in the Timing tab. Use this connection for Enter key handshaking if you want the Enter connection to be reset when a value at the data source changes.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and resets the Enter connection when the expression value meets the conditions of the Handshake Reset Type.  Minimum  An optional read connection. If the Use variable Minimum/Maximum check box on the Numeric tab is checked, assign a tag or an expression to this connection. If the check box is not checked, this connection is not read.  The application reads the value of the tag or expression to determine the minimum value the object can write to the data source.  Maximum  An optional read connection. If the Use variable Minimum/Maximum check box on the Numeric tab is checked, assign a tag or an expression to this connection. If the check box is not checked, this connection is not read.  The application reads the value of the tag or expression to determine the maximum value the object can write to the data source.  See also  Set up general properties for a Numeric Input Enable button  Set up numeric options for a Numeric Input Enable button  Set up handshaking for a Numeric Input Enable button  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  Example: Write expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1488,
    "title": "Example: Write expressions",
    "url": "60227.htm",
    "text": "In this example, the operator regulates the speed of a conveyor belt by entering a value in feet or meters per second. When the operator enters the value in feet per second, the value is passed to the data source without conversion. When the operator enters the value in meters per second, the value is converted to feet per second before being passed to the data source.  The operator first indicates whether the value is in feet or meters by pushing a maintained push button. The push button has one state corresponding to feet per second, and the other state to meters per second. A tag called feet_or_meters is assigned to the maintained push button&#8217;s Value connection.  Then the operator enters the value in a numeric pop-up keypad. The \"?\" character is the placeholder for the value the operator enters.  Here is the write expression assigned to the numeric input enable button&#8217;s Optional Expression connection:  IF feet_or_meters == 0 THEN<br />?<br />ELSE<br />? * 3.281  The application writes the result of the expression to the Value connection assigned to the numeric input enable button.  See also  Set up connections for the numeric input cursor point (Connections tab)  Set up connections for the numeric input enable button (Connections tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1489,
    "title": "How Enter key handshaking works at run time",
    "url": "60245.htm",
    "text": "When an object&#8217;s Enter button is pressed, the object writes a value to the data source. Use Enter key handshaking to hold the value at the data source for a specific period of time to ensure it is read before the object overwrites the value.  You can use Enter key handshaking with these objects:  String input enable button  Control list selector  Numeric input enable button  Numeric input cursor point  Use objects in the graphic display  Before the Enter connection is reset to 0, the operator can provide input to other objects in the graphic display.  If the operator presses the Enter key (using a key button or external keyboard or keypad) for an object whose Enter connection has not yet been reset , the application logs an error.  Graphic display changes  If the graphic display is closed, the Enter connection is reset to 0 and any handshake timing is also reset. In effect, the handshaking is canceled.  To set up an object for handshaking  Enter key handshaking works by setting the object's Enter connection to 1. Until the Enter connection is reset to 0, no new values can be sent to the Value connection.  There are two ways of using Enter key handshaking:  Hold the value at the data source for a specified period of time,  Hold the value at the data source until the data source notifies FactoryTalk View that the value has been read.  See also  Hold a value for a specified length of time  Hold a value until it is acknowledged  Causes of run-time errors for Enter key handshaking  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1490,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for Enter key handshaking",
    "url": "60243.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs error messages about Enter key handshaking to diagnostics under these circumstances:  \"Enter key handshake time\" expires  If the \"Enter key handshake time\" expires before the Enter Handshake connection resets the Enter connection, the application logs an error.  Enter key handshaking still in effect  If the operator presses the Enter key for an object whose Enter connection has not yet been reset (using a key button or external keyboard or keypad), the application logs an error.  Unassigned connections  If the Value connection is unassigned (or if the object cannot write to the Value connection), the Enter connection is not set to 1 and the application logs an error.  See also  How Enter key handshaking works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1491,
    "title": "How the Numeric Input Enable button works at run time",
    "url": "60233.htm",
    "text": "When the operator presses the Numeric Input Enable button, the numeric pop-up keypad or scratchpad opens. The operator types a numeric value in the pop-up and presses Enter. The value is sent to the Value connection at the data source.  If a write expression is assigned, the application evaluates the expression and sends the expression value to the Value connection.  If the terminal resolution for the computer running the application is too small, the pop-up does not open:  If the terminal's resolution is smaller than 124 pixels wide by 240 pixels high, the numeric pop-up keypad cannot open.  If the terminal's resolution is smaller than 124 pixels wide by 68 pixels high, the numeric pop-up scratchpad cannot open.  Ramp  If the button has input focus, you can press a Move Up Key button object or a cursor up key on an external keyboard or keypad to increase the Value connection by the ramp value, or press a Move Down Key button object or a cursor down key to decrease the Value connection by the ramp value.  Tip:  The button does not need to have input focus to call a pop-up. It does have to have input focus to perform the ramping function. If you want the button to have input focus when pressed, check the Take Focus on Press check box (General tab). Check the Key Navigation box (General tab) if you want the operator to be able to navigate to the button with the keyboard and give the button input focus.  See also  Causes of run-time errors for the Numeric Input Enable button  Set up connections for the Numeric Input Enable button  How Enter key handshaking works at run time  Use the numeric pop-up keypad  Use the numeric pop-up scratchpad  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1492,
    "title": "Example: Use a Numeric Input Enable button",
    "url": "60517.htm",
    "text": "In this example, the Numeric Input Enable button controls the speed of a conveyor. Pressing this button brings up a keypad or scratchpad (depending on the numeric pop-up setting) that the operator can use to enter the new speed.  Create a Numeric Input Enable button. Change the maximum value to 100 and set the caption to \"Set value.\"  Assign a tag to the Value connection. When the operator presses the button a keypad or scratchpad pops up and the operator can enter a value between the minimum and maximum values. The value entered becomes the value of the Value connection. The data source registers the value change and the conveyor speed changes accordingly.  See also  Create Numeric Input Enable buttons  Use the numeric pop-up keypad  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1493,
    "title": "Use the numeric pop-up keypad",
    "url": "60209.htm",
    "text": "To enter numeric values, the operator must open the numeric pop-up keypad by pressing a numeric input enable button or numeric input cursor point object. The keypad can accept up to 17 digits, including the decimal point, leading zero, and minus sign.  When the keypad is open, no other objects in the graphic display can accept input.  To use the numeric pop-up keypad  Press the buttons in the pop-up keypad to enter a value.  Press Enter @.  See also  How the numeric pop-ups work at run time  How values are calculated  Causes of run-time errors for the numeric pop-ups  Numeric pop-up keypad keys  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1494,
    "title": "Numeric pop-up keypad keys",
    "url": "333291.htm",
    "text": "Use the keys on an external keyboard or keypad (where equivalent keys exist) in place of any of the buttons in the numeric pop-up keypad.  Keys  Descriptions  Decimal  The decimal button (.) on the pop-up keypad is visible only if the decimal point type is Implicit. If the decimal button is visible, you can also use the decimal key on an external keyboard or keypad.  Minus  Press the minus button (-) on the pop-up keypad or the minus key on an external keyboard or keypad to toggle the value between positive and negative.  Escape  To close the pop-up keypad without writing the value to the Value connection, press the ESC button on the pop-up keypad or the Esc key on an external keyboard or keypad.  Backspace  To delete the right-most digit, press @ on the pop-up keypad or external keyboard or keypad. Hold the button down to delete multiple digits. If there are no digits left, the minus sign, if any, is removed.  Enter  Press @ on the pop-up keypad or on an external keyboard or keypad to write the value to the Value connection.  Delete  Press the Delete key on an external keyboard or keypad to clear the scratchpad.  Tip:  If the graphic display is changed remotely before the operator has pressed the Enter button in the pop-up keypad, the keypad closes without writing out a value.  If the computer&#8217;s resolution is smaller than 124 pixels wide by 240 pixels high, the pop-up keypad cannot open.  See also  How the numeric pop-ups work at run time  How values are calculated  Causes of run-time errors for the numeric pop-ups  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1495,
    "title": "Use a numeric pop-up scratchpad",
    "url": "60235.htm",
    "text": "To enter numeric values, the operator must open the numeric pop-up scratchpad by pressing a numeric input enable button or numeric input cursor point object. The scratchpad can accept up to 17 digits, including the decimal point, leading zero, and minus sign.The numeric pop-up scratchpad does not contain any buttons. The computer must have an external keyboard or keypad to use and close the numeric pop-up scratchpad.  When the scratchpad is open, no other objects in the graphic display can accept input.  To use the numeric pop-up scratchpad  Use the keys on an external keyboard or keypad to enter a value in the pop-up scratchpad.  Press Enter @ on the external keyboard or keypad.  Tip:  If the graphic display changes remotely before the operator has pressed the Enter key on the external keyboard or keypad, the scratchpad closes without writing anything out.  If the computer&#8217;s screen is smaller than 124 pixels wide by 68 pixels high, the numeric pop-up scratchpad cannot open.  See also  How the numeric pop-ups work at run time  How values are calculated  Causes of run-time errors for the numeric pop-ups  Numeric pop-up scratchpad keys  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1496,
    "title": "Numeric pop-up scratchpad keys",
    "url": "333293.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the keys on an external keyboard or keypad.  Keys  Descriptions  Decimal  The decimal button (.) on an external keyboard or keypad works only if the decimal point type is Implicit.  Minus  Press the minus key on an external keyboard or keypad to toggle the value between positive and negative.  Escape  To close the pop-up scratchpad without writing the value to the Value connection, press the ESC key on an external keyboard or keypad  Backspace  Press @ on an external keyboard or keypad to delete the right-most digit. Hold the button down to delete multiple digits. If there are no digits left in the scratchpad, the minus sign, if any, is removed.  Enter  Press @ on an external keyboard or keypad to write the value to the Value connection.  Delete  Press the Delete key on an external keyboard or keypad to clear the scratchpad.  See also  Use a numeric pop-up scratchpad  How the numeric pop-ups work at run time  How values are calculated  Causes of run-time errors for the numeric pop-ups  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1497,
    "title": "How the numeric pop-ups work at run time",
    "url": "60237.htm",
    "text": "When the operator enters a value in the numeric pop-up keypad or scratchpad and presses the Enter button:  The value is written to the Value connection.  If the Optional Expression connection is assigned, the application calculates the value of the expression and writes the result to the Value connection.  The pop-up is cleared.  If Enter key handshaking is set up for the numeric input enable button or the numeric input cursor point, the Enter connection is set to 1 and the handshaking timers begin timing.  Operator input  When a pop-up is shown, only the pop-up accepts operator input.  The pop-up accepts input from the numeric keys, decimal point, minus, Backspace or Enter key from a keypad terminal, and from the numeric keys, decimal point, minus keys, Backspace, Delete, Escape or Enter key on an external keyboard.  Initial values  When a numeric object has the focus and the operator presses a number key, the number is entered into the pop-up's scratchpad. The decimal point will be shown according to the numeric object's decimal point settings.  When a numeric object has the focus and the operator presses a minus (-) key, &nbsp;a minus sign followed by a zero (-0) is shown. If the operator presses a decimal (.) key, a zero followed by a decimal point (0.) is shown.  If the numeric object that invoked the pop-up is configured to use a decimal point type of Fixed position, and the number of digits after the decimal is greater than 0, a decimal point followed by the specified number of digits appears after the leading zero.  For example, if the decimal type is Fixed position and the Digits after decimal point option is set to 2, the zero is shown as 0.00.  If the pop-up was not invoked by pressing a number key, a minus (-) key, or a decimal (.) key, the initial value shown will be based on the current Value connection value. The decimal point will be shown according to the numeric object's decimal point settings.  See also  Use the numeric pop-up scratchpad  Use the numeric pop-up keypad  How values are calculated  Causes of run-time errors for the numeric pop-ups  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1498,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the Numeric Input Enable button",
    "url": "60241.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs errors about the button to diagnostics under these circumstances:  Unassigned connections  If the Value connection is not assigned, when the operator presses the button the pop-up is not shown and the application logs an error.  Terminal resolution too small  If the computer's resolution is too small to display the numeric pop-up keypad or scratchpad, the pop-up is not shown and the application logs an error.  See also  Create Numeric Input Enable buttons  How the Numeric Input Enable button works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for Enter key handshaking  Causes of run-time errors for the numeric pop-ups  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1499,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the numeric pop-ups",
    "url": "60239.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs error messages about the numeric pop-ups to diagnostics under the following circumstances. These are common causes, but because of the wide variety of possible applications, other conditions not mentioned here may also cause error messages.  Value beyond the Value limit  Value too large for the Value connection  If the value is too large for the data type of the tag assigned to the Value connection, or if the value is outside the assigned tag's minimum and maximum values, when the operator presses the Enter button:  Nothing is written to the Value connection.  The pop-up remains open and continues to show the invalid value in red.  If Enter key handshaking is set up, the Enter connection is not set to 1 and the handshake timers do not begin timing.  The application logs an error.  For example, the value is too large for the tag&#8217;s data type if the data source is a PLC-5, the value is 2147483647, and the assigned tag is an integer tag using the address N7:0. Integer tags have a range of -32768 to 32767 only.  Value outside minimum and maximum range  The displayed value with the decimal point stripped is compared to the minimum and maximum range for Fixed Position using the Stripped Value option. The shown value with decimal point is compared to the minimum and maximum range for Implicit and for Fixed Position using the Displayed Value option. If the value is outside the minimum and maximum range (specified in the General tab for the numeric input enable button), when the operator presses the Enter button:  Nothing is written to the Value connection.  The pop-up remains open and continues to show the invalid value in red.  If Enter key handshaking is set up, the Enter connection is not set to 1 and the handshake timers do not begin timing.  The application logs an error.  Enter key handshaking still in effect  If timing for Enter key handshaking from a previous pop-up entry is still in effect when the operator presses the Enter button:  Nothing is written to the Value connection.  The Enter connection remains set to 1 and the handshake timers continue timing.  The application logs an error.  Screen resolution too small  If the screen is too small to display the numeric pop-up, the application logs an error.  Invalid Optional Expression  If the optional expression assigned to the object is invalid or not assigned, when the operator presses the Enter button:  Nothing is written to the Value connection.  The pop-up remains open and continues to show the invalid value in red.  If Enter key handshaking is set up, the Enter connection is not set to 1 and the handshake timers do not begin timing.  The application logs an error.  Invalid initial value  If the initial value shown is based on the Value connection, and the initial value is invalid, the pop-up's scratchpad will show asterisks to indicate an error condition. The application will not log an error.  See also  Use the numeric pop-up scratchpad  Use the numeric pop-up keypad  How the numeric pop-ups work at run time  How values are calculated  Causes of run-time errors for the numeric input enable button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1500,
    "title": "Create numeric input cursor points",
    "url": "60211.htm",
    "text": "Use the numeric input cursor point object to write numeric information to a data source. For example, you might use a numeric input cursor point to set the current temperature of an oven in a bakery.  To create a numeric input cursor point  In the Graphics Display editor, from the Objects menu, select Numeric and String > Numeric Input Cursor Point.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the numeric input cursor point to be.  Double-click the display to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box tabs, specify how the display numeric input cursor point looks, how it inputs and displays values, its timing and handshake settings, and its tags and/or expressions.  See also  Set up general properties for a numeric input cursor point  Set up numeric options for a numeric input cursor point  Set up handshaking for the numeric input cursor point  Set up connections for the numeric input cursor point  How the numeric input cursor point works at run time  ",
    "keywords": {
      "numeric": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1501,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a numeric input cursor point",
    "url": "60213.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Numeric Input Cursor Point Properties dialog box to set up how a numeric input cursor point looks.  To set up general options for the numeric input cursor point  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  See also  Set up numeric options for the numeric input cursor point  Set up handshaking for the numeric input cursor point  Set up controls for the numeric input cursor point  How the numeric input cursor point works at run time  Options on the General tab of the Numeric Input Cursor Point Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1502,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Numeric Input Cursor Point Properties dialog box",
    "url": "329241.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Numeric Input Cursor Point Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border or displayed value. If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Fore color  This box shows the color of the text shown on the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the text to blink at run time. The text blinks twice per second.  Text  The text settings apply to the numeric values in the display.  Font  Select the font to use for the text.  Size  Select the font size to use for the text.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the text, if required.  Alignment  Specifies how the shown text is positioned on the object.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  Key navigation  Select this check box to allow the user to navigate to the object using the keyboard and give the object input focus.  See also  Set up numeric options for the numeric input cursor point  Set up handshaking for the numeric input cursor point  Set up controls for the numeric input cursor point  Configure the gradient fill  Set up general properties for a numeric input cursor point object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1503,
    "title": "Set up numeric options for a numeric input cursor point",
    "url": "60215.htm",
    "text": "Use the Numeric tab of the Numeric Input Cursor Point Properties dialog box to set up a numeric pop-up for the object.  To set up a numeric pop-up for the numeric input cursor point  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Numeric tab.  Select a numeric pop-up option:  Numeric pop-up keypad  Numeric pop-up scratchpad  Specify these properties for the pop-up:  Maximum and minimum values  Ramp values (if any)  Decimal point settings  Number of digits (in display settings)  Specify these properties for the shown value:  Display settings  See also  Configure the numeric input cursor point  Set up handshaking for the numeric input cursor point  Set up controls for the numeric input cursor point  How the numeric input cursor point object works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the numeric input cursor point  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1504,
    "title": "Options on the Numeric tab of the Numeric Input Cursor Point Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330866.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Numeric tab of the Numeric Input Cursor Point Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Pop-up settings  Numeric pop-up  Select the kind of pop-up to use:  Keypad. Pressing the object will invoke the numeric keypad.  Scratchpad. Pressing the object will invoke the numeric scratchpad. To use the scratchpad, the computer running the application must have an external keyboard or keypad.  None. If you choose None, pressing the object will not invoke a pop-up.  Caption on keypad/scratchpad  Type a caption to appear at the top of the keypad or scratchpad at run time.  Insert Variable  Click this button to select the type of variable to be inserted.  Min/max range and ramp settings  Minimum and maximum values  Specify the minimum and maximum values the object can write to the Value connection.  If the Decimal point selection is Implicit, the minimum and maximum values applies to the value shown in the pop-up. The possible range is -9.9E15 to 9.9E16.  If the Decimal point selection is Fixed position, the possible range is -2147483648 to 2147483647.  If the Decimal point selection is Fixed position, and the Fixed position output selection is Displayed value, the minimum or maximum value applies to the value shown in the pop-up.  If the Decimal point selection is Fixed position, and the Fixed position output selection is Stripped value, the minimum or maximum value applies to the stripped value, not the shown value.  If you assign a connection to the Optional Expression, the minimum or maximum applies to the value sent to the expression, and not to the value written to the Value connection.  Ramp value  Specify the amount by which the Value connection will change when the associated key is pressed. The key can be the Move up or Move Down key, or the cursor up or cursor down key.  Permitted range is 1.175494E-38 to 3.402823E38. If the value is set to 0, the ramp functionality is disabled. No negative numbers can be entered.  Use variable Minimum/Maximum  Select this check box to use the Minimum and Maximum connections specified on the Connections tab to control the object's minimum and maximum values.  Decimal point settings  Decimal point  Select the type of decimal point to use:  Implicit. If the operator manually enters the decimal point and you want the decimal point to be used when the value is sent to the Value connection.  Fixed position. If the values to enter in the pop-up always have the same number of digits after the decimal point. If you select this type of decimal point, specify a \"Digits after decimal point\" value.  Fixed position output  Select the kind of output to use with the Fixed position decimal point:  Stripped value. The decimal point will be stripped out of the displayed value and the resulting integer will be written to the Value connection. For example, if the displayed value is 1.25, 125 will be written to the Value connection.  Displayed value. The displayed value will be written to the Value connection without any changes.  Digits after decimal point. If you select the Fixed position type of decimal point, specify the number of digits to appear after the decimal point.  Display settings  These settings apply to the shown value. Only the Number of digits property is used by the pop-up.  Number of digits  Select the maximum number of digits to show, up to 17 digits. The decimal point and minus sign each count as a digit.  Fill left with  Select a character to fill the left of the display with if the value at the data source contains fewer than the maximum number of digits.  If you don&#8217;t want to use a fill character, select None.  Decimal places  Type the maximum number of digits to show after the decimal point.  The possible range is 0 to (Number of digits - 2). 2 is subtracted from the number of digits to allow for a leading digit and a decimal point. For example, .12 is shown as 0.12.  Tip:  If you only want to use the numeric input cursor point to ramp values, you do not need a pop-up, so you can select None. You will need to have one of the following enabled on the General tab in order to give the object input focus; once it has input focus, the value can be ramped using the Move Up/Down key buttons or the cursor control keys:  Key Navigation (navigate to the object and give it input focus using the keyboard)  Take focus on press, and Touch (touch the object to give it input focus)  Take focus on press, with a function key assigned to the object (press the function key to give the object input focus)  If the ramp value is floating point and the Value connection is an integer tag, the application rounds the value before writing it to the connection. If an Optional Expression is assigned on the Connections tab, ramping is disabled.  2 is subtracted from the number of digits to allow for a leading digit and a decimal point. For example, \".12\" is shown as \"0.12\".  See also  Set up general properties for a numeric input cursor point  Set up handshaking for the numeric input cursor point  Set up controls for the numeric input cursor point  How the numeric input cursor point works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the numeric input cursor point  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1505,
    "title": "Example: Fixed Position decimal point setting",
    "url": "60219.htm",
    "text": "Decimal Point option = Fixed Position  DigitsAfterDecimalPoint value =3.  Comments  Value Entered  Value Displayed in Scratchpad  Value Written to Value connection when Fixed position output is:<br />Stripped Value  Value Written to Value connection when Fixed position output is:<br />Displayed Value  Initial Value  0.000  Enter button pressed  9  0.009  9  0.009  90  0.090  90  0.090  900  0.900  900  0.900  9000  9.000  9000  9.000  Delete button pressed  0. 000  &#8211; 9000  &#8211; 9.000  Backspace button pressed  &#8211; 0.900  &#8211; 0.090  &#8211; 0.009  0. 000  See also  Set up numeric options for the numeric input cursor point (Numeric tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1506,
    "title": "Example: Implicit decimal point setting",
    "url": "60217.htm",
    "text": "Decimal Point option = Implicit  Comments  Value Entered  Value Displayed in Scratchpad  Value Written to Floating Point Value connection  Value Written to Integer<br />Value connection  Initial Value  0  Enter button pressed  9  9  9  9  9.50  9.50  9.5  10  9.49  9.49  9.49  9  Clear button pressed  0  &#8211; 0.90  &#8211; 0.90  Delete button pressed  &nbsp;&#8211; 0.9  &#8211; 0.  &#8211; 0  0  See also  Set up numeric options for the numeric input cursor point (Numeric tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1507,
    "title": "Set up handshaking for the numeric input cursor point (Timing tab)",
    "url": "60221.htm",
    "text": "When the operator presses the Enter button, the numeric pop-up keypad or scratchpad writes a value to the data source. Use Enter key handshaking to hold the value at the data source for a specific period of time to ensure it is read before the operator sends a new value to the Value connection.  Tip:  For these settings to take effect, you must assign controls to Enter and Enter handshake in the Connections tab.  To set up handshaking for the numeric input cursor point  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the numeric input cursor point to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Timing tab, specify the handshaking settings to use with the numeric input cursor point.  Options  Enter key control delay  Select the length of time to delay between the time the operator presses the pop-up's Enter button and the time the application sets the Enter connection to 1. Assign the Enter connection in the Connections tab.  Enter key hold time  Select the time the Enter connection will be set to 1. This time setting applies only if the Enter connection is assigned and the Enter Handshake connection is not assigned (in the Connections tab).  Enter key handshake time  Select the maximum time the Enter connection will be set to 1. This time setting applies only if the Enter and Enter Handshake controls are both assigned (in the Connections tab).  Handshake reset type  Select how the Enter Handshake connection resets the Enter connection to 0:  Non-zero value resets the Enter connection when the Enter Handshake connection is a non-zero value.  Zero to non-zero transition resets the Enter connection when the Enter Handshake connection changes from 0 to a non-zero value.  See also  Configure the numeric input cursor point (General tab)  Set up numeric options for the numeric input cursor point (Numeric tab)  Set up controls for the numeric input cursor point (Connections tab)  How the numeric input cursor point works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the numeric input cursor point  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1508,
    "title": "Set up connections for the numeric input cursor point (Connections tab)",
    "url": "60223.htm",
    "text": "To set up tags and expressions for the numeric input cursor point  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the cursor point to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag or expression to these controls:  Value  A read-write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. When the operator presses the pop-up's Enter key or ramps a value, the application writes the numeric value to the tag&#8217;s data source.  If you do not assign the Value connection, at run time when the operator presses the button, the numeric pop-up does not open.  Optional Expression  An optional write connection. Assign a write expression to this connection.  The application calculates the value of the expression and writes the result to the Value connection. All write expressions must contain a question mark (?) as a placeholder for the value the operator enters at run time.  If the decimal point type is Fixed position, and the \"Digits after decimal point\" value is not 0, the decimal point is removed from the displayed value and the resulting value is used.  Indicator  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. The application reads the value of the connection at the data source, and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the state corresponding to the value.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the state corresponding to the value.  If you assign this connection, the cursor point does not display the value sent to the Value connection until it receives a response from the Indicator connection. If you do not assign this connection, the cursor point's state corresponds to the value at the Value connection.  Enter  A write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. This connection accepts values of 0 and 1 only. The connection determines how long the Enter key press is registered. Use this connection for Enter key handshaking.  Enter Handshake  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. This connection resets the Enter connection, using the Handshake reset type option specified in the Timing tab. Use this connection for Enter key handshaking if you want the Enter connection to be reset when a value at the data source changes.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and resets the Enter connection when the expression value meets the conditions of the Handshake reset type option.  Example: Write expressions  Minimum  An optional read connection. If the Use variable Minimum/Maximum check box on the Numeric tab is checked, assign a tag or an expression to this connection. If the check box is not checked, this connection is not read.  The application reads the value of the tag or expression to determine the minimum value the object can write to the data source.  Maximum  An optional read connection. If the Use variable Minimum/Maximum check box on the Numeric tab is checked, assign a tag or an expression to this connection. If the check box is not checked, this connection is not read.  The application reads the value of the tag or expression to determine the maximum value the object can write to the data source.  See also  Configure the numeric input cursor point (General tab)  Set up numeric options for the numeric input cursor point (Numeric tab)  Set up handshaking for the numeric input cursor point (Timing tab)  How the numeric input cursor point works at run time  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1509,
    "title": "Example: Write expressions",
    "url": "60227_1.htm",
    "text": "In this example, the operator regulates the speed of a conveyor belt by entering a value in feet or meters per second. When the operator enters the value in feet per second, the value is passed to the data source without conversion. When the operator enters the value in meters per second, the value is converted to feet per second before being passed to the data source.  The operator first indicates whether the value is in feet or meters by pushing a maintained push button. The push button has one state corresponding to feet per second, and the other state to meters per second. A tag called feet_or_meters is assigned to the maintained push button&#8217;s Value connection.  Then the operator enters the value in a numeric pop-up keypad. The \"?\" character is the placeholder for the value the operator enters.  Here is the write expression assigned to the numeric input enable button&#8217;s Optional Expression connection:  IF feet_or_meters == 0 THEN<br />?<br />ELSE<br />? * 3.281  The application writes the result of the expression to the Value connection assigned to the numeric input enable button.  See also  Set up connections for the numeric input cursor point (Connections tab)  Set up connections for the numeric input enable button (Connections tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1510,
    "title": "How the numeric input cursor point works at run time",
    "url": "60513.htm",
    "text": "Activate  Once the numeric input cursor point object has been selected, that is, has input focus, the user can activate the object by:  pressing the Enter key on a keypad or keyboard, or an Enter Key object on the display.  pressing the Backspace key on a keypad or keyboard, or a Backspace Key object on the display.  pressing a numeric key, a minus sign (-), or a decimal point (.). This will invoke the pop-up and display the number, minus sign or decimal point in the pop-up's scratchpad, with whatever decimal point setting is specified in the Numeric tab.  When the operator activates the numeric input cursor point, the numeric pop-up keypad or scratchpad opens. The operator types a numeric value in the pop-up and presses Enter. The value appears in the cursor point and is sent to the Value connection at the data source.  If a write expression is assigned, the application evaluates the expression and sends the expression value to the Value connection.  Ramp  If the cursor point has input focus, you can press a Move Up Key button object or a cursor up key on an external keyboard or keypad to increase the Value connection by the ramp value, or press a Move Down Key button object or a cursor down key to decrease the Value connection by the ramp value.  If the Optional Expression is assigned (on the Connections tab), the numeric input cursor point will not support ramping.  The ramping behavior at run time also depends on whether you set up auto repeat. Move Up/Down keys have their own auto-repeat properties. Auto-repeat for cursor keys is controlled through the Keyboard settings in the Control Panel on the run-time PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, or PanelView Plus CE terminal.  Tip:  The cursor point object does not need to have input focus to call a pop-up. It does have to have input focus to perform the ramping function. Check the Key Navigation box (General tab) if you want the operator to be able to navigate to the cursor point with the keyboard and give it input focus.  Display Value  The numeric input cursor point shows the value of the Indicator connection at the data source. The application clears the display before showing a new value. If the Indicator connection is unassigned, the object displays the last value written out.  What is shown  When an operator opens a display at run time, the application reads the values of all assigned controls and updates the display based on these values.  If the Value and Indicator controls are unassigned, the numeric input cursor point's display is filled with asterisks (*).  If the integer portion of the value, including the decimal point or minus sign, contains more digits than specified for the Number of digits option (in the Numeric tab), the display is filled with asterisks (*).  If the numeric input cursor point is sized so that the value cannot be fully shown (and the value including decimal point and minus sign, is within the configured number of digits for the object), any parts of the value that cannot be shown are truncated and the last displayable digit is replaced with an asterisk.  If the value does not fit on the first line of the display, and there is room for a second line, the value continues onto the second line.  If the Fill left with option is None, and the displayed value is a floating point value between 0 and 1, a leading 0 is placed in front of the decimal point.  If the number of places after the decimal point in the returned value is greater than the Decimal places value, the shown value will be rounded off.  See also  Create numeric input cursor points  Configure the numeric input cursor point (General tab)  Set up numeric options for the numeric input cursor point (Numeric tab)  Set up handshaking for the numeric input cursor point (Timing tab)  Set up controls for the numeric input cursor point (Connections tab)  Causes of run-time errors for the numeric input cursor point  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1511,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the numeric input cursor point",
    "url": "60515.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs errors about the cursor point to diagnostics under these circumstances:  Unassigned connections  If the Value connection is not assigned, when the operator activates the numeric input cursor point, the pop-up is not shown and the application logs an error.  Terminal resolution too small  If the computer's resolution is too small to display the numeric pop-up keypad or scratchpad, the pop-up is not shown and the application logs an error.  If the terminal's resolution is smaller than 124 pixels wide by 240 pixels high, the numeric pop-up keypad cannot open.  If the terminal's resolution is smaller than 124 pixels wide by 68 pixels high, the numeric pop-up scratchpad cannot open.  Ramped value outside minimum and maximum range  If ramping the value either up or down using a key button or a cursor key, causes the value to be greater than the Maximum value or less than the Minimum value (set in the Numeric tab):  The application logs an error.  Nothing is written to the Value connection.  The numeric input cursor point will stop ramping until the key button or cursor key has been released and pressed again. Therefore the error will not continue to be logged repeatedly in auto-repeat mode.  See also  Configure the numeric input cursor point (General tab)  Set up numeric options for the numeric input cursor point (Numeric tab)  Set up handshaking for the numeric input cursor point (Timing tab)  Set up controls for the numeric input cursor point (Connections tab)  How the numeric input cursor point works at run time  Create numeric input cursor points  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1512,
    "title": "Create string displays",
    "url": "60699.htm",
    "text": "Use the string display object to show the operator messages from the data source. For example, you might set up strings that report on the state of a process or operation, or that provide instructions about what the operator should do next. At run time the display shows the operator the string value of the Value connection at the data source.  Tip:  The display can show any character in the Windows character set. Configure the data source to show the string values that suit your purposes.  To create a string display  In the Graphics Display editor, select Numeric and String > String display from the Objects menu.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the display to be.  Double-click the display to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the display looks and its tags.  See also  How the string display works at run time  Example: Use a string display  Configure the string display appearance  Set up connections for the string display  ",
    "keywords": {
      "string": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1513,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a  string display",
    "url": "60705.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the String Display Properties dialog box to set up how a string display object looks.  To set up general options for a string display  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  See also  Create string displays  Set up connections for the string display  Options on the General tab of the String Display Properties dialog box  How the string display works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1514,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the String Display Properties dialog box",
    "url": "329288.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Spring Display Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border or displayed value. If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Fore color  This box shows the color of the text shown on the object. Click it to select another color.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the text to blink at run time. The text blinks twice per second.  Text  The text settings apply to the numeric values in the display.  Font  Select the font to use for the text.  Size  Select the font size to use for the text.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the text, if required.  Alignment  Specifies how the shown text is positioned on the object.  Word wrap  Select this check box if you want the text to continue on the next line at the beginning of a new word.  If this check box is cleared, the text continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  See also  Create string displays  Set up connections for the string display  Configure the gradient fill  Set up general properties for a  string display object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1515,
    "title": "Set up connections for the string display (Connections tab)",
    "url": "60703.htm",
    "text": "To set up tags for the string display  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the display to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag or expression to this connection:  Value  A read connection. Assign a tag or expression that can support up to 82 characters (bytes). The application reads the value of the Value connection&#8217;s tag at the data source to determine the string to show.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and updates the string display to reflect the value.  See also  Create string displays  Configure the string display appearance  How the string display works at run time  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1516,
    "title": "How the string display works at run time",
    "url": "60701.htm",
    "text": "The string display shows the string value of the Value connection at the data source. The application clears the display before showing a new string.  Open graphic displays  When you open a display at run time, the application reads the Value connection value and updates the display based on the value.  What is shown  If the Value connection is unassigned, the display is blank.  The application displays the number of characters (bytes) specified for the tag assigned to the Value connection. If a longer string is read from the connection, only the specified number of characters is shown.  See also  Set up connections for the string display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1517,
    "title": "Example: Use a string display",
    "url": "60697.htm",
    "text": "Create a string display and assign a string tag to the Value connection. The application reads the Value connection and updates the string display.  For example, a process carries a variety of parts past a fixed barcode reader on the shop floor. The barcode reader passes its data to a string tag in the PLC. The string display monitors the string tag, and shows the string associated with the code currently being read by the barcode reader, that is, the name or identification number of the part passing the reader.  See also  Create string displays  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1518,
    "title": "Create String Input Enable buttons",
    "url": "60249.htm",
    "text": "At run time the operator can use the String Input Enable button to open a string pop-up keyboard or scratchpad. When the operator presses the button, the pop-up opens. The operator can use the pop-up to enter a string value to send to the Value connection at the data source.  To create a String Input Enable button  In the Graphics Display editor, select Numeric and String > String Input Enable from the Objects menu.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks, the button&#8217;s tags, whether to use the string pop-up keyboard or scratchpad, and whether to use Enter key handshaking.  See also  Set up general properties for a String Input Enable button  Set up handshaking for a String Input Enable button  Set up connections for the string input enable button  How the String Input Enable button works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the String Input Enable button  ",
    "keywords": {
      "string": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1519,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a String Input Enable button",
    "url": "60259.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the String Input Enable Properties dialog box to set up how a String Input Enable button looks.  To set up general options for a String Input Enable button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create String Input Enable buttons  Use the string pop-up keyboard  Use the string pop-up scratchpad  Set up a caption and image for a button  Options on the General tab of the String Input Enable Button Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1520,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the String Input Enable Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "329291.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the String Input Enable Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border or displayed value. If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the text to blink at run time. The text blinks twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  Key navigation  Select this check box to allow the user to navigate to the object using the keyboard and give the object input focus.  Take focus on press  Select this check box if you want the object to take the focus when pressed.  See also  bounding box  Create String Input Enable buttons  Use the string pop-up keyboard  Configure the gradient fill  Set up general properties for a String Input Enable button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1521,
    "title": "How to insert a string value as a variable in captions",
    "url": "75179.htm",
    "text": "To insert a string value for PLC5 and SLC controllers as a variable  For PLC5 and SLC controllers, there are two types of data files that hold string values: ST (String) and A (Ascii).  When using ST Data Files, each element holds 82 characters. To input strings from an ST (String) data table, browse to the data table element that holds the string, for example, ST12:0. You do not need an added syntax display and can input up to 82 characters in each element.  When using A (Ascii) Data Files, each element holds two characters. To input more than two characters, you must add an Lx (length) modifier to the connection. To input strings from an A (Ascii data table), first, browse to the data table element that holds the string, labeled A9:0. Next, add a comma and Lx modifier along with a value, for example, A9:0, and L10 will show 20 characters. To display the full 82 characters supported by the String Input and String Display, use the following syntax; A9:0,L4.  To insert a string value for Logix Controllers  For Logix controllers there is a String Data type to hold string values. To input strings from a String Data type tag, browse to the string tag that holds the string, for example, MyString. You do not need an added syntax to display and you can input up to 82 characters in each element.  See also  Causes of run-time errors for the string input enable button  Set up connections for the string input enable button (Connections tab)  How Enter key handshaking works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1522,
    "title": "Set up the string pop-up (String tab)",
    "url": "60263.htm",
    "text": "Use the String tab to specify which pop-up the string input enable button will use, the number of characters shown, the display's fill characters, and whether the data entry will be masked.  Tip:  To use the string pop-up character input instead of the keyboard, from the Tools menu, select Options > String Pop-Up, and then select Use the string pop-up character input. The character input opens instead of the keyboard when the operator presses a string input enable button, the User and Password buttons in the Login dialog box, or a Password button.  Pop-up settings  String pop-up  Select whether to use the keyboard or the scratchpad. To use the scratchpad, the computer running the application must have an external keyboard or keypad.  Number of input characters  Select the maximum number of input characters for the pop-up to accept, up to 82 characters.  Fill character  Select a character to fill the entered string if the operator enters fewer than the maximum number of input characters.  When the value is sent to the Value connection, the fill characters are placed after the string the operator enters. They do not appear in the pop-up window.  Mask scratchpad  Check this box to show all the characters the operator enters as the # character.  See also  Create string input enable buttons  Use the string pop-up keyboard  Use the string pop-up scratchpad  Use the Login dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1523,
    "title": "Set up handshaking for a String Input Enable button",
    "url": "60247.htm",
    "text": "When the operator presses the Enter button, the pop-up writes a value to the data source. Use Enter key handshaking to hold the value at the data source for a specific period of time to ensure it is read before the operator sends a new value to the Value connection.  Tip:  For these settings to take effect, you must assign connections to Enter and Enter handshake in the Connections tab.  To set up handshaking for the button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Timing tab.  Specify the handshaking settings to use with the button.  See also  Create String Input Enable buttons  Set up general properties for a String Input Enable button  Options on the Timing tab of the String Input Enable Properties dialog box  Set up connections for the String Input Enable button  How the String Input Enable button works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1524,
    "title": "Options on the Timing tab of the String Input Enable Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330875.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Timing tab of the String Input Enable Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Timing and handshaking settings  Enter key control delay  Select the time to delay between the time the operator presses the Enter button and the time the application sets the Enter connection to 1.  Enter key hold time  Select the time the Enter connection will be set to 1. This time setting applies only if the Enter connection is assigned and the Enter Handshake connection is not assigned.  Enter key handshake time  Select the maximum time the Enter connection will be set to 1. This time setting applies only if the Enter and Enter Handshake connections are both assigned.  Handshake reset type  Select how the Enter Handshake connection resets the Enter connection to 0:  Non-zero value resets the Enter connection when the Enter Handshake connection is a non-zero value.  Zero to non-zero transition resets the Enter connection when the Enter Handshake connection changes from 0 to a non-zero value.  See also  Create String Input Enable buttons  Set up connections for the String Input Enable button  How the String Input Enable button works at run time  How Enter key handshaking works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1525,
    "title": "Set up connections for the string input enable button (Connections tab)",
    "url": "60285.htm",
    "text": "To set up tags and expressions for the button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag or expression to these connections:  Value  A write connection. Assign a tag that can support up to 82 characters (bytes). When the operator presses the Enter key, the application writes the alphanumeric string to the tag's data source.  If you do not assign the Value connection, at run time when the operator presses the button the pop-up does not open.  Enter  A write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. This connection accepts values of 0 and 1 only. The connection determines how long the Enter key press is registered. Use this connection for Enter key handshaking.  Enter Handshake  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. This connection resets the Enter connection, using the Handshake reset type option specified in the Timing tab. Use this connection for Enter key handshaking if you want the Enter connection to be reset when a value at the data source changes.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and resets the Enter connection when the expression value meets the conditions of the Handshake reset type option.  See also  Create string input enable buttons  How the string input enable button works at run time  How Enter key handshaking works at run time  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1526,
    "title": "How Enter key handshaking works at run time",
    "url": "60245_1.htm",
    "text": "When an object&#8217;s Enter button is pressed, the object writes a value to the data source. Use Enter key handshaking to hold the value at the data source for a specific period of time to ensure it is read before the object overwrites the value.  You can use Enter key handshaking with these objects:  String input enable button  Control list selector  Numeric input enable button  Numeric input cursor point  Use objects in the graphic display  Before the Enter connection is reset to 0, the operator can provide input to other objects in the graphic display.  If the operator presses the Enter key (using a key button or external keyboard or keypad) for an object whose Enter connection has not yet been reset , the application logs an error.  Graphic display changes  If the graphic display is closed, the Enter connection is reset to 0 and any handshake timing is also reset. In effect, the handshaking is canceled.  To set up an object for handshaking  Enter key handshaking works by setting the object's Enter connection to 1. Until the Enter connection is reset to 0, no new values can be sent to the Value connection.  There are two ways of using Enter key handshaking:  Hold the value at the data source for a specified period of time,  Hold the value at the data source until the data source notifies FactoryTalk View that the value has been read.  See also  Hold a value for a specified length of time  Hold a value until it is acknowledged  Causes of run-time errors for Enter key handshaking  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1527,
    "title": "How the String Input Enable button works at run time",
    "url": "60253.htm",
    "text": "When the operator presses the String Input Enable button, the string pop-up keyboard or scratchpad opens. The operator types an alphanumeric string in the pop-up and presses Enter. The string is sent to the Value connection at the data source.  If the screen for the computer running the application is too small, the pop-up does not open:  If the terminal's resolution is smaller than 236 pixels wide by 208 pixels high, the string pop-up keyboard cannot open.  If the terminal's resolution is smaller than 236 pixels wide by 44 pixels high, the string pop-up scratchpad cannot open.  See also  Causes of run-time errors for the String Input Enable button  Set up connections for the String Input Enable button  How Enter key handshaking works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1528,
    "title": "Example: Use a String Input Enable button",
    "url": "60295.htm",
    "text": "In this example, the String Input Enable button controls the address printed on a label. Pressing this button brings up a keyboard or scratchpad (depending on the string pop-up setting) that the operator can use to enter the new label address.  Create a String Input Enable button. Change the number of input characters to 22, and set the caption to \"Set address.\"  Assign a string tag to the Value connection. When the operator presses the button, a keyboard or scratchpad pops up and the operator can enter a new address. The value that is entered becomes the value of the Value connection. The data source registers the value change and the label printer now prints this new address.  See also  Create String Input Enable buttons  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1529,
    "title": "Use the string pop-up keyboard",
    "url": "60251.htm",
    "text": "To enter string values at run time, the operator must open the string pop-up keyboard by pressing a string input enable button. The keyboard also opens when the operator presses the User and Password buttons in the Login dialog box or the Old Password, New Password and Confirm Password buttons in the Change Password dialog box at run time.  If the operator opens the pop-up keyboard by pressing a String Input Enable button, the number of characters the keyboard accepts depends on how you set up the button.  When the keyboard is open, no other objects in the graphic display can accept input.  To use the string pop-up keyboard  Press the buttons in the pop-up, or use the keys on an external keyboard or keypad, to enter a string in the pop-up&#8217;s scratchpad.  Press Enter (@).  Tip:  If the graphic display changes remotely before the operator has pressed the Enter button in the string pop-up keyboard, the pop-up closes without writing anything out.  If the computer&#8217;s resolution is smaller than 236 pixels wide by 208 pixels high, the string pop-up keyboard cannot open.  To use the string pop-up character input instead of the string pop-up keyboard at run time, from the Tools menu, select Options > String Pop-Up. Then click the string pop-up character input radio button.  If the string input enable button has its Mask scratchpad option set to True, the string pop-up character input's scratchpad will show # characters instead of the characters entered.  When invoked from the Change Password or from the Login dialog's Password button, the string pop-up character input's scratchpad will show # characters instead of the characters entered.  Use the buttons  Except for the SHF and CAP buttons, you can use the keys on an external keyboard or keypad in place of the string pop-up keyboard's buttons, where an equivalent key exists.  Shift  Press the SHF button to capitalize a single character.  Tab and Shift-Tab  Press the TAB or SHF-TAB buttons to move input focus to another button. Pressing TAB moves input focus down and to the left, and pressing SHF-TAB moves input focus to the right and up.  F1  Press F1 to activate the button with the highlight focus.  Caps  Press the CAP button to capitalize multiple characters.  Insert/Overstrike  Press the INS/OVR button or the Insert key on an external keyboard to toggle between insert and overstrike modes.  Left arrow  Press the << button or the Left arrow key on an external keyboard to move the cursor to the left.  Right arrow  Press the >> button or the Right arrow key on an external keyboard to move the cursor to the right.  Escape  To close the pop-up without writing the string to the Login dialog box or the Value connection, press one of these:  the ESC button  the Esc key on an external keyboard or keypad  Clear  Press the CLR button or the Delete key on an external keyboard to clear the scratchpad.  Backspace  Press @ to delete the character to the left of the cursor. Hold the button down to delete multiple characters.  Enter  Press  or the @ key on an external keyboard or keypad to write the string to the Login dialog box or Value connection.  See also  How the string pop-up keyboard works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the string pop-up keyboard  Use the Login dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1530,
    "title": "How the string pop-up keyboard works at run time",
    "url": "60293.htm",
    "text": "With the Login dialog box  When the operator enters a string in the string pop-up keyboard and presses the Enter button:  The string is entered in the User or Password box.  The pop-up closes.  With the string input enable button  When the operator enters a string in the string pop-up keyboard and presses the Enter button:  If a fill character is configured for the string input enable button (in the General tab), and the operator enters fewer than the maximum number of input characters, the fill characters are placed after the string the operator enters.  Spaces have a hex value of 20.  Zeroes have a hex value of 30.  FF characters have a hex value of FF.  Null characters have hex value of 0.  If the number of input characters is fewer than the tag length of the Value connection, the remaining spaces are padded with the null character.  The string is written to the Value connection. The first character is placed in the high order byte of the first word at the connection address, the second character is placed in the low order byte of the first word, and so on.  The pop-up closes.  If Enter key handshaking is set up for the string input enable button, the Enter connection is set to 1 and the handshaking timers begin timing.  See also  Use the string pop-up keyboard  Causes of run-time errors for the string pop-up keyboard  Configure the String Input Enable button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1531,
    "title": "How to input a string value",
    "url": "75184.htm",
    "text": "To input a string value for PLC5 and SLC controllers  For PLC5 and SLC controllers, there are two types of data files that hold string values: ST (String) and A (Ascii).  When using ST Data Files, each element holds 82 characters. To input strings from an ST (String) data table, browse to the data table element that holds the string, for example, ST12:0. You do not need an added syntax display and can input up to 82 characters in each element.  When using A (Ascii) Data Files, each element holds two characters. To input more than two characters, you must add an Lx (length) modifier to the connection. To input strings from an A (Ascii data table), first, browse to the data table element that holds the string, labeled A9:0. Next, add a comma and Lx modifier along with a value, for example, A9:0, and L10 will display 20 characters. To display the full 82 characters supported by the String Input and String Display, use the following syntax; A9:0,L4.  To input a string value for Logix Controllers  For Logix controllers there is a String Data type to hold string values. To show and input strings from a String Data type tag, browse to the string tag that holds the string, for example, MyString. You do not need an added syntax to display and you can input up to 82 characters in each element.  See also  Causes of run-time errors for the string input enable button  Set up connections for the string input enable button (Connections tab)  How Enter key handshaking works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1532,
    "title": "Use the string pop-up scratchpad",
    "url": "60255.htm",
    "text": "To enter string values, the operator must open the string pop-up scratchpad by pressing a string input enable button. The number of characters the scratchpad accepts depends on how you set up the String Input Enable button.  The scratchpad does not contain any buttons. The computer must have an external keyboard or keypad to use and close the pop-up scratchpad. If the runtime terminal is a keypad terminal, the operator can enter numbers in the scratchpad and close the scratchpad.  When the scratchpad is open, no other objects in the graphic display can accept input.  To use the pop-up scratchpad  Use the keys on an external keyboard or keypad to enter a string in the pop-up&#8217;s scratchpad.  Press Enter @ on the external keyboard or keypad.  Tip:  If the graphic display changes remotely before the operator has pressed the Enter key on the external keyboard or keypad, the pop-up closes without writing anything out.  If the computer&#8217;s resolution is smaller than 236 pixels wide by 44 pixels high, the pop-up scratchpad cannot open.  Use the keys on the external keyboard or keypad  Insert/Overstrike  Press the Insert key to toggle between insert and overstrike modes.  Left arrow  Press the Left arrow key to move the cursor to the left.  Right arrow  Press the Right arrow key to move the cursor to the right.  Escape  Press the Esc key to close the pop-up without writing the string to the Value connection.  Delete  Press the Delete key to clear the scratchpad.  Backspace  Press @ to delete the character to the left of the cursor. Hold the button down to delete multiple characters.  Enter  Press @ to write the string to the Value connection.  See also  How the string pop-up scratchpad works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the string pop-up scratchpad  Causes of run-time errors for the string input enable button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1533,
    "title": "How the string pop-up scratchpad works at run time",
    "url": "60257.htm",
    "text": "When the operator enters a string in the string pop-up scratchpad and presses the Enter button:  If a fill character is configured for the string input enable button (in the General tab), and the operator enters fewer than the maximum number of input characters, the fill characters are placed after the string the operator enters.  Spaces have a hex value of 20.  Zeroes have a hex value of 30.  FF characters have a hex value of FF.  Null characters have hex value of 0.  If the number of input characters is fewer than the tag length of the Value connection, the remaining spaces are padded with the null character.  The string is written to the Value connection. The first character is placed in the high order byte of the first word at the connection address, the second character is placed in the low order byte of the first word, and so on.  The pop-up closes.  If Enter key handshaking is set up for the string input enable button, the Enter connection is set to 1 and the handshaking timers begin timing.  See also  Use the string pop-up scratchpad  Causes of run-time errors for the string pop-up scratchpad  Configure the String Input Enable button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1534,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the String Input Enable button",
    "url": "60289.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs errors about the button to diagnostics under these circumstances:  Unassigned connections  If the Value connection is not assigned, when the operator presses the button the pop-up is not shown and the application logs an error.  Terminal resolution too small  If the terminal's resolution is too small to show the string pop-up keyboard or scratchpad, the pop-up is not shown and the application logs an error.  Invalid Values  If the number of characters entered is greater than the maximum number allowed by the tag, when the operator presses Enter, the display turns red, the string is not sent to the Value connection and the application logs an error.  See also  Create String Input Enable buttons  How the String Input Enable button works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for Enter key handshaking  Causes of run-time errors for the string pop-up keyboard  Causes of run-time errors for the string pop-up scratchpad  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1535,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the string pop-up scratchpad",
    "url": "60287.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs error messages about the string pop-up scratchpad to diagnostics under the circumstances listed below. These are common causes, but because of the wide variety of possible applications, other conditions not mentioned here may also cause error messages.  String too long for Value connection  If the string pop-up scratchpad is configured to accept more input characters than the Value connection tag length (using the \"Number of input characters\" option for the string input enable button), when the operator presses the Enter button:  Nothing is written to the Value connection.  The pop-up remains open and continues to show the invalid value in red.  If Enter key handshaking is set up, the Enter connection is not set to 1 and the handshake timers do not begin timing.  The application logs an error.  Enter key handshaking in effect  If timing for Enter key handshaking from a previous pop-up entry is still in effect when the operator presses the Enter button:  Nothing is written to the Value connection.  The Enter connection remains set to 1 and the handshake timers continue timing.  The application logs an error.  Terminal resolution too small  If the terminal's resolution is too small to show the string pop-up scratchpad, the application logs an error.  See also  Use the string pop-up scratchpad  How the string pop-up scratchpad works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the string input enable button  Configure the String Input Enable button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1536,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the string pop-up keyboard",
    "url": "60291.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs error messages about the string pop-up keyboard to diagnostics under the circumstances listed below. These are common causes, but because of the wide variety of possible applications, other conditions not mentioned here may also cause error messages.  String too long for Value connection  If the string pop-up keyboard is configured to accept more input characters than the Value connection tag length (using the Number of input characters option for the string input enable button), when the operator presses the Enter button:  Nothing is written to the Value connection.  The pop-up remains open and continues to show the invalid value in red.  If Enter key handshaking is set up, the Enter connection is not set to 1 and the handshake timers do not begin timing.  The application logs an error.  Enter key handshaking in effect  If timing for Enter key handshaking from a previous pop-up entry is still in effect when the operator presses the Enter button:  Nothing is written to the Value connection.  The Enter connection remains set to 1 and the handshake timers continue timing.  The application logs an error.  Terminal resolution too small  If the terminal's resolution is too small to show the string pop-up keyboard, the application logs an error.  See also  Use the string pop-up keyboard  How the string pop-up keyboard works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the string input enable button  Configure the String Input Enable button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1537,
    "title": "Create Goto Display buttons",
    "url": "60571.htm",
    "text": "At run time the operator can press a Goto Display button to open the graphic display assigned to the button.  Tip:  The operator cannot use this button to open Replace displays if display change is currently controlled remotely. But the operator can still open On Top displays (with or without the Cannot Be Replaced option).  To create a Goto Display button  In the Graphics Display editor, from the Objects menu, select Display Navigation > Goto.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the Goto Display button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks and the display to go to.  See also  How the Goto Display button works at run time  Configure the Goto Display button  Set up a caption and image for a button  Causes of run-time errors for the Goto Display button  ",
    "keywords": {
      "display navigation": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1538,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Goto Display button",
    "url": "60575.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of Goto Display button Properties dialog box to set up how a Goto Display button looks.  To set up general options for a Goto Display button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create Goto Display buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  How the Goto Display button works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the Goto Display button  Set up connections for the goto button (Connections tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1539,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Goto Display Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "329294.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Goto Display Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Specify the background color and the border color on the States tab.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Display settings  Display  Click the Browse button (...) to open the Component Browser and select the display to open when the button is pressed. The list contains all of the graphic displays in the project.  Use variable display  Select this box to use the tag/expression content that is set on the Connections tab. If this check box is not selected, the goto button uses the display name specified in the Display field.   Parameter file  Select this option if the display's run-time parameter values will be provided by a parameter file. Click the Browse button (...) to open the Component Browser and select the parameter file to run when the button object is pressed.  Parameter list  Select this option if the display's run-time parameter values will be provided by a parameter list. Click the Browse button to open the Tag Browser and select the tag or tags to add to the list.  Display position  Select this check box to specify where the display is positioned when it is opened. If you leave this check box cleared, when the display is opened, it is positioned according to whatever is specified in the Position options in the Properties tab of the Display Settings dialog box. These properties apply only to On Top displays. They are ignored for a Replace display.  Top position  If Display position is selected, type the number of pixels from the top of the screen to position the display. This property applies only to On Top displays (with or without the Cannot Be Replaced option).  Left position  Type the number of pixels from the left edge of the screen to position the display.  This property applies only when Display position is selected and to On Top displays (with or without the Cannot Be Replaced option).  Use Variable Display Position  Select this check box to use the tag/expression content that is set on the Connections tab for the Top Position and Left Position. If this check box is not selected, the display is positioned as specified by the settings associated with the Display position check box on this tab (General tab) or as specified on the display's properties dialog box.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  Create Goto Display buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  How the Goto Display button works at run time  Configure the gradient fill  Set up general properties for a Goto Display button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1540,
    "title": "Set up connections for the Goto Display button (Connections tab)",
    "url": "80939.htm",
    "text": "When selected at run time, the Goto Display button opens the graphic display assigned to the button.   To set up tags and expressions for the goto button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag or expression to the Display Name, Top Position, and Left Position connections, as necessary.  Tip:  The Display Name must be a string type. The Top Position and Left Position connections must be numeric types. Valid values must be an integer between &#8209;32768 to 32767.  See also  Configure the Goto Display button (General tab)  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1541,
    "title": "How the Goto Display button works at run time",
    "url": "60573.htm",
    "text": "When the operator presses the Goto Display button at run time, the graphic display assigned to the button opens.  The Goto Display button&#8217;s behavior at run time also depends on which types of graphic displays are already open and which type of display it is opening.  Use display types  If the graphic display assigned to the button is a Replace display, it closes any open On Top or Replace displays. It does not close any On Top displays that use the Cannot Be Replaced option.  If the graphic display assigned to the button is an On Top display (with or without the Cannot Be Replaced option) and you select the Display position enabled option (on the General tab), the display is positioned using the \"Top position\" and \"Left position\" settings. Otherwise, the display is positioned using the graphic display&#8217;s settings.  The operator cannot use this button to open Replace displays if display change is currently controlled remotely. But the operator can still open On Top displays (with or without the Cannot Be Replaced option).  Tip:  The types of displays and the graphic display's settings are configured in the Display Settings editor.  See also  Create Goto Display buttons  Configure the Goto Display button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  Causes of run-time errors for the Goto Display button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1542,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the Goto Display button",
    "url": "60579.htm",
    "text": "At run time, the assigned graphic display does not open, and the application logs errors to diagnostics about the Goto Display button if:  The display assigned to the button has been deleted from the project.  The operator does not have security access for the display.  The display assigned to the button is the display that contains the button.  The display change is controlled remotely (by the data source) and a Replace display is assigned to the button.  The parameter file assigned to the button has been deleted from the project.  See also  Create Goto Display buttons  How the Goto Display button works at run time  Set up a caption and image for a button  Configure the Goto Display button (General tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1543,
    "title": "Create Return to Display buttons",
    "url": "60712.htm",
    "text": "At run time the operator can press a Return to Display button to close the graphic display that the button is on and reopen the display that was previously open.  To create a Return to Display button  In the Graphics Display editor, select Display Navigation > Return To from the Objects menu.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks.  See also  How the Return to Display button works at run time  Configure the Return to Display button  Set up a caption and image for a button  Causes of run-time errors for the Return to Display button  ",
    "keywords": {
      "display navigation": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1544,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Return to Display button",
    "url": "60717.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Return to Display button Properties dialog box to set up how a Return to Display button looks.  To set up general options for a Return to Display button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  bounding box  Create Return to Display buttons  How the Return to Display button works at run time  Configure the gradient fill  Options on the General tab of the Return to Display Button Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1545,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Return to Display Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "329298.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Return to Display Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  For objects without states, if you select this check box the object always blinks.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Create Return to Display buttons  How the Return to Display button works at run time  Configure the gradient fill  Set up general properties for a Return to Display button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1546,
    "title": "How the Return to Display button works at run time",
    "url": "60714.htm",
    "text": "When the operator presses the button at run time, the graphic display that the button is on closes and the display that was previously open reopens, even if the current display was opened by a remote display change (that is, by the data source).  Tip:  As long as the Remote Display Number value is non-zero, the return-to-display will not work.  The Return to Display button only goes back to the most recent display. It dose not go back through a series of displays.  The Return to Display button&#8217;s behavior at run time also depends on which type of graphic display is closing and which types of displays were previously open.  Use display types  If the graphic display that is closing is a Replace display, the display closes and the previously opened Replace display opens. Any On Top displays that were previously open with the Replace display are not reopened.  If no Replace displays were previously open, the display does not close.  If the graphic display that is closing is an On Top display (with or without the Cannot Be Replaced option), the display closes but no display is reopened.  See also  Create Return to Display buttons  Configure the Return to Display button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  Causes of run-time errors for the Return to Display button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1547,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the Return to Display button",
    "url": "60721.htm",
    "text": "At run time the display does not close and the application logs errors about the Return to Display button to diagnostics if:  The operator does not have security access for the previous display.  The display change is controlled remotely (by the data source).  There were no previously opened Replace displays. The diagnostics message says <Button name>&#8217;s requested display is already open.  See also  Create Return to Display buttons  How the Return to Display button works at run time  Set up a caption and image for a button  Configure the Return to Display button (General tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1548,
    "title": "Create Close Display buttons",
    "url": "60559.htm",
    "text": "At run time the operator can press a Close Display button to close the graphic display that the button is on.  To create a Close Display button  In the Graphics Display editor, select Display Navigation > Close from the Objects menu.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks.  See also  How the Close Display button works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the Close Display button  Configure the Close Display button  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up controls for the Close Display button (Connections tab)  ",
    "keywords": {
      "display navigation": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1549,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Close Display button",
    "url": "60567.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Close Display button Properties dialog box to set up how a Close Display button looks.  To set up general options for a Close Display button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create Close Display buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up controls for the Close Display button (Connections tab)  Configure the gradient fill  Options on the General tab of the Close Display Button Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1550,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Close Display Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "329301.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Close Display Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  For objects without states, if you check this box the object always blinks.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Value  Write on close  Select this check box if you want a value written out when the button is pressed.  Close value  Type the value that will be written out when the button is pressed. The range is from -2,147,483,648 through 2,147,483,647.  This option is available when Write on close is selected.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  Create Close Display buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up controls for the Close Display button (Connections tab)  Configure the gradient fill  Set up general properties for a Close Display button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1551,
    "title": "Set up connections for the Close Display button",
    "url": "60569.htm",
    "text": "Use the Connections tab to set up a tag or expression for the Close Display button.  To set up a tag or expression for the Close Display button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag to this write connection. Assign a tag that can receive the integer value specified in the Close value box on the General tab.  Value  When the operator presses the Close Display button, the application writes the integer value specified in the Close value property to the tag&#8217;s data source.  See also  Create Close Display buttons  Set up general properties for a Close Display button  Set up a caption and image for a button  How the Close Display button works at run time  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1552,
    "title": "How the Close Display button works at run time",
    "url": "60561.htm",
    "text": "When the operator presses the button at run time, the graphic display that the button is on closes. If the Write on Close check box on the General tab is checked, when the button is pressed, the value specified in the Close value box (General tab) is written out to the location specified in the Connections tab.  If the graphic display that is closing is a Replace display, and display change is controlled remotely (by the data source), the display does not close.  See also  Create Close Display buttons  Causes of run-time errors for the Close Display button  Set up a caption and image for a button  Configure the Close Display button (General tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1553,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the Close Display button",
    "url": "60563.htm",
    "text": "At run time the display does not close and the application logs errors about the Close Display button to diagnostics if:  The Close Display button is on a Replace display, and display change is controlled remotely (by the data source).  See also  Create Close Display buttons  How the Close Display button works at run time  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up controls for the Close Display button (Connections tab)  Configure the Close Display button (General tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1554,
    "title": "Create display list selectors",
    "url": "60335.htm",
    "text": "Use the display list selector to show a list of graphic displays that the operator can choose from. The operator can scroll through the list and select a graphic display.  The operator can scroll through the list and select displays using key buttons or by using the arrow keys and Enter key on a keypad or an external keyboard.  Tip:  The operator cannot use the display list selector to open Replace displays if display change is currently controlled remotely. But the operator can still open displays of the type On Top (with or without the Cannot Be Replaced option).  To create a display list selector  In the Graphics Display editor, select Display Navigation > Display List Selector from the Objects menu.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the selector to be.  Double-click the selector to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the selector looks and its states.  See also  Set up general properties for a display list selector  Set up states for a display list selector  How the display list selector works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the display list selector  ",
    "keywords": {
      "display navigation": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1555,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a display list selector",
    "url": "60339.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Display List Selector Properties dialog box to set up how a display list selector object looks.  To set up general options for a display list selector  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  See also  Create display list selectors  Options on the General tab of the Display List Selector Properties dialog box  Set up states for the display list selector  How the display list selector works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the display list selector  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1556,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Display List Selector Properties dialog box",
    "url": "329387.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Display List Selector Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border or displayed value. If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Selection back color  This box shows the color for the highlight bar. Click it to select another color. The highlight bar indicates the selected display at run time.  Selection fore color  This box shows the color for the caption on the highlighted display. Click it to select another color.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the text to blink at run time. The text blinks twice per second.  Text  The text settings apply to the numeric values in the display.  Font  Select the font to use for the text.  Size  Select the font size to use for the text.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the text, if required.  Caption truncate  Select Word if you want captions that exceed the maximum length to be cut off at the beginning of a new word.  Select Character if you want the caption to be cut off whenever the maximum caption length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word.  The maximum caption length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  When a caption has been truncated, the application places an asterisk (*) at the right end of the caption to indicate that text is missing.  Number of states  Select the number of states for the object.  Other  Key navigation  Select this check box to allow the user to navigate to the object using the keyboard and give the object input focus.  Wrap around  Select this check box if you want the list to wrap from the end of the list to the beginning when scrolling down, and from the beginning of the list to the end when scrolling up.  See also  Create display list selectors  Configure the gradient fill  Set up general properties for a display list selector object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1557,
    "title": "Set up states for a display list selector",
    "url": "60341.htm",
    "text": "Use the States tab to set up which displays appear in the display list selector.  To set up states for the display list selector  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the States tab.  From the Select state list, select State 0.  Specify these properties for State 0:  Display to open  Parameter file or parameter list (if any)  Position  Caption  Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each additional state.  Once you set up the properties for one state, you can copy and paste the state&#8217;s properties to another state or to all states.  Tip:  To add or remove a state without returning to the General tab, click Insert State or Delete State.  See also  Create display list selectors  Set up general properties for a display list selector  Options on the States tab of the Display List Selector Properties dialog box  How the display list selector works at run time  Copy and paste state properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1558,
    "title": "Options on the States tab of the Display List Selector Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330878.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the States tab of the Display List Selector Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Select state  Click the state for which to set up properties.  Display Settings  Display  Specify the display to open when the operator highlights this state and presses Enter. To select from a list of the graphic displays in the project, click the Browse button (\u2026).  Parameter file  Select this option if the display's run-time parameter values will be provided by a parameter file. Click the Browse button (...) to open the Component Browser and select the parameter file to run when the operator highlights this state and presses Enter. The list contains all of the parameter files in the project.  A parameter file assigns tags to tag placeholders in the display when the display opens.  Parameter list  Select this option if the display's run-time parameter values will be provided by a parameter list. Click the Browse button to open the Tag Browser and select the tag or tags to add to the list.  Display position  Check this box to use the Top position and Left position for the display. These properties apply only to On Top displays (with or without the Cannot Be Replaced option).  Top position  Type the number of pixels from the top of the screen to position the display.  Left position  Type the number of pixels from the left edge of the screen to position the display.  Caption  Enter the text for the state. The text appears on the face of the object, to give the operator information about the current state.  Use display name  Check this box to use the name of the display as the caption for this state. This caption appears in the display list at run time.  Insert Variable  Click this button to select the type of variable to be inserted.  Caption color  This box shows the current text color for the caption when the state is not selected. Click it to select another color.  Caption back color  This box shows the current background color for the caption when the state is not selected. Click it to select another color.  If the caption background style is transparent, the application does not use this caption background color.  Caption blink  Select this check box if you want the caption to blink at run time. The caption blinks twice per second.  Alignment  Specifies how the caption is positioned on the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the position is relative to the object's bounding box.  See also  Create display list selectors  Configure the display list selector  Insert a numeric variable  Insert a string variable  Copy and paste state properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1559,
    "title": "How the display list selector works at run time",
    "url": "60337.htm",
    "text": "The display list selector shows a list of graphic displays that the operator can choose from. The operator can move through the list and select a graphic display. When the operator presses Enter, the selected display opens.  The operator can scroll through the list and select displays using key buttons or by using the arrow keys and the Enter key on a keypad or an external keyboard.  The display list selector&#8217;s behavior at run time also depends on which types of graphic displays are already open and which type of display is opening.  Use display types  If the selected graphic display is a Replace display, it closes any open On Top or Replace displays. It does not close any On Top displays that use the Cannot Be Replaced option.  If the selected display is an On Top (with or without the Cannot Be Replaced option), the display is positioned using the graphic display&#8217;s settings.  See also  Create display list selectors  Set up general properties for a display list selector  Set up states for a display list selector  Causes of run-time errors for the display list selector  Create Key buttons  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1560,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the display list selector",
    "url": "60409.htm",
    "text": "At run time the selected display does not open and the application logs errors about the display list selector to diagnostics if:  The selected display has been deleted from the project.  The operator does not have security access for the display.  The selected display is the display that contains the display list selector.  The display change is controlled remotely (by the data source) and a Replace display is assigned to the list item the operator has selected.  The parameter file specified has been renamed or does not exist.  See also  Create display list selectors  How the display list selector works at run time  Configure the display list selector (General tab)  Set up states for the display list selector (States tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1561,
    "title": "Create multistate indicators",
    "url": "60361.htm",
    "text": "The multistate indicator displays the current state of a process or operation by showing a different color, caption, or image to reflect different states.  You configure the state values of the multistate indicator. Then, at run time, the object displays the state whose value matches the Indicator connection value at the data source.  You can enter a maximum of 2000 states plus the Error state.  To create a multistate indicator  In the Graphics Display editor, choose Indicator > Multistate from the Objects menu.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the indicator to be.  Double-click the indicator to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the indicator looks, set up its states and assign an Indicator tag.  Tip:  If the value of the Indicator connection does not match any of the configured state values for the multistate indicator, the error state is shown.  See also  Set up general properties for a multistate indicator  Set up states for a multistate indicator  Set up connections for the multistate indicator  How the multistate indicator works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the multistate indicator  ",
    "keywords": {
      "indicator": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1562,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a multistate indicator",
    "url": "60367.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Multistate Indicator Properties dialog box to set up how a multistate indicator looks.  To set up general options for a multistate indicator  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the States tab to specify how the object looks in each state at run time.  See also  Create multistate indicators  Options on the General tab of the Multistate Indicator Properties dialog box  Set up states for the multistate indicator  Set up connections for the multistate indicator  How the multistate indicator works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1563,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Multistate Indicator Properties dialog box",
    "url": "329399.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Multistate Indicator Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Specify the color for the background (Back color) on the States tab.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Specify the background color and the border color on the States tab.  State settings  Number of states  Select the number of states for the object.  Trigger type  Select Value to allow the object to trigger a state based on the value of the Value connection.  Select LSB to allow the object to trigger a state based on the least significant bit that is set high in the Value connection.  See also  bounding box  Create multistate indicators  Configure the gradient fill  Set up general properties for a multistate indicator object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1564,
    "title": "Set up states for a multistate indicator",
    "url": "60359.htm",
    "text": "Use the States tab to set up how the multistate indicator's appearance changes to match the value of the Indicator connection.  To set up states for the multistate indicator  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the States tab.  From the Select state list, select State 0.  Specify these properties for State 0:  Value  General appearance  Caption, if any  Image, if any  Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each additional state and the Error state. (The Error state does not have a value.) You can enter a &nbsp;maximum of 2000 states, plus the Error state.  Once you set up the properties for one state, you can copy and paste the state&#8217;s properties to another state or to all states.  Tip:  To add or remove a state without returning to the General tab, click Insert State or Delete State.  See also  Create multistate indicators  Set up general properties for a multistate indicator  Options on the States tab of the Multistate Indicator Properties dialog box  Set up connections for the multistate indicator  How the multistate indicator works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1565,
    "title": "Options on the States tab of the Multistate Indicator Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330885.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the States tab of the Multistate Indicator Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Select state  Click the state for which to set up properties.  The first state is State 0. There is also an error state, which is labeled Error.  General  Value  Type the integer value to use for each state. You cannot assign a value to the error state. When the Indicator connection changes to this value, the object's appearance changes to the settings specified for the state.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the state. Click it to select another color.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the state. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected on the General tab, this color appears at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink when the object is in this state at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the state. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object).  If the object&#8217;s back style is specified as transparent or gradient in the General tab, the pattern is not visible.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the state. Click it to select another color.  Caption  Enter the text for the state. The text appears on the face of the object, to give the operator information about the current state.  The default caption for the error state is Error. You can change it if required.  Insert Variable  Click this button to select the type of variable to be inserted.  Font  Select the font to use for the caption.  Size  Select the font size to use for the caption.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the caption, if required.  Caption color  This box shows the current text color for the caption when the state is not selected. Click it to select another color.  Caption back color  This box shows the current background color for the caption. Click it to select another color.  If the caption background style is transparent, the application does not use this caption background color.  Caption blink  Select this check box if you want the caption to blink at run time. The caption blinks twice per second.  Caption word wrap  Select this check box if you want the text to continue on the next line at the beginning of a new word.  If this check box is cleared, the text continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  Caption back style  Select whether the caption&#8217;s background is Solid or Transparent.  If you select Transparent, the object&#8217;s background is not filled in and any objects behind it show through.  Alignment  Specifies how the caption is positioned on the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the position is relative to the object's bounding box.  Image settings  Image  Enter the file name of the graphic image for the state or click the Browse button to select the image in the Image Browser. The image appears on the face of the object to show the information about the current state.  Before you can place an image on the object, you must import the image into your project.  Image color  This property applies to monochrome images. It determines the color the image is drawn in; that is, the foreground color.  Click the colored box to select another color.  Image back color  This property applies to monochrome images. It determines the color of the background the image is drawn on. Click the colored box to select another color.  If the Image back style is Transparent, the background of the image will be transparent.  Image blink  Select this check box to let the monochrome image blink at run time. The image blinks twice per second.  Image scaled  Select this check box to let the application resize the image to fit the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the image is resized to fit in the object&#8217;s bounding box and clipped to fit the object&#8217;s shape.  If this is not selected, the image is first aligned using the Alignment setting, and then, if larger than the object, the image is clipped to fit the object.  Image back style  This property applies to monochrome and color images. Use it to set the background style to Solid or Transparent.  If Image back style is Transparent:  For monochrome images, the background will be transparent .  For color images that are not PNG with Alpha channel, any parts of the images that are black will be transparent.  Alignment  Specifies how the image is positioned on the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the position is relative to the object's bounding box.  See also  Create multistate indicators  Configure the multistate indicator  Set up connections for the multistate indicator  How the multistate indicator works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the multistate indicator  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1566,
    "title": "Set up connections for the multistate indicator (Connections tab)",
    "url": "60369.htm",
    "text": "To set up a tag or expression for the multistate indicator  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the indicator to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag or expression to this connection:  Indicator  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection.  If you assign a tag, the application reads the value of the tag at the data source, assigns this value to the connection, and updates the object in the display to reflect the state corresponding to the value or least significant bit value (depending on the trigger type).  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the state corresponding to the value or least significant bit value (depending on the trigger type).  See also  Configure the multistate indicator (General tab)  Set up states for the multistate indicator (States tab)  How the multistate indicator works at run time  Example: Use a multistate indicator  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1567,
    "title": "How the multistate indicator works at run time",
    "url": "60365.htm",
    "text": "The multistate indicator displays the current state of a process or operation by showing a different color, caption, or image to reflect different states. The current state is the state whose value matches the Indicator connection value at the data source (if the Trigger type is set to Value on the General tab) or the state whose value matches the value of the least significant bit set high in the Indicator connection at the data source (if the Trigger type is set to LSB).  Use controls  If the Indicator connection value is a floating point value, the application rounds the value to the nearest integer to determine the state to show.  If an array tag is assigned to the object's Value connection, and the Trigger type is set to Value, an error message will be shown.  Open graphic displays  When you open a display at run time, the application reads the Indicator connection value and updates the display based on the value and the trigger type.  See also  Create multistate indicators  Configure the multistate indicator (General tab)  Set up states for the multistate indicator (States tab)  Set up controls for the multistate indicator  Causes of run-time errors for the multistate indicator  Example: Using a multistate indicator  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1568,
    "title": "Example: Use a multistate indicator",
    "url": "60363.htm",
    "text": "In these examples, the multistate indicator shows the status of a discharge screw for a bag filler machine. The discharge screw has three states: Off, Running, and Faulted.  These examples show three different methods of achieving the same results. When designing your own project, use the method that best fits your overall design.  Method 1: Use text to indicate the states  Create a multistate indicator with the captions \"Off\" for State 0, \"Running\" for State 1, and \"Faulted\" for State 2. Select the border style None, the back style Transparent, and caption colors that reflect each state. For example, use gray for State 0, green for State 1, and red for State 2.  Method 2: Use an image that changes colors to indicate the states  Create a multistate indicator with a monochrome image of the discharge screw on each state. Select an image color of gray for State 0, green for State 1, and red for State 2.  Tip:  You would typically use the symbol indicator object if you want to use the same monochrome image on all states. The advantages of using the multistate indicator are that you can use a different image for each state, the images can have more than two colors, and you can add a caption to each state as well.  Method 3: Using color by itself to indicate the states  Create a multistate indicator with no images or captions. Place the indicator beside text or an image of the discharge screw and select the back color gray for State 0, green for State 1, and red for State 2.  See also  Create multistate indicators  How the multistate indicator works at run time  Configure the multistate indicator  Set up states for the multistate indicator  Set up controls for the multistate indicator  Causes of run-time errors for the multistate indicator  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1569,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the multistate indicator",
    "url": "60371.htm",
    "text": "The error state is shown at run time if any of the following are true:  The Indicator connection does not have a tag or an expression assigned to it  The Trigger type is set to Value and the Indicator connection value does not match one of the configured state values  The Trigger type is set to LSB and the position of the least significant bit set in the Indicator connection does not match one of the configured state values  The Trigger type is set to Value and an array tag has been assigned to the object's Value connection  See also  Create multistate indicators  Configure the multistate indicator (General tab)  Set up states for the multistate indicator (States tab)  How the multistate indicator works at run time  Example: Use a multistate indicator  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1570,
    "title": "Create symbol indicators",
    "url": "60375.htm",
    "text": "Symbol indicators work well for showing the state of a process or operation at a glance. For example, you might create a symbol indicator with a picture of a pump and set up the states so that the pump changes colors to show the state:  red if there&#8217;s a problem  green if everything&#8217;s okay  yellow if there&#8217;s a warning  gray if the pump is not in use  You can assign unique attributes (such as color, blink, and so on) to every state, but the monochrome graphic image you assign to the indicator is used for all states.  You configure the state values of the symbol indicator. Then, at run time, the object displays the state whose value matches the Indicator connection value at the data source.  Tip:  If the value of the Indicator connection does not match any of the configured state values for the symbol indicator, the error state is shown.  To create a symbol indicator  In the Graphics Display editor, select Indicator > Symbol from the Objects menu.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the indicator to be.  From the Image Browser, select a monochrome image to be shown on the object.  When you assign a bitmap image to this object, the size changes to the size of the image plus the borders you configure, if any.  Double-click the indicator to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify the indicator's appearance, and its tags.  Tip:  The symbol indicator supports only monochrome bitmap images.  Before you can place an image in a display, you must import the image into your project.  See also  Set up general properties for a symbol indicator  Set up states for a symbol indicator  Set up connections for the symbol indicator  How the symbol indicator works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the symbol indicator  ",
    "keywords": {
      "indicator": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1571,
    "title": "Set up how the symbol indicator looks (General tab)",
    "url": "60379.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Symbol Properties dialog box to set up how a symbol indicator looks.  To set up general options for the symbol indicator  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Before you can select an image for the indicator, you must import the image into your project.  If the image is not a monochrome bitmap, or if the bitmap has been removed from the project, an X appears on the indicator.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the States tab to specify how the object looks in each state at run time.  See also  Create symbol indicators  Options on the General tab of the Symbol Properties dialog box  Set up states for a symbol indicator  Set up connections for the symbol indicator  How the symbol indicator works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1572,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Symbol Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330889.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Symbol Properties dialog box.  Table Heading  Table Heading  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Symbol settings  Number of states  Select the number of states for the object.  Trigger type  Select Value to allow the object to trigger a state based on the value of the Value connection.  Select LSB to allow the object to trigger a state based on the least significant bit that is set high in the Value connection.  Image  Enter the file name of the graphic image or click the Browse button to select the file name in the Image Browser. The image appears on the face of the object, to show the information about what the object does.  Before you can place an image on the object, you must import the image into the project.  You must use a monochrome image with this object.  See also  bounding box  Create symbol indicators  Set up states for the symbol indicator  Set up controls for the symbol indicator  How the symbol indicator works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1573,
    "title": "Set up states for a symbol indicator",
    "url": "60373.htm",
    "text": "Use the States tab to set up how the symbol indicator's appearance changes to match the value of the Indicator connection.  To set up states for the symbol indicator  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the States tab.  From the Select state list, select State 0.  Specify these properties for State 0:  Value  Border color  Image appearance  Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each additional state and the Error state. (The Error state has no value.)  Once you set up the properties for one state, you can copy and paste the state&#8217;s properties to another state or to all states.  Tip:  To add or remove a state without returning to the General tab, click Insert State or Delete State.  See also  Create symbol indicators  Set up general properties for a symbol indicator  Set up connections for the symbol indicator  How the symbol indicator works at run time  Copy and paste state properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1574,
    "title": "Options on the States tab of the Symbol Indicator Properties dialog box",
    "url": "331563.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the States tab of the Symbol Indicator Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Select state  Click the state for which to set up properties. There is an error state, which is labeled Error.  General  Value  Type the integer value to use for each state. You cannot assign a value to the error state. When the Indicator connection changes to this value, the object's appearance changes to the settings you specify for the state.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the state. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected on the General tab, this color appears at run time.  Image settings  Image color  This property applies to monochrome images. It determines the color the image is drawn in; that is, the foreground color.  Click the colored box to select another color.  Image back color  This property applies to monochrome images. It determines the color of the background the image is drawn on. Click the colored box to select another color.  If the Image back style is Transparent, the background of the image will be transparent.  Image blink  Select this check box to let the monochrome image blink at run time. The image blinks twice per second.  Image back style  This property applies to monochrome and color images. Use it to set the background style to Solid or Transparent.  If Image back style is Transparent:  For monochrome images, the background will be transparent .  For color images that are not PNG with Alpha channel, any parts of the images that are black will be transparent.  See also  Create symbol indicators  Set up how the symbol indicator looks  Set up controls for the symbol indicator  How the symbol indicator works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1575,
    "title": "Set up connections for the symbol indicator (Connections tab)",
    "url": "60381.htm",
    "text": "To set up tags and expressions for the symbol indicator  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the indicator to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag or expression to this connection:  Indicator  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection.  If you assign a tag, the application reads the value of the tag at the data source, assigns this value to the connection, and updates the object in the display to reflect the state corresponding to the value or least significant bit value (depending on the trigger type).  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the state corresponding to the value or least significant bit value (depending on the trigger type).  See also  Set up how the symbol indicator looks (General tab)  Set up states for the symbol indicator (States tab)  How the symbol indicator works at run time  Example: Use a symbol indicator  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1576,
    "title": "How the symbol indicator works at run time",
    "url": "60377.htm",
    "text": "The symbol indicator displays the current state of a process or operation by changing the color of the image to reflect different states. The current state is the state whose value matches the Indicator connection value at the data source (if the Trigger type is set to Value in the General tab) or the state whose value matches the value of the least significant bit set high in the Indicator connection at the data source (if the Trigger type is set to LSB).  Use controls  If the Indicator connection value is a floating point value, the application rounds the value to the nearest integer to determine the state to show.  If an array tag is assigned to the object's Value connection, and the Trigger type is set to Value, an error message will be shown.  Open graphic displays  When you open a display at run time, the application reads the Indicator connection value and updates the display based on the value and the trigger type.  See also  Create symbol indicators  Set up how the symbol indicator looks (General tab)  Set up states for the symbol indicator (States tab)  Set up controls for the symbol indicator  Causes of run-time errors for the symbol indicator  Example: Using a symbol indicator  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1577,
    "title": "Example: Use a symbol indicator",
    "url": "60385.htm",
    "text": "In this example, the symbol indicator monitors the Indicator connection to show the mode of operation of a blower. The blower can operate manually or automatically, or it can be turned off.  Create a symbol indicator with the colors \"red\" for State 0, \"yellow\" for State 1, and \"green\" for State 2.  The application reads the tag you assign to the Indicator connection and updates the indicator&#8217;s state when the value changes. This state change enables the current operation mode to be shown.  See also  Create symbol indicators  How the symbol indicator works at run time  Set up how the symbol indicator looks  Set up states for the symbol indicator  Set up controls for the symbol indicator  Causes of run-time errors for the symbol indicator  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1578,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the symbol indicator",
    "url": "60383.htm",
    "text": "The error state shows at run time if any of the following are true:  The Indicator connection does not have a tag or expression assigned to it  The Trigger type is set to Value and the &nbsp;Indicator connection value does not match one of the configured state values  The Trigger type is set to LSB and the position of the least significant bit set in the Value connection does not match one of the configured state values  The Trigger type is set to Value and an array tag has been assigned to the object's Value connection  See also  Create symbol indicators  Set up how the symbol indicator looks (General tab)  Set up states for the symbol indicator (States tab)  Set up controls for the symbol indicator (Connections tab)  How the symbol indicator works at run time  Example: Use a symbol indicator  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1579,
    "title": "Create list indicators",
    "url": "60347.htm",
    "text": "The list indicator displays a list of states for a process or operation, and highlights the current state. Each state is represented by a caption in the list. This type of indicator is useful if you want to view the current state but also want to see the other possible states. For sequential processes, the list can alert the operator about what happens next in the process.  You configure the state values of the list indicator. Then, at run time, the object highlights the state in the list whose value matches the Indicator connection value at the data source.  Tip:  If the value of the Indicator connection does not match any of the configured state values for the list indicator, none of the states are highlighted.  To create a list indicator  In the Graphics Display editor, select Indicator > List from the Objects menu.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the indicator to be.  Double-click the indicator to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the indicator looks and its tags.  See also  Set up general properties for a list indicator  Set up states for a list indicator  Set up connections for the list indicator  How the list indicator works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the list indicator  ",
    "keywords": {
      "indicator": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1580,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a list indicator",
    "url": "60349.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the List Indicator Properties dialog box to set up how a list indicator looks.  To set up general options for a list indicator  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the States tab to specify how the object looks in each state at run time.  See also  Create list indicators  Options on the General tab of the List Indicator Properties dialog box  Set up states for a list indicator  Set up connections for the list indicator  How the list indicator works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1581,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the List Indicator Properties dialog box",
    "url": "329408.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the List Indicator Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border or displayed value. If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Selection fore color  This box shows the color for the caption on the highlighted state. Click it to select another color.  Selection back color  This box shows the color for the highlight bar. Click it to select another color. The highlight bar indicates the current state at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the text to blink at run time. The text blinks twice per second.  Text  The text settings apply to the numeric values in the display.  Font  Select the font to use for the text.  Size  Select the font size to use for the text.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the text, if required.  Caption truncate  Select Word if you want captions that exceed the maximum length to be cut off at the beginning of a new word.  Select Character if you want the caption to be cut off whenever the maximum caption length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word.  The maximum caption length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  When a caption has been truncated, the application places an asterisk (*) at the right end of the caption to indicate that text is missing.  State settings  Number of states  Select the number of states for the object.  Trigger type  Select Value to allow the object to trigger a state based on the value of the Value connection.  Select LSB to allow the object to trigger a state based on the least significant bit that is set high in the Value connection.  See also  Create list indicators  Configure the gradient fill  Set up general properties for a list indicator object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1582,
    "title": "Set up states for a list indicator",
    "url": "60345.htm",
    "text": "Use the States tab to set up how the list indicator's appearance changes to match the value of the Indicator connection.  To set up states for a list indicator object  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the States tab.  From the Select state list, select State 0.  Specify these properties for State 0:  Value  Caption  Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each additional state.  Once you set up the properties for one state, you can copy and paste the state&#8217;s properties to another state or to all states.  Tip:  To add or remove a state without returning to the General tab, click Insert State or Delete State.  See also  Create list indicators  Set up general properties for a list indicator  Set up connections for the list indicator  How the list indicator works at run time  Copy and paste state properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1583,
    "title": "Options on the States tab of the List Indicator Properties dialog box",
    "url": "331566.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the States tab of the List Indicator Properties dialog box.  Options   Descriptions  Select state  Click the state for which to set up properties.  General  Value  Type the integer value to use for each state. When the Indicator connection changes to this value, this state become the highlighted state.  Caption  Enter the text for the state. The text appears on the face of the object, to give the operator information about the current state.  Insert Variable  Click this button to select the type of variable to be inserted.  Caption color  This box shows the current text color for the caption when the state is not selected. Click it to select another color.  Caption back color  This box shows the current background color for the caption when the state is not selected. Click it to select another color.  If the caption background style is transparent, the application does not use this caption background color.  Caption blink  Select this check box if you want the caption to blink at run time. The caption blinks twice per second.  Caption back style  Select whether the caption&#8217;s background is Solid or Transparent.  If you select Transparent, the object&#8217;s background is not filled in and any objects behind it show through.  Alignment  Specifies how the caption is positioned on the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the position is relative to the object's bounding box.  See also  Create list indicators  Configure the list indicator  Set up connections for the list indicator  How the list indicator works at run time  bounding box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1584,
    "title": "Set up connections for the list indicator (Connections tab)",
    "url": "60351.htm",
    "text": "To set up tags and expressions for the list indicator  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the indicator to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag or expression to this connection:  Indicator  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. If you assign this connection, the object does not display the value sent to the Value connection until it receives a response from the Indicator connection.  If you assign a tag, the application reads the value of the tag at the data source, assigns this value to the connection, and updates the object in the display to reflect the state corresponding to the value or least significant bit value (depending on the trigger type).  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the state corresponding to the value or least significant bit value (depending on the trigger type).  See also  Configure the list indicator (General tab)  Set up states for the list indicator (States tab)  How the list indicator works at run time  Example: Use a list indicator  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1585,
    "title": "How the list indicator works at run time",
    "url": "60353.htm",
    "text": "The list indicator displays a configured list of states for a process or operation, and highlights the current state. The current state is the state in the list whose value matches the Indicator connection value at the data source (if the Trigger type is set to Value in the General tab) or the state whose value matches the value of the least significant bit set high in the Indicator connection at the data source (if the Trigger type is set to LSB).  Tip:  If the value (or the least significant bit value) of the Indicator connection does not match any of the configured state values for the list indicator, none of the states are highlighted.  If an array tag is assigned to the object's Value connection, and the Trigger type is set to Value, none of the states are highlighted. An error message will be shown.  Use controls  If the Indicator connection value is a floating point value, the application rounds the value to the nearest integer to determine the state to display.  Open graphic displays  When you open a display at run time, the application reads the Indicator connection value and updates the display based on the value and the trigger type.  If there are more states than fit in the list, the application scrolls the list to display the current state.  See also  Create list indicators  Configure the list indicator (General tab)  Set up states for the list indicator (States tab)  Set up controls for the list indicator  Causes of run-time errors for the list indicator  Example: Use a list indicator  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1586,
    "title": "Example: Use a list indicator",
    "url": "60357.htm",
    "text": "In this example, the list indicator monitors the Indicator connection to display the mode of operation of a blower. The blower can operate manually or automatically, or it can be turned off.  Create a list indicator with three states.  Set the caption to \"Off\" for State 0, \"Manual\" for State 1, and \"Automatic\" for State 2.  The application reads the tag you assign to the Indicator connection and updates the indicator&#8217;s state when the value changes. This state change enables the current operation mode to be shown.  See also  Create list indicators  Configure the list indicator  Set up states for the list indicator  Set up controls for the list indicator  How the list indicator works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the list indicator  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1587,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the list indicator",
    "url": "60355.htm",
    "text": "At run time these circumstances produce these error conditions:  Invalid values  If the Indicator connection value does not match any of the state values for the indicator, none of the states in the list are highlighted.  Unassigned connections  If the Indicator connection is not assigned, none of the states in the list are highlighted.  See also  Create list indicators  Configure the list indicator (General tab)  Set up states for the list indicator (States tab)  Set up controls for the list indicator (Connections tab)  How the list indicator works at run time  Example: Use a list indicator  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1588,
    "title": "Create bar graphs",
    "url": "60756.htm",
    "text": "Use the bar graph object to show a control&#8217;s value at the data source. The bar graph increases or decreases in size to show the changing value. You can configure thresholds for the bar graph to alert the operator to error conditions.  To create a bar graph  In the Graphics Display editor, select Gauge and Graph > Bar Graph from the Objects menu.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the bar graph to be.  Double-click the bar graph to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the bar graph looks, its thresholds, and its tags.  See also  Set up general properties for a bar graph  Set up connections for the bar graph  How the bar graph works at run time  Example: Use a bar graph  ",
    "keywords": {
      "graph": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1589,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a bar graph",
    "url": "60760.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Bar Graph Properties dialog box to set up how a bar graph looks.  To set up general options for a bar graph  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  See also  Create bar graphs  Options on the General tab of the Bar Graph Properties dialog box  Set up connections for the bar graph  How the bar graph works at run time  Example: Using a bar graph  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1590,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Bar Graph Properties dialog box",
    "url": "329569.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Bar Graph Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Fill style  Select whether the bar graph background is solid or gradient. If you select Gradient, the bar graph's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Fill color  This box shows the current fill color for the bar graph.  Click it to select another color. If the fill style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Bar graph settings  Minimum value  Type the value required to empty the bar graph. If the Value connection is at or below this value, the bar graph is empty.  Maximum value  Type the value required to completely fill the bar graph. If the Value connection is at or above this value, the bar graph is full.  Fill direction  Select the direction for filling the bar graph.  Thresholds  Number of thresholds  Select the number of thresholds for the object. Select 0 if you do not want to use thresholds.  Threshold type  Select Value to set up thresholds using an absolute value.  Select Percentage to set up thresholds using percentages of the range between the graph's minimum and maximum values.  Threshold 1 value  Type the value or percentage for the first threshold.  Fill color  This box shows the current fill color for the section of the bar graph that is at or above the first threshold and below the second threshold (if enabled). Click it to select another color. If the fill style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Blink  Check this box if you want the section of the bar graph that is at or above the first threshold (and below the second threshold, if enabled) to blink at run time. The section of the bar graph blinks twice per second.  Threshold 2 value  Type the value or percentage for the second threshold.  Fill color  This box shows the current fill color for the section of the bar graph that is at or above the second threshold. Click it to select another color. If the fill style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Blink  Check this box if you want the section of the bar graph that is at or above the second threshold to blink at run time. The section of the bar graph blinks twice per second.  See also  Create bar graphs  Configuring the gradient fill  Set up general properties for a bar graph object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1591,
    "title": "Set up connections for the bar graph (Connections tab)",
    "url": "60763.htm",
    "text": "To set up tags and expressions for the bar graph  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the bar graph to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag or expression to this connection:  Value  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. The application reads the value of the connection at the data source and changes the fill level on the bar graph to reflect the value.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the value.  See also  Create bar graphs  Configure the bar graph (General tab)  How the bar graph works at run time  Example: Using a bar graph  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1592,
    "title": "How the bar graph works at run time",
    "url": "60758.htm",
    "text": "The fill level in the bar graph increases and decreases to reflect the Value connection value at the data source. The bar graph&#8217;s behavior at run time also depends on how you set up thresholds and controls.  Use thresholds  If you set up thresholds for the bar graph, when the Value connection value is at or above the threshold value, the color of the fill changes (if you set up different fill colors on the General tab). You can also configure the section of the bar graph at or above the threshold level to blink.  Open graphic displays  When you open a display at run time, the application reads the Value connection value and updates the bar graph based on the value.  See also  Create bar graphs  Configure the bar graph (General tab)  Set up controls for the bar graph  Example: Use a bar graph  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1593,
    "title": "Example: Use a bar graph",
    "url": "60765.htm",
    "text": "In this example, the bar graph monitors the speed of a conveyor.  Create a bar graph and assign a tag to the Value connection.  Change the number of thresholds to 2.  The application reads the Value connection and updates the bar graph by filling the bar graph in the fill direction.  When the Value connection goes above the threshold 1 value, the fill color changes to the threshold 1 fill color.  When the Value connection goes above the threshold 2 value, the fill color changes to the threshold 2 fill color.  See also  Create bar graphs  How the bar graph works at run time  Configure the bar graph  Set up controls for the bar graph  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1594,
    "title": "Create gauges",
    "url": "60634.htm",
    "text": "The gauge is a semi-circle with a needle and range of values that represents a traditional meter or dial.  Use the gauge object to display a control&#8217;s value at the data source. The gauge&#8217;s needle moves around the dial to show the changing value. You can configure thresholds for the gauge to alert the operator to error conditions.  To create a gauge  In the Graphics Display editor, select Gauge and Graph > Gauge from the Objects menu.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the gauge to be.  Double-click the gauge to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the gauge looks, its values and thresholds, and its tags.  See also  Set up general properties for a gauge  Set up values and thresholds for a gauge  Set up connections for the gauge  How the gauge works at run time  Example: Using a gauge  ",
    "keywords": {
      "gauge": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1595,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a gauge",
    "url": "60640.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Gauge Properties dialog box to set up how a gauge looks.  To set up general options for a gauge  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Display tab to specify the values and thresholds for the object.  See also  Create gauges  Options on the General tab of the Gauge Properties dialog box  Set up values and thresholds for a gauge  Set up connections for the gauge  How the gauge works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1596,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Gauge Properties dialog box",
    "url": "329574.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Gauge Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Line style  Select the line style. If you select a style other than Solid, the line width must be 1 pixel.  Dash-Dot and Dash-Dot-Dot show as Dot on the PanelView Plus family terminals.  The line properties apply to the dial outline and tick marks.  Line width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object's line. Any line style other than solid must have a width of 1 pixel.  Sweep style  Specify whether to color the area behind the needle as the value changes.  Select Solid fill or Gradient fill to use the fill color to color the portion of the gauge behind the needle that has a value less than or equal to the Value connection.  Select Point to point the needle at the value of the Value connection.  Needle width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the gauge&#8217;s needle.  Major ticks  Select the number of major ticks on the scale. You must use at least two major ticks (one for each end of the dial).  Minor ticks  Select the number of minor ticks on the scale. This number of ticks appears between each major tick.  Font  Select the font to use for the legends.  Specify whether to use legends on the Display tab.  Size  Select the font size to use for the legends.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the legends, if required.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Fill color  This box shows the current fill color for the gauge. Click it to select another color. If the sweep style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill. This color is not used if you select point for the sweep style.  If you specify thresholds for the gauge, you can also assign a fill color to each threshold on the Display tab.  Needle color  This box shows the current needle color for the gauge. Click it to select another color.  Fore color  This box shows the current color for the gauge's scale, that is, the curved line and the ticks that form the dial shape. Click it to select another color.  See also  Create gauges  Configure the gradient fill  legend  Set up general properties for a gauge object   "
  },
  {
    "id": 1597,
    "title": "Set up values and thresholds for a gauge",
    "url": "60644.htm",
    "text": "Use the Display tab to set up values and thresholds for a gauge.  To set up values and thresholds for a gauge  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the gauge to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Display tab.  Specify these properties:  Minimum and maximum values  Legends, if any  Thresholds, if any  See also  Create gauges  Set up general properties for a gauge  Options on the Display tab of the Gauge Properties dialog box  Set up connections for the gauge  How the gauge works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1598,
    "title": "Options on the Display tab of the Gauge Properties dialog box",
    "url": "331568.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Display tab of the Gauge Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Value settings  Minimum value  Type the lowest value for the gauge. If the Value connection is at or below this value, the needle is at the left end of the dial.  Maximum value  Type the highest value for the gauge. If the Value connection is at or above this value, the needle is at the right   end of the dial.  Legend settings  Legends are captions beside each major tick mark. The caption corresponds to the value at the part of the dial where the tick mark is located.  Show legend  Check this box if you want to include legends on the gauge object.  Digits after decimal  Select the number of digits to show after the decimal point.  Legend color  This box shows the current legend color. Click it to select another color.  Thresholds settings  Number of thresholds  Select the number of thresholds for the object. Select 0 if you do not want to use thresholds.  Threshold type  Select Value to set up thresholds using an absolute value.  Select Percentage to set up thresholds using percentages of the range between the graph's minimum and maximum values.  Threshold 1 value  Type the value or percentage for the first threshold.  Fill color  This box shows the current fill color for the section of the dial that is at or above the first threshold and below the second threshold (if enabled). Click it to select another color. If the sweep style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  This color is not used if you select point for the sweep style on the General tab.  Blink  Check this box if you want the section of the dial that is at or above the first threshold (and below the second threshold, if enabled) to blink at run time. The section of the dial blinks twice per second.  Threshold 2 value  Type the value or percentage for the second threshold.  Fill color  This box shows the current fill color for the section of the dial that is at or above the second threshold. Click it to select another color. If the sweep style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  This color is not used if you select point for the sweep style (on the General tab).  Blink  Check this box if you want the section of the dial that is at or above the second threshold to blink at run time. The section of the dial blinks twice per second.  See also  Create gauges  Configure the gauge appearance (General tab)  Set up values and thresholds for the gauge (Display tab)  Set up controls for the gauge (Connections tab)  Configure the gradient fill  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1599,
    "title": "Set up connections for the gauge (Connections tab)",
    "url": "60646.htm",
    "text": "To set up tags and expressions for the gauge  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the gauge to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag or expression to this connection:  Value  A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. The application reads the value of the connection at the data source and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the value.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the value.  See also  Configure the gauge appearance (General tab)  Set up values and thresholds for the gauge (Display tab)  How the gauge works at run time  Example: Using a gauge  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1600,
    "title": "How the gauge works at run time",
    "url": "60638.htm",
    "text": "The gauge&#8217;s needle moves around the dial to reflect the Value connection value at the data source. If you set the sweep style to Fill (on the General tab), the color of the dial behind the needle fills as the needle moves.  The gauge&#8217;s behavior at run time also depends on how you set up thresholds and controls.  Use thresholds  If you set up thresholds for the gauge, when the Value connection value is at or above the threshold value, the color of the fill changes (if you set up different fill colors for thresholds on the Display tab). You can also configure the section of the gauge at or above the threshold level to blink.  Open graphic displays  When you open a display at run time, the application reads the Value connection value and updates the gauge based on the value.  See also  Create gauges  Configure the gauge appearance (General tab)  Set up values and thresholds for the gauge (Display tab)  Set up controls for the gauge (Connections tab)  Example: Use a gauge  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1601,
    "title": "Example: Using a gauge",
    "url": "60636.htm",
    "text": "In this example, the gauge monitors the speed of a conveyor.  Create a gauge and assign a tag to the Value connection.  Change the sweep style to fill and the number of thresholds to 2.  The application reads the Value connection and updates the gauge by moving the needle and filling the gauge to the correct value.  When the Value connection goes above the threshold 1 value, the fill color changes to the threshold 1 fill color.  When the Value connection goes above the threshold 2 value, the fill color changes to the threshold 2 fill color.  See also  Create gauges  How the gauge works at run time  Configure the gauge appearance  Set up values and thresholds for the gauge  Set up controls for the gauge  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1602,
    "title": "Create scales",
    "url": "60652.htm",
    "text": "Use the scale object to draw a line with tick marks on it.  The scale can be used as a ruler or measuring guide. For example, you can place the scale next to a bar graph, with text labels at the top and bottom, to illustrate the range of the bar graph.  To draw a scale  In the Graphics Display editor, select Gauge and Graph > Scale from the Objects menu.  Press the Mouse button and drag the mouse diagonally to draw the scale.  When the scale is the desired size, release the button.  Double-click the scale to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how you want the scale to look.  See also  Set up general properties for a scale  Example: Using a scale  ",
    "keywords": {
      "scale": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1603,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a scale",
    "url": "60656.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Scale Properties dialog box to set up how a scale looks.  To set up general options for a scale object  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  See also  Create scales  Example: Using a scale  Use drawing objects  Options on the General tab of the Scale Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1604,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Scale Properties dialog box",
    "url": "329583.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Scale Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Line style  Select the line style. If you select a style other than Solid, the line width must be 1 pixel.  Dash-Dot and Dash-Dot-Dot show as Dot on the PanelView Plus family terminals.  Line width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object's line. Any line style other than solid must have a width of 1 pixel.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Transparent. The bounding box for the scale is not filled in and any objects behind the scale show through.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Fore color  This box shows the color for the object&#8217;s line. Click it to select another color.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  Scale Setup  Tick direction  Select the tick direction. For example, if you select Up, the ticks appear on the top side of the scale.  Major ticks  Select the number of major ticks on the scale. You must use at least two major ticks (one for the first tick and one for the last tick).  Minor ticks  Select the number of minor ticks on the scale. This number of ticks appears between each major tick.  See also  bounding box  Create scales  Example: Using a scale  Configure the gradient fill  Set up general properties for a scale object   "
  },
  {
    "id": 1605,
    "title": "Example: Using a scale",
    "url": "60654.htm",
    "text": "In this example, the scale object helps in visually determining the speed of a conveyor as depicted by a bar graph.  Create a scale and change the number of minor ticks to 9.  Set the back style to transparent.  Place the scale on top of a bar graph.  As the bar graph fill changes, the value it represents can be determined by using the scale ticks as markers.  Tip:  If the scale disappears behind the bar graph, from the Arrange menu, use Bring to Front.  See also  Create scales  Configure the scale appearance  Use drawing objects  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1606,
    "title": "How the RecipePlus objects work at run time",
    "url": "60851.htm",
    "text": "The RecipePlus table is used to show and edit recipes at run time. It works with the RecipePlus selector, which selects a recipe file and unit to be acted upon, and the RecipePlus buttons, which determine what operation will be performed with the selected unit. The Save and Restore operations work on the table object.  On a graphics display, create a RecipePlus table, a RecipePlus selector, a RecipePlus button for the Save operation, and another RecipePlus button for the Restore operation.  To see a recipe file in the table, select the recipe file to display and press the Restore button. Once the recipe is shown in the table, you can edit the ingredients. To save the changes, press the Save button. To show another recipe, select it in the selector and press Restore.  Restore a recipe  When a recipe file is selected in the selector and a button with the Restore operation assigned to it is pressed, this is what happens:  the selected recipe file and the associated recipe unit (tag set and data set) are opened in the RecipePlus table object.  the recipe ingredients appear in the Ingredient column.  the tag values in the tag set appear in the Current column.  the values in the data set appear in the Recipe column.  if the value in the Current column is different than the value in the Recipe column, an X appears in the Compare column.  the tag names in the tag set appear in the Tag Name column.  the status bar at the bottom of the table displays the recipe file name, the recipe unit name, the number of visible ingredients and the total number of ingredients.  Edit an ingredient  Unless the View only property is checked in the Recipe tab, operators can make changes to the data value of a recipe ingredient.  To change the value in the Recipe column, select the ingredient row in the table and press Enter.  If the ingredient type is Numeric, an on-screen keypad appears. Type the new value into the scratchpad and press the Enter key to write the new value to the table.  If the ingredient type is String, an on-screen keyboard appears. Type the new string and press Enter to write the new string to the table.  Save a recipe  When a recipe unit is selected in the selector and a button with the Save operation assigned to it is pressed, this is what happens:  all the changes made in the Recipe column are saved back to the data set of the current recipe unit.  the recipe file is updated on the storage card on the terminal and (if in the HMI project) in the runtime application *.mer file.  Use buttons with the RecipePlus table and selector  The following key buttons work with the table and selector objects:  Move Up  Move Down  Page Up  Page Down  Home  End  The following terminal keypad or external keyboard keys work with the table and selector objects:  Cursor Up  Cursor Down  Page Up  Page Down  Home  End  See also  Create a RecipePlus table  Create a RecipePlus Selector  Create a RecipePlus button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1607,
    "title": "Create a RecipePlus table",
    "url": "60853.htm",
    "text": "The RecipePlus table object lists the ingredients in the recipe file most recently selected in the RecipePlus selector and restored. It can also be used to edit the data values for ingredients and to save those edited values to the recipe file.  The table displays:  the name of each ingredient in the recipe (Ingredient name column)  the current value of each ingredient in the tag associated with the ingredient (Current value column)  the data value assigned to each ingredient (Recipe value column)  an X if the ingredient value is different than the tag value when the restore occurred (Compare status column)  the tag name associated with each ingredient (Tag name column)  the recipe file name, the recipe unit name, the number of visible ingredients and the total number of ingredients (status bar at the bottom)  To create a RecipePlus table  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > RecipePlus > Table.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle of the general size and in the general location that you want the table to be.  Double-click the table to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties tabs, specify how the table looks, how it will show recipes, and its common properties.  Tip:  There can only be one RecipePlus table on a graphic display. Attempts to add a second one produce an error message.  See also  Create a RecipePlus button  Create a RecipePlus Selector  Configure the table (General tab)  Set up recipe properties for the table (Recipe tab)  How the RecipePlus objects work at runtime  ",
    "keywords": {
      "RecipePlus": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1608,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a RecipePlus table",
    "url": "60868.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the RecipePlus Table Properties dialog box to set up how a RecipePlus table looks.  To set up general options for a RecipePlus table  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  See also  Create a RecipePlus table  Options on the General tab of the RecipePlus Table Properties dialog box  Set up recipe properties for a RecipePlus table  How the RecipePlus objects work at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1609,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the RecipePlus Table Properties dialog box",
    "url": "329588.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the RecipePlus Table Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Fore color  This box shows the color of the text shown on the object. Click it to select another color.  Header back color  This box shows the current color for the heading bar at the top of the object. Click it to select another color.  Header fore color  This box shows the current color for the text in the heading bar at the top of the object. Click it to select another color.  Selection back color  This box shows the color for the highlight bar. Click it to select another color. The highlight bar indicates the currently selected ingredient at run time.  Selection fore color  This box shows the color for the caption on the highlighted ingredient. Click it to select another color.  Footer back color  This box shows the color for the background of the text at the bottom of the object. Click it to select another color.  Footer fore color  This box shows the color for the text at the bottom of the object. Click it to select another color.  Grid color  This box shows the current color of the grid lines on the object. Click it to select another color.  Text  The text settings apply to the numeric values in the display.  Font  Select the font to use for the text.  Size  Select the font size to use for the text.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the text, if required.  Other  Key navigation  Select this check box to allow the user to navigate to the object using the keyboard and give the object input focus.  Wrap around  Select this check box if you want the list to wrap from the end of the list to the beginning when scrolling down, and from the beginning of the list to the end when scrolling up.  See also  Create a RecipePlus table  Configure the gradient fill  Set up general properties for a RecipePlus table object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1610,
    "title": "Set up recipe properties for a RecipePlus table object",
    "url": "60870.htm",
    "text": "Use the Recipe tab of the RecipePlus Table Properties dialog box to set up recipe properties for the object.  To specify what columns will be shown and how they will appear  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the recipe selector to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Recipes tab.  Select and define the table's columns.  Specify whether a header and/or footer will be shown.  Specify whether the table will accept user input or will be view-only.  See also  Create a RecipePlus table  Set up general properties for a RecipePlus table object  Options on the Recipe tab of the RecipePlus Table Properties dialog box  Create a RecipePlus button  Create a RecipePlus selector  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1611,
    "title": "Options on the Recipe tab of the RecipePlus Table Properties dialog box",
    "url": "331572.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Recipe tab of the RecipePlus Table Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Columns  Specify which columns to use, their width, and header text, if any.  Select a column  Select a column to be edited:  Ingredient name. Shows the name of the recipe ingredient. This text does not support language switching at run time.  Current value. Shows the current value in the tag associated with the ingredient.  Recipe value. Shows the recipe's data value for the ingredient.  Compare status. If the tag value and the recipe value differ, an X appears in this column to alert the operator to the difference.  Tag name. Shows the name of the tag associated with the ingredient in the tag set.  Display column  Select this check box if you want the selected column to appear on the object.  Width  Type the width in pixels of the selected column. The range is 0 - 1000.  Header text  Type the text to show for the header of the selected column.  Display  Choose whether or not to show headers and/or footers for the table at run time.  Display Header  Select this check box to show column headers on the object.  Display Footer  Check this box to show the footer on the table.  List settings  Set how many lines each recipe ingredient will use, and how text will wrap in the table cells.  Lines per item  From the drop-down list, select the number of lines each ingredient will use in the table. Range is from 1 to 10.  Word wrap  Select this check box if you want the text to continue on the next line at the beginning of a new word.  If this check box is cleared, the text continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  User Input  Specify whether the table will be accessible to user input, or be view-only.  View only  Check this box if you want the table to be view-only. If the box is not checked, the operator will be able to make changes to the table.  See also  Create a RecipePlus table  Set up recipe properties for a RecipePlus table object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1612,
    "title": "Create a RecipePlus button",
    "url": "60855.htm",
    "text": "Use the RecipePlus button to initiate RecipePlus operations at run time. Each button can perform one of the following operations:  Download writes the ingredient values in the data set of the recipe unit currently selected in the selector object to the tags in the unit's tag set  Upload reads the tag values in the tag set of the recipe unit currently selected in the selector object and saves those values to the unit's data set  Upload and create reads the tag values in the tag set of the unit currently selected in the selector object and creates a new recipe unit by writing those values to a new data set  Save saves the values in a recipe table object to a recipe file  Restore loads the values from a recipe unit to a recipe table object  Delete deletes the recipe unit currently selected in the selector object  Rename renames the recipe unit currently selected in the selector object  The buttons work with the RecipePlus selector object and the RecipePlus table object. Download, upload, upload and create, delete, and rename operations work on the recipe currently selected in the selector. Restore and save operations work with the RecipePlus table object.  Create a separate button on the graphic display for each operation.  Tip:  If a display containing a RecipePlus table is closed while the recipe system is restoring a recipe, the restore operation will be canceled.  To create a RecipePlus button object  In the Graphics editor, choose RecipePlus from the Objects menu, and then choose Button.  Drag the mouse to draw and position a rectangle of the general size and in the general location that you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties tabs, specify:  how the button looks  whether it beeps when pressed  what action it will perform  the caption or image to use on the button  its common properties  See also  Configure the button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  Create a RecipePlus Selector  Create a RecipePlus table  How the RecipePlus objects work at runtime  ",
    "keywords": {
      "RecipePlus": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1613,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a RecipePlus button",
    "url": "60857.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the RecipePlus Button Properties dialog box to set up how a RecipePlus button looks.  To set up general options for a RecipePlus button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create a RecipePlus button  Set up a caption and image for a button  Create a RecipePlus Selector  Create a RecipePlus table  Options on the General tab of the RecipePlus Button Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1614,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the RecipePlus Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330153.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the RecipePlus Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  Action  Select the recipe operation that the button will initiate when pressed at run time. Available options are:  Download  Upload  Upload and Create  Restore  Save  Delete  Rename  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Create a RecipePlus button  Create a RecipePlus Selector  Configure the gradient fill  Set up general properties for a RecipePlus button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1615,
    "title": "Create a RecipePlus selector",
    "url": "60861.htm",
    "text": "The RecipePlus selector is a list of recipe files and recipe units available in the application. Use the selector to select from the list of recipes and their associated units. When a recipe is selected, it becomes the \"current\" recipe, and becomes the object of subsequent recipe operations, such as upload, download, restore, etc., performed on that display.  When the selector object is selected, the operator can scroll through the list and select recipe files using key button objects, or by using the arrow keys and the Enter key on a keypad or external keyboard. Key button objects can also be linked directly to the selector so that they will work whether the selector is selected or not.  To create a RecipePlus selector  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > RecipePlus > Selector.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle of the general size and in the general location that you want the selector to be.  Double-click the selector to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties tabs, specify how the selector looks, how it will show recipes, and its common properties.  Tip:  There can only be one RecipePlus selector on a graphic display. Attempts to add a second one produce an error message.  See also  Configure the selector (General tab)  Set up recipe properties (Recipe tab)  How the RecipePlus objects work at runtime  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1616,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a RecipePlus selector",
    "url": "60863.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the RecipePlus Selector Properties dialog box to set up how a RecipePlus selector looks.  To set up general options for a RecipePlus selector  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  See also  Create a RecipePlus Selector  Options on the General tab of the Selector Properties dialog box  Set up recipe properties for the selector  How the RecipePlus objects work at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1617,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the RecipePlus Selector Properties dialog box",
    "url": "329964.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the RecipePlus Selector Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Fore color  This box shows the color of the text shown on the object. Click it to select another color.  Header back color  This box shows the current color for the heading bar at the top of the object. Click it to select another color.  Header fore color  This box shows the current color for the text in the heading bar at the top of the object. Click it to select another color.  Selection back color  This box shows the color for the highlight bar. Click it to select another color. The highlight bar indicates the currently selected ingredient at run time.  Selection fore color  This box shows the color for the caption on the highlighted ingredient. Click it to select another color.  Text  The text settings apply to the numeric values in the display.  Font  Select the font to use for the text.  Size  Select the font size to use for the text.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the text, if required.  Other  Key navigation  Select this check box to allow the user to navigate to the object using the keyboard and give the object input focus.  Wrap around  Select this check box if you want the list to wrap from the end of the list to the beginning when scrolling down, and from the beginning of the list to the end when scrolling up.  See also  Create a RecipePlus Selector  Configure the gradient fill  Set up general properties for a RecipePlus selector object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1618,
    "title": "Set up recipe properties for the selector",
    "url": "60865.htm",
    "text": "Use the Recipe tab of the RecipePlus Selector Properties dialog box to set up recipe properties for the object.  To specify how recipes will be shown in the Recipe Selector  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the recipe selector to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Recipes tab.  Specify whether headers will be shown.  Specify the width of each of the selectors columns.  Define the header text, if any.  See also  Create a RecipePlus Selector  Set up general properties for a RecipePlus selector  Options on the Recipe tab of the RecipePlus Selector Properties dialog box  Create a RecipePlus table  Create a RecipePlus button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1619,
    "title": "Options on the Recipe tab of the RecipePlus Selector Properties dialog box",
    "url": "331574.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Recipe tab of the RecipePlus Selector Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Column  Specify whether the selector will show a header, what the header text will be, and the column width.  Display header  Select this check box to show column headers on the object.  Select a column  Select a column to be edited:  Recipe. Shows the name of the recipe file.  Unit. Shows the name of the recipe unit associated with the recipe file.  Width  Type the width in pixels of the selected column.  Header text  Type the text to show for the header of the selected column.  List settings  Lines per item  From the drop-down list, select the number of lines each recipe/unit row will use in the selector. Range is from 1 to 10.  Word wrap  Select this check box if you want the text to continue on the next line at the beginning of a new word.  If this check box is cleared, the text continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  See also  Create a RecipePlus Selector  Set up recipe properties for the selector  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1620,
    "title": "Create Key buttons",
    "url": "60301.htm",
    "text": "At run time the operator can use Key buttons to move the cursor and make selections on certain objects. You can use Key buttons with these graphic objects:  Alarm list  Control list selector  Display list selector  Trend  Audit trail list  These are the types of Key buttons:  Move Left moves to the left.  Move Right moves to the right.  Move Up moves up one item in the list.  Move Down moves down one item in the list.  Page Up moves up one page in the list.  Page Down moves down one page in the list.  Home moves to the top of the page that&#8217;s currently shown.  End moves to the bottom of the page that&#8217;s currently shown.  Backspace moves back to the previously highlighted item.  Enter selects the currently highlighted item.  You can configure different combinations of Key buttons for different objects. For example, trend objects recognize only Home, End and the four Move keys.  Backspace works with the control list selector. If a Numeric Input Cursor Point is selected, the Backspace or Enter key, when clicked or pressed, opens the keypad. To see which objects on your display work with a particular button, open the button's Properties dialog box or Property Panel and click the Object Browser in the Linked object property.  Add and configure each Key button separately.  Tip:  You can set up auto repeat for Move Up/Down/Left/Right, Page Up, and Page Down key buttons. Set up auto repeat on the Timing tab.  To create a Key button  In the Graphics Display editor, choose Key from the Objects menu, and then choose the type of Key button to add.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the Key button to be.  Double-click the Key button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify the how the Key button looks, the caption or image to use on the Key button, and (for Move Up, Move Down, Page Up, and Page Down buttons only) auto repeat.  See also  How the Key button works at run time  Configure the Key button  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up auto repeat for the Key button  Causes of run-time errors for the Key button  ",
    "keywords": {
      "key": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1621,
    "title": "Set up general properties for Key buttons",
    "url": "60399.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Key Button Properties dialog box to set up how a Key button looks.  To set up general options for a Key button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  If you choose to send the button press to a linked object, click the Browse button (...) in the Linked object field to open the Object Browser and select the object to link to.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create Key buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up auto repeat for the Key button  Options on the General tab of the Key Button Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1622,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Key Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330169.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Key Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  Send press to  Select whether the button press will be sent to whatever object currently has the focus, or to a specific object linked to the button.  Linked object  Specify the object to which the button press will be sent if the Send press to option is Linked object.  See also  bounding box  Create Key buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Configure the gradient fill  Set up general properties for a Key button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1623,
    "title": "Set up Timing tab for Key buttons",
    "url": "60397.htm",
    "text": "If you set up auto repeat, when the operator presses and holds down the Key button, repeated button presses are registered until the operator releases the button. You can set up auto repeat for the Move Up, Move Down, Move Left, Move Right, Page Up, and Page Down key buttons.  To set up auto repeat for a Key button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Timing tab.  Specify the auto repeat settings to use with the Key button.  See also  Create Key buttons  Configure the Key button  Set up a caption and image for a button  How the Key button works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1624,
    "title": "Options on the Timing tab of the Key Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "332334.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Timing tab of a Key button's Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Auto repeat rate  Specifies the number of times per second a button press is registered when the button goes into auto repeat mode.  Select 0 if you don&#8217;t want to use auto repeat.  Auto repeat delay  Specifies the length of time the button has to be pressed and held down before auto repeat starts.  See also  Create Key buttons  Configure the Key button  Set up a caption and image for a button  How the Key button works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1625,
    "title": "How the Key button works at run time",
    "url": "60403.htm",
    "text": "The Key button&#8217;s behavior at run time depends on which other objects appear on the display with the Key button, and whether the Key button's Send Press To property is set to Object With Focus or Linked Object.  Key buttons do not work with all objects. If a Key button's Send Press To property is set to Object with Focus, but the object with focus on the display does not work with the Key button, when the operator presses a Key button, nothing happens.  If a Key button whose Send Press To property is set to Object with Focus is pressed, and there is no selected object, nothing happens.  See also  Causes of run-time errors for the Key button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1626,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the Key button",
    "url": "60405.htm",
    "text": "If a Key button's Send Press To property is set to Linked Object, and the object specified in the Linked Object property does not exist, or is not a valid object for the Key button to work with, when the button is pressed, the application logs an error to the diagnostics.  For details on the error conditions that occur when a Key button function is sent to the selected object, see the help for the object you&#8217;re using the Key button with control list selectors and display list selectors.  See also  Create Key buttons  Causes of run-time errors for the control list selector  Causes of run-time errors for the display list selector  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1627,
    "title": "Create User Management buttons",
    "url": "132837.htm",
    "text": "These buttons work for any user that can access them, except DEFAULT user. DEFAULT user cannot operate these User Management buttons.  HMI designers must be careful to use security to limit access to the User Management buttons in the application(s).  The administrator mentioned below is any user that has access to the display(s) containing the User Management buttons.  Click the links for more information.  Add User/Group button  The administrator can use the Add User/Group button to add a FactoryTalk security user, a Windows-linked user, or a Windows-linked group to the current running application.  A newly added user does not belong to any user group and has no run-time security code. The user cannot log in the system before the user is moved to an existing group that is configured with run-time security code(s).  On PanelView Plus 6, and PanelView Plus 7 terminals, there is a five-minute threshold when adding a Windows-linked user, or a Windows-linked user group.  When you add a Windows-linked user, or a Windows-linked user group for the first time, a window prompts you to enter an authorized user name and password.  Within five minutes after a Windows-linked user, or a Windows-linked user group is successfully added, you can add another Windows-linked user, or Windows-linked user group without entering an authorized user name and password.  Beyond five minutes after a Windows-linked user, or a Windows-linked user group is successfully added, a window will prompt you to enter an authorized user name and password again before you can add another Windows-linked user, or Windows-linked user group.  Delete User/Group button  The administrator can use the Delete User/Group button to delete a FactoryTalk security user, a Windows-linked user, or a Windows-linked group from the current running application.  The last FactoryTalk administrator, and current logged-in user cannot be deleted.  If a Windows-linked user is deleted, the user will be removed from the current running application, but will not be removed from Windows.  Modify Group Membership button  The administrator can use the Modify Group Membership button to change a FactoryTalk user, a Windows-linked user, or a Windows-linked group membership in the current running application.  When a user is added to a group, the user will inherit the A-P security code(s) of the group.   When a user is deleted from a group, the user will not have the A-P security code(s) of the group  If a user is a member of multiple groups  The user will inherit the A-P security code(s) shared by the multiple groups. For example, if a user belongs to both Group One and Group Two; Group One has the security codes of A, B, C, and Group Two has the security codes of B, C, D; the user will only inherit the security codes of B, C.  When the user is removed from one group, the user is still a member of other groups.  Unlock User button  The administrator can use the Unlock User button to unlock a FactoryTalk user account, which has been locked.  When a FactoryTalk user exceeds incorrect password login attempts, the user account will be locked. When the user account is locked, the user cannot log in to the system even with correct password before the user account is unlocked.  You can adjust the account lockout threshold and account lockout auto reset settings in FactoryTalk Security Policy Settings. For more information on FactoryTalk Security Policy Settings, refer to \"Setting up security policies\" in FactoryTalk Help.  You cannot use this button to unlock a Windows-linked user. Only a Windows Domain administrator can unlock a Windows-linked user from a domain computer.  Enable User button  The administrator can use the Enable User button to enable a disabled FactoryTalk user account from the current running application.  When a disabled user is enabled, the user can log in the system again.  You cannot use this button to enable a Windows-linked user. Only a Windows Domain administrator can enable a Windows-linked user from a domain computer.  Disable User button  The administrator can use the Disable User button to disable a FactoryTalk user account from the current running application.  When a user is disabled, the user cannot log in the system.  You cannot use this button to disable a Windows-linked user. Only a Windows Domain administrator can disable a Windows-linked user from a domain computer.  Login button  When the operator presses the Login button at run time, the Login dialog box opens. To log in to the system, the operator is either configured with run-time security code(s), or belong to a group that is configured with run-time security code(s). If security is set up, the operator must also have a password.  Only the users who are configured in ME run-time security, or belong to the group that is configured in ME run-time security can log in.  If a user account is disabled, or locked, the user cannot successfully log in before the user account is enabled or unlocked.  If a PanelVeiw Plus 6 or PanelView Plus 7 terminal's time is not synchronized with the domain controller, domain users cannot log in on the terminal before the terminal's time is synchronized with the domain controller.  If you only add a user&#8217;s default primary group, Domain Users, to Runtime Security, user authentication fails via Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) on terminals. Because the members attribute cannot be populated with the primary group.  To log in a domain user successfully on terminals, do one of the following:  Add the domain user directly to Runtime Security at design time.  Create a domain group (non-primary), add the domain user to the group, and add the group directly to Runtime Security at design time.  Create a FactoryTalk group at design time. Add members, FactoryTalk users, domain users, or domain groups (non-primary) to the FactoryTalk group at design time and run time.  When a user logs in, the previous user is logged out.  If a user's password has expired and must change password at first logon, or the user's password will be expired, when the user logs in, the change password dialog box opens to prompt the user to change password.  If a Windows-linked user belongs to a Distribution type Windows-linked user group, the user cannot log in to the running application on desktops. To log in the user, change the group type of the Windows-linked user group to Security.  Logout button  When a logged in user presses the Logout button, the user will log out of the system.  When a user logs out, the DEFAULT user is logged in.  Password button  At run time, the Password button allows the currently logged-in user to change the current password, or the logged-in administrator to change any FactoryTalk user password.  The passwords for Windows-linked users can only be changed in Windows.  The passwords for domain users can only be changed on domain servers.  Change User Properties button  ",
    "keywords": {
      "user management": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1628,
    "title": "Create Add User/Group buttons",
    "url": "132845.htm",
    "text": "To create an Add User/Group button  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > User Management > Add User/Group.   Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.   Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks.  See also  Configure the Add User/Group button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  Use the Add User/Group Account dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "user management": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1629,
    "title": "Set up general properties for an Add User/Group button",
    "url": "132851.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Add User/Group Button Properties dialog box to set up how an Add User/Group button looks.  To set up general options for an Add User/Group button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create Add User/Group buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Use the Add User/Group Account dialog box  Options on the General tab of the Add User/Group Button Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1630,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Add User/Group Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330184.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Add User/Group Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the object's top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Configuring the gradient fill  Create Add User/Group buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up general properties for an Add User/Group button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1631,
    "title": "Use the Add User/Group Account dialog box",
    "url": "133776.htm",
    "text": "To add a FactoryTalk security user, a Windows-linked user, or a Windows-linked group to the system at run-time  Press the Add User/Group button to open the Add User/Group Account dialog box.  If you want to add a FactoryTalk security user, follow step a. If you want to add a Windows-linked user or Windows-linked group, follow step b.  Add a FactoryTalk security user  Press Type to select FactoryTalk Security User.  In the Name box, type the user name. The name is not case sensitive.  In the Password box, type the user password. The password is case sensitive.  In the Confirm Password box, type the user password again.  Press the Advanced button to set the following options if needed, and click OK. The advanced settings are set to No by default.  User must change password at next logon  User cannot change password  Password never expires  Account is disabled  Tip:  For more information on run-time security settings, refer to \"Working with the Runtime Security editor\" in FactoryTalk View Machine Edition User's Guide.  For more information on account policy settings, refer to \"Setting up security policies\" in FactoryTalk Help.  Add a Windows-linked user or Windows-linked user group  Press Type to select Windows-linked User, or Windows-linked User Group.  Tip:  When adding a Windows-linked user, or a Windows-linked user group, the system will verify whether the user or group exists in the Windows User Accounts. If the user or group does not exist in the Windows User Accounts, it cannot be added.  In the Name box, type the user or group name. The name is not case sensitive.  Tip:  On PanelView Plus 6, and PanelView Plus 7 terminals, there is a five-minute threshold when adding a Windows-linked user, or a Windows-linked user group.  When you add a Windows-linked user, or a Windows-linked user group for the first time, a window prompts you to enter an authorized user name and password.  Within five minutes after a Windows-linked user, or a Windows-linked user group is successfully added, you can add another Windows-linked user, or Windows-linked user group without entering an authorized user name and password.  Beyond five minutes after a Windows-linked user, or a Windows-linked user group is successfully added, a window will prompt you to enter an authorized user name and password again before you can add another Windows-linked user, or Windows-linked user group.  Press the Add button or Enter @ on the external keyboard or string pop-up keyboard to add the user or group. The operation status shows in the Result field.  Tip:  If the application is running on a computer that does not have an external keyboard or keypad, press the Name, Password, and Confirm Password buttons to open the string pop-up keyboard.  Tip:  A newly added user does not belong to any user group and has no run-time security code. The user cannot log in the system before the user is moved to an existing group that is configured with run-time security code(s).  Use the buttons  Name  Press this button to open the string pop-up keyboard. Use the keyboard to type the user or group name, and then press Enter on the keyboard.  Password or Confirm Password  Press this button to open the string pop-up keyboard. Use the keyboard to type the user or group password, and then press Enter on the keyboard.  Add  Press this button to finish adding a user or group.  Cancel  Press this button to close the dialog box without adding user or group.  Use other keys  Delete  Press this key on an external keyboard to clear the box that the cursor is in.  Backspace  Press this key @ on an external keyboard or keypad to delete the character in front of the cursor. Hold the button down to delete multiple characters.  Left arrow  Press this key on an external keyboard to move the cursor to the left.  Right arrow  Press this key on an external keyboard to move the cursor to the right.  See also  Create Add User/Group buttons  Set up general properties for an Add User/Group button  Set up a caption and image for a button  Use the string pop-up keyboard  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1632,
    "title": "Add a FactoryTalk security user",
    "url": "134727.htm",
    "text": "Press Type to select FactoryTalk Security User.  In the Name box, type the user name. The name is not case sensitive.  In the Password box, type the user password. The password is case sensitive.  In the Confirm Password box, type the user password again.  Press the Advanced button to set the following options if needed, and click OK. The advanced settings are set to No by default.  User must change password at next logon  User cannot change password  Password never expires  Account is disabled  Tip:  For more information on run-time security settings, refer to \"Working with the Runtime Security editor\" in FactoryTalk View Machine Edition User's Guide.  For more information on account policy settings, refer to \"Setting up security policies\" in FactoryTalk Help.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1633,
    "title": "Add a Windows-linked user or Windows-linked user group",
    "url": "134728.htm",
    "text": "Press Type to select Windows-linked User, or Windows-linked User Group.  Tip:  When adding a Windows-linked user, or a Windows-linked user group, the system will verify whether the user or group exists in the Windows User Accounts. If the user or group does not exist in the Windows User Accounts, it cannot be added.  In the Name box, type the user or group name. The name is not case sensitive.  Tip:  On PanelView Plus 6, and PanelView Plus 7 terminals, there is a five-minute threshold when adding a Windows-linked user, or a Windows-linked user group.  When you add a Windows-linked user, or a Windows-linked user group for the first time, a window prompts you to enter an authorized user name and password.  Within five minutes after a Windows-linked user, or a Windows-linked user group is successfully added, you can add another Windows-linked user, or Windows-linked user group without entering an authorized user name and password.  Beyond five minutes after a Windows-linked user, or a Windows-linked user group is successfully added, a window will prompt you to enter an authorized user name and password again before you can add another Windows-linked user, or Windows-linked user group.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1634,
    "title": "Create Delete User/Group buttons",
    "url": "132846.htm",
    "text": "To create an Delete User/Group button  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > User Management > Delete User/Group.   Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.   Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.   In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks.  See also  Configure the Delete User/Group button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  Use the Delete User/Group Account dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "user management": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1635,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Delete User/Group button",
    "url": "133061.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Delete User/Group Button Properties dialog box to set up how a Delete User/Group button looks.  To set up general options for a Delete User/Group button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create the Delete User/Group button  Set up a caption and image for a button  Use the Delete User/Group Account dialog box  Options on the General tab of the Delete User/Group Button Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1636,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Delete User/Group Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330188.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Delete User/Group Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Configuring the gradient fill  Create the Delete User/Group button  Set up general properties for a Delete User/Group button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1637,
    "title": "Use the Delete User/Group Account dialog box",
    "url": "133777.htm",
    "text": "To delete a user or group from the system at run time  Press the Delete User/Group button to open the Delete User/Group Account dialog box.  Press the Select User/Group button to open the User or Group Selection dialog box.  Press Type to select the user or group type.  In the Select User or Group box, select the user or group to be deleted. Current login user is not listed in the Select User or Group box at runtime, and cannot be deleted.  Press the Select button, or Enter @ on the external keyboard to select the user or group.  Press the Delete button , or Enter on the external keyboard to delete the selected user or group.  Use the buttons  Up  Press this button to move up the selection.  Down  Press this button to move down the selection.  Cancel  Press this button to close the dialog box without any action.  See also  Create the Delete User/Group button  Configure the Delete User/Group button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1638,
    "title": "Create Modify Group Membership buttons",
    "url": "132847.htm",
    "text": "To create a Modify Group Membership button, do the following  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > User Management > Modify Group Membership.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.   Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.   In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks.  See also  Configure the Modify Group Membership button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  Use the Modify Group Membership dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "user management": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1639,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Modify Group Membership button",
    "url": "133056.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Modify Group Membership Button Properties dialog box to set up how a Modify Group Membership button looks.  To set up general options for a Modify Group Membership button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create Modify Group Membership buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Use the Modify Group Membership dialog box  Options on the General tab of the Modify Group Membership Button Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1640,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Modify Group Membership Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330192.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Modify Group Membership Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Configuring the gradient fill  Create Modify Group Membership buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up general properties for a Modify Group Membership button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1641,
    "title": "Use the Modify Group Membership dialog box",
    "url": "133849.htm",
    "text": "To modify a user or group membership at run time  Press the Modify Group Membership button to open the Modify Group Membership dialog box.  Press Select User/Group to open the User or Group Selection dialog box.  Press Type to select FactoryTalk User, Windows-linked User, or Windows-linked Group.  In the Select User or Group field, press Up or Down to select a user or group.  Press the Select button, or Enter @ on the external keyboard to select the user or group.  Tip:  The User or Group Selection dialog box only shows the groups and users already configured in FactoryTalk Directory and packed in the application.  Press FactoryTalk Group to open FactoryTalk Group Selection dialog box.  In the Select Group box, select a group and press Select.  If you want to add the selected user or group to the selected FactoryTalk group, press Add to Group.  If you want to remove the selected user or group from the FactoryTalk group, press Remove from Group.  Use the buttons  Up  Press this button to move up the selection.  Down  Press this button to move down the selection.  Cancel  Press this button to close the dialog box without any action.  See also  Create Modify Group Membership buttons  Configure the Modify Group Membership button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1642,
    "title": "Create Unlock User buttons",
    "url": "132848.htm",
    "text": "To create an Unlock User button  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > User Management > Unlock User.   Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.   Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.   In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks.  See also  Configure the Unlock User button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  Use the Unlock User Account dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "user management": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1643,
    "title": "Set up general properties for an Unlock User button",
    "url": "133086.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Unlock User Button Properties dialog box to set up how a Unlock User button looks.  To set up general options for an Unlock User button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create Unlock User buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Use the Unlock User Account dialog box  Options on the General tab of the Unlock User Button Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1644,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Unlock User Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330196.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Unlock User Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Configuring the gradient fill  Create Unlock User buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up general properties for an Unlock User button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1645,
    "title": "Use the Unlock User Account dialog box",
    "url": "134310.htm",
    "text": "To unlock a user account at run time  Press the Unlock User button to open the Unlock User Account dialog box.  Press Select User to open the FactoryTalk User Selection dialog box.  In the Select User field, press the Up or Down key to select a user account.  Press the Select button, or Enter @ on the external keyboard to select the user account.  Press the Unlock button, or Enter @ on the external keyboard to unlock the selected user account.  The operation status shows in the Result field.  Use the buttons  Up  Press this button to move up the selection.  Down  Press this button to move down the selection.  Cancel  Press this button to close the dialog box without any action.  See also  Create Unlock User buttons  Configure the Unlock User button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1646,
    "title": "Create Enable User buttons",
    "url": "132849.htm",
    "text": "To create an Enable User button  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > User Management > Enable User.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.   In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks.  See also  Configure the Enable User button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  Use the Enable User Account dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "user management": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1647,
    "title": "Set up general properties for an Enable User button",
    "url": "133091.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Enable User button Properties dialog box to set up how an Enable User button looks.  To set up general options for an Enable User button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create Enable User buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Options on the General tab of the Enable User Button Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1648,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Enable User Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330200.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Enable User Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Configuring the gradient fill  Create Enable User buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up general properties for an Enable User button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1649,
    "title": "Use the Enable User Account dialog box",
    "url": "134312.htm",
    "text": "To enable a user account at run time  Press the Enable User button to open the Enable User Account dialog box.  Press Select User to open the FactoryTalk User Selection dialog box.  In the Select User field, press the Up or Down key to select a user account.  Press the Select button, or Enter @ on the external keyboard to select the user account.  Press the Enable button, or Enter @ on the external keyboard to enable the selected user account.  The operation status shows in the Result field.  Use the buttons  Up  Press this button to move up the selection.  Down  Press this button to move down the selection.  Cancel  Press this button to close the dialog box without any action.  See also  Create Enable User buttons  Configure the Enable User button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1650,
    "title": "Create Disable User buttons",
    "url": "132850.htm",
    "text": "To create a Disable User button  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > User Management > Disable User.   Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.   Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.   In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks.  See also  Configure the Disable User button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  Use the Disable User Account dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "user management": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1651,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Disable User button",
    "url": "133097.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Disable User Button Properties dialog box to set up how a Disable User button looks.  To set up general options for a Disable User button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create Disable User buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Use the Disable User Account dialog box  Options on the General tab of the Disable User Button Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1652,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Disable User Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330203.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Disable User Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Configuring the gradient fill  Create Disable User buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up general properties for a Disable User button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1653,
    "title": "Use the Disable User Account dialog box",
    "url": "134314.htm",
    "text": "To disable a user account at run time  Press the Disable User button to open the Disable User Account dialog box.  Press Select User to open the FactoryTalk User Selection dialog box.  In the Select User field, press the Up or Down key to select a user account.  Press the Select button or Enter @ on the external keyboard to select the user account.  Press the Disable button or Enter @ on the external keyboard to disable the selected user account.  The operation status shows in the Result field.  Use the buttons  Up  Press this button to move up the selection.  Down  Press this button to move down the selection.  Cancel  Press this button to close the dialog box without any action.  See also  Create Disable User buttons  Configure the Disable User button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1654,
    "title": "Create Login buttons",
    "url": "60267.htm",
    "text": "To create a Login button  In the Graphics Display editor, choose Objects > User Management > Login from the Objects menu.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify the how the button looks.  See also  Use the Login dialog box  Configure the Login button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up connections for the Login button (Connections tab)  Problems with logging in  Run-time messages to Diagnostics for the Login button  ",
    "keywords": {
      "user management": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1655,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Login button",
    "url": "60269.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Login Button Properties dialog box to set up how a Login button looks.  To set up general options for a Login button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create Login buttons  Assign connections to an object  Run-time messages to Diagnostics for the Login button  Problems with logging in  Set up a caption and image for a button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1656,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Login Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330206.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Login Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Domain Name  If there is Windows-linked user in the application, you need to set the Domain Name options.   If there is no Windows-linked user in the application, you do not need to set Domain Name options.  Visible  If this check box is selected, the domain name in the Login dialog box is visible.  Domain name  In this field, enter a domain name for authentication.  Use Variable Domain Name  Select this checkbox to use the Tag/Expression content that is set on the Connections tab as the Domain name. If this check box is not selected, the Login button uses the domain name specified in the Domain name field.  Disable  If this check box is selected, the Domain name field is read-only in the Login dialog box.  User Name  Hide User Name Entry  If this check box is selected, the user name input in the Login dialog box is masked by #.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Configuring the gradient fill  Set up connections for the Login button (Connections tab)  Set up general properties for a Login button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1657,
    "title": "Set up Connections for the Login button",
    "url": "134317.htm",
    "text": "To set up tags and expressions for the Login button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag or expression to the Domain Name.  Tip:  The Domain Name must be a string type.  See also  Set up general properties for a Login button  Set up a caption and image for a button  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1658,
    "title": "Use the Login dialog box",
    "url": "60265.htm",
    "text": "Use the Login dialog box to log in to the system at run time.  To log in to the system at run time  Press the Login button to open the Login dialog box.  In the Domain box, enter domain name.  Tip:  If the Visible check box is not selected in the General tab of the Login Button Properties window, the Domain box is invisible.  If both the Visible check box and the Disable check box are selected in the General tab of the Login Button Properties window, the Domain box is read-only.  In the User Name box, type the user name. The name is not case sensitive.  Tip:  If the Hide User Name Entry check box is selected in the General tab of the Login Button Properties window, the user name entered is masked by #.  In the Password box, type the user password. The password is case sensitive.  Press Enter @ on the external keyboard or string pop-up keyboard.  Tip:  If the application is running on a computer that does not have an external keyboard or keypad, press the Domain, User Name and Password buttons to open the string pop-up keyboard.  If the graphic display changes remotely before the operator presses Enter, the Login dialog box closes and the login is canceled.  The operation status shows in the Result field.  Use the buttons  Domain  Press this button to open the string pop-up keyboard. Use the keyboard to type the domain name, and then press Enter on the keyboard.  User Name  Press this button to open the string pop-up keyboard. Use the keyboard to type the user name, and then press Enter on the keyboard.  Password  Press this button to open the string pop-up keyboard. Use the keyboard to type the user password, and then press Enter on the keyboard.  Login  Press this button to finish logging in.  Cancel  Press this button to close the dialog box without logging in.  Use other keys  Delete  Press this key on an external keyboard to clear the box that the cursor is in.  Backspace  Press this key @ on an external keyboard or keypad to delete the character in front of the cursor. Hold the button down to delete multiple characters.  Left arrow  Press this key on an external keyboard to move the cursor to the left.  Right arrow  Press this key on an external keyboard to move the cursor to the right.  See also  Create Login buttons  Problems with logging in  Run-time messages to Diagnostics for the Login button  Use the string pop-up keyboard  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1659,
    "title": "Problems with logging in",
    "url": "60273.htm",
    "text": "At run time the operator uses the Login dialog box to log in to the system. If login is successful, the previous user is logged out and the operator is logged in.  Login is unsuccessful under these circumstances:  Graphic display change  If the graphic display changes remotely before the operator has pressed the Enter button in the Login dialog box, the dialog box closes and the user is not logged in. If the string pop-up keyboard is open when the display change occurs, both the keyboard and the dialog box close.  Unknown user or password  If the user name or password does not match the settings in the Runtime Security editor, the user is not logged in and a diagnostics message is logged.  See also  Create Login buttons  Use the Login dialog box  Run-time messages to Diagnostics for the Login button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1660,
    "title": "Run-time messages to Diagnostics for the Login button",
    "url": "60275.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs information and error messages about the Login button to diagnostics under these circumstances:  Log in  If login is successful, the application logs a message.  If login is successful, the application logs a message about the System\\User Account ID.  Unknown user or password  If the user name or password dose not match the settings in the Runtime Security editor, the user is not logged in and the application logs an error.  See also  Create Login buttons  Use the Login dialog box  Problems with logging in  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1661,
    "title": "Create Logout buttons",
    "url": "60777.htm",
    "text": "To create a logout button  In the Graphics Display editor, choose Objects > User Management > Logout.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify the how the button looks.  See also  Configure the Logout button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  Run-time messages to Diagnostics for the Logout button  ",
    "keywords": {
      "user management": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1662,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Logout button",
    "url": "60779.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Logout Button Properties dialog box to set up how a Logout button looks.  To set up general options for a Logout button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create Logout buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Options on the General tab of the Logout Button Properties dialog box  Use the Logout button  Run-time messages to Diagnostics for the Logout button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1663,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Logout Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330435.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Logout Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Display settings  Choose whether a display will be shown when the logout button is pressed. If so, specify the display, and choose whether placeholders will be replaced by tag values from a parameter file or from a parameter list.  Show display on logout  Check this box if you want a display to be shown when the logout button is pressed.  Display  Specify the display to be shown when the logout button is pressed. Click the Browse button to open the Component Browser and select from the list of shows in the application.  Parameter file  Select this option if the display's run-time parameter values will be provided by a parameter file. Click the Browse button (...) to open the Component Browser and select the parameter file to run when the button object is pressed. The list contains all of the parameter files in the project.  Parameter list  Select this option if the display's run-time parameter values will be provided by a parameter list. Click the Browse button to open the Tag Browser and select the tag or tags to add to the list.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Configuring the gradient fill  Create Logout buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up general properties for a Logout button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1664,
    "title": "Use the Logout button",
    "url": "134316.htm",
    "text": "When a logged in user presses the Logout button, the user will log out of the system.  See also  Create Logout buttons  Configure the Logout button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  Run-time messages to Diagnostics for the Logout button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1665,
    "title": "Run-time messages to Diagnostics for the Logout button",
    "url": "60784.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs information messages about the Logout button to diagnostics under these circumstances:  Log out  When the user logs out, the application sends a message.  When the user logs out, the application logs a message about the System\\User Account ID (for the default user).  See also  Create Logout buttons  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1666,
    "title": "Create Password buttons",
    "url": "60277.htm",
    "text": "To create a password button  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > Use Management > Password from the menu bar, or click the Password Button icon on the Objects toolbar.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify the how the button looks, and a caption and/or image for the button.  See also  Configure the Password button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  Use the Password dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "user management": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1667,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Password button",
    "url": "60279.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Password Button Properties dialog box to set up how a Password button looks.  To set up general options for a Password button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create Password buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Use the Password dialog box  Options on the General tab of the Password Button Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1668,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Password Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330438.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Password Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  Mode  Change current user password  When logging in, the operator can change current password.  Change any user password (Administrative)  When logging in, the administrator can change any user password.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Configuring the gradient fill  Create Password buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up general properties for a Password button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1669,
    "title": "Use the Password dialog box",
    "url": "134025.htm",
    "text": "At run time, the logged-in user can change FactoryTalk Security passwords using the Password button. Policies determining password length, length of life, complexity, and alike, are set in the Security Policy Properties dialog box of FactoryTalk Security.  Tip:  RSView 3.20 and earlier passwords are not case sensitive. FactoryTalk Security passwords are case sensitive. When 3.20 and earlier passwords are migrated, the resulting 4.00 passwords are lower case.  Changing the FactoryTalk Security password does not change the Windows-linked account domain password.  To modify the current user password  Press the Password button to open the Change Current User Password dialog box.  Press Old Password to enter the current password.  Press New Password to enter the new password.  Press Confirm Password to enter the new password again.  Press the Change Password button, or Enter @ on the external keyboard or string pop-up keyboard to change the password. The password change status shows in the Result field.  To modify any user password  Press the Password button to open the Change Any User Password dialog box.  Press Select User to open the FactoryTalk User Selection dialog box.  In the Select User field, press the Up or Down key to select a user account.  Press the Select button, or Enter @ on the external keyboard or string pop-up keyboard to select the user account.  Press New Password to enter the new password.  Press Confirm Password to enter the new password again.  Press the Change Password button, or Enter @ on the external keyboard or string pop-up keyboard to change the password. The operation status shows in the Result field.  For password policy settings, refer to \"Setting up security policies\" in FactoryTalk Help.  Use the buttons  Up  Press this button to move up the selection.  Down  Press this button to move down the selection.  Cancel  Press this button to close the dialog box without any action.  Use other keys  Delete  Press this key on an external keyboard to clear the box that the cursor is in.  Backspace  Press @ on an external keyboard or keypad to delete the character in front of the cursor. Hold the button down to delete multiple characters.  Left arrow  Press this key on an external keyboard to move the cursor to the left.  Right arrow  Press this key on an external keyboard to move the cursor to the right.  See also  Create Password buttons  Configuring the Password button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1670,
    "title": "Create Change User Properties buttons",
    "url": "139172.htm",
    "text": "To create a Change User Properties button  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > User Management > Change User Properties.   Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.   Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks.  See also  Configure the Change User Properties button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  Use the Change User Properties dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "user management": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1671,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Change User Properties button",
    "url": "139174.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Change User Properties Button Properties dialog box to set up how a Change User Properties button looks.  To set up general options for a Change User Properties button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create Change User Properties buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Use the Change User Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1672,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Change User Properties Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330466.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Change User Properties Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Configuring the gradient fill  Set up a caption and image for a button  Use the Change User Properties dialog box  Set up general properties for a Change User Properties button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1673,
    "title": "Use the Change User Properties dialog box",
    "url": "139176.htm",
    "text": "To modify a user properties at run time  Press the Change User Properties button to open the Change User Properties dialog box.  Press Select User to open the FactoryTalk User Selection dialog box.  Press Up or Down to select a user or group.  Tip:  The FactoryTalk User Selection dialog box only shows the users already configured in FactoryTalk Directory and packed in the application.  Press the Select button, or Enter @ on the external keyboard to select the user.  Press Properties to set the following options if needed, and click OK. The advanced settings are set to No by default.  User must change password at next logon  User cannot change password  Password never expires  Account is disabled  Press Change to close the dialog box and save the changes.  The operation status shows in the Result field.  Use the buttons  Up  Press this button to move up the selection.  Down  Press this button to move down the selection.  Cancel  Press this button to close the dialog box without any action.  See also  Create Change User Properties buttons  Configure the Change User Properties button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1674,
    "title": "Create control list selectors",
    "url": "60299.htm",
    "text": "Use the control list selector to select from a list of states for a process or operation. The list is highlighted to show the current state, and the operator can scroll through the list to select a different state. The value assigned to the selected state is written to the data source.  When the control list object is selected, the operator can scroll through the list and select states using key buttons or by using the arrow keys and Enter key on a keypad or an external keyboard. Key buttons can also be linked directly to the control list selector so that they will work whether the selector is selected or not.  To create a control list selector  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > Advanced > Control List Selector.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the selector to be.  Double-click the selector to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify the how the selector looks, its states and tags and whether to use Enter key handshaking.  See also  How the control list selector works at run time  Example: Using a control list selector  Configure the control list selector  Set up states for the control list selector  Set up connections for the control list selector  Set up handshaking for the control list selector  Causes of run-time errors for the control list selector  ",
    "keywords": {
      "control list selector": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1675,
    "title": "Example: Use a control list selector",
    "url": "60503.htm",
    "text": "In this example, the control list selector enables an operator to use a list to select the mode of operation of a blower. The blower can operate manually or automatically, or it can be turned off.  Create a control list selector with three states.  Set the caption to \"Off\" for State 0, \"Manual\" for State 1, and \"Automatic\" for State 2.  The application monitors the tag you assign to the Value connection to control the operation mode. If the operator scrolls the list and selects an entry, the Value connection value changes, and the machine switches modes.  The operation mode can also be set by a supervisory system. The operator must be able to view the application&#8217;s local display to see which mode the machine is currently in. The application reads the Value connection and highlights the currently selected mode of operation.  See also  How the control list selector works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the control list selector  Set up connections for the control list selector  How Enter key handshaking works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1676,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a control list selector",
    "url": "60389.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Control List Selector Properties dialog box to set up how a control list selector looks.  To set up general options for a control list selector  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the States tab to specify how the object looks in each state at run time.  See also  Create control list selectors  Set up states for the control list selector  Set up connections for the control list selector  Set up handshaking for the control list selector  Options on the General tab of the Control List Selector Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1677,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Control List Selector Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330456.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Control List Selector Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border or captions (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to open the gradient fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Selection back color  This box shows the color for the highlight bar. Click it to select another color. The highlight bar indicates the currently selected ingredient at run time.  Selection fore color  This box shows the color for the caption on the highlighted ingredient. Click it to select another color.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  At run time the selected state does not blink; only the background of the object blinks.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Text  The text settings apply to the numeric values in the display.  Font  Select the font to use for the text.  Size  Select the font size to use for the text.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the text, if required.  Caption truncate  Select Word if you want captions that exceed the maximum length to be cut off at the beginning of a new word.  Select Character if you want the caption to be cut off whenever the maximum caption length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word.  The maximum caption length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  When a caption has been truncated, the application places an asterisk (*) at the right end of the caption to indicate that text is missing.  Number of states  Select the number of states for the object.  Other  Write on enter  Select this check box to write to the data source when the operator presses the Enter key button or the Enter key on a keyboard or keypad, while the object is selected on the display.  Clear this check box to write the state value to the data source as soon as a new state is selected.  Key navigation  Select this check box to allow the user to navigate to the object using the keyboard and give the object input focus.  Wrap around  Select this check box if you want the list to wrap from the end of the list to the beginning when scrolling down, and from the beginning of the list to the end when scrolling up.  See also  Create control list selectors  Set up states for the control list selector  Set up connections for the control list selector  Configure the gradient fill  Set up general properties for a control list selector object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1678,
    "title": "Set up states for a control list selector",
    "url": "60387.htm",
    "text": "Use the States tab to set up how the control list selector's appearance changes to match the value of the Indicator connection.  To set up states for a control list selector  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the States tab.  From the Select state list, select State 0.  Specify these properties for State 0:  Value  Caption, if any  Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each additional state.  Once you set up the properties for one state, you can copy and paste the state&#8217;s properties to another state or to all states.  Tip:  To add or remove a state without returning to the General tab, click Insert State or Delete State.  See also  Create control list selectors  Configure the control list selector  Set up connections for the control list selector  Set up handshaking for the control list selector  Copy and paste state properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1679,
    "title": "Options on the States tab of the Control List Selector Properties dialog box",
    "url": "331403.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the States tab of the Control List Selector Properties dialog box  Options  Descriptions  Select state  Click the state for which to set up properties.  Value  Type the integer value to use for each state.  Caption  Enter the text for the state. The text appears on the face of the object, to give the operator information about the current state.  Insert Variable  Click this button to select the type of variable to be inserted.  Caption color  This box shows the current text color for the caption when the state is not selected. Click it to select another color.  Caption back color  This box shows the current background color for the caption when the state is not selected. Click it to select another color.  If the caption background style is transparent, the application does not use this caption background color.  Caption blink  Select this check box if you want the caption to blink at run time. The caption blinks twice per second.  Caption back style  Select whether the caption&#8217;s background is Solid or Transparent.  If you select Transparent, the object&#8217;s background is not filled in and any objects behind it show through.  Alignment  Specifies how the caption is positioned on the object.  See also  Create control list selectors  Configure the control list selector  Set up connections for the control list selector  Set up handshaking for the control list selector  Causes of run-time errors for the control list selector  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1680,
    "title": "Set up handshaking for a control list selector",
    "url": "60297.htm",
    "text": "When the operator presses the Enter key, the application writes a value to the data source. Use Enter key handshaking to hold the value at the data source for a specific period of time to ensure it is read before the operator sends a new value to the Value connection.  To set up handshaking for a control list selector&#8217;s buttons  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Timing tab.  Specify the handshaking settings to use with the Enter key.  See also  Create control list selectors  Configure the control list selector  Set up states for the control list selector  Set up connections for the control list selector  How Enter key handshaking works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1681,
    "title": "Options on the Timing tab of the Control List Selector Properties dialog box",
    "url": "332336.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Timing tab of the Control List Selector Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Timing and handshaking settings  Enter key control delay  Select the time to delay between the time the operator presses the Enter button and the time the application sets the Enter connection to 1.  Enter key hold time  Select the time the Enter connection will be set to 1. This time setting applies only if the Enter connection is assigned and the Enter Handshake connection is not assigned.  Enter key handshake time  Select the maximum time the Enter connection will be set to 1. This time setting applies only if the Enter and Enter Handshake connections are both assigned.  Handshake reset type  Select how the Enter Handshake connection resets the Enter connection to 0:  Non-zero value resets the Enter connection when the Enter Handshake connection is a non-zero value.  Zero to non-zero transition resets the Enter connection when the Enter Handshake connection changes from 0 to a non-zero value.  See also  Create control list selectors  Configure the control list selector  Set up states for the control list selector  Set up connections for the control list selector  How the control list selector works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1682,
    "title": "Set up connections for the control list selector (Connections tab)",
    "url": "60391.htm",
    "text": "To set up tags and expressions for the control list selector  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the selector to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag or expression to these connections:  Value  Assign a tag to this connection. When the operator selects a state, the application writes the value corresponding to the selected state to the tag&#8217;s data source. The application also monitors this connection and if the value changes, highlights the new state in the list.  The Value connection triggers the state's action. For example, when the tag assigned to the connection changes to a new state, the data source changes a motor's speed to a new setting.  Tip:  If Write on enter is selected (on the General tab), the application does not write to the Value connection until the operator selects a state and presses Enter.  If Write on enter is not selected (in the General tab), the application writes to the Value connection as soon as a state is selected. The Enter and Enter Handshake connections are ignored.  Enter  This connection accepts values of 0 and 1 only. The connection determines how long the Enter key press is registered. Use this connection for Enter key handshaking.  Enter Handshake  You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. This connection resets the Enter connection, using the Handshake reset type property specified in the Timing tab. Use this connection for Enter key handshaking if you want the Enter connection to be reset when a value at the data source changes.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and resets the Enter connection when the expression value meets the conditions of the Handshake reset type option.  See also  Create control list selectors  Configure the control list selector  Set up states for the control list selector  Set up handshaking for the control list selector  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1683,
    "title": "How Enter key handshaking works at run time",
    "url": "60245_2.htm",
    "text": "When an object&#8217;s Enter button is pressed, the object writes a value to the data source. Use Enter key handshaking to hold the value at the data source for a specific period of time to ensure it is read before the object overwrites the value.  You can use Enter key handshaking with these objects:  String input enable button  Control list selector  Numeric input enable button  Numeric input cursor point  Use objects in the graphic display  Before the Enter connection is reset to 0, the operator can provide input to other objects in the graphic display.  If the operator presses the Enter key (using a key button or external keyboard or keypad) for an object whose Enter connection has not yet been reset , the application logs an error.  Graphic display changes  If the graphic display is closed, the Enter connection is reset to 0 and any handshake timing is also reset. In effect, the handshaking is canceled.  To set up an object for handshaking  Enter key handshaking works by setting the object's Enter connection to 1. Until the Enter connection is reset to 0, no new values can be sent to the Value connection.  There are two ways of using Enter key handshaking:  Hold the value at the data source for a specified period of time,  Hold the value at the data source until the data source notifies FactoryTalk View that the value has been read.  See also  Hold a value for a specified length of time  Hold a value until it is acknowledged  Causes of run-time errors for Enter key handshaking  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1684,
    "title": "Hold a value for a specified length of time",
    "url": "60505.htm",
    "text": "One method of using Enter key handshaking is to hold the value at the data source for a specified period of time. For this method, assign a tag to the Enter connection and specify the Enter key hold time. Enter key control delay is optional.  To set up Enter key handshaking to hold the value at the Value connection for a certain length of time  In the Timing tab, specify a time for the Enter key hold time, and, optionally, the Enter key control delay.  In the Connections tab, assign a tag to the Enter connection. A digital tag is recommended.  How this type of handshaking works  When the user presses the Enter key, the value is sent to the Value connection.  If there is a time specified for the Enter key control delay, the delay timer begins timing. When the time is up, the Enter connection is set to 1. If no time is specified for the Enter key control delay, the Enter connection is set to 1 as soon as the user presses the Enter key.  As long as the Enter connection is set to 1, the user cannot send new values to the Value connection.  When the Enter connection is set to 1, the Enter key hold time timer begins timing. When the time expires, the Enter connection is reset to 0 and new values can be sent to the Value connection.  See also  How Enter key handshaking works at run time  Hold a value until it is acknowledged  Causes of run-time errors for Enter key handshaking  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1685,
    "title": "Hold a value until it is acknowledged",
    "url": "60507.htm",
    "text": "One method of using Enter key handshaking is to hold the value at the data source until the data source notifies the application that the value has been read. To do this, specify the Enter key handshake time and a Handshake reset type. Enter key control delay is optional.  To hold a value at the data source until it is acknowledged by the data source  In the Timing tab, specify the Enter key handshake time, the Handshake reset type, and, optionally, the Enter key control delay.  In the Connections tab, assign a tag to the Enter connection, and a tag or expression to the Enter handshake connection. A digital tag is recommended for the Enter connection.  Set up the data source to send a non-zero value to the Enter handshake connection when it has read the Value connection, and then to reset the Enter handshake connection to 0.  How this type of handshaking works  When the user presses the Enter key, the value is sent to the Value connection.  If you specified a time for the Enter key control delay, the delay timer begins timing. When the time is up, the Enter connection is set to 1. If you did not specify a time for the Enter key control delay, the Enter connection is set to 1 as soon as the user presses the Enter key.  As long as the Enter connection is set to 1, the user cannot send new values to the Value connection.  When the Enter connection is set to 1, the Enter key handshake timer begins timing. The Enter connection remains set until the \"Enter key handshake time\" expires, or until it is reset by the Enter Handshake connection, whichever happens first.  The data source informs the terminal that a value has been received by changing the Enter handshake connection from 0 to some non-zero value. This triggers the handshake reset, and resets the Enter connection to 0. The operator can now send new values to the Value connection.  How the \"Handshake reset type\" works  How the Enter Handshake connection resets the Enter connection depends on which Handshake reset type you select:  Non-zero value resets the Enter connection from 1 to 0 when the Enter Handshake connection has a non-zero value.  Tip:  If the \"Handshake reset type\" is \"Non-zero value,\" the Enter handshake connection must be 0 when the \"Enter key control delay\" expires to set the Enter connection to 1. If the Enter handshake connection already has a non-zero value, the assumption is that the Enter connection is still set to 1 from a previous event. Then the Enter connection is not set to 1 and Enter key handshaking does not happen.  Zero to non-zero transition resets the Enter connection when the Enter Handshake connection changes from 0 to a non-zero value.  In either case, if the \"Enter key handshake time\" expires before the Enter Handshake connection resets the Enter connection, the Enter connection is reset to 0 and the application reports an error to diagnostics.  See also  How Enter key handshaking works at run time  Hold a value for a specified length of time  Causes of run-time errors for Enter key handshaking  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1686,
    "title": "How the control list selector works at run time",
    "url": "60393.htm",
    "text": "At run time the control list selector is highlighted to show the state with a value that matches the Value connection value at the data source. The operator can scroll through the list to select a different state. The value assigned to the selected state is written to the Value connection.  Scroll through the list  The operator can scroll and select states and write out the value associated with the selected state using key buttons or by using the arrow keys and Enter key on a keypad or an external keyboard.  The list scrolls if it contains more states than can be viewed at one time. When the operator reaches the bottom of the list and presses the Move Down button, the cursor moves to the top of the list. If the cursor is at the top of the list and the operator presses the Move Up button, the cursor moves to the bottom of the list.  If \"Write on enter\" is selected (on the General tab), the value is not sent to the Value connection until the operator presses the Enter button or Enter key. If \"Write on enter\" is not selected, the value is sent as soon as the operator scrolls to a different state.  Tip:  In the control list selector, when you scroll to a state and select it, it takes a specific period of time for the system to write the value and make the state selected.  Use auto repeat  If auto repeat is set up for the key button (on the key button's Timing tab) and the operator holds down the Move Up or Move Down button for the specified Auto repeat delay time, the list begins to scroll. If \"Write on enter\" is not selected, the application attempts to send a value to the Value connection for each state that scrolls by. However, some values may be lost if the Auto repeat rate is too fast for all the values to register.  Open graphic displays  When you open a display at run time, the application reads the Value connection value and highlights the state with the matching value. If no state matches the Value connection value, no state is highlighted and the cursor appears at the top of the list.  Update the list once the display is open  The application periodically reads the Value connection and highlights the state with the matching value. If no state matches the Value connection value, no state is highlighted and the cursor remains beside the previously highlighted state.  The frequency with which the application updates the control list selector depends on the update rate for the tag assigned to the Value connection.  Invalid values  When the operator moves to a new state that has an invalid value and presses Enter, the cursor moves but the state is not highlighted.  See also  Causes of run-time errors for the control list selector  Set up connections for the control list selector  How Enter key handshaking works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1687,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the control list selector",
    "url": "60407.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs errors about the control list selector to diagnostics under these circumstances:  Value connection unassigned  If the Value connection is unassigned:  Nothing is written to the Value connection.  The cursor remains on the unselected state.  The highlight bar does not appear.  The application logs an error.  Invalid values  If a state&#8217;s value is too large for the data type of the tag assigned to the Value connection, or if the value is outside the assigned tag&#8217;s minimum and maximum values:  The application does not write the value to the Value connection.  The highlight remains as is.  The application logs an error.  For example, the state value is too large for the tag&#8217;s data type if your data source is a PLC-5&reg;, the state value is 2,147,483,647, and the assigned tag is an integer tag using the address N7:0. Integer tags have a range of -32,768 to 32,767 only.  If Enter key handshaking is set up and \"Write on enter\" is selected (on the General tab), the Enter connection is not set to 1, and the handshake timers do not begin timing.  Enter key handshaking in effect  If the control list selector&#8217;s Enter key handshaking is still in effect when the operator presses the Enter button:  Nothing is written to the Value connection.  The cursor remains on the unselected state and the highlight remains on the selected state.  The Enter connection remains set to 1 and the handshake timers continue timing.  The application logs an error.  See also  Create control list selectors  Set up connections for the control list selector  How Enter key handshaking works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for Enter key handshaking  Configure the control list selector  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1688,
    "title": "Create piloted control list selectors",
    "url": "60413.htm",
    "text": "Use the piloted control list selector to select from a list of states for a process or operation. The selected state on the list is highlighted. If the list scrolls, the state at the top of the list is highlighted.  The object can be controlled directly by an operator, or remotely by a device such as a programmable controller. The operator or the controller scrolls through the list to select a different state or a different group of visible states. The object can be configured to write out the value of the selected state, the value of the state in the top position on the list, and the values of all the states visible on the list, to the data source. If all the visible states of the object are being written, the data source must be a direct reference array tag with a length that matches the number of states visible on the list. The syntax of such an array tag depends on the FactoryTalk Linx OPC server used.  When the piloted control list object is selected, if the object is operator-controlled, the operator can scroll through the list and select states using key buttons or by using the arrow keys and Enter key on a keypad or an external keyboard. Key buttons can also be linked directly to the piloted control list selector so that they will work whether the object has the input focus or not.  To create a piloted control list selector  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > Advanced > Piloted Control List Selector.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the selector to be.  Double-click the selector to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify the how the selector looks, whether it will be controlled remotely or by an operator, its states and connections, and whether to use Enter key handshaking.  See also  Configure the piloted control list selector (General tab)  Set up states for the piloted control list selector (States tab)  Set up handshaking for the piloted control list selector (Timing tab)  Set up connections for the piloted control list selector (Connections tab)  How the piloted control list selector works at run time  ",
    "keywords": {
      "piloted control list selector": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1689,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a piloted control list selector",
    "url": "60415.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Piloted Control List Selector Properties dialog box to set up how a piloted control list selector object looks.  To set up general options for a piloted control list selector  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the States tab to specify how the object looks in each state at run time.  See also  Create piloted control list selectors  Options on the General tab of the Piloted Control List Selector Properties dialog box  Set up states for a piloted control list selector  Set up handshaking for the piloted control list selector  Options on the General tab of the Piloted Control List Selector Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1690,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Piloted Control List Selector Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330476.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Piloted Control List Selector Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border or captions (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to open the gradient fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Selection back color  This box shows the color for the highlight bar. Click it to select another color. The highlight bar indicates the currently selected ingredient at run time.  Selection fore color  This box shows the color for the caption on the highlighted ingredient. Click it to select another color.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  At run time the selected state does not blink; only the background of the object blinks.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Text  The text settings apply to the numeric values in the display.  Font  Select the font to use for the text.  Size  Select the font size to use for the text.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the text, if required.  Caption truncate  Select Word if you want captions that exceed the maximum length to be cut off at the beginning of a new word.  Select Character if you want the caption to be cut off whenever the maximum caption length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word.  The maximum caption length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  When a caption has been truncated, the application places an asterisk (*) at the right end of the caption to indicate that text is missing.  Number of states  Select the number of states for the object.  Other  Write on enter  Select this check box to write to the data source when the operator presses the Enter key button or the Enter key on a keyboard or keypad, while the object is selected on the display.  Clear this check box to write the state value to the data source as soon as a new state is selected.  Key navigation  Select this check box to allow the user to navigate to the object using the keyboard and give the object input focus.  Wrap around  Select this check box if you want the list to wrap from the end of the list to the beginning when scrolling down, and from the beginning of the list to the end when scrolling up.  See also  Create piloted control list selectors  Set up states for the piloted control list selector  Set up handshaking for the piloted control list selector  Configure the gradient fill  Set up general properties for a piloted control list selector object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1691,
    "title": "Set up states for a piloted control list selector",
    "url": "60411.htm",
    "text": "Use the States tab to set up how the piloted control list selector's appearance changes to match the value of the Indicator connection.  To set up states for a piloted control list selector  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the States tab.  From the Select state list, select State 0.  Specify these properties for State 0:  Value  Caption, if any  Access. Whether the state can be selected by an operator, a remote controller, both, or neither  Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each additional state.  Once you set up the properties for one state, you can copy and paste the state&#8217;s properties to another state or to all states.  Tip:  To add or remove a state without returning to the General tab, click Insert State or Delete State.  See also  Create piloted control list selectors  Set up general properties for a piloted control list selector  Set up handshaking for the piloted control list selector  Set up connections for the piloted control list selector  How the control list selector works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1692,
    "title": "Options on the States tab of the Piloted Control List Selector Properties dialog box",
    "url": "332338.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the States tab of the Piloted Control List Selector Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Select state  Click the state for which to set up properties.  Value  Type the integer value to use for each state. The Value connection changes to this value when the selected state is in effect.  Values for states whose Access is other than None should be unique. Values for states whose Access is None need not be unique.  Caption  Enter the text for the state. The text appears on the face of the object, to give the operator information about the current state.  Insert Variable  Click this button to select the type of variable to be inserted.  Caption color  This box shows the current text color for the caption when the state is not selected. Click it to select another color.  Caption back color  This box shows the current background color for the caption when the state is not selected. Click it to select another color.  If the caption background style is transparent, the application does not use this caption background color.  Caption blink  Select this check box if you want the caption to blink at run time. The caption blinks twice per second.  Caption back style  Select whether the caption&#8217;s background is Solid or Transparent.  If you select Transparent, the object&#8217;s background is not filled in and any objects behind it show through.  Alignment  Specifies how the caption is positioned on the object.  Access  Specify whether the state can be selected by an operator, a remote controlling device, both or neither.  Operator and Remote. Both an operator and a controller can select the state. This is the default setting.  Operator. Only an operator can select the state  Remote. The state can only be selected remotely.  None. The state cannot be selected.  See also  Create piloted control list selectors  Configure the piloted control list selector  Set up handshaking for the piloted control list selector  Set up connections for the piloted control list selector  How the control list selector works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1693,
    "title": "Set up handshaking for the piloted control list selector",
    "url": "60417.htm",
    "text": "When the operator presses the Enter key, the application writes a value to the data source. Use Enter key handshaking to hold the value at the data source for a specific period of time to ensure it is read before the operator sends a new value to the Value connection.  To set up handshaking for the control list selector&#8217;s buttons  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Timing tab.  Specify the handshaking settings to use with the Enter key.  See also  Create piloted control list selectors  Set up general properties for a piloted control list selector object  Set up states for a piloted control list selector  Options on the Timing tab of the Piloted Control List Selector Properties dialog box  Set up connections for the piloted control list selector  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1694,
    "title": "Options on the Timing tab of the Piloted Control List Selector Properties dialog box",
    "url": "332340.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Timing tab of the Piloted Control List Selector Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Timing and handshaking settings  Enter key control delay  Select the time to delay between the time the operator presses the Enter button and the time the application sets the Enter connection to 1.  Enter key hold time  Select the time the Enter connection will be set to 1. This time setting applies only if the Enter connection is assigned and the Enter Handshake connection is not assigned.  Enter key handshake time  Select the maximum time the Enter connection will be set to 1. This time setting applies only if the Enter and Enter Handshake connections are both assigned.  Handshake reset type  Select how the Enter Handshake connection resets the Enter connection to 0:  Non-zero value resets the Enter connection when the Enter Handshake connection is a non-zero value.  Zero to non-zero transition resets the Enter connection when the Enter Handshake connection changes from 0 to a non-zero value.  See also  Create piloted control list selectors  Configure the piloted control list selector  Set up states for the piloted control list selector  Set up connections for the piloted control list selector  How the piloted control list selector works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1695,
    "title": "Set up connections for the piloted control list selector (Connections tab)",
    "url": "60419.htm",
    "text": "To set up tags and expressions for the piloted control list selector  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the selector to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign a tag or expression to these controls:  Value  Assign a tag to this connection. When a display that includes a piloted control list selector object is opened, if the operator has control of the list, the application reads the Value connection to determine what state to select. The application does not read the Value connection at any other time. When the operator selects a valid state, if its Value connection is assigned, the state's value is written out to the Value connection.  If the list is remotely controlled, the Value connection does not necessarily have to be assigned. The remote controller uses the Indicator connection to select a state. If the selected state is a valid state, and if its Value connection is assigned, the state's value is written to the Value connection.  Tip:  If Write on enter is selected (in the General tab), the application does not write to the Value connection until the operator selects a state and presses Enter.  If Write on enter is not selected (in the General tab), the application writes to the Value connection as soon as a state is selected. The Enter and Enter Handshake controls are ignored.  Indicator  Assign a tag or an expression to this read connection. When the list is remotely controlled, this connection is used to select a state in the list.  Remote Access  A read connection. This connection determines whether the operator or a remote controller selects states in the list. If you assign a tag or an expression to this connection, the object will be remotely controlled. If unassigned, the operator has control of the object.  Top Position  Assign a tag to this write connection. Whenever the list scrolls, the value of the top visible state in the list is written to this tag.  Visible States  Assign an array tag to this write connection. When the list scrolls, the values of the visible states are written to the array tag. The first visible state is written to the first element of the array tag, the second visible state is written to the second element of the array tag, and so on. The length of the array tag must be the same as the number of visible states the object has.  Tip:  You must use a direct reference for this assignment. You cannot use an HMI tag.  The syntax of the array tag is dependant on the type of OPC data server the application is using.  If you are using FactoryTalk Linx, you must use the syntax tagname,Larraylength (for example, [PLC5]N7:0,L5). Do not leave a space between the tag address and the length. For example, the address {[PLC5]N7:0, L5} will not work. {[PLC5]N7:0,L5} will work.  Enter  Assign a tag to this connection. This connection accepts values of 0 and 1 only. The connection determines how long the Enter key press is registered. Use this connection for Enter key handshaking.  Enter Handshake  Assign a tag or an expression to this connection. This connection resets the Enter connection, using the Handshake reset type property specified on the Timing tab. Use this connection for Enter key handshaking if you want the Enter connection to be reset when a value at the data source changes.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and resets the Enter connection when the expression value meets the conditions of the Handshake reset type option.  See also  Create piloted control list selectors  Configure the piloted control list selector (General tab)  Set up states for the piloted control list selector (States tab)  Set up handshaking for the piloted control list selector (Timing tab)  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1696,
    "title": "How the piloted control list selector works at run time",
    "url": "60421.htm",
    "text": "The piloted control list selector differs from the control list selector in that:  it can be controlled remotely or by an operator (determined by the Remote Access property)  it can be set to write out, not only the selected state, but also the state in the top position on the list, and/or all the states visible on the list, whenever the list scrolls (determined by the Top Position and Visible States connections)  its Value connection is read to determine what state to select only when a display is opened  it has an Indicator connection, which is used instead of the Value connection to select a state when the list is remotely controlled  Each state has an access property that determines whether that state can be selected remotely or by an operator, by both or by neither. When a new state is selected, if the state's Access property allows the selection, cursor moves to the state and the state is highlighted. If the object's Value connection is assigned, the state's value is written to the Value connection. If the Top Position connection is assigned, the value of the state at the top of the list is written to the assigned connection. If the Visible States connection is assigned, the values of all the state's visible in the list are written out.  Open graphic displays  When you open a display at run time, the application reads the Remote Access connection value to see if the list is operator controlled or remotely controlled. If the Remote Access connection is unassigned, the list is operator-controlled.  If the list is operator controlled, the application reads the Value connection value and highlights the state with the matching value. The Value connection is not read at any other time. If no state matches the Value connection value, no state is highlighted and the cursor appears at the top of the list. If the operator selects a state whose Remote Access is set to Remote or to None, the cursor appears hollow.  If the list is remotely controlled, the application reads the value of the Indicator connection and highlights the state with the matching value. If no state matches the Indicator connection value, no state is highlighted and the cursor appears at the top of the list.  Update the list once the display is open  The list is updated only when it scrolls, either through operator action or by remote control.  If the list is operator controlled  The operator can scroll through the list to select a different state, as long as the selected state's access property is set to Operator or to Operator and Remote (on the General tab).  The operator can scroll and select states and write out the value associated with the selected state using key buttons, or by using the arrow keys and Enter key on a keypad or an external keyboard.  If the selected state is not valid, that is, it is not selectable by the operator, or if the state's value is invalid, the highlight bar will not move. The cursor will move to the selected state, but it will be hollow, to indicate that the operator does not have access to the state.  The list scrolls if it contains more states than can be viewed at one time. If \"Wrap around\" is selected in the General tab, when the operator reaches the bottom of the list and presses the Move Down button, the cursor moves to the top of the list. If the cursor is at the top of the list and the operator presses the Move Up button, the cursor moves to the bottom of the list.  If \"Write on enter\" is selected (on the General tab), the value is not sent to the Value connection until the operator selects a valid state and presses the Enter button or Enter key. If \"Write on enter\" is not selected, the value is sent as soon as the operator scrolls to a new valid state.  When the list scrolls, if the Visible States connection is assigned, the values for the states visible in the list will be written to the Visible States connection. If the Top Position&nbsp;connection is assigned, the value for the state in the top position on the list will be sent to the Top Position connection.  Use auto repeat  If auto repeat is set up for the key button (on the key button's Timing tab) and the operator holds down the Move Up or Move Down button for the specified Auto repeat delay time, the list begins to scroll. If \"Write on enter\" is not selected, the application attempts to send a value to the Value connection for each state that scrolls by. However, some values may be lost if the Auto repeat rate is too fast for all the values to register.  If the list is remotely controlled  The application reads the value of the Indicator connection to determine what state to display. If the value of the Indicator connection matches a valid state, that is, one whose Access is set to either Remote or Operator and Remote, the state is highlighted and the value associated with the selected state is written to the Value connection, if it is assigned.  When the list scrolls, if the Visible States connection is assigned, the values for the states visible in the list will be written to the Visible States connection. If the Top Position connection is assigned, the value for the state in the top position on the list will be sent to the Top Position connection.  When the list is remotely controlled, the \"Write on enter\" selection does not apply.  The cursor is not shown.  See also  Create piloted control list selectors  Set up general properties for a piloted control list selector  Set up states for the piloted control list selector  Set up handshaking for the piloted control list selector  Set up connections for the piloted control list selector  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1697,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the piloted control list selector",
    "url": "60771.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs errors to diagnostics about the piloted control list selector under these circumstances:  Operator input to a remotely controlled list  If the list is remotely controlled, and the operator tries to use a key button or keyboard cursor key on it, the application logs an error.  Value connection unassigned  If the list is operator controlled and Write on enter (on the General tab) is not selected:  If the user selects a state whose access (on the States tab) is set to Operator or to Operator and Remote, and the Value connection is unassigned:  Nothing is written to the Value connection.  The cursor appears next to the selected state.  The highlight bar does not appear on the selected state.  The application logs an error.  If the list is operator controlled and Write on enter (on the General tab) is selected:  If the user presses an Enter key or button, and the selected state's access (on the States tab) is set to Operator or to Operator and Remote, and the Value connection is unassigned:  Nothing is written to the Value connection.  The highlight bar does not appear on the selected state.  The application logs an error.  Invalid values  If a state&#8217;s value is too large for the data type of the tag assigned to the Value connection, or if the value is outside the assigned tag&#8217;s minimum and maximum values:  The application does not write the value to the Value connection.  The application logs an error.  If the list is operator controlled, the highlight remains as is.  For example, the state value is too large for the tag&#8217;s data type if your data source is a PLC-5, the state value is 2,147,483,647, and the assigned tag is an integer tag using the address N7:0. Integer tags have a range of -32,768 to 32,767 only.  If Enter key handshaking is set up and \"Write on enter\" is selected (on the General tab), the Enter connection is not set to 1, and the handshake timers do not begin timing.  Enter key handshaking in effect  If the control list selector&#8217;s Enter key handshaking is still in effect when the operator presses the Enter button:  Nothing is written to the Value connection.  The cursor remains on the unselected state and the highlight remains on the selected state.  The Enter connection remains set to 1 and the handshake timers continue timing.  The application logs an error.  See also  Create piloted control list selectors  Configure the piloted control list selector (General tab)  Set up states for the piloted control list selector (States tab)  Set up handshaking for the piloted control list selector (Timing tab)  Set up connections for the piloted control list selector (Connections tab)  How the piloted control list selector works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1698,
    "title": "Create Display Print buttons",
    "url": "60786.htm",
    "text": "At run time the operator can use the Display Print button to generate a screen print of the visible portions of all the displays that are currently open, including portions of other Windows applications that are visible. The screen print is printed on the printer connected to the computer running the application.  To create a Display Print button  In the Graphics Display editor, select Object > Advanced > Display Print.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks.  See also  Configure the Display Print button  Set up a caption and image for a button  Causes of run-time errors for the Display Print button  ",
    "keywords": {
      "display print": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1699,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Display Print button",
    "url": "60788.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Display Print Button Properties dialog box to set up how a Display Print button looks.  To set up general options for the display print button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create Display Print buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Causes of run-time errors for the Display Print button  Options on the General tab of the Display Print Button Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1700,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Display Print Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330484.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Display Print Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  For objects without states, if you check this box the object always blinks. If you select a pattern style, the pattern also blinks  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Configuring the gradient fill  Create Display Print buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up general properties for a Display Print button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1701,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the Display Print button",
    "url": "60793.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs errors about the Display Print button to diagnostics under these circumstances:  Printer occupied  If the printer is currently printing when the operator presses the Display Print button, the display is not printed.  See also  Create Display Print buttons  Configure the Display Print button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1702,
    "title": "Create Language Switch buttons",
    "url": "60810.htm",
    "text": "At run time, the Language Switch button changes the language of the application to the language specified by the button.  To create a Language Switch button  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > Advanced > Language Switch Button, or click the Language Switch Button icon in the toolbar.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks, what language it will switch the application to, and a caption and/or image for the button.  See also  Configure the Language Switch button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  ",
    "keywords": {
      "language switch": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1703,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Language Switch button",
    "url": "60812.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Language Switch Button Properties dialog box to set up how a Language Switch button looks.  To set up general options for a Language Switch button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create Language Switch buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Options on the General tab of the Language Switch Button Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1704,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Language Switch Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330493.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Language Switch Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  Language  Selects the language that the application will switch to when the button is pressed.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Configuring the gradient fill  Create Language Switch buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up general properties for a Language Switch button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1705,
    "title": "Create a local message display",
    "url": "60157.htm",
    "text": "Create a local message display that prompts the operator about the information of a process or what to do next.  To create a local message display:  In the Graphics Display editor, from the Objects menu, select Advanced > Local Message Display.  Drag the cursor to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the display to be.  Double-click the display to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the display looks, the message file to use with the display, and its tags.  See also  How the local message display works at run time  Configuring the local message display  Set up controls for the local message display  ",
    "keywords": {
      "local message display": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1706,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a local message display",
    "url": "60163.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Local Message Display Properties dialog box to set up general options for a local message display.  To set up general options for a local message display  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Tip:  Use |n for a new line in your messages in the message file to control where a message begins a new line. Or you can select the Word wrap option to let the application begin a new line when the next word will not fit on the current line.  See also  Create local message displays  Options on the General tab of the Local Message Display Properties dialog box  How the local message display works at run time  Configuring the gradient fill  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1707,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Local Message Display Properties dialog box",
    "url": "297217.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Local Message Display Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Specifies the type of border for the button. The available options are:  None  Raised  Inset  RaisedInset  Line  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Specify the pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object).  If the object&#8217;s Back style is Transparent or Gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  Specifies the object's pattern color.  Fore color  This box shows the color of the text shown on the object. Click it to select another color.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  Text  The text properties apply to the messages on the object.  Font  Select the font to use for the message.  Size  Specify the font size to use for the message.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the message, if required.  Word wrap  Select this check box if you want the text to continue on the next line at the beginning of a new word.  If this check box is cleared, the text continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  Alignment  Specify how the message is positioned on the local message display object.  Message file  Specify the message file to use with the local message display object. Click the Browse (...) button to the right of the box to select the message file.  This option is available only when the Use variable message file check box is cleared.  Use variable message file  If this check box is selected, the string tag or expression specified for the Message File connection on the Connections tab will be used as the message file.  Use echo message  Select this check box to write the triggered message to the tag assigned to the Echo Message connection.  See also  Create a local message display  Set up general options for a local message display  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1708,
    "title": "Set up connections for a local message display",
    "url": "60165.htm",
    "text": "Use the Connections tab of the Local Message Display Properties dialog box to set up connections for a local message display.  To set up connections for a local message display  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the display to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign tags or expressions to the connections:  Value  Message File, if you want to use a variable message file  Echo Message, if you want to write the triggered message to a tag  See also  Create a local message display  Set up general options for a local message display  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1709,
    "title": "How the local message display works",
    "url": "60161.htm",
    "text": "Use a local message display to give the operator prompts about what to do next or information about a process.  At run time the local message display shows one message at a time from the message file you assigned to the local message display. The application monitors the Value connection at the data source, and shows the message with the trigger value that matches the Value connection value.  Tip:  A message file contains a list of messages with a trigger value for each message. Set up the message files in the Local Messages editor.   Message File  When you open a graphic display at run time, the application checks whether a valid local message file is referenced. If no message file is selected, or the selected message file is corrupt or does not exist, the following message shows on the local message display:  \"Referenced Local Message file is missing or corrupt.\"  You can select a local message file at design time, or use a variable message file and select a local message file at run time.  Value connection  When you open a graphic display at run time, if the referenced local message file is valid, the application reads the Value connection value and updates the local message display object based on the value.  If the Value connection value is 0, the local message display is cleared.  If the Value connection is unassigned, or the Value connection value does not match any of the trigger values in the specified message file, question marks (?) shows on the local message display.  Echo message  When the echo message function is used, the triggered message will be written to the string tag assigned to the Echo Message connection.  The echo message function works whether the local message display object is visible or hidden at run time.  See also  Create a local message display  Create local messages  Options on the General tab of the Local Message Display Properties dialog box  Set up connections for a local message display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1710,
    "title": "Create Macro buttons",
    "url": "60803.htm",
    "text": "The Macro button runs a specified macro when the operator presses it at run time.  To create a macro button  In the Graphics Display editor, from the Objects menu, select Advanced > Macro.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks and what macro will run when it is pressed.  See also  Configure the Macro button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  ",
    "keywords": {
      "macro": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1711,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Macro button",
    "url": "60805.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Macro Button Properties dialog box to set up how a Macro button looks.  To set up general options for a Macro button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create Macro buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up connections for the Macro button (Connections tab)  Set up common properties  Options on the General tab of the Macro Button Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1712,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Macro Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330496.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Macro Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Macro  Click the Browse button (...) to open the Component Browser and select the macro to run when the button object is pressed. The list contains all the macros in the project. A macro assigns a value to tags.  Use variable Macro  Select this check box to use the tag or expression content specified on the Connections tab. Clear this check box to use the macro name specified for the button.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Configuring the gradient fill  Create Macro buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up general properties for a Macro button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1713,
    "title": "Set up connections for the Macro button",
    "url": "80918.htm",
    "text": "The Macro button runs a specified macro when the operator presses it at runtime.  To set up tags and expressions for the Macro button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Assign tags and expressions to the connections for the macro name, as necessary.  Tip:  The macro name must be a string type.  See also  Create Macro buttons  Set up general properties for a Macro button  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1714,
    "title": "Create Shutdown buttons",
    "url": "60795.htm",
    "text": "At run time the operator can use the shutdown button to shut down the application. When the operator presses the button, the application closes, stopping all project components, and returns to Windows.  To create a shutdown button  In the Graphics Display editor, from the Objects menu, select Advanced > Shutdown.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks.  See also  Configure the shutdown button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  ",
    "keywords": {
      "shutdown": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1715,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Shutdown button",
    "url": "60797.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Shutdown Button Properties dialog box to set up how a Shutdown button looks.  To set up general options for a Shutdown button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create Shutdown buttons  Configure the gradient fill  Set up a caption and image for a button  Options on the General tab of the Shutdown Button Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1716,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Shutdown Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330500.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Shutdown Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Macro  Click the Browse button (...) to open the Component Browser and select the macro to run when the button object is pressed. The list contains all the macros in the project. A macro assigns a value to tags.  Use variable Macro  Select this check box to use the tag or expression content specified on the Connections tab. Clear this check box to use the macro name specified for the button.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Configuring the gradient fill  Create Shutdown buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up general properties for a Shutdown button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1717,
    "title": "Create goto Configure Mode buttons",
    "url": "60821.htm",
    "text": "At run time the operator can use the go to Configure Mode button to open the terminal's Configure Mode. When the operator presses the button, the application stops and the main Configure Mode dialog box opens.  To create a Goto Configure Mode button  In the Graphics Display editor, select Objects > Advanced > Goto Configure Mode.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks.  See also  Configure the Goto Configure Mode button  Set up a caption and image for a button  ",
    "keywords": {
      "goto configure mode": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1718,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Goto Configure Mode button",
    "url": "60823.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Goto Configure Mode Button Properties dialog box to set up how a Goto Configure Mode button looks.  To set up general options for a goto configure mode button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create go to configure mode buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Options on the General tab of the Goto Configure Mode Button Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1719,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Goto Configure Mode Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330503.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Goto Configure Mode Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Configuring the gradient fill  Create go to configure mode buttons  Set up a caption and image for a button  Set up general properties for a Goto Configure Mode button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1720,
    "title": "Create time and date displays",
    "url": "60648.htm",
    "text": "At run time the time and date display shows the current time and date, which the application obtains from the Windows operating system on the run-time computer.  Tip:  The display uses the language, time and date settings from the Regional (or Regional and Language) Options in the operating system.   If the operating system settings are different on your development and run-time systems, the run-time settings are used at run time.  To create a time and date display  In the Graphics Display editor, select Object > Advanced > Time and Date.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the display to be.  Double-click the display to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify the how the display looks.  See also  Configure the time and date display appearance (General tab)  ",
    "keywords": {
      "time and date": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1721,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a time and date display",
    "url": "60650.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Time and Date Display Properties dialog box to set up how a time and date display looks.  To set up general options for a time and date display  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  See also  Create time and date displays  Options on the General tab of the Time and Date Display Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1722,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Time Date Display Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330508.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Time Date Display Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Fore color  This box shows the color of the text shown on the object. Click it to select another color.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Text  The text properties apply to the time and date text on the display.  Font  Select the font to use for the caption.  Size  Select the font size to use for the caption or message.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the caption or message, if required.  Word wrap  Select this check box if you want the text to continue on the next line at the beginning of a new word.  If this check box is cleared, the text continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  Alignment  Specifies how the shown message or value is positioned on the object.  Time and date format  Select the time and date format to show.  The available options reflect the settings in your development computer&#8217;s operating system. In Windows, these are found in the Regional and Language options in the Control Panel. If the operating system settings are different on your development and run-time systems, the run-time settings are used at run time.  In the Property Panel, the name of this property is Format.  See also  Create time and date displays  Configure the gradient fill  Set up general properties for a time and date display object   "
  },
  {
    "id": 1723,
    "title": "Create an alarm list",
    "url": "60303.htm",
    "text": "You may need to create an alarm list on a graphic display.  To create an alarm list  In the Graphics Display editor, from the Objects menu, select Advanced > Alarm > Alarm List.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the list to be.  Double-click the list to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the list looks.  See also  Alarm list  Configure the alarm list  About alarms  ",
    "keywords": {
      "alarm": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1724,
    "title": "Alarm list",
    "url": "270872.htm",
    "text": "Alarm list shows a list of triggered alarms, with the newest alarms on top. When a trigger connection at the data source matches a message&#8217;s trigger value at run time, an alarm appears in the alarm list.   Use an alarm list to notify the operator when a situation requiring immediate attention occurs. For example, the list could show a message that warns the operator that the pressure in a boiler is too high.  Tip:  Set up the alarm messages and their trigger values in the Alarm Setup editor.  You can place an alarm list on any display in the project.  The number of alarm messages that fits on the display depends on the height of the alarm list, the font size, and the number of lines specified per alarm specified in the Alarm List Properties dialog box. If the message is too long to fit on the display, the last shown character is replaced with an asterisk (*).  When a display containing an alarm list object is opened, the alarm indicator (highlight bar or cursor) is at the top of the list, on the most recent alarm. As new alarms come in, the old alarms scroll down, but the indicator remains at the top.  If the highlight bar on the alarm list object is not at the top of the list, for example, the operator select an alarm other than the top one in the list, the list will not scroll down when new alarms are triggered. Therefore the new alarms will not automatically appear at the top of the list. If the highlight bar is moved, or if the screen is refreshed (by a screen change, for example), the new alarms appear at the top of the list.  Use the following Alarm buttons and Key buttons to interact with an alarm list:  Acknowledge Alarm  Acknowledge All Alarms  Silence Alarms  Clear Alarm History  Move Up  Move Down  Page Up  Page Down  Home  End  Enter  See also  Create an alarm list  The Alarm Setup editor  Alarm buttons  Create Key buttons  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1725,
    "title": "[HISTORY] and [ALARM MULTI-LINE] displays",
    "url": "270874.htm",
    "text": "The Graphics Libraries folder contains displays called [HISTORY] and [ALARM MULTI-LINE].  The [ALARM MULTI-LINE] display has an alarm list object and the following buttons:  Acknowledge Alarm  Acknowledge All Alarms  Silence Alarms  Move Up  Move Down  Close Display  The [HISTORY] display has a larger alarm list and the following buttons:  Acknowledge Alarm  Acknowledge All Alarms  Silence Alarms  Clear Alarm History  Home  End  Page Up  Page Down  Move Up  Move Down  Print History  Goto Display (to move to the [STATUS] display)  Sort Alarms  Close Display  You can use these displays as they are or modify them to suit your needs. For example, you can change the appearance of the alarm list object and buttons on the display, or add or remove buttons.  You can also create your own graphic display containing an alarm list object and buttons that you create, or copy and paste the objects on the [HISTORY] and [ALARM MULTI-LINE] displays to the graphic display that you want the alarm list graphic object to reside in.  See also  [ALARM] display  Create an alarm list  Alarm list  [STATUS] display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1726,
    "title": "Set up general properties for an alarm list",
    "url": "60317.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Properties dialog box to specify how the alarm list looks.  To set up general options for the alarm list  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the list to open its Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, specify the appearance, text, and the rest properties.  See also  Create an alarm list  Options on the General tab of the Alarm List Properties dialog box  Set up alarms for an alarm list  Set up alarm conditions for an alarm list  Set up connections for an alarm list  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1727,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Alarm List Properties dialog box",
    "url": "270875.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Alarm List Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to open the gradient fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Header back color  This box shows the current color for the heading bar at the top of the object. Click it to select another color.  Header fore color  This box shows the current color for the text in the heading bar at the top of the object. Click it to select another color.  Selection back color  This box shows the color for the highlight bar. Click it to select another color.  The highlight bar indicates the selected alarm at run time.  Selection fore color  This box shows the color for the caption on the highlighted alarm. Click it to select another color.  Text  The text properties apply to the alarms in the alarm list when they are not selected.  Font  Select the font to use for the alarm text.  Size  Select the font size to use for the alarm text.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the alarm text, if required.  Other  Key navigation  Select this check box to allow the user to navigate to the object using the keyboard and give the object input focus.  Wrap around  Select this check box if you want the list to wrap from the end of the list to the beginning when scrolling down, and from the beginning of the list to the end when scrolling up.  Use Alarm Identifier  Select this check box to write the alarm identifier value assigned to the alarm message to the tag specified for the AlarmIdentifier connection.  See also  Set up general properties for an alarm list  Configure the gradient fill  Set up connections for an alarm list  Options on the Message tab of the Alarm Setup editor  AlarmIdentifier  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1728,
    "title": "Set up alarms for an alarm list",
    "url": "60319.htm",
    "text": "Use the Alarm tab of the Alarm List Properties dialog box to specify what columns will be shown and how they will appear.  To specify what columns will be shown and how they will appear  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the alarm list to open its Properties dialog box.  On the Alarm tab, select and define the list's columns.  Specify the number of lines per alarm and how the currently selected alarm will be indicated.  Specify the trigger labels whose alarms will be filtered.  See also  Create an alarm list  Alarm list  Create an alarm trigger  Create an alarm message  Options on the Alarm tab of the Alarm List Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1729,
    "title": "Options on the Alarm tab of the Alarm List Properties dialog box",
    "url": "270877.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Alarm tab of the Alarm List Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Columns  Specify which columns to use, the symbols to show, if any, their time and date format and what header text they will show, if any.  Display header  Select this check box to show column headers on the object.  Select a column  Select a column to be edited:  Acknowledge symbol - Shows a symbol beside an acknowledged alarm.  Active symbol - Shows a symbol beside an active alarm.  Alarm time - Shows the time the alarm was triggered.  Acknowledge time - Shows the time the alarm was acknowledged.  Message - Shows the alarm's message as defined on the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor. You cannot clear the Display column check box for Message.  Display column  Select this check box if you want the selected column to appear on the object.  Time and date format  Select the time and date format to show.  The available options reflect the settings in your development computer&#8217;s operating system. In Windows, these are found in the Regional and Language options in the Control Panel. If the operating system settings are different on your development and run-time systems, the run-time settings are used at run time.  If the Acknowledge Symbol, Active symbol, or Message column is selected, this option is unavailable.  Header text  Type the text to show for the header of the selected column.  Symbol  Type a symbol to show beside an acknowledged or active alarm.  List settings  Select how many lines each alarm can use, how selected alarms will be indicated, and word wrap behavior for messages.  Lines per alarm  Select the number of lines, from 1 to 10, each alarm will occupy in the object. The default is 1.  Selected alarm indicator  Select whether the selected alarms will be indicated by a highlight bar or by a cursor.  Word wrap  Select this check box if you want the text to continue on the next line at the beginning of a new word.  If this check box is cleared, the text continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  Filtering  Filter the object to show only the alarms from the specified triggers.  Filtered triggers  Click the Browse button to open the Trigger Label Selector, where you can select the alarm trigger labels whose alarms will be included on the display as they occur.  If this box is blank, all alarms are shown.  See also  Set up alarms for an alarm list  Trigger Label Selector  Options on the Message tab of the Alarm Setup editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1730,
    "title": "Set up alarm conditions for an alarm list",
    "url": "60829.htm",
    "text": "Use the Display tab of the Alarm List Properties dialog box to show the alarms in any or all of the following conditions:  Active and acknowledged  Active and unacknowledged  Inactive and acknowledged  Inactive and unacknowledged  Tip:  If you assign the connections on the Connections tab of the Alarm List Properties dialog box, at run time, those settings will override the settings on the Display tab.  To set up what alarms will be shown  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the alarm list to open its Properties dialog box.  On the Display tab, specify the alarm conditions to be shown in the alarm list at run time.  Specify whether the alarm will blink, and what colors will be used to show the alarms.  See also  Alarm list  Options on the Display tab of the Alarm List Properties dialog box  Create an alarm trigger  Create an alarm message  Specify the graphic display and system-wide alarm options  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1731,
    "title": "Options on the Display tab of the Alarm List Properties dialog box",
    "url": "270879.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Display tab of the Alarm List Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Alarm conditions  Alarms can be acknowledged or unacknowledged, active or inactive. Specify the conditions for the alarms that will be displayed in the alarm list at run time.  Select alarm condition  Select an alarm condition from the list.  Active and acknowledged  Select this item and the Display check box to show the alarms that are active and acknowledged.  Active and unacknowledged  Select this item and the Display check box to show the alarms that are active but not acknowledged.  Inactive and acknowledged  Select this item and the Display check box to show the alarms that are no longer active but are acknowledged.  Inactive and unacknowledged  Select this item and the Display check box to show the alarms that are no longer active and have not been acknowledged.  Display  Select this check box to show the alarms that match the selected alarm condition at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the alarms that match the selected alarm condition to blink at run time.  Use alarm colors  Select this check box if you want the alarms that match the selected alarm condition to be shown using the colors specified in the Alarm Setup editor.  If this check box is cleared, alarms will be shown using the colors specified in the Back color and Fore color boxes.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the alarms matching the selected alarm condition. Click the box to select a different color.  Fore color  This box shows the current color of the shown text for the alarms matching the selected alarm condition. Click the box to select another color.  See also  Alarm list  Set up alarm conditions for an alarm list  The Alarm Setup editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1732,
    "title": "Set up connections for an alarm list",
    "url": "60830.htm",
    "text": "Use the Connections tab of the Alarm List Properties dialog box to assign tags or expressions to control an alarm list remotely. Connections will override the settings on the Display tab of the Alarm List Properties dialog box.  To set up tags and expressions for an alarm list  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the alarm list to open its Properties dialog box.  On the Connections tab, assign a tag or expression to the following connections:  ActiveAcknowledged  ActiveUnacknowledged  AlarmIdentifier  InactiveAcknowledged  InactiveUnacknowledged  Tip:  If you assign a tag, the application reads the value of the tag at the data source, and assigns this value to the connection.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and determines the conditions whose matching alarms will be shown in the alarm list.  If the assigned tag or expression value is non-zero, alarms matching the alarm condition related to the connection will be shown.  If the assigned tag or expression value is zero, alarms matching the alarm condition will not be shown.  If a tag or expression is assigned to a connection, the connection settings override the settings on the Display tab, if any.  At runtime, the Alarm Identifier specified on the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor will be written to the numeric tag assigned to the AlarmIdentifier connection only if the Use Alarm Identifier check boxes are selected on the General tab of the graphic object's Properties dialog box and the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor. If the Alarm Identifier column is blank on the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor and the Use Alarm Identifier check boxes on both tabs are selected, zero will be written to the numeric tag.  See also  Create an alarm list  Options on the Display tab of the Alarm List Properties dialog box  All properties  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1733,
    "title": "Create an alarm status list",
    "url": "60325.htm",
    "text": "You may need to create an alarm status list on a graphic display.  To create an alarm status list  In the Graphics Display editor, select Advanced > Alarm > Alarm Status List from the Objects menu.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the list to be.  Double-click the list to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the list looks.  See also  Alarm status list  [STATUS] display  Set up general properties for an alarm status list  Set up alarms for an alarm status list  Set up connections for an alarm status list  ",
    "keywords": {
      "alarm": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1734,
    "title": "Alarm status list",
    "url": "270867.htm",
    "text": "The alarm status list object shows the status of all alarms in the system. Use the alarm status list at run time to see a list of all alarms, currently active alarms, or alarms that have been active since the alarm status was last reset.  Use a Print Alarm Status button to print out lists of alarms grouped by status. You can print all alarms, active alarms, or past alarms.  See also  Create an alarm status list  [STATUS] display  Set up general properties for an alarm status list  Set up alarms for an alarm status list  Set up print options for the Print Alarm Status button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1735,
    "title": "[STATUS] display",
    "url": "270868.htm",
    "text": "The Graphics Libraries folder contains displays called [STATUS].  The [STATUS] display has an alarm status list object and the following buttons:  Alarm Status Mode  Silence Alarms  Reset Alarm Status  Home  End  Page Up  Page Down  Move Up  Move Down  Print Alarm Status  Goto Display (to move to the[HISTORY] display)  Close Display  You can use the [STATUS] display as it is or modify it to suit your needs. For example, you can change the appearance of the alarm status object and buttons in the display, or add or remove buttons.  You can also create your own graphic display containing an alarm status list object and buttons that you create, or copy and paste the objects on the [STATUS] display to the graphic display that you want the alarm status list graphic object to reside in.  See also  Create an alarm status list  Alarm status list  [HISTORY] and [ALARM MULTI-LINE] displays  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1736,
    "title": "Set up general properties for an alarm status list",
    "url": "60329.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Alarm Status List Properties dialog box to set up general properties for an alarm status list.  To set up general properties for an alarm status list  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the alarm status list to open its Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, specify the appearance, text, and the rest properties.  See also  Create an alarm status list  Alarm status list  Options on the General tab of the Alarm Status List Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1737,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Alarm Status List Properties dialog box",
    "url": "270869.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Alarm Status List Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to open the gradient fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Fore color  This box shows the color of the text shown on the object. Click it to select another color.  If Use alarm colors is selected, the application does not use this color. Instead, it shows messages using the Foreground and Background colors defined on the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor.  Header back color  This box shows the current color for the heading bar at the top of the object. Click it to select another color.  Header fore color  This box shows the current color for the text in the heading bar at the top of the object. Click it to select another color.  Selection back color  This box shows the color for the highlight bar. Click it to select another color.  The highlight bar indicates the selected alarm message at run time.  Selection fore color  This box shows the color for the caption on the highlighted alarm message. Click it to select another color.  Use alarm colors  Select this check box to show alarm messages using the Background and Foreground colors defined in the Alarm Setup editor instead of the Fore color and Back color selections on this tab.  Text  The text properties apply to the alarm messages in the alarm status list.  Font  Select the font to use for the message.  Size  Select the font size to use for the message.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the message, if required.  Other  Key navigation  Select this check box to allow the user to navigate to the object using the keyboard and give the object input focus.  Wrap around  Select this check box if you want the list to wrap from the end of the list to the beginning when scrolling down, and from the beginning of the list to the end when scrolling up.  Use Alarm Identifier  Select this check box to write the alarm identifier value assigned to the alarm message to the tag specified for the AlarmIdentifier connection.  See also  Set up general properties for an alarm status list  Set up connections for an alarm status list  Options on the Message tab of the Alarm Setup editor  Options in the Gradient Fill dialog box  AlarmIdentifier  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1738,
    "title": "Set up alarms for an alarm status list",
    "url": "60331.htm",
    "text": "Use the Alarm tab of the Alarm Status List Properties dialog box to specify what alarms will be shown in the alarm status list and how they will be shown.  To specify what alarms will be shown in the alarm status list and how they will be shown  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the alarm status list to open its Properties dialog box.  On the Alarm tab, select and define the list's columns.  Select what mode of alarm will be shown.  Specify whether headers and titles will be shown.  Specify the trigger labels whose alarms will be included.  See also  The Alarm Setup editor  Create an alarm status list  Alarm status list  Select trigger labels  Options on the Alarm tab of the Alarm Status List Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1739,
    "title": "Options on the Alarm tab of the Alarm Status List Properties dialog box",
    "url": "270871.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Alarm tab of the Alarm Status List Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Column  Specify which columns to use, their width, and header text, if any.  Display header  Select this check box to show column headers on the object.  Display title  Select this check box to show the title of the list.  Select a column  Select a column to be edited:  Trigger label - Shows the alarm's trigger label as defined on the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor.  Trigger value - Shows the alarm's trigger value as defined on the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor.  Alarm quantity - Shows the number of times the alarm has been triggered since the last reset.  Accumulated time - Shows the total amount of time that the alarm has been active since the last reset.  Alarm state - Shows whether the alarm is active or inactive. Active alarms are marked with an asterisk.  Message - Shows the alarm's message as defined on the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor.  Display column  Select this check box if you want the selected column to appear on the object.  Width  Type the width in pixels of the selected column.  Header text  Type the text to show for the header of the selected column.  List settings  Select how many lines each alarm can use, and word wrap behavior for messages.  Lines per alarm  Select the number of lines, from 1 to 10, each alarm will occupy in the object. The default is 1.  Word wrap  Select this check box if you want the text to continue on the next line at the beginning of a new word.  If this check box is cleared, the text continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  List Mode  Select whether to show all alarms, currently active alarms, or alarms that have been active in the past.  All Alarms  All the alarms that have been set up in the Alarm Setup editor, whether they are active, inactive, or never have been active, will be shown.  Active alarms  Only currently active alarms are shown. When an alarm becomes inactive, it is removed from the list.  Past alarms  Alarms that have been active at some point since the last reset are shown, whether they are currently active.  Titles  Use the default title for the selected list, or type a title up to 80 characters long.  Filtering  Filter the object to show only the alarms from the specified triggers.  Filtered triggers  Click the Browse button to open the Trigger Label Selector, where you can select the alarm trigger labels whose alarms will be included on the display as they occur.  If this box is blank, all alarms are shown.  See also  Set up alarms for an alarm status list  The Alarm Setup editor  Trigger Label Selector  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1740,
    "title": "Set up connections for an alarm status list",
    "url": "226485.htm",
    "text": "Use the Connections tab of the Alarm Status List Properties dialog box to set up connections for an alarm status list.  To set up connections for an alarm status list  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the alarm status list to open its Properties dialog box.  On the Connections tab, assign a numeric tag to the AlarmIdentifier connection.  Tip:  At runtime, the Alarm Identifier specified on the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor will be written to the numeric tag assigned to the AlarmIdentifier connection only if the Use Alarm Identifier check boxes are selected on the General tab of the graphic object's Properties dialog box and the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor. If the Alarm Identifier column is blank on the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor and the Use Alarm Identifier check boxes on both tabs are selected, zero will be written to the numeric tag.  See also  Alarm status list  Set up general properties for an alarm status list  Set up alarms for an alarm status list  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  AlarmIdentifier  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1741,
    "title": "Create an alarm banner",
    "url": "60309.htm",
    "text": "You may need to create an alarm banner on a graphic display.  To create an alarm banner  In the Graphics Display editor, from the Objects menu, select Advanced > Alarm > Alarm Banner.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the banner to be.  Double-click the banner to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the banner looks.  See also  Alarm banner  [STATUS] display  Set up general properties for an alarm status list  Set up alarms for an alarm status list  Set up connections for an alarm status list  ",
    "keywords": {
      "alarm": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1742,
    "title": "Alarm banner",
    "url": "270807.htm",
    "text": "An alarm banner is a list showing only one unacknowledged alarm.  By default, each new unacknowledged alarm overwrites the previous one as long as the object is visible.  If the Queue new alarms check box on the Alarm tab of the Alarm Banner Properties dialog box is selected, new alarms do not overwrite previous alarms, but are queued in the order they occur. The alarm banner shows the first of the queued unacknowledged alarms. The operator has to acknowledge each alarm individually by the Ack Alarm button or the Ack All button to remove it from the queue.  See also  Create an alarm banner  [ALARM BANNER] display  Set up general properties for an alarm banner  Set up alarms for the alarm banner  Set up connections for an alarm banner  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1743,
    "title": "[ALARM BANNER] display",
    "url": "270808.htm",
    "text": "The Graphics Libraries folder contains a display called [ALARM BANNER].  The [ALARM BANNER] display has an alarm banner object and the following buttons:  Acknowledge Alarm  Silence Alarms  Clear Alarm Banner  Close Display  You can use the [ALARM BANNER] display as it is or modify it to suit your needs. For example, you can change the appearance of the alarm banner object and buttons on the display, or add or remove buttons.  You can also create your own graphic display containing an alarm banner object and buttons that you create, or copy and paste the objects on the [ALARM BANNER] display to the graphic display that you want the alarm banner graphic object to reside in.  See also  Create an alarm banner  Alarm banner  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1744,
    "title": "Set up general properties for an alarm banner",
    "url": "60311.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Alarm Banner Properties dialog box to set up general properties for an alarm banner.  To set up general properties for an alarm banner  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the alarm banner object to open its Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, specify the appearance, text, and the rest properties.  See also  Create an alarm banner  Alarm banner  Options on the General tab of the Alarm Banner Properties dialog box  Set up alarms for an alarm banner  Set up connections for an alarm banner  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1745,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Alarm Banner Properties dialog box",
    "url": "270809.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Alarm Banner Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border or alarms. If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Fore color  This box shows the color of the text shown on the object. Click it to select another color.  If Use alarm colors is selected, the application does not use this color. Instead, it shows messages using the Foreground and Background colors defined on the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor.  Use alarm colors  Select this check box to show alarm messages using the Background and Foreground colors defined in the Alarm Setup editor instead of the Fore color and Back color selections on this tab.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the alarm message to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  Text  The text properties apply to the alarm messages in the alarm banner.  Font  Select the font to use for the message.  Size  Select the font size to use for the message.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the message, if required.  Word wrap  Select this check box if you want the text to continue on the next line at the beginning of a new word.  If this check box is cleared, the text continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  Alignment  Select how you want the text to be positioned on the object.  Other  Key navigation  Select this check box to allow the user to navigate to the object using the keyboard and give the object input focus.  Use Alarm Identifier  Select this check box to write the alarm identifier value assigned to the alarm message to the tag specified for the AlarmIdentifier connection.  See also  Set up general properties for an alarm banner  Set up connections for an alarm banner  Options on the Message tab of the Alarm Setup editor  AlarmIdentifier  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1746,
    "title": "Set up alarms for an alarm banner",
    "url": "60313.htm",
    "text": "Use the Alarm tab of the Alarm Banner dialog box to specify what alarms will be shown and how they will be shown.  To specify what alarms will be shown and how they will be shown  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the alarm banner to open its Properties dialog box.  On the Alarm tab, select the alarm settings, that is, how the alarms will be queued what alarms will be shown, and what information will be shown for each alarm.  Specify what trigger labels will be filtered, if any.  Tip:  If a message defined on the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor uses an embedded variable to show the value of an alarm, and if that alarm is in alarm when the application starts up, the alarm banner will show question marks in place of the embedded variable. This is because the alarm system cannot determine when the alarm was triggered, and therefore cannot determine what the value of the variable was at that time. After the value has been reset to 0, the embedded variable value will show accurately the next time the alarm is triggered.  See also  The Alarm Setup editor  Create an alarm banner  Set up general properties for an alarm banner  Options on the Alarm tab of the Alarm Banner Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1747,
    "title": "Options on the Alarm tab of the Alarm Banner Properties dialog box",
    "url": "270811.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Alarm tab of the Alarm Banner Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Alarm settings  Specify alarm options in this area.  Queue new alarms  Select this check box to queue new alarms until the operator clears the current alarm from the banner.  If this check box is clear, new alarms will replace the shown alarm as soon as they occur, and the banner will always show the most recent alarm.  Display trigger value  Select this check box if you want the alarm banner to show the current alarm's trigger value as defined on the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor.  Display trigger label  Select this check box if you want the alarm banner to show the current alarm's trigger label as defined on the Trigger tab of the Alarm Setup editor.  Display inactive alarms  Select this check box if you want the alarm banner to show inactive alarms that have not been acknowledged as well as active alarms that have not been acknowledged.  Display alarm state  If the Display inactive alarms check box is selected, select this check box to show the alarm state. If an alarm is still active, an asterisk (*) appears beside the message.  Display alarm time  Select this check box if you want the alarm banner to show the time when the current alarm occurred.  Alarm time format  If you select the Display alarm time check box, select the format in which to show alarm times.  Filtering  Filter the object to show only the alarms from the specified triggers.  Filtered triggers  Click the Browse button to open the Trigger Label Selector, where you can select the alarm trigger labels whose alarms will be included on the display as they occur.  If this box is blank, all alarms are shown.  See also  Set up alarms for an alarm banner  The Alarm Setup editor  Trigger Label Selector  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1748,
    "title": "Set up connections for an alarm banner",
    "url": "226484.htm",
    "text": "Use the Connections tab of the Alarm Banner Properties dialog box to set up connections for an alarm banner.  To set up connections for an alarm banner  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the alarm status list to open its Properties dialog box.  On the Connections tab, assign a numeric tag to the AlarmIdentifier connection.  Tip:  At runtime, the Alarm Identifier specified on the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor will be written to the numeric tag assigned to the AlarmIdentifier connection only if the Use Alarm Identifier check boxes are selected on the General tab of the graphic object's Properties dialog box and the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor. If the Alarm Identifier column is blank on the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor and the Use Alarm Identifier check boxes on both tabs are selected, zero will be written to the numeric tag.  See also  Alarm banner  Set up general properties for an alarm banner  Set up alarms for an alarm banner  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  AlarmIdentifier  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1749,
    "title": "Trigger Label Selector",
    "url": "60333.htm",
    "text": "The Trigger Label Selector lists all the trigger labels defined in the Alarm Setup editor.  Select the check box for each trigger label whose alarm you want to show in the alarm list, alarm banner, or alarm status list object, or that you want an alarm button to act on.  FactoryTalk View Machine Edition 5.00.00 and later supports alarm triggers in multiple languages. When you create an alarm trigger, its name is in the application's current language. When a graphic object such as the alarm list filters alarms by the trigger name, the Trigger Label Selector shows the trigger name in the application's default language. If the trigger name has not been set up in the default language, a question mark (?) appears instead of the trigger name. To correct the display, import the trigger labels for the default language.  If you change the default language, you must re-specify the trigger labels for each of the graphic objects that are filtering triggers, using the trigger label names in the new default language.  See also  The Alarm Setup editor  Set up alarms for an alarm list  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1750,
    "title": "Create an Alarm button",
    "url": "60305.htm",
    "text": "All Alarm buttons are created in the same way.  To create an Alarm button  In the Graphics Display editor, from Objects menu, select Advanced > Alarm, and then select the button you want to create.  Drag the mouse to draw a rectangle of the general size and in the general location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks.  See also  Alarm buttons  Configure the Alarm button (General tab)  Set up a caption and image for a button  How the Alarm buttons work at run time  ",
    "keywords": {
      "alarm": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1751,
    "title": "Alarm buttons",
    "url": "270970.htm",
    "text": "Use these alarm buttons to interact with the alarm list, alarm banner, or alarm status list, and to clear and sort the alarm history:  Alarm buttons  Descriptions  Acknowledge Alarm  This button acknowledges and silences the selected alarm in an alarm list or alarm banner.  Acknowledge All Alarms  This button acknowledges and silences all unacknowledged alarms or the unacknowledged alarms for a specific alarm trigger in the alarm history.  Alarm Status Mode  This button changes the mode of an alarm status list to its next setting. The order of the settings is:  All alarms  Active alarms  Past alarms  The current setting is dependent on how the list is set up on the Alarm tab of the list's Properties dialog box.  Clear Alarm Banner  This button removes the current alarm from the banner without removing it from the alarm history and alarm lists.  Clear Alarm History  This button removes all alarms or the alarms for a specific alarm trigger from the alarm history and alarm lists, and resets the alarm status.  If you choose to reset alarms, pressing this button resets the number of times an alarm has been triggered to&nbsp;0, and the accumulated time in alarm to&nbsp;0, for all alarms that are being cleared. If the alarm is still active, the number of times in alarm changes to&nbsp;1 after the alarm is reset to 0.  Print Alarm History  This button prints a report of the alarm messages in the alarm log file. You can include all alarms, or the alarms for a specific alarm trigger. The report can include the time when alarms occurred and were acknowledged.  Print Alarm Status  This button prints a report of the status of all alarms or the alarms for a specific alarm trigger. The report can include how many times each alarm was triggered and the accumulated time in alarm.  Reset Alarm Status  This button resets the accumulated time and the number of times the alarm has been triggered to zero for all alarms in the application.  If the alarm is still active, the number changes to&nbsp;1.  Silence Alarms  This button silences all current alarms. If the hold time for any alarm is still in effect, the alarm cannot be silenced.  Sort Alarms  This button sorts the alarms in the alarm history and alarm lists by time or by trigger.  When alarms are sorted by trigger, they are first sorted so that all alarms assigned to one trigger are together in the order that the triggers appear in the Alarm Setup editor. Within these groups, triggers are sorted by trigger value.  See also  Create an Alarm button  Set up general properties for an Alarm button  Set up print options for a Print Alarm History button  Set up a caption and image for a button  How the Alarm buttons work at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1752,
    "title": "Set up general properties for an Alarm button",
    "url": "60321.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Alarm Button Properties dialog box to set up how an alarm button looks.  To set up general options for an alarm button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify these properties:  General appearance  Touch margins  Audio (whether the button beeps at run time)  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to set up a caption and image for the button.  See also  Create an Alarm button  Alarm buttons  Options on the General tab of the Alarm Button Properties dialog box  Set up a caption and image for a button  How the Alarm buttons work at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1753,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Alarm Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "333935.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Alarm Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent, the pattern is not visible. If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object or state. Click it to select another color. If the back style is transparent, the application does not use this background color. If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the gradient fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill. For objects with a line style other than Solid, the background color is used for the spaces between the dots or dashes.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object or state. Click it to select another color. If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object or state. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Filtering/Alarm settings  You can filter the Alarm button so that only alarms from the specified triggers are affected by the button. If this box is blank, all alarms are affected. The following buttons have this property:  Acknowledge All Alarms button - acknowledges only filtered alarms  Clear Alarm History button - clears only filtered alarms  Print Alarm History and Print Alarm Status buttons - print only filtered alarms  Filtered triggers  Click the Browse button to open the Trigger Label Selector, where you can select the alarm trigger labels whose alarms will be included in the button's action.  Reset alarm status  This property applies only to the Clear Alarm History button.  Select this check box if you want the alarm status to be reset when the Clear Alarm History button is pressed.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed. If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  The Send press to and Linked object properties apply only to the Acknowledge Alarm button.  Send press to  Select whether the button press will be sent to whatever object currently has the focus, or to a specific object linked to the button.  Linked object  Choose the object the button press will be sent to if the Send press to property is set to Linked object.  See also  Set up general properties for an Alarm button  Bounding box  Alarm buttons  How the Alarm buttons work at run time  Configure the gradient fill  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1754,
    "title": "Set up print options for a Print Alarm History button",
    "url": "60849.htm",
    "text": "At run time, the operator presses a Print Alarm History button to print the contents of the alarm history.  Tip:  You cannot print the alarm history and the alarm status at the same time.  You can print alarms in landscape mode with a line printer, but only one alarm is printed per page.  If you set up alarm messages in multiple languages, all messages, trigger labels and times are printed in the current application language.  To set up print options &nbsp;for a Print Alarm History button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Print tab.  Specify these properties for the Print button:  column to print  column heading  column width  See also  Create an Alarm button  Alarm buttons  Set up general properties for an Alarm button  Options on the Print tab of the Alarm History Button Properties dialog box  How the Alarm buttons work at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1755,
    "title": "Options on the Print tab of the Alarm History Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "333938.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Print tab of the Alarm History Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Column  Select a column  By default, all the columns in the alarm history display are selected for printing. If you want to omit a column or columns from the print, select the column and clear the Print check box.  Trigger label. Prints the trigger label associated with the alarm  Trigger value. Prints the trigger value of the alarm  Alarm time. Prints the date and time at which the alarm was triggered  Acknowledge time. Prints the date and time at which the alarm was acknowledged  Message. Prints the alarm message  Print  Check this box for each column that you want to print. Clear this box for each column that you do not want to print.  Width  Type the number of characters for the width of the selected column. This property applies only to the Trigger label and Trigger value columns.  Heading  Title  Type a title for the printed report, up to 80 characters long. The default title is Alarm Status.  Print type  All Alarms  Select to print&nbsp;the status of all the alarms set up in the Alarm Setup editor.  Active alarms  Select to print the status of only those alarms that are currently active.  Past alarms  Select to print the status of all the alarms that have been active since the alarm status was last reset.  See also  Set up print options for a Print Alarm History button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1756,
    "title": "Set up print options for a Print Alarm Status button",
    "url": "60327.htm",
    "text": "At run time, the operator presses a Print Alarm Status button to print the status of a group of alarms in the application.  Tip:  You cannot print the alarm history and the alarm status at the same time.  You can print alarms in landscape mode with a line printer, but only one alarm is printed per page.  If you set up alarm messages in multiple languages, all messages, trigger labels and times are printed in the current application language.  To set up print options&nbsp;for a Print Alarm Status button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Print tab.  Specify these properties:  column to print  column heading  what type of alarms to print  See also  Create an Alarm button  Set up general properties for an Alarm button  Options on the Print tab of the Print Alarm Status Button Properties dialog box  Set up a caption and image for a button  How the Alarm buttons work at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1757,
    "title": "Options on the Print tab of the Print Alarm Status Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "333946.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Print tab of the Print Alarm Status Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Column  Select a column  By default, all the columns in the alarm status display are selected for printing. If you want to omit a column or columns from the print, select the column and clear the Print check box.  Trigger label. Prints the trigger label associated with the alarm  Trigger value. Prints the trigger value of the alarm  Alarm quantity. Prints the number of times the alarm has been triggered  Accumulated time. Prints the total time the alarm has been in alarm since the last reset  Alarm state. Prints the alarm status. At run time, an asterisk (*) indicates the alarm is active. If the column is blank, the alarm is off.  Message. Prints the alarm message  Print  Check this box for each column that you want to print. Clear this box for each column that you do not want to print.  Width  Type the number of characters for the width of the selected column. This property applies only to the Trigger label and Trigger value columns.  Heading  Title  Type a title for the printed report, up to 80 characters long. The default title is Alarm Status.  Print type  All Alarms  Select to print&nbsp;the status of all the alarms set up in the Alarm Setup editor.  Active alarms  Select to print the status of only those alarms that are currently active.  Past alarms  Select to print the status of all the alarms that have been active since the alarm status was last reset.  See also  Set up print options for a Print Alarm Status button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1758,
    "title": "How the Alarm buttons work at run time",
    "url": "60307.htm",
    "text": "The Alarm buttons work with the alarm system at run time.  Acknowledge messages  When the operator presses the Acknowledge Alarm button, the current alarm is acknowledged and the Ack connection is set to the alarm trigger value at the data source. The value is held as long as the operator presses the button, or for the notification hold time, whichever is longer. Then the connection's value is reset to zero. Assign the Ack connection and specify the hold time in the Alarm Setup editor.  If the hold time for any alarm is still in effect and the operator presses Acknowledge Alarm, the button press is ignored.  If the button's Send press to property is set to Object With Focus, and the current object with focus is not an alarm list or alarm banner, the button press will have no effect.  If the button's Send press to property is set to Linked Object, pressing the button will not change input focus to the linked object. Whatever object has input focus on the display will continue to have input focus.  When the operator presses the Acknowledge All button, all unacknowledged alarms in the system are acknowledged, and the \"Acknowledge all value\" (specified in the Alarm Setup editor) is sent to the Ack connection. The value is held as long as the operator presses the button, or for the duration of the notification hold time, whichever is longer. Then the connection's value is reset to zero. Assign the Ack connection and specify the hold time in the Alarm Setup editor.  If the hold time for any alarm is still in effect and the operator presses Acknowledge All, the button press is ignored.  Silence alarms  When the operator presses the Silence Alarms button, any audible signal triggered by an alarm is silenced. The Silence connection is set to 1 for as long as the operator presses the button or for the notification hold time, whichever is longer. Then the connection's value is reset to zero. Assign the Silence connection and specify the hold time in the Alarm Setup editor.  If the hold time for any alarm is still in effect and the operator presses Silence Alarms, the button press is ignored.  Clear messages  When the operator presses the Clear Alarm History button, all alarms in the alarm history are cleared. If there is an unacknowledged alarm whose trigger has the Use ack all value check box checked and the Ack connection assigned, the operator is prompted to acknowledge the unacknowledged alarms before clearing the messages from the alarm history. If the operator chooses to acknowledge the alarms, the \"Acknowledge all value\" is sent to the Ack connection before clearing the messages. If the connection is not assigned, or if the operator chooses not to acknowledge alarms, all messages are cleared immediately.  Pressing the Clear Alarm History button also closes the Current Alarm Display. To prevent the Current Alarm Display from closing, go to Terminal Settings > Alarms and set the Close Alarm Display When Newest Alarm Acknowledged option to No.  See also  Create Alarm buttons  Create alarm lists  Create alarm banners  Alarm list  The Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1759,
    "title": "Create an audit trail list",
    "url": "311576.htm",
    "text": "You may need to create an audit trail list on a graphic display.  To create an audit trail list  In the Graphics Display editor, from the Objects menu, select Advanced > Audit > Audit Trail List.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the list to be.  Double-click the list to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the list looks.  See also  Audit trail list  Set up general properties for an audit trail list  Set up appearance for an audit trail list  Create a Clear Audit Trail button  ",
    "keywords": {
      "audit": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1760,
    "title": "Audit trail list",
    "url": "311650.htm",
    "text": "Audit trail list shows the information about operator actions at run time, including:  Occurred time - The local date and time when the software product records the action as having occurred.  Source - The name of the software product that logged the action in the audit log.  Location - The name of the computer, Windows CE device, or MobileView terminal on which the action took place.  Resource - Reserved  Username - The login ID of the user who is using the software product. This can be a FactoryTalk Security user or a Microsoft Windows user, depending on how the user logged into the software product that generated the audit record.  Message - Information about a specific operator action executed within the context of the running runtime application. For example, the message for a tag write will include the tag being modified, and the tag&#8217;s previous and new values.  Use the Clear Audit Trail button and the following Key buttons to interact with an audit trail list:  Move up  Move down  Page up  Page down  Home  End  See also  Create an audit trail list  Set up general properties for an audit trail list  Set up appearance for an audit trail list  Clear Audit Trail button  Create Key buttons  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1761,
    "title": "Set up general properties for an audit trail list",
    "url": "311579.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Properties dialog box to specify how the audit trail list looks.  To set up general options for the audit trail list  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the list to open its Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, specify the appearance, text, and the rest properties.  See also  Create an audit trail list  Audit trail list  Options on the General tab of the Audit Trail List Properties dialog box  Set up appearance for an audit trail list  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1762,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Audit Trail List Properties dialog box",
    "url": "312227.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Audit Trail List Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to open the gradient fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Fore color  This box shows the color of the text shown on the object. Click it to select another color.  Header back color  This box shows the current color for the heading bar at the top of the object. Click it to select another color.  Header fore color  This box shows the current color for the text in the heading bar at the top of the object. Click it to select another color.  Selection back color  This box shows the color for the highlight bar. Click it to select another color.  The highlight bar indicates the selected audit at run time.  Selection fore color  This box shows the color for the caption on the highlighted audit. Click it to select another color.  Text  The text properties apply to the audit entries in the audit trail list when they are not selected.  Font  Select the font to use for the audit text.  Size  Select the font size to use for the audit text.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the audit text.  Other  Key navigation  Select this check box to allow the user to navigate to the object using the keyboard and give the object input focus.  Wrap around  Select this check box if you want the list to wrap from the end of the list to the beginning when scrolling down, and from the beginning of the list to the end when scrolling up.  See also  Create an audit trail list  Audit trail list  Set up general properties for an audit trail list  Configure the gradient fill  Options on the Audit tab of the Audit Trail List Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1763,
    "title": "Set up appearance for an audit trail list",
    "url": "311580.htm",
    "text": "Use the Audit tab of the Audit Trail List Properties dialog box to specify what columns will be shown and how they will appear.  To set up appearance for an audit trail list  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the list to open its Properties dialog box.  On the Audit tab, select and define the list's columns.  Specify the number of lines per audit.  See also  Create an audit trail list  Audit trail list  Set up general properties for an audit trail list  Options on the Audit tab of the Audit Trail List Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1764,
    "title": "Options on the Audit tab of the Audit Trail List Properties dialog box",
    "url": "312229.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Audit tab of the Audit Trail List Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Columns  Specify which columns to use, their time and date format, and what header text they will show, if any.  Display header  Select this check box to show column headers on the object.  Select a column  Select a column to be edited:  Occurred Time  Source  Location  Resource  Username  Message  Display column  Select this check box if you want the selected column to appear on the object.  Time and date format  Select the time and date format to show.  The available options reflect the settings in your development computer&#8217;s operating system. In Windows, these are found in the Regional and Language options in the Control Panel. If the operating system settings are different on your development and run-time systems, the run-time settings are used at run time.  This option is available only when Occurred Time is selected.  Header text  Type the text to show for the header of the selected column.  Column width  Define the width of the selected column in pixels.  This option applies only to the Source, Location, Resource, and Username columns.  List settings  Specify the amount of lines each audit can use and word wrap behavior for messages.  Lines per audit  Select the number of lines, from 1 to 10, each audit will occupy in the list.  Word wrap  Select this check box if you want the text to continue on the next line at the beginning of a new word.  If this check box is cleared, the text continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  See also  Create an audit trail list  Audit trail list  Options on the General tab of the Audit Trail List Properties dialog box  Set up appearance for an audit trail list  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1765,
    "title": "How the audit graphic objects work",
    "url": "308799.htm",
    "text": "Audit trail list shows the information about operator actions at run time, including:  Occurred time - The local date and time when the software product records the action as having occurred.  Source - The name of the software product that logged the action in the audit log.  Location - The name of the computer, Windows CE device, or MobileView terminal on which the action took place.  Resource - Reserved  Username - The login ID of the user who is using the software product. This can be a FactoryTalk Security user or a Microsoft Windows user, depending on how the user logged into the software product that generated the audit record.  Message - Information about a specific operator action executed within the context of the running runtime application. For example, the message for a tag write will include the tag being modified, and the tag&#8217;s previous and new values.  Audit trail detail object shows the information about the selected audit entry on an audit trail list.  When a display containing an audit trail list object is opened, the highlight bar is on the most recent audit message at the top of the list. As new audit messages come in, the old messages scroll down, but the indicator remains at the top. If the highlight bar on the object is not at the top of the list, for example, the operator selects an audit message other than the top one in the list, the list will not scroll down when new messages come in. Therefore, the new audit will not automatically appear at the top of the list.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1766,
    "title": "Create an audit trail detail object",
    "url": "316057.htm",
    "text": "You may need to create an audit trail detail object to view the details of an audit entry on a graphic display.  To create an audit trail detail object  In the Graphics Display editor, from the Objects menu, select Advanced > Audit > Audit Trail Detail.  Drag the mouse to draw a rectangle of the general size and in the general location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the object looks.  See also  Audit trail detail object  Set up general properties for an audit trail detail object  Set up appearance for an audit trail detail object  ",
    "keywords": {
      "audit": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1767,
    "title": "Audit trail detail object",
    "url": "316058.htm",
    "text": "Audit trail detail object shows the information about the selected audit entry on an audit trail list, including:  Occurred time - The local date and time when the software product records the action as having occurred.  Source - The name of the software product that logged the action in the audit log.  Location - The name of the computer, Windows CE device, or MobileView terminal on which the action took place.  Resource - Reserved  Username - The login ID of the user who is using the software product. This can be a FactoryTalk Security user or a Microsoft Windows user, depending on how the user logged into the software product that generated the audit record.  Message - Information about a specific operator action executed within the context of the running runtime application. For example, the message for a tag write will include the tag being modified, and the tag&#8217;s previous and new values.  Use the Clear Audit Trail button and the following Key buttons to interact with an audit trail detail object:  Move up  Move down  See also  Audit trail list  Create an audit trail detail object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1768,
    "title": "Set up general properties for an audit trail detail object",
    "url": "316059.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Audit Trail Detail Properties dialog box to specify how the audit trail detail object looks.  To set up general options for the audit trail detail object  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, specify the appearance, text, and the rest properties.  See also  Create an audit trail detail object  Audit trail detail object  Options on the General tab of the Audit Trail Detail Properties dialog box  Set up appearance for an audit trail detail object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1769,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Alarm List Properties dialog box",
    "url": "317315.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Audit Trail Detail Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to open the gradient fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Fore color  This box shows the color of the text shown on the object. Click it to select another color.  Header back color  This box shows the current color for the heading column. Click it to select another color.  Header fore color  This box shows the current color for the text in the heading column. Click it to select another color.  Text  The text properties apply to the audit entries in the audit trail list when they are not selected.  Font  Select the font to use for the audit text.  Size  Select the font size to use for the audit text.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the audit text.  Other  Key navigation  Select this check box to allow the user to navigate to the object using the keyboard and give the object input focus.  Wrap around  Select this check box if you want the list to wrap from the end of the list to the beginning when scrolling down, and from the beginning of the list to the end when scrolling up.  Receive selection from  Specify the audit trail list to receive selection from.  See also  Create an audit trail detail object  Audit trail detail object  Set up general properties for an audit trail detail object  Configure the gradient fill  Options on the Audit tab of the Audit Trail Detail Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1770,
    "title": "Set up appearance for an audit trail detail object",
    "url": "316060.htm",
    "text": "Use the Audit tab of the Audit Trail Detail Properties dialog box to specify what rows will be shown and how they will appear.  To set up appearance for an audit trail detail object:  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  On the Audit tab, select and define the object's rows.  See also  Create an audit trail detail object  Audit trail detail object  Set up general properties for an audit trail detail object  Options on the Audit tab of the Audit Trail Detail Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1771,
    "title": "Options on the Audit tab of the Audit Trail List Properties dialog box",
    "url": "317316.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Audit tab of the Audit Trail Detail Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Rows  Specify which rows to use, their time and date format, and what header text they will show, if any.  Select a row  Select a row to be edited:  Occurred Time  Source  Location  Resource  Username  Message  Display row  Select this check box if you want the selected row to appear in the object.  Time and date format  Select the time and date format to show.  The available options reflect the settings in your development computer&#8217;s operating system. In Windows, these are found in the Regional and Language options in the Control Panel. If the operating system settings are different on your development and run-time systems, the run-time settings are used at run time.  This option is available only when Occurred Time is selected.  Header text  Type the text to show for the header of the selected row.  Word wrap  Select this check box if you want the text to continue on the next line at the beginning of a new word.  If this check box is cleared, the text continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  See also  Create an audit trail detail object  Audit trail detail object  Options on the General tab of the Audit Trail Detail Properties dialog box  Set up appearance for an audit trail detail object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1772,
    "title": "Create a Clear Audit Trail button",
    "url": "311577.htm",
    "text": "You may need to create a Clear Audit Trail button on a graphic display.  To create a Clear Audit Trail button  In the Graphics Display editor, from the Objects menu, select Advanced > Audit > Clear Audit Trail.  Drag the mouse to draw a rectangle of the general size and in the general location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks.  See also  Clear Audit Trail button  Set up general properties for the Clear Audit Trail button  Set up a caption and image for a button  Create an audit trail list  ",
    "keywords": {
      "audit": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1773,
    "title": "Clear Audit Trail button",
    "url": "311651.htm",
    "text": "Use the Clear Audit Trail button to clear the audit log file, audit trail list, and audit trail RAM cache.  See also  Create a Clear Audit Trail button  Audit trail list  Create an audit trail list  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1774,
    "title": "Set up general properties for the Clear Audit Trail button",
    "url": "311585.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Properties dialog box to specify how the Clear Audit Trail button looks.  To set up general properties for the Clear Audit Trail button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify these properties:  General appearance  Touch margins  Audio (whether the button beeps at run time)  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to set up a caption and image for the button.  See also  Create a Clear Audit Trail button  Clear Audit Trail button  Options on the General tab of the Clear Audit Trail Button Properties dialog box  Set up a caption and image for a button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1775,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Clear Audit Trail Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "312540.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Clear Audit Trail Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object).  If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object or state. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Touch margins  Specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Specify the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Specify the Audio option.  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  Create a Clear Audit Trail button  Clear Audit Trail button  Set up general properties for the Clear Audit Trail button  Configure the gradient fill  bounding box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1776,
    "title": "Create Information Acknowledge buttons",
    "url": "60589.htm",
    "text": "The information message display gives the operator run-time messages about information that requires immediate attention. The operator can use the Information Acknowledge button to acknowledge the message in the display.  When the operator presses the button, the Ack connection is set to 1 at the data source. The value is held as long as the operator presses the button, or for the acknowledge hold time, whichever is longer. Then the connection is reset to 0.  Tip:  Assign the Ack connection and specify a hold time in the Information Setup editor.  The default [INFORMATION] graphic display contains an information message display and the Information Acknowledge button. You can use the [INFORMATION] display as is, or modify the appearance of the button in the display. Or, you can create your own graphic display containing an information message display and Information Acknowledge button that you create.  To create an Information Acknowledge button  In the Graphics Display editor, from the Objects menu, select Advanced > Information > Acknowledge.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks.  See also  Configure the Information Acknowledge button  Set up a caption and image for a button  Create information message displays  How the information message display works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the information message display  About information messages  ",
    "keywords": {
      "information": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1777,
    "title": "Set up general properties for an Information Acknowledge button",
    "url": "60593.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Information Acknowledge Button Properties dialog box to set up how an Information Acknowledge button looks.  To set up general options for an Information Acknowledge button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create Information Acknowledge buttons  Create information message displays  Options on the General tab of the Information Acknowledge Button Properties dialog box  Set up a caption and image for a button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1778,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Information Acknowledge Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330512.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Information Acknowledge Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  See also  bounding box  Configuring the gradient fill  Create Information Acknowledge buttons  Create information message displays  Set up general properties for an Information Acknowledge button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1779,
    "title": "Create information message displays",
    "url": "60587.htm",
    "text": "Use the information message display object to give the operator run-time messages about information that requires immediate attention.  When you create a project, the application creates a default graphic display called [INFORMATION] that contains an information message display object. The graphic display also contains buttons for acknowledging messages and closing the display.  You can use the [INFORMATION] display as is, or modify the appearance of the information message display object and buttons in the display. Or, you can create your own graphic display containing an information message display object and buttons that you create.  If you set up your own graphic display, use an On Top display, otherwise an error will be generated when the runtime application is created.&nbsp;You can also select the Cannot Be Replaced option. This means that, when a message occurs, your display will open on top of the current display, and will remain open until the operator closes it. You can use the information acknowledge button with the information message display object.  Tip:  Specify the graphic display to use for information messages, and the file containing the messages to display, in the Information Setup editor.  The application monitors the Value connection to determine when to display a message. Assign a tag or expression to the Value connection in the Information Setup editor. The display opens automatically whenever the Value connection value changes to a non-zero value.  Set up the messages and their trigger values in the Information Messages editor. When the Value connection matches a trigger value at run time, that message is shown on the information message display object. If the Value connection value does not match any trigger value, the message display shows question marks as the message.  The display opens automatically whenever the Value connection value changes to a non-zero value. You can also create a goto display button that the operator can press to open the display containing the information message display object.  You can place an information message display object on any display, not just on an information display.  To create an information message display  In the Graphics Display editor, select Advanced > Information from the Objects menu, then choose Message Display.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the display to be.  Double-click the message display to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the display looks.  See also  How the information message display works at run time  Configure the information message display appearance  Causes of run-time errors for the information message display  About information messages  Set up how information messages are shown  ",
    "keywords": {
      "information": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1780,
    "title": "Set up general properties for an information message display object",
    "url": "60601.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Information Message Display Properties dialog box to set up how an information message display looks.  To set up general options for an information message display  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  See also  Create information message displays  Options on the General tab of the Information Message Display Properties dialog box  How the information message display works at run time  Causes of run-time errors for the information message display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1781,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Information Message Display Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330515.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Information Message Display Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Fore color  This box shows the color of the text shown on the object. Click it to select another color.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  Text  The text properties apply to the time and date text on the display.  Font  Select the font to use for the message.  Size  Select the font size to use for the caption or message.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the caption or message, if required.  Alignment  Specifies how the shown message or value is positioned on the object.  Word wrap  Select this check box if you want the text to continue on the next line at the beginning of a new word.  If this check box is cleared, the text continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  See also  Create information message displays  Configure the gradient fill  Set up general properties for an information message display object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1782,
    "title": "How the information message display works at run time",
    "url": "60597.htm",
    "text": "At run time the graphic display containing the information message display object opens when the Value connection at the data source changes from zero to any non-zero value. If the value matches a message&#8217;s trigger value, the corresponding message is shown. If the non-zero value does not match any configured trigger value, question marks are displayed. The display opens on top of the current display.  If the Value connection value changes to 0, the display closes.  Tip:  Use the Information Setup editor to specify the graphic display to use for information messages, specify the file containing the messages to display, and assign the Value connection.  What is shown  If the Value connection is unassigned, the display never appears automatically. If the user manually goes to a graphic display containing an information message display object with an unassigned Value connection, the information message display is filled with question marks (?).  The Value connection value is rounded up to the nearest integer. If the value does not match any of the trigger values in the specified message file, the display is filled with question marks (?).  If the message is too long to fit in the display, the last displayed character is an asterisk (*).  Use buttons with the information message display  The application creates a default graphic display called [INFORMATION] that contains an information message display object and these buttons:  Ack - acknowledges the message. You can create this button in your own display using the information acknowledge button.  Close - closes the display. You can create this button in your own display using the close display button.  If you modify the default display or create your own graphic display containing an information message display, the display might contain different buttons.  Acknowledge messages  When the operator presses the Acknowledge button, the Ack connection is set to 1 at the data source. The value is held as long as the operator presses the button, or for the acknowledge hold time, whichever is longer. Then the connection is reset to 0. Assign the Ack connection and specify a hold time in the Information Setup editor.  Tip:  To close the display when the operator acknowledges the message, configure the data source to set the Value connection to 0 when the Ack connection is set to 1.  See also  Create information message displays  Causes of run-time errors for the information message display  Create Information Acknowledge buttons  Create Close Display buttons  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1783,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for the information message display",
    "url": "60599.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs errors about the information message display to diagnostics under this circumstance:  Unassigned connections  If the Ack connection is not assigned (in the Information Setup editor), and the Acknowledge button appears on the display, when the operator presses the Acknowledge button, the application logs an error.  See also  Create information message displays  How the information message display works at run time  Set up how information messages are shown  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1784,
    "title": "Set up a caption and image for a button",
    "url": "311586.htm",
    "text": "Use the Label tab of a button object's Properties dialog box to set up a caption and image for the button.  To set up a caption and image for the button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Label tab.  Specify the caption and image.  See also  The Label tab of a button object's Properties dialog box  Options on the Label tab of a button object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1785,
    "title": "Options on the Label tab of a button object's Properties dialog box",
    "url": "311584.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Label tab of a button object's Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Caption  Specify the text for the object. The text appears on the face of the object to give the operator information about what the object does or about the current state.  Insert Variable  Click this button to select the type of variable to be inserted.  Font  Select the font to use for the caption.  Size  Select the font size to use for the caption or message.  Bold, Italic, Underline  Select a font style for the caption or message, if needed.  Caption color  This box shows the current text color for the caption. Click it to select another color.  Caption back color  This box shows the current background color for the caption. Click it to select another color.  If the caption background style is transparent, the application does not use this caption background color.  Caption blink  Select this check box if you want the caption to blink at run time. The caption blinks twice per second.  Word wrap  Select this check box if you want the text to continue on the next line at the beginning of a new word.  If this check box is cleared, the text continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum text length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  Alignment  Select how you want the caption to be positioned on the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the position is relative to the button&#8217;s bounding box.  Caption back style  Select whether the caption&#8217;s background is solid or transparent.  If you select Transparent, the object&#8217;s background is not filled in and any objects behind it show through.  Image settings  Specify the image to show on the button.  Image  Specify the name of the image file to show on the button, or click the Browse button to open the Image Browser.  The image appears on the face of the object to give the operator information about what the object does or about the current state.  Before you can place an image on the object, you must import the image into your project.  Image back style  This property applies to monochrome and color images. Use it to set the background style to Solid or Transparent.  If Image back style is Transparent:  For monochrome images, the background will be transparent .  For color images that are not PNG with Alpha channel, any parts of the images that are black will be transparent.  Image color  Specify the color that the image is drawn in; that is, the foreground color. It applies only to monochrome images.  Click it to select another color.  Image back color  This property applies to monochrome images. It determines the color of the background the image is drawn on. Click the colored box to select another color.  If the Image back style is Transparent, the background of the image will be transparent.  Image blink  Select this check box to let the monochrome image blink at run time. The image blinks twice per second.  Image scaled  Select this check box to let the application resize the image to fit the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the image is resized to fit in the object&#8217;s bounding box and clipped to fit the object&#8217;s shape.  If this is not selected, the image is first aligned using the Alignment setting, and then, if larger than the object, the image is clipped to fit the object.  Alignment  Specify how you want the image to be positioned on the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the position is relative to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  See also  Set up a caption and image for a button  The Label tab of a button object's Properties dialog box  Bounding box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1786,
    "title": "The Label tab of a button object's Properties dialog box",
    "url": "312556.htm",
    "text": "The Label tab is common to the following button objects' Properties dialog box.  Categories  Objects  Numeric and String  Numeric Input Enable  Ramp  String Input Enable  Display Navigation  Goto Display  Return to Display  Close Display  Trending  Pause  Next Pen  RecipePlus  RecipePlus Button  Key  Backspace  End  Enter  Home  Move Left  Move Right  Move Down  Move Up  Page Down  Page Up  User Management  Add User/Group  Delete User/Group  Modify Group Membership  Unlock User  Enable User  Disable User  Login  Logout  Password  Change User Properties  Advanced  Display Print  Language Switch Button  Macro  Shutdown  Goto Configure Mode  Alarm:  Acknowledge  Acknowledge All  Alarm Status Mode  Clear Alarm Banner  Clear Alarm History  Print Alarm History  Print Alarm Status  Reset Alarm Status  Silence  Sort Alarm  Diagnostics:  Clear  Clear All  Audit:  Clear Audit Trail  Information  Acknowledge  See also  Set up a caption and image for a button  Options on the Label tab of a button object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1787,
    "title": "Set up electronic signature properties",
    "url": "223382.htm",
    "text": "Use the E-Signature tab in the Properties dialog box to set up electronic signature properties.  Tip:  The electronic signature function is only supported in FactoryTalk View ME 8.20 and latter applications.  If a FactoryTalk View ME application is imported to a FactoryTalk View SE application, the electronic signature properties will not be imported to the SE application.  To set up the electronic signature properties  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the E-Signature tab.  Specify the electronic signature properties for the object.  See also  The E-Signature tab  Options on the E-Signature tab  ",
    "keywords": {
      "electronic signature": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1788,
    "title": "The E-Signature tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box",
    "url": "223616.htm",
    "text": "Use the E-Signature tab of the Properties dialog box to configure electronic signature capability to control and record operator actions.  The electronic signature properties are common to the following graphic objects:  Advanced:  Control List Selector  Goto Configure Mode button  Macro button  Piloted Control List Selector  Shutdown button  Clear Audit Trail button  Alarm:  Acknowledge Alarm button  Acknowledge All Alarms button  Clear Alarm History button  Reset Alarm Status button  Numeric and String:  Numeric Input Cursor Point  Numeric Input Enable  String Input Enable  Push Button:  Interlocked Push button  Latched Push button  Maintained Push button  Multistate Push button  Ramp button  User Management:  Add User/Group button  Delete User/Group button  Modify Group Membership button  Unlock User button  Enable User button  Disable User button  Password button  Change User Properties button  RecipePlus  RecipePlus button  See also  Set up electronic signature properties  Options on the E-Signature tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1789,
    "title": "Options on the E-Signature tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box",
    "url": "223617.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the E-Signature tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Require Electronic Signature  Select this check box to enable the electronic signature function.  If this check box is clear, all other options on the E-Signature tab are disabled.  Allow blank comment  If this check box is selected, the Comment box can be empty in the Electronic Signature window.  Single Signatory  Configure the single signatory settings.  Require re-authentication  If this check box is selected,password is required on the Operator tab in the Electronic Signature window.  If this check box is clear, password is not required on the Operator tab in the Electronic Signature window.  Counter Signatory  Configure the counter signatory settings.  Require counter signature  If this check box is selected, all other options under the Counter Signatory settings are enabled. Authentication by another person is required to execute the action.  If this check box is clear, all other options under the Counter Signatory settings are disabled. After the operator presses Accept in the Electronic Signature window, the action will be executed.  Authorized Group  This list includes all the groups in FactoryTalk Security. If one group is selected from this list, all members of the selected group can be a supervisor of this object.  You do not need to add the Authorized Group to Runtime Security.  Domain Name  Configure the domain name for the Electronic Signature window.  Visible  If this check box is selected, the options under the Domain Name settings are enabled, and the Domain button and box is visible in the Electronic Signature window.  If this check box is clear, the options under the Domain Name settings are disabled, and the Domain button and box are invisible in the Electronic Signature window.  Domain Name  Enter the domain name in this box.  Variable Domain Name  Click the browse button to open the Tag Browser, and select a tag from the tag database for the domain name.  Parameter is supported.  Disable  If this check box is selected, the Domain button and box is disabled in the Electronic Signature window.  If this check box is clear, the Domain button and box is enabled in the Electronic Signature window.  See also  Set up electronic signature properties  The E-Signature tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1790,
    "title": "Set up common properties",
    "url": "60657.htm",
    "text": "Use the Common tab in the Properties dialog box to set up common properties.  To set up the common properties  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Common tab.  Specify the common properties for the object.  See also  The Common tab  Options on the Common tab  About embedded variables  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1791,
    "title": "The Common tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box",
    "url": "223635.htm",
    "text": "Some properties, such as size and position, are common to all graphic objects. These properties are set up through the Common tab of the Properties dialog box.  See also  Set up common properties  Options on the Common tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1792,
    "title": "Options on the Common tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box",
    "url": "223636.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Common tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Size  Height  Specify the number of pixels for the object's height (including borders).  Width  Specify the number of pixels for the object's width (including borders).  Position  Top  Specify the number of pixels for the distance between the top of the display and the top edge of the object.  The number must be positive.  To specify a negative number, which will position part, or all of the object off screen, use the Property Panel.  Left  Specify the number of pixels for the distance between the left edge of the display and the left edge of the object.  The number must be positive.  To specify a negative number, which will position part or all of the object off screen, use the Property Panel.  If the objects shape is Circle, or Ellipse, the size and position properties refer to the object's bounding box.  Other  Name  Type the name of the object. The name must start with a letter and cannot contain spaces. You can use numbers and the underscore character (_).  Visible  If this check box is clear, the object is invisible at runtime.  If you use Visibility animation, its setting will override this setting.  If an object is invisible at runtime, it is not functional. Clicks or touches on an invisible object pass through the object to whatever is behind it.  For Trend objects and third-party ActiveX objects, assign the following properties:  Key Navigation  Select this check box to allow the user to navigate to the object using the keyboard and give the object input focus.  Focus Highlight  Select this box if you want the object to have a highlight box shown around it when it has input focus at runtime.  See also  Set up common properties  The Common tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  Bounding box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1793,
    "title": "Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box",
    "url": "270812.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box.  Columns  Descriptions  Name  This column shows the name of the connection.  Value update direction  This column shows an arrow to indicate in which way data can flow between the connection and the data source.  @ connection updates the data source (write only connection)  @ data source updates the connection (read-only connection)  @ connection updates the data source and data source updates the connection (read-write connection)  Tag/Expression  Type the tag name or expression associated with the connection. If a tag or expression was selected, it is shown here.  Tag button (...)  Click this button to open the Tag Browser and select a tag instead of typing the tag name in the Tag/Expression column.  Exprn button (...)  Click this button to open the Expression Editor and create an expression instead of typing the expression in the Tag/Expression column.  See also  Options on the Common tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  All properties  Assign connections to an object  Delete a connection from an object  data source  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1794,
    "title": "Copy and paste state properties",
    "url": "60343.htm",
    "text": "Use the Copy State Settings dialog box to specify the state properties to copy. When you paste, you can paste the copied state properties to one other state or to all states for the object. The selected properties are copied to the new states.  To copy state properties  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click an object to open its Properties dialog box.  In the States tab, in the Select state list, click the state with the properties to copy, and then click the Copy button.  In the Copy State Settings dialog box, check the boxes for the properties to copy.  Click OK.  To paste state properties  With the object&#8217;s States tab still open, in the Select state list, click the state to paste to. If you&#8217;re copying the properties to all states, it does not matter which state is selected.  Click the Paste button.  Specify whether to paste the properties to the current state or to all states.  Click OK.  See also  Set up states for a list indicator  Set up states for a multistate indicator  Set up states for a symbol indicator  Set up states for a piloted control list selector  Set up states for a display list selector  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1795,
    "title": "The Alarm Import Export Wizard",
    "url": "60876.htm",
    "text": "An application's alarm configuration information is created in the application's Alarm Setup editor and is contained in a file called MachineAlarms.MAL.  FactoryTalk View Studio's Alarm Import Export Wizard allows you to export this information to an XML file, or to import an alarm configuration XML file and create a new alarm configuration (MachineAlarms.MAL file) for an application.  To open the Alarm Import Export Wizard  Open the Alarms folder in the Explorer window.  Right-click Alarm Setup and select Import and Export from the Context menu.  If the Alarm Setup editor is opened and has unsaved changes, a message appears asking if you want to save your changes.  Choose Yes to save your changes, close the Alarm Setup editor and open the Alarm Import Export Wizard.  Choose No to close the Alarm Setup editor without saving your changes and open the Alarm Import Export Wizard.  Choose Cancel to leave the Alarm Setup editor open. The Alarm Import Export Wizard will not open.  See also  About alarms  Select an operation  Export alarms  Create a backup alarm file  Select a backup destination  Import alarms  ",
    "keywords": {
      "alarm": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1796,
    "title": "Select an operation",
    "url": "60878.htm",
    "text": "When the Alarm Import Export Wizard opens, you specify whether you want to export the alarm configuration from an application or import alarm configuration into an application.  Options  Export alarm configuration from application  Click this button to export the alarm configuration in the application's MachineAlarms.MAL file to an XML file.  Import alarm configuration into application  Click this button to import an XML file and create a new alarm configuration (MachineAlarms.MAL file) for the application from the information in the XML file. The existing alarm configuration file will be overwritten.  See also  Alarm Import Export Wizard  Export alarms  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1797,
    "title": "Export alarms",
    "url": "60881.htm",
    "text": "When you select the export operation in the Alarm Import Export Wizard Select Operation dialog box, the Select Destination dialog box opens. Specify the name of the exported alarm configuration file and where it will be stored.  To export the file  Click Finish.  The Alarm Import Export Wizard will generate a well-formed XML file containing the application's alarm configuration and store it in the location you specified. The file will have a .xml extension.  Options  Enter a file name for the exported alarm configuration  The default name for the alarm configuration file you are exporting is Alarms. To use a different name, replace Alarms with the new name.  Select where to store the exported file  The default folder for the exported alarm configuration file is \\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\HMI Projects\\<Application Name>.  To specify a different location, click the Browse button and navigate to the location you want to use. You can also create a new folder.  See also  Alarm Import Export Wizard  Select an operation  Import alarms  Create a backup alarm file  Select a backup destination  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1798,
    "title": "Import alarms",
    "url": "60883.htm",
    "text": "When you select the import operation in the Alarm Import Export Wizard Select Operation dialog box, the Select Destination dialog box opens. Specify the alarm configuration file to import to the application. The imported file must be a well-formed XML file.  Tip:  To check if an XML file is well-formed, open the file in Internet Explorer. If the file is not well-formed, Internet Explorer will show an error message. If the file shows without errors, it is well-formed.  If the file to be imported contains any characters other than English, be sure the file is saved in UTF-8 format before importing.  PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications have a limit of 500 alarm messages. Compact Machine Edition applications (applications running on PanelView Plus 6 Compact or PanelView Plus Compact terminals) have a limit of 200 alarm messages. If the alarm messages in the XML file exceed the limits, the import will fail and an error message will be shown.  Import an alarm file:  Click the Browse button to open the File Browser dialog box.  In the File Browser dialog box, from the File Types list, select .xml (Alarm) files or .bak (Alarm Backup) files.  Select the file that you want to import and click OK.  Click Finish.  The Alarm Import Export Wizard will close. If you chose to back up your present configuration, the backup file will be created and stored (with a .bak extension) and then the specified configuration file will be imported into the current application. If you chose not to create a backup, the import occurs immediately. The existing configuration file is overwritten by the imported file, whether it has been backed up or not.  If errors occur during the import, they are logged to a text file named AlarmImportLog.txt in the application folder. For example, for an ME application named \"Alarm1\", the error log would be in \\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\HMI Projects\\Alarm1.  See also  Alarm Import Export Wizard  Select an operation  Create a backup alarm file  Select a backup destination  Export alarms  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1799,
    "title": "Create a backup alarm file",
    "url": "60885.htm",
    "text": "When you select the Import option in the Alarm Import Export Wizard's Select Operation dialog box, the Create Backup dialog box opens. Backing up your present alarm configuration creates a well-formed XML file with the extension .bak.  Important:  It is strongly recommended that you back up your existing alarm configuration before importing a new one.  Yes  Click this button and then click Next to proceed to the Select Backup Destination dialog box.  No  Click this button and then click Next to proceed to the Select File dialog box without backing up your present alarm configuration.  See also  Alarm Import Export Wizard  Select an operation  Select a backup destination  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1800,
    "title": "Select a backup destination",
    "url": "60887.htm",
    "text": "If you selected Yes on the Create Backup dialog box, the Select Backup Destination dialog box opens. Use this dialog to specify a name and a location for your backup configuration (.bak) file.  Options  Enter a name for the backup file  The default name for the backup alarm configuration file is Alarms. To use a different name, replace Alarms with the new name.  Select where to store the backup file  The default location for the backup alarm configuration file is the root directory of the current application. To specify a different location, click the Browse button and navigate to the location you want to use. You can create a new folder if you need to.  Tip:  The backup file is not actually created until the new configuration file is imported.  See also  Alarm Import Export Wizard  Select an operation  Create a backup alarm file  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1801,
    "title": "Alarm XML file structure",
    "url": "60888.htm",
    "text": "The alarm import file is an XML document that describes the alarm configuration of a FactoryTalk View Machine Edition application as it might be defined in the Alarm Setup editor. The root element of the XML document is called alarms. It represents the alarm configuration file for the application.  An XML document can contain only one root element. All other elements in the document must be contained or nested within the root element.  In an XML document, the start and end of an element shows as follows:  <element name>  ...  </element name>  The start and end of the alarms element look like this in an XML document:  <alarms>  ...  </alarms>  The syntax for specifying an attribute for an element is:  attribute name=\"value\"  The attribute value must be enclosed in single or double quotes.  Elements and attributes in the alarm import and export files are case sensitive.  You can specify multiple attributes for an element and have multiple elements in an XML document.  See also  Alarm Import Export Wizard  Alarm XML file elements  Example: Alarm XML file  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1802,
    "title": "Alarm XML file elements",
    "url": "60890.htm",
    "text": "XML Declaration  An exported XML file begins with an XML declaration, containing the XML version and the encoding information.  An XML declaration is one of the following:  <xml version=\"1.0\" encoding=\"UTF-8 ?>  <xml version=\"1.0\" encoding=\"UTF-16 ?>  An XML declaration is optional for an import file.  If you are creating XML documents in Notepad, the files can be saved in UTF-8 or UTF-16 file format. (Notepad's Unicode file type corresponds to UTF-16 file format.) For files containing strings in English or other Latin-based languages, UTF-8 is recommended, to reduce the size of the xml file. For other foreign languages such as Chinese. Japanese or Korean, UTF-16 is recommended.  XML elements and attributes  In the following definitions, objects in braces <> indicate a data type such as string, int, float, and others.  Objects separated by | indicate the possible values for the attribute, only one of which is allowed.  Alarms element  The alarms element contains all attributes and elements in the XML file.  Alarms element attributes include the following:  version = <float>  id = <string> - optional  product = <string> - optional  Alarm element  The alarm element must be contained within the alarms element. The alarm element corresponds to the Advanced tab of the ME Alarm Setup editor. The Triggers element and the Messages element are nested within the alarm element.  Alarm element attributes include the following:  history-size = <int> (1 to 10000)  display-name = <string>  hold-time = 50 | 250 | 500 | 750 | 1000 | 2000 | 3000 | 4000 | 5000  max-update-rate = 0.05 | 0.1 | .025 | 0.5 | 1 | 2 | 5 | 10 | 60 | 120  silence-tag = <tag>  remote-silence-exp = <tag or expression>  remote-ack-all-exp = <tag or expression>  status-reset-tag = <tag>  remote-status-reset-exp = <tag or expression>  close-display-tag = <tag>  remote-close-display-exp = <tag or expression>  use-alarm-identifier = true | false  Triggers element  The triggers element must be contained within the alarms element and within the alarm element. The triggers element corresponds to the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor. The \"triggers\" element will contain multiple \"trigger\" elements whose attributes define each trigger.  Trigger element attributes include the following:  id = <string>  exp = <tag or expression>  type = value | bit | lsbit  label = <string> - this string cannot include a comma  use-ack-all = true | false  ack-all-value = <int> (-2147483648 to 2147483647)  handshake-tag = <tag>  ack-tag = <tag>  remote-ack-exp = <tag or expression>  remote-ack-handshake-tag = <tag>  message-tag = <tag>  message-notification-tag = <tag>  message-handshake-exp = <tag or expression>  Messages element  The messages element must be contained within the alarms element and within the alarm element. This element corresponds to the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor.  Messages element attributes include the following:  id = <string> - optional  trigger-value = <int> (-2147483648 to 2147483647)  identifier = <int> (0 to - 32767)  trigger = #<T> | all | \"\" - enter a # character followed by the ID number of the trigger that is triggering the message. OR all to use the <AllTriggers>, OR \"\" to indicate <Unassigned>.  backcolor = <color> - enter a # character followed by the RRGGBB value of the color.  forecolor = <color> - enter a # character followed by the RRGGBB value of the color.  audio = true | false  display = true | false  print = true | false  message-to-tag = true | false  text = <string>  See also  Alarm Import Export Wizard  Set up the alarm display  Set up alarm triggers  Options on the Message tab of the Alarm Setup editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1803,
    "title": "Example: Alarm XML file",
    "url": "60896.htm",
    "text": "The structure of the ME Alarm XML file is given below. There are three main sections, alarms, triggers, and messages, which correlate to the Advanced, Triggers, and Messages tabs of the Alarm Setup editor.  Elements are in maroon text. Attributes are red. Values are blue.  <?xml version=\"1.0\" encoding=\"UTF-8\" ?>  <alarms id=\"Alarms\" version=\"1.0\" product=\"{123-456-789}\">  <alarm history-size=\"64\" display-name=\"[ALARM]\" hold-time=\"250\" max-update-rate=\"0.5\" silence-tag=\"\" remote-silence-exp=\"\" remote-ack-all-exp=\"\" status-reset-tag=\"\" remote-status-reset-exp=\"\" close-display-tag=\"\" remote-close-display-exp=\"\" use-alarm-identifier=\"true\">  <triggers>  <trigger id=\"T1\" type=\"value\" ack-all-value=\"25\" use-ack-all=\"true\" ack-tag=\"\" exp=\"if tag2 = 0 then 5 else if Tag2 = 1 then 10 else 15\" message-tag=\"\" message-handshake-exp=\"\" message-notification-tag=\"\" remote-ack-exp=\"\" remote-ack-handshake-tag=\"\" label=\"Label1\" handshake-tag=\"\" />  <trigger id=\"T2\" type=\"bit\" ack-all-value=\"0\" use-ack-all=\"false\" ack-tag=\"\" exp=\"Tag1 = 20\" message-tag=\"Alarm/Message1\" message-handshake-exp=\"Alarm/Handshake1\" message-notification-tag=\"Alarm/Notification1\" remote-ack-exp=\"\" remote-ack-handshake-tag=\"\" label=\"\" handshake-tag=\"HandshakeTag1\" />  </triggers>  <messages>  <message id=\"M1\" trigger-value=\"1\" identifier=\"1\" trigger=\"#T1\" backcolor=\"#c00000\" forecolor=\"#ffffff\" audio=\"true\" display=\"true\" print=\"false\" message-to-tag=\"true\" text=\"Tank Full\" />  <message id=\"M2\" trigger-value=\"2\" identifier=\"0\" trigger=\"#T2\" backcolor=\"#c00000\" forecolor=\"#ffffff\" audio=\"true\" display=\"true\" print=\"false\" message-to-tag=\"true\" text=\"Tank Overflow\" />  </messages>  </alarm>  </alarms>  See also  Alarm Import Export Wizard  Alarm XML file structure  Alarm XML file elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1804,
    "title": "The Alarm Setup editor",
    "url": "60189.htm",
    "text": "Use the Alarm Setup editor to specify what graphic display to use as the pop-up alarm display, specify the alarm messages to show, and assign the trigger controls.  See also  About alarms  Set up an alarm  Create an alarm trigger  Create an alarm message  Specify the graphic display and system-wide alarm options  ",
    "keywords": {
      "alarm": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1805,
    "title": "About alarms",
    "url": "60187.htm",
    "text": "An alarm occurs when something goes wrong or is about to go wrong. Alarms can signal that a device or process has ceased operating within acceptable, predefined limits, and can indicate breakdown, wear, or process malfunctions. Alarms are also used to indicate the approach of a dangerous condition.  Alarms are an important part of most plant control applications because an operator must know the instant something goes wrong. It is often equally important to have a record of the alarm and whether the alarm was acknowledged.  Use alarms to notify the operator when a situation requiring immediate attention occurs. When an alarm condition occurs, the application can open an alarm graphic display, set off an audible signal, send a message to a printer or a display, send the alarm trigger value to the data source, or do any combination of these. All triggered alarms in the application are logged in the alarm history.  Alarm display  Alarms can be shown in the following graphic objects:  Alarm list  Alarm banner  Alarm status list  Generating alarms  In the Alarm Setup editor, define a tag as a trigger and give it a trigger value, and define a message to be shown when the trigger value is set.  Configure the data source so that when a particular event occurs, the value in the tag changes to the trigger value.  For example, you might set up a tag to be an alarm message trigger with the trigger value 10, for the alarm message Tank about to overflow. Configure the data source to monitor the tank level. When the level is higher than 99 percent of the tank&#8217;s capacity, the data source sets the alarm trigger connection to 10, and the message is sent to the operator.  Retaining alarm messages  As soon as the project starts running, the application begins monitoring the trigger connections for alarm conditions. When an alarm occurs, the application adds the associated message to the alarm list. The list is saved (logged to the alarm history) 30 seconds after an alarm is triggered or acknowledged. The alarm list is retained when an application is restarted due to a shutdown or power loss. However, alarms that were triggered or acknowledged less than 30 seconds before power loss will not be included in the alarm history. When a newer version of the application is run on the runtime computer, the alarm list for the older version is deleted.  If the alarm list object is configured to show unacknowledged alarms only, acknowledged alarms are not shown, although they are retained in memory.  Tip:  For a permanent record of alarms, configure alarm messages to print to a printer on the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor.  You can delete the alarm log file from the runtime computer at project startup.  Setting up alarms  Use the following editors to set up alarms:  Alarm Setup - set up alarm triggers (the tags to monitor), define the alarm messages and their trigger values, and specify the alarm window to show.  Startup - to turn on alarm monitoring, select the Alarms check box.  Graphics Display (optional) - modify the default [ALARM] display or create your own graphic display to use for alarms. For example, if you won&#8217;t be using audible alarm signals, edit the default display to remove the Silence Alarms button.  Acknowledging alarms  When the operator presses the Acknowledge Alarm button, the Enter button, or the Enter key on an external keyboard or keypad, the selected alarm is acknowledged and the audio indicator for the alarm, if any, is silenced.  When the alarm is acknowledged:  If assigned, the Ack connection is set to the alarm trigger value at the data source. The value is held as long as the operator presses the button, or for the notification hold time, whichever is longer. Assign the Ack connection and specify the hold time in the Alarm Setup editor.  If the hold time is still in effect and the operator acknowledges a new instance of the same alarm, the new acknowledgment is ignored.  When an alarm is acknowledged, it will be removed from the list only if the alarm no longer meets the selected Alarm conditions for the list, as defined on the Display tab or on the Connections tab (if assigned). This means that an alarm that is no longer in alarm, but has not been acknowledged, will be removed from the list when the alarm is acknowledged, only if the alarm conditions for the list at that time are Inactive and acknowledged.  If the highlight bar is on an acknowledged alarm when the operator presses the Acknowledge Alarm button, the button press will be ignored.  If you have chosen to show the Acknowledged symbol column, and have selected a symbol (on the Alarm tab), the symbol will appear beside an alarm when it is acknowledged.  Acknowledging messages does not remove the alarms or the messages from the alarm history.  See also  The Alarm Setup editor  Create an alarm list  Create an alarm status list  Create an alarm banner  Options on the Message tab of the Alarm Setup editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1806,
    "title": "[ALARM] display",
    "url": "271070.htm",
    "text": "When you create a project, the application creates a default graphic display called [ALARM] that contains an alarm banner object.  The default [ALARM] display contains the following buttons:  Ack Alarm  Silence Alarms  Clear Alarm Banner  Close  The application monitors the trigger connections that you set up for alarms to determine when to open the alarm display.  Tip:  If you use the default alarm display, it opens automatically whenever a trigger connection value matches a trigger value.  To use your own display, on the Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor, in the Current alarms field, replace the default [ALARM] display with your own display.  If you set up your own graphic display, use an On Top display, otherwise an error will be generated when the runtime application is created. You can also select the Cannot Be Replaced option on the General tab of the Display Settings dialog box so when a message occurs, your display will open on top of the current display, and will remain open until the operator closes it.  Filtering alarms on the display object that opens automatically when alarms occur is not recommended. It is assumed that the user will want this display to register all alarms. If you do filter alarms on a display, be sure to clear the Display check box on the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor for all the alarms that have been filtered out. Otherwise the display will open automatically when the alarm occurs, but the alarm object (banner or list) will be blank because the alarm that was triggered has been filtered out for that object.  See also  About alarms  Alarm buttons  [HISTORY] and [ALARM MULTI-LINE] displays  Trigger Label Selector  Create an alarm trigger  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1807,
    "title": "Set up an alarm",
    "url": "270964.htm",
    "text": "Use the Alarm Setup editor to set up an alarm.  To set up an alarm  In the Explorer window, open the Alarms folder.  Double-click the Alarm Setup icon to open the editor.  Set up the options on the Triggers, Messages, and Advanced tabs.  Click OK to save your changes and close the editor.  See also  The Alarm Setup editor  About alarms  Create an alarm trigger  Create an alarm message  Specify the graphic display and system-wide alarm options  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1808,
    "title": "The Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor",
    "url": "60191.htm",
    "text": "On the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor, specify the tags or expressions to monitor for alarm conditions.  For each trigger, specify the type of data the trigger uses. You can also set up handshaking and acknowledgment features for the trigger, if required, and specify a message connection to which the message text can be sent.  See also  The Alarm Setup editor  Create an alarm trigger  Options on the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor  The Message tab of the Alarm Setup editor  The Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1809,
    "title": "Create an alarm trigger",
    "url": "270933.htm",
    "text": "Use the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor to create an alarm trigger.  To create an alarm trigger  On the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor, click Add.  In the Trigger dialog box, click the Browser button (...) to create a new tag or expression or to select an existing tag to monitor for alarm conditions. Alternatively, you can type a tag or expression. Then click OK.  The application reads the tag&#8217;s or expression&#8217;s value, and generates an alarm when the value matches an alarm message&#8217;s trigger value.  Specify the properties in the Trigger settings area of the Triggers tab.  Click OK. The trigger you create is selected in the Select Trigger box.  Repeat steps 2 through 4 to set up additional triggers.  Important:  An alarm&#8217;s Trigger and Remote Ack settings should not be configured to use the same tag. Doing so may cause unpredictable alarm acknowledgment behaviors.  See also  The Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor  The Trigger dialog box  Edit an alarm trigger  Remove an alarm trigger  Options on the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1810,
    "title": "The Trigger dialog box",
    "url": "60195.htm",
    "text": "The Trigger dialog box opens when you click the Add button on the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor.  The Trigger dialog box has the following columns:  Tag or expression  Type the tag name or expression associated with the connection. If a tag or expression was selected, it is shown here. You can use analog, digital, and array tags to generate alarms.  Tag button (...)  Click this button to open the Tag Browser and select a tag instead of typing the tag name in the Tag or expression column.  Exprn button (...)  Click this button to open the Expression Editor and create an expression instead of typing the expression in the Tag or expression column.  See also  Create an alarm trigger  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1811,
    "title": "Edit an alarm trigger",
    "url": "270935.htm",
    "text": "You may need to edit an alarm trigger.  To edit an alarm trigger  On the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor, in the Select trigger list, click the trigger to edit.  To change the tag or expression assigned to the trigger, click Edit to make changes in the Trigger dialog box  To change other properties for the trigger, such as Trigger Type, make changes in the Trigger settings area of the Alarm Setup editor.  Important:  An alarm&#8217;s Trigger and Remote Ack settings should not be configured to use the same tag. Doing so may cause unpredictable alarm acknowledgment behaviors.  See also  The Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor  Create an alarm trigger  The Trigger dialog box  Remove an alarm trigger  Options on the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1812,
    "title": "The Trigger dialog box",
    "url": "60197.htm",
    "text": "The Trigger dialog box opens when you click the Edit button on the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor.  The Trigger dialog box has the following columns:  Tag or expression  Type the tag name or expression associated with the connection. If a tag or expression was selected, it is shown here. You can use analog, digital, and array tags to generate alarms.  Tag button (...)  Click this button to open the Tag Browser and select a tag instead of typing the tag name in the Tag or expression column.  Exprn button (...)  Click this button to open the Expression Editor and create an expression instead of typing the expression in the Tag or expression column.  See also  Edit an alarm trigger  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1813,
    "title": "Remove an alarm trigger",
    "url": "270936.htm",
    "text": "You may need to remove an alarm trigger.  To remove an alarm trigger  On the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor, from the Select trigger list, select the trigger and click Remove.  Click OK.  See also  The Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor  Create an alarm trigger  Edit an alarm trigger  Options on the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1814,
    "title": "Options on the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor",
    "url": "270937.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor.  Options  Descriptions  Select trigger  Select a trigger from the list.  Add...  Click this button to add a trigger.  Edit...  Click this button to edit a trigger.  Remove  Click this button to remove a trigger.  Trigger settings  Specify trigger properties in this area.  Trigger type  Select the type of data the trigger&#8217;s tag or expression uses:  Value - integer or floating point values. Floating point values are rounded to the nearest integer. Use with analog or digital tags.  Bit - a bit array consisting of one or more bit positions. Use this trigger type to generate multiple alarm messages with a single tag (or array tag) or expression. Each bit in the array whose value changes from 0 to 1 triggers an alarm if a message is configured for the bit.  LSBit (least significant bit) - an analog or digital tag, or a direct reference bit array consisting of one or more bit positions. Use this trigger type to trigger alarms based on a priority sequence that is determined by bit position. When multiple bits in the array change from 0 to 1, only the alarm with the lowest bit position is triggered. The LSB trigger type property does not work with tags that use the Default data type. Default data type is Floating Point, and LSB does not support Floating Point.  Bit and LSB trigger types can be used with a digital HMI tag or a direct reference using the array syntax.  Trigger label  Type a label for the trigger, up to 40 characters long. Do not use commas.  The alarm list and alarm status list use these labels to filter the alarms shown in the list.  You can configure the alarm status list to show trigger labels.  Use ack all value  Select this check box to send a value to the data source when the operator presses the Ack All (Acknowledge All Alarms) button or when a RemoteAckAll connection occurs.  In the box, type the integer value to send.  Optional trigger connections  Specify the following optional trigger connections:  Handshake - a write connection. Assign a digital tag to this connection to notify the data source when the trigger connection&#8217;s value changes.  Ack - a write connection. Assign a digital or analog tag to this connection to notify the data source when an alarm is acknowledged by the operator.  Remote Ack - a read connection. Assign an analog tag or an expression to this connection to allow the data source to acknowledge alarms.  Remote Ack Handshake - a write connection. Assign a digital tag to this connection to notify the data source when a remote acknowledgment occurs.  Message - a write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. When the alarm is triggered, if the Message to Tag option is selected on the Messages tab, up to 82 characters of the message text is written to this connection. The maximum string length supported is 82 characters. Make sure the tag supports the type of data sent in the alarm message.  Message Notification - a read/write connection. Assign a digital tag to this connection if you want to use message handshaking. This connection notifies the operator that an alarm message has been sent.  Message Handshake - a read connection. Assign a digital or analog tag or an expression to this connection. This connection provides the run-time terminal with confirmation that alarm messages are received by the data source.  Do not configure an alarm&#8217;s Trigger and Remote Ack settings to use the same tag. Doing so may cause unpredictable alarm acknowledgement behaviors.  Name  This column shows the name of the connection.  Tag or expression  Type the tag name or expression associated with the connection. If a tag or expression was selected, it is shown here.  Tag button (...)  Click this button to open the Tag Browser and select a tag instead of typing the tag name in the Tag or expression column.  Exprn button (...)  Click this button to open the Expression Editor and create an expression instead of typing the expression in the Tag or expression column.  See also  The Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor  Create an alarm trigger  Edit an alarm trigger  How values are rounded  All properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1815,
    "title": "Example: Use alarm triggers",
    "url": "60193.htm",
    "text": "This example shows how alarm triggers and message trigger values work together to trigger alarms.  Set up the alarm triggers:  Trigger (tag name)  Trigger type  Tag address  Trigger1  Bit  N7:0  Trigger2  LSB  N7:1  Trigger3  Value  N7:2  Set up the alarm messages:  Trigger  Value / bit  Message  <AllTriggers>  1  High temp in vat area  Trigger1  1  Vat 100 temp high  Trigger2  1  Vat 101 temp high  Trigger3  1  Vat 102 temp high  At run time, these messages appear when the tag values (or bit positions) change to 1.  Notice that the <AllTriggers> message is configured to appear when any trigger&#8217;s value (or bit position) changes to 1.  Trigger and value  Messages triggered  Trigger1 = 0001  High temp in vat area  Vat 100 temp high  Trigger2 = 0003  High temp in vat area  Vat 101 temp high  Trigger3 = 0001  High temp in vat area  Vat 102 temp high  See also  Create an alarm trigger  Create an alarm message  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1816,
    "title": "The Message tab of the Alarm Setup editor",
    "url": "60185.htm",
    "text": "On the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor, specify trigger values and messages for the triggers you defined on the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor.  See also  The Alarm Setup editor  Create an alarm message  Delete an alarm message  Create an alarm trigger  Specify the graphic display and system-wide alarm options  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1817,
    "title": "Create an alarm message",
    "url": "270791.htm",
    "text": "Use the Message tab of the Alarm Setup editor to create an alarm message.  To create an alarm message  On the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor, in the Trigger column, select the trigger for which to create an alarm message.  Specify the properties for the trigger.  Tip:  If the application is not a PanelView Plus 7 Standard application that has 500 alarm messages, or a Compact Machine Edition application that has 200 alarm messages, specifying the properties (except Background and Foreground) for the trigger in the last row will add an unassigned trigger.  Repeat steps 1 and 2 to set up additional messages.  See also  The Message tab of the Alarm Setup editor  Delete an alarm message  Copy an alarm message  Options on the Message tab of the Alarm Setup editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1818,
    "title": "Delete an alarm message",
    "url": "270793.htm",
    "text": "Use the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor to delete an alarm message.  To delete an alarm message  On the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor, select a cell in the message's row and press Delete, or right-click the cell and select Delete Row(s).  Tip:  To delete multiple alarm messages, press Shift or Ctrl to select multiple cells in a column, right-click the selected cells and select Delete Row(s).  See also  The Message tab of the Alarm Setup editor  Create an alarm message  Copy an alarm message  Options on the Message tab of the Alarm Setup editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1819,
    "title": "Copy an alarm message",
    "url": "270796.htm",
    "text": "You may need to copy an alarm message on the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor.  To copy an alarm message  On the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor, in the Message column, select a message and press Ctrl+C, or right-click a message and select Copy.  In the Message column, click the cell to paste the selected message in and press Ctrl+V, or right-click the cell and select Paste.  Tip:  You can press Shift or Ctrl to select multiple messages to copy at one time.  If you want to assign the same message to all the triggers you set up on the Triggers tab, from the Trigger Filter list, select <AllTriggers> and paste the copied message in the Message cell.  See also  The Message tab of the Alarm Setup editor  Create an alarm message  Delete an alarm message  Options on the Message tab of the Alarm Setup editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1820,
    "title": "Options on the Message tab of the Alarm Setup editor",
    "url": "270797.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Message tab of the Alarm Setup editor.  Options  Descriptions  Trigger filter  Select a filter option from the list to show alarm messages in the Alarm messages area:  <none> - all alarm messages show.  <Unassigned> - only unassigned alarm messages show.  <AllTriggers> - only the <AllTriggers> alarm messages show. <AllTriggers> is a system-defined trigger and applies to all the triggers added on the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor.  A trigger to show only its alarm messages.  Sort by  Select an option from the list to sort the alarm messages by trigger names or messages.  Use Alarm Identifier  Select this check box to show the Alarm Identifier column in the Alarm messages area.  Clear all identifiers  Click this button to clear all the alarm identifiers assigned to the alarm messages.  Alarm messages  Specify alarm messages for triggers in this area.  Trigger  Select the trigger for which to define messages.  If you are creating a message before setting up the trigger, select <Unassigned> from the Trigger list.  Trigger value  Enter a non-zero integer value or bit position. Bit positions start at 1.  When the trigger&#8217;s value changes to this value, or when the bit in this position changes from zero to 1, the associated message is generated.  This column cannot be blank.  Message  Enter the message, up to 256 characters, or right-click and select Edit String to include embedded variables in the message.  To create a line break in the message, type \\n.  To show the character sequence in the message, type \\\\n.  You cannot use tag placeholders (#n) in the variables that are embedded in an alarm message.  PanelView Plus 7 Standard applications are limited to 500 alarm messages, and Compact Machine Edition applications are limited to 200 alarm messages.  If a message uses an embedded variable to show the value of an alarm, and if that alarm is in alarm when the application starts up, the alarm banner will show question marks in place of the embedded variable. This is because the alarm system cannot determine when the alarm was triggered, and therefore cannot determine what the value of the variable was at that time. After the value has been reset to 0, the embedded variable value will show accurately the next time when the alarm is triggered.  Alarm Identifier  This column only shows when the Use Alarm Identifier check box is selected.  Enter a value (1-32767) in this column to identify the alarm message.  If this column is blank, the alarm identifier value is zero.  Display  Select this check box to open the alarm graphic display that is selected on the Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor when this alarm is triggered. The message is added to the alarm history and can be shown in any alarm list, alarm banner, and alarm status list objects even if this check box is clear and the graphic display is not opened.  When the Bit trigger type is used, and multiple bits are triggered at the same time, the highest bit triggered message will be shown on the alarm banner display even if the Display check box of particular bits message is clear.  Filtering alarms on the display object that opens automatically when alarms occur (specified on the Triggers tab) is not recommended. It is assumed that the user will want this display to register all alarms. If you filter alarms on this display for some reason, be sure to clear the Display check boxes for all the alarms that have been filtered out. Otherwise the display will open automatically when the alarm occurs because the Display option for the alarm is selected, but the alarm object (banner or list) will be blank, because the alarm that was triggered has been filtered out for that object.  Audio  For applications running on Windows 7 SP1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1, Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2016 operating systems, select this check box to sound the run-time computer&#8217;s internal beeper when the alarm is triggered. The beeper beeps continuously, five seconds on and five seconds off, until the alarm is silenced.  Print  Select this check box to print the alarm message when this alarm is triggered. Be sure a printer is set up on the run-time terminal.  You can print alarms in landscape mode with a line printer, but only one alarm is printed per page.  If you set up alarm messages in multiple languages, all messages, trigger labels, and times are printed in the current application language.  Message to Tag  Select this check box to send the text of the message to the message connection specified on the Triggers tab when the alarm is triggered.  If you set up alarm messages in multiple languages, make sure that the data source can receive the message in Unicode format or convert it into ASCII characters for all the languages you will use.  Background  Click this button to select a color for the background of the message text.  Foreground  Click this button to select a color for the message text.  See also  Edit message strings  The Message tab of the Alarm Setup editor  Create an alarm message  Copy an alarm message  AlarmIdentifier  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1821,
    "title": "The Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor",
    "url": "60543.htm",
    "text": "On the Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor, specify the graphic display used to show alarm messages, and specify other settings that apply to all alarms as opposed to a single alarm trigger or message.  See also  The Alarm Setup editor  The Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor  The Message tab of the Alarm Setup editor  Specify the graphic display and system-wide alarm options  Options on the Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1822,
    "title": "Specify the graphic display and system-wide alarm options",
    "url": "270938.htm",
    "text": "Use the Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor to specify the graphic display and system-wide alarm options.  To specify the graphic display and system-wide alarm options  On the Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor, in the Current alarms box, select the graphic display used to show alarm messages. Click the Browse button to select from a list of all the graphic displays in the project. The specified display opens when an alarm occurs if you select the Display option for the alarm message on the Messages tab.  Specify the system-wide alarm settings.  See also  The Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor  Options on the Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1823,
    "title": "Options on the Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor",
    "url": "270939.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor.  Options  Descriptions  Display  Select the graphic display used to show alarm messages.  Current alarms  Click the Browse button (...) to select which graphic display is used to show alarm messages when an alarm is triggered.  Edit  Click this button to open and modify the selected graphic display.  Time settings  Specify notification hold time, maximum update rate, and embedded server update rate in this area.  Hold time  Select the notification hold time (millisecond) to use when acknowledging, silencing, and resetting alarms. The application holds values at the Ack, Silence, Status Reset, and Close Display connections for the specified length of time, then resets the connections to zero.  Maximum update rate  Select the maximum rate (second) at which data servers will supply data to the trigger tags specified on the Triggers tab. The default update rate is 1 second.  This rate also applies to any tags used in trigger expressions, remote tags or expressions, and tags in trigger message embedded variables.  At run time, all of these tags are updated immediately upon startup, no matter what the update rate is.  Embedded server update rate  Select the embedded server update rate (second) at which the data server will supply data to the tags in the trigger message embedded variables. The default update rate is set to match the alarm update rate.  The embedded server update rate cannot be set to be larger than the maximum update rate.  At run time, all of these tags are updated immediately upon startup, no matter what the update rate is.  History  Specify the alarm log file (.alm).  Maximum number of alarm entries  Specify the maximum amount of alarm entries in the log file. The available value is 1-10,000.  If the amount of alarm entries in the log file reaches the maximum capacity, the oldest alarm entry is deleted when new alarm occurs.  Capacity high warning (%)  Specify the threshold of capacity high warning, which will occur when the amount of alarm entries reaches or exceeds the specified percentage of the Maximum number of alarm entries.  The available value is 1-99.  A write connection. Click the Browse button to assign a tag to the connection to notify the data source that the amount of alarm entries received has reached or exceeded the capacity high warning threshold.  Capacity high-high warning (%)  Specify the threshold of capacity high-high warning, which will occur when the amount of alarm entries reaches or exceeds the specified percentage of the Maximum number of alarm entries.  The available value is 1-99 and must be greater than the Capacity high warning value.  A write connection. Click the Browse button to assign a tag to the connection to notify the data source that the amount of alarm entries received has reached or exceeded the capacity high-high warning threshold.  Capacity overrun  Specify when the amount of alarm entries received exceeds the Maximum number of alarm entries and the oldest entry is overwritten.  A write connection. Click the Browse button to assign a tag to this connection to notify the data source that the amount of alarm entries received has exceeded the Maximum number of alarm entries.  Optional connections  Specify the following optional connections:  Silence - A write connection. If alarms use the audio signal, assign a digital tag to this connection to notify the data source that alarms have been silenced.  Remote Silence - A read connection. Assign an analog tag or an expression to this connection. When this connection changes to a new non-zero value, all alarms are silenced. Alarms can be silenced using other methods regardless of this connection&#8217;s value.  Remote Ack All - A read connection. Assign an analog tag to this connection. When this connection changes to a new non-zero value, all alarms are acknowledged.  Status Reset - A write connection. Assign a digital tag to this connection to notify the data source that the alarm status has been reset, that is, the accumulated time for all alarms has been reset to 00:00:00, and the alarm quantity for all alarms has been reset to 0.  Remote Status Reset - A read connection. Assign a tag or expression to this connection. When this connection changes to a new non-zero value, the alarm status is reset. All accumulated alarm times are reset to 00:00:00, and all alarm quantities are reset to 0. If an alarm is still active when the alarm status is reset, its accumulated time will continue from 00:00:00 and its alarm quantity will increase from 0 to 1.  Close Display - A write connection. Assign A write connection. Assign a digital tag to this connection to notify the data source that the pop-up alarm display has been closed.  Remote Close Display - A read connection. Assign a tag or expression to this connection. When this connection changes to a new non-zero value, the pop-up alarm display specified on the Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor is closed.  Remote Clear History - A read connection. Assign a tag or an expression to this connection to allow the data source to remove all alarms from the alarm log file and alarm lists, and reset the alarm status.  Name  This column shows the name of the connection.  Tag or expression  Type the tag name or expression associated with the connection. If a tag or expression was selected, it is shown here.  Tag button (...)  Click this button to open the Tag Browser and select a tag instead of typing the tag name in the Tag or expression column.  Exprn button (...)  Click this button to open the Expression Editor and create an expression instead of typing the expression in the Tag or expression column.  See also  The Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor  Specify the graphic display and system-wide alarm options  All properties and connections  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1824,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for alarms",
    "url": "60581.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs an error about alarms to the diagnostics list if:  The value for a trigger connection tag or expression is a string  Message to Tag is set to True, but no tag has been assigned  The message connection is assigned to an analog or digital tag and the alarm message being written out contains non-numeric characters  The message connection is assigned to an analog tag and the message being written out is a numeric value outside the tag's maximum/minimum range  The message connection is assigned to a digital tag and the message being written out is a numeric value other than 0 or 1  See also  About alarms  The Alarm Setup editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1825,
    "title": "Set up diagnostics for development",
    "url": "60898.htm",
    "text": "Logging information about system activity, which was previously done by the RSView Activity Log subsystem, is now performed by the FactoryTalk Diagnostics system. FactoryTalk Diagnostics continually records information about system activity for the local computer such as command and macro usage, operator comments, subsystem-related warnings and errors, and communication errors. This information can be sent to various destinations. The destinations that are available depends on how your system is set up.  Diagnostics information can be displayed in any or all of these three locations:  in the Diagnostics List, by default at the bottom of the main FactoryTalk View Studio window (the FactoryTalk equivalent to the RSView Activity Bar in earlier versions of RSView Studio)  in a Diagnostics List object in a display (the equivalent of the RSView Activity List object in earlier versions of RSView Studio)  in the FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer, accessible through the Tools menu  To set up FactoryTalk Diagnostics  From the Tools menu, select Diagnostics Setup to open the editor.  To set up a destination, select it in the tree.  To set up which types of messages are sent to which destinations, select Message Routing.  To view information in the Diagnostics List  Click View in the FactoryTalk View Studio bar menu and then click the Diagnostics List item if it does not have a check mark beside it.  The Diagnostics List appears at the bottom of the display area.  To move the Diagnostics List  By default, the list is docked at the bottom of the main window.  Place the mouse pointer on the double line below the two buttons at the left of the list.  Right click and drag the mouse until the Diagnostics List is where you want it to be.  Double-click the Diagnostics List to float it, or, if floating, re-dock it in its last position.  When the list is floating, put the mouse pointer in the title bar to move it where you want it.  You can also resize the list.  To view information in the Diagnostics Viewer, use one of the following methods  In FactoryTalk View Studio, from the Tools menu, select Diagnostics Viewer.  From Windows Start menu:  (Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008) Select All Programs > Rockwell Software > FactoryTalk Tools > Diagnostics Viewer  (Windows Server 2012) Click the down arrow and select Apps > Rockwell Software > Diagnostics Viewer  (Windows 10 and Windows Server 2016) Select All apps > Rockwell Software > Diagnostics Viewer  For more information, click Help in the Diagnostics Viewer's main menu.  Tip:  Diagnostic error messages may appear truncated if they are too long for the diagnostics window. To ensure that error messages are displayed in full, use the FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer to show these messages on the desktop terminal and at design time. For applications that run on PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, or PanelView Plus CE terminals, configure the FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer to accept messages from Windows CE devices. In the Tools menu, click Diagnostics Setup, and then select Message Routing to select the check box for this option. Click Help in the Message Routing pane for more details.  See also  Set up run-time diagnostics  ",
    "keywords": {
      "diagnostics": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1826,
    "title": "Set up run-time diagnostics",
    "url": "60900.htm",
    "text": "In the Diagnostics List Setup editor, set up when to print messages at run time, the graphic display to use and when to open it, and the maximum number of messages to store.  Tip:  Diagnostic error messages may appear truncated if they are too long for the diagnostics window. To ensure that error messages are shown in full, use the FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer to show these messages on the desktop terminal and at design time. For applications that run on PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, or PanelView Plus CE terminals, configure the FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer to accept messages from Windows CE devices. In the Tools menu, click Diagnostics Setup, and then select Message Routing to select the check box for this option. Click Help in the Message Routing pane for more details.  To change the setup of a Diagnostics List  Double-click the Diagnostics List Setup icon to open the editor.  In the Log messages to printer when section, specify the types of messages you want to print, if any. Be sure you have set up a printer on the run-time terminal.  In the Runtime display section, specify the graphic display to use for diagnostics messages at run time and what events, if any, will open that display automatically.  Specify the maximum number of messages to store.  See also  Set up Diagnostics for development  How the diagnostics list works at run time  Create diagnostics lists  Create Diagnostics buttons  Create Goto Display buttons  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1827,
    "title": "Options in the Diagnostics List Setup editor",
    "url": "334136.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options in the Diagnostics List Setup editor.  Options  Descriptions  Log messages to printer when  Error occurs  Check this box to print the error message when an error occurs. An error message indicates a significant problem which severely degrades functionality.  Warning occurs  Check this box to print the warning message when a warning occurs. An warning message indicates that the product still runs but is not right.  Information occurs  Check this box to print the information message when an information message occurs. Information messages document the essential purpose of an application.  Audit occurs  Check this box to print the audit message when an audit message occurs. Audit messages indicate activities essential to the purpose of the application.  Runtime display  Display name  The default graphic display is called [DIAGNOSTICS]. If you don&#8217;t want to use the default display, specify a graphic display that contains a diagnostics list object. To select from a list of the graphic displays in the application, click the Browse button.  Edit  Click this button to open the selected graphic display for editing.  Open display automatically when  Error occurs  Check this box to open the specified display whenever a new error occurs.  Warning occurs  Check this box to open the specified display whenever a new warning occurs.  Information occurs  Check this box to open the specified display whenever a new information message occurs.  Audit occurs  Check this box to open the specified display whenever a new audit message occurs.  Maximum number of messages  Type the maximum number of messages to store in memory, up to 2000. When this number is reached, the oldest message is deleted to make room for a new message.  Tip:  If you set up your own display, use a display type of On Top, otherwise an error will be generated when the runtime application is created. You can also select the Cannot Be Replaced option. This means that, when a message occurs, your display will open on top of the current display, and will remain open until the operator closes it. You can use the diagnostics buttons with your display.  If you do not want the diagnostics display to open automatically, clear all the check boxes. You can still display diagnostics messages in any diagnostics list graphic object in any graphic display. Create a goto display button that the operator can use to open the graphic display containing the diagnostics list.  See also  Set up Diagnostics for development  How the diagnostics list works at run time  Create diagnostics lists  Create Diagnostics buttons  Create Goto Display buttons  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1828,
    "title": "Create diagnostics lists",
    "url": "60902.htm",
    "text": "At run time the diagnostics list displays messages to give the operator information about system activity:  Information messages, such as messages about tag assignments, tag read and write activity, and macro usage.  Warning messages.  Error messages, such as messages about communication errors, invalid values, and unassigned controls.  When you create your project, the application creates a default graphic display called [DIAGNOSTICS] that contains a diagnostics list. The display also contains buttons for scrolling through the list, clearing messages, and closing the list.  You can use the [DIAGNOSTICS] display as is, or modify the appearance of the diagnostics list and buttons in the display. Or, you can create your own graphic display containing a diagnostics list and buttons that you create.  If you set up your own graphic display, use an On Top display, otherwise an error will be generated when the runtime application is created. You can also select the Cannot Be Replaced option. This means that, when a message occurs, your display will open on top of the current display, and will remain open until the operator closes it. You can use the diagnostics buttons with the diagnostics list object. You can also use all of the key buttons except Move Left, Move Right, Backspace, and Enter.  Tip:  Specify the graphic display to use for diagnostics messages, and the types of messages to display, in the Diagnostics Setup editor.  You can configure the display to open automatically whenever a new message occurs, using the options in the Diagnostics Setup editor. Or, you can create a goto display button that the operator can press to open the display containing the Diagnostics list.  You can place a diagnostics list on any display in the project, not just on a diagnostics display.  To create a diagnostics list  In the Graphics Display editor, select Advanced > Diagnostics from the Objects menu, then choose Diagnostics List.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the list to be.  Double-click the list to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the list looks.  See also  How the diagnostics list works at run time  Set up how the diagnostics list looks  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1829,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a diagnostics list object",
    "url": "60912.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Diagnostics List Properties dialog box to set up general properties for the object.  To set up general options for the diagnostics list object  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  See also  Set up diagnostics for development  Create diagnostics lists  Options on the General tab of the Diagnostics List Properties dialog box  Create Diagnostics buttons  How the diagnostics list works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1830,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Diagnostics List Properties dialog box",
    "url": "332344.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Diagnostics List Properties dialog box  Options  Description  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Fore color  This box shows the color of the text shown on the object. Click it to select another color.  Selection back color  This box displays the color for the highlight bar. Click it to select another color. The highlight bar indicates the selected message at run time.  Selection fore color  This box displays the color for the highlighted message. Click it to select another color.  Text  The text properties apply to the messages on the object.  Font  Select the font to use for the message.  Size  Select the font size to use for the message.  Bold, Italic Underline  Select a font style for the message, if required.  Other  Key navigation  Select this check box to allow the user to navigate to the object using the keyboard and give the object input focus.  Wrap around  Select this check box if you want the list to wrap from the end of the list to the beginning when scrolling down, and from the beginning of the list to the end when scrolling up.  See also  Create diagnostics lists  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1831,
    "title": "Create Diagnostics buttons",
    "url": "60904.htm",
    "text": "At run time the diagnostics list shows information messages, warning messages, error messages and audit messages. The operator can use the Diagnostics buttons to clear the messages in the list. There are two types of Diagnostics buttons: Clear and Clear All.  When the operator presses the Clear button, the selected message is cleared. When the operator presses the Clear All button, all the messages in the system, including those in the currently selected list, are cleared.  Tip:  The default [DIAGNOSTICS] graphic display contains a Diagnostics list and the Clear and Clear All Diagnostics buttons. You can use the [DIAGNOSTICS] display as is, or modify the appearance of the buttons in the display. Or, you can create your own graphic display containing a Diagnostics list and Diagnostics buttons that you create.  To create a Diagnostics button  In the Graphics Display editor, select Advanced > Diagnostics from the Objects menu, and then choose Clear or Clear All.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify how the button looks.  See also  Configure the Diagnostics button  Set up a caption and image for a button  Create diagnostics lists  How the diagnostics list works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1832,
    "title": "Set up general properties for a Diagnostics button",
    "url": "60906.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Diagnostics Button Properties dialog box to set up how a Diagnostics button looks.There are two types of Diagnostics buttons: Clear and Clear All.  To set up general options for a Diagnostics button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options.  Once you set up the options on the General tab, click the Label tab to specify a caption or image for the button.  See also  Create Diagnostics buttons  Create Diagnostics lists  Options on the General tab of a Diagnostics Button Properties dialog box  Set up a caption and image for a button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1833,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Diagnostics Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "330518.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Diagnostics Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Appearance  Specify the object's appearance in this area.  Border style  Select a border style for the object.  If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Select a pattern for the object. The pattern appears on the face of the object. The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image (if any are defined for the object). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is not visible.  Shape  Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  If the background style is gradient, click it to bring up the Gradient Fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Border color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern color  This box shows the current pattern color for the object. Click it to select another color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  If a pattern style is selected, the pattern also blinks.  Touch margins  You can specify a touch-insensitive margin inside the button&#8217;s edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the button&#8217;s top and bottom edges.  Other  Audio  Select this check box to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  Send press to  Select whether the button press will be sent to whatever object currently has the focus, or to a specific object linked to the button.  This option applies only to the Clear button.  Linked object  Specify the object to which the button press will be sent if the Send press to option is Linked object.  This option applies only to the Clear button.  See also  bounding box  Configuring the gradient fill  Create Diagnostics buttons  Create Diagnostics lists  Set up general properties for a Diagnostics button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1834,
    "title": "How the diagnostics list works at run time",
    "url": "60910.htm",
    "text": "At run time, the Diagnostics list shows information about system activity, with a different icon for each type of message.  Open the diagnostics list display  There are two ways to open the display containing the Diagnostics list:  In the Diagnostics Setup editor, select one or more Open display automatically when options to make the application open the display whenever a new message appears. You can use the default [diagnostics] display or specify a graphic display you have created that contains a Diagnostics list.  In a graphic display, create a goto display button that the operator can press to open the display containing the Diagnostics list.  The default display opens on top of the current display.  Tip:  If you are using your own graphic display containing the diagnostics list, in the Display Settings dialog box, make it an On Top display, and select the Cannot Be Replaced option. This means that, when a message occurs, your display will open on top of the current display, and will remain open until you close it.  Use buttons with the diagnostics list  The application creates a default graphic display called [diagnostics] that contains a Diagnostics list and these buttons:  Clear - clears the selected message. You can create this button in your own display using the Clear diagnostics button.  If the button's Send press to property is set to Object With Focus, and the current object with focus is not a diagnostics list, the button press will have no effect.  If the button's Send press to property is set to Linked Object, pressing the button will not change input focus to the linked diagnostics list. Whatever object has input focus on the display will continue to have input focus.  Clear All - clears all messages. You can create this button in your own display using the Clear All Diagnostics button.  Move Up - scrolls up in the list. You can create this button in your own display using the Move Up button.  Move Down - scrolls down in the list. You can create this button in your own display using the Move Down button.  Close - closes the graphic display containing the list. You can create this button in your own display using the Close Display button.  If you modify the default display or create your own graphic display containing a diagnostics list, the display might contain different buttons.  See also  Create diagnostics lists  Use the MoveLeftButton and MoveRightButton to view diagnostic messages  Create Goto Display buttons  Create Diagnostics buttons  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1835,
    "title": "Use the MoveLeftButton and MoveRightButton to view diagnostic messages",
    "url": "80944.htm",
    "text": "The MoveLeftButton and MoveRightButton objects can be added to the diagnostic graphic display to view messages that are too long to be viewed on the display. When selected, the buttons are used to scroll the message content across the display.  Tip:  An asterisk (*) shown at the end of a message indicates the full message is not shown  How the buttons work at run time:  When the MoveRightButton is selected, the message moves six characters to the left. When the MoveLeftButton is selected, the message moves six characters to the right. The buttons can be selected as needed to view additional characters.  When either button is selected, all messages that are displayed in the list move accordingly.  When either button is selected, updates to the diagnostic list are temporarily paused.  If there are no messages on the diagnostics list (for example, if a Clear All operation was used), the MoveLeftButton and MoveRightButton do not work.  When either button is selected several times and then followed by another key button (such as Home, End, and Page Down), all of the properties of the MoveLeftButton and MoveRightButton are reset. In this case, all messages are displayed from the leftmost characters, and updates to the list are resumed.  The MoveLeftButton and MoveRightButton only support objects with the Send press to property set to Object With Focus.   See also  How the diagnostics list works at run time  Create key buttons  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1836,
    "title": "Set up on-board audit trail",
    "url": "307195.htm",
    "text": "Use the Audit Trail Setup editor to set up on-board audit trail at run time.  Tip:  Select the Audit trail check box in the Startup editor to apply the audit trail settings.  The audit log file is automatically saved in:  (PC and MobileView) \\Users\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\Logs\\<ApplicationName>\\M_AuditTrails\\  (PanelView Plus 7 and PanelView Plus 6) \\Windows\\Logs\\<ApplicationName>\\M_AuditTrails\\  To set up audit trail  From the Explore tree, double-click Audit Trail Setup to open the Audit Trail Setup editor.  Specify the Maximum number of audit messages for the log file.  (Optional) Specify these values and assign tags:  Capacity high warning (%)  Capacity high-high warning (%)  (Optional) Specify a tag to Capacity overrun.  (Optional) Specify a tag or expression to Remote clear audit history.  Click OK to save the options and close the editor.  Select the Audit trail check box in the Startup editor to turn on audit trail.  See also  Options in the Audit Trail Setup editor  Configure startup settings  ",
    "keywords": {
      "audit trail": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1837,
    "title": "Options in the Audit Trail Setup editor",
    "url": "307194.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options in the Audit Trail Setup editor.  Options  Descriptions  Maximum number of audit entries  Specify the maximum amount of audit entries in the log file (.atl). The available value is 500-10,000.  If the amount of audit entries in the log file reaches the maximum capacity, the oldest audit entry is deleted when the new audit occurs.  Capacity high warning (%)  Specify the threshold of capacity high warning, which will occur when the amount of audit entries reaches or exceeds the specified percentage of the Maximum number of audit entries.  The available value is 1-99.  A write connection. Click the Browse button to assign a tag to the connection to notify the data source that the amount of audit entries received has reached or exceeded the capacity high warning threshold.  Capacity high-high warning (%)  Specify the threshold of capacity high-high warning, which will occur when the amount of audit entries reaches or exceeds the specified percentage of the Maximum number of audit entries.  The available value is 1-99 and must be greater than the Capacity high warning value.  A write connection. Click the Browse button to assign a tag to the connection to notify the data source that the amount of audit entries received has reached or exceeded the capacity high-high warning threshold.  Capacity overrun  Specify when the amount of audit entries received exceeds the Maximum number of audit entries and the oldest entry is overwritten.  A write connection. Click the Browse button to assign a tag to this connection to notify the data source that the amount of audit entries received has exceeded the Maximum number of audit entries.  Remote clear audit history  A read connection. Assign a tag or an expression to this connection to allow the data source to clear the audit log file, audit trail list, and audit trail RAM cache.  See also  Set up on-board audit trail  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1838,
    "title": "Set up CSV export",
    "url": "313705.htm",
    "text": "Use the CSV Export Setup dialog box to set up CSV export.  To set up CSV export  From the Explore tree, double-click CSV Export Setup to open the CSV Export Setup editor.  Select the Enable CSV Export check box.  Select the types of information to be exported.  Enter either or both of the paths to save the CSV files to.  Tip:  For example, enter:  \\My documents or \\Storage card2 in PanelView Plus 6 or PanelView Plus 7 path.  It is recommended to save CSV files to an external storage on a PanelView Plus 7 or PanelView Plus 6 terminal due to the limited space on the internal storage. Plug in the external storage to the terminal before running the application. If the external storage does not exist, the Storage Card 2 or USB Storage folder will be created during CSV export on the internal storage.  C:\\Users\\Public\\Documents in Windows PC or MobileView path.  Specify a tag or an expression for the Export Trigger connection.  (Optional) Specify a tag or an expression for the File Label connection.  (Optional) On the History tabs, specify tags for Status Code and Status Message.  Click OK.  Tip:  Use the Startup editor to turn on the CSV export function:  Select the Audit trail check box to export audit information.  Select the Alarms check box to export alarm information.  See also  About CSV export  Options in the CSV Export Setup editor  CSV export status codes and messages  ",
    "keywords": {
      "export": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1839,
    "title": "About CSV export",
    "url": "313706.htm",
    "text": "Use the CSV Export Setup editor to set up CSV export at design time to export audit, alarm, and diagnostics information to CSV files at run time:  When the trigger's value changes from zero to nonzero.  If the trigger's initial value is nonzero when the application starts.  The CSV files will be saved to the specified path or paths. A CSV file name follows the format as YYYY_MM_DD_HH_mm_ss-<FileLabel>-TYPE.csv, where TYPE represents the type of information that could be ALARM, AUDIT, or DIAGNOSTICS. For example, an audit information CSV file name could be 2017_06_19_09_33_55-Batch001-AUDIT.csv.  Tip:  Storing more than 500 CSV files in a folder on an SD card may slow system performance.  Use CVB Data Log Tamper Detection Utility to detect the integrity of the CSV file.  See also  Set up CSV export  Options in the CSV Export Setup editor  CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1840,
    "title": "Options in the CSV Export Setup editor",
    "url": "313707.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options in the CSV Export Setup editor.  Options  Descriptions  Enable CSV Export  Select this check box to enable the options in the CSV Export Setup editor.  Type  Select the type of information to be exported:  Audit Information  Alarm Information  Diagnostics Information  Path  Specify local paths to save the CSV files to.  Connections  Specify tags or expressions for the connections:  Export Trigger - This is a read connection. Information will be exported to CSV files:  When the trigger's value changes from zero to nonzero.  If the trigger's initial value is nonzero when the application starts.  File Label - This is a read connection. The value of this connection will be part of a CSV file name. A CSV file name follows the format as YYYY_MM_DD_HH_mm_ss-<FileLabel>-TYPE.csv, where TYPE represents the type of information that could be ALARM, AUDIT, or DIAGNOSTICS. For example, an audit information CSV file name could be 2017_06_19_09_33_55-Batch001-AUDIT.csv.  If no tag is specified for File Label or the specified tag does not return a value, <FileLabel> will be the computer or device name.  Status  Specify tags for the selected information type:  Status Code - This is a write connection.  Status Message - This is a write connection.  See also  Set up CSV export  About CSV export  CSV export status codes and messages  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1841,
    "title": "CSV export status codes and messages",
    "url": "314007.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the CSV export status codes and messages.  Status codes  Status messages  Descriptions  0  Not applicable  This is the initial status code value.  100  \"Alarm information is being exported to a CSV file.\"  \"Audit information is being exported to a CSV file.\"  \"Diagnostics information is being exported to a CSV file.\"  Before the current export operation completes, you cannot perform another export operation.  200  \"Alarm information has successfully been exported to a CSV file.\"  \"Audit information has successfully been exported to a CSV file.\"  \"Diagnostics information has successfully been exported to a CSV file.\"  The information is exported to a CSV file in the specified paths.  700  \"Insufficient disk space to perform the export operation.\"  Delete files you no longer need from the disk you are saving to and export the information again.  701  \"The path or address doesn't exist, or contains invalid characters.\"  Specify a valid path or address, or remove the invalid characters (\\ / : * ? &#8220; < > |), and export the information again.  702  \"The file name contains invalid characters.\"  Remove the invalid characters (\\ / : * ? &#8220; < > |) and export the information again.  703  \"The CSV file is missing.\"  Check whether the drive or address still exists and export the information again.  704  \"Unknown error occurred.&#8221;  Export the information again.  See also  Set up CSV export  About CSV export  Options in the CSV Export Setup editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1842,
    "title": "About embedded variables",
    "url": "60151.htm",
    "text": "Embedded variables allow you to show values that change dynamically at runtime. Put placeholders in strings where the embedded variable will be shown. At run time, the placeholder is updated with the real-time values of the variables.  Embedded variables are of two kinds:  A tag is read to provide the run-time value. Use tags, to embed tag values (Numeric or String), date values, and time values. The tag is read at run time and the current value is shown.  A tag is not read. Use this type to embed literal strings and numbers that will be shown at run time as they were entered.  Use one or more embedded variables in:  The text captions on graphic objects  The title bar of On Top displays  Message text.  For example, you could embed a tag value and the time variable in a local message. At run time when the local message is shown, it is updated to reflect the tag&#8217;s current value as the value changes. The time is also updated as the time changes.  You can also use literal strings and constants in embedded variables, or a combination of both variable and literal strings and numbers.  Embedded variables can consist of:  Numeric (analog or digital) tags, including both HMI and data server tags  Literal numbers (constants)  String tags, including both HMI and data server tags  Literal strings (static text)  Tag placeholders.   The time  The date  Use literal strings instead of tag values  To use a character string in an embedded variable instead of a tag value, choose the Literal string option in the String Variable dialog box. To use a literal number instead of a tag value, choose the Literal number option in the Numeric variable dialog box.  Tip:  You can include numbers in the Literal string option. Use the Literal number option if the number you want to display requires decimal places or other special formatting.  Use tag placeholders instead of tag names  The Graphics editor accepts tag placeholders instead of tag names. Placeholders allow you to use the same display with different sets of tags.  You can use tag placeholders in:  The graphic display that opens when the application is first run.  Graphic displays that are opened using a goto display button.  Graphic displays that are opened using a display list selector.  The graphic display that opens when the logout button is pressed.  The graphic display that opens when auto logout is used.  Graphic displays that are opened using the Remote Display Number global connection.  Parameter lists for parameter passing.  Use parameter files or parameter lists to specify which tags to substitute for which placeholders.  To create a tag placeholder in an embedded variable  In the Tag box, type the cross-hatch character followed by a number (no space in between). For example, #1.  To delete an embedded variable  Click the embedded variable to select it, and then press Delete.  Tip:  Embedded variables are case sensitive, and must be in the proper format and syntax to work. If you make a mistake, your variable will be treated as a piece of text. Therefore, do not attempt to edit embedded variables manually. Use the Insert Variable and Edit variable dialog boxes to avoid problems.  See also  Embed a variable in a message  Embed a variable in a caption  Insert a string variable  Insert a time/date variable  Insert a numeric variable  ",
    "keywords": {
      "embedded variable": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1843,
    "title": "Where you can create embedded variables",
    "url": "329264.htm",
    "text": "You can create embedded variables in these editors:  Graphics. Use this editor to insert embedded variables in the captions for graphic objects or in any text objects. For graphic objects with multiple states, you can insert different embedded variables in each state&#8217;s caption.  Local Messages. Use this editor to insert embedded variables in local messages.  Information Messages. Use this editor to insert embedded variables in information messages.  Alarm Setup. Use this editor to insert embedded variables in alarm messages.  Display Settings. Use this editor to insert embedded variables in the title bars of displays.  See also  About embedded variables  Embed a variable in a message  Embed a variable in a caption  Insert a string variable  Insert a time/date variable  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1844,
    "title": "Embed a variable in a caption",
    "url": "60181.htm",
    "text": "You can insert embedded variables in the captions of any graphic objects that have captions. At run time, the caption will be updated with the real-time values of &nbsp;the variable.  To insert an embedded variable in a caption  Double-click the object whose caption you want to set up, to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the tab containing the Caption box. This may be the General tab, the Label tab or the States tab, depending on the type of object.  In the Caption text box, type the caption as desired. At the point where you want to embed the variable, click Insert Variable.  Select the type of variable you want to insert.  In the dialog box that opens, define the variable and click OK.  See also  About embedded variables  Embed a variable in a message  Insert a string variable  Insert a time/date variable  Insert a numeric variable  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1845,
    "title": "Embed a variable in a message",
    "url": "60183.htm",
    "text": "You can embed variables in local messages, information messages and alarm messages. Create the message as you normally would, and at the point where you want to insert a variable, open the Edit String dialog box.  To open a dialog box for creating an embedded variable in a message  In the Local Messages, Information Messages, or Alarm Setup editor, right click in the Message column and then click Edit String.  or  In the Edit menu, click Edit String.  Click Insert Variable.  Click the type of variable to insert.  Fill in the options in the dialog box that opens.  See also  About embedded variables  Embed a variable in a caption  Insert a string variable  Insert a time/date variable  Insert a numeric variable  Create local messages  Create information messages  Set up alarm messages (Messages tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1846,
    "title": "Embed a variable in a text object",
    "url": "60149.htm",
    "text": "You can insert embedded variables in any graphic text objects. At run time, the text will be updated with the real-time values of &nbsp;the variable.  To insert an embedded variable in a text object  Double-click the text object you want to set up, to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab containing the text box.  In the text box, type the text as desired. At the point where you want to embed the variable, click Insert Variable.  Select the type of variable you want to insert.  In the dialog box that opens, define the variable and click OK.  See also  About embedded variables  Embed a variable in a message  Embed a variable in a caption  Insert a string variable  Insert a time/date variable  Insert a numeric variable  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1847,
    "title": "Insert a numeric variable",
    "url": "60171.htm",
    "text": "Use the Numeric Variable dialog box to insert a numeric variable in a text box. The numeric variable can be a tag name or placeholder that will provide a value that will change dynamically at run time, or it can be a literal number that will display as entered.  There are many cases where you might want to show process data within a fixed string on an object. For example, you may want to show the current value of a setpoint in the caption of a numeric input enable button that edits the setpoint value. To do this, embed the setpoint's data item or tag in the caption property.  Tip:  Embedded variables are case sensitive, and must be in the proper format and syntax to work. If you make a mistake, your variable will be treated as a piece of text. Therefore, do not attempt to edit embedded variables manually. Use the Insert Variable and Edit variable dialog boxes to avoid problems.  To set up a numeric variable  In the Caption box in a graphic object&#8217;s Properties dialog box, or in the Message column of the Local Messages, Information Messages, or Alarm Setup editor, click Insert Variable.  Click Numeric.  Specify the options in the dialog box that opens and click OK.  To edit a numeric variable  Double-click the numeric variable in the text box, or right-click and select Edit Variable.  In the Numeric Variable dialog box, make the required changes and click OK.  Options  Tag  Choose this option to use a tag as the source of the numeric variable. Type the name of an analog or digital tag, or type a tag placeholder.  To open the Tag Browser and select a tag, click the Browse button.  Literal number  Choose this option to enter a literal number string as the numeric variable. This choice places the character 'L' (for Literal) at the beginning of the embedded variable, and prevents the system from performing a tag read for this variable.  Tip:  Use the Literal number option if the number you want to show requires decimal places or other special formatting. Otherwise, you can include numbers in the Literal string option.  Number of digits  Select the maximum number of digits to display, up to 17 digits. The decimal point and minus sign each count as a digit.  Decimal places  Select the number of digits to appear after the decimal point.  Fill left with  Select a character to fill the left of the display with if the value at the data source contains fewer than the maximum number of digits. If you don&#8217;t want to use a fill character, select None.  See also  About embedded variables  Numeric variable syntax  Insert a string variable  Insert a time/date variable  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1848,
    "title": "Numeric variable syntax",
    "url": "60583.htm",
    "text": "Tip:  Embedded variables are case sensitive, and must be in the proper format and syntax to work. If you make a mistake, your variable will be treated as a piece of text. Therefore, do not attempt to edit embedded variables manually. Use the Insert Variable and Edit variable dialog boxes to avoid problems.  Numeric embedded variables use this format:  /*LN:# Tag_name Fill_character DP:#*/  The syntax is:  an opening escape sequence &#8216;/*&#8217;  followed by an optional letter L (for Literal) preventing a tag read for the variable, (if the Literal number option is chosen in the Numeric Variable dialog box)  followed by the letter 'N'  followed by a colon ':'  followed by a numeric length field  followed by a space character  followed by the tag name, tag placeholder (#1, #2, etc.)  followed by a space character  followed by a word describing the left fill property  followed by a space character  followed by the letters &#8216;DP:&#8217;  followed by the number of decimal places  followed by a closing escape sequence '*/'  For example, to show the current value of an analog tag called Oven_temp, with 3 digits, two decimal places, and no fill character, you would type:  /*N:6 Oven_temp NOFILL DP:2*/  On the display during development, you would see as many # characters as digits, with the decimal place as specified:  ###.##  At run time, you would see the value of the tag displayed in the format specified:  183.00  See also  About embedded variables  Insert a numeric variable  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1849,
    "title": "Insert a string variable",
    "url": "60173.htm",
    "text": "Use the String Variable dialog box to enter a string variable in a text box. The string variable can be a tag name or placeholder that will change dynamically at run time, or a literal string that will be shown as entered here.  There are instances where you may want to embed string data within another string. For example, you may be connected to a controller that provides alarm text messages or event messages through a tag or data item. You may want to trap that text message and save it in a FactoryTalk View alarm message, to retain a history of controller issues. To do this, embed the data item within the alarm message text generated when the alarm is triggered. When the alarm occurs, the variable string is saved with the alarm text.  Tip:  Embedded variables are case sensitive, and must be in the proper format and syntax to work. If you make a mistake, your variable will be treated as a piece of text. Therefore, do not attempt to edit embedded variables manually. Use the Insert Variable and Edit variable dialog boxes to avoid problems.  To insert a string variable  In the Caption box in a graphic object&#8217;s Properties dialog box, or in the Message column of the Local Messages, Information Messages, or Alarm Setup editor, click Insert Variable.  Click String.  Specify the options in the dialog box that opens and click OK.  To edit a String variable  Double-click the string variable in the text box, or right-click and select Edit Variable.  In the String Variable dialog box, make the required changes and click OK.  Options  Tag  Choose this option to use a string tag as the source of the string variable. Type the name of a string tag, or type a tag placeholder.  To open the Tag Browser and select a tag, click the Browse button.  Literal string  Choose this option to enter a literal character string as the string variable. This choice places the character 'L' (for Literal) at the beginning of the embedded variable, and prevents the system from performing a tag read for this variable.  Tip:  You can include numbers in the Literal string option. However, if the number you want to show requires decimal places or other special formatting, use the Literal number option.  Fixed number of characters  Check this box if you want the variable to always display the same number of characters. Then select the number of characters to display, up to 255.  If you clear this box, the length of the embedded variable changes to accommodate the length of the string tag&#8217;s value.  Right-most characters in string are shown  Check this box if you want the number of shown characters to be counted from the right-hand side of the string, instead of the left-hand side.  Show * character if string is longer than field width  Check this box if you want the display to show an asterisk (*) if the character string is too long to be shown in the field. If the Right-most characters in string are displayed check box is selected, the asterisk will appear at the beginning of the string, otherwise it will appear at the end.  See also  About embedded variables  String variable syntax  Insert a numeric variable  Insert a time/date variable  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1850,
    "title": "String variable syntax",
    "url": "60175.htm",
    "text": "Tip:  Embedded variables are case sensitive, and must be in the proper format and syntax to work. If you make a mistake, your variable will be treated as a piece of text. Therefore, do not attempt to edit embedded variables manually. Use the Insert Variable and Edit variable dialog boxes to avoid problems.  String embedded variables use this format:  /*LS:# Tag_name*/  The syntax is:  an opening escape sequence &#8216;/*&#8217;  followed by the letter 'L' (for Literal) preventing a tag read for the variable, (if the Literal string option is chosen in the String Variable dialog box)  followed by the letter 'S'  followed by a colon ':'  followed by a numeric length field (if the Fixed number of characters check box is checked in the String Variable dialog box)  followed by a space character  followed by the tag name, tag placeholder (#1, #2, etc.)  followed by a closing escape sequence '*/'  For example, to display the current value of a string tag called Blower_status, with a fixed length of 20 characters, the correct syntax would be:  /*S:20 Blower_status*/  On the display during development, you would see as many 's' characters as specified in the variable, in this case, 20:  ssssssssssssssssssss  At run time, you would see the value of the tag shown as a string:  Functioning normally  Tip:  If the Fixed number of characters check box and the Right-most characters in string are displayed check box are checked in the String Variable dialog box, the numeric length field will be a negative number.  If the Fixed number of characters check box and the Show * character if string is longer than field width check box are checked in the String Variable dialog box, the keyword SHOWSTAR will be added to the embedded variable string after the tag or parameter field.  For example, to display the current value of the string tag called Blower_status, with a fixed length of 20 characters, counting from the right, and displaying the * character if the string exceeds the field width, the correct syntax would be:  /*S:-20 Blower_status SHOWSTAR*/  See also  About embedded variables  Insert a string variable  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1851,
    "title": "Insert a time/date variable",
    "url": "60177.htm",
    "text": "Use the Time Date dialog to insert a time and date variable in a text box. The time and date will change dynamically at run time.  For example, many developers like to put the system time and date on the main display. To do this, embed a time and date variable in a text string and link it to a system time tag. For example, the string \"Current time is /*t*/\" might display as Current time is 3:04:45 pm.  Tip:  Embedded variables are case sensitive, and must be in the proper format and syntax to work. If you make a mistake, your variable will be treated as a piece of text. Therefore, do not attempt to edit embedded variables manually. Use the Insert Variable and Edit variable dialog boxes to avoid problems.  To set up a time/date variable  In the Caption box in a graphic object&#8217;s Properties dialog box, or in the Message column of the Local Messages, Information Messages, or Alarm Setup editor, click Insert Variable.  Click Time/Date.  Select an option from the drop-down list in the dialog box that opens.  Click OK.  Options  From the drop-down list, select the time and date format to show.  Select this option from the list  To insert these characters  This format is called  29/11/2000  SD  Short date  November 29, 2000  LD  Long date  29/11/2000 3:39:03 PM  SDT  Short date and time  November 29, 2000 3:39:03 PM  LDT  Long date and time  3:39:03 PM  T  Time  3:39:03 PM 29/11/2000  TSD  Time and short date  3:39:03 PM November 29, 2000  TLD  Time and long date  Tip:  The time-and-date formats in the list will be shown in the language of the operating system as defined in the Regional Options tab of the Regional and Language Options dialog box in the Control Panel. The time and date will be shown in the current language of the application.  See also  About embedded variables  Time-and-date variable syntax  Insert a numeric variable  Insert a string variable  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1852,
    "title": "Time-and-date variable syntax",
    "url": "60179.htm",
    "text": "Tip:  Embedded variables are case sensitive, and must be in the proper format and syntax to work. If you make a mistake, your variable will be treated as a piece of text. Therefore, do not attempt to edit embedded variables manually. Use the Insert Variable and Edit variable dialog boxes to avoid problems.  The time-and-date formats in the list will be displayed in the language of the operating system as defined in the Regional Options tab of the Regional and Language Options dialog box in the Control Panel. The time and date will be displayed in the current language of the application.  Time and date embedded variables use this format:  /*Time_date_format*/  The syntax is:  an opening escape sequence &#8216;/*&#8217;  followed by one or more 'characters' representing the time and or date format  followed by a closing escape sequence '*/'  Time_date_format uses one of these character sequences to specify the format:  Select this option from the drop-down list  To insert these characters  This format is called  29/11/2000  SD  Short date  November 29, 2000  LD  Long date  29/11/2000 3:39:03 PM  SDT  Short date and time  November 29, 2000 3:39:03 PM  LDT  Long date and time  3:39:03 PM  T  Time  3:39:03 PM 29/11/2000  TSD  Time and short date  3:39:03 PM November 29, 2000  TLD  Time and long date  For example, to display the time followed by the short date, you would select this option from the list:  3:39:03 PM 29/11/2000  The time-and-date variable would appear as this:  /*TSD*/  On the display during development, the variable displays the time it was created until the display is closed and reopened. It will then show the time the display was reopened.  At run time, the variable will update continuously.  A space appears between the time and date when the embedded variable is displayed at run time.  See also  About embedded variables  Insert a time/date variable  Embed a variable in a caption  Embed a variable in a message  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1853,
    "title": "Edit an existing embedded variable",
    "url": "60916.htm",
    "text": "To edit an embedded variable  In the Caption box or String Edit dialog box, double-click the embedded variable.  or  Right-click the variable and then click Edit Variable.  Make your changes in the dialog box that opens.  Click OK.  To delete an embedded variable  Click the embedded variable to select it, and then press Delete.  Tip:  Embedded variables are case sensitive, and must be in the proper format and syntax to work. If you make a mistake, your variable will be treated as a piece of text. Therefore, do not attempt to edit embedded variables manually. Use the Insert Variable and Edit variable dialog boxes to avoid problems.  See also  About embedded variables  Embed a variable in a message  Embed a variable in a caption  Insert a string variable  Insert a time/date variable  Insert a numeric variable  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1854,
    "title": "About local messages",
    "url": "60155.htm",
    "text": "Use local messages to provide ongoing information on the status of devices and processes.  For example, you might put a local message display object in your display to describe the status of a device whose condition cannot be shown graphically with complete accuracy. A hoist might have related local messages to say At top or At bottom as well as Lowering, Raising, and Stopped.  First, set up a file containing the local messages and their trigger values in the Local Messages editor. Then assign the file of messages to a local message display object. When you set up the local message display object, assign a tag or expression to the Value connection.  At run time, when a message&#8217;s trigger value matches the Value connection, the local message display object shows the associated message.  Tip:  Configure the Value connection at the data source to change to the trigger value that suits the particular message. For example, you might set up a message Motor running with the trigger value 10. Configure the data source to monitor the motor and, when the motor starts, set the Value connection to 10. The local message object on the display would then read Motor running until the Value connection changes.  The local message display object always appears in the graphic display it&#8217;s placed in, whether or not there is a message to show. This is the key difference between local messages and information messages. The [INFORMATION] graphic display only opens when there are information messages to display (unless the operator opens it using a goto display button).  When renaming any of your local message files, make sure you update any local objects that use that message file to the new name.  See also  Create local messages  Create local message displays  How the local message display works at run time  ",
    "keywords": {
      "local message": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1855,
    "title": "Create local messages",
    "url": "60153.htm",
    "text": "Use the Local Messages editor to create local messages and specify their trigger values. You can define up to 10,000 messages in each message file.  To create local messages  In the Graphics folder in the Explorer window, double-click the Local Messages icon to open the editor.  Specify the messages and their trigger values.  From the File menu, choose Save and specify a name for the file.  Click Close.  Tip:  If you rename any of your local message files, make sure you update any local objects that use that message file to the new name.  Options  Trigger value  Type an integer trigger value. You can use positive and negative numbers. Do not use 0. Trigger values do not need to be contiguous, but they must be unique for each message. For example, you could use trigger values of 1, 2, and 3, or values of 10, 20, and 30. The trigger value cannot be blank.  Message  Type the message, up to 256 characters long. You can use the new line character, \\n, to specify that the message continues onto the next line after the character.  See also  About local messages  Create local message displays  How the local message display works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1856,
    "title": "Edit message strings",
    "url": "60169.htm",
    "text": "Open the String Edit dialog box by clicking Edit String in the Edit menu or in the right-click Context menu of the Message column in a message editor.  Use the Edit String dialog box to edit existing messages and to insert embedded variables in messages. You can use embedded variables in local messages, information messages and alarm messages.  Type the message text in the text box.  Options  Insert variable  From the list, select the type of variable to be inserted in the caption.  In the dialog box, specify the details of the variable.  Tip:  Embedded variables are case sensitive, and must be in the proper format and syntax to work. If you make a mistake, your variable will be treated as a piece of text. Therefore, do not attempt to edit embedded variables manually. Use the Insert Variable and Edit variable dialog boxes to avoid problems.  See also  Insert a numeric variable  Insert a string variable  Insert a Time/Date variable  Create local messages  Create information messages  Set up alarm messages (Messages tab)  About embedded variables  Embed a variable in a message  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1857,
    "title": "About information messages",
    "url": "60585.htm",
    "text": "Use information messages to give the operator messages about the process, prompts or instructions, and information about the current states.  Show information messages  When you create a project, the application creates a default graphic display called [INFORMATION] that contains an information message display object. The graphic display also contains buttons for acknowledging messages and closing the display. You can use the default display, or create your own display for displaying information messages at run time.  At run time, the graphic display containing the information message display object opens when the Value connection at the data source changes from zero to any non-zero value. If the value matches a message&#8217;s trigger value, the corresponding message is shown. If the value does not match any configured trigger value, question marks are shown.  Tip:  If you set up your own graphic display, use an On Top display, otherwise an error will be generated when the runtime application is created. You can also select the Cannot Be Replaced option. This means that, when a message occurs, your display will open on top of the current display, and will remain open until the operator closes it. You can use the information acknowledge button with the information message display object.  The display opens automatically whenever the Value connection value changes from zero to any non-zero value. You can also create a goto display button that the operator can press to open the display containing the information message display object.  You can place an information message display on any graphic display in the project, not just on an information display.  Generate information messages  Configure the Value connection at the data source to change to the trigger value that suits the particular message. For example, suppose your plant uses a bag-filling machine that requires the operator to remove the full bag and set up an empty bag between each fill. You might configure the data source to monitor the bag-filling machine, and when the bag is full, set the Value connection to the trigger value. This would trigger a message like this: \"Bag filling is complete. Transfer full bag to conveyor and hook new bag in place.\"  See also  Set up information messages  Create information messages  Create information message displays  Set up how information messages are shown  How the information message display works at run time  ",
    "keywords": {
      "information message": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1858,
    "title": "Set up information messages",
    "url": "329277.htm",
    "text": "Follow the steps below to set up information messages.  To set up information messages  In the Information Messages editor, set up the messages and their trigger values.  In the Information Setup editor:  Specify the graphic display to open when information messages occur, and the file of messages to show.  Assign a tag or expression to the Value connection.  If you want the operator to acknowledge messages, assign the Ack connection and specify the acknowledge hold time.  In the Startup editor, select the Information messages check box is selected.  (Optional) In the Graphics editor, modify the default [INFORMATION] display or create your own graphic display to use for information messages.  For example, if you don&#8217;t want the operator to acknowledge messages, edit the default display to remove the information acknowledge button.  Tip:  When renaming information message files, update the reference to the message file in the Information Setup editor to the new name.  See also  About information messages  Options in the Information Setup editor  Create information messages  Create information message displays  Set up how information messages are shown  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1859,
    "title": "Options in the Information Setup editor",
    "url": "332844.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options in the Information Setup editor.  Options  Descriptions  Display file name  The default graphic display is called [INFORMATION]. If you don&#8217;t want to use the default display, specify a graphic display that contains an information message display object. To select from a list of the graphic displays in the project, click the Browse button. If you clear the box, no display will open when the Value connection changes to an assigned trigger value.  Edit button  Click this button to open the selected graphic display for editing in the Graphic Displays editor.  Message file name  Type the name of the information message file to use. To select from a list of the information message files in the project, click the Browse button. If you leave the box blank, no messages are ever shown.  Edit button  Click this button to open the selected information message file for editing.  Acknowledge hold time  Select the minimum length of time to hold the Ack connection value at 1 after the operator presses the information acknowledge button. If the operator is still pressing the button when the hold time expires, the connection is not reset to 0 until the operator releases the button.  Maximum update rate  Select the maximum rate at which data servers will supply data to the Value tag specified in the Connections section. This includes any tags used in Value expressions. The default update rate is 1 second.  At run time, all Value tags are updated immediately upon startup, no matter what the update rate is.  Connection  Assign a tag or expression to these controls:  Value - a read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. The graphic display opens when the Value connection at the data source changes from zero to any non-zero value. If the value matches a message's trigger value, the message is shown. If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and displays the message with the trigger value that matches the expression value.  Ack - a write connection. Assign a digital tag to this connection. When the operator presses the information acknowledge button, the Ack connection is set to 1 at the data source. When the acknowledge hold time expires, the connection is reset to 0. If the operator is still pressing the button when the hold time expires, the connection is not reset until the operator releases the button.  Connections columns  Name  This column shows the name of the connection.  Tag/Expression  Type the tag name or expression associated with the connection. If a tag or expression has already been selected, it is shown here. The information message graphic display opens when the Value connection at the data source changes from 0 to any non-zero value.  Tag button (...)  Click this button to open the Tag Browser and choose a tag instead of typing the tag name in the Tag/Expression column.  Exprn button (...)  Click this button to open the Expression editor and create an expression instead of typing the expression in the Tag/Expression column.  See also  About information messages  Create information messages  Set up how information messages are shown  How the information message display works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1860,
    "title": "Create information messages",
    "url": "60167.htm",
    "text": "Use information messages to give the operator prompts about what to do next or information about a process. Use the Information Messages editor to create information messages and specify their trigger values. You can define up to 10,000 messages in each message file.  To create information messages  Double-click the Information Messages icon to open the editor.  Specify the messages and their trigger values.  From the File menu, choose Save and specify a name for the file.  Click Close.  To delete messages  Select any cell in the message's row and then press Delete. Shift-click in a column to select cells for multiple messages.  To copy messages  In the Message column, select one or more messages and then press Ctrl-C, or right-click and then click Copy.  In the Message column, click the cell to paste the first message in, and then press Ctrl-V, or right-click and then click Paste.  Options  Trigger value  Type a non-zero integer trigger value. You can use positive and negative numbers. Trigger values do not need to be contiguous, but they must be unique for each message. For example, you could use trigger values of 1, 2, and 3, or values of 10, 20, and 30. The trigger value cannot be blank.  Message  Type the message, up to 256 characters long. You can use the new line character, \\n, to specify that the message continues onto the next line after the character.  or  Right click in the message column to open the Context menu, and then click Edit string. Use this option to insert an embedded variable in the message.  See also  About information messages  Set up how information messages are shown  Edit message strings  Embed a variable in a message  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1861,
    "title": "Set up how information messages are shown",
    "url": "60591.htm",
    "text": "Use the Information Setup editor to set up how information messages are shown.  Select the Information messages check box in the Startup editor to turn on information messages at run time.  Tip:  If you use the Information Acknowledge button, configure the data source to change the Value connection to 0 when the Ack connection changes to 1. Then acknowledging the message closes the information display.  When renaming information message files, make sure you update the reference to the message file in the Information Setup editor to the new name.  To set up how information messages are shown  Double-click the Information Setup icon to open the editor.  Specify these options:  The graphic display to use for information messages  The file of messages to show  The acknowledge hold time, if any  Assign a tag or expression to these controls:  Value  Ack  Click OK to save the options and close the editor.  See also  About information messages  Set up information messages  Create information messages  How the information message display works at run time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1862,
    "title": "How the information message display works at run time",
    "url": "60597_1.htm",
    "text": "At run time the graphic display containing the information message display object opens when the Value connection at the data source changes from zero to any non-zero value. If the value matches a message&#8217;s trigger value, the corresponding message is shown. If the non-zero value does not match any configured trigger value, question marks are displayed. The display opens on top of the current display.  If the Value connection value changes to 0, the display closes.  Tip:  Use the Information Setup editor to specify the graphic display to use for information messages, specify the file containing the messages to display, and assign the Value connection.  What is shown  If the Value connection is unassigned, the display never appears automatically. If the user manually goes to a graphic display containing an information message display object with an unassigned Value connection, the information message display is filled with question marks (?).  The Value connection value is rounded up to the nearest integer. If the value does not match any of the trigger values in the specified message file, the display is filled with question marks (?).  If the message is too long to fit in the display, the last displayed character is an asterisk (*).  Use buttons with the information message display  The application creates a default graphic display called [INFORMATION] that contains an information message display object and these buttons:  Ack - acknowledges the message. You can create this button in your own display using the information acknowledge button.  Close - closes the display. You can create this button in your own display using the close display button.  If you modify the default display or create your own graphic display containing an information message display, the display might contain different buttons.  Acknowledge messages  When the operator presses the Acknowledge button, the Ack connection is set to 1 at the data source. The value is held as long as the operator presses the button, or for the acknowledge hold time, whichever is longer. Then the connection is reset to 0. Assign the Ack connection and specify a hold time in the Information Setup editor.  Tip:  To close the display when the operator acknowledges the message, configure the data source to set the Value connection to 0 when the Ack connection is set to 1.  See also  Create information message displays  Causes of run-time errors for the information message display  Create Information Acknowledge buttons  Create Close Display buttons  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1863,
    "title": "Options in the Gradient Fill dialog box",
    "url": "72904.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options in the Gradient Fill dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Colors  Move the slider to change the percentage of the start and end color.  Start color  Click the Start color box to choose the start color for the gradient fill.  End color  Click the End color box to choose the end color for the gradient fill.  Horizontal  Click Horizontal to make the color gradient in a horizontal direction.  Vertical  Click Vertical to make the color gradient in a vertical direction.  Diagonal Up  Click Diagonal Up to make the color gradient in a diagonal up direction.  Diagonal Down  Click Diagonal Down to make the color gradient in a diagonal down direction.  Styles  A linear gradient color is specified by two points, and a color (or different intensity of one color) at each point. Depending on the points' positions, there are four styles you can select.  Important:  The PanelView Plus 7 and PanelView Plus 6 terminals cannot process a Gradient Fill that uses a Diagonal Up or Diagonal Down direction, nor can the terminal apply a Gradient Fill to a rotated object. When running an MER on a PanelView Plus 7 or PanelView Plus 6 terminal and the system encounters an object with these attributes, the system shall use the gradient fill starting color as the object's solid color background.  When running the MER on a computer, the system can process all gradient fills and this warning does not apply.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1864,
    "title": "Open an object's properties dialog automatically (Settings tab)",
    "url": "80906.htm",
    "text": "Use this tab to specify if an object's property dialog should automatically open when you place an object on a display.  To automatically open the object's property dialog box  From the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Settings tab.  Select Auto-open Property Dialog to have the object's property dialog box automatically open when you place the object on a display.  Click OK.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1865,
    "title": "Name graphic objects",
    "url": "67801.htm",
    "text": "Objects (and groups of objects) are automatically given a name and number when you create them, for example NumericInputEnable4. If desired, you can assign a more meaningful name to the object, for example Conveyor_speed_input.  The object name appears in the status bar, diagnostics bar, Property Panel, and Object Explorer in FactoryTalk View Studio, and in diagnostics log messages at run time.  The name must start with a letter, and cannot contain spaces. You can use the underscore character (_).  To name an object in the Property Panel  Select the object.  In the Property Panel, click the Properties tab.  Double-click the (Name) row, and then type the name.  To name an object in its Properties dialog box  Double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Common tab.  In the Name box, type the name.  To name a group object  Select the group object.  In the Property Panel, click the Properties tab.  Double-click the (GroupName) row, and then type the name.  See also  Select graphic objects  Object Explorer  Graphics editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1866,
    "title": "Reshape objects",
    "url": "67273.htm",
    "text": "To change the size of an object while maintaining its proportions  Select the object.  Grab a corner of the object.  Hold down Shift and the left mouse button as you drag the handle.  When the object is the desired size, release the left mouse button and then release Shift.  Tip:  To grab a handle, point the mouse cursor at it, and when the cursor changes to a double-ended arrow, hold down the left mouse button.  To create a perfect square or circle  Select the rectangle or ellipse object.  Grab a handle then press and hold Ctrl.  Hold down Ctrl and the left mouse button as you drag the handle.  When the object is the correct shape and size, release the mouse button and then release Ctrl.  To reshape an arc or wedge  Select the object, right-click to display the context menu, then select Edit.  Grab a handle and drag one way or the other until the arc or wedge is the desired shape.  Click the Select tool to end editing.  Tip:  The overall shape is the same size but the proportion that is an arc or wedge is changed.  To reshape a polygon or polyline  Right-click the object and select Edit.  To create an angle along any line in the polygon or polyline, position the point on the line where you want the angle. A square is shown at this point.  Drag the square to the tip of the angle.  To delete a line segment, position the pointer at the tip of the angle, then click the Delete key. The pointer becomes a cross hair when it is centered on an angle.  See also  Drawing objects  Edit fine details with the keyboard  Select graphic objects  Context menu  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1867,
    "title": "Duplicate objects",
    "url": "67802.htm",
    "text": "Use the Duplicate option on the Edit menu to make a copy of the selected object or objects. The duplicated object is placed slightly offset from the original.  To duplicate objects  Select one or more objects.  Do one of the following:  From the Edit menu, select Duplicate.  Click @ on the toolbar.  Right-click the selected objects and select Duplicate.  Tip:  If you duplicate an object, move it, and then select Duplicate again, the object will be duplicated and moved in one step. This is useful for creating a series of objects with an equal distance between them.  Any animation attached to the object is also duplicated. If a group is duplicated, the new copy of the group can be ungrouped to individual objects.  Duplicate works until you cancel the object's selection.  Duplicate does not use the clipboard, so the clipboard&#8217;s contents are not changed when you use this command.  See also  Create graphic displays  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1868,
    "title": "Delete objects",
    "url": "67803.htm",
    "text": "You can delete one or more objects from a graphic display.  To delete objects  Select one or more objects.  Do one of the following:  From the Edit menu, select Delete.  Right-click the object and select Delete.  Press the Delete key on the keyboard.  Tip:  To delete all the objects on a graphic display, from the Edit menu, select Clear All.  Delete does not use the clipboard. Use Undo @ to reverse an accidental deletion.  See also  Graphic objects and drawing elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1869,
    "title": "Edit fine details with the keyboard",
    "url": "67271.htm",
    "text": "You can use the keyboard to obtain more precise control than the mouse gives you when editing the fine details of a graphic display. The keyboard can be used for reshaping, resizing, repositioning, and drawing objects.  To reposition an object  Use the Up, Down, Right, and Left Arrow keys to move the Select cursor (single arrow) over the object.  Press and hold the Shift key. This is equivalent to holding down the left mouse button.  Use the Arrow keys to move the object to its new position, then release the Shift key.  To resize or reshape an object  Move the Select cursor over the object.  Press and release the Shift key. This selects the object and displays its handles.  Move the Select cursor to a handle using the Arrow keys. When the cursor is over a handle, the handle will become a double arrow.  Press and hold the Shift key.  Use the Arrow keys to drag the handle until the object is the way you want it.  To draw an object using the keyboard  Press Alt-O to open the Objects menu.  Use the Arrow keys to move to the object you want, then press Enter to select it.  Use the Arrow keys to move the tool cursor to the place in the display where you want to start drawing the object.  Press and hold Shift.  Use the Arrow keys to drag the tool until the object is the size and shape you want.  Tip:  Use the plus (+) and minus (-) keys to increase or decrease the amount moved by the Arrow keys, per key press.  To stop drawing, press Alt-O to open the Objects menu, then choose the Select tool.  See also  Reshape objects  Select graphic objects  Move graphic objects  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1870,
    "title": "Assign function keys to objects",
    "url": "67392.htm",
    "text": "Use the Key Assignments option on the display's context menu to assign function keys to graphic objects. When the operator presses the function key at run time, the object is activated.  Tip:  You can assign the function keys F1 through F14, and K1 through K20.  The list shows all the objects in the graphic display to which a function key can be assigned. If keys have already been assigned to the objects, the key name appears in brackets after the object name.  You can also open the Key Assignments dialog box from the Edit menu.  To assign a function key to a graphic object  Right-click the mouse in the display to open the context menu.  Click Key Assignments to open the Key Assignment Properties dialog box.  In the Select an object box, select the object. Only those objects in the display that can have keys assigned to them appear in the box.  In the Select a key assignment box, select the key to use. The assigned function key name appears in brackets after the object name in the Select an object box.  Repeat for as many keys as you want to assign.  Click OK to close the dialog box.  To change the function key assigned to a graphic object  Right-click the mouse in the display to open the Context menu.  Click Key Assignments to open the Key Assignment Properties dialog box.  In the Select an object box, select the object.  In the Select a key assignment box, select a new key or Unassigned.  Click OK to close the dialog box.  Key combination equivalents  If your keyboard does not have more than 12 function keys, you can use the following key combinations to simulate the other keys. If your keypad terminal does not have a Right-Shift key, attach a keyboard with a Right-Shift key to enable keys K13-K20.  For this function key assignment  Press this combination of keys  F13  Left SHIFT + F1  F14  Left SHIFT + F2  K1  Right ALT + F1  K2  Right ALT + F2  K3  Right ALT + F3  K4  Right ALT + F4  K5  Right ALT + F5  K6  Right ALT + F6  K7  Right ALT + F7  K8  Right ALT + F8  K9  Right ALT + F9  K10  Right ALT + F10  K11  Right ALT + F11  K12  Right ALT + F12  K13  Right SHIFT + F1  K14  Right SHIFT + F2  K15  Right SHIFT + F3  K16  Right SHIFT + F4  K17  Right SHIFT + F5  K18  Right SHIFT + F6  K19  Right SHIFT + F7  K20  Right SHIFT + F8  See also  About graphic displays  Graphic objects and drawing elements  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1871,
    "title": "Edit grouped objects",
    "url": "67254.htm",
    "text": "A grouped object can be manipulated like a single object. For example, you can cut, copy and paste groups, change their color or pattern, or send the whole group to the front or back. You can also double-click the group or use the Object Explorer to edit the objects within it.  When you double-click a group, you are in group edit mode. In this mode you can select individual members of the group and modify them without ungrouping them. You can also add new objects to the group in this mode.  You can apply animation to a group. In general, except for visibility, fill, and color, animation set up for a group of objects takes precedence over animation set up for individual objects within the group.   For visibility animation, the Invisible behavior takes precedence.   For fill animation, group animation is added to object animation.   For color animation, applying color animations to an object group as well as to the individual objects in the group causes unexpected behaviors. To set up color animations for an object group, apply the color animations to the group or to the individual objects in the group.  As well, some positioning animation may be additive. Be sure to test group animation to ensure that it produces the effect you intend.  To edit the properties that are common to all the objects in the group, use the Property Panel.  All properties  Click All Properties to view the properties of the group. Since the group is treated as a single object, these are the same as the Shared properties.  To view and edit all the properties of all the objects within the group, in the Property Panel, click All Properties, and then click Include Grouped Properties. The properties of all the objects in the group are listed.  Tip:  Any properties that are shared by more than one object will only be shown once, so changing a shared property will affect all the objects in the group that have that property.  Shared properties  Click Shared Properties to view the shared properties of the group. Since the group is treated as a single object, the list is the same as All Properties.  To view and edit the properties shared by all of the objects within the group, in the Property Panel, click Shared Properties, and then click Include Grouped Properties. Changing a shared property will affect all the objects in the group.  Tip:  To select an item in a group, use the Object Explorer.  See also  Set up object properties (Properties tab)  Object Explorer  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1872,
    "title": "Set up common properties (Common tab)",
    "url": "67224.htm",
    "text": "Some properties, such as size and position, are common to all graphic objects. These properties are set up through the Common tab in the Properties dialog box.  To set the common properties for the object  In the Graphics editor, double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the Common tab.  Specify the common properties for the object.  Options  Size  Height  Specify the number of pixels for the object's height (including borders).  Width  Specify the number of pixels for the object's width (including borders).  Position  Top  Specify the number of pixels for the distance between the top of the display and the top edge of the object. The number must be positive. To specify a negative number, which will position part or all of the object off-screen, use the Property Panel.  Left  Specify the number of pixels for the distance between the left edge of the display and the left edge of the object. The number must be positive. To specify a negative number, which will position part or all of the object off-screen, use the Property Panel.  If the objects shape is Circle or Ellipse, the size and position properties refer to the object's bounding box.  Other  Name  Type the name of the object. The name must start with a letter and cannot contain spaces. You can use numbers and the underscore character (_).  Visible  Clear this check box if you want the object to be invisible at run time.  If you use Visibility animation, its setting will override this setting.  Tip:  If an object is not visible at run time, it is not functional. Clicks or touches on an invisible object pass through the object to whatever is behind it.  For trend objects and third-party ActiveX objects, assign the following properties  Key Navigation  Check this box to allow the user to navigate to the object using the keyboard and give the object input focus.  Focus Highlight  Check this box if you want the object to have a highlight box displayed around it when it has input focus at run time.  See also  The Graphics editor  input focus  Bounding box  Set up visibility animation  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1873,
    "title": "Check an object's different states",
    "url": "67808.htm",
    "text": "Use the States toolbar, or the Property Panel to check that an object&#8217;s states have been configured correctly.  To check an object&#8217;s states using the States toolbar  Select the object or objects.  From the View menu, select Toolbars > States.  In the States toolbar, select the state to view from the list of states configured for the object.  To view the next state, press the Down Arrow key on your keyboard. To view the previous state, press the Up Arrow key. To view the first state, press the Home key. To see the last state, press the End key.  Tip:  If multiple objects are selected, the toolbar shows the states that are common to all the objects.  To check an object&#8217;s states using the Property Panel  Select one or more objects.  In the Property Panel, click the State property and then select the state to view.  To view the next state quickly, double-click the row, or press the Enter key on your keyboard.  See also  Select graphic objects  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1874,
    "title": "Select a pattern style for graphic objects",
    "url": "67309.htm",
    "text": "Use the Foreground Color palette, Background Color palette, and Pattern Style toolbar to set up pattern styles for your graphic objects. Pattern styles apply only to solid objects. The pattern and fore color are changed to the foreground color, while the background is changed to the background color.  You can select foreground and background colors before or after you draw an object with a pattern.  Tip:  If you select more than one object and then click a pattern style, the pattern for all selected objects is changed.  You can also change an object&#8217;s pattern and pattern color using the Property Panel, or by opening the dialog box for the object. If you use the Property Panel, you can change the pattern of multiple selected objects simultaneously.  To make the object&#8217;s background transparent, select the transparent option from the Back Style toolbar. To open the Back Style toolbar, from the View menu, select Toolbars > Back Styles.  To select a pattern style for an object  Select the object.  Click the pattern in the Pattern Style toolbar.  To change an object&#8217;s pattern using the Property Panel  Select the object.  In the Property Panel, click the box beside the PatternStyle property.  Click the pattern you want.  To change an object&#8217;s pattern using the object&#8217;s Properties dialog box  Double-click the object.  In the dialog box, click the pattern you want.  See also  Change the color of graphic objects  Default colors and styles  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1875,
    "title": "Change the color of graphic objects",
    "url": "67307.htm",
    "text": "When you create an object, its colors are the FactoryTalk View Studio default colors for the object. To change the colors, you can use the Foreground Color and Background Color toolbars, the Property Panel, or the object&#8217;s Properties dialog box.  To open the toolbars, from the View menu, select Toolbars.  About color properties  The number of color properties an object has depends on the type of object and how you set it up. For example, a button with states can have up to seven different colors for each state. When you select colors using the color toolbars, some properties are assigned the foreground color and some are assigned the background color. Other color properties, such as Fill color, cannot be assigned using the color toolbars. For these, use the object's Properties dialog box or Property Panel.  For drawing objects (except image and panel) you can select colors from the color toolbars before you draw an object (either before or after you click the object's tool). Other objects are always drawn using their default colors, but you can select the objects and then click the toolbars to change their colors.  Default colors and styles  The default colors for drawing objects change when you use the Foreground Color and Background Color toolbars. When you select a color in the Foreground or Background toolbar, that color becomes the default value for all future drawing objects (except the panel and image objects), whether or not you have selected an object in the display. The same is true of the Back Style and Pattern Style toolbars. If you use these toolbars to change a back style or pattern style, the style you select becomes the new default.  In these toolbars, the color or style that shows as selected in the toolbar is the default color or style, not the color or style of the currently selected object in the display.  Tip:  If you select more than one object, when you click a color toolbar or change a color property in the Property Panel, the applicable colors of all selected objects are changed.  The Foreground Color and Background Color toolbars can affect multiple properties of the object. To assign different colors to the affected properties, use the Property Panel or the Properties dialog box.  Use the Properties dialog box or the Property Panel to assign separate colors to different foreground or background properties, to choose colors that do not appear in the toolbars, or to change the default colors for properties that cannot be assigned using the color toolbars.  Use the color toolbars to assign colors to the following properties.  Foreground Color toolbar  Background Color toolbar  Border Color  Back Color  Caption Color  Background Color  Fore Color  Caption Back Color  Foreground Color  Image Back Color  Image Color  Legend Color  Line Color  Needle Color  Pattern Color  To change the colors of an object using the toolbars  Select the object.  Click the color in the applicable toolbar. The color you clicked becomes the default color for future drawing objects.  To change the colors of an object using the Property Panel  Select the object.  In the Property Panel, click the color box beside the name of the property to change. A color palette opens.  Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  To change the colors of an object using the Properties dialog box  Double-click the object. For drawing objects, you can also right-click the object, and then select Properties.  In the Properties dialog box&#8217;s General tab, click the color box beside the name of the property to change. A color palette opens.  Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  Options  Basic Colors  Click the appropriate colored box to select a basic color.  Custom Colors  You can define up to 16 custom colors. To select one, click the appropriate box.  See also  Select a pattern style for graphic objects  Set up object properties (Properties tab)  Default colors and styles  Define custom colors  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1876,
    "title": "Default colors and styles",
    "url": "67312.htm",
    "text": "When you open the Graphics editor, the background and foreground colors, the back style and the pattern style used for drawing items are set to default values. You can change these values using the toolbars for each of these properties.  Default colors  To see what the default colors are, open the Foreground and Background color palettes. With the Graphics editor open, from the View menu, select Toolbars > Foreground Colors or Background Colors. A check appears beside the menu item to show that the toolbar is open.  The default color will appear selected in the palette. To change the default color, select another color. The color you select will be the default value for all drawing objects (except the panel and image objects) until you select another color in the palette.  Show displays in grayscale  Applications running on the PanelView Plus grayscale terminals do not display in color. If you are developing applications for these terminals, use this option to see how your displays will look at run time.  To set displays to appear in grayscale, from the View menu, select Show Displays in Grayscale. When Show Displays in Grayscale is selected, all open displays will change from full color to grayscale. When Show Displays in Grayscale is cleared, all open displays will appear in color.  Third party ActiveX objects will not appear in grayscale.  Show Displays in Grayscale does not work in Test Application mode.  Default styles  The Back Style and Pattern Style toolbars control the default values for these properties. With the Graphics editor open, from the View menu, select Toolbars > Pattern Styles or Back Styles. A check appears beside the menu item to show that the toolbar is open.  By default, the back style property is Transparent, and the pattern style property is None. If you select a back style or pattern style in the toolbar, the style you select becomes the new default.  Tip:  The color or style that shows as selected in the toolbar is the default color or style, not the color or style of the currently selected object in the display.  See also  Change the color of graphic objects  Select a pattern style for graphic objects  Define custom colors  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1877,
    "title": "Define custom colors",
    "url": "67305.htm",
    "text": "To define a custom color  In the color palette, click Other to open the Color dialog box.  Select one of the Custom colors boxes to edit. (This will avoid accidentally editing an existing custom color.)  In the color refiner box to the right of the basic colors palette, drag the cursor to the area that shows the color you want (in the small Color/Solid box), then drag the arrow beside the luminosity bar to adjust the brightness.  or  Type values for Red, Green and Blue, or for Hue, Sat(uration) and Lum(inosity), until you achieve the desired color.  Click Add to Custom Colors. The color is added to the list of custom colors in the Color dialog box.  Tip:  Hue is the position of the color in the color spectrum. Saturation is the purity of the hue, going from gray to the pure color. Luminosity is the brightness of the color, going from black to white.  See also  Change the color of graphic objects  Default colors and styles  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1878,
    "title": "Tag placeholders",
    "url": "67179.htm",
    "text": "Use a tag placeholder to mark where you want to insert a tag name or some part of a tag name at run time. A tag placeholder is a crosshatch character (#) followed by a number from 1 to 500. Tag placeholders let you create one display that you can use to represent a number of similar operations. At run time you use a parameter file or parameter list to supply the tag names associated with the particular operation, and these names are used in place of the tag placeholders.  You can also use tag placeholders with global objects. You can assign tag placeholders to the connections for base objects, and to connections for reference objects with the LinkConnections property set to False. For more information, see Global object parameters.  Tip:  A placeholder need not be a complete tag name. It can be only part of a tag name, for example, the name of the folder in which the tag is stored.  You can use parameter files or parameter lists to replace tag placeholders in these graphic displays:  The graphic display that opens when the project is first run; specify the graphic display and the parameter file or list in the Startup editor.  Graphic displays that are opened using a logout button, goto display button or display list selector, specify both the graphic display and the parameter file or list in the Properties dialog box.  The graphic display specified in the Project Settings Runtime tab when auto logout is enabled.  Displays specified in the Display tab of the Global Connections editor.  To use a tag placeholder in a graphic display  Type the placeholder (# and a number) where you would normally type a tag name or some part of a tag name.  If you are using a parameter file, create a parameter file that lists the tag names in the order they are to be used and references them to the placeholder.  Then, in the Startup editor, Project Settings, Global Connections editor, or in the Properties dialog box for the graphic object, specify the parameter file to use with the graphic display.  At run time, the tags in the parameter file replace the tag placeholders.  To use a parameter list, in the Startup editor, Project Settings, Global Connections editor, or in the Properties dialog box for the graphic object, select the tags to use with the graphic display. The first tag in the list will replace #1, the second will replace #2, and so on.  At run time, the tags in the parameter list replace the tag placeholders.  Tip:  Tag placeholders cannot be tested in Test Display Mode.  Tag placeholders cannot be used in macros.  If a tag placeholder is not replaced by a tag from a parameter file at run time, an error will be shown in the diagnostics list.  See also  Create parameter files  Create parameter lists  Tag names with animation  Global object parameters  Configure startup settings  Specify project settings (Runtime tag)  Set up global connections - Display tab  Examples: Using tag placeholders  ",
    "keywords": {
      "tag placeholder": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 1879,
    "title": "Property Panel",
    "url": "67250.htm",
    "text": "How do I open the Property Panel?  When you open a project, the Property Panel is shown on the right in the main window. You can hide it, and change its size and position. If it is not shown, open it using one of the following methods:  On the Graphics toolbar, click @  From the View menu, select Property Panel  Right-click an object and select Property Panel  Right-click an empty area of a display and select Property Panel  Use the Property Panel to modify the properties of graphic objects and assign tags and expressions to the objects. The Property Panel is especially useful for making changes to the properties of multiple objects at the same time.  See also  Set up object properties  Assign controls to objects  The Graphics editor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1880,
    "title": "Set up object properties (Properties tab)",
    "url": "67248.htm",
    "text": "The Properties tab of the Property Panel displays all the non-hidden properties of the selected object. The left column shows the property name and the right column shows the value.  Tip:  To get help for the selected property, click the ? button in the top right corner of the dialog box.  If multiple objects are selected, click Shared Properties to edit the properties that are common to all the objects. To edit all the properties of all the selected objects, whether shared or not, click All Properties.  If a group object is selected, click the button to the left of All Properties to view the properties of the individual objects within the group.  You cannot change a property&#8217;s name.  If a property is read-only, its value is grayed and you cannot change it.  If a property is write-only, (for example, for a password), its value will be blank, and the words Write-only are added to the property&#8217;s type in the description box. When you enter a value, it will be blanked out immediately, but the value will be written to the property.  If the selected object has a dialog box for setting up properties, the first name in the property grid, below (AboutBox), is (Custom). Double-click the row, or click the Browse button (\u2026), to open the object&#8217;s Properties dialog box and make changes to the object&#8217;s properties, tags, and expressions.  In the Properties tab of the Property Panel you can enter negative numbers for the positioning properties, Top and Left. These properties specify where an object sits in relation to the top and left side of the display. Using negative numbers lets you define a position for an object that results in part of the object being off-screen. You cannot enter negative numbers for these properties in the Common tab of Properties dialog box for an object.  To change the value of a property in the Property Panel  Double-click the property&#8217;s row to select the property.  If the property has a list of values associated with it, pressing Enter or double-clicking in the property&#8217;s row changes the value to the next available value. A down-arrow appears in the right column. Click it to see the options for the property.  If the property has a property dialog box (such as the Font dialog box) associated with it, double-clicking the row opens the dialog box. Or, a Browse button appears in the right column - click it to open the dialog box.  Type the new value for the property, select one from the list, or make selections from the dialog box.  Press Enter or click another cell in the grid to save the change. The selected object is updated with the new property value and its appearance in the display changes, if appropriate.  See also  Property Panel  Assign controls to objects  Edit grouped objects  All properties and connections  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1881,
    "title": "The Object Browser",
    "url": "67390.htm",
    "text": "The Object Browser provides a list of objects in the current display that can be linked to the button whose properties you are editing; that is, when the button is pressed, the object you select will be affected.  For some buttons, there will only be type of one object in the list, because the button only works with one type of object. A Diagnostics Clear button's list, for example, will show only the Diagnostics List objects on the display, because that is the only type of object the button works with. Other buttons, such as Key buttons, will show a wider selection.  To open the Object Browser  Click the Browse button (...) for a button's Linked object property on the Properties dialog box or Property panel. The Object Browser opens, showing a list of objects.  To link the button to an object  Highlight the object you want to link the button to.  Click OK to make the link and close the dialog box.  See also  Assign function keys to objects  Property Panel  All properties and connections  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1882,
    "title": "The Component Browser",
    "url": "67810.htm",
    "text": "The Component Browser allows you to select what display, macro, image, parameter, or message file will be called when a button or display object is activated at run time.  To specify a component  Open the object&#8217;s property panel or Properties dialog box.  Click the property (Display, MessageFile, ParameterFile, for example) that needs to be defined. A Browse button (...) appears at the right.  Click the Browse button. The Component Browser opens with a list of the components of that type available in the project.  Select the component (parameter or message file, display, macro, or image) to be called when the object is activated at run time, that is, when the button is pressed or the display object is clicked.  Click OK.  See also  Set up object properties  All properties and connections  Open an object's properties dialog automatically (Settings tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1883,
    "title": "Assign connections to an object",
    "url": "67252.htm",
    "text": "The Connections tab of the Property Panel shows all the object&#8217;s connections that can have a tag or expression.  If more than one object is selected on the display, nothing shows on the Connections tab.  If a third-party ActiveX control is selected, the Connections tab shows all the ActiveX control's properties that can have a tag or expression assigned.  Tip:  To get help for the selected control in the Property Panel, click the ? button.  To assign connections to an object  On the Connections tab, click a connection's row to select it.  In the Tag/Expression column, specify a tag name, or specify an expression if the connection accepts expressions and you want to assign one.  Tip:  To select a tag from the tag database, click the Browser button (...) in the Tags column.  To open the Expression editor, click the Browser button (...) in the Exprn column.  Press Enter or click another cell in the grid to save the tag or expression assignment.  See also  Property Panel  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  Delete a connection from an object  All properties and connections  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1884,
    "title": "Assign connections to an object",
    "url": "78486.htm",
    "text": "The Connections tab of the Property Panel shows all the object&#8217;s connections that can have a tag or expression.  If more than one object is selected on the display, nothing shows on the Connections tab.  If a third-party ActiveX control is selected, the Connections tab shows all the ActiveX control's properties that can have a tag or expression assigned.  Tip:  To get help for the selected control in the Property Panel, click the ? button.  To assign connections to an object  On the Connections tab, click a connection's row to select it.  In the Tag/Expression column, specify a tag name, or specify an expression if the connection accepts expressions and you want to assign one.  Tip:  To select a tag from the tag database, click the Browser button (...) in the Tags column.  To open the Expression editor, click the Browser button (...) in the Exprn column.  Press Enter or click another cell in the grid to save the tag or expression assignment.  See also  Property Panel  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  Delete a connection from an object  All properties and connections  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1885,
    "title": "Delete a connection from an object",
    "url": "299144.htm",
    "text": "You may need to delete a connection from an object.  To delete a connection from an object  Delete all characters in the Tag or expression column or click the row and press Delete.  Press Enter or click another cell in the grid to save the change.  See also  Assign connections to an object  Columns on the Connections tab of a graphic object's Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1886,
    "title": "All properties and connections",
    "url": "137568.htm",
    "text": "This section introduces FactoryTalk View Machine Edition graphic object properties and connections.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1887,
    "title": "(AboutBox)",
    "url": "61235.htm",
    "text": "Shows version and copyright information for the object. Double-click the row, or click the Browse button (\u2026), to open the About box.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1888,
    "title": "(Custom)",
    "url": "61225.htm",
    "text": "Opens a dialog box in which you configure properties and assign tags and expressions to the object. Double-click in the row, or click the Browse button (\u2026), to open the object&#8217;s dialog box.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1889,
    "title": "(Name) or (GroupName)",
    "url": "61221.htm",
    "text": "Specifies a name for the selected object or group. If you don&#8217;t specify a name, at run time the application uses the object&#8217;s default name in error messages.  You can use letters, numbers, and the underscore character (_) in the group object name. The first character must be a letter.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1890,
    "title": "Ack connection",
    "url": "60531.htm",
    "text": "When the application starts, this connection has a value of zero.  When the operator acknowledges an alarm by pressing the Ack Alarm button, the application sends the alarm's trigger value (or bit position, for bit triggers) to this connection, and holds the value as long as the operator presses the button, or for the duration of the notification hold time, whichever is longer. Then the connection's value is reset to zero. Specify the hold time in the Advanced tab.  When the operator acknowledges all alarms by pressing the Acknowledge All Alarms button, the application sends the Acknowledge all value (specified in the Use ack all value box) to this connection, and holds the value as long as the operator presses the button, or for the duration of the notification hold time, whichever is longer. Then the connection's value is reset to zero.  See also  Property Panel  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1891,
    "title": "AckSymbol",
    "url": "61178.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the character to be shown in the Acknowledged Symbol column of the alarm list object, next to an acknowledged alarm.  The default symbol is an asterisk (*).  This property is only used if the DisplayAckSymbol property is set to true.  See also  DisplayAckSymbol  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1892,
    "title": "Action",
    "url": "61182.htm",
    "text": "Select the recipe operation that the button will initiate when pressed at run time. Available options are:  Download  Upload  Upload and Create  Restore  Save  Delete  Rename  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1893,
    "title": "AckSymbol",
    "url": "61177.htm",
    "text": "The box shows the background color to use when displaying alarms that are currently in alarm (active) and have also been acknowledged, in the alarm list object. Double-click to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  This property is only used when the ActiveAckedUseAlarmColors property is set to False.  See also  ActiveAckedUseAlarmColors  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1894,
    "title": "ActiveAckedBlink",
    "url": "61139.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether alarms that are currently in alarm (active) and have also been acknowledged will blink at run time.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1895,
    "title": "ActiveAckedForeColor",
    "url": "61174.htm",
    "text": "The box shows the foreground color to use when showing alarms that are currently in alarm (active) and have also been acknowledged, in the alarm list object. Double-click to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  This property is only used when the ActiveAckedUseAlarmColors property is set to False.  See also  ActiveAckedUseAlarmColors  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1896,
    "title": "ActiveAckedUseAlarmColors",
    "url": "61172.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether alarms that are currently active (in alarm), and have also been acknowledged, will be shown in the alarm list object using the colors defined in the Alarm Setup editor, or (if False) the values specified for the ActiveAckedForeColor and ActiveAckedBackColor properties.  See also  ActiveAckedForeColor  AckSymbol  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1897,
    "title": "ActiveAcknowledged",
    "url": "60832.htm",
    "text": "A read-only connection. Assign a tag or an expression to this connection. At run time, when the tag or expression value is non-zero, the Alarm List shows alarms that are both active and acknowledged.  If you assign an expression to this connection, the application calculates the value of the expression and uses the result to determine whether to show active acknowledged alarms.  When this connection is assigned, it overrides the DisplayActiveAckedAlarms property.  See also  DisplayActiveAckedAlarms  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1898,
    "title": "ActiveSymbol",
    "url": "61194.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the character to be shown in the Active Symbol column of the alarm list object, next to an alarm that is currently in alarm (active).  The default symbol is an asterisk (*).  This property is only used if the DisplayActiveSymbol property is set to true.  See also  DisplayActiveSymbol  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1899,
    "title": "ActiveUnackedBackColor",
    "url": "61170.htm",
    "text": "The box shows the background color to use when showing alarms that are currently in alarm (active) and have not yet been acknowledged, in the alarm list object. Double-click to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  This property is only used when the ActiveUnackedUseAlarmColors property is set to False.  See also  ActiveUnackedUseAlarmColors  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1900,
    "title": "ActiveUnackedBlink",
    "url": "61171.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether alarms that are currently in alarm (active) and have not yet been acknowledged will blink at run time.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1901,
    "title": "ActiveUnackedForeColor",
    "url": "61167.htm",
    "text": "The box shows the foreground color to use when displaying alarms that are currently in alarm (active) and have not yet been acknowledged, in the alarm list object. Double-click to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  This property is only used when the ActiveUnackedUseAlarmColors property is set to False.  See also  ActiveUnackedUseAlarmColors  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1902,
    "title": "ActiveUnackedUseAlarmColors",
    "url": "61165.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether alarms that are currently active (in alarm), and have not yet been acknowledged, will be shown in the alarm list object using the colors defined in the Alarm Setup editor, or (if False) the values specified for the ActiveUnackedForeColor and ActiveUnackedBackColor properties.  See also  ActiveUnackedForeColor  ActiveUnackedBackColor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1903,
    "title": "ActiveUnacknowledged",
    "url": "60836.htm",
    "text": "A read-only connection. Assign a tag or an expression to this connection. At run time, when the tag or expression value is non-zero, the Alarm list shows alarms that are active but have not yet been acknowledged.  If you assign an expression to this connection, the application calculates the value of the expression and uses the result to determine whether to show active unacknowledged alarms.  When this connection is assigned, it overrides the DisplayActiveUnackedAlarms property.  See also  DisplayActiveUnackedAlarms  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1904,
    "title": "AlarmIdentifier",
    "url": "270723.htm",
    "text": "AlarmIdentifier is a write-only connection. Assign a numeric tag to this connection.  If the Use Alarm Identifier check box on the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor is  and the Use Alarm Identifier check box on the General tab of the object's Properties dialog box is  Alarm identifier in the alarm log file (history.alm) shows  The AlarmIdentifier connection is  Selected  Selected  The value specified on the Messages tab.  If the Alarm Identifier column on the Messages tab is empty, the value is 0.  Updated with the value specified on the Messages tab.  If the Alarm Identifier column on the Messages tab is empty, the value is 0.  Selected  Clear  The value specified on the Messages tab.  If the Alarm Identifier column on the Messages tab is empty, the value is 0.  Not updated  Clear  Selected  0  Not updated  Clear  Clear  0  Not updated  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1905,
    "title": "Alignment",
    "url": "60997.htm",
    "text": "Select how you want the text to be positioned on the object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1906,
    "title": "Alignment",
    "url": "58295.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the alignment of the caption or image on the button.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1907,
    "title": "AllowBlankComment",
    "url": "224576.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the Comment box can be empty in the Electronic Signature window.  Select False to disallow empty Comment box.  Select True to allow empty Comment box.  See also  Set up electronic signature properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1908,
    "title": "Audio",
    "url": "60996.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed.  If the computer running the project does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1909,
    "title": "Audio",
    "url": "58296.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed. If the computer running the application does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1910,
    "title": "AuthorizedGroup",
    "url": "223751.htm",
    "text": "Select a group from the AuthorizedGroup list to grant the group access to the control object. If one group is selected from the list, all members of the selected group can be a supervisor of this object.  The AuthorizedGroup list is generated from the groups that are added to FactoryTalk Security.  You do not need to add the Authorized Group to Runtime Security.  See also  Set up electronic signature properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1911,
    "title": "auto repeat",
    "url": "60395.htm",
    "text": "With auto repeat, when the operator presses and holds down the button, the software registers repeated button presses until the operator releases the button. To use auto repeat, specify how many times per second to repeat the button press, and how long to wait before auto repeat starts.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1912,
    "title": "AutoRepeatRate",
    "url": "60994.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the number of times per second a button press is registered when the button goes into auto repeat mode. Select 0 if you don&#8217;t want to use auto repeat.  See also  auto repeat  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1913,
    "title": "AutoRepeatDelay",
    "url": "60995.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the length of time the button has to be pressed and held down before auto repeat starts.  See also  auto repeat  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1914,
    "title": "Back color",
    "url": "58297.htm",
    "text": "This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1915,
    "title": "BackColor or St_BackColor",
    "url": "61000.htm",
    "text": "The box shows the background color for the object or state. Click it to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  If the BackStyle property is Transparent, the background color is not used. For objects with a LineStyle property other than Solid, the background color is used for the spaces between the dots or dashes.  See also  BackStyle  LineStyle  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1916,
    "title": "Back style",
    "url": "58298.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the object background. The available options include:  Solid - Specifies the background color using the Back Color option.  Gradient - The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Transparent - The object's background is not filled in and any objects behind it show through.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1917,
    "title": "BackStyle",
    "url": "60998.htm",
    "text": "Select whether the object background is solid, gradient, or transparent. If you select Transparent, the object&#8217;s background is not filled in and any objects behind it show through. If you select Gradient, the object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1918,
    "title": "BackgroundColor",
    "url": "58294.htm",
    "text": "This box shows the background color for the chart. Click it to select another color.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1919,
    "title": "Blink",
    "url": "58299.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the button will blink at runtime.  The blink rate is twice per second.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1920,
    "title": "Bold, Italics, Underline",
    "url": "58300.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the caption for the button is in bold, in italics, or underlined.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1921,
    "title": "Border color",
    "url": "58301.htm",
    "text": "This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1922,
    "title": "Border style",
    "url": "58302.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the type of border for the button. The available options are:  None  Raised  Inset  RaisedInset  Line  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1923,
    "title": "Border uses back color",
    "url": "58303.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to use the button's background color for the border of the button. If not, use the Border Color property.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1924,
    "title": "Options: Border width_range",
    "url": "58304.htm",
    "text": "The available value is 1-32,767.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1925,
    "title": "Bounding box",
    "url": "58253.htm",
    "text": "The bounding box is a rectangular shape that encloses an object. The application measures in relation to the bounding box to calculate an object&#8217;s position, size, caption alignment, image alignment, and touch margins.  For example, an object with an ellipse shape is surrounded by a rectangular bounding box. An image will be positioned on the ellipse by calculating in relation to the edges of the rectangle, not the edges of the ellipse.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1926,
    "title": "BufferSize",
    "url": "58311.htm",
    "text": "Specify the number of data points to be stored outside of the chart display area. The operator can view these data points by manual scrolling. The buffer size is limited to 32,767 data points. When the buffer is full, old data drops off.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1927,
    "title": "Blink",
    "url": "60999.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the object&#8217;s text blinks at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1928,
    "title": "Blink",
    "url": "61029.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the object blinks at run time. The blink rate is twice per second. The selected state does not blink.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1929,
    "title": "Blink or St_Blink",
    "url": "61026.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the object&#8217;s background blinks when the object is in this state at run time. The blink rate is twice per second. If the object has a configured PatternStyle property, the pattern also blinks when the object is in this state.  For objects without states, if Blink is set to True, the object always blinks.  See also  PatternStyle or St_PatternStyle  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1930,
    "title": "BorderUsesBackColor",
    "url": "61019.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to use the object&#8217;s BackColor property for the border of the object.  If this is False, you can assign a separate color to the border, instead of using the object&#8217;s background color.  See also  BackColor or St_BackColor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1931,
    "title": "ButtonAction",
    "url": "61021.htm",
    "text": "Select the type of action for the button:  Normally open sends a value of 1 when the button is pressed, and a value of 0 when the button is released.  Normally closed sends a value of 0 when the button is pressed, and a value of 1 when the button is released.  Value sends the value you assign to State 0 when the button is pressed and the value you assign to State 1 when the button is released.  If the button&#8217;s hold time is still in effect when the button is released, the second value is not sent until the hold time expires.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1932,
    "title": "ButtonValue",
    "url": "61007.htm",
    "text": "Type the integer value to use for this button. When the operator presses the button, the button changes to State 1 and the application sends this value to the data source.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1933,
    "title": "BorderColor or St_BorderColor",
    "url": "61024.htm",
    "text": "The box shows the border color for the object or state. Double-click it to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  This color appears at run time only if the BorderUsesBackColor property is False.  See also  BorderUsesBackColor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1934,
    "title": "BorderStyle",
    "url": "61022.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the border style for the list part of the object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1935,
    "title": "BorderStyle",
    "url": "61023.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the border style. If the Shape property is Circle or Ellipse, the available border styles are None and Line.  See also  Shape  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1936,
    "title": "BorderWidth",
    "url": "61030.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1937,
    "title": "Bounding box",
    "url": "60205.htm",
    "text": "The bounding box is a rectangular shape that encloses an object. The application measures in relation to the bounding box to calculate an object&#8217;s position, size, caption alignment, image alignment, and touch margins.  For example, an object with an ellipse shape is surrounded by a rectangular bounding box. An image will be positioned on the ellipse by calculating in relation to the edges of the rectangle, not the edges of the ellipse.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1938,
    "title": "Caption",
    "url": "58305.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the caption to be shown on the button. The caption can be more than one line.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1939,
    "title": "Caption back color",
    "url": "58306.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the background color for the caption.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1940,
    "title": "Caption back style",
    "url": "58307.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the background style for the caption is visible (Solid) or hidden (Transparent).  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1941,
    "title": "Caption blink",
    "url": "58309.htm",
    "text": "If selected, the caption blinks at run time.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1942,
    "title": "Caption color",
    "url": "58310.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the color of the caption&#8217;s text.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1943,
    "title": "ChartFont",
    "url": "58308.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the font in the trend chart.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1944,
    "title": "ChartFontColor",
    "url": "58312.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the color of the font in the trend chart.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1945,
    "title": "ChartMode",
    "url": "58313.htm",
    "text": "Specifies how often the chart updates data, using one of two modes: Automatic and On Change.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1946,
    "title": "ChartRadix",
    "url": "58314.htm",
    "text": "Specify the number base used to show numeric values on the chart. The available options are:  Decimal  Hexadecimal  Octal  This setting affects the numbers on the y-axis and the x-axis if XY plot is selected. If the number of decimal places on the Y-Axis tab is set to anything other than 0, it overrides the radix selection and shows numbers as decimals.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1947,
    "title": "ChartStyle",
    "url": "58315.htm",
    "text": "Specify the plotting style of the chart. A trend either plot values against time (Standard) or against a selected pen (XY plot).  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1948,
    "title": "CaptionOnBorder",
    "url": "61335.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the object's caption or label can overlap the object's border.  This property has been created specifically to deal with objects in converted PanelBuilder 1400e applications, whose text may have overlapped the object's borders. This was possible because text labels on PanelBuilder 1400e objects were manually positioned. If the text label on an imported PanelBuilder 1400e object overlaps the object's border, the object's CaptionOnBorder property will be set to True on import. If the text on an imported object does not overlap the border, this property will be set to False.  For new objects, the default setting for this property is False.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1949,
    "title": "CaptionTruncate",
    "url": "61006.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to cut off captions that exceed the maximum length at the beginning of a new word.  If you select Character, the caption is cut off whenever the maximum caption length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word. If you select Word, the caption is cut off at the end of a word. The maximum caption length depends on the width of the object and the font size.  When a caption has been truncated, the application places an asterisk at the right end of the caption to indicate that text is missing.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1950,
    "title": "CaptionColor or St_CaptionColor",
    "url": "61008.htm",
    "text": "The box shows the caption&#8217;s text color. Double-click it to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1951,
    "title": "CaptionBlink or St_CaptionBlink",
    "url": "61009.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the caption blinks at run time. The caption blinks twice per second.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1952,
    "title": "CaptionBackStyle or St_CaptionBackStyle",
    "url": "61010.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the caption&#8217;s background is solid or transparent.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1953,
    "title": "CaptionBackColor or St_CaptionBackColor",
    "url": "61011.htm",
    "text": "The box shows the current background color for the caption text. Double-click it to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  If the CaptionBackStyle property is Transparent, the application doesn&#8217;t use this caption background color.  See also  CaptionBackStyle or St_CaptionBackStyle  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1954,
    "title": "CaptionAlignment or St_CaptionAlignment",
    "url": "61013.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the caption&#8217;s position on the object.  If the object&#8217;s Shape property is Circle or Ellipse, the position is relative to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  See also   Shape  Bounding box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1955,
    "title": "Caption or St_Caption",
    "url": "61016.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the text for the object or state. The text appears on the face of the object, to give the operator information about what the object does or about the current state.  For the numeric and string input enable objects, the text also appears as a caption on the top of the pop-up that opens at run time when the button is pressed.  For objects with error states, the default caption for the error state is Error. You can change it if required.  For objects with the St_CaptionUsesDisplayName property, text entered here is shown only if that property is set to False.  See also  St_CaptionUsesDisplayName  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1956,
    "title": "Close Display connection",
    "url": "60555.htm",
    "text": "A write connection. Assign a digital tag to this connection to notify the data source that the pop-up alarm display has been closed.  When the application starts, this connection has a value of zero. If the pop-up alarm display specified in the Alarm Setup editor closes, the connection is set and held for the duration of the notification hold time, and is then reset to 0.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1957,
    "title": "CloseValue",
    "url": "61231.htm",
    "text": "Type the value that will be written out when the button is pressed. The range is from -2,147,483,648 through 2,147,483,647.  This option is available when the WriteOnClose property is set to True.  See also  WriteOnClose  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1958,
    "title": "ColumnWidthAccumulatedTime",
    "url": "61230.htm",
    "text": "Sets the width, in pixels, of the Accumulated Time column in the Alarm Status list. Range is 1 - 32,767.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1959,
    "title": "ColumnWidthAlarmQuantity",
    "url": "61228.htm",
    "text": "Sets the width, in pixels, of the Alarm Quantity column in the Alarm Status list. Range is 1 - 32,767.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1960,
    "title": "ColumnWidthAlarmState",
    "url": "61236.htm",
    "text": "Sets the width, in pixels, of the Alarm State column in the Alarm Status list. Range is 1 - 32,767.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1961,
    "title": "ColumnWidthAuditLocation",
    "url": "311588.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the width, in pixels, of the Location column in the audit trail list object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1962,
    "title": "ColumnWidthAuditResource",
    "url": "311589.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the width, in pixels, of the Resource column in the audit trail list object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1963,
    "title": "ColumnWidthAuditSource",
    "url": "311590.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the width, in pixels, of the Source column in the audit trail list object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1964,
    "title": "ColumnWidthAuditUsername",
    "url": "311591.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the width, in pixels, of the Username column in the audit trail list object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1965,
    "title": "ColumnWidthCompareStatus",
    "url": "61328.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the width, in pixels, of the Compare Status column in the RecipePlus table object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1966,
    "title": "ColumnWidthCurrentValue",
    "url": "61196.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the width, in pixels, of the Current column in the RecipePlus table object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1967,
    "title": "ColumnWidthIngredientName",
    "url": "61189.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the width, in pixels, of the Ingredient column in the RecipePlus table object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1968,
    "title": "ColumnWidthMessage",
    "url": "61229.htm",
    "text": "Sets the width, in pixels, of the Message column in the Alarm Status list. Range is 1 - 32,767.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1969,
    "title": "ColumnWidthRecipe",
    "url": "61327.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the width, in pixels, of the Recipe Name column in the RecipePlus selector object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1970,
    "title": "ColumnWidthRecipeValue",
    "url": "61188.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the width, in pixels, of the Recipe Value column in the RecipePlus table object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1971,
    "title": "ColumnWidthTagName",
    "url": "61190.htm",
    "text": "Sets the width, in pixels, of the Tag name column in the RecipePlus table object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1972,
    "title": "ColumnWidthTriggerLabel",
    "url": "61227.htm",
    "text": "Sets the width, in pixels, of the Trigger Label column in the alarm status list. Range is 1 - 32767.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1973,
    "title": "ColumnWidthTriggerValue",
    "url": "61226.htm",
    "text": "Sets the width, in pixels, of the Trigger Value column in the Alarm Status list. Range is 1 - 32,767.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1974,
    "title": "ColumnWidthUnit",
    "url": "61326.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the width, in pixels, of the Unit column in the RecipePlus table object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1975,
    "title": "data source",
    "url": "60159.htm",
    "text": "The FactoryTalk View documentation uses the term data source as a generic term that includes all possible sources of tag data, for both data server tags and HMI tags.  The data source can be memory or a device such as a programmable logic controller or OPC server. The application writes values to and reads values from the data source.  The data source is configured to exchange information (in the form of numeric or string values) between the application and the physical machine that your project is controlling.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1976,
    "title": "data source",
    "url": "67129.htm",
    "text": "The FactoryTalk View documentation uses the term data source as a generic term that includes all possible sources of tag data, for both data server tags and HMI tags.  The data source can be memory or a device such as a programmable logic controller or OPC server. The application writes values to and reads values from the data source.  The data source is configured to exchange information (in the form of numeric or string values) between the application and the physical machine that your project is controlling.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1977,
    "title": "DecimalPlaces",
    "url": "61039.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the maximum number of digits to show after the decimal point. The possible range is 0 to (Number of digits - 2).  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1978,
    "title": "DecimalPoint",
    "url": "61036.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the type of decimal point to use:  Implicit if the operator manually enters the decimal point and you want the decimal point to be used when the value is sent to the Value connection.  Fixed position if the values to enter in the numeric pop-up scratchpad or keypad always have the same number of digits after the decimal point. If you select this type of decimal point, specify a value for the DigitsAfterDecimalPoint property. The decimal point is stripped when the value is sent to the Value connection.  See also  DigitsAfterDecimalPoint  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1979,
    "title": "Description",
    "url": "61224.htm",
    "text": "Specifies a description for the object. The description is optional. It does not appear at run time, but you can use it during application development to make notes about the object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1980,
    "title": "DigitsAfterDecimalPoint",
    "url": "61034.htm",
    "text": "Specify the number of digits to appear after the decimal point. This option is available when Fixed Position is selected for the Decimal point option.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1981,
    "title": "DigitsAfterDecimalPoint",
    "url": "61038.htm",
    "text": "Select the number of digits to show after the decimal point.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1982,
    "title": "Display",
    "url": "61033.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the display to open when the button is pressed. Click the Browse button (\u2026) to open the Display Selector. The selector's list contains all of the graphic displays in the project.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1983,
    "title": "DisplayAccumulatedTime",
    "url": "61223.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether to show the Accumulated Time column in the Alarm Status list. This column shows the amount of time the alarm has been active.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1984,
    "title": "DisplayAckSymbol",
    "url": "61164.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the alarm list object will show a symbol in an acknowledged symbol column next to alarms that have been acknowledged.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1985,
    "title": "DisplayAckTime",
    "url": "61031.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to show the Acknowledge Time column. This column shows the time the alarm was acknowledged.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1986,
    "title": "DisplayActiveAckedAlarms",
    "url": "60834.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the alarm list object will show alarms that are currently in alarm (active) and have also been acknowledged.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1987,
    "title": "DisplayActiveSymbol",
    "url": "61193.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the alarm list object will show a symbol in an active symbol column next to alarms that are currently in alarm (active).  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1988,
    "title": "DisplayActiveUnackedAlarms",
    "url": "60838.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the alarm list object will show alarms that are currently in alarm (active) and have not yet been acknowledged.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1989,
    "title": "DisplayAlarmQuantity",
    "url": "61222.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether to show the Alarm Quantity column in the Alarm Status list. This column shows the number of times the alarm has been triggered.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1990,
    "title": "DisplayAlarmState",
    "url": "61249.htm",
    "text": "If the DisplayInactiveAlarms property is set to True, this property determines whether the alarm banner will indicate an active alarm by showing an asterisk. If DisplayInactiveAlarms is set to False, no asterisk will be shown, no matter what setting this property has.  See also  DisplayInactiveAlarms  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1991,
    "title": "DisplayAlarmTime",
    "url": "61032.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to display the Alarm Time column. This column shows the time the alarm was triggered.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1992,
    "title": "DisplayAlarmTime",
    "url": "79372.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to display the Alarm Time column. This column shows the time the alarm was triggered.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1993,
    "title": "DisplayAuditLocation",
    "url": "311592.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the audit object will show the Location column or row.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1994,
    "title": "DataPointConnection",
    "url": "58316.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether data points on the chart are always connected with a line, will show a discontinuity in data by a break in the line, or are shown as unconnected markers. This property setting applies to all pens on the chart. If Not Connected is selected, pens without markers assigned on the Pens tab are not shown on the chart.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1995,
    "title": "Deadband",
    "url": "58321.htm",
    "text": "Specify a percentage, from 0% to 100% of the actual value, by which a value must change before the chart shows the next value.  This property applies only when the ChartMode property is set to On Change.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1996,
    "title": "DisplayElapsedTime",
    "url": "58323.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the label at the bottom of the chart shows elapsed time or clock time.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1997,
    "title": "DisplayMilliseconds",
    "url": "58324.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the time stamps on the X-axis legend at the bottom of the chart include milliseconds.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1998,
    "title": "DisplayPens",
    "url": "58325.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether pen icons show on the right side of the chart. Pen icons indicate the last read value of each pen. Pen icons move to show the current value, even if the chart is not scrolling, so some pen icons may not appear to be at the end of the line.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 1999,
    "title": "DisplayAuditMessage",
    "url": "311593.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the audit object will show the Message column or row.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2000,
    "title": "DisplayAuditOccurredTime",
    "url": "311594.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the audit object will show the Occurred Time column or row.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2001,
    "title": "DisplayAuditResource",
    "url": "311595.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the audit object will show the Resource column or row.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2002,
    "title": "DisplayAuditSource",
    "url": "311596.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the audit object will show the Source column or row.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2003,
    "title": "DisplayAuditUsername",
    "url": "311597.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the audit object will show the Username column or row.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2004,
    "title": "DisplayCompareStatus",
    "url": "61187.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the RecipePlus table object will show the Compare column. The Compare column shows an X if the current tag value of the ingredient differs from the recipe value at the time of the Restore operation.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2005,
    "title": "DisplayCurrentValue",
    "url": "61186.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the RecipePlus table object will show the Current column. The Current column shows the current tag value of the ingredient at the time of the Restore operation.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2006,
    "title": "DisplayFooter",
    "url": "61197.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether the RecipePlus table object will show a footer. If the DisplayFooter property is True, the footer will be shown.  If the footer is shown, its format will be:  <run-time recipe name> : <unit name> : <# of ingredients displayed in table> : <total # of ingredients>  Example  Cookies : Unit1 : 6 : 17  Tip:  Unit names do not support language switching at run time.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2007,
    "title": "DisplayHeader",
    "url": "61042.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to display the heading bar at the top of the object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2008,
    "title": "DisplayInactiveAckedAlarms",
    "url": "60842.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the alarm list object will show alarms that have gone out of alarm (inactive) and have also been acknowledged.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2009,
    "title": "DisplayInactiveAlarms",
    "url": "61248.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether the alarm banner will show only active unacknowledged alarms, or both active and inactive unacknowledged alarms.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2010,
    "title": "DisplayInactiveUnackedAlarms",
    "url": "60846.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the alarm list object will display alarms that have gone out of alarm (inactive) and have not yet been acknowledged.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2011,
    "title": "DisplayIngredientName",
    "url": "61185.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the RecipePlus table object will show the Ingredient column.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2012,
    "title": "DisplayLeftPosition",
    "url": "61075.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the number of pixels from the left of the screen to position the display. This property applies only to On Top displays (with or without the Cannot Be Replaced option).  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2013,
    "title": "DisplayMessage",
    "url": "61247.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether to show the Alarm Message column in the Alarm Status list.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2014,
    "title": "DisplayPosition",
    "url": "61071.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to use the DisplayTopPosition and DisplayLeftPosition properties for the display.  See also  DisplayTopPosition  DisplayLeftPosition  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2015,
    "title": "DisplayRecipeValue",
    "url": "61184.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the RecipePlus table object will show the Recipe column. The Recipe column shows the recipe value of the ingredient.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2016,
    "title": "DisplayTagName",
    "url": "61180.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the RecipePlus table object will show the Tag Name column.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2017,
    "title": "DisplayTitle",
    "url": "61239.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether the current mode's title for the Alarm Status list will be shown.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2018,
    "title": "DisplayTopPosition",
    "url": "61073.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the number of pixels from the top of the screen to position the display. This property applies only to On Top displays (with or without the Cannot Be Replaced option).  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2019,
    "title": "DisplayTriggerLabel",
    "url": "61245.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether the Alarms Trigger Label column will be shown in the Alarm Status list.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2020,
    "title": "DisplayTriggerLabel",
    "url": "61246.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether the alarms trigger label will be shown in the alarm banner.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2021,
    "title": "DisplayTriggerValue",
    "url": "61243.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether the Alarm Trigger Value column will be shown in the Alarm Status list.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2022,
    "title": "DisplayTriggerValue",
    "url": "61244.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether the alarm's trigger value will be shown in the alarm banner.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2023,
    "title": "DisplayAlarmState",
    "url": "61219.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether the Alarm State column will be shown in the Alarm Status list.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2024,
    "title": "DomainName",
    "url": "132833.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the user&#8217;s domain name for authentication.   You can either enter a domain name, or select a DomainName tag in the Connections tab of the Login Button Properties dialog box.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2025,
    "title": "DomainNameDisable",
    "url": "132834.htm",
    "text": "Determines runtime editing of Domain Name field.   If you select True, the domain name is read-only in the Login dialog box.  If you select False, the domain name can be edited in the Login dialog box.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2026,
    "title": "DomainNameType",
    "url": "224580.htm",
    "text": "Specifies domain name type.  Select 0 - ESDomainNameConstant to use constant domain name. In the ESDomainName box, type the domain name.  Select 1 - ESDomainNameVariable to use variable domain name. In the VariableDomainName box, click the browse button and select a tag from Tag Browser.  See also  Set up electronic signature properties  ESDomainName  ESDomainNameDisable  ESDomainNameVisible  VariableDomainName  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2027,
    "title": "DomainNameVisible",
    "url": "132835.htm",
    "text": "Specifies runtime visibility of Domain Name field.   If you select True, domain name is visible in the Login dialog box.   If you select False, domain name is hidden in the Login dialog box.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2028,
    "title": "Echo Message connection",
    "url": "302337.htm",
    "text": "A write-only connection.  Assign a string tag to write the triggered message to the connection.  If the UseEchoMessage property is False, this connection will not be written to.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2029,
    "title": "Enter",
    "url": "61045.htm",
    "text": "A write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. This connection accepts values of 0 and 1 only. The connection determines how long the Enter key press is registered. Use this connection for Enter key handshaking.  See also  Enter key handshaking  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2030,
    "title": "Enter",
    "url": "61077.htm",
    "text": "A write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. This connection accepts values of 0 and 1 only. The connection determines how long the Enter key press is registered. Use this connection for Enter key handshaking.  See also  Enter key handshaking  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2031,
    "title": "Enter Handshake",
    "url": "61068.htm",
    "text": "A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. This connection resets the Enter connection, using the HandshakeResetType property specified in the Properties dialog box. Use this connection for Enter key handshaking if you want the Enter connection to be reset when a value at the data source changes.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and resets the Enter connection when the expression value meets the conditions of the HandshakeResetType property.  See also  Enter  HandshakeResetType  Enter key handshaking  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2032,
    "title": "Enter Handshake",
    "url": "61076.htm",
    "text": "A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. This connection resets the Enter connection, using the Handshake reset type option specified in the Timing tab. Use this connection for Enter key handshaking if you want the Enter connection to be reset when a value at the data source changes.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and resets the Enter connection when the expression value meets the conditions of the Handshake reset type option.  See also  Enter key handshaking  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2033,
    "title": "Enter key handshaking",
    "url": "60225.htm",
    "text": "When an object's Enter button is pressed, the object writes a value to the data source. Enter key handshaking holds the value at the data source for a specific period of time to ensure it is read before the object overwrites the value.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2034,
    "title": "EnterKeyControlDelay",
    "url": "61043.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the length of the delay between the time the operator presses the Enter button and the time the application sets the Enter connection to 1. Assign the Enter connection in the Connections tab.  See also  Enter  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2035,
    "title": "EnterKeyHandshakeTime",
    "url": "61066.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the maximum time the Enter connection will be set to 1. This time setting applies only if the Enter and Enter Handshake connections are both assigned (in the Connections tab).  See also  Enter  Enter Handshake  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2036,
    "title": "EnterKeyHoldTime",
    "url": "61078.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the time the Enter connection will be set to 1. This time setting applies only if the Enter connection is assigned and the Enter Handshake connection is not assigned (in the Connections tab).  See also  Enter  Enter Handshake  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2037,
    "title": "ESDomainName",
    "url": "224581.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the domain name for the Electronic Signature window.  See also  Set up electronic signature properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2038,
    "title": "ESDomainNameDisable",
    "url": "224582.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the Domain button and box is disabled in the Electronic Signature window.  Select False to enable the Domain button and box in the Electronic Signature window.  Select True to disable the Domain button and box in the Electronic Signature window.  See also  Set up electronic signature properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2039,
    "title": "ESDomainNameVisible",
    "url": "224583.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the Domain button and box is visible in the Electronic Signature window.  Select False to hide the Domain button and box in the Electronic Signature window.  Select True to show the Domain button and box in the Electronic Signature window.  See also  Set up electronic signature properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2040,
    "title": "FillCharacters",
    "url": "61063.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the character to fill the entered string with if the operator enters fewer characters than the value for the NumberOfInputCharacters property.  The fill characters are placed after the string the operator enters.  See also  NumberOfInputCharacters  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2041,
    "title": "FillColor",
    "url": "61054.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the fill color for the bar graph object. Double-click the box to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  If you specify thresholds for the bar graph object, you can also assign a fill color to each threshold.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2042,
    "title": "FillColor",
    "url": "61055.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the fill color for the gauge object. This color is used only if you select Fill for the SweepStyle property. Double-click the box to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  If you specify thresholds for the gauge object, you can also assign a fill color to each threshold.  See also  SweepStyle  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2043,
    "title": "FillDirection",
    "url": "61053.htm",
    "text": "Select the direction for filling the bar graph.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2044,
    "title": "FillLeftWith",
    "url": "61050.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the character to fill the left of the display with if the value at the data source contains fewer digits than the NumberOfDigits property. If you don&#8217;t want to use a fill character, select None.  See also  NumberOfDigits  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2045,
    "title": "FilteredTriggers",
    "url": "61242.htm",
    "text": "Determines which trigger labels the alarm object will use to filter the alarms shown, acknowledged, cleared or printed. If the property is blank, the object will not filter the alarms.  Select the desired trigger labels from the selector list, or type in the labels, separating them with a comma (,). The maximum number of characters is 32767.  Tip:  If the application's default language is changed, this property will have to be modified manually.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2046,
    "title": "FixedPosition",
    "url": "61305.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the kind of output to use with the Fixed position decimal point:  Stripped value The decimal point will be stripped out of the shown value and the resulting integer will be written to the Value connection.  Displayed value The shown value will be written to the Value connection without any changes.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2047,
    "title": "FocusHighlight",
    "url": "61049.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether or not the object will have a highlight box shown around it when it has input focus.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2048,
    "title": "Font",
    "url": "61046.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the font to use for the legends. This property applies only if the ShowLegend property is True.  See also  legend  ShowLegend  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2049,
    "title": "Font",
    "url": "58331.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the font used for the caption.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2050,
    "title": "Font, CaptionFont or St_CaptionFont",
    "url": "61041.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the font name and size to use for the caption, message, or display text, and whether to use underline, bold or italics.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2051,
    "title": "FooterBackColor",
    "url": "61213.htm",
    "text": "This box shows the color for the background of the text at the bottom of the object. Click it to select another color.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2052,
    "title": "FooterForeColor",
    "url": "61210.htm",
    "text": "This box shows the color for the text at the bottom of the object. Click it to select another color.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2053,
    "title": "ForeColor",
    "url": "61240.htm",
    "text": "The box shows the current color for the gauge&#8217;s line. Click it to select another color.  This property applies to the dial outline and tick marks.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2054,
    "title": "ForeColor",
    "url": "61079.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the color for the object&#8217;s text or line. Double-click the box to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2055,
    "title": "Format",
    "url": "61095.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the time and date format to show. For the alarm list object, this format is used for the alarm time and acknowledge time.  The options reflect the settings in your development computer&#8217;s operating system. If the operating system settings are different on your development and run-time systems, the run-time settings are used at run time.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2056,
    "title": "FormatAckTime",
    "url": "61238.htm",
    "text": "Sets the format in which the alarm list shows the alarm acknowledge time and date.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2057,
    "title": "FormatAlarmTime",
    "url": "61237.htm",
    "text": "Sets the format in which the alarm banner or alarm list shows the alarm time and date.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2058,
    "title": "FormatAlarmTime",
    "url": "79374.htm",
    "text": "Sets the format in which the alarm banner or alarm list shows the alarm time and date.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2059,
    "title": "FormatAuditOccurredTime",
    "url": "311598.htm",
    "text": "Sets the format in which the audit trail list shows the occurred time and date.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2060,
    "title": "GridColor",
    "url": "61183.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the color for the RecipePlus table object&#8217;s grid lines. Double-click the box to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2061,
    "title": "Handshake",
    "url": "61080.htm",
    "text": "A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. The application reads the value of this connection at the data source, and resets the button to its unlatched state when this connection changes to meet the conditions of the LatchResetType property.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and resets the button to its unlatched state when this connection changes to meet the conditions of the LatchResetType property.  See also  LatchResetType  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2062,
    "title": "HeartbeatRate",
    "url": "58328.htm",
    "text": "Specify the maximum amount of time in milliseconds between updates when a chart is updating on change. If the value of a pen has not changed within the amount of time specified, the chart shows the current value.  Set the heartbeat rate to 0 to disable the heartbeat.  This property applies only when the ChartMode property is set to On Change.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2063,
    "title": "Highlight color",
    "url": "58332.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the button's highlight color. The button&#8217;s border changes to the highlight color when the button is clicked or pressed at run time.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2064,
    "title": "Horizontal margin",
    "url": "58333.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2065,
    "title": "Handshake connection",
    "url": "60529.htm",
    "text": "When the application starts, this connection has a value of one. When the trigger tag or expression value changes, the Handshake connection's value toggles from one to zero. The next time the trigger value changes, the Handshake connection's value toggles from zero to one.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2066,
    "title": "HandshakeResetType",
    "url": "61070.htm",
    "text": "Specifies how the Enter Handshake connection resets the Enter connection to 0:  Non-zero value resets the Enter connection when the Enter Handshake connection is a non-zero value.  Zero to non-zero transition resets the Enter connection when the Enter Handshake connection changes from 0 to a non-zero value.  See also  Enter Handshake  Enter  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2067,
    "title": "HeaderBackColor",
    "url": "61096.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the color for the heading bar or column of the object. Double-click the box to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2068,
    "title": "HeaderForeColor",
    "url": "61093.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the color for the text in the heading bar or column of the object. Double-click the box to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2069,
    "title": "HeaderTextAccumulatedTime",
    "url": "61241.htm",
    "text": "Sets the text of the heading, up to 80 characters, for the Accumulated Time column in the Alarm Status list.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2070,
    "title": "HeaderTextAckTime",
    "url": "61251.htm",
    "text": "Sets the text of the heading, up to 80 characters, for the Alarm Acknowledge Time column in the Alarm list.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2071,
    "title": "HeaderTextAlarmQuantity",
    "url": "61267.htm",
    "text": "Sets the text of the heading, up to 80 characters, for the Alarm Quantity column in the Alarm Status list.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2072,
    "title": "HeaderTextAlarmState",
    "url": "61266.htm",
    "text": "Sets the text of the heading, up to 80 characters, for the Alarm State column in the Alarm Status list.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2073,
    "title": "HeaderTextAlarmTime",
    "url": "61265.htm",
    "text": "Sets the text of the heading, up to 80 characters, for the Alarm Time column in the Alarm list.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2074,
    "title": "HeaderTextAuditLocation",
    "url": "311599.htm",
    "text": "Sets the text of the heading, up to 80 characters, for the Location column or row of an audit object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2075,
    "title": "HeaderTextAuditMessage",
    "url": "311600.htm",
    "text": "Sets the text of the heading, up to 80 characters, for the Message column or row of an audit object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2076,
    "title": "HeaderTextAuditOccurredTime",
    "url": "311601.htm",
    "text": "Sets the text of the heading, up to 80 characters, for the Occurred Time column or row of an audit object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2077,
    "title": "HeaderTextAuditResource",
    "url": "311602.htm",
    "text": "Sets the text of the heading, up to 80 characters, for the Resource column or row of an audit object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2078,
    "title": "HeaderTextAuditSource",
    "url": "311603.htm",
    "text": "Sets the text of the heading, up to 80 characters, for the Source column or row of an audit object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2079,
    "title": "HeaderTextAuditUsername",
    "url": "311604.htm",
    "text": "Sets the text of the heading, up to 80 characters, for the Username column or row of an audit object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2080,
    "title": "HeaderTextCompareStatus",
    "url": "61211.htm",
    "text": "Sets the text of the heading for the Compare column of the RecipePlus table object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2081,
    "title": "HeaderTextCurrentValue",
    "url": "61217.htm",
    "text": "Sets the text of the heading for the Current Value column of the RecipePlus table object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2082,
    "title": "HeaderTextIngredientName",
    "url": "61181.htm",
    "text": "Sets the text of the heading for the Ingredient column of the RecipePlus table object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2083,
    "title": "HeaderTextMessage",
    "url": "61252.htm",
    "text": "Sets the text of the heading, up to 80 characters, for the Message column in the Alarm or Alarm Status list.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2084,
    "title": "HeaderTextRecipe",
    "url": "61325.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the text for the heading of the Recipe column in the RecipePlus selector object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2085,
    "title": "HeaderTextRecipeValue",
    "url": "61216.htm",
    "text": "Sets the text of the heading for the Recipe Value column of the RecipePlus table object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2086,
    "title": "HeaderTextTagName",
    "url": "61215.htm",
    "text": "Sets the text of the heading for the Tag name column of the RecipePlus table object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2087,
    "title": "HeaderTextTriggerLabel",
    "url": "61264.htm",
    "text": "Sets the text of the heading, up to 80 characters, for the Trigger Label column in the Alarm Status list.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2088,
    "title": "HeaderTextTriggerValue",
    "url": "61268.htm",
    "text": "Sets the text of the heading, up to 80 characters, for the Trigger Value column in the Alarm Status list.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2089,
    "title": "HeaderTextUnit",
    "url": "61338.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the text for the heading of the Unit column in the RecipePlus selector object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2090,
    "title": "Height or (GroupHeight)",
    "url": "61094.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the number of pixels for the height of the object or group. The height includes the object&#8217;s borders.  If the object&#8217;s Shape property is Circle or Ellipse, the height applies to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  You must use a positive integer for the height.  See also  Shape  Bounding box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2091,
    "title": "HideUserNameEntry",
    "url": "132836.htm",
    "text": "Specifies runtime visibility of username.   If you select True, user name is invisible in the Login dialog box.   If you select False, use name is visible in the Login dialog box.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2092,
    "title": "HighlightColor",
    "url": "61092.htm",
    "text": "The box shows the current highlight color. Double-click it to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  The object&#8217;s border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the object at run time.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2093,
    "title": "HoldTime",
    "url": "61091.htm",
    "text": "Select a minimum hold time for the push button. The application keeps the button pressed for this length of time even if the operator releases the button sooner.  The hold time should reflect network traffic. Increasing the hold time prevents a very quick button press from being missed by the data source. If the data source is a memory tag, network traffic is not an issue. If you are using a memory tag, click the shortest hold time.  The operator cannot press the button again until the hold time has expired. If a display containing the button is closed before the hold time has expired, the hold time will be reset, the button will be reset to state 0 and the value for state 0 will be written out immediately.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2094,
    "title": "HorizontalMargin",
    "url": "61089.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the number of pixels for the horizontal touch margin. The horizontal margin is a touch-insensitive margin inside the object&#8217;s left and right edges. If the operator presses the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  This property is useful for buttons that are positioned close together. A touch-insensitive border on each button helps ensure that an adjacent button is not pressed by mistake.  If the Shape property is Circle or Ellipse, the touch margin applies to the button&#8217;s bounding box.  See also  Bounding box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2095,
    "title": "Image",
    "url": "61088.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the file name of the graphic image for the object or state. You must use a monochrome image with this object. The image appears on the face of the object, to give the operator information about what the object does or about the current state.  Before you can place an image on the object, you must import the image into your project.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2096,
    "title": "Image or St_Image",
    "url": "61097.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the file name of the graphic image for the object or state. The image appears on the face of the object, to give the operator information about what the object does or about the current state.  Before you can place an image on the object, you must import the image into your project.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2097,
    "title": "ImageAlignment or St_ImageAlignment",
    "url": "61087.htm",
    "text": "Specifies how the image is positioned on the object.  If the object&#8217;s Shape property is Circle or Ellipse, the position is relative to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  See also  Shape  Bounding box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2098,
    "title": "Image",
    "url": "58330.htm",
    "text": "Specifies a graphic image shown on the button. Click the Browse button @ to the right of the box to search for an image.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2099,
    "title": "Image back color",
    "url": "58329.htm",
    "text": "If the image is monochrome, specifies the background color of the image.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2100,
    "title": "Image back style",
    "url": "58326.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the image&#8217;s background is visible or hidden. If the background is visible (Solid), the image&#8217;s background color is the Image back color. If the background is hidden (Transparent), anything behind the image will show through the background.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2101,
    "title": "Image blink",
    "url": "58317.htm",
    "text": "If the image is monochrome, it will blink at run time if this box is selected.  If the image is not monochrome, this property will not apply.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2102,
    "title": "Image color",
    "url": "58318.htm",
    "text": "If the image is monochrome, specifies the foreground color of the image.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2103,
    "title": "Image scaled",
    "url": "58319.htm",
    "text": "If selected, the image scales to the size of the button.  If not selected:  When the image is larger than the button, the image is clipped to fit into the button.  When the image is smaller than the button, the Alignment option determines the image&#8217;s position on the button.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2104,
    "title": "ImageBackColor or St_ImageBackColor",
    "url": "61085.htm",
    "text": "This property applies only to monochrome images. It determines the color of the background the image is drawn on.  If the ImageBackStyle property is set to Transparent, the background of the image will be transparent.  To select another color, double-click the colored box to open the color palette. Click a color to select it, or click Other to create a custom color.  See also  ImageBackStyle or St_ImageBackStyle  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2105,
    "title": "ImageBackStyle or St_ImageBackStyle",
    "url": "61084.htm",
    "text": "This property applies to both monochrome and color images. Use it to set the background style to Solid or Transparent.  For monochrome images, if the ImageBackStyle is set to Transparent, the background will be transparent.  For color images that are not PNG with Alpha channel, if the ImageBackStyle is set to Transparent, any parts of the image that are black will be transparent.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2106,
    "title": "ImageBlink or St_ImageBlink",
    "url": "61098.htm",
    "text": "For monochrome images, specifies whether the image blinks at run time. The image blinks twice per second.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2107,
    "title": "ImageColor or St_ImageColor",
    "url": "61099.htm",
    "text": "This property applies only to monochrome images. It determines the color the image is drawn in; that is, the foreground color.  To select another color, double-click the colored box to open the color palette. Click a color to select it, or click Other to create a custom color.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2108,
    "title": "ImageScaled or St_ImageScaled",
    "url": "61102.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to resize the image to fit the object. If the object&#8217;s Shape property is Circle or Ellipse, the image is resized to fit in the object&#8217;s bounding box, and then clipped to fit the object&#8217;s shape.  If this is False, the image is first aligned using the Alignment property, then, if larger than the object, the image is clipped to fit the object.  See also  Shape  Bounding box  Alignment  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2109,
    "title": "InactiveAckedBackColor",
    "url": "61150.htm",
    "text": "The box shows the background color to use when displaying alarms that have gone out of alarm (inactive) and have also been acknowledged, in the alarm list object. Double-click to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  This property is only used when the InactiveAckedUseAlarmColors property is set to False.  See also  InactiveAckedBackColor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2110,
    "title": "InactiveAckedBlink",
    "url": "61163.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether alarms that have gone out of alarm (inactive) and have also been acknowledged will blink at run time.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2111,
    "title": "InactiveAckedForeColor",
    "url": "61154.htm",
    "text": "The box shows the foreground color to use when displaying alarms that have gone out of alarm (inactive) and have also been acknowledged, in the alarm list object. Double-click to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  This property is only used when the InactiveAckedUseAlarmColors property is set to False.  See also  InactiveAckedUseAlarmColors  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2112,
    "title": "InactiveAckedUseAlarmColors",
    "url": "61152.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether alarms that have gone out of alarm (inactive), and have also been acknowledged, will be shown in the alarm list object using the colors defined in the Alarm Setup editor, or (if False) the values specified for the InactiveAckedForeColor and InactiveAckedBackColor properties.  See also  InactiveAckedForeColor  InactiveAckedBackColor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2113,
    "title": "InactiveAcknowledged",
    "url": "60840.htm",
    "text": "A read-only connection. Assign a tag or an expression to this connection. At run time, when the tag or expression value is non-zero, the Alarm list displays alarms that are no longer active but have been acknowledged.  If you assign an expression to this connection , the application calculates the value of the expression and uses the result to determine whether to show inactive acknowledged alarms.  When this connection is assigned, it overrides the DisplayInactiveAckedAlarms property.  See also  DisplayInactiveAckedAlarms  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2114,
    "title": "InactiveUnackedBackColor",
    "url": "61161.htm",
    "text": "The box shows the background color to use when displaying alarms that have gone out of alarm (inactive) and have not yet been acknowledged, in the alarm list object. Double-click to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  This property is only used when the InactiveUnackedUseAlarmColors property is set to False.  See also  InactiveUnackedUseAlarmColors  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2115,
    "title": "InactiveUnackedBlink",
    "url": "61162.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether alarms that have gone out of alarm (inactive) and have not yet been acknowledged will blink at run time.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2116,
    "title": "InactiveUnackedForeColor",
    "url": "61158.htm",
    "text": "The box shows the foreground color to use when showing alarms that have gone out of alarm (inactive) and have not yet been acknowledged, in the alarm list object. Double-click to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  This property is only used when the InactiveUnackedUseAlarmColors property is set to False.  See also  InactiveUnackedUseAlarmColors  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2117,
    "title": "InactiveUnackedUseAlarmColors",
    "url": "61156.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether alarms that have gone out of alarm (inactive), and have not yet been acknowledged, will be shown in the alarm list object using the colors defined in the Alarm Setup editor, or (if False) the values specified for the InactiveUnackedForeColor and InactiveUnackedBackColor properties.  See also  InactiveUnackedForeColor  InactiveUnackedBackColor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2118,
    "title": "InactiveUnacknowledged",
    "url": "60844.htm",
    "text": "A read-only connection. Assign a tag or an expression to this connection. At run time, when the tag or expression value is- non-zero, the Alarm list shows alarms that are no longer active and have not yet been acknowledged.  If you assign an expression to this connection , the application calculates the value of the expression and uses the result to determine whether to show inactive unacknowledged alarms.  When this connection is assigned, it overrides the DisplayInactiveUnackedAlarms property.  See also  DisplayInactiveUnackedAlarms  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2119,
    "title": "Indicator",
    "url": "61108.htm",
    "text": "A read connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. The application reads the value of the connection at the data source, and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the state corresponding to the value.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the state corresponding to the value.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2120,
    "title": "Indicator",
    "url": "61113.htm",
    "text": "A read-only connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. The application reads the value of the connection at the data source, and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the value.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the value.  If the Indicator connection is unassigned, the object will display the last value written out to the Value connection.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2121,
    "title": "Indicator",
    "url": "61334.htm",
    "text": "A read-only connection. Assign a tag or an expression to this connection. When a display containing a piloted control list selector is opened, if the piloted control list selector is remotely controlled, the application reads this value to determine what state to show.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2122,
    "title": "Indicator",
    "url": "61101.htm",
    "text": "A read-only connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. The application reads the value of the connection at the data source, and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the state corresponding to the value.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the state corresponding to the value.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2123,
    "title": "KeyAssignment",
    "url": "61262.htm",
    "text": "Assigns a function key to the object. You can assign function keys F1 through F14, and K1 through K20. Pressing the assigned key on the keyboard will activate the object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2124,
    "title": "KeyNavigation",
    "url": "61261.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether the user can navigate to the object using the keyboard and give the object input focus.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2125,
    "title": "Language",
    "url": "61333.htm",
    "text": "Selects the language that the application will switch to when the button is pressed.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2126,
    "title": "LatchResetType",
    "url": "61082.htm",
    "text": "Specify how to unlatch the button:  Non-zero value unlatches the button when the Handshake connection is a non-zero value.  Zero to non-zero transition unlatches the button when the Handshake connection changes from 0 to a non-zero value.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2127,
    "title": "Left or (GroupLeft)",
    "url": "61107.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the number of pixels from the left of the display to position the object or group. You can type a positive or negative number. If you use a negative number, part or all of the object is off screen.  If the object&#8217;s Shape property is Circle or Ellipse, the left position applies to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  See also  Shape  Bounding box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2128,
    "title": "Legacy compatibility",
    "url": "60953.htm",
    "text": "Legacy applications using file path locations for CE4.1 terminals will continue to work on CE6.0 terminals.  The same source can be used to create MERuntime applications for either or both.  The platform file paths that reference \\Storage Card can still be used for unmodified or new legacy applications as well as a common reference for new applications for either or both.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2129,
    "title": "legend",
    "url": "60642.htm",
    "text": "Legends are captions beside each tick mark. The caption corresponds to the numerical value at the part of the dial where the tick mark is located.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2130,
    "title": "LegendColor",
    "url": "61100.htm",
    "text": "This box shows the current legend color. Click it to select another color.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2131,
    "title": "Limit",
    "url": "61201.htm",
    "text": "A read connection. Assign a tag or an expression to this connection. The application reads the tag or expression value to determine the upper or lower limit value.  If the UseVariableLimit property is False, this connection will not be read.  See also  UseVariableLimit  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2132,
    "title": "LimitValue",
    "url": "61104.htm",
    "text": "If the RampType property is Ramp up, specifies the amount beyond which the button&#8217;s value cannot increase.  If the RampType property is Ramp down, specifies the amount beyond which the button&#8217;s value cannot decrease.  See also  RampType  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2133,
    "title": "LinkSize or (GroupLinkSize)",
    "url": "61204.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the reference object will use the base object's Height and Width properties.  If this property is set to True, the reference object's Height and Width properties will be read-only, and will use the values assigned to the base object.  If the property is set to False, the reference object's Height and Width properties can be edited by the user.  This property applies to both grouped and ungrouped reference objects. If the reference object is grouped, the GroupHeight and GroupWidth properties apply.  All reference objects, except objects that are part of a grouped reference object, will have this property.  See also  Height or  Width or  Height or  Width or  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2134,
    "title": "LineStyle",
    "url": "61003.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the line style. If you select a style other than Solid, the LineWidth property must be 1 pixel.  For the gauge object, this property applies to the dial outline and tick marks.  Tip:  The dash-dash-dot and dash-dot-dot formats display as dot format in PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, or PanelView Plus CE at run time.  See also  LineWidth  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2135,
    "title": "LineWidth",
    "url": "61005.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the number of pixels for the width of the object's line.  For the gauge object, this property applies to the dial outline and tick marks.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2136,
    "title": "Linked object",
    "url": "58320.htm",
    "text": "Specify the object to which the button press will be sent if the Send press to option is Linked object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2137,
    "title": "LinkAnimation or (GroupLinkAnimation)",
    "url": "61212.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether a reference object will use the animation settings of the base object to which it is linked, and if it does use the base object's animations, whether the expressions assigned to the base object's animations will also be used by the reference object.  All reference objects, including objects that are part of a grouped reference object, will have this property.  Options  Do not link  The reference object initially uses the animations assigned to the base object. However, they are not linked, so changes to the base object are not picked up by the reference object, and changes to the reference object do not affect the base object.  Link with expressions  The reference object uses the animations and the expressions assigned to the base object. The user cannot edit the animation properties of the reference object. Changes to the animation settings of the base object will be picked up by the reference object.  Link without expressions  The reference object uses the animations assigned to the base object, but not the base object's expressions. The user will be able to edit the expressions governing the animation properties of the reference object, but not the non-expression animation properties (such as the Expression true state for Visibility animation). Changes to the animations for the reference object will not affect the base object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2138,
    "title": "LinkBaseObject or (GroupLinkBaseObject)",
    "url": "61209.htm",
    "text": "Shows the location and name of the base object or group to which the reference object is linked. This property is read-only, and cannot be edited by the user.  All reference objects, except objects that are part of a grouped reference object, will have this property. For grouped reference objects, the property in the property panel is called GroupLinkBaseObject.  The syntax is:  DisplayName.BaseObjectName  For example, if a momentary push button object named Button1 on a global object display called Main, is the base object for a reference object, this would appear as the value for the reference object's LinkBaseObject property:  Main.Button1  Tip:  If the display name does not match the name of a display in the application's, or HMI server's, Global Displays folder, or if the object name does not match one on the display, the link between the base and reference global objects will be broken.  If you delete the base object and create another with the same name but with a different object type, the link between the base and reference global objects will be broken.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2139,
    "title": "LinkConnections",
    "url": "61208.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the reference object will use the connections assigned to the base object.  If the property is True, the object's connections will be read-only, and cannot be edited by the user.  If the property is False, the reference object can have other connections assigned. These connections will not affect the base object, and any changes to the base object's connections will not be picked up by the reference object.  Only reference objects that support a connection will have this property.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2140,
    "title": "LinkedObject",
    "url": "61258.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the object the button press will be sent to if the SendPressTo property is set to Linked object.  See also  SendPressTo  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2141,
    "title": "LinesPerAlarm",
    "url": "61192.htm",
    "text": "Select the number of lines, from 1 to 10, each alarm will occupy in the object. The default is 1.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2142,
    "title": "LinesPerAudit",
    "url": "314782.htm",
    "text": "Specifies how many lines each audit will take up in the audit trail list object.  The possible value is 1-10. The default value is 1.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2143,
    "title": "LinesPerItem",
    "url": "61337.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the number of lines each shown item will use in the RecipePlus selector object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2144,
    "title": "ListMode",
    "url": "61263.htm",
    "text": "Sets the mode of the Alarm Status list. The list has three modes:  0 (All Alarms) shows all alarms set up in the Alarm Setup editor, whether active, inactive, or never active  1 (Active Alarms) shows currently active alarms  2 (Past Alarms) shows alarms that are or have been active since the last reset  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2145,
    "title": "Macro",
    "url": "61257.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the macro to be run when the button is pressed.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2146,
    "title": "MajorTicks",
    "url": "61114.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the number of major ticks. You must use at least two major ticks, one for each end point.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2147,
    "title": "MaskScratchpad",
    "url": "61138.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to display the characters the operator enters in the scratchpad as the # character. This is useful if, for security reasons, you don&#8217;t want onlookers to see what the operator enters.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2148,
    "title": "Maximum",
    "url": "61130.htm",
    "text": "A read-only connection. Specifies the maximum value that the object can write to the Value connection. Assign a tag or an expression to this connection.  If the UseVariableMinMax property is False, this connection will not be read.  See also  UseVariableMinMax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2149,
    "title": "MaximumValue",
    "url": "61135.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the highest value for the gauge. If the Value connection is at or above this value, the needle is at the right end of the dial.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2150,
    "title": "MaximumValue",
    "url": "61128.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the maximum value that the object can write to the Value connection. If the DecimalPoint property is Fixed position, the maximum applies to the stripped value, not the shown value.  If you assign a connection to the Optional Expression, the maximum also applies to the value sent to the expression.  If a Maximum connection is assigned, this property is disabled.  See also  DecimalPoint  Optional Expression  Maximum  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2151,
    "title": "MaximumValue",
    "url": "61136.htm",
    "text": "Type the value required to completely fill the bar graph. If the Value connection is at or above this value, the bar graph is full.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2152,
    "title": "Message connection",
    "url": "60537.htm",
    "text": "This connection allows the message text to be shown elsewhere besides on the alarm graphic display or alarm list.  If you assign this connection and select the Message to Tag option for the trigger, when the alarm is triggered, up to 82 characters of the message text is written to this connection. The maximum string length supported by FactoryTalk View Machine Edition is 82 characters.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2153,
    "title": "Message File connection",
    "url": "297007.htm",
    "text": "A read-only connection. Assign a string tag or expression.  The application reads the value of the connection and uses the value as the message file for the local message display.  If the UseVariableMessage property is False, this connection will not be read.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2154,
    "title": "MessageFile",
    "url": "61134.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the message file to use with the local message display. Click the Browse button (...) to open the Local Message Selector. The selector's list contains all of the local message files in the project.  If a variable message file is used, this is disabled and the application uses the string tag or expression specified for the Message File connection as the message file.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2155,
    "title": "Message Handshake connection",
    "url": "60541.htm",
    "text": "Assign a tag or an expression to this connection.  When a message is written to the Message connection, the Message Notification is set to 1.  If the Message Handshake connection is not assigned, the Hold Time starts timing. When the Hold Time finishes timing, the Message Notification connection is reset to 0.  If the Message Handshake connection is assigned, the Message Notification connection is reset to 0 when the Message Handshake connection changes to a new non-zero value.  See also  Message connection  Message Notification connection  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2156,
    "title": "Message Notification connection",
    "url": "60539.htm",
    "text": "Assign a tag to this connection. If this connection is not assigned, message handshaking cannot occur.  When the application is initially run, this connection is set to 0. When a message is written to the Message connection, the Message Notification is set to 1.  If the Message Handshake connection is not assigned, the Hold Time starts timing. When the Hold Time finishes timing, the Message Notification connection is reset to 0.  If the Message Handshake connection is assigned, the Message Notification connection is reset to 0 when the Message Handshake connection changes to a new non-zero value.  If an alarm with a Message flag is triggered while the Message Notification connection is set to 1, the alarm message will be queued until the Message Notification connection is reset. A maximum of 128 messages can be queued. (Messages are queued on a per-trigger basis. Messages from the same trigger will be queued on a first in-first out (FIFO) basis.)  If the message queue is full, the application logs a diagnostic error.  See also  Message connection  Message Handshake connection  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2157,
    "title": "Minimum",
    "url": "61124.htm",
    "text": "A read only connection. Specifies the minimum value that the object can write to the Value connection. Assign a tag or an expression to this connection.  If the UseVariableMinMax property is False, this connection will not be read.  See also  UseVariableMinMax  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2158,
    "title": "MinimumValue",
    "url": "61120.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the minimum value that the object can write to the Value connection. If the DecimalPoint property is Fixed position, the minimum applies to the stripped value, not the displayed value.  If you assign a connection to the Optional Expression, the minimum also applies to the value sent to the expression.  If a Minimum connection is assigned, this property is disabled.  See also  DecimalPoint  Optional Expression  Minimum  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2159,
    "title": "MinimumValue",
    "url": "61132.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the lowest value for the gauge. If the Value connection is at or below this value, the needle is at the left end of the dial.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2160,
    "title": "MinimumValue",
    "url": "61133.htm",
    "text": "Type the value required to empty the bar graph. If the Value connection is at or below this value, the bar graph is empty.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2161,
    "title": "MinorTicks",
    "url": "61116.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the number of minor ticks. This number of ticks appears between each major tick.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2162,
    "title": "ModeType",
    "url": "132832.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether password change operates in administrative mode, or in current user mode.  If 1 &#8211; AnyUserMode is selected, the administrator can change any user password when logging in in run-time mode.  If 0 &#8211; CurrentUserMode is selected, the logged-in operator can change the current password when logging in in run-time mode.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2163,
    "title": "NeedleColor",
    "url": "61119.htm",
    "text": "This box shows the current needle color for the gauge. Click it to select another color.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2164,
    "title": "NeedleWidth",
    "url": "61118.htm",
    "text": "Type the number of pixels for the width of the gauge&#8217;s needle.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2165,
    "title": "NextStateBasedOn",
    "url": "61137.htm",
    "text": "Specifies how the button changes states:  Current state - the application switches the button from the current state to the other state and writes out the other state value.  Value connection - the application reads the value of the Value connection, and, if the value matches one of the button&#8217;s two state values, changes the button to the other state and writes out the other state value. Select this option if you want the button to base its state on external changes to the Value connection.  If the value does not match one of the button&#8217;s state values, the application changes the button to State 0 and writes out the State 0 value.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2166,
    "title": "NextStateBasedOn",
    "url": "61117.htm",
    "text": "Specifies how the button changes states:  Current state - the application switches the button from the current state to the next state and writes out the next state value.  Value connection - the application reads the value of the Value connection, and, if the value matches one of the button&#8217;s state values, changes the button to the next state and writes out the next state value. Select this option if you want the button to base its state on external changes to the Value connection.  If the value does not match one of the button&#8217;s state values, the application changes the button to State 0 and writes out the State 0 value. When the button is in its last configured state, pressing it causes the button to change to State 0 and write out the State 0 value.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2167,
    "title": "NumberOfDigits",
    "url": "61052.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the maximum number of digits to display, up to 17 digits. The decimal point and minus sign each count as a digit.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2168,
    "title": "NumberOfInputCharacters",
    "url": "61065.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the maximum number of input characters for the string pop-up scratchpad or keyboard to accept, up to 82 characters.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2169,
    "title": "NumberOfStates",
    "url": "61115.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the number of states for the object. This number does not include the error state, if any.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2170,
    "title": "NumberOfStates",
    "url": "61149.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the number of displays to list.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2171,
    "title": "NumberOfThresholds",
    "url": "61148.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the number of thresholds for the object. Select 0 if you don&#8217;t want to use thresholds.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2172,
    "title": "NumericPopUp",
    "url": "61147.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to use the keypad or the scratchpad. To use the scratchpad, the computer running the application must have an external keyboard or keypad.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2173,
    "title": "Optional Expression",
    "url": "61122.htm",
    "text": "An optional write connection. Assign a write expression to this connection.  The application calculates the value of the expression and writes the result to the Value connection. All write expressions must contain a question mark (?) as a placeholder for the value the operator enters at run time.  If the decimal point type is Fixed position, and the \"Digits after decimal point\" value is not 0, the decimal point is removed from the displayed value and the resulting value is used.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2174,
    "title": "ParameterFile",
    "url": "61146.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the parameter file to run when the button is pressed. Click the Browse button (...) to open the file selector. The selector's list contains all of the parameter files in the project.  A parameter file assigns tags to tag placeholders in the display when the display opens.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2175,
    "title": "ParameterList or St_ParameterList",
    "url": "61321.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the parameter list to run when the button is pressed or when the operator highlights this state and presses Enter. Click the Browse button (...) to open the Tag Browser and add tags to the list. Each new tag is separated from the previous tag by a comma.  A parameter list assigns tags to tag placeholders in the display when the display opens.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2176,
    "title": "ParameterType or St_ParameterType",
    "url": "61309.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether a display's parameter values will be provided by a parameter file (0) or a parameter list (1) when the display is opened at run time.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2177,
    "title": "PatternColor or St_PatternColor",
    "url": "61145.htm",
    "text": "The box displays the pattern color for the object or state. Double-click it to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2178,
    "title": "PatternStyle or St_PatternStyle",
    "url": "61028.htm",
    "text": "Specifies a pattern for the object or state. The pattern appears on the face of the object.  The pattern does not cover the object&#8217;s border, caption, or image. If the object&#8217;s BackStyle property is Transparent, the pattern is not visible.  See also  BackStyle  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2179,
    "title": "Pattern color",
    "url": "58350.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the button's pattern color.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2180,
    "title": "Pattern style",
    "url": "58334.htm",
    "text": "Specifies a pattern for the button. The pattern appears on the face of the button. The pattern does not cover the border, caption, or image (if any). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is invisible.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2181,
    "title": "Polarity",
    "url": "61144.htm",
    "text": "A read-only connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. This connection determines whether a minus sign is shown. A minus sign is displayed when this connection has a positive non-zero value. If this connection is assigned, it overrides the polarity of the Value connection&#8217;s value.  If you assign an expression to this connection, the application calculates the value of the expression and uses the result to determine whether to show a minus sign.  If the Polarity connection uses a tag with a floating point address, values less than .5 will be rounded down and values greater than or equal to .5 will be rounded up.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2182,
    "title": "PrintAccumulatedTime",
    "url": "61256.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether the Accumulated Time column of the alarm status will be printed when the Print Alarm Status button is pressed.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2183,
    "title": "PrintAcknowledgeTime",
    "url": "61255.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether the time the alarm was acknowledged will be printed when the Print Alarm History button is pressed.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2184,
    "title": "PrintAlarmQuantity",
    "url": "61254.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether the Alarm Quantity column of the alarm status will be printed when the Print Alarm Status button is pressed.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2185,
    "title": "PrintAlarmState",
    "url": "61253.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether the Alarm State column of the alarm status will be printed when the Print Alarm Status button is pressed.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2186,
    "title": "PrintAlarmTime",
    "url": "61269.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether the Alarm Time column of the alarm history will be printed when the Print Alarm History button is pressed.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2187,
    "title": "PrintMessage",
    "url": "61275.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether the Alarm Message column of the Alarm History or Alarm Status list will be printed when the Print Alarm History or Print Alarm Status button is pressed.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2188,
    "title": "PrintType",
    "url": "61278.htm",
    "text": "Determines what view (0 All Alarms, 1 Active Alarms or 2 Past Alarms) will be printed when the operator presses the Print Alarm Status button.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2189,
    "title": "PrintTriggerLabel",
    "url": "61274.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether the Trigger Label column of the alarm history or alarm status will be printed when the Print Alarm History or Print Alarm Status button is pressed.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2190,
    "title": "PrintTriggerValue",
    "url": "61273.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether the Trigger Value column of the alarm history or alarm status will be printed when the Print Alarm History or Print Alarm Status button is pressed.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2191,
    "title": "QueueNewAlarms",
    "url": "61272.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether new alarms will replace the shown alarm in the Alarm Banner as they occur, or whether they will be queued and shown only when the present alarm is cleared.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2192,
    "title": "Ramp",
    "url": "60684.htm",
    "text": "A read connection. Assign a tag or an expression to this connection. The application reads the tag or expression value to determine the ramp value.  If the UseVariableRamp property is False, this connection will not be read.  See also  UseVariableRamp  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2193,
    "title": "RampType",
    "url": "61106.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to increase or decrease the Value control&#8217;s value when the button is pressed.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2194,
    "title": "RampValue",
    "url": "61271.htm",
    "text": "Type the amount to change the value by. Type a positive number. For a Ramp down button, the value is decreased by this amount. For a Ramp up button, the value is increased by this amount.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2195,
    "title": "RampValue",
    "url": "60688.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the amount to change the value by. Type a positive number. If the user presses a Move Up Key button or the cursor up key, the value is increased by this amount. If the user presses a Move Down Key button or the Cursor Down key, the value is decreased by this amount.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2196,
    "title": "ReceiveSelectionFrom",
    "url": "316064.htm",
    "text": "Specify the audit trail list to receive selection from.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2197,
    "title": "RefreshRate",
    "url": "58342.htm",
    "text": "In the Automatic mode, the Refresh Rate controls how often the trend acquires data.  The Refresh Rate range is 50 milliseconds - 596 hours.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2198,
    "title": "Remote Access",
    "url": "61332.htm",
    "text": "A read-only connection. Assign a tag to this connection. If this connection is a non-zero value, the piloted control list selector is controlled remotely. If the connection is set to zero, the operator controls the object.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2199,
    "title": "Remote Ack All connection",
    "url": "60549.htm",
    "text": "A read connection. Assign an analog tag to this connection. When this connection changes to a new non-zero value, all alarms are acknowledged.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2200,
    "title": "Remote Ack connection",
    "url": "60533.htm",
    "text": "The Remote Ack connection allows for remote acknowledgment of alarms. The data source writes the alarm's trigger value to this connection, and all unacknowledged alarms with this trigger value are acknowledged.  Assign an analog tag to this connection.  If you assign this connection and select the \"Use ack all value\" option for the trigger, when the Acknowledge all value is sent to this connection, all unacknowledged alarms for the trigger are acknowledged.  Remote acknowledgment does not take place if the notification hold time is in effect for the Ack connection.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2201,
    "title": "Remote Ack Handshake connection",
    "url": "60535.htm",
    "text": "When the application starts, this connection has a value of one. When the Remote Ack connection value changes, the Remote Ack Handshake connection's value toggles from one to zero. The next time the Remote Ack value changes, the Remote Ack Handshake value toggles from zero to one.  The Remote Ack Handshake value toggles whether or not the new Remote Ack value matches a trigger value.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2202,
    "title": "Remote Close Display connection",
    "url": "60557.htm",
    "text": "A read connection. Assign a tag or expression to this connection. When this connection changes to a new non-zero value, the pop-up alarm display specified on the Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor is closed.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2203,
    "title": "Remote Clear History connection",
    "url": "311911.htm",
    "text": "A read connection. Assign a tag or an expression to this connection to allow the data source to remove all alarms from the alarm log file and alarm lists, and reset the alarm status.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2204,
    "title": "Remote Silence connection",
    "url": "60547.htm",
    "text": "A read connection. Assign an analog tag or an expression to this connection. When this connection changes to a new non-zero value, all alarms are silenced. Alarms can be silenced using other methods regardless of this connection&#8217;s value.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2205,
    "title": "Remote Status Reset connection",
    "url": "60553.htm",
    "text": "A read connection. Assign a tag or expression to this connection. When this connection changes to a new non-zero value, the alarm status is reset. All accumulated alarm times are reset to 00:00:00, and all alarm quantities are reset to 0. If an alarm is still active when the alarm status is reset, its accumulated time will continue from 00:00:00 and its alarm quantity will increase from 0 to 1.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2206,
    "title": "RequireCounterSignature",
    "url": "224577.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether counter signature is required in the Electronic Signature window.  Select False to disable counter signature. After the operator presses Accept in the Electronic Signature window, the action will be executed.  Select True to enable counter signature. Authentication by another person is required to execute the action.  See also  Set up electronic signature properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2207,
    "title": "RequireESignature",
    "url": "224578.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether electronic signature feature is enabled.  Select False to disable the electronic signature feature.  Select True to enable the electronic signature feature.  See also  Set up electronic signature properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2208,
    "title": "RequireReAuthentication",
    "url": "224579.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether password is required on the Operator tab in the Electronic Signature window.  Select False to not require password on the Operator tab in the Electronic Signature window.  Select True to require password on the Operator tab in the Electronic Signature window.  See also  Set up electronic signature properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2209,
    "title": "ResetAlarmStatus",
    "url": "61331.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the alarm status will be reset when the Clear Alarm History button is pressed.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2210,
    "title": "SelectedAlarmIndicator",
    "url": "61191.htm",
    "text": "Select whether the selected alarms will be indicated by a highlight bar or by a cursor.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2211,
    "title": "SelectionBackColor",
    "url": "61270.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the color for the highlight bar. Double-click the box to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  The highlight bar indicates the current state or the selected list item at run time.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2212,
    "title": "SelectionForeColor",
    "url": "61277.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the color for the caption on the highlighted state or list item. Double-click the box to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2213,
    "title": "SendPressTo",
    "url": "61260.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the button press will be sent to whatever object currently has input focus on the display, or to a specific object linked to the button.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2214,
    "title": "Scroll",
    "url": "58343.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the chart continually updates with new data during runtime.  If the Scroll property is set to False, the chart fills with new data up to the limit specified in the BufferSize property. Beyond that point, the chart does not update with new data until the operator manually toggles the scroll mode using the Pause Pen button.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2215,
    "title": "ScrollMode",
    "url": "58346.htm",
    "text": "Specifies how the chart scrolls when the Scroll property is set to True to allow automatic scrolling during runtime. Options are continuous scroll, half-screen scroll, or full screen scroll.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2216,
    "title": "Send press to",
    "url": "58348.htm",
    "text": "Select whether the button press will be sent to whatever object currently has the focus, or to a specific object linked to the button.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2217,
    "title": "Shape",
    "url": "58338.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the shape of the button. The available options are:  Rectangle  Circle  Ellipse  If the button's shape is a circle or ellipse, the button&#8217;s touch area remains a rectangle, and the width, height, and other properties apply to the button's bounding box.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2218,
    "title": "Size",
    "url": "58339.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the size of the font used for the caption.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2219,
    "title": "Shape",
    "url": "61015.htm",
    "text": "Select the shape of the object. If the object shape is circle or ellipse, the application applies properties such as size and position by measuring in relation to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2220,
    "title": "ShowDisplayOnLogout",
    "url": "61109.htm",
    "text": "Check this box if you want a display to appear when the logout button is pressed.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2221,
    "title": "ShowLegend",
    "url": "61048.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to include legends on the gauge object.  See also  legend  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2222,
    "title": "Silence connection",
    "url": "60545.htm",
    "text": "A write connection. If alarms use the audio signal, assign a digital tag to this connection to notify the data source that alarms have been silenced.  When the application starts, this connection has a value of zero. When alarms are silenced, this connection is set to one for the notification hold time and the internal beeper is turned off. At the end of the notification hold time, the connection is reset to zero.  Alarms are silenced under these circumstances:  The operator presses the Silence button.  An alarm is acknowledged.  The Remote Silence connection&#8217;s value changes to a new non-zero value.  The operator presses the Clear Alarm History button.  If subsequent alarms (that have been set up to sound the internal beeper) are generated, the alarms sound the beeper regardless of the Silence connection value or notification hold time status.  While the notification hold time is in effect, new alarms cannot be silenced.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2223,
    "title": "SizeToFit",
    "url": "61279.htm",
    "text": "&#8209;Specifies whether the text will stretch or shrink to fit if the object is resized at run time. If SizeToFit is False, the WordWrap property will apply.  See alao  WordWrap, CaptionWordWrap or St_CaptionWordWrap  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2224,
    "title": "St_Access",
    "url": "61140.htm",
    "text": "Specifies who has access to the piloted control list selector's selected state . The options are:  Operator and Remote - both a user and a remote controller can select the state  Operator - only a user can select the state  Remote - only a controller can select the state  None - the state cannot be selected  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2225,
    "title": "St_CaptionBlink",
    "url": "61276.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the caption in the list blinks at run time. The caption blinks twice per second.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2226,
    "title": "St_CaptionUsesDisplayName",
    "url": "61018.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to use the name of the display as the caption for this state. This caption appears in the display list at run time.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2227,
    "title": "St_Display",
    "url": "61282.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the display to open when the operator highlights this state and presses Enter. Click the Browse button to open the Display Selector. The selector's list contains all of the graphic displays in the project.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2228,
    "title": "St_Value",
    "url": "61286.htm",
    "text": "If you specified Value for the momentary push button's ButtonAction property, the Value property specifies the integer value to use for the object&#8217;s current state. You cannot assign a value to the error state.  If you selected Momentary Open for the ButtonAction property, State 0 has a value of 0, and State 1 has a value of 1. You cannot change these values.  If you selected Momentary Closed for the ButtonAction property, State 0 has a value of 1, and State 1 has a value of 0. You cannot change these values.  See also  ButtonAction  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2229,
    "title": "St_Value",
    "url": "61112.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the integer value to use for the state. You cannot assign a value to the error state (if the object has an error state).  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2230,
    "title": "St_Value",
    "url": "61324.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the integer value for the currently selected state of the piloted control list selector. If the piloted control list selector's Write on Enter is enabled, when the operator presses the Enter key, this value is written to the data source.  See also  WriteOnEnter  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2231,
    "title": "State",
    "url": "61203.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the state whose properties are displayed in the St_... properties. Select a different number to edit a different state, or use the States toolbar to select a different state.  The released state is State 0. The selected state is State 1.  When the button&#8217;s connection tag value equals the value for this button, the button is in State 1. If the connection tag is any other value, the button is in State 0.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2232,
    "title": "State",
    "url": "61218.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the state whose properties are displayed in the St_... properties. Select a different number to edit a different state, or use the States toolbar to select a different state.  The released state is State 0. The pressed state is State 1.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2233,
    "title": "State",
    "url": "61220.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the state whose properties are displayed in the St_... properties. Select a different number to edit a different state, or use the States toolbar to select a different state.  The unlatched state is State 0. The latched state is State 1.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2234,
    "title": "State",
    "url": "61281.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the state whose properties are shown in the St_... properties. Select a different number to edit a different state, or use the States toolbar to select a different state.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2235,
    "title": "static objects",
    "url": "60145.htm",
    "text": "A static object does not initiate actions or change to reflect current processes or tag values. It is used for illustrative purposes. However, you can attach animation to static objects (except the panel and image objects) if you want the object to act as an indicator of a changing tag value.  The drawing objects and the scale object are static objects. Objects that are converted to wallpaper are also static, and animation does not affect them.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2236,
    "title": "Status Reset connection",
    "url": "60551.htm",
    "text": "A write connection. Assign a digital tag to this connection to notify the data source that the alarm status has been reset, that is, the accumulated time for all alarms has been reset to 00:00:00, and the alarm quantity for all alarms has been reset to 0.  When the application starts, this connection has a value of zero. If the operator presses a Reset Alarm Status or Clear Alarm History button, the connection is set and held for as long as the button is pressed, or for the notification hold time, whichever is longer.  If the Remote Status Reset connection causes the reset, the Status Reset connection is set and held for the notification hold time. The connection is then reset to zero.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2237,
    "title": "StringPopUp",
    "url": "61283.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to use the keyboard or the scratchpad. To use the scratchpad, the computer running the application must have an external keyboard or keypad.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2238,
    "title": "SweepStyle",
    "url": "61057.htm",
    "text": "Specify whether to color the area behind the needle as the value changes.  Select Solid fill or Gradient fill to use the FillColor, Threshold1Color, and Threshold2Color properties to color the portion of the gauge that has a value less than or equal to the Value connection.  See also  FillColor  Threshold1Color  Threshold2Color  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2239,
    "title": "TakeFocusOnPress",
    "url": "61284.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the object will take input focus when pressed. A press is a mouse click, touch screen press or assigned function key press.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2240,
    "title": "Threshold1Blink",
    "url": "61285.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the section of the object that&#8217;s at or above the first threshold (and below the second threshold, if enabled) blinks at run time. The section of the object blinks twice per second.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2241,
    "title": "Threshold1Color",
    "url": "61060.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the fill color for the section of the object that&#8217;s at or above the first threshold (and below the second threshold, if enabled) . Double-click the box to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2242,
    "title": "Threshold1Value",
    "url": "61293.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the value or percentage of the value range for the first threshold.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2243,
    "title": "Threshold2Blink",
    "url": "61292.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the section of the object that&#8217;s at or above the second threshold blinks at run time. The section of the object blinks twice per second.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2244,
    "title": "Threshold2Color",
    "url": "61062.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the fill color for the section of the object that&#8217;s at or above the second threshold. Double-click the box to select another color. A color palette opens. Click the color to use, or click Other to select from a broader range of colors.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2245,
    "title": "Threshold2Value",
    "url": "61291.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the value or percentage of the value range for the second threshold.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2246,
    "title": "ThresholdType",
    "url": "61290.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to use an absolute value, or a percentage of the range between the minimum and maximum values, for the thresholds.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2247,
    "title": "TickDirection",
    "url": "61289.htm",
    "text": "Select the tick direction. For example, if you select Up, the ticks appear on the top side of the scale.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2248,
    "title": "TimeFormat",
    "url": "58327.htm",
    "text": "Specify in what time format the trend shows. This setting affects every time display in the trend object.  The available options are:  12-hour (AM/PM)  24-hour  Use system time setting  If system time format is selected, the format specified in the Windows Control Panel's Regional Options is used.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2249,
    "title": "Title",
    "url": "61288.htm",
    "text": "Specifies a title of up to 80 characters for the print job sent to the printer when the Print Alarm History or Print Alarm Status button is pressed.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2250,
    "title": "TitleActiveAlarmsMode",
    "url": "61302.htm",
    "text": "Sets the title, up to 80 characters, of the Alarm Status list for Active alarms mode. The default is Active Alarms.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2251,
    "title": "TitleAllAlarmsMode",
    "url": "61301.htm",
    "text": "Sets the title, up to 80 characters, of the Alarm Status list for All alarms mode. The default is All Alarms.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2252,
    "title": "TitlePastAlarmsMode",
    "url": "61300.htm",
    "text": "Sets the title, up to 80 characters, of the Alarm Status list for Past alarms mode. The default is Past Alarms.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2253,
    "title": "Top or (GroupTop)",
    "url": "61304.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the number of pixels from the top of the display to position the object or group. You can type a positive or negative number. If you use a negative number, part or all of the object is off screen.  If the object&#8217;s Shape property is Circle or Ellipse, the top position applies to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  See also  Shape  Bounding box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2254,
    "title": "Top Position",
    "url": "61330.htm",
    "text": "A write only connection for the piloted control list selector. Assign a tag to this connection. Whenever the list scrolls, the value of the top visible state is written out to the assigned tag.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2255,
    "title": "Touch",
    "url": "61294.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the object is touch activated. If you select True, the operator can press the object using a touch screen or mouse.  If you select False, the operator must use a keypad or external keyboard to press the object. In this case, use the Key Assignments editor to assign a function key to the object.  If the object&#8217;s Shape property is Circle or Ellipse, the touch area is the object&#8217;s boundiTouchng box.  See also  Shape  Bounding box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2256,
    "title": "TriggerLabel",
    "url": "61299.htm",
    "text": "Type a label for the trigger, up to 40 characters. Do not use commas.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2257,
    "title": "TriggerType",
    "url": "61110.htm",
    "text": "Select 0 (Value) if you want the object to trigger the state whose St_Value property corresponds to the value of the Value connection.  Select 1 (LSB) if you want the object to trigger the state whose St_Value property corresponds to the position of the least significant bit in the object's Value connection.  If the TriggerType property is set to 1 (LSB), a Value connection value of 0 will trigger a state whose St_Value property is set to 0.  Tip:  The LSB trigger type property does not work with tags that use the Default data type. Default data type is Floating Point, and LSB does not support Floating Point.  See also  St_Value  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2258,
    "title": "Use the string pop-up character input",
    "url": "60283.htm",
    "text": "The string pop-up character input is an alternative to the string pop-up keyboard. To use the character input instead of the keyboard, in the Tools menu, select Options > String Pop-Up, and then select Use the string pop-up character input.  The character input opens instead of the keyboard when the operator presses a string input enable button, the User and Password buttons in the Login dialog box, or the buttons in the Change Password dialog box.  To use the string pop-up character input  Press the buttons in the pop-up, or use the keys on an external keyboard or keypad, to enter a string in the pop-up&#8217;s scratchpad.  Press Enter @.  Tip:  When the pop-up is open, the graphic display does not accept input to any other objects in the display.  If the graphic display changes remotely before the operator has pressed the Enter button in the string pop-up character input, the pop-up closes without writing anything out.  If the computer&#8217;s resolution is smaller than 320 pixels wide by 240 pixels high, the string pop-up character input cannot open.  If the string input enable button has its Mask scratchpad option set to True, the string pop-up character input's scratchpad will show # characters instead of the characters entered.  When invoked from the Change Password or from the Login dialog box's Password button, the string pop-up character input's scratchpad will show # characters instead of the characters entered.  Use the keys on the external keyboard or keypad  SEL [F1]  Press F1 on the keyboard to write the selected character to the scratchpad.  Insert/Overstrike [F2]  Press the F2 key to toggle between insert and overstrike modes.  << [F3]  Press F3 to move the cursor in the scratchpad to the left.  >> [F4]  Press F4 to move the cursor in the scratchpad to the right.  CLR [F5]  Press F5 or the Delete key to clear the scratchpad.  Backspace  Press the @ to delete the character to the left of the cursor. Hold the button down to delete multiple characters.  Left arrow  Press the Left arrow key to move the character highlight to the left.  Right arrow  Press the Right arrow key to move the character highlight to the right.  Up arrow  Press the Up arrow key to move the character highlight up to the next higher row.  Down arrow  Press the Down arrow key to move the character highlight down to the next row down.  Escape  Press the Esc key to close the pop-up without writing the string to the Value connection or text box.  Enter  Press the Enter key to write the string to the Value connection of a string input enable button or to the text field in the Login or Change Password dialog box.  See also  Use the string pop-up keyboard  How the String Input Enable button works at run time  Use the Login dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2259,
    "title": "UseAlarmColors",
    "url": "61141.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the message text shown on the alarm banner or alarm status list uses the Foreground and Background colors specified in the Alarm Setup editor, or (if False) the ForeColor and BackColor values specified for the object.  See also  ForeColor  BackColor or St_BackColor  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2260,
    "title": "UseAlarmIdentifier",
    "url": "271219.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to write the alarm identifier value assigned to the alarm message to the tag specified for the AlarmIdentifier connection.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2261,
    "title": "UseEchoMessage",
    "url": "302338.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to use an echo message.  If this is True, the echo message function is used and the triggered message will be written to the string tag assigned for the Echo Message connection.  If this is False, the echo message function will not be used.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2262,
    "title": "UseVariableDomainName",
    "url": "134697.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether the variable value uses a DomainName tag instead of a domain name at run-time.   If you select True, the variable value uses the DomainName tag selected in the Connections tab of the Login Button Properties dialog box.  If you select False, the variable value uses the domain name entered in the Domain name field in the General tab of the  Login Button Properties dialog box.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2263,
    "title": "UseVariableLimit",
    "url": "61198.htm",
    "text": "Choose whether the object's upper or lower Ramp value will use a tag or expression value (True), or a constant value (False), at run time. If a constant value is used, the LimitValue property must be specified. If a tag or expression value is used, the Limit connection must be assigned.  See also  LimitValue  Limit  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2264,
    "title": "UseVariableMessage",
    "url": "297005.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to use a variable message file.  If this is True, uses the string tag or expression specified for the Message File connection as the message file.  If this is False, uses the specified message file.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2265,
    "title": "UseVariableMinMax",
    "url": "61126.htm",
    "text": "Choose whether the object's Minimum/Maximum values will use tag or expression values (True), or constant values (False), at run time. If constant values are used, the MaximumValue and MinimumValue properties must be specified. If tag or expression values are used, the Minimum and Maximum connections must be assigned.  See also  MaximumValue  MinimumValue  Minimum  Maximum  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2266,
    "title": "UseVariableRamp",
    "url": "60686.htm",
    "text": "Choose whether the object's Ramp value will use a tag or expression value (True), or a constant value (False), at run time. If a constant value is used, the RampValue property must be specified. If a tag or expression value is used, the Ramp connection must be assigned.  See also  RampValue  Ramp  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2267,
    "title": "VariableDomainName",
    "url": "224585.htm",
    "text": "Click the browse button to open the Tag Browser, and select a tag from the tag database for the domain name.  Parameter is supported.  See also  Set up electronic signature properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2268,
    "title": "Value",
    "url": "61329.htm",
    "text": "A write connection for the piloted control list selector. Assign a tag to this connection. When a display containing a piloted control list selector is opened, if the list is operator controlled, (that is, if the Remote Access connection's value is set to zero), the application reads this tag to determine what state to display.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2269,
    "title": "Value",
    "url": "61322.htm",
    "text": "A write only connection. Assign a tag or expression that can support up to 82 characters (bytes). When the operator presses the Enter key, the application writes the alphanumeric string to the tag&#8217;s data source.  If you do not assign the Value connection, at run time when the operator presses the button, the string pop-up does not open.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2270,
    "title": "Value",
    "url": "61307.htm",
    "text": "A read-only connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. The application reads the value of the Value connection&#8217;s tag at the data source and displays this value in the numeric display.  If you assign an expression to this connection, the application calculates the value of the expression and displays the result in the numeric display.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2271,
    "title": "Value",
    "url": "61308.htm",
    "text": "A write only connection. Assign a tag to this connection. When the operator presses the Close Display button, the application writes the value specified in the CloseValue property to the tag&#8217;s data source.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2272,
    "title": "Value",
    "url": "61310.htm",
    "text": "A write only connection. Assign a tag to this connection. The application writes the value corresponding to the current state (pressed or released) to the tag&#8217;s data source.  Tip:  To provide visual feedback that the Value connection has been read by the data source, assign different tags to the Value and Indicator connections. Configure the data source to pass the Value connection&#8217;s value to the Indicator connection.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2273,
    "title": "Value",
    "url": "61311.htm",
    "text": "A read-write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. The application writes the value corresponding to the new state to the tag&#8217;s data source. If the NextStateBasedOn property is \"Value connection,\" the application reads this tag to determine which state to display next.  Tip:  To provide visual feedback that the Value connection has been read by the data source, assign different tags to the Value and Indicator connections. Configure the data source to pass the Value connection&#8217;s value to the Indicator connection.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2274,
    "title": "Value",
    "url": "61313.htm",
    "text": "A read connection. The application reads the value of the connection at the data source and updates the local message display to show the message whose trigger value corresponds to the connection value.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and updates the display to show the message whose trigger value corresponds to the expression value.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2275,
    "title": "Value",
    "url": "61314.htm",
    "text": "A read-write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. When the operator presses the button, the application writes the value corresponding to the latched state (State 1) to the tag&#8217;s data source, unless the LatchResetType property is \"Non-zero\" and the Handshake connection is currently a non-zero value.  When the Handshake connection unlatches the button, the application sends the value corresponding to the unlatched state (State 0) to the Value connection.  When you open a display containing a latched push button, the application reads the value of the Value connection to determine its current state.  Tip:  To provide visual feedback that the Value connection has been read by the data source, assign different tags to the Value and Indicator connections. Configure the data source to pass the Value connection&#8217;s value to the Indicator connection.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2276,
    "title": "Value",
    "url": "61315.htm",
    "text": "A read-write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. When the operator presses the button, the application writes the value for this button to the tag&#8217;s data source. The application also reads this tag to determine which state to display.  Assign the same tag to the Value connection for each interlocked push button in the group.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2277,
    "title": "Value",
    "url": "61316.htm",
    "text": "A read-write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. When the operator selects a state, the application writes the value corresponding to the selected state to the tag&#8217;s data source. The application also monitors this connection and if the value changes, highlights the new state in the list.  Tip:  If the WriteOnEnter property is True, the application doesn&#8217;t write to the Value connection until the operator selects a state and presses Enter.  If the WriteOnEnter property is False, the Enter and Enter Handshake connections are ignored.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2278,
    "title": "Value",
    "url": "61318.htm",
    "text": "A read-only connection. You can assign a tag or an expression to this connection. The application reads the value of the connection at the data source and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the value.  If you assign an expression, the application calculates the value of the expression and updates the object&#8217;s display to reflect the value.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2279,
    "title": "Value",
    "url": "61319.htm",
    "text": "A read-only connection. Assign a tag or expression that can support up to 82 characters (bytes). The application reads the value of the Value connection&#8217;s tag at the data source to determine the string to display.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2280,
    "title": "Value",
    "url": "61320.htm",
    "text": "A read-write connection. The application keeps a copy of the Value connection on the computer. When the operator presses the Ramp button, the application adds or subtracts the RampValue amount from the local Value connection value and writes the result to the Value connection tag&#8217;s data source.  Tip:  If the RampValue property is a floating point value and the Value connection is an integer tag, the application rounds the value before writing it to the connection.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2281,
    "title": "Value/Optional Expression",
    "url": "61143.htm",
    "text": "A write connection. Assign a tag to this connection. When the operator presses the Enter key, the application writes the numeric value to the tag&#8217;s data source.  The Optional Expression connection is an optional write connection that works with the Value connection. To use it, assign a write expression to the Optional Expression connection.  The application calculates the value of the expression and writes the result to the Value connection. All write expressions must contain a question mark (?) as a placeholder for the value the operator enters at run time.  If the DecimalPoint property is Fixed position, and the DigitsAfterDecimalPoint property value is not 0, the decimal point is removed from the displayed value and the resulting value is used.  Tip:  If you do not assign the Value connection, at run time when the operator presses the button, the numeric pop-up does not open.  Example: Write expressions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2282,
    "title": "Variable",
    "url": "61323.htm",
    "text": "From the list, select the type of variable to be inserted in the caption. In the dialog box, specify the details of the variable.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2283,
    "title": "VerticalMargin",
    "url": "61306.htm",
    "text": "Type the number of pixels for the vertical touch margin. The vertical margin is along the object's top and bottom edges. The vertical margin is a touch-insensitive margin inside the object&#8217;s top and bottom edges. If the operator presses the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  This property is useful for buttons that are positioned close together. A touch-insensitive border on each button helps ensure that an adjacent button is not pressed by mistake.  If the Shape property is Circle or Ellipse, the touch margin applies to the button&#8217;s bounding box.  See also  Bounding box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2284,
    "title": "Vertical margin",
    "url": "58340.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the top and bottom edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2285,
    "title": "ViewOnly",
    "url": "61214.htm",
    "text": "Determines whether the operator can change recipe ingredient values at run time. If the ViewOnly property is set to True, the user cannot change values in the RecipePlus table object at run time.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2286,
    "title": "Visible or (GroupVisible)",
    "url": "61303.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to make the object or group visible.  If this is False, the object is invisible at run time. (It is visible in the development system.)  If you are using visibility animation, the visibility animation setting overrides this option.  Tip:  If an object is not visible at run time, it is not functional. Clicks or touches on an invisible object pass through the object to whatever is behind it.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2287,
    "title": "Visible States",
    "url": "61336.htm",
    "text": "A write connection for the piloted control list selector. Assign an array tag or an expression to this connection. When the list scrolls, the values associated with the states that are visible on the list will be written to the data source. The number of elements in the array tag must match the number of visible states.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2288,
    "title": "Width or (GroupWidth)",
    "url": "61207.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the number of pixels for the width of the object or group. The width includes the object&#8217;s borders.  If the object&#8217;s Shape property is Circle or Ellipse, the width applies to the object&#8217;s bounding box.  You must use a positive integer for the width.  See also  Shape  Bounding box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2289,
    "title": "WidthTriggerLabel",
    "url": "61298.htm",
    "text": "Type a value between 1 and 255 for the width, in characters, of the Trigger Label column that will be printed when the Print Alarm History or Print Alarm Status button is pressed. The default value is 20.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2290,
    "title": "WidthTriggerValue",
    "url": "61297.htm",
    "text": "Type a value between 1 and 255 for the width, in characters, of the Trigger Value column that will be printed when the Print Alarm History or Print Alarm Status button is pressed. The default value is 11.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2291,
    "title": "WindowColor",
    "url": "58349.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the color of the trend chart window when the chart is opaque.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2292,
    "title": "WindowStyle",
    "url": "58347.htm",
    "text": "Specifies the style of the window background. The background can be:  Default: uses the background color of the graphic display  Opaque: uses the Window Color  Transparent: allows the display&#8217;s background color and other objects to show through  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2293,
    "title": "Word wrap",
    "url": "58341.htm",
    "text": "If selected, the caption wraps to a new line at the end of a word.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2294,
    "title": "WordWrap, CaptionWordWrap or St_CaptionWordWrap",
    "url": "61040.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether the text continues onto the next line at the beginning of a new word.  If WordWrap is False, the text continues on the next line whenever the maximum text length is reached, even if this occurs in the middle of a word or number. The maximum text length depends on the width of the object or column and the font size.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2295,
    "title": "WrapAround",
    "url": "61296.htm",
    "text": "Choose whether the list will wrap from the end of the list to the beginning when scrolling down and from the beginning of the list to the end when scrolling up.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2296,
    "title": "WriteOnEnter",
    "url": "61295.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether to write to the data source when the operator presses an Enter key button object or the Enter key on an external keyboard/keypad while the Control List Selector is the selected object on the display.  If you select False, the application writes the state value to the data source as soon as a new state is highlighted.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2297,
    "title": "WriteOnClose",
    "url": "61233.htm",
    "text": "Specifies whether a value will be written out when the Close Display button is pressed. If you select True, the value must be specified in the CloseValue property.  See also  CloseValue  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2298,
    "title": "XY plot",
    "url": "58263.htm",
    "text": "A trend chart can either plot values against time or against a selected pen. In an XY Plot, the X axis represents the value of a selected pen.  The time span controls the number of data points shown. For example, if the time span is 20 seconds and the interval is one second, the chart shows up to 20 points. Data points outside of the time span are removed from the display. The time span is included in the trend chart&#8217;s title.  Configure the chart style on the General tab of the trend object&#8217;s Properties dialog box.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2299,
    "title": "XYPlotAxisPen",
    "url": "58336.htm",
    "text": "Specify which pen serves as the X-Axis in an X-Y plot. A trend chart can plot values against time or against a selected pen. This property takes effect only when the ChartStyle property is set to XYplotStyle. If the ChartStyle property is not set to XYplotStyle, the value is always zero.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2300,
    "title": "Attach animation to graphic objects",
    "url": "67299.htm",
    "text": "When you attach animation to an object you define how you want it to behave at run time.  Object animation associates objects with tags or expressions so the appearance or movement of an object changes to reflect changes to a tag's or expression's value. Use the menu options on the Animation menu to open the Animation dialog boxes where you define object behavior. If the animation type is not supported for the selected object, the boxes in the tab are unavailable.  In the animation tabs for horizontal and vertical sliders, you assign a single tag to define animation. For other types of animation, define an expression in the Expression box. Specify how the object's appearance changes based on the result of the expression.  For some types of animation you specify a change of state. For example, an object with visibility animation switches between visible and invisible. For other types of animation, you specify a range of motion. For example, an object can move from a fixed starting point to a fixed end point. The range of motion is related to the minimum and maximum values for the expression. The object moves from the At minimum position to the At maximum position as the expression value changes to the maximum value.  When specifying a tag name you can use an existing HMI tag or direct referenced data item, create a new one, or use a tag placeholder.  You can attach these types of animation to drawing objects: color, fill, height, horizontal position, horizontal slider, rotation, vertical position, vertical slider, visibility, and width. The exceptions are the image and panel objects, which only support visibility animation.  For the other objects and ActiveX controls, you can attach visibility animation only.  Tip:  You can attach animation to a group. In general, except for visibility, fill, and color, animation set up for a group of objects takes precedence over animation set up for individual objects within the group.  For visibility animation, the Invisible behavior takes precedence.   For fill animation, group animation is added to object animation.   For color animation, applying color animations to an object group as well as to the individual objects in the group causes unexpected behaviors. To set up color animations for an object group, apply the color animations to the group, or to the individual objects in the group.  As well, some positioning animation may be additive. Be sure to test group animation to ensure that it produces the effect you intend.  If you use a tag's value to control visibility animation as well as in an expression to control some other aspect of animation, when you set up visibility, set the Expression true state to 'Invisible'. If you do not, the object could appear briefly in its design-time location and orientation before animating properly.  To open the Animation dialog box, select the object and then, from the View menu, select Animation.  See also  About ActiveX objects  Create graphic displays  Copy and paste animation  Tag names with animation  Tag placeholders  ",
    "keywords": {
      "animation": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2301,
    "title": "Set up color animation",
    "url": "67303.htm",
    "text": "With color animation, an object changes color based on a tag value or the result of an expression. You can specify up to 16 color changes (A to P) for any object. Colors can be solid or blinking. For each color change, specify the value or threshold at which the color is to change and specify the colors to change to. At runtime, when the value reaches or crosses the threshold, the color changes.  Color animation is available for all drawing objects only except image and panel objects, which only support visibility animation.  To attach color animation to an object  Select the object.  Choose Color from the Animation menu or click the Color tab in the Animation dialog box.  Type a tag name or expression that will return numeric values at run time.  Click the letter you are defining a color change for, then specify the value at which the change is to occur.  Select the line and fill colors by clicking the colored box beside the label to open the color selection box and then clicking a color. Line colors apply to the object's Fore color and Pattern color properties. Fill colors apply to the object's Back color property.  Click on the Blink check box beside Line or Fill, to specify how the color is to behave. When you select Blink, a color box will be shown so you can specify an alternate color.  From the Fill Style drop-down list, select how the fill color shows.  If you select Blink, specify a blink rate. The same rate is used for all blinking colors defined for the object.  Tip:  The threshold values must be defined in ascending order, starting with A as the lowest value.  If the tag or expression evaluates to less than the minimum threshold, the object is shown in its default color (the one in which it was drawn).  You can use the Object Explorer to search for objects in your display that have animation. Open the Highlight Settings box and select the kind of animation you want to highlight.  If the graphic object's back style is Transparent, the solid, gradient, or shaded color animation does not take effect.  Options  Expression  Type a tag name or an expression that will evaluate to numeric values at run time. An expression is a mathematical or logical equation that returns a value. It can contain tag names, constants, and mathematical, relational, logical, and bitwise operators. A tag name can be used as an expression.  Value  Type the value at which the color is to change. The threshold values must be defined in ascending order, starting with A as the lowest value.  Line and Fill  Select colors for the Line and Fill. If you specify blink for either line or fill, a second colored box is shown. An object blinks by alternating two blinking colors. When you define two blinking colors for a change, they are both shown beside the letter identifier (A - P) for the change. The default alternate blink color is black (If you choose Gradient in the Fill Style, the default gradient fill uses black and white color). If the object&#8217;s line or fill color is black, the default alternate blink color is white. You cannot select the same color for the blink on and blink off states. Using Fill Style you can control the look of the fill color, Original (no changes from the original), Solid, Gradient, or a patterned Shaded look.  Fill Style  Use the Fill Style option to control the look of the fill color.  Use this fill style  To  Solid  Change the colors, and they will have a solid look to them.  Gradient  Change the colors, and they will have a gradient look to them. If you select Gradient as the Fill Style, the Fill color box changes to gradient. Click it to bring up the gradient fill dialog box to configure the gradient fill.  Original  Prevent the colors of the object to be changed from what was originally imported.  Shaded  Use a tight dot pattern to soften or give a shaded appearance.  The Shaded fill style takes effect only on the group object that is composed of individual objects with dark to light colors, such as the Symbol Factory objects.  The following example shows the effects of Shaded and Gradient fill styles.  Keep Original Color  Using the Original Fill Style allows for more variations on animating an object. Instead of a specific color for the object&#8217;s non-blink state, the object&#8217;s original color can be used.  If Original is used as a Fill Style on any state, the color palette boxes will not allow a color change. By selecting the Blink option, a different color can be used for both the Line and the Fill color or individually.  Controlling Color Shading  Using the Shaded Fill Style along with the Blink option allows control of the shading aspect of a display object by changing combinations of Line and Fill and different colors.  Important:  Some types of graphics are made up of many elements. An individual element can be selected and have color animation applied just to it.  Blink Rate (Seconds)  Type the number of seconds for the blink cycle. For example, if you specify a rate of two seconds and have two colors specified, the object will blink for 1 second on one color, then 1 second on the other color. The blink rate is the same for all blinking colors defined for an object.  Default Colors  Click this button to reset colors to their defaults.  See also  Attach animation to graphic objects  Use the Expression editor  Use tag names with animation  Define custom colors  Drawing objects  Object Explorer  Highlight Settings dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2302,
    "title": "Properties on the General tab of the ME Custom String Popup Keyboard Properties dialog box",
    "url": "60972.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the properties on the General tab of the ME Custom String Popup Keyboard Properties dialog box. These properties cannot be modified at run time.  Properties  Descriptions  Caption  Optional  This property contains fixed text that is shown on the button object on the display containing the control.  File Location  Required  The property contains the full path (for example, \"C:\\myProject\\\" or \"\\Storage Card\\\") to the definition file (for example, \"ME.TXT\") that configures the popup keyboard.  Number of input characters  Required  The property contains the maximum number of characters that will be returned from the popup keyboard. The maximum number of characters is 82.  See also  Custom String Popup Keyboard ActiveX control  Popup keyboard definition file  Connections for the Custom String Popup Keyboard ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2303,
    "title": "Set up fill animation",
    "url": "67314.htm",
    "text": "Use the Fill option on the Animation menu to change the fill level in an object when an expression or tag value changes. The object's fill level is proportional to the minimum and maximum values specified for the expression. For example, if the value of the expression is halfway between its minimum and maximum values, the object will be half full.  You can attach fill animation to drawing objects only. The exceptions are the image and panel objects, which only support visibility animation.  To attach fill animation to an object  Select the object.  Choose Fill from the Animation menu, or click the Fill tab in the Animation dialog box.  Create an expression that will evaluate to a number at run time.  Specify minimum and maximum values for percent fill.  Indicate the fill direction and whether only the inside is to vary or not.  Select the method to use to calculate the expression's minimum and maximum values.  Specify a range of values for the expression.  Tip:  You can use the Object Explorer to search for objects in your display that have animation. Open the Highlight Settings box and select the kind of animation you want to highlight.  If you add fill animation to a group as well as to individual objects within the group, the object's fill animation will be applied first and then the group fill animation will be added to it.  Options  Expression  Type a tag name or an expression that will evaluate to numeric values at run time. An expression is a mathematical or logical equation that returns a value. It can contain tag names, constants, and mathematical, relational, logical, and bitwise operators. A tag name can be used as an expression. When you use a tag name, the minimum and maximum expression values default to the tag's minimum and maximum values.  Expression range  Use tag's min and max property values  If you have specified a tag in the Expression box, click this button to use the tag's minimum and maximum values to define the range of values for the expression. If your expression contains more than one tag, the minimum and maximum values for the first tag will be used for the animation.  Use constant  To use constant numeric values to define a range of values, click this button and specify values for minimum and maximum.  Read from tags  To define the range of values using one tag's value for the minimum and another tag's value for the maximum, click this button and then specify a tag for minimum and another for maximum. Using this option, when the display opens and animation for an object is started, the tags' values are read once to set the minimum and maximum values. The tags are not read again after the display is opened, nor are the minimum and maximum values for the animation changed, even if the tag values change.  Fill (Percent)  The default values for this are 0 and 100, which means that when the expression returns the minimum value, the object will be empty and when it returns its maximum, the object will be completely full.  At Minimum  Type the percent the object is to be filled when the expression evaluates to its minimum value. The default is 0.  At Maximum  Type the percent the object is to be filled when the expression evaluates to its maximum value. The default is 100.  Fill Direction  Select Left, Right, Up or Down for the fill direction. For example, if you choose Left, the object will fill from the right to the left side.  Inside Only  When you check this box the outline of the object remains constant while the inside fill varies.  See also  Attach animation to graphic objects  Using the Expression editor  Tag names with animation  Drawing objects  Object Explorer  Highlight Settings dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2304,
    "title": "Set up height animation",
    "url": "67316.htm",
    "text": "With height animation, an object&#8217;s height changes based on a tag value or the result of an expression. The height of the object is proportional to the value of the expression. For example, if the value of the expression is halfway between the minimum and maximum values, the object&#8217;s height will be halfway between its minimum and maximum vertical change percents.  Height animation is available for all drawing objects except image and panel objects, which only support visibility animation.  To set up height animation for an object  Select the object.  Choose Height from the Animation menu or click the Height tab in the Animation dialog box.  Select a tag or create an expression that will evaluate to a number at run time to determine the height of the object.  Specify minimum and maximum values for vertical change (height) percent. You can also use the Object Smart Path feature to set these values.  Select the anchor for the object. The object will increase and decrease in height from this point.  Select the method to use to calculate the expression's minimum and maximum values.  Specify a range of values for the expression.  Tip:  You can use the Object Explorer to search for objects in your display that have animation. Open the Highlight Settings box and select the kind of animation you want to highlight.  Options  Expression  Type a tag name or an expression that will evaluate to numeric values at run time. An expression is a mathematical or logical equation that returns a value. It can contain tag names, constants and mathematical, relational, logical and/or bitwise operators. A tag name can be used as an expression. When you do this, the minimum and maximum expression values default to the tag's minimum and maximum values.  Expression range  Use tag's min and max property values  If you have specified a tag in the Expression box, click this button to use the tag's minimum and maximum values to define the range of values for the expression. If your expression contains more than one tag, the minimum and maximum values for the first tag will be used for the animation.  Use constant  To use constant numeric values to define a range of values, click this button and specify values for minimum and maximum.  Read from tags  To define the range of values using one tag's value for the minimum and another tag's value for the maximum, click this button and then specify a tag for minimum and another for maximum. Using this option, when the display opens and animation for an object is started, the tags' values are read once to set the minimum and maximum values. The tags are not read again after the display is opened, nor are the minimum and maximum values for the animation changed, even if the tag values change.  Vertical Change (Percent)  At Minimum  The height of an object when it is selected is the base size (100 percent). Click on a handle on the left or right side of the object and drag it to resize the object.  or  Type the height the object is to be when the expression evaluates to its minimum value. This is a percentage of its base size.  At Maximum  Click on a handle on the left or right side of the object and drag it to resize the object.  or  Type the height the object is to be when the expression evaluates to its maximum value. This is a percentage of its base size.  Anchor  Anchor determines which part of the object remains constant.  Top  Select Top if the top position of the object is to remain constant. As the value of the expression changes, the object grows to or shrinks from the bottom.  Middle  Select Middle if the midpoint of the object is to remain constant. As the value of the expression changes, the object lengthens and shortens equally on either side of its midpoint.  Bottom  Select Bottom if the bottom position of the object is to remain constant. As the value of the expression changes, the object grows to or shrinks from the top.  See also  Attach animation to graphic objects  Tag names with animation  Use the Expression editor  Drawing objects  Object Smart Path  Object Explorer  Highlight Settings dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2305,
    "title": "Set up horizontal motion for objects",
    "url": "67297.htm",
    "text": "Use the Horizontal Position option on the Animation menu to move an object horizontally as a tag value or the results of an expression change. The horizontal position of the object is proportional to the value of the expression. For example, if the value of the expression is halfway between its minimum and maximum values, the horizontal position of the object will be halfway between its minimum and maximum horizontal offset positions.  You can attach horizontal position animation to drawing objects only. The exceptions are the image and panel objects, which only support visibility animation.  To set up horizontal motion for an object  Select the object.  Choose Horizontal Position from the Animation menu or click the Horizontal Position tab in the Animation dialog box.  Select a tag or create an expression that will evaluate to a number at run time to determine the position of the object.  Specify the horizontal offset for the object when the expression evaluates to its minimum and maximum values. You can also use Object Smart Path to set these values.  Select the method to use to calculate the expression's minimum and maximum values.  Specify a range of values for the expression.  Options  Expression  Type a tag name or an expression that will evaluate to numeric values at run time. An expression is a mathematical or logical equation that returns a value. It can contain tag names, constants, and mathematical, relational, logical, and bitwise operators. A tag name can be used as an expression. When you do this, the minimum and maximum expression values default to the tag's minimum and maximum values.  Expression range  Use tag's min and max property values  If you have specified a tag in the Expression box, click this button to use the tag's minimum and maximum values to define the range of values for the expression. If your expression contains more than one tag, the minimum and maximum values for the first tag will be used for the animation.  Use constant  To use constant numeric values to define a range of values, click this button and specify values for minimum and maximum.  Read from tags  To define the range of values using one tag's value for the minimum and another tag's value for the maximum, click this button and then specify a tag for minimum and another for maximum. Using this option, when the display opens and animation for an object is started, the tags' values are read once to set the minimum and maximum values. The tags are not read again after the display is first opened, nor are the minimum and maximum values for the animation changed, even if the tag values change.  Horizontal Offset (Pixels)  Horizontal offset determines the object's position in the display. The At Minimum and At Maximum boxes determine where the object is to be at the expression's minimum and maximum values.  At Minimum  Type the starting position of the object in pixels, or drag the object to its starting position and then click the check box. The offset value, in pixels, will reflect the object's new position.  At Maximum  Type the ending position of the object, in pixels, or drag the object from its start to its finish position, then click the check box. The offset value, in pixels, will reflect the object's new position.  See also  Attach animation to graphic objects  Tag names with animation  Use the Expression editor  Drawing objects  Object Smart Path  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2306,
    "title": "Set up hyperlink animation",
    "url": "271420.htm",
    "text": "With hyperlink animation, an object links to a destination. When the object is clicked at run time, in Test application mode, or in Test Display mode, the linked destination opens. The destination can be a file, a web page, or a program.  Hyperlink animation is available for all drawing objects except image and panel objects which only support visibility animation.  To set up hyperlink animation for an object  Select the object.  From the Animation menu, select Hyperlink.  On the Hyperlink tab, in the Address box, specify an expression that represents the linked destination by any of the following methods:  Type a URL address or a file path. It must be enclosed in double quotes (&#8220; &#8221;). When entering a URL address on a PanelView Plus 7 or PanelView Plus 6 terminal, you must include the protocol name, such as http:// and https://.  Click Tag to browse for a string tag that represents the URL address or a file path.  Click Expression to open the Expression Editor to create one.  Click Browse for File to browse and select a file.  Click Browse the Web to open the default browser on your computer. Then browse to the web page you want to link to, and copy and paste the URL to the Expression box.  When finished, click Apply.  Tip:  If an object&#8217;s hyperlink animation address is a path to a nonexistent file, clicking this object on a PanelView Plus 7 or PanelView Plus 6 terminal will launch the file type associated program or show an error message.  See also  Drawing objects  Options on the Hyperlink tab  Example: Addresses of hyperlinks  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2307,
    "title": "Options on the Hyperlink tab",
    "url": "272172.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Hyperlink tab.  Options  Descriptions  Address  Specify the address that represents the linked destination. You can enter a URL address or a file path. You can also click Tag or Expression to specify a tag or an expression.  An expression is a mathematical or logical equation that returns a value. A tag name can be used as an expression.  Browse the Web  Click this button to open the default web browser on your computer. You can browse to the web page that you want to link to, and copy and paste the URL to the Address box.  The URL must be enclosed in double quotes (\" \").  Browse for File  Click this button to select the file that you want to open at run time. After you specify the file, the full path with the file name is shown in the Address box.  The path must be enclosed in double quotes (\" \").  See also  Set up hyperlink animation  Example: Addresses of hyperlinks  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2308,
    "title": "Example: Addresses of hyperlinks",
    "url": "272239.htm",
    "text": "The address of the hyperlink animation can be a URL address, a file path, a tag, or an expression.  Example 1: Use a URL address  To link to the homepage of Rockwell Automation, in the Address box, enter:  \"http://www.rockwellautomation.com\" or ''www.rockwellautomation.com\" on a personal computer or MobileView terminal  \"http://www.rockwellautomation.com\" on a PanelView Plus 7 or PanelView Plus 6 terminal  The URL must be enclosed in double quotes.  Example 2: Use a file path  To link to the file sample.pdf in C:\\Users\\Public\\Documents, in the Address box, enter: \"C:\\Users\\Public\\Documents\\sample.pdf\"  The path must be enclosed in double quotes.  Example 3: Use a tag  Assume that the string tag linkAddress represents the linked destination of a web page or a file. To use the tag, in the Address box, enter: linkAddress  Example 4: Use an expression  Assume that:  The string tag launchApp represents the location of the program: C:\\Windows\\System32\\notepad.exe  The string tag launchWarningFile represents the location of the file that contains the warning information: C:\\Users\\Public\\Documents\\warnings.txt  If the current user has the security code A, the system launches the specified program. Otherwise, the system shows the specified warning information.  To do this, in the Address box, enter: If CurrentUserHasCode(A) Then launchApp Else launchWarningFile  See also  Set up hyperlink animation  Options on the Hyperlink tab  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2309,
    "title": "Set up rotation animation",
    "url": "67320.htm",
    "text": "With rotation animation, an object rotates around an anchor point based on a tag value or the result of an expression, with the angle of rotation of the object being proportional to the value of the expression. For example, if the value of the expression is halfway between the minimum and maximum values, the object will rotate half the specified amount.  Rotation animation is available for all drawing objects except images, panels, and rounded rectangles. If you apply rotation animation to text, the text rotates around the anchor point but remains in the upright position.  To set up rotation for an object  Select the object.  Choose Rotation from the Animation menu, or click the Rotation tab in the Animation dialog box.  Select a tag or create an expression that will evaluate to a number at run time to determine the rotation of the object.  Specify degree of rotation when the tag is at its minimum and maximum values. This determines the range of rotation. Specify positive values for clockwise rotation and negative for counter-clockwise rotation. You can also use the Object Smart Path feature with the Rotate tool to set these values.  To select the center of rotation (offset, or the point about which the object will rotate), click one of the nine buttons or click the button beside the Center of Rotation input box, and type this position in pixels.  Select the method to use to calculate the expression's minimum and maximum values.  Specify a range of values for the expression.  Tip:  You can use the Object Explorer to search for objects in your display that have animation. Open the Highlight Settings box and select the kind of animation you want to highlight.  Options  Expression  Type a tag name or an expression that will evaluate to numeric values at run time. An expression is a mathematical or logical equation that returns a value. It can contain tag names, constants, and mathematical, relational, logical, and bitwise operators. A tag name can be used as an expression. When you do this, the minimum and maximum expression values default to the tag's minimum and maximum values.  Expression range  Use tag's min and max property values  If you have specified a tag in the Expression box, click this button to use the tag's minimum and maximum values to define the range of values for the expression. If your expression contains more than one tag, the minimum and maximum values for the first tag will be used for the animation.  Use constant  To use constant numeric values to define a range of values, click this button and specify values for minimum and maximum.  Read from tags  To define the range of values using one tag's value for the minimum and another tag's value for the maximum, click this button and then specify a tag for minimum and another for maximum. Using this option, when the display opens and animation for an object is started, the tags' values are read once to set the minimum and maximum values. The tags are not read again after the display is opened, nor are the minimum and maximum values for the animation changed, even if the tag values change.  Rotation (Degrees)  Use positive values for clockwise rotation and negative values for counter-clockwise rotation.  At Minimum  Type the angle of rotation, in degrees, that the object is to be when the expression evaluates to its minimum value. The default rotation of the object is 0 degrees for the position it is in when it is selected.  At Maximum  Type the angle of rotation, in degrees, that the object is to be when the expression evaluates to its maximum value.  Center of Rotation  The center of rotation, or offset, determines the anchor point about which the object will rotate. The default is 0,0, which is the geographic center of the object. The anchor point can be moved anywhere inside or outside the object. If it is outside, the object can appear as if it is moving in an arc. Offset is expressed in pixels.  You can click one of the nine buttons to specify the center of rotation, or click the tenth button beside the data input box, then type offset values, in pixels, in the box.  See also  Attach animation to graphic objects  Tag names with animation  Use the Expression editor  Drawing objects  Object Smart Path  Object Explorer  Highlight Settings dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2310,
    "title": "Set up vertical motion for objects",
    "url": "67322.htm",
    "text": "Use the Vertical Position option on the Animation menu to move an object vertically as a tag value or the results of an expression change. The vertical position of the object is proportional to the value of the expression. For example, if the value of the expression is halfway between its minimum and maximum values, the vertical position of the object will be halfway between its minimum and maximum vertical offset positions.  You can attach vertical position animation to drawing objects only. The exceptions are the image and panel objects, which only support visibility animation.  To set up vertical motion for an object  Select the object.  Choose Vertical Position from the Animation menu or click the Vertical Position tab in the Animation dialog box.  Select a tag or create an expression that will evaluate to a number at run time to determine the position of the object.  Specify the vertical offset for the object when the expression evaluates to its minimum and maximum values. You can also use the Object Smart Path feature to set these values.  Select the method to use to calculate the expression's minimum and maximum values.  Specify a range of values for the expression.  Options  Expression  Type a tag name or an expression that will evaluate to numeric values at run time. An expression is a mathematical or logical equation that returns a value. It can contain tag names, constants, and mathematical, relational, logical, and bitwise operators. A tag name can be used as an expression. When you do this, the minimum and maximum expression values default to the tag's minimum and maximum values.  Expression range  Use tag's min and max property values  If you have specified a tag in the Expression box, click this button to use the tag's minimum and maximum values to define the range of values for the expression. If your expression contains more than one tag, the minimum and maximum values for the first tag will be used for the animation.  Use constant  To use constant numeric values to define a range of values, click this button and specify values for minimum and maximum.  Read from tags  To define the range of values using one tag's value for the minimum and another tag's value for the maximum, click this button and then specify a tag for minimum and another for maximum. Using this option, when the display opens and animation for an object is started, the tags' values are read once to set the minimum and maximum values. The tags are not read again after the display is opened, nor are the minimum and maximum values for the animation changed, even if the tag values change.  Vertical Offset (Pixels)  Vertical offset determines the object&#8217;s position on the screen. The At Minimum and At Maximum boxes determine where the object is to be at the expression's minimum and maximum values.  At Minimum  Type the starting position of the object in pixels, or drag the object to its start position then click the check box. The offset value, in pixels, will reflect the object's new position.  At Maximum  Type the ending position of the object in pixels, or drag the object from its start to its finish position, then click the check box. The offset value, in pixels, will reflect the object's new position.  See also  Attach animation to graphic objects  Tag names with animation  Use the Expression editor  Drawing objects  Object Smart Path  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2311,
    "title": "Set up visibility animation",
    "url": "67226.htm",
    "text": "With visibility animation, an object becomes visible or invisible based on a tag value or the result of an expression. When an object is invisible, it cannot be selected. Mouse clicks pass through it to whatever object is underneath.  Visibility animation is available for all objects and overrides an object&#8217;s Visible property.  Tip:  If you use a tag&#8217;s value to control visibility animation as well as in an expression to control some other aspect of animation, when you set up visibility, set the Expression true state to Invisible. If you do not do this, the object could appear briefly in its design-time location and orientation before animating properly.  To attach visibility animation to a graphic object  Select the graphic object.  Choose Visibility from the Animation menu or click the Visibility tab in the Animation dialog box.  In the Expression box, type a tag name or create an expression that will return a numeric value.  Select whether the object is to be visible or invisible when the expression is true (that is, a non-zero value).  Tip:  You can use the Object Explorer to search for objects in your display that have animation. Open the Highlight Settings box and select the kind of animation you want to highlight.  If a apply visibility animation to a group as well as to individual objects within the group, when the group's visibility is False, that is, the group is invisible, all the objects in the group are invisible, regardless of the animation on individual objects. When the group's animation is True, that is, the group is visible, the visibility of any object within the group is determined by the object's animation.  Options  Expression  Type a tag name or an expression that will evaluate to numeric values at run time. An expression is a mathematical or logical equation that returns a value. It can contain tag names, constants, and mathematical, relational, logical, and bitwise operators. A tag name can be used as an expression.  Expression True State  Check whether the object is to be visible or invisible when the expression is true. For visibility animation, if an expression returns a numeric value of 0, the expression is false. If any non-zero value is returned, the expression is true.  See also  Attach animation to graphic objects  Use the Expression editor  Tag names with animation  Object Explorer  Highlight Settings dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2312,
    "title": "Set up width animation",
    "url": "67326.htm",
    "text": "With width animation, an object&#8217;s width changes based on a tag value or the result of an expression. The width of the object is proportional to the value of the expression. For example, if the value of the expression is halfway between its minimum and maximum values, the width of the object will be halfway between its minimum and maximum horizontal change percents.  Width animation is available for all drawing objects except image and panel objects, which only support visibility animation.  To set up width animation for an object  Select the object.  Choose Width from the Animation menu or click the Width tab in the Animation dialog box.  Select a tag or create an expression that will evaluate to a number at run time to determine the width of the object.  Specify minimum and maximum values for horizontal change (width) percent. You can also use the Object Smart Path feature to set these values.  Select the anchor for the object. The object will widen and narrow from this point.  Select the method to use to calculate the expression's minimum and maximum values.  Specify a range of values for the expression.  Tip:  You can use the Object Explorer to search for objects in your display that have animation. Open the Highlight Settings box and select the kind of animation you want to highlight.  Options  Expression  Type a tag name or an expression that will evaluate to numeric values at run time. An expression is a mathematical or logical equation that returns a value. It can contain tag names, constants and mathematical, relational, logical, and bitwise operators. A tag name can be used as an expression. When you do this, the minimum and maximum expression values default to the tag's minimum and maximum values.  Expression range  Use tag's min and max property values  If you have specified a tag in the Expression box, click this button to use the tag's minimum and maximum values to define the range of values for the expression. If your expression contains more than one tag, the minimum and maximum values for the first tag will be used for the animation.  Use constant  To use constant numeric values to define a range of values, click this button and specify values for minimum and maximum.  Read from tags  To define the range of values using one tag's value for the minimum and another tag's value for the maximum, click this button and then specify a tag for minimum and another for maximum. Using this option, when the display opens and animation for an object is started, the tags' values are read once to set the minimum and maximum values. The tags are not read again after the display is opened, nor are the minimum and maximum values for the animation changed, even if the tag values change.  Horizontal Change (Percent)  At Minimum  The width of the object when it is selected is the base size (100 percent). Click on a handle on the left or right side of the object and drag it to resize the object.  or  Type the width the object is to be when the expression evaluates to its minimum value. This is a percentage of its base size.  At Maximum  Click on a handle on the left or right side of the object and drag it to resize the object.  or  Type the width the object is to be when the expression evaluates to its maximum value. This is a percentage of its base size.  Anchor  Anchor determines which part of the object remains constant.  Left  Select Left if the left side of the object is to remain constant. As the value of the expression changes, the object grows to or shrinks from the right.  Center  Select Center if the midpoint of the object is to remain constant. As the value of the expression changes, the object widens and narrows equally on either side of its midpoint.  Right  Select Right if the right side of the object is to remain constant. As the value of the expression changes, the object grows to or shrinks from the left.  See also  Attach animation to graphic objects  Use the Expression editor  Tag names with animation  Object Smart Path  Drawing objects  Object Explorer  Highlight Settings dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2313,
    "title": "Touch animation",
    "url": "67813.htm",
    "text": "This feature is not supported in FactoryTalk View Machine Edition.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2314,
    "title": "OLE Verb animation",
    "url": "67876.htm",
    "text": "This feature is not supported in FactoryTalk View Machine Edition.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2315,
    "title": "Create horizontal sliders",
    "url": "67318.htm",
    "text": "Use the Horizontal Slider option on the Animation menu to create a graphic object that can control the value of a specified tag. With horizontal slider animation, you define a path for the object, then use the mouse to move the object horizontally along its path. The pixel position of the object is translated into a value that is written to the tag.  A tag that has values input by slider animation can be used in an expression to attach animation to another object or group of objects. If the tag value is changed externally, the position of the slider will change as well.  Both vertical and horizontal slider animation can be attached to the same object.  You can attach horizontal slider animation to drawing objects only. The exceptions are the image and panel objects, which only support visibility animation.  To create a horizontal slider  Draw an object that is to be the slider. It is also useful to draw an object, for example a line that represents the path the slider will move along.  Select the object, then choose Horizontal Slider from the Animation menu.  Type the name of the tag that will be associated with the slider.  Define the path for the slider by typing minimum and maximum pixel positions for the beginning and end of the path or by using the Object Smart Path feature.  Select the method to use to calculate the minimum and maximum values that are written to the tag.  Specify a range of values for the expression.  Tip:  The value of the tag will be proportional to the horizontal position of the slider on the path defined by the minimum and maximum horizontal offsets. If the object is halfway along the path, the value of the tag will be halfway between the minimum and maximum tag values.  Options  Tag  Type the name of the tag to which values will be written.  Expression range  Use tag's min and max property values  If you have specified an HMI tag in the Tag box, click this button to use the tag's minimum and maximum values to define the range of values for the expression.  Use constant  To use constant numeric values to define a range of values, click this button and specify values for minimum and maximum.  Read from tags  To define the range of values using one tag's value for the minimum and another tag's value for the maximum, click this button and then specify a tag for minimum and another for maximum. Using this option, when the display opens and animation for an object is started, the tags' values are read once to set the minimum and maximum values. The tags are not read again after the display is first opened, nor are the minimum and maximum values for the animation changed, even if the tag values change.  Horizontal Offset (Pixels)  Offset refers to the position of an object in relation to some starting point. When you select an object, its position is considered the starting point, which gives it an offset of 0.  At Minimum  Type the offset, in pixels, of the beginning of the slider's path, or drag the slider to this position. Select the check box.  At Maximum  Type the offset, in pixels, of the end of the slider's path, or drag the object to this position. Select the check box.  See also  Attach animation to graphic objects  Use the Expression editor  Tag names with animation  Drawing objects  Object Smart Path  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2316,
    "title": "Create vertical sliders",
    "url": "67324.htm",
    "text": "Use the Vertical Slider option on the Animation menu to create a graphic object that can control the value of a specified tag. With vertical slider animation, you define a path for the object, then use the mouse to move the object vertically along its path. The pixel position of the object is translated into values that are written to the tag.  A tag that has values input by slider animation can be used in an expression to attach animation to another object or group of objects. If the tag value is changed externally, the position of the slider will change as well.  Both vertical and horizontal slider animation can be attached to the same object.  You can attach vertical slider animation to drawing objects only. The exceptions are the image and panel objects, which only support visibility animation.  To create a vertical slider  Draw an object that is to be the slider. It is also useful to draw an object, for example a line that represents the path the slider will move along.  Select the object then choose Vertical Slider from the Animation menu.  Type the name of the tag that will be associated with the slider.  Define the path for the slider by typing minimum and maximum pixel positions for the beginning and end of the path or by using Object Smart Path.  Select the method to use to calculate the minimum and maximum values that are written to the tag.  Specify a range of values for the expression.  Tip:  The value of the tag will be proportional to the vertical position of the slider on the path defined by the minimum and maximum vertical offsets. If the object is halfway along the path, the value of the tag will be halfway between the minimum and maximum tag values.  Options  Tag  Type the name of the tag to which values will be written.  Expression range  Use tag's min and max property values  If you have specified an HMI tag in the Tag box, click this button to use the tag's minimum and maximum values to define the range of values for the expression.  Use constant  To use constant numeric values to define a range of values, click this button and specify values for minimum and maximum.  Read from tags  To define the range of values using one tag's value for the minimum and another tag's value for the maximum, click this button and then specify a tag for minimum and another for maximum. Using this option, when the display opens and animation for an object is started, the tags' values are read once to set the minimum and maximum values. The tags are not read again after the display is opened, nor are the minimum and maximum values for the animation changed, even if the tag values change.  Vertical Offset (Pixels)  Offset refers to the position of an object in relation to some starting point. When you select an object, its position is considered the starting point, which gives it an offset of 0.  At Minimum  Type the offset, in pixels, of the starting position for the slider's path, or drag the object to this position. The value is 0 for the position the object is in when it is selected.  At Maximum  Type the offset, in pixels, of the end position for the slider's path, or drag the object to this position.  See also  Attach animation to graphic objects  Use the Expression editor  Tag names with animation  Drawing objects  Object Smart Path  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2317,
    "title": "Copy and paste animation",
    "url": "67328.htm",
    "text": "You can copy the animation defined for one graphic object in a display and then paste it onto another object. Use Copy Animation and Paste Animation options on the Edit menu to do this.  To copy the animation from an object  Select the object whose animation is to be copied.  Choose Copy Animation from the Edit menu.  To paste the animation to another object  Select the objects to which the animation is to be copied.  Choose Paste Animation from the Edit menu.  Tip:  You can select the object, then open the relevant Animation dialog box to review the details of the animation before you copy it. You do not have to close the Animation dialog box to copy the animation, simply choose Copy Animation from the Edit menu.  When you paste animation onto an object, it overrides and merges with any existing animation.  See also  About ActiveX objects  Create graphic displays  Attach animation to graphic objects  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2318,
    "title": "Test animation",
    "url": "67814.htm",
    "text": "To test the animation you have set up on a graphic display, use Test Display to switch to test mode. When you finish testing, switch back to edit mode to continue editing.  To switch between test and edit modes, do one of the following:  From the View menu, select Test Display or Edit Display  On the toolbar, click @ or @.  Tip:  Test mode is not the same as running the display. Test mode does not change the appearance or position of the display as set up in the Display Settings dialog box. Also, data logging is not turned on in test mode.  See also  Attach animation to graphic objects  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2319,
    "title": "Tag names with animation",
    "url": "67301.htm",
    "text": "When you attach animation to objects, you can use tags that already exist or ones that are not yet in the tag database.  To supply a tag name for an object  Use one of these methods:  Type a tag name in the Expression box.  Click the Expression button and type a tag name in the Expression editor.  Choose the Tags button and select a tag from the Tag Browser.  Click the New Tag button in the Tag Browser to create a new tag.  See also  Attach animation to graphic objects  Tag placeholders  Use the Expression editor  Highlight Settings  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2320,
    "title": "Replace a tag name or character string",
    "url": "67191.htm",
    "text": "Use Tag Substitution to replace the tag names or character strings used for all currently selected graphic objects in a display. Character strings include tag placeholders, expressions, and parts of strings within expressions. When replacing tags, you can use an entire tag name, including folders, or you can replace only one part of it. You cannot use wildcard characters when searching for or replacing tag names.  To substitute a tag or character string  Select the graphic object(s) you intend to do substitutions for. If more than one object is involved you can use the Select tool to draw a selection border around them, or press Ctrl-Click to select each one.  In the Edit menu, click Tag Substitution, or right-click the display and select Tag Substitution from the context menu.  In the Search For box, type the tag name or character string to be replaced.  or  Click the Down arrow to display and select from the list of tags, tag placeholders, and expressions associated with the currently selected graphic object(s).  or  Click the Tags browse button (...) to display the Tag Browser dialog box, and select a tag from the tag database.  In the Replace With box, type the name of the replacement tag or character string. You can also use the down arrow or Tags browse button (...) to select a tag.  Click Replace.  Options  Search for  Type the tag name or character string you want to replace. You cannot use wildcard characters in this box.  Replace with  Type the tag name or character string that is to replace what you are searching for. You cannot use wildcard characters in this box.  Confirm replacements  Click this check box if you want the Confirm Replacement dialog box to be displayed when you click the Replace button. This lets you replace this occurrence of the tag or string, replace all, or go on to the next one without replacing this one. If you click Replace, the next occurrence is displayed automatically.  If you do not check the Confirm replacements box, all occurrences of the text in the Search for box are automatically replaced with the text in the Replace with box.  See also  Confirm tag substitution  Tag placeholders  Context menu  Examples: Tag substitution  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2321,
    "title": "Confirm tag substitution",
    "url": "67195.htm",
    "text": "If you have select the Confirm Replacements check box in the Tag Substitution dialog box, this dialog box opens when you click the Replace button. It shows the tag or string about to be replaced, along with its usage.  You can:  Click the Replace button to replace this instance of the tag.  Click Next to search for the next occurrence of the tag and show its usage in the Usage box.  Click Replace All to replace all instances of the tag in the currently selected object.  Usage  This shows how the tag or string is being used, the type of graphic object it is associated with, and the object's position in the graphic display.  See also  Replace a tag name or character string  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2322,
    "title": "Examples: Tag substitutions",
    "url": "67193.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows examples of tag substitutions.  To substitute  Do this  A folder called Machine1 with a folder called Machine2  Type Machine1 in the search box and type Machine2 in the replace box.  A tag named Machine1\\tag1\\max would become Machine2\\tag1\\max.  A tag for another in the same folder, for example to replace Machine1\\Tag1 with Machine1\\Tag2  Type Tag1 in the search box and type Tag2 in the replace box.  All tag placeholders for the selected objects from #1 to #2  Type #1 in the search box and type #2 in the replace box.  See also  Confirm tag substitution  Replace a tag name or character string  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2323,
    "title": "Object Smart Path",
    "url": "67295.htm",
    "text": "Object Smart Path lets you position drawing objects visually, rather than by entering numbers in the Animation dialog box. This means that you can specify an object's position by dragging it into place rather than trying to determine what the position is in pixels.  Because the Animation dialog box floats on the screen like the toolbox and color palettes, it can remain visible on the screen while you draw or edit objects in the graphic display. Object Smart Path takes advantage of this as described in the following example.  To define the range of horizontal motion for an object using Object Smart Path  With the Animation dialog box open, select the drawing object, then click the Horizontal Position tab.  On the Horizontal Position tab, type a tag name or create an expression that returns a value that will determine the object's current horizontal position in the display.  Select and drag the object to the position you want it to start from in the graphic display.  Click the At Minimum check box under Horizontal Offset in the Animation dialog box.  Drag the object to its end position. As you do this, you can see the numbers change in the At Maximum box.  Click the At Maximum check box when the object is in the end position, then click the Apply button.  Tip:  To attach rotation animation, you can use the Rotate tool to determine the start and finish positions for an object, clicking the Minimum and Maximum check boxes as described above for horizontal position.  See also  Attach animation to graphic objects  Drawing objects  Set up horizontal motion for objects  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2324,
    "title": "Arrange graphic objects",
    "url": "67815.htm",
    "text": "After you draw or paste a graphic object, you can move the object around and arrange it using the menu options on the Arrange menu or the toolbar.  You can:  combine several objects into a group that behaves as a single object  ungroup a group object, dividing it into its component parts  stack objects by moving them in front of or behind other objects  align objects with each other vertically or horizontally  space objects vertically or horizontally  flip objects and groups horizontally or vertically  rotate a graphic object or a group  lock a graphic object or a group into position  See also  Object Explorer  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Move a graphic object in small increments  Group graphic objects  Create graphic displays  ",
    "keywords": {
      "graphic object": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2325,
    "title": "Object Explorer",
    "url": "67228.htm",
    "text": "How do I open the Object Explorer?  When you open a project, the Object Explorer is shown on the right in the main window. You can hide it, and change its size and position. If it is not shown, open it using one of the following methods:  On the Graphics toolbar, click @.  From the View menu, select Object Explorer.  Right-click an object and select Object Explorer.  Object Explorer provides a tree-list naming all the objects on the graphic display and allows you to select, hide, and highlight objects from the list. Groups are listed as expandable items in the tree, with a + icon.  You can use the Object Explorer to:  Select an object that is hidden behind other objects on the graphic display, without bringing the object to the front. Objects are listed in front-to-back order. The object you created most recently is at the front, unless you move it back using the Send to Back option.  Show or hide an object on the graphic display by selecting or clearing the check box in front of the object in the Object Explorer.  Highlight objects by object type, highlight objects that have animation attached, and to highlight objects with specific tag or expression assignments.  The Object Explorer does not show wallpaper objects or objects within ActiveX composite objects.  Tip:  When you right-click the root node, Display in the Object Explorer, a context menu shows. The menu is the same menu that you would see if you right-click on the graphic display.  When you right-click a graphic object or group in the Object Explorer, the context menu for that object or group shows. The menu is the same menu that you would see if you right-click the object or group on the graphic display, except that the Object Explorer menu item does not show.  When you double-click most graphic objects in the Object Explorer, including drawing objects, the object's Properties dialog box opens. For ActiveX objects, the behavior of the object when double-clicked depends on the vendor's implementation.  See also  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Select a graphic object within a group  Select a graphic object that is behind another object  Show or hide a graphic object on a graphic display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2326,
    "title": "Object Explorer",
    "url": "78496.htm",
    "text": "How do I open the Object Explorer?  When you open a project, the Object Explorer is shown on the right in the main window. You can hide it, and change its size and position. If it is not shown, open it using one of the following methods:  On the Graphics toolbar, click @.  From the View menu, select Object Explorer.  Right-click an object and select Object Explorer.  Object Explorer provides a tree-list naming all the objects on the graphic display and allows you to select, hide, and highlight objects from the list. Groups are listed as expandable items in the tree, with a + icon.  You can use the Object Explorer to:  Select an object that is hidden behind other objects on the graphic display, without bringing the object to the front. Objects are listed in front-to-back order. The object you created most recently is at the front, unless you move it back using the Send to Back option.  Show or hide an object on the graphic display by selecting or clearing the check box in front of the object in the Object Explorer.  Highlight objects by object type, highlight objects that have animation attached, and to highlight objects with specific tag or expression assignments.  The Object Explorer does not show wallpaper objects or objects within ActiveX composite objects.  Tip:  When you right-click the root node, Display in the Object Explorer, a context menu shows. The menu is the same menu that you would see if you right-click on the graphic display.  When you right-click a graphic object or group in the Object Explorer, the context menu for that object or group shows. The menu is the same menu that you would see if you right-click the object or group on the graphic display, except that the Object Explorer menu item does not show.  When you double-click most graphic objects in the Object Explorer, including drawing objects, the object's Properties dialog box opens. For ActiveX objects, the behavior of the object when double-clicked depends on the vendor's implementation.  See also  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Select a graphic object within a group  Select a graphic object that is behind another object  Show or hide a graphic object on a graphic display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2327,
    "title": "Close the Object Explorer",
    "url": "229963.htm",
    "text": "You can close the Object Explorer in multiple ways.  To close the Object Explorer, do one of the following  From the View menu, select Object Explorer.  Click the Close button on the top right hand corner of the Object Explorer.  On the graphic display, right-click to open the context menu and then select Object Explorer.  See also  Object Explorer  Options in the Object Explore  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2328,
    "title": "Options in the Object Explore",
    "url": "229964.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options in the Object Explorer.  Options  Descriptions  Highlight on  Select this check box to highlight the objects specified in the Highlight Settings dialog box on the graphic display and the Object Explorer tree list. You can select objects by object type, animation type, or tag name.  Settings  Click Settings to open the Highlight Settings dialog box.  Expand  Use the Expand button to expand all the groups in the list at once.  Collapse  Use the Collapse buttons to collapse all the groups in the list at once.  See also  Object Explorer  Close the Object Explorer  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2329,
    "title": "Highlight Settings dialog box",
    "url": "67230.htm",
    "text": "How do I open the Highlight Settings dialog box?  In the Object Explorer, select Highlighting on and click Settings.  Use the Highlight Settings dialog box to highlight specified objects on the graphic display and the Object Explorer tree list.  You can select objects by object type, animation type, or tag name.  Objects with the selected properties are highlighted in red on the graphic display and in the Object Explorer. If your graphic display uses a red background, you will not be able to see the highlights.  See also  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Object Browser  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2330,
    "title": "Highlight Settings",
    "url": "78498.htm",
    "text": "How do I open the Highlight Settings dialog box?  In the Object Explorer, select Highlighting on and click Settings.  Use the Highlight Settings dialog box to highlight specified objects on the graphic display and the Object Explorer tree list.  You can select objects by object type, animation type, or tag name.  Objects with the selected properties are highlighted in red on the graphic display and in the Object Explorer. If your graphic display uses a red background, you will not be able to see the highlights.  See also  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Object Browser  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2331,
    "title": "Specify the highlight settings",
    "url": "229982.htm",
    "text": "Specify the highlight settings in the Highlight Settings dialog box.  To specify the highlight settings  In the Highlight Settings dialog box, select the object type(s), animation type(s), and tag name (if any) to be highlighted.  See also  Highlight Settings dialog box  Options in the Highlight Settings dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2332,
    "title": "Options in the Highlight Settings dialog box",
    "url": "229978.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options in the Highlight Settings dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  By object type  Select one or more object types in the list.  By animation type  Select one or more animation types in the list.  By tag name  Select By tag name, and then select a tag name or expression from the list. The list shows all the tags and expressions referenced by objects on the graphic display (except the tags contained in embedded variables).  See also  Highlight Settings dialog box  Specify the highlight settings  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2333,
    "title": "Select a graphic object on a graphic display",
    "url": "67232.htm",
    "text": "You can select a graphic object on a graphic display in multiple ways.  To select a graphic object on a graphic display, do one of the following  On the graphic display, click the object. When a graphic object is selected on the graphic display, the selected object will also be selected in the Object Explorer.  In the Object Explorer, click the object. You can select only one object in the Object Explorer.  When a graphic object is selected, selection handles appear on the object on the graphic display.  Tip:  When the Select tool is active, the cursor is represented by an arrow. When you select another tool, the symbol for it appears below the arrow.  To select more than on object, select the first object and then press Ctrl and click the other objects on the graphic display.  To select all the objects on a graphic display, from the Edit menu, select Select All. If the graphic display contains grouped objects, Select All selects the group only, not the individual objects within the group.  See also  Drawing objects  Edit graphic displays  Object Explorer  Deselect a graphic object on a graphic display  Group graphic objects  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2334,
    "title": "Select a graphic object within a group",
    "url": "229960.htm",
    "text": "You can select a graphic object within a group without ungrouping the objects.  To select a graphic object within a group  Double-click the group to put the group in edit mode.  Do one of the following:  Click the object on the graphic display  In the Object Explorer, click the + sign next to a group and click the object in the Object Explorer. Objects are listed front to back.  Tip:  You can use the Object Explorer to select the objects out of a group.  See also  Object Explorer  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Select a graphic object that is behind another object  Deselect a graphic object on a graphic display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2335,
    "title": "Select a graphic object that is behind another object",
    "url": "229961.htm",
    "text": "You can select a graphic object that is behind another object without bringing it to the front.  To select a graphic object that is behind another object  Click the top object, and then click the top object again.  Tip:  You can also select the object that is behind another object in the Object Explorer. In the Object Explorer, objects are listed front to back.  You can use the check box in front of a graphic object in the Object Explorer to show or hide the object on the graphic display.  See also  Object Explorer  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Select a graphic object within a group  Deselect a graphic object on a graphic display  Show or hide a graphic object on a graphic display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2336,
    "title": "Deselect a graphic object on a graphic display",
    "url": "229962.htm",
    "text": "You may need deselect a graphic object on a graphic display.  To deselect a graphic object on a graphic display  Press Ctrl and then click the object or click outside the object on the graphic display.  Tip:  To deselect all selected objects, click in the drawing area away from any objects on the graphic display.  See also  Object Explorer  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Select a graphic object within a group  Select a graphic object that is behind another object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2337,
    "title": "Show or hide a graphic object on a graphic display",
    "url": "230681.htm",
    "text": "You can use the check box in front of a graphic object in the Object Explorer to show or hide the object on the graphic display.  To show or hide a graphic object on a graphic display  In the Object Explorer, select the check box in front of the object you want to show, or clear the check box in front of the object you want to hide.  Tip:  By default, all check boxes in the Object Explorer are selected and all objects are shown on the graphic display.  If you select or clear the check box in front of a group in the Object Explorer, all objects in the group are shown or hidden on the graphic display. If you select or clear the check box in front of the root node, Display in the Object Explorer, all the objects on the graphic display are shown or hidden.  At runtime, the visibility state of a graphic object depends on the expression. The Object Explorer visibility state of a graphic object has no effect on the default visibility state of the object at runtime.  See also  Object Explorer  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Deselect a graphic object on a graphic display  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2338,
    "title": "Drag a graphic object with a mouse",
    "url": "67275.htm",
    "text": "You may need drag a graphic object.  To drag a graphic object with mouse  Select the object.  Place the pointer on the object, not on its edge or handle.  Press the left mouse button and drag the object to its new location.  See also  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Arrange graphic objects  Move a graphic object in small increments  Use the Property Panel  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2339,
    "title": "Move a graphic object in small increments",
    "url": "230134.htm",
    "text": "You can use the Shift key and arrow keys to move a graphic object in small increments.  To move a graphic object in small increments  Select the object.  Place the pointer on the object, not on its edge or handle.  Press the Shift key and an arrow key.  Release the Shift key when the object is in place.  Tip:  You can move several objects at once by selecting them all and dragging one of the selected objects. When you are moving the selected objects, they are shown in outline form.  You can also use cut and paste to move a graphic object on a graphic display or edit the object&#8217;s Top and Left properties in the Property Panel.  See also  Drag a graphic object with a mouse  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Group graphic objects  Edit fine details with the keyboard  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2340,
    "title": "Resize a graphic object using a mouse",
    "url": "67291.htm",
    "text": "You can use a mouse to resize all graphic objects.  To resize a graphic object using a mouse  Select the object. Handles appear around it.  Place the pointer on one of the handles. A double arrow appears.  Drag the handle until the object is the desired size.  Tip:  Drag a side handle to change width or height or a corner handle to change both.  For perfect circles and squares press Ctrl as you drag a corner handle with the mouse.  To maintain the aspect ratio (width/height), press Shift as you drag a corner handle with the mouse.  See also  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Resize a graphic object in small increments  Use the Property Panel  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2341,
    "title": "Resize a graphic object in small increments",
    "url": "230144.htm",
    "text": "Use the Shift key with the arrow keys to resize objects in small increments.  To resize a graphic object in small increments  Select the object. Handles appear around it.  Place the pointer on one of the handles. A double arrow appears.  Press the Shift key and an arrow key until the object is the desired size.  Tip:  You can also resize a graphic object by editing its Height and Width properties in the Property Panel.  You can resize multiple objects to the same size by selecting them and editing their Height and Width properties in the Shared Properties panel.  See also  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Resize a graphic object using a mouse  Use the Property Panel  Edit fine details with the keyboard  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2342,
    "title": "Group graphic objects",
    "url": "67279.htm",
    "text": "Use the Group option on the Arrange menu to combine selected graphic objects into a group.  To group graphic objects  Select the objects to be grouped.  From the Arrange menu, select Group.  Tip:  To edit a group, you can double click the group and select individual objects to edit within that group, or use the Object Explorer. You do not have to ungroup to edit the constituent objects in a group.  The handles around each object are replaced by a single set of handles around the group. You can use these handles to resize the group, just as you resize a single object.  See also  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Object Explorer  Ungroup graphic objects  Edit grouped objects  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2343,
    "title": "Ungroup graphic objects",
    "url": "67281.htm",
    "text": "Use the Ungroup option on the Arrange menu to ungroup a set of grouped objects.  Ungrouping deletes any animation attached to the group because the group no longer exists. Animation attached to the individual objects remains active.  To ungroup a group of objects  Select the group you want to ungroup.  From the Arrange menu, select Ungroup.  The handles around the group are replaced with handles around each object.  See also  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Arrange graphic objects  Group graphic objects  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2344,
    "title": "Bring a graphic object to the front",
    "url": "67283.htm",
    "text": "Graphic objects can be stacked on top of each other in a graphic display. Use the Bring to Front option on the Arrange menu to move the selected object to the top of the stack.  To bring a graphic object to the front  Select the object.  From the Arrange menu, select Bring to Front.  You can select several objects or groups of objects with a selection border and move them simultaneously as a single object.  See also  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Send a graphic object to the back  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2345,
    "title": "Send a graphic object to the back",
    "url": "67285.htm",
    "text": "Graphic objects can be stacked on top of each other in a graphic display. Use the Send to Back option on the Arrange menu to move the selected object to the bottom of the stack.  To send a graphic object to the back  Select the object.  From the Arrange menu, select Send to Back.  You can select several objects or groups of objects with a selection border and move them simultaneously as a single object.  See also  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Bring a graphic object to the front  Space graphic objects  Align graphic objects  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2346,
    "title": "Align graphic objects",
    "url": "67289.htm",
    "text": "Use the Align options on the Arrange menu to position selected objects so that they line up with each other and the grid. Final positioning depends on the commands used.  To align graphic objects  Select the objects you want to align.  From the Arrange menu, select the align option you want to apply to the selected objects.  Tip:  You can also align objects using the Alignment toolbar. To open the Alignment toolbar, from the View menu, select Toolbars > Alignment Toolbar.  See also  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Options for aligning objects  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2347,
    "title": "Options for aligning objects",
    "url": "213106.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options for aligning objects on the Arrange menu.  This option  Aligns objects to  Align Left  left-most selected object  Align Center  horizontal center of all selected objects  Align Right  right-most selected object  Align Top  top-most selected object  Align Middle  vertical center of all selected objects  Align Bottom  bottom-most selected object  Align Center Points  center of all selected objects  Align To Grid  grid  See also  Align graphic objects  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2348,
    "title": "Space graphic objects",
    "url": "67287.htm",
    "text": "Use the Space Vertical and Space Horizontal options on the Arrange menu to move the selected objects so there is an equal amount of space between them. You must select at least three objects to use either of these commands.  To space graphic objects equidistant from each other  Select at least three objects.  From the Arrange menu, select the spacing option you want to apply.  Tip:  To arrange objects in a column, arrange them roughly, select them, and use Align Center and then Space Vertical to arrange them exactly.  For a horizontal line, use Align Middle and then Space Horizontal.  See also  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Align graphic objects  Options for spacing objects  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2349,
    "title": "Options for spacing objects",
    "url": "230152.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options for spacing objects on the Arrange menu.  This option  Shifts objects  Space Vertical  So the center points of each object are the same vertical distance from one another.  The top and bottom objects do not move, but the other objects move up or down so there is equal space between the centers of each object.  Space Horizontal  So the center points of each object are the same horizontal distance from one another.  The left most and right most objects do not move, but the other objects move left or right so there is equal space between the centers of each object.  See also  Space graphic objects  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2350,
    "title": "Flip a drawing object",
    "url": "67330.htm",
    "text": "Use the Flip Vertical or Flip Horizontal options on the Arrange menu to move a drawing object so its new position is the reverse of its original position. You can flip all simple drawing objects (except text, panels, and images) and groups.  To flip a drawing object  Select the object you want to reposition.  From the Arrange menu, select the Flip Vertical or Flip Horizontal option.  See also  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Options for flipping a drawing object  Drawing objects  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2351,
    "title": "Options for flipping a drawing object",
    "url": "230155.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options for flipping a drawing object.  Options  Description  Flip Vertical  Flip Vertical turns a graphic object upside down.  Flip Horizontal  Flip Horizontal switches the object from left to right.  See also  Flip a drawing object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2352,
    "title": "Rotate a drawing object",
    "url": "67293.htm",
    "text": "You can rotate all of the drawing objects except rounded rectangles, images, and panels.  To rotate a drawing object around an anchor point  From the Objects menu, select Rotate. The cursor arrow will have the rotate tool icon attached to it.  Click the object you want to rotate. A small cross hair circle appears in the middle of the object. This acts as an anchor that you can rotate the object around.  To move the rotation anchor, position the cursor arrow over it. The cursor is replaced by a cross hair that you can drag to a new anchor position. This can be in or outside the object.  Place the pointer on an edge of the object and drag the mouse in the direction you want to rotate the object.  Release the mouse button when the object is in the desired position.  See also  Arrange graphic objects  Edit graphic displays  Object Smart Path  Drawing objects  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2353,
    "title": "Convert graphic objects to wallpaper",
    "url": "67817.htm",
    "text": "You may need to convert a graphic object or a group of objects to wallpaper.  To convert a graphic object or group to wallpaper  Select the object or group you want to convert to wallpaper.  Do one of the following:  Select Edit > Wallpaper > Convert to Wallpaper.  Right-click the selected object or group and select Convert to Wallpaper.  Tip:  To unlock the wallpaper objects, right-click any empty area of the display and select Unlock All Wallpaper. Alternatively, select Edit > Wallpaper > Unlock All Wallpaper.  See also  Select a graphic object on a graphic display  Group graphic objects  Edit grouped objects  Static objects  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2354,
    "title": "Wallpaper object",
    "url": "230161.htm",
    "text": "Convert a graphic object or group of objects to wallpaper to:  Lock the selected object or group into position on the graphic display  Make the object or group an unchanging background for the other objects on the graphic display  Make the object(s) become static object(s)  Speed up animated graphic displays because the wallpaper does not have to be redrawn each time when one of the overlapping objects changes.  Tip:  You cannot select or edit a wallpaper object during development, and the wallpaper object does not accept operator input at runtime. To select or edit the object, unlock the wallpaper by selecting Edit > Wallpaper > Unlock All Wallpaper.  The wallpaper objects cannot be animated.  See also  Convert graphic objects to wallpaper  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2355,
    "title": "static objects",
    "url": "67819.htm",
    "text": "A static object does not initiate actions or change to reflect current processes or tag values. It is used for illustrative purposes. However, you can attach animation to static objects if you want the object to act as an indicator of a changing tag value.  The drawing objects and the scale object are static objects. Objects that are converted to wallpaper are also static, and you cannot attach animation to them.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2356,
    "title": "ActiveX control",
    "url": "67246.htm",
    "text": "An ActiveX control is an off-the-shelf software component created by a third-party vendor. An ActiveX control provides functions which can be accessed by FactoryTalk View ME Station through the object's properties. ActiveX objects use tags or expressions to exchange information with the data source. The properties and connections available for a particular ActiveX object depend on the third-party vendor&#8217;s implementation.  Important:  The run-time behavior of an ActiveX control depends on the vendor's implementation. Test the object thoroughly before you run an application to ensure the object behaves as expected.  The information passed between FactoryTalk View ME Station and an ActiveX control must be in one of the formats used by a tag:  Analog number  Digital number  String  ActiveX controls must be available for the supported operating systems and for the PanelView Plus family platforms. To use an ActiveX control at run time, you must have the version of the object that is compatible with the operating system of the runtime computer.  ActiveX objects support visibility animation only.  See also  Add an ActiveX control to a graphic display  data source  Set up object properties (Properties tab)  Assign connections to an object  ",
    "keywords": {
      "ActiveX control": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2357,
    "title": "Add an ActiveX control to a graphic display",
    "url": "67821.htm",
    "text": "You may need to add an ActiveX control to a graphic display.  To add an ActiveX control to a graphic display  In FactoryTalk View Studio, select Objects > ActiveX Control or click @ on the toolbar.  On the graphic display, drag the ActiveX tool to draw a rectangle the size you want the object to be.  In the Insert an ActiveX Control dialog box, select the object you want to add and click OK.  The object is placed on the display. Depending on how the third party implemented the object, it might be a different size than the rectangle you drew.  To specify the object&#8217;s properties and assign tags or expressions to its connections, do one of the following:  Right-click the object, and then select Properties to open the object&#8217;s Properties dialog box.  Depending on how the third party implemented the object, it might not have a Properties dialog box. If the Properties menu item is not available, use the next method.  Right-click the object and select Property Panel.  In the Properties dialog box or Properties tab of the Property Panel, specify the object&#8217;s properties.  (Optional) Set up the properties on the Common tab.  On the Connections tab, assign tags or expressions to the object&#8217;s connections.  Click OK to close the Properties dialog box, or click Close to close the Property Panel.  Tip:  If an ActiveX control you have installed does not appear in the Insert an ActiveX Control dialog box, the object might not be registered. Register the control using the Insert an ActiveX Control dialog box before you can add it to a graphic display.  To define the properties for an ActiveX control, you can double-click the object to open its Properties dialog box or right-click the object and select Property Panel to make the changes.  You can attach visibility animation to an ActiveX control by assigning a tag or expression to the object in the Animation dialog box.  Configure your video adapter to show more than 256 colors to make sure that the colors of the ActiveX controls appear the same as in the original.  See also  ActiveX control  Insert an ActiveX Control dialog box   Options in the Insert an ActiveX Control dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2358,
    "title": "Insert an ActiveX Control dialog box",
    "url": "243178.htm",
    "text": "What ActiveX controls appear in the Insert an ActiveX Control dialog box depends on the software installed on your system. Any ActiveX controls that are registered in your system will appear as available.  Use the Insert an ActiveX Control dialog box to:  Add an ActiveX control to a graphic display  Register an ActiveX control  Remove an ActiveX control  See also  ActiveX control  Add an ActiveX control to a graphic display  Options in the Insert an ActiveX Control dialog box   "
  },
  {
    "id": 2359,
    "title": "Options in the Insert an ActiveX Control dialog box",
    "url": "243163.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options in the Insert an ActiveX Control dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Register  Click the Register button to register an ActiveX control to the system registry and show the control in the Insert an ActiveX Control dialog box.  Unregister  Click the Unregister button to remove the selected ActiveX control from the system registry and the Insert an ActiveX Control dialog box.  See also  Add an ActiveX control to a graphic display  Insert an ActiveX Control dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2360,
    "title": "CaseStatement ActiveX control",
    "url": "82358.htm",
    "text": "The CaseStatement ActiveX control allows an application to write different values to a destination tag based on the value of a source tag. The CaseStatement ActiveX control addresses a need for string association in a FactoryTalk View Machine Edition application.  See also  Connections for the CaseStatement ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2361,
    "title": "Connections for the CaseStatement ActiveX control",
    "url": "82359.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the connections to control the operation of the CaseStatement ActiveX control at run time.  Connections  Descriptions  Trigger  Required  When the assigned tag transitions from a zero to a non-zero value, the control evaluates the value of ; SOURCE against the configured Casexx_Test values using the specified Casexx_Operator.  If the evaluation result is true, the control writes the Casexx_Result value to the Destination tag.  If none of the evaluation results are true, the Default_Result value is written to the Destination tag.  The Trigger connection must be reset before each evaluation attempt.  The connection data type is Integer. The connection can be a direct tag, memory tag, or expression.  Source  Required  This connection contains the value to evaluate against all test cases.  The connection data type is Integer. The connection can be a direct tag, memory tag, or expression.  Destination  Required  This connection contains the target tag where values are written to.  The connection data type is String. The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  Execution_Complete  Optional  This connection supports communication to the control program.  The connection data type is Integer. The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  Handshake  Optional  This connection allows the control program to reset the Trigger.  The connection data type is Integer. The connection can be a direct tag, memory tag, or expression.  Default_Result  Optional  This connection provides the default value that is written to Destination, when no evaluation result is true.  The connection data type is String. The connection can be a direct tag, memory tag, or expression.  Result_Code  Optional  This connection allows the control program to evaluate the results of each control execution.  The connection data type is Integer. The connection can be a direct tag or memory tag.  Case01_Test - Case50_Test  Optional  Casexx_Test contains the number xx value to be evaluated against Source.  The connection data type is Integer. The connection can be a direct tag, memory tag, or expression.  Case01_Operator - Case50_Operator  Optional  Casexx_Operator offers the operator to be used when Casexx_Test is evaluated against Source.  The connection data type is String. The connection can be a direct tag, memory tag, explicit text entry, or expression.  The value can only be one of the following: LES, LEQ, EQU, GEQ, GRT or NEQ. Those values stand for:  LES = Less Than  LEQ = Less Than or Equal to  EQU = Equal to  GEQ = Greater than or Equal to  GRT = Greater than  NEQ = Not Equal to  Case01_Result - Case50_Result  Optional  Casexx_Result offers the value to be written to Destination when the result of evaluating Case01_Test against Source is true.  The connection data type is String. The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  See also  CaseStatement ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2362,
    "title": "Chart ActiveX control",
    "url": "259378.htm",
    "text": "The Chart ActiveX control utilizes user-defined data type (UDT) capability in Logix controllers to create a data structure. The control uses two UDTs, Chart, and DataSeries, to contain the data and datasets used to render the chart at run time.  Important:  Do not change the UDT member names. It is recommended to use the default naming convention to simplify troubleshooting. Failure to use the exact UDT member names will prevent the Chart ActiveX control from drawing data at run time.  A Chart ActiveX control may slow the display load time at run time due to the UDT.  The Chart ActiveX control supports up to eight data series plotted against one fixed data series. You can use the control in multiple applications. For example, you can use the control to plot a current process variable and a variable from another process against a known value.  The Chart ActiveX control has the same functionality on a Windows desktop, and a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7 or PanelView Plus 6 terminal.  When using the Chart ActiveX control on a PanelView Plus 7 or PanelView Plus 6 terminal:  Only the pens with solid and dashed line styles are supported. Any other style will show as a dashed line.  Diagonal up and diagonal down shading directions of the gradient style are not supported.  See also  Options on the Pens tab of the ME Chart Control Properties dialog box  Chart UDT members  DataSeries UDT members  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2363,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the ME Chart Control Properties dialog box",
    "url": "261164.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the ME Chart Control Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Chart title  Specify how the chart title shows at run time.  Display Chart title  Select this check box to show the chart title at run time. Click the Font button to specify the font.  Title value options  Specify the chart title.  Fixed value - Select this option to enter the chart title in the text box.  Controlled by tag - Select this option to show the tag Title of the UDT Chart as the chart title.  Redraw mode  Specify how often the chart updates with new data.  Controlled by tag  Select this option to update the chart as the Redraw connection tag value changes.  Automatic  Select this option and enter the redraw rate to update the chart at regular time intervals.  The redraw rate controls how often to refresh the chart in millisecond, second, minute, or hour. The redraw rate is from 50 milliseconds through 596 hours.  Maximum tag update rate  Specify the maximum rate at which the tags of the chart are updated.  The default maximum rate is one second.  Chart display options  Specify how the chart shows at run time.  Background color  Specify the background color for the chart. Click the color square and select a color from the palette.  Use Gradient Style  Select this check box to show a gradient background.  Data point connection  Select an option to specify how data points on the chart are connected.  Connect points - Data points are connected with a line. To view connected points and markers on the chart, configure the marker symbol for each pen on the Pens tab.  Show only markers - A marker is shown for each data point. Lines do not connect the data points and the chart shows only the pens with assigned markers. Any pen without an assigned marker does not show on the chart.  Chart radix  Select an option to specify the number base (including decimal, hexadecimal, or octal) that is used to show numeric values on the chart.  Chart orientation  Select the fixed axis to define the orientation of the chart.  Fix X-axis (Horizontal Chart) - The chart uses the data points of tag DataSeries.FixedAxis for x-axis, and uses the data points of tag DataSeries_x for y-axis.  Fix Y-axis (VerticalChart) - The chart uses the data points of tag DataSeries_x for x-axis, and uses the data points of tag DataSeries.FixedAxis for y-axis.  See also  Chart ActiveX control  Options on the Pens tab of the ME Chart Control Properties dialog box  Options on the X-Axis and the Y-Axis tabs of the ME Chart Control Properties dialog box  Chart UDT members  Options in the Gradient Fill dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2364,
    "title": "Options in the Gradient Fill dialog box",
    "url": "83848.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options in the Gradient Fill dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Colors  Move the slider to change the percentage of the start and end color.  Start color  Click the Start color box to choose the start color for the gradient fill.  End color  Click the End color box to choose the end color for the gradient fill.  Horizontal  Click Horizontal to make the color gradient in a horizontal direction.  Vertical  Click Vertical to make the color gradient in a vertical direction.  Diagonal Up  Click Diagonal Up to make the color gradient in a diagonal up direction.  Diagonal Down  Click Diagonal Down to make the color gradient in a diagonal down direction.  Styles  A linear gradient color is specified by two points, and a color (or different intensity of one color) at each point. Depending on the points' positions, there are four styles you can select.  Important:  The PanelView Plus 7 and PanelView Plus 6 terminals cannot process a Gradient Fill that uses a Diagonal Up or Diagonal Down direction, nor can the terminal apply a Gradient Fill to a rotated object. When running an MER on a PanelView Plus 7 or PanelView Plus 6 terminal and the system encounters an object with these attributes, the system shall use the gradient fill starting color as the object's solid color background.  When running the MER on a computer, the system can process all gradient fills and this warning does not apply.  See also  Chart ActiveX control  Options on the General tab of the ME Chart Control Properties dialog box  Options on the Pens tab of the ME Chart Control Properties dialog box  Options on the X-Axis and the Y-Axis tabs of the ME Chart Control Properties dialog box  Connections for the Chart ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2365,
    "title": "Options on the Pens tab of the ME Chart Control Properties dialog box",
    "url": "261165.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Pens tab of the ME Chart Control Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Display Legend  Select this check box to show the legend on the right of the chart. The legend percentage supports five percent increment from 10 percent through 50 percent.  The legend shows each visible trend line with its label. The label is read from tags DataSeries_x.Label.  Pen Attributes  Use the spreadsheet to configure the appearance of each pen on the chart at run time, including line color, width, style, and marker.  Color  Specify the color of the chart line. Click the color square and select a color from the palette.  Width  Specify the width of the chart line. The larger the size, the thicker the width.  Style  Specify the style of the chart line such as solid, dashed, dotted, and other styles.  Marker  Specify the plot symbol for each data point.  If you select Show only markers for Data point connection on the General tab of the ME Chart Control Properties dialog box, only the pens with assigned markers will show on the chart.  Multiple Pen Edits  Use the spreadsheet to apply attributes to one or more pens.  Clear Selections  Click this button to clear the attributes.  Apply to Selected Pens  Click this button to apply the attributes to the selected pen or pens.  See also  Chart ActiveX control  Options on the General tab of the ME Chart Control Properties dialog box  DataSeries UDT members  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2366,
    "title": "Options on the X-Axis and the Y-Axis tabs of the ME Chart Control Properties dialog box",
    "url": "261166.htm",
    "text": "The X-Axis and the Y-Axis tabs of the ME Chart Control Properties dialog box show the same options as follows.  Options  Descriptions  Min / Max value options  Specify the minimum and maximum values.  Automatic (Best fit based on data)  If select this option, the lowest data reading serves as the minimum value and the highest data reading serves as the maximum value.  As the chart acquires new data, the x-axis or y-axis may re-scale automatically to fit.  Custom  Select this option to specify the minimum and maximum values that serve as the x-axis or y-axis scale.  Specify a fixed value or control the value by a tag such as X_Axis_Min or X_Axis_Max.  Display options  Specify how the x-axis or y-axis shows at run time.  Display axis label  Select this check box to show the horizontal or vertical axis label on the chart.  Specify a fixed value or control the value by a tag such as X_Axis_Label or Y_Axis_Label.  Display scale  Select this check box to show scales besides the x-axis or y-axis.  Enter a value from 0 through 8 to configure the number of decimal places included on the axis. If the value is set to a non-zero value, numbers cannot be accurately converted to octal or hexadecimal. To provide accurate data, the chart shows the numbers as decimals, even if Octal or Hexadecimal is selected for Chart radix on the General tab of the ME Chart Control Properties dialog box.  Display gridlines  Select this check box to show the horizontal or vertical grid lines on the chart.  For Major Gridlines, enter a value from 0 through 30.  For Minor Gridlines, enter a value from 0 through 10.  Click the color square to configure the color of the grid lines.  See also  Chart ActiveX control  Options on the General tab of the ME Chart Control Properties dialog box  Chart UDT members  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2367,
    "title": "Connections for the Chart ActiveX control",
    "url": "261169.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the connections for the Chart ActiveX control.  Connections  Descriptions  Redraw  Required  This connection draws the chart object on each transition from zero to non-zero.  The connection is read-only.  The connection data type is Analog or Boolean.  Clear  Optional  This connection clears the chart area on each transition from zero to non-zero.  The connection is read-only.  The connection data type is Analog or Boolean.  Data_Source  Required  This connection contains the root tag of the chart UDT instance. The UDT must match the definition in the section About User-defined Data Type, otherwise, errors return.  The connection is read-only.  Tag placeholders are not supported.  ErrorCode  Optional  This connection allows the application to manage errors that occur with the chart control configuration.  The connection is write-only.  The connection data type is Integer.  ErrorMessage  Optional  This connection shows the text messages associated with ErrorCode.  The connection is write-only.  The connection data type is String.  See also  Chart ActiveX control  Error codes and error messages  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2368,
    "title": "Error codes and error messages",
    "url": "261301.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the error codes and error messages of the Chart ActiveX control at run time.  Error codes  Error messages  0  No error.  1000  Error. Visible element of all DataSeries is set to false (zero).  1001  Error. DataSeries_FixedAxis Visible element is set to false (zero).  1002  Error. Visible element in DataSeries_1 through DataSeries_8 is set to false (zero).  1003  Error. NumberofDataPoints element is greater than 500.  1010  Error. X-axis minimum value is greater than maximum value.  1011  Error. Y-axis minimum value is greater than maximum value.  1100  Warning. All data points in DataSeries_<first data series number with error> are greater than the X-axis maximum value.  1101  Warning. All data points in DataSeries_<first data series number with error> are less than the X-axis minimum value.  1102  Warning. All data points in DataSeries_<first data series number with error> are greater than the Y-axis maximum value.  1103  Warning. All data points in DataSeries_<first data series number with error> are less than the Y-axis minimum value.  See also  Chart ActiveX control  Connections for the Chart ActiveX control  Chart UDT members  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2369,
    "title": "Chart UDT members",
    "url": "259996.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the Chart UDT members.  Members  Descriptions  Title  This is the caption shown on top of the chart.  NumberOfDataPoints  The is the number of data points in each DataSeries[] array.  X_Axis_Label  This is the caption shown below the x-axis.  X_Axis_Min  This specifies the minimum value of the x-axis.  X_Axis_Max  This specifies the maximum value of the x-axis.  Y_Axis_Label  This is the caption shown beside the y-axis.  Y_Axis_Min  This specifies the minimum value of the y-axis.  Y_Axis_Max  This specifies the maximum value of the y-axis.  DataSeries_FixedAxis  This is an instance of the UDT DataSeries. This contains the data points of the fixed axis.  You can configure the axis in the Chart orientation area on the General tab of the ME Chart Control Properties dialog box.  DataSeries_x  This is an instance of the UDT DataSeries. This contains the data points for one data series of x-axis or y-axis, depending on the chart orientation.  x is a number from 1 through 8, such as DataSeries_1, DataSeries_2, and DataSeries_8.  See also  Chart ActiveX control  Options on the General tab of the ME Chart Control Properties dialog box  DataSeries UDT members  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2370,
    "title": "DataSeries UDT members",
    "url": "259997.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the DataSeries UDT members.  Members  Descriptions  Label  This is the name of the data series shown in the legend.  The data type is String.  Visible  This determines whether to show data points. The data points are shown when the value is non-zero.  The data type is Boolean.  Data[]  The array contains the data points for each chart line. The maximum number of data points for each DataSeries.Data[] array is 500. If the number exceeds 500, the Chart ActiveX control only reads the first 500 data points.  The number of array elements allocated must be equal to or greater than the NumberOfDataPoints value.  The data type is Array of Float.  See also  Chart ActiveX control  Chart UDT members  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2371,
    "title": "Custom String Popup Keyboard ActiveX control",
    "url": "60970.htm",
    "text": "The Custom String Popup Keyboard ActiveX control provides the system with the ability to present the operator with a keyboard that is customized to the specific application running on a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal.  Use the Custom String Popup Keyboard ActiveX control to:  Configure keyboards for different languages, for example, Chinese, Korean, Japanese, French, and others  Specify multiple key sets to configure the operation of the custom popup keyboard  Use the user entry, created with the popup keyboard, in the HMI application  Specify the length of the string returned from the popup keyboard  Control when the popup keyboard is available to the operator  See also  Properties on the General tab of the ME Custom String Popup Keyboard Properties dialog box  Popup keyboard definition file  Connections for the Custom String Popup Keyboard ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2372,
    "title": "Properties on the General tab of the ME Custom String Popup Keyboard Properties dialog box",
    "url": "60972_1.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the properties on the General tab of the ME Custom String Popup Keyboard Properties dialog box. These properties cannot be modified at run time.  Properties  Descriptions  Caption  Optional  This property contains fixed text that is shown on the button object on the display containing the control.  File Location  Required  The property contains the full path (for example, \"C:\\myProject\\\" or \"\\Storage Card\\\") to the definition file (for example, \"ME.TXT\") that configures the popup keyboard.  Number of input characters  Required  The property contains the maximum number of characters that will be returned from the popup keyboard. The maximum number of characters is 82.  See also  Custom String Popup Keyboard ActiveX control  Popup keyboard definition file  Connections for the Custom String Popup Keyboard ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2373,
    "title": "Popup keyboard definition file",
    "url": "257989.htm",
    "text": "A popup keyboard definition file is used to configure the popup keyboard keys.  A definition file has the following characteristics:  The file must be saved as Unicode text.  The definition file is tab-delimited.  The file can be stored on the internal or external storage card when using a PanelView Plus terminal. The use of a network drive is not recommended.  There is no limit to the number of key sets the file defines.  The first line of the definition file specifies the key set name. For example, \"Default\" &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;\"Set1\" &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;\"Set2\" &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;\"Set3\".  Redefinition of the keys \"Home\", \"End\", \"Page Left\", \"Page Right\", \"Spacebar\", \"ESC\". \"CLR\", \"<<\", \">>\", \"<--\", and \"<--|\" will be ignored.  See also  Custom String Popup Keyboard ActiveX control  Properties on the General tab of the ME Custom String Popup Keyboard Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2374,
    "title": "Connections for the Custom String Popup Keyboard ActiveX control",
    "url": "78617.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the connections to control the operation of the Custom String Popup Keyboard ActiveX control at run time.  Connections  Descriptions  Value  Required  The configured tag contains the user-entered string returned by the control.  The connection is write-only and can be a memory or direct reference tag.  The connection data type is String.  Launch Enable  Required  When the configured tag transitions from zero (0) to non-zero, the keyboard will be shown to the user.  The connection is read-only and can be a memory or direct reference tag.  The connection data type is Analog.  See also  Custom String Popup Keyboard ActiveX Control  Properties on the General tab of the ME Custom String Popup Keyboard Properties dialog box  Popup keyboard definition file  Keys with predetermined functions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2375,
    "title": "Keys with predetermined functions",
    "url": "258196.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the keys with predetermined functions.  Keys  Descriptions  Page Right  Press this key to switch to the next defined key set. If no next key set is defined, pressing Page Right has no effect.  Page Left  Press this key to switch to the previous defined key set. If no previous key set is defined, pressing Page Left has no effect.  Home   Press this key to load the first defined key set.  See also  Custom String Popup Keyboard ActiveX control  Properties on the General tab of the ME Custom String Popup Keyboard Properties dialog box  Popup keyboard definition file  Connections for the Custom String Popup Keyboard ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2376,
    "title": "CSVDataLog ActiveX control",
    "url": "243060.htm",
    "text": "The CSVDataLog ActiveX control is similar to the DataStorePlus ActiveX control and contains the following enhancements:  Supports a minimum periodic logging rate of 250ms  Generates the CSV data log files which contain tamper detection strings  See also  Start a new log file after an elapsed time period  Configure how the data being collected is stored in a log file  Options on the General tab of the ME CSVDataLog Properties dialog box  DataStorePlus ActiveX control  CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2377,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the ME CSVDataLog Properties dialog box",
    "url": "256734.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the ME CSVDataLog Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Never  If this option is selected, the control will create a file named as your configuration. The control will use the file for all logging.  Periodic  If this option is selected, the control will create a file using the naming convention YYYY_MM_DD_HH_MM_NNNN_<filename>.csv, for example, 2015_12_15_02_02_0001_File.csv.  YYYY is the year, based on the System year in the systems local time zone.  MM is the month, based on the System Month in the systems local time zone.  DD is the day, based on the System Day in the systems local time zone.  HR is the hour in 24-hour clock format, based on the systems local time zone.  MM is the minute, based on the System Minute in the systems local time zone.  NNNN is the sequential file identifier. This number indicates the sequence files were created in. The application may use up to 9999 file sets per day. At midnight, the sequence starts at 0000 again.  If the Periodic option is selected, the following options are available:  Hourly - New files are started on the hour.  Daily - New files are started each day at 00:00 (after midnight).  Weekly - New files are started each Sunday at 00:00 (after midnight Saturday).  Monthly - New files are started the first day of each month at 00:00.  At Specified Times  If this option is selected, the control will create a file using the naming convention YYYY_MM_DD_HH_MM_NNNN_<filename>.csv.  In the Start Times text box, enter a time or times.  Day - New files are started each day at 00:00 (after midnight).  Date - New files are started on the specified calendar date. Valid settings are 1 - 28. Files cannot be configured to start on the 29th, 30th, or 31st of a month.  Hour - New files are started on the hour. Valid settings are 00:00 - 23:00  Minute - New files are started on the minute. Valid settings are 00 - :59  You can combine a time with a date or selected day of the week in the Start Times box. Enter times and dates in the format shown. Do not use time and date formats specific to the system's Regional Settings.  Filename Delimiter Selection  This is a file format option allowing you to customize the filename.  None - Filename sample = YYYYMMDDHHMMNNNN<filename>.csv  Underscore(_) - (This is the default) Filename sample = &nbsp;YYYY_MM_DD_HH_MM_NNNN_<filename>.csv  Period(.)  Filename sample = YYYY.MM.DD.HH.MM.NNNN.<filename>.csv  Hyphen(-) - Filename sample = YYYY-MM-DD-HH-MM-NNNN-<filename>.csv  Delete Oldest Files  After Maximum Time - Select this checkbox, type a number, and choose a time period based on that number. When that number of days, weeks, or months has elapsed, the older log file sets are automatically deleted.  After Maximum Files - Select this checkbox and type a number of the maximum files to be available. The files currently being logged to are not included in this number.  See also  CSVDataLog ActiveX control  Options on the Advanced tab of the ME CSVDataLog Properties dialog box  Connections for the CSVDataLog ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2378,
    "title": "Options on the Advanced tab of the ME CSVDataLog Properties dialog box",
    "url": "256735.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Advanced tab of the ME CSVDataLog Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  File Header  In the File Header area, there are the following options:  Default - The control provides the column heading names. The default names are: \"Alg1\", \"Alg2\", ...,\"Alg100\", \"Str1\", \"Str2\", ...,\"Str50\"  Template - The application designer reads a CSV file that contains in its first row the desired column heading names for the log file. These entries in the external file are used as the column heading names.  Use Tag Names - The column headings for the float and string data match the tag names being logged.  Log Periodically  Once the control is enabled, it logs periodically based on the time interval entered in this box.  The time interval should be 1-9999s or 250-32767ms.  Log System Time and Date of each record  Select this option to automatically record a System Time and Date stamp with each log entry. When logging System Time and Date, there is an option to also log a System Timezone Indicator. The indicator will contain the offset from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) and the system's local timezone.  Indicate Timezone  When logging System time, this option adds a timezone indicator to the record. The system's Regional Setting determines the timezone offset.  Log UTC Time and Date of each record  Select this option to automatically log a UTC Time and Date stamp with each record.  Overwrite oldest data when file reaches  This option begins to overwrite the oldest data in the log file when the file reaches a specified size creating a circular log file.  Log assigned connections only  This option optimizes the size of the log file by only logging configured connections.  If this option is not selected, each record will always contain entries for 100 float and 50 string values.  Enable tamper detection  If this check box is selected, the log file generated by the CSVDataLog ActiveX control contains tamper detection strings. You can use the CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility to detect the integrity of the log file.  If this check box is clear, the log file generated by the CSVDataLog ActiveX control is in the same format with the log file generated by the DataStorePlus ActiveX control.  CSV File Logging Order  This option allows the designer to configure the order, in which data is written to the log file.  See also  CSVDataLog ActiveX control  Options on the General tab of the ME CSVDataLog Properties dialog box  Connections for the CSVDataLog ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2379,
    "title": "Connections for the CSVDataLog ActiveX control",
    "url": "253357.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the connections to control the operation of the CSVDataLog ActiveX control at run time.  Connections  Descriptions  FileLocation  Required  This is the complete path and filename of the CSV file the control will use, for example, \"C:\\DataStorePlus\\File.csv\".  This connection can be an explicit string or a string tag.  If set Start New Files with Never, the control will create a new file named as your configuration. The control will use the file for all logging.  If set Start New Files with Periodic or At specified Times, the control will create new file using the naming convention YYYY_MM_DD_HH_MM_NNNN_<filename>.csv.  For example, if FileLocation is set to \"c:\\DataStorePlus\\File.csv\", the control will create a file named as \"c:\\DataStorePlus\\2015_12_15_02_02_0001_File.csv\".  Trigger  Required  The control uses an event to enable record writing.  This connection must be a tag. When the assigned tag transitions from a zero to non-zero value, the control will append data to a CSV file until the tag value changes to zero.  A new CSV file will be created if:   A CSV file does not exist.  The control configured for Time exceed last time period data collection.  Float01 - Float100  Optional  These connections are the analog tags that make up the data in each row of the CSV file. Assign analog tags to these connections.  It is recommended that the connections are specified as a contiguous list, for example, use connections 1-25 as opposed to connections 10-25 & 40-50.  When using the control to read data from a CSV file, these connections should be configured to use memory tags. The application should use a macro to copy the memory tags to controller tags.  String01 - String50  Optional  These connections are the string tags that make up the data in each row of the CSV file. Each string can be up to 82 characters long. Assign string tags to these connections  It is recommended that the connections are specified as a contiguous list, for example, use connections 1-25 as opposed to connections 10-25 & 40-50.  When using the control to read data from a CSV file, these connections should be configured to use memory tags. The application should use a macro to copy the memory tags to controller tags.  Handshake  Optional  This connection is used for coordinating the control's operations with the automation control system. Assign a Boolean controller tag to the connection.  If this connection is set, when the Trigger value is set from a zero to non-zero value, the control object logs one line data. Then the Trigger and Handshake values are set to False, waiting for user's next trigger.  See also  CSVDataLog ActiveX control  Options on the General tab of the ME CSVDataLog Properties dialog box  Options on the Advanced tab of the ME CSVDataLog Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2380,
    "title": "DataStorePlus ActiveX control",
    "url": "60951.htm",
    "text": "The DataStorePlus ActiveX control is similar to the RSView32 and SE data log model and contains the following advanced features:  Specify when new files are created and old files are deleted  Customize the headers of the CSV or TXT files  Log periodically based on the time interval specified  Each record is automatically date and time stamped with UTC or System Date and Time information  Overwrite oldest data when the file reaches the size specified  Log assigned connections only  See also  Start a new log file after an elapsed time period  Configure how the data being collected is stored in a log file  Options on the General tab of the ME DataStore Plus Properties dialog box  Options on the Advanced tab of the ME DataStore Plus Properties dialog box  Connections for the DataStorePlus ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2381,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the ME DataStore Plus Properties dialog box",
    "url": "256938.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the ME DataStore Plus Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Never  If this option is selected, the control will create a file named as your configuration. The control will use the file for all logging.  Periodic  If this option is selected, the control will create a file using the naming convention YYYY_MM_DD_HH_MM_NNNN_<filename>.csv, for example, 2015_12_15_02_02_0001_File.csv.  YYYY is the year, based on the System year in the systems local time zone.  MM is the month, based on the System Month in the systems local time zone.  DD is the day, based on the System Day in the systems local time zone.  HR is the hour in 24-hour clock format, based on the systems local time zone.  MM is the minute, based on the System Minute in the systems local time zone.  NNNN is the sequential file identifier. This number indicates the sequence files were created in. The application may use up to 9999 file sets per day. At midnight, the sequence starts at 0000 again.  If the Periodic option is selected, the following options are available:  Hourly - New files are started on the hour.  Daily - New files are started each day at 00:00 (after midnight).  Weekly - New files are started each Sunday at 00:00 (after midnight Saturday).  Monthly - New files are started the first day of each month at 00:00.  At Specified Times  If this option is selected, the control will create a file using the naming convention YYYY_MM_DD_HH_MM_NNNN_<filename>.csv.  In the Start Times text box, enter a time or times.  Day - New files are started each day at 00:00 (after midnight).  Date - New files are started on the specified calendar date. Valid settings are 1 - 28. Files cannot be configured to start on the 29th, 30th, or 31st of a month.  Hour - New files are started on the hour. Valid settings are 00:00 - 23:00  Minute - New files are started on the minute. Valid settings are 00 - :59  You can combine a time with a date or selected day of the week in the Start Times box. Enter times and dates in the format shown. Do not use time and date formats specific to the system's Regional Settings.  Filename Delimiter Selection  This is a file format option allowing you to customize the filename.  None - Filename sample = YYYYMMDDHHMMNNNN<filename>.csv  Underscore(_) - (This is the default) Filename sample = &nbsp;YYYY_MM_DD_HH_MM_NNNN_<filename>.csv  Period(.)  Filename sample = YYYY.MM.DD.HH.MM.NNNN.<filename>.csv  Hyphen(-) - Filename sample = YYYY-MM-DD-HH-MM-NNNN-<filename>.csv  Delete Oldest Files  After Maximum Time - Select this checkbox, type a number, and choose a time period based on that number. When that number of days, weeks, or months has elapsed, the older log file sets are automatically deleted.  After Maximum Files - Select this checkbox and type a number of the maximum files to be available. The files currently being logged to are not included in this number.  See also  DataStorePlus ActiveX control  Options on the Advanced tab of the ME DataStore Plus Properties dialog box  Connections for the DataStorePlus ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2382,
    "title": "Options on the Advanced tab of the ME DataStore Plus Properties dialog box",
    "url": "256940.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Advanced tab of the ME DataStore Plus Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  File Header  In the File Header area, there are the following options:  Default - The control provides the column heading names. The default names are: \"Alg1\", \"Alg2\", ...,\"Alg100\", \"Str1\", \"Str2\", ...,\"Str50\"  Template - The application designer reads a CSV file that contains in its first row the desired column heading names for the log file. These entries in the external file are used as the column heading names.  Use Tag Names - The column headings for the float and string data match the tag names being logged.  Log Periodically  Once the control is enabled, it logs periodically based on the time interval entered in this box.  The time interval should be 1-9999s.  Log System Time and Date of each record  Select this option to automatically record a System Time and Date stamp with each log entry. When logging System Time and Date, there is an option to also log a System Timezone Indicator. The indicator will contain the offset from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) and the system's local timezone.  Indicate Timezone  When logging System time, this option adds a timezone indicator to the record. The system's Regional Setting determines the timezone offset.  Log UTC Time and Date of each record  Select this option to automatically log a UTC Time and Date stamp with each record.  Overwrite oldest data when file reaches  This option begins to overwrite the oldest data in the log file when the file reaches a specified size creating a circular log file.  Log assigned connections only  This option optimizes the size of the log file by only logging configured connections.  If this option is not selected, each record will always contain entries for 100 float and 50 string values.  CSV File Logging Order  This option allows the designer to configure the order, in which data is written to the log file.  See also  DataStorePlus ActiveX control  Options on the General tab of the ME DataStore Plus Properties dialog box  Connections for the DataStorePlus ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2383,
    "title": "Connections for the DataStorePlus ActiveX control",
    "url": "78545.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the connections to control the operation of the DataStorePlus ActiveX control at run time.  Connections  Descriptions  FileLocation  Required  This is the complete path and filename of the CSV file the control will use, for example, \"C:\\DataStorePlus\\File.csv\".  This connection can be an explicit string or a string tag.  If set Start New Files with Never, the control will create a new file named as your configuration. The control will use the file for all logging.  If set Start New Files with Periodic or At specified Times, the control will create new file using the naming convention YYYY_MM_DD_HH_MM_NNNN_<filename>.csv.  For example, if FileLocation is set to \"c:\\DataStorePlus\\File.csv\", the control will create a file named as \"c:\\DataStorePlus\\2015_12_15_02_02_0001_File.csv\".  Trigger  Required  The control uses an event to enable record writing.  This connection must be a tag. When the assigned tag transitions from a zero to non-zero value, the control will append data to a CSV file until the tag value changes to zero.  A new CSV file will be created if:   A CSV file does not exist.  The control configured for Time exceed last time period data collection.  Float01 - Float100  Optional  These connections are the analog tags that make up the data in each row of the CSV file. Assign analog tags to these connections.  It is recommended that the connections are specified as a contiguous list, for example, use connections 1-25 as opposed to connections 10-25 & 40-50.  When using the control to read data from a CSV file, these connections should be configured to use memory tags. The application should use a macro to copy the memory tags to controller tags.  String01 - String50  Optional  These connections are the string tags that make up the data in each row of the CSV file. Each string can be up to 82 characters long. Assign string tags to these connections  It is recommended that the connections are specified as a contiguous list, for example, use connections 1-25 as opposed to connections 10-25 & 40-50.  When using the control to read data from a CSV file, these connections should be configured to use memory tags. The application should use a macro to copy the memory tags to controller tags.  Handshake  Optional  This connection is used for coordinating the control's operations with the automation control system. Assign a Boolean controller tag to the connection.  If this connection is set, when the Trigger value is set from a zero to non-zero value, the control object logs one line data. Then the Trigger and Handshake values are set to False, waiting for user's next trigger.  See also  DataStorePlus ActiveX control  Options on the General tab of the ME DataStore Plus Properties dialog box  Options on the Advanced tab of the ME DataStore Plus Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2384,
    "title": "Configuration of a CSVDataLog or a DataStorePlus ActivewX control",
    "url": "257983.htm",
    "text": "Configure the CSVDataLog or the DataStorePlus ActiveX control to:  Never start a new log file  Start a new log file after an elapsed time  Start a new log file at a specified time  Automatically delete old data log files  Configure how the data being collected is stored in a log file  Tip:  The CSVDataLog or the DataStorePlus ActiveX control has the same functionality on a Windows desktop and a PanelView Plus CE platform.  The value of the FileLocation property on a PanelView Plus terminal begins with \\Storage Card\\ or \\Storage Card2\\. The value of the FileLocation property on a PanelView Plus 7 or PanelView Plus 6 terminal begins with \\My Documents\\ or \\Storage Card2\\.  When using a PanelView Plus CE terminal, the data access from the CSV file will not be as fast as the Windows desktop platform. This may be noticeable for CSV files with more than 1,000 rows.  It is not recommended to use a floppy drive to store or read CSV files with the ActiveX control due to the slower read and write access speed of the floppy drive. A hard drive or flash memory is recommended.  Test the run-time performance to ensure the file access is performed in a timely manner.  See also  CSVDataLog ActiveX control  DataStorePlus ActiveX control  Legacy compatibility  Never start a new log file  Automatically delete old data log files  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2385,
    "title": "Never start a new log file",
    "url": "60955.htm",
    "text": "You may need to never start a new log file and always log data to the same file.  To never start a new log file  Double-click the CSVDataLog or the DataStorePlus ActiveX control to open its Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, select the Never option.  The control uses a file name set in the FileLocation connection.  See also  CSVDataLog ActiveX control  Connections for the CSVDataLog ActiveX control  DataStorePlus ActiveX control  Connections for the DataStorePlus ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2386,
    "title": "Start a new log file after an elapsed time period",
    "url": "60960.htm",
    "text": "You may need to start a new log file after a specific time period has elapsed.  To start a new log file after an elapsed time period  Double-click the CSVDataLog or the DataStorePlus ActiveX control to open its Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, select the Periodic option.  Select the time period to elapse before a new log is started.  Click OK.  See also  Options on the General tab of the ME CSVDataLog Properties dialog box  Options on the General tab of the ME DataStore Plus Properties dialog box  Never start a new log file  Start a new log file at a specified time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2387,
    "title": "Start a new log file at a specified time",
    "url": "60958.htm",
    "text": "You may need to start a new log file at a specified time.  To start a new log file at a specified time  Double-click the CSVDataLog or the DataStorePlus ActiveX control to open its Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, select the At Specified Times option.  In the Start Times text box, type the specific date and time combination for the new log file to start.  Only one specific combination can be on a single line. Start a new line for an additional date and time combination.  Click OK.  See also  Options on the General tab of the ME CSVDataLog Properties dialog box  Options on the General tab of the ME DataStore Plus Properties dialog box  Never start a new log file  Start new log files after an elapsed time period  Examples of starting a new log file at a specified time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2388,
    "title": "Examples of starting a new log file at a specified time",
    "url": "257694.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the examples of starting a new log file at specified times.  To start a new file  In the Start Times text box, enter  Every Wednesday at 2:00 AM and every Friday at 3:00 PM  WED &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;2:00  FRI &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;15:00  On the first day of each month  1  On the 10th day of each month at 8:00 AM  10 &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;8:00  Every day at 2:35 PM  14:35  At five minutes past the hour for every hour  :05  See also  Start a new log file at a specified time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2389,
    "title": "Automatically delete old data log files",
    "url": "60962.htm",
    "text": "If you select the Periodic option or the At Specified Times option on the General tab of the ME CSVDataLog Properties or the ME DataStore Plus Properties dialog box, you can automatically delete old data log files.  To automatically delete old data log files  Double-click the CSVDataLog or the DataStorePlus ActiveX control to open its Properties dialog box.  On the General tab, in the Delete Oldest Files area, select a check box for the options to be used and specify the settings to be applied.  Tip:  If you select both check boxes, files are deleted after the maximum time or after the maximum number of files is reached, whichever happens first.  Click OK.  See also  Options on the General tab of the ME CSVDataLog Properties dialog box  Options on the General tab of the ME DataStore Plus Properties dialog box  Start a new log file after an elapsed time period  Start a new log file at a specified time  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2390,
    "title": "Configure how the data being collected is stored in a log file",
    "url": "60964.htm",
    "text": "You may need configure how the data being collected is stored in a log file.  To configure how the data being collected is stored in a log file:  Double-click the CSVDataLog or the DataStorePlus ActiveX control to open its Properties dialog box.  On the Advanced tab, specify each options.  Click OK.  See also  Options on the Advanced tab of the ME CSVDataLog Properties dialog box  Options on the Advanced tab of the ME DataStore Plus Properties dialog box  Configuration of a CSVDataLog or a DataStorePlus ActivewX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2391,
    "title": "Embeded- guaranteed logging rates",
    "url": "87106.htm",
    "text": "The native ME Data Log supports a 10ms minimum scan rate. The maximum guaranteed precision that the Data Logger can provide is at 20ms for the data.  Pick practical scan rates for your application no matter you choose DataStorePlus ActiveX Control or Data Log Model. As the network speed and bandwidth will determine how fast you are able to update your tags.  If you need to capture data which is changing in the PLC at one second interval, you need to set the scan rate at 500ms. This way you can guarantee its one second data capture precision. In this example, you can only choose the built-in ME Data Log.  If you need to capture data which is changing in the PLC at a five second interval, you need to set the scan rate at about 2.5 seconds. This will guarantee the data being captured with a precision of five seconds. In this example, you could choose either.  See also  Configure how the data being collected is stored in a log file  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2392,
    "title": "Display ActiveX control",
    "url": "60935.htm",
    "text": "The Display ActiveX control provides the system with the ability to open and close OnTop and Replace displays. When a display is opened, a parameter file can be specified.  Use the Display ActiveX control to:  Open an OnTop or a Replace display  Specify a parameter file to be passed to the display during opening  Close an OnTop or Replace display  See also  Connections for the Display ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2393,
    "title": "Connections for the Display ActiveX control",
    "url": "138017.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the connections to control the operation of the Display ActiveX control at run time. There are no additional parameters to configure the operation of the control beyond these connections.  Connections  Descriptions  Enable  Required  The tag value is a trigger. When the value is changed from 0 to 1, the specified display will open.  The connection is read-only.  The connection data type is Numeric.  DisplayName  Required  The tag value is a display file name.  The connection is read-only.  The connection data type is String.  ParameterName  Optional  The tag value is a parameter file name.  The connection is read-only.  The connection data type is String.  See also  Display Control ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2394,
    "title": "EmailSender ActiveX control",
    "url": "77462.htm",
    "text": "The EmailSender ActiveX control provides the system with the ability to send an email via an external SMTP server.  Use the EmailSender ActiveX control to:  Send an email containing a string  Send an email with an attachment  Send an email whose body is contained within a text file  Send to separate TO, CC and BCC lists  Customize the sender  Customize the subject  Customize the signature  Important:  You should only use one EmailSender ActiveX control per display. It is suggested to only have one EmailSender ActiveX control per application.  See also  Connections for the EmailSender ActiveX control  FailureCode connection values  If failed in sending an attachment that is smaller than 10 MB  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2395,
    "title": "Connections for the EmailSender ActiveX control",
    "url": "77464.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the connections to control the operation of the EmailSender ActiveX control at run time.  Connections  Descriptions  Trigger  Required  When the assigned tag transitions from a zero to non-zero value, the control reads the values of the other connections and attempts to send an email.  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", or expression.  SMTPSrvrAddress  Required  This connection contains the server name (for example, smtp.gmal.com) or IP address of the SMTP Server (for example, 200.71.232.10).  The connection data type is String. The maximum length is 82 characters.  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", expression, or explicit string (for example, \"smtp.gmail.com\").  SMTPPort  Required  This connection contains the TCP/IP port (for example, 25) used to communicate with the SMTP server.  The connection data type is String. The maximum length is 82 characters.  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", expression, or explicit string (for example, \"25\").  SMTPUserID  Optional  This connection contains the user id (for example, myusername) to be used to authenticate with a SMTP server that requires authentication.  The connection data type is String. The maximum length is 82 characters.  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", expression, or explicit string (for example, \"myusername\").  SMTPUserPwd  Optional  This connection contains the password associated with the user ID, contained in SMTPUserId\u00a0(for example, P@as5word), to be used to authenticate with a SMTP server that requires authentication.  The connection data type is String. The maximum length is 82 characters.  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", expression, or explicit string (for example, \"P@as5word\").  SSLEnable  Optional  When the value is non-zero, the SMTP Email control uses Secure Socket Layer (SSL) protocol to communicate with the SMTP Server.  When the value is zero or blank, the SMTP Email control does not use Secure Socket Layer (SSL) protocol to communicate with the SMTP Server.  The connection data type is String.  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", expression, or explicit string (for example, \"True\").  SendAnonymous  Optional  When the value is non-zero, the SMTP Email control does not attempt to authenticate with the SMTP Server before attempting to send an email. When sending an email, anonymously SMTPUserId\u00a0and SMTPUserPwd\u00a0should be left blank.  When the value is zero or blank, the SMTP Email control authenticates with the SMTP Server using the credentials contained in SMTPUserId\u00a0and SMTPUserPwd.  The connection data type is String.  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", expression, or explicit string (for example, \"True\").  From_Address  Required  This connection contains the email address of the sender (for example, myEmail@emaildomain.com).  The connection data type is String. The maximum length is 82 characters.  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", expression, or explicit string (for example, \"myEmail@emaildomain.com\").  From_Name  Optional  This connection contains the name of the sender (for example, \"Palletizer 22B\", \"PanelView Plus Alarm\", or \"Fred\")  The connection data type is String. The maximum length is 82 characters.  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", expression, or explicit string (for example, \"Fred\").  TO_Address  Optional  This connection contains the TO recipients of the email (for example, Fred@att.net). Comma separate the individual emails if a list is desired.  At least one email address among the TO_address, CC_address, and BCC_address connections must contain a valid email address or the send operation will fail.  The connection data type is String. The maximum length is 82 characters.  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", expression, or explicit string (for example, \"Fred@emaildomain.com\").  CC_Address  Optional  This connection contains the CC recipients of the email (for example, Fred@att.net). Comma separate the individual emails if a list is desired.  At least one email address among the TO_address, CC_address, and BCC_address connections must contain a valid email address or the send operation will fail.  The connection data type is String. The maximum length is 82 characters.  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", expression, or explicit string (for example, \"Fred@emaildomain.com\").  BCC_Address  Optional  This connection contains the BCC recipients of the email (for example, Fred@att.net). Comma separate the individual emails if a list is desired.  At least one email address among the TO_address, CC_address, and BCC_address connections must contain a valid email address or the send operation will fail.  The connection data type is String. The maximum length is 82 characters.  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", expression, or explicit string (for example, \"Fred@emaildomain.com\").  Subject  Optional  This connection contains the subject (for example, Alarm email) of the email being sent.  The connection data type is String. The maximum length is 82 characters.  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", expression, or explicit string (for example, \"Alarm Email\").  Body  Optional  This connection contains the body (for example, The level of the tank is 100 psi) of the email being sent.  The connection data type is String. The maximum length is 82 characters.  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", expression, or explicit string (for example, \"The level of the tank is 100 psi.\").  BodyFile  Optional  This connection contains the path (for example, C:\\SMTP Files\\ALARM.TXT) to a text file containing the body of the email. When the email is sent the control reads specified text file and sends that content as the email body. Only simple text (.txt) files are supported.  The connection data type is String. The maximum length is 82 characters.  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", expression, or explicit string (for example, \"\\my documents\\alarm.txt\").  AttachmentFile  Optional  This connection contains the path (for example, C:\\SMTP Files\\ALARM.TXT) to a file to be attached to the email. When the email is sent the control reads specified file path and attaches the file to the email.  The connection data type is String. The maximum length is 82 characters.  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", expression, or explicit string (for example, \"\\my documents\\readings.csv\").  AttachmentFailure  Optional  When this value is non-zero and the file specified in AttachmentFile cannot be attached to the email, this connection causes the email send operation to fail.  The connection data type is String.  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", expression, or explicit string (for example, \"\\my documents\\readings.csv\").  Signature  Optional  This connection contains the signature (for example, Palletizer 22B or Fred Smith) of the email being sent.  The connection data type is String. The maximum length is 82 characters.  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", expression, or explicit string (for example, \"Fred Smith\").  Handshake  Optional  When triggered the control writes the status of the email send operation. Non-zero result indicates success. Zero result indicates failure.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a tag or tag placeholder \"{#1}\".  FailureCode  Optional  When a send attempt fails the control writes a string message to this connection indicating the cause of the failure.  The connection data type is String.  The connection can be a tag or tag placeholder \"{#1}\".  See also  EmailSender ActiveX control  FailureCode connection values  If failed in sending an attachment that is smaller than 10 MB  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2396,
    "title": "FailureCode connection values",
    "url": "257673.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the FailureCode connection values returned by the EmailSender ActiveX control.  Error codes  Error messages  1 (Dec)  Failed to start Winsock library.  2 (Dec)  Windows socket library version is unsupported.  3 (Dec)  Failure sending data over network.  4 (Dec)  Failure receiving data over network.  5 (Dec)  Failure connecting to remote server.  6 (Dec)  Failed to get host name by address.  7 (Dec)  Failure creating socket.  8 (Dec)  Internal socket error.  9 (Dec)  Internal socket error  10 (Dec)  Invalid body file extension or format.  11 (Dec)  Internal socket error.  12 (Dec)  Bad SMTP user account.  13 (Dec)  Internal error. Bad MD5 digest response.  14 (Dec)  Internal error. Bad server name.  15 (Dec)  Internal error. Server not responding.  16 (Dec)  Internal error. Timeout occurred while communicating to the server.  17 (Dec)  Memory allocation failure. System may be running out of memory.  18 (Dec)  Failed to retrieve system time.  19 (Dec)  Unexpected error. SMTP receive buffer found empty.  20 (Dec)  Unexpected error. SMTP send buffer found empty.  21 (Dec)  Connection to the server is closed while receiving data.  22 - 33 (Dec)  Internal SMTP error.  34 (Dec)  Authorization type not supported by the server.  35 (Dec)  Internal SMTP error.  36 (Dec)  Failure creating a thread.  37 (Dec)  Specified attachment file is either missing or not accessible.  38 (Dec)  Email TO recipient address is in invalid format.  39 (Dec)  Email CC recipient address is in invalid format.  40 (Dec)  Email BCC recipient address is in invalid format.  41 (Dec)  Specified attachment file size exceeds the value defined in the AttachmentSize registry value.  42 (Dec)  Specified Body File is either missing or not accessible.  43 (Dec)  Failure opening specified body file.  44 (Dec)  Sender email address is in invalid format.  45 (Dec)  Internal ActiveX error.  46 (Dec)  SMTP Server name is not specified.  47 (Dec)  SMTP Server port is not specified.  48 (Dec)  SMTP Server account username is not specified.  49 (Dec)  SMTP Server account password is not specified.  50 (Dec)  Email recipient address is not specified.  51 (Dec)  Email sender address is not specified.  52 (Dec)  Email queue is full. Maximum queue size limit is five emails.  53 (Dec)  An error occurred while Unicode string conversion.  54 (Dec)  SSL error occurred.  55 (Dec)  SMTP error. Service unavailable.  56 - 57 (Dec)  SMTP error. Recipient mailbox full.  58 (Dec)  SMTP error. Recipient disk full.  59 (Dec)  SMTP error. Recipient server not responding.  60 (Dec)  SMTP error. Connection dropped during transmission.  61 (Dec)  SMTP error. The maximum hop count was exceeded.  62 (Dec)  SMTP error. Outgoing message timed out.  63 (Dec)  SMTP error. Routing error.  64 (Dec)  SMTP error. Requested action not taken: mailbox unavailable.  65 (Dec)  SMTP error. Requested action aborted: local error in processing.  66 (Dec)  SMTP error. Requested action not taken: insufficient storage.  67 (Dec)  SMTP error. Syntax error, command unrecognized.  68 (Dec)  SMTP error. Syntax error in parameters or arguments.  69 (Dec)  SMTP error. Command not implemented.  70 (Dec)  SMTP error. Bad sequence of commands.  71 (Dec)  SMTP error. Command parameter not implemented.  72 - 73 (Dec)  SMTP error. Bad Email Address.  74 (Dec)  SMTP error. Recipient&#8217; host server cannot be found.  75 (Dec)  SMTP error. Domain does not accept mail.  76 (Dec)  SMTP error. Access denied.  77 (Dec)  SMTP error. SMTP login unsuccessful: bad username or password.  78 (Dec)  SMTP error. Requested action not taken: mailbox unavailable.  79 (Dec)  SMTP error. User not local, relay denied.  80 (Dec)  SMTP error. Requested mail action aborted: exceeded storage allocation.  81 (Dec)  SMTP error. Requested action not taken: mailbox name not allowed.  82 (Dec)  SMTP error. Transaction failed.  See also  EmailSender ActiveX control  Connections for the EmailSender ActiveX control  If failed in sending an attachment that is smaller than 10 MB  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2397,
    "title": "If failed in sending an attachment that is smaller than 10 MB",
    "url": "258193.htm",
    "text": "The maximum size of an attachment file that the EmailSender ActiveX control can send is limited to 10 MB in an email. However, the default maximum size of the attachment file is limited to 300 KB. When you send an attachment that is smaller than 10 MB and it fails, follow the steps below:  Locate the AttachmentSize registry value:  On desktops, navigate to HKEY_CURRENT_USER\\Software\\Rockwell software\\RSViewME\\EmailSender\\  On terminals, navigate to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\Rockwell Software\\RSViewME\\EmailSender\\  Double click the AttachmentSize registry value, and in the Value data text box, enter the maximum size. The unit is bit. For example, if you select the Decimal option, you can enter 307200 (300 KB) through 10485760 (10 MB).  Tip:  If the Value data is smaller than 300 KB or lager than 10 MB, the maximum size of the attachment file will be limited to 300 KB.  If you did not send any email with an attachment, the AttachmentSize registry value does not exist. You can also create the registry value before you send the attachment.  See also  EmailSender ActiveX control  Connections for the EmailSender ActiveX control  FailureCode connection values  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2398,
    "title": "FunctionKey ActiveX control",
    "url": "134529.htm",
    "text": "The FunctionKey ActiveX control provides the system with the ability to send Function Key keystrokes to the keyboard buffer using tags when it is not possible to use the terminal keypad, for example, when the terminal is mounted within an explosion-proof panel.  Use the FunctionKey ActiveX control to:  Send Fx function keys to the keyboard buffer on Windows desktops, and MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, and PanelView Plus 6 terminals  Send Kx function keys to the keyboard buffer on MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, and PanelView Plus 6 terminals  Debounce the tag connections to ensure only a single function key is sent each time when the FunctionKey ActiveX control is triggered  See also  Connections for the FunctionKey ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2399,
    "title": "Connections for the FunctionKey ActiveX control",
    "url": "134530.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the connections to control the operation of the FunctionKey ActiveX control at run time.  Connections  Descriptions  Trigger  Required  When the assigned tag transitions from a zero to non-zero value, the control continuously reads the values of the other connections and sends function keys to the keyboard buffer.  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", or expression.  OnDelay  Optional  This connection contains the time that any function key connection must be non-zero before the control will send a function key to the keyboard buffer. The display update rate hosting the ActiveX control must be at least two times faster than the value in this Connection.  The connection data type is Integer. The minimum value is 200 MS.  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", or expression.  OffDelay  Optional  This connection contains the time that any function key connection must return to a zero value before the control will detect the next zero to non-zero transition. The Display update rate hosting the ActiveX control must be at least two times faster than the value in this Connection.   The connection data type is Integer. The minimum value is 200 MS..  The connection can be a tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", or expression.  F1 - F20  Optional  When the connection transitions from zero to non-zero, the control will send the associated function key (for example, F1, F6, F15) to the keyboard buffer. The connection must remain non-zero for a duration that exceeds the configured OnDelay connection, or 200 MS if OnDelay is not configured.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a tag, or tag placeholder \"{#1}\".  K1 - K20  Optional  When the connection transitions from zero to non-zero, the control will send the associated function key (for example, K3, K8, K17) to the keyboard buffer. The connection must remain non-zero for a duration that exceeds the configured OnDelay connection, or 200 MS if OnDelay is not configured. It is not possible to send Kx function keys to the keyboard buffer on a Windows desktop device.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a tag, or tag placeholder \"{#1}\".  See also  FunctionKey ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2400,
    "title": "IPInfo ActiveX control",
    "url": "60988.htm",
    "text": "The IPInfo ActiveX control provides the system with the ability to read the hosting PanelView Plus terminal's TCPIP settings.  Use the IPInfo ActiveX control to read:  Terminal IP address as a stringRead  Individual terminal IP address octets as separate values  Terminal subnet mask address as a string  Individual terminal subnet mask address octets as separate values  Terminal gateway address as a string  Individual terminal gateway address octets as separate values  Terminal MAC ID as a string  See also  Connections for the IPInfo ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2401,
    "title": "Connections for the IPInfo ActiveX control",
    "url": "137562.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the connections to control the operation of the IPInfo ActiveX control at run time. There are no additional parameters to configure the operation of the control beyond these connections.  Connections  Descriptions  IPAddress  Optional  The control reads the terminal's IP address, and writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is String.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  IPOctet1 - IPOctet4  Optional  The control parses the IP address into four parts, and each part is mapped to an integer, then the control writes the integer into the configured tag.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  Subnet Address  Optional  The control reads the terminal's IP subnet address, and writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is String.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  SubNetOctet1 - SubNetOctet4  Optional  The control parses the IP subnet address into four parts, each part is mapped to an integer, and then the control writes the integer into the configured tag.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  GatewayAddress  Optional  The control reads the terminal's IP gateway address, and writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is String.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  GWOctet1 - GWOctet4  Optional  The control parse the IP gateway address into four parts, each part is mapped to an integer, then the control writes the integer into the configured tag.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  macID  Optional  The control reads the terminal's Mac address and writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is String.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  See also  IPInfo ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2402,
    "title": "MacroMultiplexer ActiveX control",
    "url": "82355.htm",
    "text": "The MacroMultiplexer ActiveX control allows a Macro button to execute different macros depending on the parameters passed to the button.  See also  Connections for the MacroMultiplexer ActiveX control  ErrorMessage connection values  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2403,
    "title": "Connections for the MacroMultiplexer ActiveX control",
    "url": "82356.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the connections to control the operation of the MacroMultiplexer ActiveX control at run time.  Connections  Descriptions  Trigger  Required  When the assigned tag transitions from a zero to non-zero value, the control evaluates the Index connection and executes any macor associated with the Index value.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  Handshake  Optional  This connection allows the control program to reset the Trigger connection.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a direct tag or memory tag.  Index  Required  This connection maps to the configured macros. There can be up to 100 macros configured.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  ErrorCode  Optional  This connection allows the application to manage errors that occur with the control configuration.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  ErrorMessage  Optional  This connection defines the Text message that is associated with the ErrorCode.  The connection data type is String. The maximum length is 82 characters.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  Macro_1 - Macro_100  Optional  These connections are used to list the macro to be executed. For example, if the value of the Index connection is 1, the Macro that corresponds to Macro_1 will be executed.  The connection data type is String. The maximum length is 82 characters.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  See also  MacroMultiplexer ActiveX control  ErrorMessage connection values  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2404,
    "title": "ErrorMessage connection values",
    "url": "257674.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the ErrorMessage connection values.  Error codes  Error messages  0  No error has occurred.  1  Operation is successful.  2  Operation has failed. Cannot get the interface to execute Macro.  3  Index property is out of range.  Range is 1 to 100.  4  Macro_XX property has not been configured.  5  The macro configured in Macro_XX property does not exist.  See also  MacroMultiplexer ActiveX control  Connections for the MacroMultiplexer ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2405,
    "title": "MacroTen ActiveX control",
    "url": "60944.htm",
    "text": "The MacroTen ActiveX control provides the system with the ability to read ten analog values and write the values to ten assigned tags. The input values, Read connections, can be a constant, tag, tag placeholder \"{#1}\", or an expression built with tags and tag placeholders.  When triggered, the MacroTen ActiveX control writes the value of each Read connection to the corresponding Write connection. For example, Read01 is written to Write01, Read02 is written to Write02, ..., Read10 is written to Write10.  See also  Connections for the MacroTen ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2406,
    "title": "Connections for the MacroTen ActiveX control",
    "url": "138035.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the connections to control the operation of the MacroTen ActiveX control at run time. There are no additional parameters to configure the operation of the control beyond these connections.  Connections  Descriptions  Enable  Required  This connection is used to update all of the Write01 - Write10 properties. When the assigned value changes to a new non-zero value, this connection is triggered.   The connection is read-only.  The connection data type is Numeric.  Read01 - Read10  Optional  These connections can be assigned to an expression, a tag, or a tag placeholder (for example, \"{#1}\"). Use these connections to read values that will be written to the Write01 - Write10 properties.  The connection is read-only.  The connection data type is Analog.  Write01 - Write10  Optional  These connections can be assigned a tag or a tag placeholder. Use these properties to assign output tags from the Read01 - Read10 properties.  The connection is write-only.  The connection data type is Analog.  See also  MacroTen ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2407,
    "title": "Program Launcher ActiveX control",
    "url": "60926.htm",
    "text": "The Program Launcher ActiveX control provides the system with the ability to launch third-party applications from within the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition application.  Use the Program Launcher ActiveX control to:  Launch a specified instance of an application with optional command parameters  Control focus of launched application(s), bringing the desired application to the foreground under application control  Close specific applications launched using the control  See also  Connections for the Program Launcher ActiveX control  Program Launcher ActiveX control connections for FoxIt Reader  ProgramParameter connection examples  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2408,
    "title": "Connections for the Program Launcher ActiveX control",
    "url": "60928.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the connections to control the operation of the Program Launcher ActiveX control at run time. There are no additional parameters to configure the operation of the control beyond these connections.  Connections  Descriptions  ProgramLocation  Required  This connection contains the complete path and filename of the application program you wish to execute (for example, \"ctlpnl.exe\") using the control.  This property can be an explicit string or a string tag.  ProgramParameter  Optional  This connection contains optional command parameters to be used with the application configured in the ProgramLocation connection.  This property can be an explicit string or a string tag.  FocusEnable  Optional  While another application is running, the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition project may not be visible if it is in the background or minimized.  When the assigned tag transitions from a zero to non-zero value, the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition project is restored to the foreground.  LaunchEnable  Required  When the assigned tag transitions from a zero to non-zero value, the control launches the application configured in the ProgramLocation connection appending the optional command-line parameter(s) from the ProgramParameter connection.  The application is launched maximized and given focus. This connection must be a tag.  NewInstance  Optional  This connection configures how the control will act if the application configured in the ProgramLocation connection is executing when the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition application attempts to launch another instance.  If the configured tag is set to zero, the control will restore the application configured in the ProgramLocation connection to the foreground.  If the configured tag is set to one, the control will attempt to launch an additional instance of the application configured in the ProgramLocation connection.  MaximizeEnable  Optional  If the application specified in ProgramLocation becomes hidden behind the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition project or minimized, this property allows the application to be maximized.  To restore a minimized application, set the tag configured in MaximizeEnable to a non-zero value and the tag configured in NewInstance to zero before triggering the LaunchEnable tag.  CloseProgram  Optional  When the assigned tag transitions from a zero to non-zero value, the CloseProgram property will close the application configured in the ProgramLocation connection.  If multiple ActiveX controls are used to launch multiple application, only the control that launched a particular instance of an application can be used to close that application.  See also  Program Launcher ActiveX control  Program Launcher ActiveX control connections for FoxIt Reader  ProgramParameter connection examples  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2409,
    "title": "Program Launcher ActiveX control connections for FoxIt Reader",
    "url": "82391.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the Program Launcher ActiveX control connections to run FoxIt Reader on a terminal.  If you are running on 6.00 firmware, use a backward slash (\\) as the path delimiter, for example \\my documents\\manuals\\manual.pdf. If you are running on v6.10 or later, you can use a forward slash (/) or a backward slash (\\) as the path delimiter.  Connections  Descriptions  ProgramLocation  Required  This connection contains the complete path and file name of the FoxIt reader program. This property can be an explicit string or a string tag. For example, you can use a string tag whose value is Windows\\FoxItReader.exe, if FoxIt Reader resides in \\Windows.  FocusEnable  Optional  While FoxIt reader is running, the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition project may not be visible if it is in the background or minimized.  When the assigned tag transitions from a zero to a non-zero value, the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition project is restored to the foreground.  LaunchEnable  Required  When the assigned tag transitions from a zero to a non-zero value, the control launches FoxIt reader. The application is launched, maximized, and given focus. This connection must be a tag.  NewInstance  Optional  This connection configures how the control will act if FoxIt Reader is already executing when the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition application attempts to launch another instance.  If the configured tag is set to zero, the control will restore FoxIt Reader to the foreground.  If the configured tag is set to one, the control will attempt to launch an additional instance of FoxIt Reader.  MaximizeEnable  Optional  If FoxIt Reader becomes hidden behind the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition project or minimized to the Taskbar, this property allows the application to be maximized. To restore a minimized application, before triggering the LaunchEnable tag, set the tag configured in MaximizeEnable to a non-zero value and the tag configured in NewInstance to zero.  CloseProgram  Optional  When the assigned tag transitions from a zero to a non-zero value, the CloseProgram property will close FoxIt Reader.  If multiple ActiveX controls are used to launch multiple applications, only the control that launched a particular instance of an application can be used to close that application.  See also  Program Launcher ActiveX control  Connections for the Program Launcher ActiveX control  ProgramParameter connection examples  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2410,
    "title": "ProgramParameter connection examples",
    "url": "257984.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows parameter examples you can follow when filling in the ProgramParameter connection.  Parameters  Parameter Functions  Examples  Descriptions  -p  Go to page  Foxitreader \"file_path/file\".pdf -p 2  Opens the PDF file to page 2.  -zw  Fit width  Foxitreader &#8220;file_path/file.pdf&#8221; -zw  Opens the PDF file and fits the view to the page width.  -zp  Fit page  Foxitreader &#8220;file.pdf&#8221;-zp  Opens the PDF file and shows the full page.  -z  Zoom to  Foxitreader &#8220;file.pdf&#8221;-z 150  Opens the PDF file and zooms to 150%.  Multiple parameters  Enter empty spaces between parameters and parameter values  Foxitreader &#8220;file_path/file.pdf&#8221; -p 2 -zw  Opens the PDF file to page 2 and fits the view the page width.  -b  Go to bookmark  Foxitreader &#8220;file_path/file.pdf&#8221; -b &#8220;Bookmark1&#8221;  Opens the PDF file to the location specified within Bookmark1.  -d  Go to named destination  Foxitreader &#8220;file_path/file.pdf&#8221; -b &#8220;Destination1&#8221;  Opens the PDF file to the location specified within Destination 1.  -g  Makes the File>Open command on the Menu and the Open folder button unavailable  Foxitreader &#8220;file_path/file.pdf&#8221; -g  Opens the PDF file and makes the Menu command File>Open and the Open folder button command unavailable.  See also  Program Launcher ActiveX control  Connections for the Program Launcher ActiveX control  Program Launcher ActiveX control connections for FoxIt Reader  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2411,
    "title": "Recipe 2 Enhanced ActiveX control",
    "url": "60979.htm",
    "text": "The Recipe 2 Enhanced ActiveX control provides the system with the ability to read, write, and delete sets of data setpoints (recipes) using CSV files to persist the information.  Use the Recipe 2 Enhanced ActiveX control to:  Load recipe values from a file to tags  Save tag values to a recipe file  Delete a recipe file  Report status of Save, Load, and Delete operations  Set the location of recipes, for example, folder path  Set the recipe name, for example, MyRecipe.csv  Optionally append a number to the filename, for example, MyRecipe11.csv  List available recipe names in String tags  See also  Option on the General tab of the ME Recipe 2 Enhanced Properties dialog box  Connections for the Recipe 2 Enhanced ActiveX control  Status connection values  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2412,
    "title": "Option on the General tab of the ME Recipe 2 Enhanced Properties dialog box",
    "url": "60981.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the option on the General tab of the ME Recipe 2 Enhanced Properties dialog box.  Option  Description  Delete Confirmation  Optional  If this check box is selected, a confirmation dialog box is shown to the operator before execution. The operator can confirm or cancel the operation.  See also  Recipe 2 Enhanced ActiveX control  Connections for the Recipe 2 Enhanced ActiveX control  Status connection values  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2413,
    "title": "Connections for the Recipe 2 Enhanced ActiveX control",
    "url": "60942.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the connections to control the operation of the Recipe 2 Enhanced ActiveX control at run time. There are no additional parameters to configure the operation of the control beyond these connections.  Connections  Descriptions  RecipeNumber  Optional  The control reads the value of the tag and appends to the RecipeName connection This allows the application to select among a set of recipes with the same base name, for example, MyRecipe0.csv, MyRecipe1.csv, MyRecipe2.csv  The connection is read-only and can be a memory or direct reference tag.  The connection data type is Analog.  FolderName  Required  The control reads the tag value to determine the folder path (for example, \"C:\\Recipes\" or \"\\Storage Card\\Recipes\") containing the recipes.  The connection is read-only and can be a memory or direct reference tag.  The connection data type is String.  FileName  Required  The tag value specifies the recipe name (for example, \"MyRecipe2.csv\"). All Save, Load, and Delete operations use this property to determine which recipe to operate upon. When the RecipeNumber property changes value the FileName property will update according to the specified recipe number.  For example, if the current FileName equals \"MyRecipe5.csv\" and RecipeNumber value changes to \"12\", the FileName property will update to \"MyRecipe12.csv\"  The connection is read-write and can be a memory or direct reference tag.  The connection data type is String.  SaveEn  Optional  When this property transitions from zero to non-zero value, the configured tag values (for example, Float001-Float512 and String001-100 are written to the file specified in the FileName connection.  The connection is read-only and can be a memory or direct reference tag.  The connection data type is Boolean.  LoadEn  Optional  When this property transitions from zero to non-zero value, the file specified in the FileName connection is read and the values are written to the tags configured in the (for example, Float001-Float512 and String001-100 connections.  The connection is read-only and can be a memory or direct reference tag.  The connection data type is Boolean.  DelEn  Optional  When this property transitions from zero to non-zero value, the file specified in the FileName connection is deleted. If the optional design-time property Delete Confirmation is set, the operator is prompted before the deletion operation executes.  The connection is read-only and can be a memory or direct reference tag.  The connection data type is Boolean.  Float001 - Float512  Optional  These are the setpoints that comprise the recipe.  These connections are read-write and can be a memory or direct reference tag.  The connection data type is Analog.  It is recommended that these properties be configured as memory tags. The application can use a macro to copy the memory tags to direct reference tags.  String001 - String100  Optional  These are the setpoints that comprise the recipe.  The connections are read-write and can be memory or direct reference tags.  The connection data type is String.  It is recommended that these properties be configured as memory tags. The application can use a macro to copy the memory tags to direct reference tags.  RecipeName001 - RecipeName254  Optional  These properties are used to list the available recipes in strings tags. When the control is loaded, or a Save or Delete operation occur, the contents of the FolderName are searched for CSV files. Any CSV files that are found, up to 254 total, are alphabetically listed in these connections.  These connections are read-only and can be a memory or direct reference tag.  The connection data type is String.  Status  Optional  This connection is used to monitor the state of the control.  This connection is read-only and can be a memory or direct reference tag.  The connection data type is String.  See also  Recipe 2_Enhanced ActiveX control  Option on the General tab of the ME Recipe 2 Enhanced Properties  Status connection values  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2414,
    "title": "Status connection values",
    "url": "257676.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the values returned by the Status connection.  Values  Descriptions  0x01 (Hex) or 1 (Dec)  Downloading  0x02 (Hex) or 2 (Dec)  Download succeeded  0x04 (Hex) or 4 (Dec)  Download with errors  0x11 (Hex) or 17 (Dec)  Uploading  0x12 (Hex) or 18 (Dec)  Upload succeeded  0x14 (Hex) or 20 (Dec)  Upload with errors  0x21(Hex) or 33 (Dec)  Deleting  0x22(Hex) or 34 (Dec)  Delete succeeded  0x24(Hex) or 36 (Dec)  Delete with errors  See also  Recipe 2 Enhanced ActiveX control  Connections for the Recipe 2 Enhanced ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2415,
    "title": "ResetPassword ActiveX control",
    "url": "77501.htm",
    "text": "The ResetPassword ActiveX control allows any user to modify any other user's password in the system. The intent of the control is to allow someone in an administrative role to reset a user's password.  Use the ResetPassword ActiveX control to:  Specify a target user account name  Specify new and confirmation passwords  Report results of password reset operation  The ResetPassword ActiveX control is only available on MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, and PanelView Plus 6 terminals.  Tip:  The ResetPassword ActiveX control does not validate the current user's rights to modify another user's password. When applying the ResetPassword ActiveX control, only give access to the authorized users for security.  The ResetPassword ActiveX control should be applied in a pop-up display that uses user security to restrict access.  The HMI Designer must provide String Entry objects for the operator to specify user account name, password, and confirmation password.  See also  Connections for the ResetPassword ActiveX control  ResultCode values and ResultMessage messages  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2416,
    "title": "Connections for the ResetPassword ActiveX control",
    "url": "77502.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the connections to control the operation of the ResetPassword ActiveX control at run time.  Connections  Descriptions  Trigger  Required  When the assigned tag transitions from zero to non-zero, the control attempts to change the password of the user specified in UserAccount to the password specified in NewPassword. The password specified in NewPassword must match the password specified in NewPasswordConfirmation.  It is recommended that the NewPassword and NewPasswordConfirmation use two unique tag connections.  The connection can be a memory or direct reference tag.  The connection data type is String.  UserAccount  Required  The tag specifies the FactoryTalk Security user account that is acted upon. The user account specified must be a local FactoryTalk Security account. The ResetPassword ActiveX control cannot operate in Windows-linked user accounts.  The connection can be a memory or direct reference tag.  The connection data type is String.  NewPassword  Required  The specified tag contains the new password to be associated with the specified UserAccount. The password specified in NewPassword must match the password specified in NewPasswordConfirmation.  The connection can be a memory or direct reference tag.  The connection data type is String.  NewPasswordConfirmation  Required  The specified tag contains the confirmation password to be associated with the specified UserAccount. The password specified in NewPassword must match the password specified in NewPasswordConfirmation.  The connection can be a memory or direct reference tag.  The connection data type is String.  ResultCode  Optional  This connection is used to monitor the state of the control.  The connection is read-only.  The connection can be a memory or direct reference tag.  The connection data type is Integer.  ResultMessage  Optional  This connection shows the text messages associated with ResultCode.  The connection data type is String.  See also  ResetPassword ActiveX control  ResultCode values and ResultMessage messages  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2417,
    "title": "ResultCode values and ResultMessage messages",
    "url": "257680.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the possible ResultCode values and the associated ResultMessage messages.  ResultCode values  ResultMessage messages  0x00000000 (Hex)  0 (Dec)  \"Success\"  0x00000002 (Hex)  2 (Dec)  \"Internal error, cannot access security component.\"  0x00000003 (Hex)  3 (Dec)  \"Password and Confirmation password do not match.\"  0x00000004 (Hex)  4 (Dec)  \"Internal error, failed to initialize security component!\"  0x00000005 (Hex)  5 (Dec)  \"Internal error, cannot update MER File with new password.\"  0x80049024 (Hex)  -2147184604 (Dec)  \"User %s credentials are incorrect.\"  %s is replaced with specified user account.  0x80049010 (Hex)  -2147184624 (Dec)  \"User %s account has been disabled.\"  %s is replaced with specified user account.  0x80049019 (Hex)  -2147184615 (Dec)  \"Password cannot exceed %d characters.\"  %d is read from FactoryTalk Security policy.  0x8004901A (Hex)  -2147184614 (Dec)  \"The password cannot be changed.\"  FactoryTalk Security policy is preventing the operation from succeeding.  0x8004901B (Hex)  -2147184613 (Dec)  \"Password must be active for over %d days before it can be changed.\"  %d is read from FactoryTalk Security policy settings.  0x8004901C (Hex)  -2147184612 (Dec)  \"The password has already been used.\"  FactoryTalk Security policy is preventing the operation from succeeding.  0x8004901D (Hex)  -2147184611 (Dec)  \"Password must be at more than %d characters long.\"  %d is read from FactoryTalk Security policy settings.  0x8004901E (Hex)  -2147184610 (Dec)  \"Password does not meet complexity requirements.\"  FactoryTalk Security policy is preventing the operation from succeeding.  0x80049027 (Hex)  -2147184601 (Dec)  \"Windows-Linked user account password can only be changed in Windows.\"  0x80049003 (Hex)  -2147184637 (Dec)  \"Password cannot be changed. Access denied.\"  FactoryTalk Security is preventing the operation from succeeding.  See also  ResetPassword ActiveX control  Connections for the ResetPassword ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2418,
    "title": "SBCP ActiveX control",
    "url": "84856.htm",
    "text": "The SBCP (Set Bit Cursor Point) ActiveX control maps an integer value to one of a set of 100 tags. The 100 digital tags are mutually exclusive, and only one of the tags can be set to one (1) at any given time.  Use the SBCP ActiveX control to:  Set one tag out of 100 tags to one (1) based on an indexing tag's value to create state-based animation sequences for representing machine operation  Enable and disable the control at run time under application control  See also  Connections for the SBCP ActiveX control  Index connection example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2419,
    "title": "Connections for the SBCP ActiveX control",
    "url": "84857.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the connections to control the operation of the SBCP ActiveX control at run time.  Connections  Descriptions  Select  Required  When the tag value is non-zero, the control is active. When the tag value is zero (0), the control is inactive. When inactive, the Index connection value is persisted.  The connection is read-only and can be a memory or direct reference tag.  The connection data type is Analog.  Index  Required  When the control is active, the value of the configured tag determines which, if any, of the SBCP connections are set.  When active:  If the value of the Index tag matches a configured SBCP connection, the tag associated with that tag is set to one (1).  If the value of the Index tag matches an unconfigured SBCP connection, all SBCP connections are set to zero (0).  The connection is read-only and can be a memory or direct reference tag.  The connection data type is Analog.  SBCP1 - SBCP100  Optional  These connections are the array of states associated with the PanelView Plus Enhanced SBCP object. When the control is active, the value of the Index connection determines which, if any, SBCP connection is set to one (1).  Only one SBCP connection can be set to one (1) at a time.  These connections are read-only and can be memory or direct reference tags.  The connection data type is Analog or Boolean.  See also  SBCP ActiveX control  Index connection example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2420,
    "title": "Index connection example",
    "url": "258198.htm",
    "text": "The SBCP connections SBCP1, SBCP2, and SBCP4 are configured.  Index=2\tSBCP1=0, SBCP2=1, SBCP3=0, SBCP4=0, SBCP5=0...SBCP100=0  Index=4\tSBCP1=0, SBCP2=0, SBCP3=0, SBCP4=1, SBCP5=0...SBCP100=0  Index=3\tSBCP1=0, SBCP2=0, SBCP3=0, SBCP4=0, SBCP5=0...SBCP100=0  See also  SBCP ActiveX control  Connections for the SBCP ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2421,
    "title": "TerminalInfo ActiveX control",
    "url": "84026.htm",
    "text": "The TerminalInfo ActiveX control allows an HMI application to read the following PanelView Plus 7 and PanelView Plus 6 hardware attributes and write the values to tags:  CPU Temperature  Logic Board Temperature  Display Temperature  Battery Voltage  CPU Load  Memory Load  Memory (BinFS) Thrashing  Device Name  Internal NIC IP Address  Internal NIC Subnet Address  Internal NIC Gateway Address  Internal NIC MacID  External NIC IP Address  External NIC Subnet Address  External NIC Gateway Address  External NIC MacID  See also  Connections for the TerminalInfo ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2422,
    "title": "Connections for the TerminalInfo ActiveX control",
    "url": "84027.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the connections to control the operation of the TerminalInfo ActiveX control at run time.  Connections  Descriptions  Enable  Required  When the assigned tag transitions from zero to non-zero, the control attempts to read and write hardware attribute values to tags every 500ms. Device name and NIC information are only read once.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a direct tag, a memory tag, or an expression.  CPU Temperature  Optional  The control reads the terminal's CPU temperature and writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  Logic Board Temperature  Optional  The control reads the terminal's logic board temperature and writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  Display Temperature  Optional  The control reads the terminal's logic board temperature and writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is Double.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  Battery Voltage  Optional  The control reads the terminal's battery voltage and writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is Double.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  CPU Load  Optional  The control reads the terminal's CPU load and writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  Memory Load  Optional  The control reads the terminal's memory load and writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  Memory Thrashing  Optional  The control reads the terminal's BinFS thrashing load and writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  Device Name  Optional  The control reads the terminal's device name and writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is String.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  NIC1_IPAddress  Optional  The control reads the terminal's IP address of internal NIC and writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is String.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  NIC1_IPOctet1 - NIC1_IPOctet4  Optional  The control parses the IP address of internal NIC into four parts, and each part is mapped to an integer, then the control writes the integer into the configured tag.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  NIC1_ Subnet Address  Optional  The control reads the terminal's IP subnet address of the internal NIC and writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is String.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  NIC1_ SubNetOctet1 - NIC1_ SubNetOctet4  Optional  The control parses the IP subnet address of the internal NIC into four parts, each part is mapped to an integer, and the control writes the integer into the configured tag.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  NIC1_Gateway Address  Optional  The control reads the terminal's IP gateway address of internal NIC and writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is String.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  NIC1_ GWOctet1 - NIC1_ GWOctet4  Optional  The control parse the IP gateway address of internal NIC into four parts, each part is mapped to an integer, and the control writes the integer into the configured tag.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  NIC1_macID  Optional  The control reads the terminal's Mac address and writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is String.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  NIC2_IPAddress  Optional  The control reads the terminal's IP address of internal NIC and writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is String.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  NIC2_IPOctet1 - NIC2_IPOctet4  Optional  The control parses the IP address of internal NIC into four parts, and each part is mapped to an integer, and the control writes the integer into the configured tag.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  NIC2_ Subnet Address  Optional  The control reads the terminal's IP subnet address of the internal NIC and writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is String.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  NIC2_ SubNetOctet1 - NIC2_ SubNetOctet4  Optional  The control parses the IP subnet address of the internal NIC into four parts, each part is mapped to an integer, and the control writes the integer into the configured tag.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  NIC2_Gateway Address  Optional  The control reads the terminal's IP gateway address of internal NIC and writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is String.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  NIC2_ GWOctet1 - NIC2_ GWOctet4  Optional  The control parses the IP gateway address of internal NIC into four parts, each part is mapped to an integer, and the control writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is Integer.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  NIC2_macID  Optional  The control reads the terminal's Mac address and writes the value into the configured tag.  The connection data type is String.  The connection can be a direct tag or a memory tag.  See also  TerminalInfo ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2423,
    "title": "TerminalWakeUp ActiveX control",
    "url": "87108.htm",
    "text": "The TerminalWakeUp ActiveX control provides the system with the ability to wake up or exit from screen saver mode when the control is triggered.   Use the TerminalWakeUp ActiveX control to:  Read the terminal IP address as a string  Read the individual terminal IP address octets as a separate value  See also  Connections for the TerminalWakeUp ActiveX control  ChangeOfState Trigger connection example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2424,
    "title": "Connections for the TerminalWakeUp ActiveX control",
    "url": "87109.htm",
    "text": "She following table shows the connections to control the operation of the TerminalWakeUp ActiveX control at run time.  Connections  Descriptions  Event Trigger  Optional  When the assigned tag transitions from zero to non-zero, the control causes the PanelView Plus 7 or PanelView Plus 6 terminal to exit screen saver mode.  The connection can be a tag, a tag placeholder (for example, \"{#1}\"), or expression.  An application can use both triggers in the same control instance.  ChangeOfState Trigger  Optional  When the assigned tag changes state from the last triggering value, the control causes the PanelView Plus 7 or PanelView Plus 6 terminal to exit screen saver mode.  The connection can be a tag, a tag placeholder (for example, \"{#1}\"), or expression.  The initial triggering value is zero. The triggering value is not persisted between application (MER) execution, nor power cycles.  An application can use both triggers in the same control instance.  See also  TerminalWakeUp ActiveX control  ChangeOfState Trigger connection example  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2425,
    "title": "ChangeOfState Trigger connection example",
    "url": "258199.htm",
    "text": "The ChangeOfState Trigger connection for a TerminalWakeUp ActiveX control is configured for an HMI tag CoS. CoS has an initial value of zero (0).  During the course of operation:  At time T1, CoS is assigned a value of ten (10). The TerminalWakeup ActiveX control executes and causes the terminal to exit screen saver mode.  At time T2, CoS is assigned a value of eleven (11). The TerminalWakeup ActiveX control executes and causes the terminal to exit screen saver mode (if active).  As long as the value of CoS remains unchanged, the control does not execute.  See also  TerminalWakeUp ActiveX control  Connections for the TerminalWakeUp ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2426,
    "title": "Web Browser ActiveX control",
    "url": "77456.htm",
    "text": "The Web Browser ActiveX control provides the system with the ability to show web pages from an HMI application.  Important:  You can run the Web Browser ActiveX control only on a MobileView terminal, PanelView Plus 7 Performance terminal, or a PanelView Plus 6 terminal with extended features, as Web Browser ActiveX control uses Microsoft Internet Explorer which is only available for a MobileView terminal, a PanelView Plus 7 Performance terminal, or a PanelView Plus 6 terminal with extended features.  See also  Connections for the Web Browser ActiveX control  Opening a PNG file for the first time on a PanelView Plus 7 Performance terminal or a PanelView Plus 6 terminal with extended features  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2427,
    "title": "Connections for the Web Browser ActiveX control",
    "url": "77457.htm",
    "text": "he following table shows the connections to control the operation of the Web Browser ActiveX control at run time.  Connections  Descriptions  URL  Required  This connection specifies the URL of the web page to be shown in the control.  The connection can be a fixed string (for example, \"http://www.rockwellautomation.com/\") or a memory or direct reference string tag. A string tag would contain the URL of the web page to be shown in the control.  Back  Optional  A zero to non-zero transition will navigates backward one item in web browser's history list.  The connection is read-only.  The connection data type is Boolean.  Forward  Optional  A zero to non-zero transition will navigates forward one item in web browser's history list.  This connection is read-only.  The connection data type is Boolean.  Stop  Optional  A zero to non-zero transition will cancel any pending navigation or download operation and stop any dynamic page elements, such as background sounds and animations.  This connection is read-only.  The connection data type is Boolean.  Refresh  Optional  A zero to non-zero transition will reload current web page.  This connection is read-only.  The connection data type is Boolean.  See also  Web Browser ActiveX control  Opening a PNG file for the first time on a PanelView Plus 7 Performance terminal or a PanelView Plus 6 terminal with extended features  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2428,
    "title": "Opening a PNG file for the first time on a PanelView Plus 7 Performance terminal or a PanelView Plus 6 terminal with extended features",
    "url": "257997.htm",
    "text": "When opening a PNG file for the first time on a PanelView Plus 7 Performance terminal or a PanelView Plus 6 terminal with extended features, the following message shows:  \"There is no application associated with XXX.\"  To successfully open the PNG file, create an HTML file by linking the PNG file and open the HTML file.  See also  Web Browser ActiveX control  Connections for the Web Browser ActiveX control  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2429,
    "title": "What is a trend?",
    "url": "58282.htm",
    "text": "A trend monitors and shows real-time and historical data. You can graph data as a time plot or as an x/y plot, where two or more sets of values are plotted to show the relationship between them.  Use a trend to:  Show data as it is read from the data source  View changes in data over time  Show isolated or non-isolated graphs.  Plot one variable against one or more others in XY plots.  Print data  Use these button objects with trends:  Next pen button  Pause Pen button  Key button  A pen on the runtime trend chart represents data from the tag or expression that you assign to the pen on the Connections tab.  See also  Create a trend  Create a Pause Pen button  Create a Next Pen button  Create a Key button  Set up connections for the trend  ",
    "keywords": {
      "trend": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2430,
    "title": "Create a trend",
    "url": "296079.htm",
    "text": "To use a trend object, create a trend on a graphic display and configure it to show data from a data log model.  To create a trend  In the Graphics Display editor, from the Object menu, select Trending > Trend or click the trend icon in the toolbox.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the trend to be.  Double-click the trend object to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify:  How the trend looks.  How the trend works at runtime.  The pens to use on the trend.  The horizontal axis and vertical axis.  The tags or expressions to plot.  See also  What is a trend?  Set up how the trend looks  Set up how the trend works at runtime  Set up pens for the trend  Set up the horizontal axis for the trend  ",
    "keywords": {
      "trend": "100",
      "create": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2431,
    "title": "Set up how the trend looks",
    "url": "58261.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box to specify how the trend looks.  To set up how the trend looks  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the trend to open the Trend Object Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify these properties:  What plotting style the chart will use  How often the chart updates with new data  See also  What is a trend?  Create a trend  Options on the General tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  Best practices for FactoryTalk View Machine Edition trends  Troubleshoot FactoryTalk View Machine Edition trends  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2432,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box",
    "url": "296088.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Chart style  Specify the plotting style of the chart. A trend either plot values against time (Standard) or against a selected pen (XY plot).  Standard  Select this option to plot each pen against time in a standard line chart.  XY plot  Select this option to plot each pen against a selected pen, which serves as the X-axis.  If you select this option, select a pen for the X-axis from the X-Axis pen box.  X-Axis pen  Specify which pen serves as the X-Axis in an X-Y plot.  Chart update mode  Specify how often the chart updates with new data.  Automatic  Select this option when you want the trend to update itself at regular time intervals.  Refresh Rate  In the Automatic mode, the Refresh Rate controls how often the trend acquires data.  The Refresh Rate range is 50 milliseconds - 596 hours.  On Change  Select this option when you want the trend to update itself as data values change.  This mode is useful for data that changes rapidly.  In the On Change mode, real-time data updates in the trend whenever data changes by more than a certain amount, or after a specified interval.  Heartbeat  Specify the maximum amount of time in milliseconds between updates when a chart is updating on change. If the value of a pen has not changed within the amount of time specified, the chart shows the current value.  Set the heartbeat rate to 0 to disable the heartbeat.  Deadband  Specify a percentage, from 0% to 100% of the actual value, by which a value must change before the chart shows the next value.  See also  Create a trend  Set up how the trend looks  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2433,
    "title": "Set up how the trend works at runtime",
    "url": "58280.htm",
    "text": "Use the Display tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box to specify how the trend works at runtime.  To set up how the trend works at runtime:  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the trend to open the Trend Object Properties dialog box.  Click the Display tab.  Specify these properties:  How the trend looks  Whether the trend scrolls at runtime  How much extra data to store in the buffer  Tip:  Changing the background color does not change the chart window area. The window color and style can be changed in the Property Panel.  See also  What is a trend?  Create a trend  Options on the Display tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  Best practices for FactoryTalk View Machine Edition trends  Troubleshoot FactoryTalk View Machine Edition trends  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2434,
    "title": "Options on the Display tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box",
    "url": "296092.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Display tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Time format  Specify in what time format the trend shows. This setting affects every time display in the trend object.  The available options are:  12-hour (AM/PM)  24-hour  Use system time setting  If system time format is selected, the format specified in the Windows Control Panel's Regional Options is used.  Chart radix  Specify the number base used to show numeric values on the chart. The available options are:  Decimal  Hexadecimal  Octal  This setting affects the numbers on the y-axis and the x-axis if XY plot is selected. If the number of decimal places on the Y-Axis tab is set to anything other than 0, it overrides the radix selection and shows numbers as decimals.  Data point connection  Specifies whether data points on the chart are connected with a line or not connected.  The available options are:  Connect points. Shows data points connected with a line.  Show disconnects. Plot lines are disconnected between the start and end of a discontinuity in data. A discontinuity in data indicates a communication error or a break in a model&#8217;s data logging.  Show only markers. A marker is shown for each data point. Lines do not connect the data points, so the chart shows only those pens with assigned markers. Any pen without an assigned marker does not show on the chart.  Display milliseconds  If you select the standard chart style in the General tab, select this check box to include milliseconds in the time stamps shown on the x-axis legend at the bottom of the chart.   Display pen icons  Specifies whether pen icons show on the right side of the chart.  Pen icons indicate the last read value of each pen. Pen icons move to show the current value, even if the chart is not scrolling, so some pen icons might not appear to be at the end of a line.  Background color  This box shows the background color for the chart. Click it to select another color.  Use gradient style  Select this check box to show the background in a gradient color.  When this check box is selected, clicking the color square brings up the Gradient Fill dialog box.  Text color  Specifies the color of the text for the labels above and below the chart.  The labels on the vertical axis use the color of the first pen, unless you select Each pen on independent scale on the Y-Axis tab. In that case, the label's color matches the pen whose range is currently shown on the vertical axis.  If you select Isolated graphing on the Y-Axis tab, each pen is shown in a separate section of the chart with its own color labels.  Font  Click this button to open the Font dialog box and specify the type style used on the runtime chart display.  Allow scrolling  Select this check box to continually update the trend chart with new data at runtime. If this check box is selected, the Start Date and Start Time properties are not available. The available Scroll mode options are:  Continuous scroll. The trend chart scrolls from the right to the left for each new data reading.  Half Screen scroll. The trend chart scrolls half a screen at a time. Pens scroll from the middle of the chart to the right. When the pens reach the right side of the screen, the screen scrolls left and the pens continue from the middle of the chart.  Full Screen scroll. The trend chart scrolls a full screen at a time. Pens scroll from the left to the right, starting at the left-most side of the screen. When the pens reach the right side of the screen, the entire screen scrolls and the pens scroll again, beginning at the left side.  If this check box is clear, the trend chart fills with new data up to the limit specified in its buffer size. Beyond that point, the trend chart does not update with new data until the operator manually toggles the scroll mode using the Pause Pen button.  Buffer for extra data  Specify the number of data points to be stored outside of the chart display area. The operator can view these data points by manual scrolling. The buffer size is limited to 32,767 data points. When the buffer is full, old data drops off.  To set the buffer size, specify the number of extra points to retain for each pen. For example, if a trend chart has 10 pens and the records per pen is set to 20, the trend chart stores 200 extra data points - 20 sets of data points for each of the 10 pens - outside of the display area. The more data points held in the buffer, the faster the trend can be strolled. However, larger buffer sizes also require more system resources. If you notice runtime trend performance slowing down, consider reducing the number of data points held in the buffer.  See also  Set up how the trend looks  Options on the Pens tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  Options on the X-Axis tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2435,
    "title": "Set up pens for the trend",
    "url": "58274.htm",
    "text": "Use the Pens tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box to specify pens for the trend.  Prerequisite  Assign tags or expressions to the pens on the Connections tab.  To set up pens  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the trend to open the Trend Object Properties dialog box.  Click the Pens tab.  Specify how each pen looks and the data log model to use.  Tip:  Tag names will show after tags are assigned on the Connections tab.  See also  What is a trend?  Create a trend  Options on the Pens tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  Apply attributes to multiple pens  Plot a value across the full width of the trend  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2436,
    "title": "Options on the Pens tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box",
    "url": "296094.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Pens tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Pen Attributes  The Pen Attributes box is a spreadsheet where you can configure the individual attributes for each pen. The pen attributes define how the tag will be represented on the trend chart at runtime.  To see all of the available attributes, use the scroll bar at the bottom of the box.  Tag\\Expr. name  Specifies a tag or expression whose value will be represented as a pen on the run-time chart.  The tag or expression is assigned on the Connections tab.  Color  Specifies the color of the pen line and the labels on the vertical axis.  Click in the column to change the color in the color palette.  Visible  Specifies whether the pen is visible or hidden on the trend. Click in the column to toggle the setting.  Width  Specifies the width of the pen line in pixels. The larger the size, the thicker the width.  If you select a width other than 1, you cannot change the line style setting.  Type  Specifies how trend lines are plotted on the chart. The available options are:  Analog. Plots pen lines using diagonals from one point to the next.  Digital. Plots pen lines using only horizontal and vertical lines between points.  Full width. Plots a tag's value as a horizontal line that extends across the full width of the chart. The tag moves up and down in the chart as the tag or expression changes.  Style  Specifies the style of the trend line: solid, dashed, dotted, and so on.  To use a line style other than a solid line, the line width must be set to 1.  Marker  Specifies the plot symbol for each data point.   On the Display tab, if you select Show Only Markers and do not connect data points, only the pens with assigned markers are shown on the trend chart.  Min / Max  Specifies the values represented by the bottom and the top of the chart. Tag values outside of the range determined by the minimum and maximum values might not appear on the chart.  To control the minimum and maximum range on the sides of the chart, use the Min/Max Value options on the Y-Axis tab.  Link Data  Select this check box to disable the Min / Max columns and use the assigned tag's minimum and maximum values. If the tag's minimum and maximum values are not available, the columns show question marks.  For digital tags, the minimum is 0 and the maximum is 1. For analog tags, specify the minimum and maximum values in the Tags editor.  Data Log Model  Specifies the data log model to use to supply historical data when the trend is first shown or when you scroll back in time. If you accept the default option, None, the trend shows only real time data.  Make sure you add the tags to the data log model.  Multiple Pen Edits  Specifies properties for multiple pens.  Clear Selections  Click this button to clear the selected edits in the Multiple Pen Edits spreadsheet.  Apply to Selected Pens  Click this button to apply the multiple pen edits to the pens selected in the Pen Attributes spreadsheet.  See also  Set up pens for the trend  Apply attributes to multiple pens  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2437,
    "title": "Apply attributes to multiple pens",
    "url": "296159.htm",
    "text": "You can apply attributes to multiple pens on the Pens tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box.  To apply attributes to multiple pens:  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the trend to open the Trend Object Properties dialog box.  Click the Pens tab.  Select multiple pens in the Pen Attributes box by pressing and holding the Ctrl key while clicking the tag names.  In the Multiple Pen Edits spreadsheet, specify the attributes you want to apply to all of the selected pens, and then click Apply to Selected Pens.  See also  Set up pens for the trend  Options on the Pens tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2438,
    "title": "Plot a value across the full width of the trend chart",
    "url": "58278.htm",
    "text": "Rather than plotting a pen value as individual point, you can plot its value as a horizontal line that extends across the full width of a trend chart. You might do this, for example, to establish high and low values as an alarm deadband on a trend chart.  To plot a tag value across the full width of a trend chart:  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the trend to open the Trend Object Properties dialog box.  Click the Pens tab.  In the Type column of the pen you want to work with, select Full Width.  See also  Create a trend  Set up how the trend looks  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2439,
    "title": "Set up the horizontal axis for the trend",
    "url": "58267.htm",
    "text": "Use the X-Axis tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box to specify the horizontal axis for the trend. The horizontal axis represents time, for a standard line chart, or the selected pen value, for an XY plot.  Tip:  Select the chart style on the General tab.  To set up the horizontal axis  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the trend to open the Trend Object Properties dialog box.  Click the X-Axis tab.  Specify the time range to show on the horizontal axis and how to graphically show the time range.  See also  Create a trend  Options on the X-Axis tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  Set up the vertical axis for the trend  Best practices for FactoryTalk View Machine Edition trends  Troubleshoot FactoryTalk View Machine Edition trends  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2440,
    "title": "Options on the X-Axis tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box",
    "url": "296097.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the X-Axis tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Start date and Start time  Together, these two options determine the starting date and starting time on the left edge of the chart. As the chart scrolls with new data, it updates with the latest data for the specified time span. The start date and start time serve only as starting points on the chart. The start date must fall between 1/1/1992 and 12/31/2037.  To select a date from the calendar, click the Down Arrow beside the Start date box.  To select a time, click the Up or Down arrow beside the Start time box.  Start date and Start time are disabled when scrolling is allowed. To enable Start date and Start time, clear the Allow scrolling check box on the Display tab.  Time span  Type a time and then click a time unit to specify the amount of data the trend chart displays at runtime. For a standard line chart, the time span controls the chart's horizontal scale.  For an XY plot, the Min and Max properties configured on the Pens tab of the selected pen control the horizontal scale, and the time span controls the number of data points plotted.  When configured through the X-Axis tab, the time span does not have a specific limit. The only limitation is that the time span cannot be so large that the start date plus the time span is later than 12/31/2037 when not scrolling. Also, the current date minus the time span cannot be earlier than 1/1/1992 when scrolling.  Display scale  Specifies whether an x-axis label appears at the bottom of the chart.  For a standard line chart, the labels show the start and end times. For an XY plot, the labels show the minimum and maximum value range of the pen selected as the x-axis. If there is room, intermediate values are shown as well.  Display grid lines  Select this check box to show vertical grid lines on the chart.  Grid lines  Specifies how many vertical grid ines to show on the chart.  Available values are 0-30.  Minor grid lines  Specifies how many minor vertical grid lines to show on the chart. These lines appear between the major grid lines and do not have axis values shown.  Available values are 0-10.  Grid color  Specifies the color of the vertical grid lines.  See also  Options on the Display tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  Set up the horizontal axis for the trend  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2441,
    "title": "Set up the vertical axis for the trend",
    "url": "58270.htm",
    "text": "Use the Vertical tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box to specify the range of values to show on the vertical axis.  To set up the vertical axis  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the trend to open the Trend Object Properties dialog box.  Click the Y-Axis tab.  Specify the range of values to show on the vertical axis.  See also  Create a trend  Options on the Y-Axis tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  Set up the horizontal axis for the trend  Best practices for FactoryTalk View Machine Edition trends  Troubleshoot FactoryTalk View Machine Edition trends  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2442,
    "title": "Options on the Y-Axis tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box",
    "url": "296098.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Y-Axis tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Automatic (best fit based on actual data)  Select this option to use the lowest data reading serves as the minimum value and the highest data reading as the maximum value. As the trend acquires new data, the y-axis may re-scale to fit.  Preset (use min/max setting from Pens tab)  Select this option to show the lowest and highest minimum and maximum tag values, configured on the Pens tab, as the y-axis scale. As the chart acquires new data, the y-axis does not re-scale. Which pen's tags are used depends on the Scale options specified on the Y-Axis tab.  Custom  Select this option to specify the minimum and maximum values to use as the y-axis scale.  Minimum value and Maximum value  Actual minimum/maximum value - Select this option to specify an unchanging value as the actual minimum or maximum value on the y-axis scale.  Controlled by tag - Select this option to use a tag or expression value as the minimum or maximum value on the y-axis scale. If you assigned Minimum or Maximum tags or expressions on the Connections tab, the name of the tag is shown here.  Isolated graphing  Select this check box to place each pen in a separate band of the chart. Clear this check box to allow pens to overlap.  In isolated graphing, major and minor grid lines are not shown for the Y-Axis. Instead, a horizontal line appears above each band.  % isolation - Specifies the distance between bands when using isolated graphing. The available range is 0%-10% of the chart height.  Display scale  Select this check box to show y-axis labels on the left side of the chart.  To provide accurate data, the Trend object shows the numbers as decimals, even if Octal or Hexadecimal is selected as the Chart Radix on the Display tab.  Decimal places - Specifies the number of decimal places included on the y-axis legend. The available values are 0-8.  If the number of decimal places is set to anything other than zero, numbers cannot be accurately converted to octal or hexadecimal.  Display grid lines  Select this check box to show horizontal grid lines on the chart. If Isolated graphing is selected, this option is disabled.  Grid lines - Specifies how many lines to show. The available values are 0-30.  Minor grid lines - Specifies whether to show minor horizontal grid lines on the chart, and how many lines to show. These lines appear between the major grid lines and do not have axis values shown. The available values are 0-10.  Grid color - Specifies the color of the horizontal grid lines. If you selected Isolated graphing, this color is used for the horizontal lines between bands.  Scale options  Specifies how multiple pens with different minimum and maximum ranges scale together on a chart.  All pens on same scale  Shows all the pens relative to the same scale. The minimum scale value is the lowest minimum value of all pens. The maximum scale value is the highest maximum value of all pens.  Each pen on independent scale  Scales each pen independently using the pen's minimum and maximum values as the range. Only one pen's range is used in the labels on the vertical axis, which can be misleading of other pens use a different range.  To allow the operator to view each pen's vertical axis labels, create a Next Pen button. When the operator presses the button, the vertical axis changes to the new pen's range. The color for the labels changes to the color for the selected pen.  Scale using pen  Uses the same scale for all pens on the chart, based on the minimum and maximum values configured for the specified pen, or based on the best fit for the pen's actual data. Select the pen to use.  If you selected the Preset (use min/max setting from Pens tab) option, configure minimum and maximum values on the Pens tab.  Scale as percentage  Shows y-axis values as a percentage of the minimum and maximum range. The y-axis labels show the percentage range from 0 to 100%.  See also  Set up the vertical axis for the trend  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2443,
    "title": "Set up connections for the trend",
    "url": "58276.htm",
    "text": "Use the Connections tab to assign up to eight tags, parameters, or expressions to the trend. At runtime, the application notifies the trend object of changes in the value of the tags or expressions.  Tip:  Do not use string tags.  To plot historical values, specify tags from the data log model you will be using at runtime. Specify the data log model on the Pens tab. You cannot use expressions to plot historical data. If desired, you can use tags that are in the data log model and tags that are not.  To set up tags and expressions for the trend  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the trend to open the Trend Object Properties dialog box.  Click the Connections tab.  Select the pen to assign a tag or expression to.  Specify the tag or expression for the pen.  If the minimum/maximum value is controlled by a tag or expression, specify the tag or expression in the Minimum and Maximum rows. Tags specified here show in the Controlled by tag text box of the Y-Axis tab.  See also  Create a trend  Set up the vertical axis for the trend  Options on the Connections tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  Best practices for FactoryTalk View Machine Edition trends  Troubleshoot FactoryTalk View Machine Edition trends  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2444,
    "title": "Options on the Connections tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box",
    "url": "296099.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Connections tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Name  This column shows the names of the connections.  The names cannot be changed.  Pen 1-8  Number of the pen to assign a tag or an expression to. The trend object supports up to eight pens.  Minimum  Minimum value of the trend when the Y-Axis Minimum/maximum value option is set to Custom and the minimum value is controlled by a tag.  Maximum  Maximum value of the trend when the Y-Axis Minimum/maximum value option is set to Custom and the maximum value is controlled by a tag.  Tag / expression  Specifies the tag or expression to be assigned to the pen or value.  Tag  Click the Browse button (@) in the Tags column to select a tag from the Tag Browser. The tag you selected appears in the Tag / Expression box.  Exprn  Click the Browse button (@) in the Exprn column to open the Expression editor.  The Expression editor allows you to create an arithmetic or logical expression to assign to the pen. The expression you created appears in the Tag / Expression box.  See also  Set up connections for the trend  All properties and connections  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2445,
    "title": "Create a Pause Pen button",
    "url": "58255.htm",
    "text": "Use the Pause Pen button object to toggle the selected trend chart between pausing and resuming automatic scrolling.  To create a Pause Pen button  In the Graphics Display editor, from the Object menu, select Trend > Pause Button.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify the options as needed.  See also  Create a trend  Set up general options for a Pause Pen button  Set up a caption and image for a button  Create a Next Pen button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2446,
    "title": "Set up general options for a Pause Pen button",
    "url": "58292.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Pause Pen Button Properties dialog box to set up general options for a Pause Pen button.  To set up general options for a Pause Pen button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the Pause Pen button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options as needed.  See also  Create a Pause Pen button  Options on the General tab of the Pause Pen Button Properties dialog box  Set up a caption and image for a button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2447,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Pause Pen Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "296858.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Pause Pen Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Border style  Specifies the type of border for the button. The available options are:  None  Raised  Inset  RaisedInset  Line  If the button shape is circle or ellipse, you can select only Line or None.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  The available value is 1-32,767.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Specifies a pattern for the button. The pattern appears on the face of the button. The pattern does not cover the border, caption, or image (if any). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is invisible.  Shape  Specifies the shape of the button. The available options are:  Rectangle  Circle  Ellipse  If the button's shape is a circle or ellipse, the button&#8217;s touch area remains a rectangle, and the width, height, and other properties apply to the button's bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back Color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  Border Color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern Color  Specifies the button's pattern color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  Touch margins  Specifies a touch-insensitive margin inside the button's edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the top and bottom edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Audio  Specifies whether to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed. If the computer running the application does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  Send press to  Select whether the button press will be sent to whatever object currently has the focus, or to a specific object linked to the button.  Linked object  Specify the object to which the button press will be sent if the Send press to option is Linked object.  See also  Create a Pause Pen button  Set up general options for a Pause Pen button  Options on the Label tab of a button object's Properties dialog box  Bounding box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2448,
    "title": "Create a Next Pen button",
    "url": "58246.htm",
    "text": "Use the Next Pen button object with the trend object. Pressing the button switches the trend to the next pen&#8217;s y-axis.  To create a Next Pen button  In the Graphic Display editor, from the Object menu, select Trending > Next Pen.  Drag the mouse to position and draw a rectangle the general size and location you want the button to be.  Double-click the button to open its Properties dialog box.  In the Properties dialog box, specify the options as needed.  See also  Create a trend  Create a Pause Pen button  Set up general options for a Next Pen button  Set up a caption and image for a button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2449,
    "title": "Set up general options for a Next Pen button",
    "url": "58251.htm",
    "text": "Use the General tab of the Next Pen Button Properties dialog box to set up general options for a Next Pen button.  To set up general options for a Next Pen button  In the Graphics Display editor, double-click the Next Pen button to open its Properties dialog box.  Click the General tab.  Specify the options as needed.  See also  Create a Next Pen button  Options on the General tab of the Next Pen Button Properties dialog box  Set up a caption and image for a button  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2450,
    "title": "Options on the General tab of the Next Pen Button Properties dialog box",
    "url": "296874.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the General tab of the Next Pen Button Properties dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Border style  Specifies the type of border for the button. The available options are:  None  Raised  Inset  RaisedInset  Line  If the button shape is circle or ellipse, you can select only Line or None.  Border width  Type the number of pixels for the width of the object&#8217;s border.  The available value is 1-32,767.  Back style  Specifies the object background. Available options are:  Solid. The object&#8217;s background is filled with a solid color specified in the Back color option.  Transparent. The object&#8217;s background is not filled and any objects behind it show through.  Gradient. The object's background is filled with a linear gradient color.  Pattern style  Specifies a pattern for the button. The pattern appears on the face of the button. The pattern does not cover the border, caption, or image (if any). If the object&#8217;s back style is transparent or gradient, the pattern is invisible.  Shape  Specifies the shape of the button. The available options are:  Rectangle  Circle  Ellipse  If the button's shape is a circle or ellipse, the button&#8217;s touch area remains a rectangle, and the width, height, and other properties apply to the button's bounding box.  Border uses back color  Select this check box to use the object&#8217;s background color for the border of the object.  Clear this check box to use the selected Border Color.  Back Color  This box shows the current background color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If the background style is transparent, the application does not use this background color.  Border Color  This box shows the border color for the object. Click it to select another color.  If Border uses back color is not selected, this color appears at run time.  Pattern Color  Specifies the button's pattern color.  Highlight color  This box shows the current highlight color. Click it to select another color.  The object's border, if any, changes to the highlight color when the operator presses the button at run time.  Blink  Select this check box if you want the object&#8217;s background to blink at run time. The blink rate is twice per second.  Touch margins  Specifies a touch-insensitive margin inside the button's edges. If the operator presses on the touch-insensitive margin, the button press is not registered.  Horizontal margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the left and right edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Vertical margin  Specifies the number of pixels for the distance inside the top and bottom edges of the button where the button will not be touch sensitive.  Audio  Specifies whether to sound an internal beeper when the object is pressed. If the computer running the application does not have an internal beeper, the object press does not trigger a beep.  Send press to  Select whether the button press will be sent to whatever object currently has the focus, or to a specific object linked to the button.  Linked object  Specify the object to which the button press will be sent if the Send press to option is Linked object.  See also  Create a Next Pen button  Set up general options for a Next Pen button  Options on the Label tab of a button object's Properties dialog box  Bounding box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2451,
    "title": "Best practices for FactoryTalk View Machine Edition trends",
    "url": "58265.htm",
    "text": "Follow these best practices to achieve best possible performance and reliability in FactoryTalk View Machine Edition trends.  See also  Trend Refresh Rate  Memory considerations  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2452,
    "title": "Trend Refresh Rate",
    "url": "296671.htm",
    "text": "When creating a trend object at design time, set the trend Refresh Rate no faster than the time it takes to put a data point on a trend. Drawing extra data points only consumes additional memory.  The speed at which data points can be drawn depends on the time span specified for the X axis, and the width of the trend object.  To calculate the fastest possible refresh rate, divide the number of seconds specified for the X-axis by the width of the trend object in pixels:  (X &#8211; Axis (Seconds))/(Trend Object Width in Pixels)  Example  In the following trend object, the X-Axis Time Span = 10 Minutes = 600 seconds.  The Trend object's Width = 500 pixels.  Fastest Possible Refresh Rate = 600 seconds/500 pixels = 1.2 seconds/pixel  This trend object only shows a new pixel of width every 1.2 seconds. Therefore, setting the Refresh Rate higher than 1.2 seconds only consumes extra memory without showing more data.  Tip:  The X-axis cannot be changed dynamically at run time.  See also  Options on the General tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  Set up the horizontal axis for the trend  Set up common properties  ",
    "keywords": {
      "best practice": "100",
      "trend": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2453,
    "title": "Memory considerations",
    "url": "296672.htm",
    "text": "High memory consumption will degrade application performance.  To achieve best performance, understand each trend object's memory consumption potential:  Trending memory is consumed over time and not allocated on startup of the application.  Buffer extra trend data for real time trending only. Avoid buffering if the application uses data logging. The data log will act as the buffer.  The trend must be linked to the data log model on the Pens tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box for historical trending.  Avoid leaving the trend shown for long periods of time. Depending on the X-Axis time scale, the trend may consume more memory than is available.  The trend object runs within the 32 Mb Windows CE process limit. Additional RAM will not help after the 32 Mb limit is reached.  Set the buffer for extra data well below the theoretical maximum buffer size of 32,767 records. If the trend pens are configured with the maximum buffer size of 32,767 records, the entire allocated program memory on the terminal are consumed in a matter of a few hours, resulting in the out of memory error.  Plotting a single data point requires 58 bytes of memory. Buffering too much extra data or setting the X-Axis time span too high (hours, days) will consume excessive memory. To calculate memory usage for a trend object, refer to the following table.  Single trend object  Runtime memory consumption (formulas)  Example (four Pens, X- Axis of 15 hours, one second Refresh Rate, buffer size 10,000)  Real-time trending  # of pens * 58 bytes * Trend Refresh Rate (entries per second) * X-axis (seconds)  4 pens * 58 bytes * 1 entries/second * 15 hours * 3600 seconds = ~12.5 Mb Used  Additional trend buffered data  58 bytes * # of pens * buffer size  58 bytes * 4 pens * 10,000 = ~2.3 Mb  Total memory consumption  (# of pens * 58 bytes * Trend Refresh Rate (entries per second) * X &#8211; axis (seconds)) + (58 bytes * # of pens * buffer size)  12.5 Mb + 2.3 Mb = ~14.3 Mb Used  See also  Options on the Pens tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  Trend Refresh Rate  ",
    "keywords": {
      "best practice": "100",
      "trend": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2454,
    "title": "Troubleshoot FactoryTalk View Machine Edition trends",
    "url": "58283.htm",
    "text": "Use the troubleshooting topics in this section to resolve common issues or problems when working with FactoryTalk View Machine Edition trends.  See also  Grid lines are missing from the trend chart  Numbers show as decimals  Pen is missing from the trend chart  Range on trend chart is not as expected  Trend is missing data points  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2455,
    "title": "Grid lines are missing from the trend chart",
    "url": "58284.htm",
    "text": "Problem  A trend chart does not show horizontal or vertical grid lines.  Cause  Several configuration options control the display of grid lines. Set options for horizontal grid lines on the Y-Axis tab. Set options for vertical grid lines on the X-Axis tab.  Possible solutions  On the Y-Axis and X-Axis tabs, verify that:  The Display Grid Lines check box is selected.  The number of grid lines is set to a number greater than zero.  The grid color is not the same color as the chart background. Configure the chart background color on the Display tab.  See also  Options on the Display tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  Options on the X-Axis tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  Options on the Y-Axis tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "troubleshoot": "100",
      "trend": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2456,
    "title": "Numbers show as decimals",
    "url": "58285.htm",
    "text": "Problem  Numbers on the trend chart show as decimals, even though you have selected Octal or Hexadecimal as the Chart Radix setting on the Display tab.  Solution  On the Y-Axis tab, change the number of decimal places to zero. If the number of decimal places is set to anything other than zero, numbers cannot be accurately converted to octal or hexadecimal.  To provide accurate data, the trend shows the numbers as decimals.  See also  Options on the Display tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  Options on the Y-Axis tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "troubleshoot": "100",
      "trend": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2457,
    "title": "Pen is missing from the trend chart",
    "url": "58286.htm",
    "text": "Problem  A configured pen does not show on the trend.  Possible solutions  On the Pens tab, make sure that:  The Visible option is On.  The pen line color is not the same color as the chart's background color specified on the Display tab.  The pen has a marker assigned, if the Data Point Connection option on the Display tab is set to Show Only Markers.  On the Y-Axis tab, check the chart range, as defined by the Minimum / Maximum Value options. If the pen's data is all outside of the specified range, the pen's trend line draws at the top or bottom of the chart, where it might not be noticeable.  See also  Options on the Display tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  Options on the Pens tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  Options on the Y-Axis tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "troubleshoot": "100",
      "trend": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2458,
    "title": "Range on trend chart is not as expected",
    "url": "58287.htm",
    "text": "Problem  The range of values shown on a trend chart is not what you expect it to be. For example, the pen's minimum and maximum values are configured as 1 and 100, but the chart shows a range from -50 to 50.  Cause  The trend object offers a variety of range options, controlled by options set on the Y-Axis tab. The pen's minimum and maximum values might fall outside of the specified range or outside of the specified scale configured on the Y-Axis tab.  Possible solutions  On the Y-Axis tab, check the following:  Which Minimum / Maximum Value option is selected.  Which Scale option is selected.  See also  Options on the Y-Axis tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "troubleshoot": "100",
      "trend": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2459,
    "title": "Trend is missing data points",
    "url": "58288.htm",
    "text": "Problem  Some transitions are skipped and corresponding data points do not show on the trend.  Cause  The trend object might be polling and updating with data periodically, rather than on change. For example, if data values change every second but the Refresh Rate is set to once per minute, changes in data will be missed.  Solution  On the General tab, change the chart update mode to On Change, or increase the speed of the Refresh Rate.  See also  Options on the General tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "troubleshoot": "100",
      "trend": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2460,
    "title": "Trend is missing data when scrolling",
    "url": "58289.htm",
    "text": "Problem  Data outside of the visible trend chart area is lost. When you scroll backward or forward, data is missing.  Cause  The trend object stores a limited number of extra data points in addition to those shown. You can configure the amount of extra data stored in a buffer.  Solution  On the Display tab, configure the Buffer for extra data option to hold more records per pen.  See also  Options on the Display tab of the Trend Object Properties dialog box  ",
    "keywords": {
      "troubleshoot": "100",
      "trend": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2461,
    "title": "Configure a gradient fill",
    "url": "83849.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options in the Gradient Fill dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Colors  Move the slider to change the percentage of the start and end color.  Start color  Click the Start color box to choose the start color for the gradient fill.  End color  Click the End color box to choose the end color for the gradient fill.  Horizontal  Click Horizontal to make the color gradient in a horizontal direction.  Vertical  Click Vertical to make the color gradient in a vertical direction.  Diagonal Up  Click Diagonal Up to make the color gradient in a diagonal up direction.  Diagonal Down  Click Diagonal Down to make the color gradient in a diagonal down direction.  Styles  A linear gradient color is specified by two points, and a color (or different intensity of one color) at each point. Depending on the points' positions, there are four styles you can select.  Important:  The PanelView Plus 7 and PanelView Plus 6 terminals cannot process a Gradient Fill that uses a Diagonal Up or Diagonal Down direction, nor can the terminal apply a Gradient Fill to a rotated object. When running an MER on a PanelView Plus 7 or PanelView Plus 6 terminal and the system encounters an object with these attributes, the system shall use the gradient fill starting color as the object's solid color background.  When running the MER on a computer, the system can process all gradient fills and this warning does not apply.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2462,
    "title": "About global objects and global object displays",
    "url": "67205.htm",
    "text": "Global objects allow you to link the appearance and behavior of a graphic object to multiple copies of that object in the same application. When you make changes to the original object, the copies are changed as well.  Global objects are created on global object displays. You create global object displays in the Global Objects folder, the same way you create standard displays in the Displays folder. All of the objects and groups of objects on a global object display are global objects.  Global objects displays are saved with the extension .ggfx in \\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\HMI projects\\<Application Name>\\Global Objects.  When you copy and paste or drag and drop a global object onto a standard display in the Displays folder, the copy is called a reference object. The original global object on the global objects display in the Global Objects folder becomes its base object. Changes to the base object will be reflected in its reference objects the next time the displays containing the reference objects are opened. This is true both at design time and run time.  Tip:  All FactoryTalk View graphic objects can be global objects except ActiveX controls. These are unavailable from the Objects menu and Graphics toolbar when you are editing a global object display. When you add a standard display containing ActiveX controls to the Global Objects folder, the ActiveX controls will be deleted.  You cannot convert objects on a global object display to wallpaper.  When a global object display is open in the Graphics editor, the words '(Global Objects)' appear after the name on the title bar. A standard display created in the Displays folder, has the word '(Display)' in the title bar.  You can copy a global object onto any number of displays, or multiple times onto a single display.  Reference objects can only be linked to base objects within the same application.  The global object displays added to an application do not count toward the maximum displays allowed by the activation.  A global object display cannot be used as the initial display in a FactoryTalk View ME application, and cannot be selected from the Component Browser when creating a Display List Selector or Goto Display button.  Library graphic displays cannot contain global objects.  If an application including global objects is used to create a run-time file (.mer) for earlier versions of ME Station that do not support global objects, all reference objects that are linked to a valid base object will be converted into regular objects. If the base object does not exist, a validation error will be logged to FactoryTalk Diagnostics.  See also  Create and add global object displays  Create global objects  Global object parameters  ",
    "keywords": {
      "global object": "100",
      "global object display": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2463,
    "title": "Create and add global object displays",
    "url": "67203.htm",
    "text": "You can create or add a global object display using one of the methods listed on the Context menu which is shown when you right-click the Global Objects icon in the Explorer window. These are the same menu items that appear for standard displays and work the same way.  New - select this option to create a new global object display in the application you are editing.  This opens a new global object display in the Graphics editor. Develop the objects on the display just as you would on a standard display. The display is saved in the Global Objects folder.  Add Component into Application - select this option to add existing displays from the current or another application into the Global Objects folder.  When you add a standard graphic or library display, all the standard objects on the display become global objects, except for ActiveX controls, which are deleted.  If the display contains reference objects and is being added from the same application, all reference objects are converted to global objects, except those with broken links, which are deleted.  If the display is being added from a different application, all of the reference objects are deleted.  Import and Export - this option does not allow you to create or add a display. However, you can use it to import XML information exported from another global object display or a standard display, into an existing global object display. You could use this to add objects to a global object display.  Tip:  When a global object display is open in the Graphics editor, the words Global Objects appear after the name on the title bar.  When you copy a global object display into the Library folder, the base global objects become standard objects.  When you copy a standard display that contains reference global objects, into the Library folder, when the library display is opened, all reference objects will be deleted. If this leaves an empty grouped object, the group will also be deleted.  When you add a standard graphic display into the Displays folder from another application, any reference objects on the display will continue to be reference objects.   However, if the current HMI server does not contain a global object display with a global object that matches the reference object's LinkBaseObject property, the reference object will be shown as a broken link.  Global objects displays are saved with the extension .ggfx in \\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\HMI Projects\\<Application Name>\\Global Objects.  All FactoryTalk View graphic objects can be global objects except ActiveX controls. These are unavailable from the Objects menu and Graphics toolbar when you are editing a global object display. When you add a standard display containing ActiveX controls to the Global Objects folder, the ActiveX controls will be deleted.  You cannot convert objects on a global object display to wallpaper.  The global object displays added to an application do not count toward the maximum displays allowed by the activation.  A global object display cannot be used as the initial display in a FactoryTalk View ME application, and cannot be selected from the Component Browser when creating a Display List Selector or Goto button.  See also  About global objects and global object displays  Create global objects  Create new components  Global object parameters  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2464,
    "title": "Create global objects",
    "url": "67201.htm",
    "text": "All of the graphic objects and groups of graphic objects on a global object display are global objects.  You create global objects on displays in the Global Objects folder the same way you create graphic objects on standard displays in the Displays folder.  Global objects can be:  Created on a global object display using the tools in the Graphics editor.  Copied and pasted from a standard graphic display, another global object display, or library.  Dragged and dropped from a standard graphic display, another global object display, or library.  When you copy or drag a global object onto a standard display in the Displays folder, the copy is called a reference object. The original global object in the Global Objects folder becomes its base object.  Tip:  ActiveX objects cannot be created on or added to a global object display.  You cannot convert objects on a global object display to wallpaper.  For Group reference objects, Flip Vertical and Flip Horizontal are not available on the Arrange menu or from the toolbar.  See also  Create and add global object displays  Reference object properties  Edit a base object  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2465,
    "title": "Set global object defaults",
    "url": "67513.htm",
    "text": "When you copy and paste or drag and drop a global object onto a standard graphic display, the resulting reference object has several new properties called Link properties.  The Link properties are given default values when the reference object is created. You can change the default values that are assigned to a new reference object by setting the global object defaults.  To change the default values for Link properties  In the Graphics editor, select Global Object Defaults from the Edit menu.  In the Global Object Defaults dialog box, specify the new default values.  Press Apply or OK.  The new default values will be applied to all new reference objects, as they are created. The values of the properties can be changed at the reference object if required.  Options  LinkAnimation default  The LinkAnimation property determines whether or not the animation assigned to a base object will be used by the reference object, and if the animation is used, whether or not the expressions assigned to the base object are used. The initial default value of this property is Link without expressions.  The number of tags used by the reference object's expressions will count toward the 1000 tag limit for the display that the reference object is on.  Do not link  When the default value is Do not link, all animation settings for the reference object can be edited. Changes to the base object's animation will not be reflected in the reference object.  Link with expressions  When the default value is Link with expressions, the animation for the reference object cannot be edited and the items on the Animation menu will be unavailable. Changes to the base object's animation will be reflected in the reference object.  Link without expressions  When the default value is Link without expressions, the expressions and the expression range settings used by animation for the reference object can be edited. Changes to the reference object's expressions will not be reflected in the base object.  All other settings for animation of the reference object (for example, color settings in color animation) will not be editable, and any changes to these settings in the base object will be reflected in the reference object.  LinkConnections default  The LinkConnections property determines whether the connections assigned to the base object will be used by the reference object. The initial default value of this property is False.  The number of tags used by the reference object's expressions will count toward the 1000 tag limit for the display that the reference object is on.  True  When the default value is set to True, the reference object's connections cannot be edited, and the reference object will use the base object's connection assignments.  False  When the default value is set to False, the reference object's connections will be read/write and can be edited. Changes to the connections on the reference object will not be reflected in the base object, and changes made to the connections on the base objects will not be reflected on the reference object.  LinkSize default  The LinkSize property determines whether the values assigned to the Height and Width properties of base objects will be used by the reference object. The initial default value of this property is True.  True  When the default value is set to True, the reference object's Height and Width properties will be read-only, and the base object's values for these properties will be used. If you resize the object using its handles, it will snap back to its original size.  False  When the default value is set to False, the reference objects Height and Width properties can be edited. Changes made to these properties on the base object will not be reflected on the reference object.  Tip:  If the default LinkAnimation property is changed from Do not link to Link with expressions, any settings that were assigned for the reference object will be overwritten by the base object settings. If the LinkAnimation property is changed from Do not link to Link without expressions, any expressions assigned to the reference object will continue to be used, but any other settings will be overwritten by the base object settings. To restore these settings, use the Undo option.  If the default LinkAnimation property is changed from Link with expressions to Link without expressions, the expressions assigned to the base object's animation will continue to be used by the reference object until the expressions on the reference object are edited.  If the default LinkAnimation property is changed from Link without expressions to Link with expressions, the expressions assigned to the reference object will be overwritten by the base object settings. To restore these settings, use the Undo option.  If the default LinkSize property is set from False to True, values assigned on the reference object will be overwritten by the base object settings. To restore these settings, use the Undo option.  When a reference object's LinkBaseObject property points to a base object that no longer exists, the reference object is replaced by a red X on a white background.  See also  Create global objects  Reference object properties  Global object parameters  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2466,
    "title": "Global object parameters",
    "url": "67199.htm",
    "text": "Global object parameters are an extension of existing parameters designed to be used primarily with global object faceplates. They provide the following enhancements to regular parameters:  An optional description of the parameter that can include not only how the parameter is to be used, but also the type of tag expected to be assigned to the parameter  The ability to assign a different parameter value to each instance of a reference global object that uses the parameter without breaking the links between the tags and expressions on the base global object.  Global Object Parameters are useful when more than one instance of a global object is used on a display. For example, a single display could contain two or more Logix_PIDE faceplates, each referencing a different PIDE in the controller.  Global object parameters are not passed to the reference objects at run time. You do not need to assign a parameter file or list from a graphic object. The placeholder is defined in the base object and the tag is specified in the reference object.  Tip:  Global object parameter definitions are created on base objects.  Global object parameters are assigned on reference objects as parameter values.  Global object parameters can be used wherever a regular parameter can be used.  Global object parameters are not supported in the versions of FactoryTalk View Studio prior to 5.00.00.  To use global object parameters  Create a base global object.  Define the parameter on a base global object.  Create a reference object linked to the base object created in Step 1.  Create one or more additional instances of the same reference objects.  Assign unique parameter values to each of the reference objects.  See also  About global objects and global object displays  Create global objects  Edit a base object  Define global object parameters  Assign global object parameter values  Parameter file and parameter list  Create global objects  Assign global object parameter values  Define global object parameters  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2467,
    "title": "Define global object parameters",
    "url": "67521.htm",
    "text": "Global object parameters are defined in base objects in global object displays. When you copy a global object from a global object display to a standard display in the Graphics folder, you can assign values to the global parameters in the resulting reference object.  To define global object parameters  Right-click the base global object or global object group on a global object display and select Global Object Parameter Definitions. Alternatively, on the menu bar click Edit > Global Object Parameter Definitions.  (Optional) In the Global Object Parameter Definitions dialog box, enter the description for each parameter.  See also  About global objects and global object displays  Create and add global object displays  Create global objects  Global object parameters  Assign global object parameter values  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2468,
    "title": "Assign global object parameter values",
    "url": "67523.htm",
    "text": "Global object parameters are assigned to reference objects in graphic displays.  Use the Global Object Parameter Values dialog box to assign unique parameter values to multiple reference objects without having to break the links to the base object's tags and expressions.  To assign global object parameter values  Select a reference object on a graphic display.  Right-click and then select Global Object Parameter Values from the context menu to open the Global Object Parameter Values dialog box.  or  From the Edit menu, select Global Object Parameter Values.  Assign values to each of the parameters defined in the Global Object Parameter Definitions dialog box.  The Global Object Parameter Values menu choice will be unavailable if:  the object selected is not a reference object  the object selected is a reference object but its base object has no global object parameters defined  the object selected is part of a group reference object  Options  Name  Names of global object parameters defined in the Global Object Parameter Definitions dialog box are shown here. Users cannot edit this cell.  Value  Type a value for the global object parameter. This can be any string. If a tag is selected in the next cell, the tag will be displayed in the Value cell. This property is optional.  Tag  Click the Browse button to open the Tag Browser and select a tag or a folder as the parameter value. Selecting a folder that contains a structure tag establishes a path to the structure tag that will act as the backing tag for this reference object.  Description  The description specified in the Global Object Parameter Definitions dialog box is shown here. Users cannot edit this cell.  Tip:  To ensure that changes made to the tags and expressions in the base object are also made in the reference object, set the global object defaults in the reference object as follows:  LinkAnimation = Link with expression  LinkConnections = True  See also  About global objects and global object displays  Create and add global object displays  Create global objects  Define global object parameters  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2469,
    "title": "Edit a base object",
    "url": "67515.htm",
    "text": "Editing a base object on a global object display in the Global Objects folder is essentially the same as editing an object on a standard display in the Displays folder. The only differences are that certain options are not available on the Graphics menus, such as ActiveX Control on the Objects menu, because these items are not supported in global object displays.  To edit base objects, you can open the global object display that contains them in the Global Objects folder, the same way as you open any graphic display.  You can also open a global object display from a standard display via a reference object.  To edit a base object from a reference object  Right-click the reference object on a standard display.  On the reference object's Context menu, click Edit Base Object.  This opens the global object display containing the base object and selects the base object.  Tip:  If you change an object's Name property or you delete a base object, this will break the links between the base object and any reference objects on standard displays that refer to it.  If a base object within a grouped base object is deleted, the corresponding reference object in the grouped reference object will be deleted, but the link to the grouped reference object will not be treated as broken.  The Display Settings (Properties and Behavior tabs) behave the same way for global objects displays as they do for standard graphic displays. They are not carried over to standard displays with the global objects.  See also  Create global objects  Reference object properties  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2470,
    "title": "Reference object properties",
    "url": "67222.htm",
    "text": "When you select a reference object and open the Property Panel, there will be fewer properties shown than there are for its base object. Only the object's common properties, and a State property, if the object has states, will appear in the property panel. If you change these values on the base object, the value of the reference object will not be changed.  All the properties that the base object has but are not visible in the Property Panel for the reference object, are properties that receive their values from the base object.  The reference object also has several properties that the base object does not have. These are the Link properties that determine which information the reference object will receive from the base object. These properties are LinkAnimation, LinkBaseObject, LinkConnections, and LinkSize.  The Link properties are:  LinkAnimation - determines whether separate animation or expressions can be set up for the reference object.  LinkBaseObject - specifies the name and global object display of the base object. This property is read-only and cannot be changed.  LinkConnections - determines whether separate connections can be set up for the reference object. Reference objects that do not support connections will not have the LinkConnections property.  LinkSize - determines whether you can resize the reference object.  The Link properties are given default values when the reference object is created. The default values for LinkAnimation, LinkConnections, and LinkSize can be changed when you copy or drag a global object into a standard display in the Displays folder, or edited later.  You can edit these properties for a given reference object in the Property Panel.  You can also change the default values that are assigned to a reference object when it is created. If you change the default settings for the Link properties, the list of properties available in the Property Panel for the reference object may change.  In addition, you can break the links between the reference object to its base object. When you do this, the object becomes a standard graphic object.  To edit the Link properties for a reference object  Right-click the reference object and select Property Panel.  In the Property Panel, click a property and then click its down arrow to display the options available for it.  Click an option to select it.  To change the default values for Link properties  In the Graphics editor, select Global Object Defaults from the Edit menu, or from a global object's (right-click) context menu.  In the Global Object Defaults dialog box, specify the new default values.  Press Apply or OK.  The new default values will be applied to all new reference objects, as they are created.  To break the links between a reference object and its base object  Right-click the reference object and select Break Link.  This removes the Link properties from the reference object, making it a standard graphic object.  Tip:  If you delete, rename, or overwrite (using Save As) a global object display, the links between any base objects on the display and their reference objects, will be broken. You can restore the links by recreating the global object display and object(s) with the same names.  When a reference object's LinkBaseObject property points to a base object that no longer exists, the reference object is replaced by a red X on a white background.  See also  Create global objects  Edit a base object  Global object parameters  Set up common properties  Set global object defaults  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2471,
    "title": "About controller instruction faceplates",
    "url": "67693.htm",
    "text": "Controller instruction faceplates have been provided in FactoryTalk View Machine Edition to help you reduce your development time. These displays can be easily added to your application and quickly connected to your Logix 5000 instructions, enabling you to get up and running with minimal effort.  Adding faceplate displays to an application affects the license count. Each added faceplate display (.gfx file) counts as one display for activation purposes. The corresponding global object display (.ggfx file) does not add to the total license count.  Controller instruction faceplates provide:  Sets of Faceplates that work with the following Logix 5000 instructions:  Enhanced PID (Logix_PIDE)  Discrete 2-State Device (Logix_D2SD)  Discrete 3-State Device (Logix_D3SD)  Totalizer (Logix_TOT)  Enhanced Select (Logix_ESEL)  Alarm (Logix_ALM)  Alarm Analog (Logix_ALMA)  Alarm Digital (Logix_ALMD)  Ramp/Soak (Logix_RMPS)  PhaseManager (Logix_PhaseManager)  A consistent look and feel across all displays  Global objects that can be re-used in your own displays  See also  About controller instruction faceplate displays  About controller instruction faceplate global objects  Controller instruction faceplates display list  Add controller instruction faceplates  ",
    "keywords": {
      "controller instruction faceplate": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2472,
    "title": "About controller instruction faceplate displays",
    "url": "67695.htm",
    "text": "Controller instruction faceplates have been organized into different display files based on varying functionalities offered in each display.  Main Faceplate - generally used for monitoring an instruction.  Status Faceplate - used in viewing the status and invalid configuration indicators.  Configuration Faceplate - used to manipulate the settings that determine the instruction's behavior.  Other supporting Faceplates - provide very specialized functionality or views into the operation of the instruction.  The faceplates have been designed so that security can easily be added at the display level. For example, configuration information will exist on its own display. For a given instruction, a main faceplate will be accessible to everyone. The other faceplates, such as configuration or tuning, may not.  Faceplate displays are built from global objects. For each faceplate display there is a global object file that contains the base objects for the faceplate.  Each faceplate has a toolbar that provides a means of navigating to other displays related to that instruction.  Use the Displays  When using the Controller Instruction Faceplates consider the following:  You can add the Controller Instruction Faceplate global objects (*.ggfx), reference displays (.gfx), and image (*.bmp) files to your application automatically by right-clicking the application server name and selecting Add Controller Instruction Faceplates.  Adding faceplate displays to an application affects the license count. Each added faceplate display (.gfx file) counts as one display for activation purposes. The corresponding global object display (.ggfx file) does not add to the total license count.  When launching the faceplates, create and specify a parameter file containing the expected parameters for the faceplate even though they may not be used on the main faceplate.  Parameter file references will need to be specified on the toolbar Goto Display buttons of faceplates used in your application.  You can make changes to the display or make changes to the global object.  Global object link property settings for the Controller Instruction Faceplates are:  LinkAnimation = Link with Expressions  LinkConnections = True  LinkSize = True  Controller instruction faceplates were developed using Arial bold fonts. These fonts are typically not natively found on industrial computers such as the PanelView Plus CE or PanelView Plus. See Answer ID 29044 for information on installing Arial Bold fonts, contained in the arialbd.ttf file.  See also  About controller instruction faceplates  About controller instruction faceplate global objects  Set global object defaults  Parameter file and parameter list  Controller instruction faceplates tag passing  Add controller instruction faceplates  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2473,
    "title": "About controller instruction faceplate global objects",
    "url": "67705.htm",
    "text": "Global object displays of RSLogix 5000&reg; Controller Instruction Faceplates or Studio 5000 Logix Designer&reg; Controller Instruction Faceplates are provided with FactoryTalk View Machine Edition for inclusion in your applications. Use of global objects in application where similar graphic components are needed will enhance the maintainability of your application, because changing a global object will impact all reference instances of that base object used in your displays.  RSLogix 5000 Controller Instruction Faceplates or Logix Designer Controller Instruction Faceplates distributed with FactoryTalk View Machine Edition are implemented using global objects. To use these faceplates in your application, you can do one of the following:  Right-click the HMI Server name in the Explorer and select Add Controller Instruction Faceplates.  Import the desired global objects (*.ggfx files) and reference faceplates (*.gfx files) from \\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\Faceplates.  Layout  Global object displays are organized into different files based on the functionality offered in each display. Each display is composed of the following components:  Description Panel - This panel is intended for use in reference displays to provide an area for uniquely identifying the faceplate instance. For example, a tag label or other descriptive string display referencing the backing tag can be used with this panel on a reference display to provide an identifier for the particular instruction being monitored.  Toolbar Group - Use of a global object toolbar in your displays will allow the related instruction faceplates to be opened as pop-ups at runtime.  Content Group - The main view into the RSLogix 5000 or Logix Designer instruction.  Faceplate Panel - A panel that provides a uniform background color for the global object display.  Link  Your ability to individually customize the new reference displays that you create depends heavily upon the default global object link settings. These are applied at the time the global objects are imported onto new reference displays. With a global object display open in the editor, global object link settings are accessed by clicking Edit and selecting Global Object Defaults from the menu bar in FactoryTalk View Studio. Properties for link settings are: Link Animation, Link Connections, and Link Size.  The pre-made reference displays for the Controller Instruction Faceplates default to LinkAnimations = \"With Expressions\", LinkConnections = true, and LinkSize = true  Tip:  The panels, controls, and display elements in the content group of Controller Instruction Faceplate global object displays are grouped to allow easy importation of the entire faceplate or specific features into your reference displays. The intent is for a developer to be able to import the entire content group, a desired panel, or individual feature thereof.  When creating a reference display that consists of global objects referencing different instructions, tag substitution can be used to replace all the tags for display components in a particular group providing the link settings allow such substitution. Tag substitution is performed by right-clicking on the desired group in the Object Explorer and selecting Tag Substitution.  Most panel and display components of Controller Instruction Faceplate global objects have been made transparent, allowing inclusion on a display with any background color. It was, however, necessary for aesthetics to use a solid background on some text labels in order to obstruct background components. These labels can easily be blended with your display by changing the background color of the component properties to match the color of your display or panel's background.  See also  About controller instruction faceplates  About controller instruction faceplate displays  Process faceplates display list  Object Explorer  Examples: Tag substitutions  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2474,
    "title": "Add controller instruction faceplates",
    "url": "67691.htm",
    "text": "You can add faceplates to an existing application at any time.  The Add Controller Instruction Faceplates dialog box lists all the available faceplate display types. The number of controller instruction faceplates in each display type is shown after the display type and its file prefix. For example, Alarm - Logix_ALM (3 displays) means there are three controller instruction faceplates that show alarm information, and their display names will include the initials ALM.  You can choose to install all or none of the available display types. For each faceplate display type that you select, a set of .gfx (graphic display) files is added to the Displays folder and a set of corresponding .ggfx (global object display) files is added to the Global Objects folder.   To add controller instruction faceplates  Open the application in FactoryTalk View Machine Edition.  In the Explorer window, right-click the server icon (the third level down, the second icon with the application name), and select Add Controller Instruction Faceplates. The Add Controller Instruction Faceplates dialog box opens.  Select the faceplates you want to add to your application. By default, all the display types are checked. To select all the display types, click the Select All button. To clear all the check boxes, click the Clear All button.  Click OK.  Options  Select the display types to add to the project  By default, all display types are selected. To prevent a display type from being added to the application, clear the check box beside it.  Tip:  Adding faceplate displays to an application affects the license count. Each added faceplate display (.gfx file) counts as one display for activation purposes. The corresponding global object display (.ggfx file) does not add to the total license count.   If you make changes to the faceplates in your application, remember that these changes are local to that application. If you want these changes to be available to other applications on other computers, copy the changed files back to the shared location. Faceplate files are stored in \\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\Faceplates.  See also  About controller instruction faceplates  About controller instruction faceplate displays  About controller instruction faceplate global objects  Controller instruction faceplates display list  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2475,
    "title": "Controller instruction faceplates display list",
    "url": "67697.htm",
    "text": "The following table provides a list of files relevant to controller instruction faceplates.  Display File (*.gfx)  Global Object File (*.ggfx)  Logix_PhaseManager  Logix_PhaseManager  Logix_ALM  Logix_ALM  Logix_ALM_Config  Logix_ALM_Config  Logix_ALM_Status  Logix_ALM_Status  Logix_ALMA  Logix_ALMA  Logix_ALMA_Config  Logix_ALMA_Config  Logix_ALMA_Status  Logix_ALMA_Status  Logix_ALMD  Logix_ALMD  Logix_ALMD_Config  Logix_ALMD_Config  Logix_ALMD_Status  Logix_ALMD_Status  Logix_D2SD  Logix_D2SD  Logix_D2SD_Status  Logix_D2SD_Status  Logix_D3SD  Logix_D3SD  Logix_D3SD_Status  Logix_D3SD_Status  Logix_ESEL  Logix_ESEL  Logix_ESEL_Status  Logix_ESEL_Status  Logix_PIDE  Logix_PIDE  Logix_PIDE_Autotune  Logix_PIDE_Autotune  Logix_PIDE_Config  Logix_PIDE_Config  Logix_PIDE_Status  Logix_PIDE_Status  Logix_PIDE_Trend  Logix_PIDE_Trend  Logix_PIDE_Tune  Logix_PIDE_Tune  Logix_RMPS  Logix_RMPS  Logix_RMPS_Config  Logix_RMPS_Config  Logix_RMPS_Status  Logix_RMPS_Status  Logix_TOT  Logix_TOT  Logix_TOT_Config  Logix_TOT_Config  Logix_TOT_Status  Logix_TOT_Status  See also  About controller instruction faceplate displays  Controller instruction faceplates tag passing  Add a segment number \"n\" to Logix_RMPS Main Faceplate  Add a segment number \"n\" to Logix_RMPS_Config Faceplate  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2476,
    "title": "Controller instruction faceplates tag passing",
    "url": "67699.htm",
    "text": "The following table indicates the contents that are expected to be contained within parameter files passed to the faceplates for an instruction to provide full functionality.  Note that the arrays passed to the RMPS faceplates are expected to be of length 10 or less. You will be required to modify the RMPS and RMPS_Config faceplates to add additional segments.  Instruction Name  Displays  Placeholder Tags  Logix_ALM  Logix_ALM  Logix_ALM_Status  Logix_ALM_Config  #1= Backing tag  Logix_ALMA  Logix_ALMA  Logix_ALMA_Status  Logix_ALMA_Config  #1= Backing tag  Logix_ALMD  Logix_ALMD  Logix_ALMD_Status  Logix_ALMD_Config  #1= Backing tag  Logix_D2SD  Logix_D2SD  Logix_D2SD_Status  #1= Backing tag  Logix_D3SD  Logix_D3SD  Logix_D3SD_Status  #1= Backing tag  Logix_ESEL  Logix_ESEL  Logix_ESEL_Status  #1= Backing tag  Logix_PhaseManager  Logix_PhaseManager  #1=Phase Tag  Logix_PIDE  Logix_PIDE  Logix_PIDE_Status  Logix_PIDE_Config  Logix_PIDE_Trend  Logix_PIDE_Tune  Logix_PIDE_Autotune  #1= Backing tag  #2=Autotune tag (if used)  Logix_RMPS*  Logix_RMPS  Logix_RMPS_Status  Logix_RMPS_Config  #1= Backing tag  #2=Ramp Value Array  #3=Soak Value Array  #4=Soak Time Array  Logix_TOT  Logix_TOT  Logix_TOT_Status  Logix_TOT_Config  #1= Backing tag  See also  About controller instruction faceplates  Controller instruction faceplates display list  Add a segment number \"n\" to Logix_RMPS Main Faceplate  Add a segment number \"n\" to Logix_RMPS_Config Faceplate  Backing Tag  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2477,
    "title": "Add a segment number &quot;n&quot; to Logix_RMPS Main Faceplate",
    "url": "67703.htm",
    "text": "The Logix_RMPS faceplates support RampSoak function blocks of up to 10 segments. If more than 10 segments are needed, you may need to add a segment number \"n\" to Logix_RMPS Main Faceplate.  To add a segment number \"n\" to Logix_RMPS Main Faceplate  On the SegmentsPanel_Group-->RampingIndicator_Group-->RampingIndicator_Ellipse, add the following to the color animation expression:  Else If ({#1.CurrentSeg} == n) AND NOT {#1.Hold} then ({#4[n]} == {#1.SoakTimeLeft})  On the SegmentsPanel_Group-->SoakingIndicator_Group-->SoakingIndicator_Ellipse, add the following to the color animation expression:  Else If ({#1.CurrentSeg} == n) AND NOT {#1.Hold} then ({#4[n]} {#1.SoakTimeLeft})  On the RampPanel_Group-->RampValue_Group-->RampValue_NumericDisplay, add the following to the value expression:  Else If #1.CurrentSeg == n Then #2[n]  On the SoakPanel_Group-->SoakValue_Group-->SoakValue_NumericDisplay, add the following to the value expression:  Else If #1.CurrentSeg == n Then #3[n]  On the SoakPanel_Group-->SoakTime_Group-->SoakTime_NumericDisplay, add the following to the value expression:  Else If #1.CurrentSeg == n Then #4[n]  See also  About controller instruction faceplates  Controller instruction faceplates display list  Controller instruction faceplates tag passing  Add a segment number \"n\" to Logix_RMPS_Config Faceplate  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2478,
    "title": "Add a segment number &quot;n&quot; to Logix_RMPS_Config Faceplate",
    "url": "298860.htm",
    "text": "The Logix_RMPS faceplates support RampSoak function blocks of up to 10 segments. If more than 10 segments are needed, you may need to add a segment number \"n\" to Logix_RMPS_Config Faceplate.  To add a segment number \"n\" to Logix_RMPS_Config Faceplate  In Object Explorer, make a copy of the last Segment Group, typically SegmentDataPanel_Group-->Segment9_Group.  Paste it at the same level, under SegmentDataPanel_Group.  Rename the Polygon, Text, and NumericDisplays to your preference.  Select the Text item created and change its value to n.  Change the Ramp Value NumericDisplay's general expression to:  if ( {#1.NumberOfSegs} > n) then {#2.[n]} else -1  Change the Soak Value NumericDisplay's general expression to:  if ( {#1.NumberOfSegs} > n) then {#3.[n]} else -1  Change the Soak Time NumericDisplay's general expression to:  if ( {#1.NumberOfSegs} > n) then {#4.[n]} else -1  Change the visibility animation for the Polygon to:  {#1.CurrentSeg} == n)  Change the visibility animation for the whole Segment Group you created to:  {#1.NumberOfSegs} > n  Resize the Logix_RMPS_Config faceplate and move the new Segment Group to line up with the others.  See also  About controller instruction faceplates  Controller instruction faceplates display list  Controller instruction faceplates tag passing  Add a segment number \"n\" to Logix_RMPS Main Faceplate  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2479,
    "title": "Backing Tag",
    "url": "67701.htm",
    "text": "Fully qualified path to the instruction.  See also  Controller instruction faceplates tag passing  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2480,
    "title": "Import graphic images into your application",
    "url": "67332.htm",
    "text": "You can use these types of external graphic files in graphic displays:  .bmp - bitmap images  .jpg - JPEG images  .dxf - AutoCAD files  .wmf - Windows metafiles  Tip:  To add an image to a graphic display, first create an image object.  To place an image on a graphic object, use the Property Panel, or open the Properties dialog box for the object. If you use the Property Panel, you can place the same image on multiple selected objects simultaneously.  To import a .dxf or .wmf graphic image  Use the Object menu to import .dxf or .wmf files.  From the Objects menu, select Import.  Drag the Import cursor to create a rectangle the size you want the imported object to be. When you release the cursor, a browser window opens.  Navigate to the directory where the image file is stored.  Select the image file to import and click Open.  No bitmap information in these files will be imported. The images will be converted to simple drawing objects, such as lines, polylines, polygons, ellipses, etc.  Tip:  As .dxf and .wmf graphics can be made up of very large numbers of individual drawing objects, too many can impact system performance.  To import a bitmap (.bmp) or JPEG (.jpg) graphic image  There are three ways to import .bmp and .jpg graphic images into your application:  Right-click the Images icon in the Explorer window's Graphics folder and select Add Component Into Application. This opens a browser window that you can use to select the image type and locate the image.  Use the Image Browser dialog box. This dialog box opens when you create an image object, or when you click the Browse button in any Image property panel or Properties dialog box selection. You can also use this dialog box to remove images from the project.  Open two instances of FactoryTalk View Studio, then drag an image from an application in one instance of FactoryTalk View Studio to an application in another instance of FactoryTalk View Studio.  To import a bitmap (.bmp) or JPEG (.jpg) graphic image with the Image Browser  Open the Image Browser. If you are creating an image object, the Image Browser opens as soon as you have drawn the space on the display. If you are adding an image to an object in a display, open the object's Properties dialog box or Property Panel and then, in the Images property, click the Browse button (...).  Click Add from File to open a Windows Open dialog box.  Navigate to the directory where the images are stored.  Select the images to import and click OK. The dialog box closes and the images appear in the Image Browser's Select image list.  Click OK to close the Image Browser dialog box.  Tip:  To preview images before you import them, click the View Menu icon at the top right of the Windows Open dialog box, and select Thumbnails.  To add an image from Symbol Factory to a graphic object using the image browser  In the graphic display, draw the graphic object you are going to import an image for. The Image Browser will open.  In the Image Browser, click Launch Library. Symbol Factory will open as a new window.  Browse the Categories frame, clicking on a category to see the symbols in the right frame.  Click on the graphic to select it for the Graphic Display.  Click Copy, the Symbol Factory minimizes, returning to the Image Browser.  Click the Paste from Library button. A dialog box Image Name Entry will open.  Type a unique name for the image and click OK.  The graphic will now be shown in the Preview window. The graphic has been added to the list in the Image Browser. This also adds the image to the Images folder in the Explorer window.  Click OK to close the Image Browser. The image will be in the Graphic Display.  To remove a .bmp or .jpg graphic image from the application  Right-click the image's name in the Images folder and select Remove from the Context menu. Remove will not delete the file from the disk.  To delete a .bmp or .jpg graphic image from the application  There are two ways to delete an image:  Right-click the image's name in the Images folder and select Delete from the Context menu. Delete will delete the file from the disk.  In the Image Browser's Select image list, select the image to remove and click Delete. At the prompt, click OK to confirm.  See also  Use the Property Panel  The Graphics editor  View images in your project  Using Symbol Factory  ",
    "keywords": {
      "import": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2481,
    "title": "View images in your application",
    "url": "67334.htm",
    "text": "To view an image and its attributes  Use the Image Viewer to view the application's bitmap and jpeg images and their attributes.  In the Explorer window's Graphics folder, double-click Images.  Double-click the image in the list. The Image Viewer opens, showing the image and its attributes, that is, the image's type, width, height, and format.  See also  Import graphic images into your application  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2482,
    "title": "The Graphic Libraries",
    "url": "67238.htm",
    "text": "There are two graphic libraries that are available, Symbol Factory and Graphics Library. The Graphics Library comes with a number of ready-made graphic displays containing objects that you can use in other displays. The sample graphic displays in the libraries show you how to:  use drawing objects and interactive objects in your graphic displays  set up the different objects to interact with each other  use visual design elements, such as the color and arrangement of objects in the display, to make your displays easy to use  To use objects from the Graphic Libraries  Open the library display containing the objects you want to use.  Open the graphic display you want to put the objects in.  Drag and drop the objects from the library display to the graphic display.  Any animation that has been attached to an object will be carried along with it.  To use objects from Symbol Factory  Open the graphic display you intend to put the objects in.  Click on Symbol Factory from the Explorer, the Objects menu, or the icon in the Objects toolbar.  Select the category for the graphic you are looking for and browse the thumbnail images.  Select the image object you want to use.  Drag and drop the object from Symbol Factory to the graphic display.  Note that Symbol Factory offers other features to modify the image before bringing it into the display. The topic \"Use Symbol Factory\" has more information.  To create a new display for the Graphic Libraries  To open the editor, right-click Libraries and select New, or drag-and-drop the library icon into the display pane.  Create the display just as you would any graphic display.  Save the graphic display. It is automatically saved in the Libraries directory.  To copy an existing graphic display to the Graphic Libraries  Highlight Libraries, then right-click to display the context menu.  Choose Add Component Into Application from the Context menu.  Select the graphic display you want to add, then click OK.  To set up support for multiple languages in a graphic library  By default, libraries shipped with FactoryTalk View are not set up to support multiple languages. Text strings in these libraries always display as shipped, regardless of the current application language, and will never show as undefined. If you change these displays to support multiple languages (using the steps below), only those text strings in the library that are in the current application language will show correctly. Strings in any other language will display as undefined, that is, as question marks.  On the other hand, new library displays that you create in an application do support multiple languages by default. If the objects in your application displays already have multiple language strings, copying them to the library display will not automatically delete any strings that are not in the current application language. If you turn off multiple language support for a new library display, only text strings using the current application language will be saved. All others will be deleted when you save the change.  In the Explorer window, double-click the library to open the display.  Right-click the graphic library display and then click Display Settings.  In the Properties tab, select the Support Multiple Languages check box. To remove support for multiple languages, clear the check box.  When you save the graphic library display, all strings that support language switching are saved in the application's current language.  Tip:  If you copy an object from a graphic library that supports multiple languages into a graphic display, only strings using a language that is supported by the application are copied. Any strings using a language that has not been added to the application are not copied.  If you copy an entire graphic library that supports multiple languages into the Displays folder, all text strings are copied with the library.  See also  Create graphic displays  Edit graphic displays  Use Symbol Factory  Locate the graphic libraries  The Graphic Libraries  Context menu  ",
    "keywords": {
      "graphic library": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2483,
    "title": "Locate the graphic libraries",
    "url": "67236.htm",
    "text": "To see the location of the graphic libraries (listed under the Libraries icon in the Explorer window), in the Tools menu, click Options and then click the General tab.  By default, FactoryTalk View Studio Machine Edition stores its library files in \\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\Libraries.  To use your own files as libraries instead of the defaults, click the Browse button at the right of the window and navigate to the location of the folder containing the files you want to use. The path will appear in the window and the graphic files will appear in the Libraries list.  Tip:  To use your own graphic libraries, but still retain the default display libraries such as [DIAGNOSTICS], copy any files you want to include as libraries, from their default location into the folder you are using as the Libraries location.  See also  Use the Graphic Libraries  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2484,
    "title": "Use Symbol Factory",
    "url": "67240.htm",
    "text": "Symbol Factory is a third-party graphics library that provides a large number of quality graphic elements for industrial automation, including pumps, pipes, valves, tanks, mixers, motors, ducts, electrical symbols, flow meters, material handling, sensors, PLCs, transmitters, and ISA symbols. These graphics can be used on graphic displays.  To open Symbol Factory  From the Explorer, select Symbol Factory Object.  When the Objects menu is available, select the Symbol Factory menu item.  When the Objects toolbar is available, click the Symbol Factory icon.  To select a graphic  Browse the Categories frame, clicking on a category to see the symbols in the right frame.  Click on the graphic to select it for the Graphic Display.  If the graphic is to be used in this original state, it can be dragged and dropped into the Graphic Display.  To manipulate the graphic  With the graphic selected, it can be modified using Symbol Factory  Select Options on the menu.  Select Symbol Options from the Drop down menu.  The Symbol Options dialog box allows the graphic to be modified in several ways. The orientation can be changed, it can be rotated, and the fill color can be changed and applied to the graphic in different modes.  The Preview frame will show the changes made to the graphic.  When finished modifying, the graphic can be dragged and dropped from the Preview frame to the Graphic Display, or copied and pasted into the Graphic Display.  You can also add an image from Symbol Factory to a graphic object using the image browser, which will also save the graphic in the Images folder for additional use in other displays.  Options  Fill Color Mode  Original - Fill colors are not changed.  Shaded - Fill colors are shaded according to the selected fill color.  Solid - Fill colors are solid according to the selected fill color.  Hollow - Fill colors are removed.  Fill Color  Click on this box to change the fill color. Fill color box is enabled only if the Fill Color Mode is set to Shaded or Solid.  Flip  None -&nbsp;Picture will not be flipped.  Horizontal - Picture will be flipped horizontally.  Vertical - Picture will be flipped vertically.  Both - Picture will be flipped horizontally and vertically.  Rotation  0 - Picture will not be rotated.  90 - Picture will be rotated 90 degrees.  180 - Picture will be rotated 180 degrees.  270 - Picture will be rotated 270 degrees.  Background Color  Click on this box to change the background color for exporting metafiles as bitmaps.  Tip:  This setting will have NO EFFECT when exporting images as metafiles, VML, or SVG formats.  Defaults Button  Click on this button to return all symbol options to their default values.  ",
    "keywords": {
      "symbol factory": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2485,
    "title": "Parameter file and parameter list",
    "url": "67177.htm",
    "text": "When you open a graphic display that has tag placeholders, you specify a parameter file or a parameter list that will supply tag names or parts of tag names for the tag placeholders. This lets you use different sets of tags with a single graphic display.  Parameter list and parameter file work in the same way, replacing tag placeholders with actual tags at run time. The difference between them is that a parameter file is created as a separate file and is referenced by the graphic objects and displays that use it, while a parameter list is created with the object properties and remains with the displays and objects. If you copy displays that use parameter files from one application to another, you must also copy the associated parameter files. If you copy displays that use parameter lists, the lists are copied with the displays and their objects.  A parameter file can reference up to 500 placeholders. Use parameter files for displays that require large numbers of placeholders, and parameter lists for displays with only a few placeholders.  Use parameter file or parameter list to replace placeholders in:  The graphic display that opens when the application is first run. Specify the graphic display to open, and the parameter file or parameter list to use with it, in the Startup editor.  Graphic displays that are opened using a Goto Display button, Logout button, or Display List Selector. Specify the graphic display to open, and the parameter file or parameter list to use with it, when you set up the button or selector.  The graphic display that opens when the Logout button is pressed to log the user out.  The graphic display specified on Runtime tab of the Project Settings dialog box when auto logout is enabled.  Graphic displays that are opened using the Remote Display Number global connection. Specify the display on the Display tab of the Global Connections editor.  When the graphic display opens at run time, the application substitutes the string specified in the parameter file or parameter list for the tag placeholders on the graphic display.  See also  Tag placeholders  Configure startup settings  Specify project setting (Runtime tab)  Set up global connections - Display tab  Use tag placeholders  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2486,
    "title": "Parameter file and parameter list",
    "url": "78502.htm",
    "text": "When you open a graphic display that has tag placeholders, you specify a parameter file or a parameter list that will supply tag names or parts of tag names for the tag placeholders. This lets you use different sets of tags with a single graphic display.  Parameter list and parameter file work in the same way, replacing tag placeholders with actual tags at run time. The difference between them is that a parameter file is created as a separate file and is referenced by the graphic objects and displays that use it, while a parameter list is created with the object properties and remains with the displays and objects. If you copy displays that use parameter files from one application to another, you must also copy the associated parameter files. If you copy displays that use parameter lists, the lists are copied with the displays and their objects.  A parameter file can reference up to 500 placeholders. Use parameter files for displays that require large numbers of placeholders, and parameter lists for displays with only a few placeholders.  Use parameter file or parameter list to replace placeholders in:  The graphic display that opens when the application is first run. Specify the graphic display to open, and the parameter file or parameter list to use with it, in the Startup editor.  Graphic displays that are opened using a Goto Display button, Logout button, or Display List Selector. Specify the graphic display to open, and the parameter file or parameter list to use with it, when you set up the button or selector.  The graphic display that opens when the Logout button is pressed to log the user out.  The graphic display specified on Runtime tab of the Project Settings dialog box when auto logout is enabled.  Graphic displays that are opened using the Remote Display Number global connection. Specify the display on the Display tab of the Global Connections editor.  When the graphic display opens at run time, the application substitutes the string specified in the parameter file or parameter list for the tag placeholders on the graphic display.  See also  Tag placeholders  Configure startup settings  Specify project setting (Runtime tab)  Set up global connections - Display tab  Use tag placeholders  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2487,
    "title": "Create a parameter file",
    "url": "67183.htm",
    "text": "If a graphic display contains tag placeholders, you can specify a parameter file to supply tag or folder names, or parts of tag names, for the placeholders at run time or in test display mode. This allows you to use different sets of tags with a single graphic display.  Tip:  The recommended maximum number of tag placeholders to be used for a single graphic display is 500.  If the display contains a display list selector object, you can also provide parameters for tag placeholders, using a parameter list.  To create a parameter file:  Open the Parameters editor using one of these methods:  From the File menu, select New > Parameter.  In the Explorer window, double-click the Graphics folder to expand it, right-click Parameters and select New.  In the Parameters editor, for each tag placeholder in the graphic display, type a definition using the format:  <#number>=<string> where string can be a tag or folder name, or any part of a tag name, for any kind of tag.  For example, to use a tag called Pea_Weight in a folder called Canning, the definition in the parameter file could be one of these:  #1=Pea_Weight  #1=Canning\\Pea_Weight  #1=Canning  Using only the folder name Canning, the graphic display could contain the placeholders, #1\\Weight, #1\\Level, and #1\\Temp.  Tip:  Instead of typing the tag name, you can use the Tag Browser. Double-click in the editor and select a tag. The selected tag name is inserted in front of the cursor.  Save the file using a name that will identify the set of tags defined in the file, for example, Canning display tags.  Tip:  The parameter file editor automatically inserts these characters at the top of the file:  @!=1  This means that only if the exclamation mark is at the beginning of a line, will the text that follows the exclamation mark be treated as a comment. If an exclamation mark occurs anywhere else on the line, whatever follows it is not treated as a comment.   To be able to start a comment elsewhere in a line, delete @!=1 from the beginning of the parameter file. When you do this, an exclamation mark can be placed anywhere in a line, and whatever follows it is treated as a comment.  The parameter can be any portion of a tag name. When a parameter file is called, the placeholder is replaced with whatever portion of the tag name is specified by its corresponding parameter.  See also  Parameter file and parameter list  Create parameter lists  Causes of run-time errors for parameter files  Tag placeholders  Parameter passing  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2488,
    "title": "Create a parameter file",
    "url": "78501.htm",
    "text": "If a graphic display contains tag placeholders, you can specify a parameter file to supply tag or folder names, or parts of tag names, for the placeholders at run time or in test display mode. This allows you to use different sets of tags with a single graphic display.  Tip:  The recommended maximum number of tag placeholders to be used for a single graphic display is 500.  If the display contains a display list selector object, you can also provide parameters for tag placeholders, using a parameter list.  To create a parameter file:  Open the Parameters editor using one of these methods:  From the File menu, select New > Parameter.  In the Explorer window, double-click the Graphics folder to expand it, right-click Parameters and select New.  In the Parameters editor, for each tag placeholder in the graphic display, type a definition using the format:  <#number>=<string> where string can be a tag or folder name, or any part of a tag name, for any kind of tag.  For example, to use a tag called Pea_Weight in a folder called Canning, the definition in the parameter file could be one of these:  #1=Pea_Weight  #1=Canning\\Pea_Weight  #1=Canning  Using only the folder name Canning, the graphic display could contain the placeholders, #1\\Weight, #1\\Level, and #1\\Temp.  Tip:  Instead of typing the tag name, you can use the Tag Browser. Double-click in the editor and select a tag. The selected tag name is inserted in front of the cursor.  Save the file using a name that will identify the set of tags defined in the file, for example, Canning display tags.  Tip:  The parameter file editor automatically inserts these characters at the top of the file:  @!=1  This means that only if the exclamation mark is at the beginning of a line, will the text that follows the exclamation mark be treated as a comment. If an exclamation mark occurs anywhere else on the line, whatever follows it is not treated as a comment.   To be able to start a comment elsewhere in a line, delete @!=1 from the beginning of the parameter file. When you do this, an exclamation mark can be placed anywhere in a line, and whatever follows it is treated as a comment.  The parameter can be any portion of a tag name. When a parameter file is called, the placeholder is replaced with whatever portion of the tag name is specified by its corresponding parameter.  See also  Parameter file and parameter list  Create parameter lists  Causes of run-time errors for parameter files  Tag placeholders  Parameter passing  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2489,
    "title": "Example: Replace placeholders with tag names",
    "url": "67181.htm",
    "text": "The following example shows how to replace placeholders with tag names.  To run a display called Canning that has three tag placeholders, for the tags Pea_Weight, Pea_Level, and Pea_Temp  On the Canning graphic display, create three numeric display objects.  On the Connections tab for the first object, assign the placeholder #1 to the Value control.  Assign the placeholders #2 and #3 to the Value controls for the second and third objects, respectively.  Create a parameter file called Peas:  #1=Pea_Weight  #2=Pea_Level  #3=Pea_Temp  On another graphic display, for example, the main display or an overview display, create a Goto Display button.  Assign the Canning graphic display and the Peas parameter file to the button.  Run the application and press the Goto button to open the Canning display.  The numeric display with #1 will show the tag value for Pea_Weight, the numeric display with #2 will show the tag value for Pea_Level, and the numeric display with #3 will show the tag value for Pea_Temp.  See also  Create a parameter file  Replace a tag name or character string  Tag placeholders  Example: Replace placeholders with any part of a tag name  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2490,
    "title": "Example: Replace placeholders with any part of a tag name",
    "url": "300236.htm",
    "text": "When tags are addressed through a data server, the format of the tag string depends on the server. If the format is [Device]Item, the parameter file could use a placeholder to replace either of these parts, as in:  #1=Device1  #2=Carrots_Weight  If the data server syntax was Device.Folder.Tag, the parameter file could use placeholders to replace any or all of these parts at run time. The parameter file might contain:  #1=Device1  #2=Canning  #3=Peas_Weight  #4=Carrots_Weight  A tag address could replace Device with #1, Folder with #2 and Tag with #3 or #4.  See also  Create a parameter file  Replace a tag name or character string  Tag placeholders  Example: Replace placeholders with tag names  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2491,
    "title": "Create a parameter list",
    "url": "67185.htm",
    "text": "When you create a graphic display that has tag placeholders, you can specify a parameter list that will supply tag or folder names, or parts of tag names, for the tag placeholders. At run time, you can use a parameter list to replace the tag placeholders with whatever string you have defined for the placeholder.  The parameter list option appears on various tabs of the Properties dialog boxes for the objects that use them, for example, the States tab of the Display Selector object, and the General tab of the Logout button object, and in the Initial graphics option in the Startup editor.  To create a parameter list  Open the Properties dialog box of the object or the Startup editor and click the Parameter list button.  Click the browse button (...) to open the Tag Browser.  Select the first tag or folder to add to the list and click OK.  Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each additional tag in the list. Each tag in the parameter list text box is separated from the previous tag by a comma.  Tip:  You can use a tag placeholder in curly brackets instead of a tag in a parameter list to pass a parameter forward from one display to another display that opens from it.  The first tag in the list will replace #1 in the display expressions, the second tag in the list will replace #2, and so on. A parameter list stays with the object when it is copied or duplicated.  See also  Parameter file and parameter list  Create a parameter file  Tag placeholders  Parameter passing  The Tag Browser  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2492,
    "title": "Parameter passing",
    "url": "67187.htm",
    "text": "You can use parameter files or parameter lists to pass (carry forward) parameters from one display to other related displays that open from it. To carry the same parameter forward to subsequent displays, assign the same tag placeholder (for example, #1), instead of a tag name in the parameter list or parameter file field of the object in the related display.  Example: Use a parameter list to replace tag placeholders in linked displays  This example uses PIDE faceplate displays to demonstrate parameter passing.  The main, or first level display, is called MAIN. It has a Goto display button that opens a Logix_PIDE faceplate display. The faceplate has a Goto display button that opens a Trend faceplate.  On the Main display, the Goto display button has the parameter list option on the General tab selected, and a structure tag name, with a shortcut, selected from the Tag Browser to represent #1: {::[PLC1] Program:Fermenter_Temp.Tank_PIDE01}, for example.  When the button is pressed, the Logix_PIDE faceplate opens. The objects on the faceplate have been set up to read the tags in the structure: #1.CV, #1.SP, and so on. The objects replace the parameter #1 with the structure tag name and then derive their values from the structure elements they have been set up to read.  To carry the same parameters forward another level, the Goto display button on the Logix_PIDE faceplate display has the parameter list option on its General tab selected, and the parameter {#1} typed in. When this button is pressed, the Trend faceplate opens, and its objects in turn replace their #1 parameters with the same structure tag name, and read their values from the appropriate elements.  See also  Create parameter files  Create parameter lists  Causes of run-time errors for parameter files  Tag placeholders  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2493,
    "title": "Replace tag placeholders in test display mode",
    "url": "202081.htm",
    "text": "The Test Display dialog box appears when testing a display if one or more tag placeholders are defined in the display. You can specify a parameter file or list to replace them with the actual tag names. You can also click Cancel to quit the display testing and go back to the Edit mode.  Tip:  # followed by a number is reserved for tag placeholders. It is not recommended to use this format in other cases, such as static text. If you must use # followed by a number in static text, add a space or _ between # and the number. For example, enter #_3 or # 3.  Parameter File  Select this option if the parameter values will be provided by a parameter file.   Click the browse button and select a file in the Component Browser. The parameter file assigns tags to tag placeholders in the display when the display runs.  Parameter List  Select this option if the parameter values will be provided by a parameter list.  All tag placeholders in the display are listed. Enter a tag name or value for the placeholder. You can also click the browse button to select a tag.  See also  Use parameter files and parameter lists  Create parameter files  Create parameter lists  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2494,
    "title": "Causes of run-time errors for parameter files",
    "url": "67189.htm",
    "text": "At run time the application logs errors about parameter files to diagnostics if:  the specified parameter file for a graphic display is missing  the tag placeholder in the parameter file is not in the graphic display  the tag or folder specified in the parameter file does not exist  See also  Create parameter files  Use parameter files  Tag placeholders  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2495,
    "title": "About RecipePlus",
    "url": "67831.htm",
    "text": "The basic purpose of a recipe system is to allow the user to write a set of values to a set of tags in a single operation. Use the FactoryTalk View Studio RecipePlus system to perform this and other related tasks.  The RecipePlus system  RecipePlus consists of the following parts:  RecipePlus Setup &#8212; used to specify whether recipe files will be a part of the HMI project or not, and where the files will be stored for retrieval at run time.  RecipePlus editor &#8212; used to create and edit the recipe files by specifying the ingredients of the recipe, the data sets and tag sets the recipe will use, and the recipe units. You can also use the editor to compare one recipe file to another, or data sets and tag sets within a single recipe file, and determine where they are different.  RecipePlus table object &#8212; used to display, modify, and save the contents of a recipe at run time. The table also shows the differences between the recipe data values and the values in the tags associated with the recipe.  RecipePlus button object &#8212; used to initiate recipe operations at run time.  RecipePlus selector object &#8212; used to select from a list of recipes available to the operator at run time.  Recipe operations  The RecipePlus system supports the following run-time operations. Recipe units are selected in the selector object.  Download &#8212; for the selected recipe unit, writes the ingredient values in the data set to the tags in the tag set  Upload &#8212; for the selected recipe unit, reads the tag values in the tag set and save those values to the data set in a recipe file  Upload and create &#8212; for the selected recipe unit, reads the tag values in a tag set and creates a new recipe unit by writing those values to a new data set  Save &#8212; saves the values in a recipe table object to the selected recipe unit  Restore &#8212; loads the data set and tag set values for the selected recipe unit to a recipe table object  Delete &#8212; deletes the selected recipe unit from the recipe file  Rename &#8212; renames the selected recipe unit  Tip:  The above operations are initiated by pressing a RecipePlus button. There must be a button on the display for each operation that you want to perform.  The RecipePlus button operates in conjunction with the RecipePlus selector object. Therefore, the selector object must appear on the display.  Since the save and restore operations involve the RecipePlus table object, the RecipePlus table object must appear on the display.  The FactoryTalk View ME recipe system is primarily intended for use over networks such as Ethernet, ControlNet Unscheduled, and DH+, that allow data to be both read from and written to the same tag address in the controller. If unidirectional networks such as Remote I/O, ControlNet Scheduled, and DeviceNet I/O, are used, tag sets and data sets can only be downloaded or uploaded, not both. Therefore, unidirectional networks are not recommended for use with RecipePlus.  See also  What is a recipe file?  Data set  Tag set  ",
    "keywords": {
      "RecipePlus": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2496,
    "title": "About recipes",
    "url": "163577.htm",
    "text": "A recipe is a set of numeric and string data values (ingredients) that can be downloaded to their associated tags at the data source. Each ingredient has a pre-set data value assigned to it. The set of data values for all the ingredients in a recipe is called a data set. The set of numeric and string tags assigned to the ingredients in the recipe is called a tag set. The ingredients, data sets, and tag sets are stored together in a recipe file.  You can create different pairs of data sets and tag sets for the same set of ingredients. Each pairing of data set with tag set is called a unit. Each unit is like a unique recipe. At runtime, the operator can select the unit (recipe) that applies to the current operation.  For example, a bakery making whole wheat bread could use the same ingredients and tag sets, but depending on the type of crust desired, could use different data sets to specify different baking temperatures. As another example, you might want to have multiple production lines baking the same bread. In this case, the data set for all the production lines would be the same, but the tags receiving the recipe information would be different for each production line. Units allow you to combine different tag sets and data sets for the same set of ingredients.  The FactoryTalk View RecipePlus system allows you to create up to 15,000 ingredients, 500 data sets, 50 tag sets, and 2,500 units for each recipe file. You can create data sets at development time, edit them at runtime, and create new data sets from tag values at runtime. You can write the data set values to tags, or write tag values to data sets.  The RecipePlus system can be used for manufacturing food and beverages, but it can also be used for any application where you want to show, edit, download, or save multiple values at once. For example, recipes are used in the petrochemical and pharmaceutical industries. In the pharmaceutical industry, you could use recipes to design flexible packaging, creating recipes that specify the number of tissues to put in a box or the number of milliliters of shampoo to put in a bottle.  Units make it possible to combine different tag sets and data sets for the same set of ingredients.  As shown in the example, there are three labelers. Each one has its own set of tags which are grouped in a tag set. Each tag in the tag set is linked to an ingredient.  In the recipe, there are three different data sets of label colors: red, yellow, and blue.  Every data type within the data set is linked to an ingredient.  These three data sets can be used by any labeler because a unit is used to combine a tag set and a data set.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2497,
    "title": "What is a recipe file?",
    "url": "67841.htm",
    "text": "A recipe file is a specific set of data values that are associated with a specific set of tags. The function of the recipe system is to allow a run-time operator to write each data value to its associated tag in one operation.  A recipe file consists of:  a run-time recipe name  a status tag  a percent-complete tag  one or more ingredients  one or more data sets  one or more tag sets  one or more recipe units  See also  About RecipePlus  Recipe name  A unique name to be displayed at run time.  Data set  Tag set  ",
    "keywords": {
      "recipe file": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2498,
    "title": "Set up RecipePlus",
    "url": "67848.htm",
    "text": "At run time, recipe files can either be a part of the HMI project, or can be stored in some other location. Use the RecipePlus Setup dialog box to specify where the recipe files will be located at run time.  At design time, only recipe files that are within the HMI project can be edited.  Important:  If you select to store the recipe files outside of the HMI project at run time, you must move the files manually from within the HMI project to the desired location before running the application.  If you select Recipe files are NOT part of the HMI project in the RecipePlus Setup editor, do not include an IP address in the path that appears in the Folder where recipe files will be located at runtime text box. Instead of an IP address, be sure to use the computer name.  To set up RecipePlus  Double-click the RecipePlus Setup node in the Application Explorer.  Specify whether recipe files will be part of the HMI project at run time.  If recipe files are not part of the HMI project, specify their run-time location.  Options  Recipe file location  Recipe files are part of the HMI project  Select this radio button if recipe files will be part of the HMI project at run time. Recipe files appear under the RecipePlus editor node in the Application Explorer. The recipe folder in the HMI project will be named RecipePlus.  When this option is selected, all of the recipe files in the HMI project will be included in the ME runtime application (*.mer). This is the default behavior.  Recipe files are NOT part of the HMI project  Select this radio button to specify an alternative location for recipe files at run time.  Click the Browse button to browse to the desired location. At run time, the recipe system will look for recipe files in this folder rather than in the HMI project recipe folder.  When this option is selected, none of the recipe files in the HMI project or in the specified folder will be included in the ME runtime application.  See also  About RecipePlus  What is a recipe file?  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2499,
    "title": "Create recipe files",
    "url": "67850.htm",
    "text": "Recipe files define recipe units that pair sets of data values with sets of tags so that operators can write the values to the tags in one operation. When you create a recipe file, you define the ingredients that make up the recipe, whether they are number or string type, whether there will be maximum and minimum value limits, what the data values for each ingredient will be, and what tag each value will be written to. You create a recipe unit by associating a data set with a tag set.  Use the RecipePlus editor to create and edit recipe files. An HMI project can include multiple recipe files.  To create a recipe file  Open the RecipePlus editor using one of these methods:  If the RecipePlus editor folder is empty, double-click the RecipePlus editor folder icon; this creates a new recipe file and opens the editor on that file.  Right-click the RecipePlus editor folder icon and select New from the Context menu; this creates a new recipe file and opens the editor on that file.  From the File menu, select New > RecipePlus; this creates a new recipe file and opens the editor on that file.  Right-click an existing recipe file in the folder and select Open from the Context menu.  Double-click an existing recipe file in the folder.  Define the recipe file in the General, Ingredients and Units tabs of the Properties dialog box.  Tip:  Multiple instances of the RecipePlus editor can be open at one time; however, only one instance of any recipe file can be open at any one time.  When the RecipePlus editor is open, the menu bar at the top of the FactoryTalk View Studio frame will include two additional menus: Edit and Recipe.  See also  What is a recipe file?  Set up general recipe properties (General tab)  Setup RecipePlus  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2500,
    "title": "Set up general recipe properties (General tab)",
    "url": "67852.htm",
    "text": "In the General tab, give the recipe file a unique run-time name and specify a status tag and a percent complete tag.  Options  Runtime recipe name  Type a unique, user-friendly name for the recipe file. This is the name the recipe selector will use at run time. (This string does not allow run-time language switching.)  Status tag  Click the Browse button to open the Tag Browser and specify a tag to be used as the status tag. Alternatively, you can type in a tag string if you are sure of the tag name and address.  Percent complete tag  Click the Browse button to open the Tag Browser and specify a tag to be used as the percent complete tag. Alternatively, you can type in a tag string if you are sure of the tag name and address.  Status tag  The status tag shows the results of recipe download and upload operations:  Operation  Status  Tag set to (dec)  Tag set to (hex)  Download  start  1  0x01  successful  2  0x02  with errors  4  0x04  Upload  start  17  0x011  successful  18  0x012  with errors  20  0x014  Upload and create  start  33  0x021  successful  34  0x022  with errors  36  0x024  Delete  start  65  0x41  successful  66  0x42  with errors  68  0x44  Rename  start  129  0x81  successful  130  0x82  with errors  132  0x84  Restore  start  257  0x101  successful  258  0x102  with errors  260  0x104  Save  start  513  0x201  successful  514  0x202  with errors  516  0x204  Percent complete tag  The recipe system writes to this tag during any recipe operation to show the what percent of ingredients currently being processed have been completed.  See also  What is a recipe file?  Create recipe files  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2501,
    "title": "Set up recipe ingredients (Ingredients tab)",
    "url": "67857.htm",
    "text": "On the Ingredients tab, specify the ingredients and their types, the Min and Max values (if any), the data sets the ingredients are included in, and the tag sets associated with the data sets.  This tab functions as a standard spreadsheet. Horizontal and vertical scroll bars appear if there is more content than can be shown in the tab.  Copy and Paste  You can copy the contents of the Ingredients tab and paste them into an Excel spreadsheet or into a new recipe using the items in the Edit menu. When the Ingredients tab is open, the Edit menu is enabled. When the General or Units tab of the editor are open, the menu items in the Edit menu are disabled.  Tip:  Hidden columns will be included in cut, copy, paste or paste insert operations.  When pasting data from the Ingredients tab or Excel spreadsheet into a new recipe, make sure that the recipe you are pasting into has at least as many columns as the one you are copying from. If there are not enough columns in the new recipe, the Paste and Paste Insert menu items will not be available.  A recipe file can have up to 15000 ingredients. However, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, or PanelView Plus CE terminals have a maximum of 5000 HMI tags. If your application is intended to run on one of these terminals, be sure that not more than 5000 HMI tags are referenced by the recipe ingredients. &nbsp;Applications running on desktop, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, or PanelView Plus CE can use up to 15000 direct reference tags.  Options  Ingredient  Type the name of the ingredient. Examples might be Sugar, Nitric acid, Secret sauce, 55mm carriage bolts, 2x4 oak, etc.  This property is optional.  Type  Specify whether the data value should be interpreted as a number or a string.  If the type is Number, the value, if present, must be a valid integer or floating point number.  If the type is String, the value, if present, can be any string. The Min and Max properties do not apply.  This property is required.  Min  If the ingredient&nbsp;type is Number, type the smallest value that can be written to the tag when the recipe is downloaded or the ingredient is edited in the table at run time.  The possible range is -1.797693E+308 to 1.797693E+308.  This property is optional.  Max  If the ingredient type is Number, type the largest value that can be written to the tag when the recipe is downloaded or the ingredient is edited in the table at run time.  The possible range is -1.797693E+308 to 1.797693E+308.  This property is optional.  Data Set  When a new recipe file is created, one data set is created, and named Data Set 1. To rename or delete this data set, or to insert a new data set, click the Recipe menu at the top of the FactoryTalk View Studio frame. Data set names can have a maximum of 31 characters.  In the row for each ingredient, type the data value in the cell of the Data set column.  Tag Set  When a new recipe file is created, one tag set is created, and named Tag Set 1. To rename or delete this tag set, or to insert a new tag set, click the Recipe menu at the top of the FactoryTalk View Studio frame. Tag set names can have a maximum of 31 characters.  In the row for each ingredient, insert the tag name associated with the data value in the cell of the tag set column. You can type the tag names or select tags from the Tag Browser. To open the Tag Browser, click in the cell and press Ctrl-T, right-click in the cell and select Tag Browser, or select Tag Browser from the Edit menu.  Tip:  The FactoryTalk View ME Recipe system is primarily intended for use over networks that allow data to be read and written to the same tag address in the controller, such as Ethernet, ControlNet Unscheduled, and DH+. If unidirectional networks such as Remote I/O, ControlNet Scheduled, and DeviceNet I/O are used, tag sets and data sets can only be downloaded or uploaded, not both. Therefore, unidirectional networks are not recommended for use with RecipePlus.  Show/Hide columns  Click this box to open the Show/Hide Columns dialog box, where you can choose which columns will be shown in the Ingredients tab.  See also  Setup RecipePlus  Set up general recipe properties (General tab)  Show/Hide Columns  Set up recipe units (Units tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2502,
    "title": "The Show/Hide Column dialog box",
    "url": "67859.htm",
    "text": "How do I open the Show/Hide Column dialog box?  On the Ingredients tab of the RecipePlus Editor, click the Show/Hide Columns button.  Use the Show/Hide Column dialog box to specify which columns will be shown or hidden on the Ingredients tab.  See also  What is a recipe file?  Set up RecipePlus  Set up recipe ingredients (Ingredients tab)  Options in the Show / Hide Columns dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2503,
    "title": "Options in the Show / Hide Columns dialog box",
    "url": "299153.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options in the Show / Hide Columns dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Select columns to show  Select the check boxes of the columns you want to show on the Ingredients tab.  Clear the check boxes of the columns you want to hide on the Ingredients tab.  By default, all the check boxes are selected.  Show All  Click this button to select all the check boxes to show all the columns.  Hide All  Click this button to clear all the check boxes to show all the columns.  Show All Data Sets  Click this button to select the check boxes for all the data set columns.  Hide All Data Sets  Click this button to clear the check boxes for all the data set columns.  Show All Tag Sets  Click this button to select the check boxes for all the tag set columns.  Hide All Tag Sets  Click this button to clear the check boxes for all the tag set columns.  See also  Set up recipe ingredients (Ingredients tab)  The Show/Hide Column dialog box  Data set  Tag set  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2504,
    "title": "Data set",
    "url": "67835.htm",
    "text": "A data set consists of:  A data set name (required). This text does not support language switching at run time.   A number of data values where each data value is associated with a specific ingredient (optional)  A recipe can have up to 500 data sets.  See also  Show or hide columns  Tag set  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2505,
    "title": "Tag set",
    "url": "67837.htm",
    "text": "A tag set consists of:  A tag set name (required). This text does not support language switching at run time.  A number of tag names where each tag name is associated with a specific ingredient (optional)  A recipe can have up to 50 tag sets.  See also  Show or hide columns  Data set  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2506,
    "title": "Set up recipe units (Units tab)",
    "url": "67862.htm",
    "text": "Use the Units tab to pair tag sets with data sets to create recipe units.  When a new recipe is created, a new recipe unit with the default name of Unit 1 is created, pairing the default data set Data Set 1 and the default tag set Tag Set 1.  Click on a unit name to select it. You can then edit the selected unit, delete the selected unit, or insert a new unit at the bottom of the list.  Options  Unit name  Click on a unit name to select the unit. The Data Set and Tag Set are automatically selected as part of the unit.  Insert  Click this button to open the Insert Unit dialog box.  Edit  Click this button to open the Edit Unit dialog box.  Delete  Click this button to delete the selected unit.  Tip:  Double-click on a unit name to open the Edit Unit dialog box.  Press the Delete key to delete the selected unit.  Rename a unit by clicking and holding on the unit name.  See also  Create recipe files  Set up general recipe properties (General tab)  Set up recipe ingredients (Ingredients tab)  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2507,
    "title": "Insert Unit",
    "url": "67863.htm",
    "text": "The Insert Unit dialog box opens when the operator clicks the Insert button on the Units tab of the RecipePlus editor. Use this dialog box to create a new unit by pairing existing data sets and tag sets.  If the maximum number of units has already been reached when the Insert button is clicked, a warning will be shown and the Insert Unit dialog box will not open.  To insert a unit into the recipe file  Give the new unit a name.  Choose a data set for the new unit.  Choose a tag set for the new unit.  Options  Enter the name for the new unit  By default, the new name will be Unit <n>, where <n> is the next available number in the series of unit numbers in the recipe file. You can accept this name or type a unique name for the new unit. (This string does not allow run-time language switching.)  Select a data set  Click on the down arrow to open the list of data sets in the recipe file. Click on a data set to select it and write its name into the data set field.  Select a tag set  Click on the down arrow to open the list of tag sets in the recipe file. Click on a tag set to select it and write its name into the tag set field.  See also  Set up recipe units (Units tab)  Create recipe files  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2508,
    "title": "Insert, delete and rename data and tag sets",
    "url": "67864.htm",
    "text": "To insert new data and tag sets, delete existing data and tag sets, or rename data and tag sets, use the Recipe menu. When the RecipePlus editor is open, the Recipe menu becomes available on the menu bar.  The Recipe menu contains the following items:  Insert Data Set  Select this menu item to open a dialog where you can specify the name of a new data set. Data set names can have a maximum of 31 characters.  Delete Data Set  Select this item to open a list of the data sets in the recipe. You can then select one or more data sets to delete.  Rename Data Set  Select this item to open a dialog with a list of data sets and a text box for a new data set name. Data set names can have a maximum of 31 characters.  Insert Tag Set  Select this menu item to open a dialog where you can specify the name of a new tag set. Tag set names can have a maximum of 31 characters.  Delete Tag Set  Select this item to open a list of the tag sets in the recipe. You can then select one or more tag sets to delete.  Rename Tag Set  Select this item to open a dialog with a list of tag sets and a text box for a new tag set name. Tag set names can have a maximum of 31 characters.  Compare Recipes  Select this item to open the Compare Recipes dialog.  See also  Compare recipes  Setup RecipePlus  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2509,
    "title": "The Edit Unit dialog box",
    "url": "67878.htm",
    "text": "How do I open the Edit Unit dialog box?  On the Units tab of the RecipePlus editor, click the Edit button.  If the recipe does not have a unit, the Edit Unit dialog box will not open.  The Edit Unit dialog shows the name, data set, and tag set of the recipe unit currently selected on the Units tab.  Use the Edit Unit dialog to modify the properties for the specified unit.  See also  Set up recipe units (Units tab)  Create recipe files  Insert Unit  Options in the Edit Unit dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2510,
    "title": "Options in the Edit Unit dialog box",
    "url": "299035.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options in the Edit Unit dialog box.  Options  Descriptions  Unit name  Shows the name of the unit selected on the Units tab. You can change this name to any name that is not in use in the recipe.  This string does not allow run-time language switching.  Select a data set  Shows the data set for the selected unit.  Click the down arrow to open the list of data sets in the recipe file. Click a data set to select it and write its name into the data set field.  Select a tag set  Shows the tag set for the selected unit.  Click the down arrow to open the list of tag sets in the recipe file. Click a tag set to select it and write its name into the tag set field.  See also  The Edit Unit dialog box  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2511,
    "title": "Compare recipes",
    "url": "67866.htm",
    "text": "Use the RecipePlus Editor to compare data sets and tags sets within a single recipe, or between two recipes, and generate a report of the differences.  If you are comparing data sets or tag sets within a recipe, only ingredients with different values are shown in the report.  If you are comparing data sets or tag sets between two recipes, both common ingredients and unique ingredients are listed in the report.  The report is a Unicode text file, named CompareReport.txt and is saved in the same folder as the recipe file. If a comparison report already exists, it will be overwritten.  Tip:  If you are comparing a recipe that is open in the editor to another recipe, save the changes before comparing. The Compare operation works with the saved file on disk, not with the file currently in memory.  To compare within a single recipe  Select Compare within a single recipe.  Click the browse button in the Recipe #1 field and navigate to the desired recipe file.  To compare data sets, select the Compare Data Sets check box and specify the data sets to be compared.  To compare tag sets, select the Compare Tag Sets check box and specify the tag sets to be compared.  Click the Compare button.  To compare between two recipes  Select Compare across two recipes.  Click the browse button in the Recipe #1 field and navigate to the desired recipe file.  Click the browse button in the Recipe #2 field and navigate to the desired recipe file.  To compare data sets, select the Compare Data Sets check box and specify the data sets to be compared. Data Set #1 will be chosen from Recipe #1. Data Set #2 will be chosen from Recipe #2.  To compare tag sets, select the Compare Tag Sets check box and specify the tag sets to be compared. Tag Set #1 will be chosen from Recipe #1. Tag Set #2 will be chosen from Recipe #2.  Click the Compare button.  Options  Compare within a single recipe  Choose this option to compare tag sets or data sets within a single recipe  Compare across two recipes  Choose this option to compare the tag and/or data sets in one recipe with the tag and/or data sets in another recipe.  Recipe #1  Click the Browse button and navigate to the recipe whose data and/or tag sets you want to compare. This opens a standard Windows File Open dialog box, called Browse for Recipe File #1, where you can browse for Files of type .rpp.  You cannot enter a path to the recipe file manually.  Recipe #2  If you selected Compare across two recipes, click the Browse button and navigate to the recipe whose data and/or tag sets you want to compare to the first recipe.  Compare Data Sets  To compare data sets, select this check box.  Data Set #1  Click the Browse button to open the Data Set Browser. Select a single data set from the list and click OK (or double-click the data set name) to write the data set name to the text box.  You can enter the data set name manually.  Data Set #2  Click the Browse button to open the Data Set Browser. If you are comparing within a single recipe, the Data Set Browser will select from Recipe #1. If you are comparing across recipes, the Data Set Browser will select from Recipe #2.  You can enter the data set name manually.  Compare Tag Sets  To compare tag sets, check this check box.  Tag Set #1  Click the Browse button to open the Tag Set Browser. Select a single data set from the list and click OK (or double-click the data set name) to write the data set name to the text box.  You can enter the tag set name manually.  Tag Set #2  Click the Browse button to open the Tag Set Browser. If you are comparing within a single recipe, the Tag Set Browser will select from Recipe #1. If you are comparing across recipes, the Tag Set Browser will select from Recipe #2.  You can enter the tag set name manually.  See also  Insert, delete and rename data and tag sets  What is a recipe file?  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2512,
    "title": "Audit messages from a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal",
    "url": "67870.htm",
    "text": "A MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal cannot directly collect audit messages for FactoryTalk AssetCentre. To receive audit messages, you need configure the FactoryTalk computer and theMobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal respectively to collect the audit messages, and forward them to the FactoryTalk AssetCentre server.  See also  Configure the FactoryTalk computer for remote audits  Configure the MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal for remote audits  ",
    "keywords": {
      "audit message": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2513,
    "title": "Configure the FactoryTalk computer for remote audits",
    "url": "265983.htm",
    "text": "You need configure the FactoryTalk computer to collect the audit messages from a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal.  To configure the FactoryTalk computer for remote audits  On the computer that will be collecting the remote audits, start FactoryTalk Administration Console and log in to the Network directory.  From the Tools menu, select FactoryTalk Diagnostics > Setup.  From the root of Diagnostics Setup, select the check box for Enable this computer to receive messages broadcast from Windows CE devices or MobileView.  The default Port number is 4445.&nbsp;You need configure the port number on the terminal.  From the Diagnostics Setup tree, select Message Routing. Select the check box for Accept message from Windows CE devices or MobileView.  If FactoryTalk AssetCentre is installed on the computer, the Secured check boxes are selected in each column by default. To ensure all audit and event messages are received, select all the check boxes for Error, Warning, Info, and Audit in each row, including Operator, Engineer, Developer, and Secure.  Click OK.  Make a note of the computer&#8217;s IP address, which will be used in configuring the terminal.  See also  Audit messages from a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal  Configure the MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal for remote audits  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2514,
    "title": "Configure the MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal for remote audits",
    "url": "265984.htm",
    "text": "To collect audit messages from a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal on the FactoryTalk computer, you need configure the terminal for remote audits.  To configure the MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal for remote audits  On the terminal, start FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station.  Select Terminal Settings > Diagnostics Setup > Remote Log and click Edit.  In the Address text box, enter the IP address of the FactoryTalk computer.  In the Port text box, enter the port number from the FactoryTalk computer and click OK.  In the Diagnostics Setup dialog box, select Message Routing and click Edit.  Select Remote Log and press Enter.  To ensure the capturing of all available information, select all the check boxes in the Remote Log Message Routing dialog box and click OK.  For the changes to take effect, restart the terminal.  See also  Audit messages from a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal  Configure the FactoryTalk computer for remote audits  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2515,
    "title": "CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility",
    "url": "256571.htm",
    "text": "How do I open the CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility?  Use one of the following methods:  From Windows Start menu:  (Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008) Select All Programs > Rockwell Software > FactoryTalk View > Tools > Rockwell Automation CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility  (Windows Server 2012) Click the down arrow and select Apps > Rockwell Software > Rockwell Automation CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility  (Windows 10 and Windows Server 2016) Select All apps > Rockwell Software > Rockwell Automation CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility  In FactoryTalk View Studio, from the Tools menu, select Rockwell Automation CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility.  Use the CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility to:  Detect the integrity of a CSV data log file that contains tamper detection strings  Generate a detection report when the detection is completed  Save the detection report to a text file  Tip:  Saving changes to a CSV data log file in Microsoft Excel corrupts the file and CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility cannot detect tampers in the file.  See also  Detect the integrity of a CSV data log file using the CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility  Detect the integrity of a CSV data log file using a command  CSV data log file  CSVDataLog ActiveX control  About CSV export  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2516,
    "title": "Detect a data log file using the CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility",
    "url": "256574.htm",
    "text": "You can detect the integrity of a CSV data log file using the CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility.  To detect the integrity of a CSV data log file using the CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility  In the CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility, select a CSV data log file and click Detect.  The Detection Report dialog box opens and shows the detection result.  (Optional) In the Detection Report dialog box, click Save Result to save the report as a text file.  See also  CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility  Detect the integrity of a CSV data log file using a command  CSV data log file  Cannot perform tamper detection  ",
    "keywords": {
      "detect": "100",
      "integrity": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2517,
    "title": "Detect the integrity of a CSV data log file using a command",
    "url": "256575.htm",
    "text": "You can detect the integrity of a CSV data log file using a command.  To detect the integrity of a CSV data log file using a command  In the Command Prompt window, type a command and press Enter.  The detection result will be shown in the Command Prompt window or saved to a text file.  See also  CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility  Detect the integrity of a CSV data log file using the CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility  Commands for detecting a CSV data log file  Command examples for detecting a CSV data log file  CSV data log file  ",
    "keywords": {
      "detect": "100",
      "integrity": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2518,
    "title": "Commands for detecting a CSV data log file",
    "url": "256576.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the commands for detecting the integrity of a CSV data log file. The commands are case insensitive.  Commands  Descriptions  ra_checkcsvintegrity -i file_path\\file1.csv  file1 is the CSV file to be detected.  The detection report will be shown in the Command Prompt window.  ra_checkcsvintegrity -i file_path\\file1.csv -o file_path\\file2.txt  file1 is the CSV file to be detected.  The detection report will be saved to file2.  ra_checkcsvintegrity -i file_path\\*.csv  All the CSV files located at file_path\\ will be detected.  The detection report will be shown in the Command Prompt window.  ra_checkcsvintegrity -i file_path\\*.csv -o file_path\\file2.txt  All the CSV files located at file_path\\ will be detected.  The detection report will be saved to file2.  ra_checkcsvintegrity ?  Show the instruction for the command lines in the Command Prompt window.  See also  Detect the integrity of a CSV data log file using a command  Command examples for detecting a CSV data log file  CSV data log file  Cannot perform tamper detection  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2519,
    "title": "Command examples for detecting a CSV data log file",
    "url": "256587.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the command examples for detecting the integrity of a CSV data log file.  In the Command Prompt window, type  When press Enter  ra_checkcsvintegrity -i c:\\source\\file.csv  The integrity of file.csv will be checked and the detection report will be shown in the Command Prompt window.  ra_checkcsvintegrity -i c:\\source\\file.csv -o c:\\report\\file.txt  The integrity of file.csv will be checked and the detection report will be saved to file.txt.  ra_checkcsvintegrity -i c:\\source\\*.csv  The integrity of all the CSV files at c:\\source\\ will be checked and the detection report will be shown in the Command Prompt window.  ra_checkcsvintegrity -i c:\\source\\*.csv -o c:\\report\\file.txt  The integrity of all the CSV files at c:\\source\\ will be checked and the detection report will be saved to file.txt.  See also  Detect the integrity of a CSV data log file using a command  Commands for detecting a CSV data log file  CSV data log file  Cannot perform tamper detection  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2520,
    "title": "CSV data log file",
    "url": "319293.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the types of CSV data log files created with FactoryTalk View Machine Edition.  CSV data log files  Are  With tamper detection strings  Generated by the CSVDataLog ActiveX&reg; control when the Enable tamper detection check box is selected on the Advanced tab of the control's Properties dialog box.  Audit, alarm, and diagnostics information CSV files exported upon trigger value changes.  Without tamper detection strings  Generated by the CSVDataLog ActiveX&reg; control when the Enable tamper detection check box is cleared on the Advanced tab of the control's Properties dialog box.  Generated by the DataStorePlus ActiveX control.  See also  CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility  Detect the integrity of a CSV data log file using the CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility  Detect the integrity of a CSV data log file using a command  Cannot perform tamper detection  ",
    "keywords": {
      "CSV data log file": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2521,
    "title": "Cannot perform tamper detection",
    "url": "256590.htm",
    "text": "If detection report shows: \"Cannot perform tamper detection. The selected file's formatting information is old or is not recognizable\", consider the following causes:  The CSV data log file does not contain tamper detection strings.  The CSV data log file was modified in Microsoft Excel.  See also  CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility  Detect the integrity of a CSV data log file using the CSV Data Log Tamper Detection Utility  Detect the integrity of a CSV data log file using a command  CSV data log file  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2522,
    "title": "About ME Transfer Utility",
    "url": "58229.htm",
    "text": "How do I open ME Transfer Utility?  On the development computer, do one of the following:  From Windows Start menu:  (Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008) Select All Programs > Rockwell Software > FactoryTalk View > Tools > ME Transfer Utility  (Windows Server 2012) Click the down arrow and select Apps > Rockwell Software > ME Transfer Utility  (Windows 10 and Windows Server 2016) Select All apps > Rockwell Software > ME Transfer Utility  In FactoryTalk View Studio, from the Tools menu, select Transfer Utility.  In FactoryTalk View Studio, on the Toolbar, click the Transfer Utility icon.  Use ME Transfer Utility to:  Transfer a runtime application file (.mer) to and from the MobileView&#8482;, PanelView&#8482; Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal where the application runs  Specify that the downloaded .mer file will run automatically after the download is completed and whenever the MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal is restarted  Transfer Windows True Type font files (.ttf and .ttc) to a PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal  Compare a runtime application on a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal with a runtime application on a desktop computer  Download:  Multiple applications (one at a time) to the same terminal  Applications while another application is running on the terminal  A new copy of the application, which is running on the terminal, and use the new application next time when you run the application on the terminal  ME Transfer Utility uses the FactoryTalk&reg; Linx&#8482; Communication tree to specify the upload or download source and destination. You must use an FactoryTalk Linx driver for the download.  See also  Transfer a file to a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal  Transfer a file from a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal  Compare a local file to a remote file  Configure download drivers  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2523,
    "title": "Transfer a file to a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal",
    "url": "58232.htm",
    "text": "Use the Download tab of the Transfer Utility dialog box to:  Download a runtime application file (.mer) or True Type font file (.ttf or .ttc) from the development computer (source) to a PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal (destination). A .ttf file contains a single font. A .ttc file contains a collection of fonts.  Download a runtime application file (.mer) from the development computer (source) to a MobileView terminal (destination).  Before you transfer a file to a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal, you must:  Create a runtime application file.  Configure an FactoryTalk Linx driver for the transfer on the source computer and the destination terminal.  To transfer a file to a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal  On the Download tab of the Transfer Utility dialog box, in the Source file box, specify the location of the file to be transferred. Click the Browse button to browse for the file.  Tip:  The file source must be on the local computer. ME Transfer Utility does not support downloading from a network location.  To use a different name for the downloaded file, select the Download as check box and type the new name.  From the Destination storage type list, select the kind of storage the file will be stored in at the destination.  (Optional) If you want the downloaded application to run every time the terminal is restarted, select the Run application at start-up check box.  (Optional) If you want to replace communications or delete log files when application runs, select the following checkbox(s).  Replace communications  Delete Log Files  From the Select destination terminal list, select the destination terminal in the FactoryTalk Linx communications tree.  Click Download.  Runtime application files will be downloaded to the runtime application file folders, and Font files will be downloaded to the Font file folders.  When the download starts, ME Transfer Utility checks whether there is enough storage space on the destination to save the downloaded file.  If the file to be downloaded is the same size or nearly the same size as the existing file, you can complete the download.  If the file to be downloaded is significantly larger than the existing file, check the amount of actual available space before proceeding with the download.  If the file to be downloaded is overwriting an existing file, ME Transfer Utility does not include the size of the existing file in its calculation of available space and the existing file will be deleted.  If the download fails or is canceled, the file that was being downloaded will be deleted from the destination.  See also  Create a runtime application  Configure download drivers  Options on the Download tab  Font file folders on PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, and PanelView Plus CE terminals  Runtime application file folders on MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, and PanelView Plus CE terminals  ",
    "keywords": {
      "transfer": "100",
      "download": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2524,
    "title": "Options on the Download tab",
    "url": "188167.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Download tab.  Options  Descriptions  Source file  Type the path to the source file or click the Browse button (\u2026) to open the Select File dialog box, browse for the source file, and click Open.  If you want to select a font file, in the Select File to Download dialog box, select True Type Font Files (*.ttf, *.ttc).  Download as  If you want to rename the file that is transferred to the destination, select this check box, and in the box, type the new name.  The name must not contain any of the following characters: \\ / : * ? \" < > .  Do not specify a path.  The name will automatically be given the same file extension as the file in the Source file box. If you type an extension, it must be the same as that of the source file.  If you clear this check box, the file will be saved at the destination under the name that appears in the Source file box. This name will appear in the box, but will not be available for edit.  If the file exists at the destination, you will be prompted to overwrite it.  Destination storage type  Options include:  Internal Storage  External Storage 1  External Storage 2  Run application at start-up  If you want the transferred runtime application to start as soon as the download is finished, select this check box.  Replace communications  If you want the FactoryTalk Linx communications file in the downloaded application to replace the FactoryTalk Linx communication file presently on the terminal when the application starts, select this check box.  This check box is only available when the Run application at start-up check box is selected.  Delete Log Files  If you want to delete the log files when the application starts, select this check box.  This check box is only available when the Run application at start-up check box is selected.  Select destination terminal  The FactoryTalk Linx communication tree shows all the hardware available on the network.  See also  Transfer a file to a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal  Font files  Font file folders on PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, and PanelView Plus CE terminals  Runtime application file folders on MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, and PanelView Plus CE terminals  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2525,
    "title": "Font files",
    "url": "202823.htm",
    "text": "Licensed fonts for PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, and PanelView Plus CE terminals are supplied on the Accessories or Fonts CD. You can use only the fonts provided on these CDs with your terminals.  Before downloading the fonts to a PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal using ME Transfer Utility, copy the desired font files to the following folder on the development computer (source):  \\Users\\Public\\Public Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\Runtime  This folder is created when FactoryTalk View Studio or FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station is installed.  See also  Transfer a file to a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal  Options on the Download tab  Font file folders on PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, and PanelView Plus CE terminals  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2526,
    "title": "Font file folders on PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, and PanelView Plus CE terminals",
    "url": "264471.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the Font file folders on PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, and PanelView Plus CE terminals.  Terminal types  Internal storage Font file folders  External storage 1 Font file folders  External storage 2 Font file folders  PanelView Plus 7  PanelView Plus 6  \\Windows  \\Storage Card2\\Fonts  \\USB Storage\\Fonts  PanelView Plus  PanelView Plus Compact  PanelView Plus CE  \\Storage Card\\Fonts  \\Storage Card2\\Fonts  See also  Transfer a file to a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal  Options on the Download tab  Font files  ",
    "keywords": {
      "terminal": "100",
      "file folder": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2527,
    "title": "Transfer a file from a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal",
    "url": "58236.htm",
    "text": "Use the Upload tab of the Transfer Utility dialog box to transfer runtime application files (.mer) from a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal to a development computer.  Before you transfer an application file, you must configure an FactoryTalk Linx driver for the transfer on the terminal and the computer.  To transfer a file from a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal  On the Upload tab of the Transfer Utility dialog box, from the Select source terminal list, select the source terminal in the FactoryTalk Linx communications tree.  From the Source storage type list, select the kind of storage the file is stored in on the terminal.  In the Source file box, specify the file to be transferred. Click the Browse button to browse for the file.  (Optional) If you want to use a different name for the uploaded file, select Upload as and type the new name.  In the Destination folder box, specify the location on the destination computer to upload the file to. Click the Browse button to browse for the destination.  Tip:  The destination must be on the local computer. ME Transfer Utility does not support uploading to a network location.  Click Upload.  The selected file starts to be uploaded to the destination folder.  See also  About ME Transfer Utility  Configure download drivers  Options on the Upload tab  ",
    "keywords": {
      "transfer": "100",
      "upload": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2528,
    "title": "Options on the Upload tab",
    "url": "202793.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Upload tab.  Options  Descriptions  Source storage type  Options include:  Internal Storage  External Storage 1  External Storage 2  Source file  Type the path to the source file or click the Browse button (\u2026) to open the Select File dialog box, browse for the source file, and click OK.  Upload as  If you want to rename the file that is transferred to the destination, select this check box, and in the box, type the new name.  The name must not contain any of the following characters: \\ / : * ? \" < > .  Do not specify a path.  The name will automatically be given the same file extension as the file in the Source file box. If you type an extension, it must be the same as that of the source file.  If you clear this check box, the file will be saved at the destination under the name that appears in the Source file box. This name will appear in the box, but will not be available for edit.  If the file exists at the destination, you will be prompted to overwrite it.  Destination folder  Specify where on the destination computer you want to store the file.  Select source terminal  The FactoryTalk Linx communication tree shows all the hardware available on the network.  See also  Transfer a file from a MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal  Runtime application file folders on MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, and PanelView Plus CE terminals  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2529,
    "title": "Compare a local file to a remote file",
    "url": "58237.htm",
    "text": "Use the Compare tab of the Transfer Utility dialog box to compare a local file to a remote file. The local file is a valid FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station runtime file (.mer) located on the computer that is running ME Transfer Utility, or on a computer connected to that computer by a network. The remote file is a valid FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station runtime file (.mer) located on a remote MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, or PanelView Plus CE terminal connected to the local computer by a network.  To compare a remote file to a local file  On the Compare tab of the Transfer Utility dialog box, from the FactoryTalk Linx communications tree in the Select remote terminal area, select the remote terminal whose runtime application file you want to compare to the local file.  From the Remote storage type list, select the kind of storage the file is stored in on the terminal.  In the Remote file box, specify the remote file to be compared. Click the Browse button to browse for the file.  In the Local reference file box, specify the local file to be compared. Click the Browse button to browse for the file.  Click Compare.  The remote file is uploaded and saved to a temporary location on the computer running ME Transfer Utility. Once the upload is completed, the uploaded file is compared to the specified local file using a simple binary comparison. The utility then reports that the files are identical or different. When the comparison is finished, the uploaded file is deleted automatically.  See also  About ME Transfer Utility  Options on the Compare tab  ",
    "keywords": {
      "compare": "100",
      "local": "100",
      "remote": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2530,
    "title": "Options on the Compare tab",
    "url": "202810.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the options on the Compare tab.  Options  Descriptions  Remote Storage type  Options include:  Internal Storage  External Storage 1  External Storage 2  Remote file  Type the remote file name in the Remote file box or browse for the file.  Before you can browse for the file, you must select the remote terminal to browse and then click the Browse button at the end of the Remote file box. Only .mer files located in the selected Remote Storage Type appear in the list. If you do not see the .mer file in the browse window, change the remote storage type and browse again.  Local Reference file  Click the Browse button at the end of the text box to locate the local file.  By default, the window opens to the location where FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Station stores runtime applications. However, the file can be located anywhere that is accessible to the browse window. Only .mer files appear in the list. When you have located the file, click OK to close the browse window and write the name of the selected file in the Local Reference file box. This name will be retained each time you open ME Transfer Utility until you change it.  Select remote terminal  The FactoryTalk Linx communication tree shows all the hardware available on the network.  See also  Compare a local file to a remote file  Runtime application file folders on MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, and PanelView Plus CE terminals  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2531,
    "title": "Runtime application file folders on MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, and PanelView Plus CE terminals",
    "url": "264433.htm",
    "text": "The following table shows the runtime application file folders on MobileView, PanelView Plus 7, PanelView Plus 6, PanelView Plus, PanelView Plus Compact, and PanelView Plus CE terminals.  Terminal types  Internal storage folders  External storage 1 folders  External storage 2 folders  MobileView  C:\\Users\\Public\\Documents\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\Runtime  D:\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\Runtime  E:\\RSView Enterprise\\ME\\Runtime  PanelView Plus 7  PanelView Plus 6  \\Application Data\\Rockwell Software\\RSView ME\\Runtime  \\Storage Card2\\Rockwell Software\\RSView ME\\Runtime  \\USB Storage\\Rockwell Software\\RSView ME\\Runtime  PanelView Plus  PanelView Plus Compact  PanelView Plus CE  \\Storage Card\\Rockwell Software\\RSView ME\\Runtime  \\Storage Card2\\Rockwell Software\\RSView ME\\Runtime  See also  Options on the Download tab  Options on the Upload tab  Options on the Compare tab  ",
    "keywords": {
      "terminal": "100",
      "file folder": "100"
    }
  },
  {
    "id": 2532,
    "title": "Product support",
    "url": "67713.htm",
    "text": "If you cannot find the answer to your question in the documentation or on the Internet, contact Rockwell Automation Technical Support, using any of these methods:  Telephone: 1-440-646-3434  Online: http://support.rockwellautomation.com  Knowledgebase: https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com  Support staffs are available Monday to Friday from 8:00 A.M. through 5:00 P.M. local time (North America only), except on statutory holidays.  When you call, it is recommended that you be at your computer and ready to provide the following information:  The product&#8217;s serial number and product key, which are printed on the Activation Certificate enclosed with the product software DVD  FactoryTalk View version number  FactoryTalk Services Platform version number  FactoryTalk Linx or RSLinx Classic version number  The type of hardware you are using  The names of other Rockwell Automation products installed on the computer  The exact wording of any messages shown on the computer  A description of what happened and what you were doing when the problem occurred  A description of how you tried to solve the problem  To view the list of installed add-ons and updates  In FactoryTalk View Studio, select Help > About FactoryTalk View Studio.  To view the list of installed add-ons, click Add-Ons.  "
  },
  {
    "id": 2533,
    "title": "Legal Notices",
    "url": "196866.htm",
    "text": "Copyright notice  Copyright &copy; 2019 Rockwell Automation Technologies, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Printed in USA.  This document and any accompanying Rockwell Software products are copyrighted by Rockwell Automation, Inc. Any reproduction and/or distribution without prior written consent from Rockwell Automation, Inc. is strictly prohibited. Please refer to the license agreement for details.  End User License Agreement (EULA)  You can view the Rockwell Automation End-User License Agreement (\"EULA\") by opening the License.rtf file located in your product's install folder on your hard drive.  Open Source Licenses  The software included in this product contains copyrighted software that is licensed under one or more open source licenses. Copies of those licenses are included with the software. Corresponding Source code for open source packages included in this product are located at their respective web site(s).  Alternately, obtain complete Corresponding Source code by contacting Rockwell Automation via the Contact form on the Rockwell Automation website: http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/about-us/contact/contact.page  <br />Please include \"Open Source\" as part of the request text.  A full list of all open source software used in this product and their corresponding licenses can be found in the OPENSOURCE folder included with these Release Notes. The default installed location of these licenses is C:\\Program Files (x86)\\Common Files\\Rockwell\\Help\\<Product>\\ReleaseNotes\\OPENSOURCE\\index.htm.  Other Licenses  Symbol Factory 2.5 License  All title and copyrights in and to the SOFTWARE PRODUCT (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and \"applets,\" incorporated into the SOFTWARE PRODUCT), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT, are owned by TOOLBOX or its suppliers. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE PRODUCT. All rights not specifically granted under this AGREEMENT are reserved by TOOLBOX.  Stingray 10.1 License  Copyright 1995-2012, Rogue Wave Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.  Protected by copyright and licenses restricting use, copying, distribution and decompilation. The Rogue Wave name and logo and the Stingray name and logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Rogue Wave Software, Inc. in the United States and other countries.  Farpoint Datagrid 3.0.0 License  Portions Copyright &copy; GrapeCity, Inc. 1987-2018. All Rights Reserved.  Trademark Notices  Allen-Bradley, ControlLogix, DH+, FactoryTalk, Logix 5000, MobileView, PanelBuilder, PanelView, PLC-5, Rockwell, Rockwell Automation, Rockwell Software, RSLinx, RSLogix, RSLogix 500, RSLogix 5000, RSNetWorx, RSView, SLC, Studio 5000, and Studio 5000 Logix Designer are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.  Any Rockwell Automation software or hardware not mentioned here is also a trademark, registered or otherwise, of Rockwell Automation, Inc.  Other Trademarks  Access, ActiveX, Internet Explorer, Microsoft, SQL Server, Surface, Visual Basic, Visual C++, Windows, and Windows Server are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.  Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries.  Intel, Intel Atom, Intel Core, and Intel Xeon are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the Intel Corporation in United States and other countries.  Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.  ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International.  DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc. (ODVA).  Ethernet is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation, Intel, and Xerox Corporation.  OLE for Process Control (OPC) is a registered trademark of the OPC Foundation.  All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged.  Warranty  This product is warranted in accordance with the product license. The product&#8217;s performance may be affected by system configuration, the application being performed, operator control, maintenance, and other related factors. Rockwell Automation is not responsible for these intervening factors. The instructions in this document do not cover all the details or variations in the equipment, procedure, or process described, nor do they provide directions for meeting every possible contingency during installation, operation, or maintenance. This product&#8217;s implementation may vary among users.  This document is current as of the time of release of the product; however, the accompanying software may have changed since the release. Rockwell Automation, Inc. reserves the right to change any information contained in this document or the software at any time without prior notice. It is your responsibility to obtain the most current information available from Rockwell when installing or using this product.  Environmental compliance  Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/about-us/sustainability-ethics/product-environmental-compliance.page  Contact Rockwell Automation  Customer Support Telephone &#8212; 1.440.646.3434  Online Support &#8212; http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/  "
  }
]
; return json; };
